diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'perl-install/install/help')
75 files changed, 8415 insertions, 8281 deletions
diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/help.pm b/perl-install/install/help/help.pm index 9e4e63f7a..e2e5e8f06 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/help.pm +++ b/perl-install/install/help/help.pm @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means \"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc."); } sub chooseCd() { - N("The %s installation is distributed on several CD-ROMs. If a + N("The Mageia installation is distributed on several CD-ROMs. If a selected package is located on another CD-ROM, DrakX will eject the current CD and ask you to insert the required one. If you do not have the requested CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ want to check \"%s\" if your machine is to act as a server, or if you were not successful in getting the display configured.", N("No")); } sub doPartitionDisks() { - N("You now need to decide where you want to install the %s + N("You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to @@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ Click on \"%s\" if you wish to select partitions which will be checked for bad blocks on the disk.", N("Next"), N("Previous"), N("Advanced")); } sub installUpdates() { - N("By the time you install %s, it's likely that some packages will + N("By the time you install Mageia, it's likely that some packages will have been updated since the initial release. Bugs may have been fixed, security issues resolved. To allow you to benefit from these updates, you're now able to download them from the Internet. Check \"%s\" if you @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options: * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive - * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap + * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive \"%s\": gives access to additional features: @@ -519,12 +519,7 @@ When a partition is selected, you can use: To get information about the different filesystem types available, please read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''. - -If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS -``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot -bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you -may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for -emergency boot situations.", N("Clear all"), N("Auto allocate"), N("More"), N("Save partition table"), N("Restore partition table"), N("Rescue partition table"), N("Reload partition table"), N("Removable media auto-mounting"), N("Wizard"), N("Undo"), N("Toggle between normal/expert mode"), N("Done")); +", N("Clear all"), N("Auto allocate"), N("More"), N("Save partition table"), N("Restore partition table"), N("Rescue partition table"), N("Reload partition table"), N("Removable media auto-mounting"), N("Wizard"), N("Undo"), N("Toggle between normal/expert mode"), N("Done")); } sub resizeFATChoose() { N("More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive. diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/.gitignore b/perl-install/install/help/po/.gitignore new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cd1f2c943 --- /dev/null +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/.gitignore @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +*.mo diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/.tx/config b/perl-install/install/help/po/.tx/config new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1e41c0d04 --- /dev/null +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/.tx/config @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +[main] +host = https://www.transifex.com + +[o:MageiaLinux:p:mageia:r:drakx_help] +file_filter = <lang>.po +source_file = DrakX-help.pot +source_lang = en +type = PO diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/DrakX-help.pot b/perl-install/install/help/po/DrakX-help.pot index 444879eea..48524b132 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/DrakX-help.pot +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/DrakX-help.pot @@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -675,12 +675,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:526 diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/af.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/af.po index 14e104aed..66b9f7757 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/af.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/af.po @@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2005-04-21 17:33+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Dirk van der Walt <dirkvanderwalt@webmail.co.za>\n" "Language-Team: Afrikaans\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -139,7 +140,8 @@ msgstr "Wil u hierdie funksie gebruik?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -149,13 +151,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -166,7 +171,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Hier is 'n lys van die bestaande Linux partisies wat opgespoor is.\n" @@ -670,13 +676,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -689,12 +697,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -717,7 +727,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -985,8 +996,7 @@ msgstr "" "dit algemene gebruik op die rekenaar moeiliker maak.\n" "\n" "Indien u onseker is oor wat om te kies, bly by die verstek opsie. U\n" -"kan altyd later die vlak verander deur draksec in die Mageia " -"Control\n" +"kan altyd later die vlak verander deur draksec in die Mageia Control\n" "Center te grbruik.\n" "\n" "Die \"%s\" veld kan boodskappe stuur na 'n gekose persoon wat\n" @@ -1004,18 +1014,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1038,7 +1051,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1046,7 +1060,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1065,12 +1080,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Nou moet u asseblief besluit watter partisie(s) u gaan gebruik vir die\n" "installasie van u Mageia rekenaar.Indien die partisies reeds\n" @@ -1086,7 +1095,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\": hierdie opsie wis alle partisies op die gekose skyf uit.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": hierdie opsie sal outomaties 'ext3' en 'swap' partisies in die\n" +" * \"%s\": hierdie opsie sal outomaties 'ext4' en 'swap' partisies in die\n" "vrye spasie op die hardeskyf skep.\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gee u toegang tot verdere keuses:\n" @@ -1136,11 +1145,6 @@ msgstr "" "Om inligting rakende die verskillende beskikbare lêerstelsels te bekom, " "lees\n" "asseblief die ext2FS hoofstuk in die \"Reference Manual\".\n" -"\n" -"Indien u op 'n PPC masjien installeer, sal u 'n klien HFS 'bootstrap'\n" -"partisie van ten minste 1MB wil skep. Dit sal deur 'yaboot' herlaai-\n" -" stelsel gebruik word. Maak dit bietjie groter vir spaar 'kernel' en\n" -"'ramdisk' beelde vir hulp in nood situasies." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1180,20 +1184,24 @@ msgstr "Skakel tussen normale/kenner modus" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1204,10 +1212,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Ons het meer as een Microsoft-partisie op u hardeskyf gevind.\n" @@ -1266,7 +1276,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1790,8 +1801,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/am.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/am.po index ac95b2e18..4d4d94e65 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/am.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/am.po @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2004-06-01 03:36+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Alemayehu <alemayehu@gmx.at>\n" "Language-Team: Amharic <am-translate@geez.org>\n" +"Language: am\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -82,7 +83,8 @@ msgstr "ይህንን ሁኔታ መጠቀም ይፈልጋሉ?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -92,13 +94,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -109,7 +114,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" @@ -406,13 +412,15 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -425,12 +433,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -453,7 +463,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -610,18 +621,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -644,7 +658,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -652,7 +667,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -671,12 +687,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:526 @@ -717,20 +727,24 @@ msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:536 #, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -741,10 +755,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" @@ -769,7 +785,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1097,8 +1114,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/ar.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/ar.po index e4be1ed3d..308fda099 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/ar.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/ar.po @@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2005-03-03 01:06+0300\n" "Last-Translator: Ossama M. Khayat <okhayat@yahoo.com>\n" "Language-Team: Arabic <support@arabeyes.org>\n" +"Language: ar\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -131,7 +132,8 @@ msgstr "هل تريد استخدام هذه الميزة؟" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -141,13 +143,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -158,7 +163,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "في الأعلى ستجد تجزيئات لينكس الموجودة والتي عثر عليها على القرص الصلب الخاص " @@ -686,13 +692,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -705,12 +713,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -733,7 +743,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1026,18 +1037,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1060,7 +1074,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1068,7 +1083,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1087,12 +1103,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "عند هذه النقطة، تحتاج لاختيار أي التجزيئات ستستخدم\n" "لتثبيت نظام ماندريبا لينكس. إن كانت التجزيئات بالفعل\n" @@ -1108,7 +1118,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\": هذا الخيار يحذف كل التجزيئات على القرص الصّلب المحدّد\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": هذا الخيار يمكّنك من إنشاء تجزيئات ext3 والذّاكرة البديلة آليّاً\n" +" * \"%s\": هذا الخيار يمكّنك من إنشاء تجزيئات ext4 والذّاكرة البديلة آليّاً\n" "في المساحة الشّاغرة لقرصك الصّلب\n" "\n" " * %s: يعطي حقّ الوصول إلى مزايا إضافيّة:\n" @@ -1159,13 +1169,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "لتحصل على معلومات حول أنواع أنظمة الملفّات المختلفة المتوفّرة، رجاءً\n" "اقرا فَصْل ext2FS من ``الدّليل المرجعي``.\n" -"\n" -"إن كنت تقوم بالتّثبيت على ماكينة PPC، ستحتاج أن تنشئ تجزيء HFS\n" -"``bootstrap`` صغير بحجم 1 ميجابايت على الأقلّ والذي سيستخدم بواسطة مُحمّل " -"الإقلاع yaboot.\n" -"إن اخترت أن تجعل التجزيء أكبر قليلاً، لنقل 50 ميجابايت، قد تجده\n" -"مفيد لتخزين نواة احتياطية وصور ramdisk من أجل\n" -"أوضاع الإقلاع الطّارئة." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1205,20 +1208,24 @@ msgstr "التغيير إلى الوضع العادي/وضع الخبير" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1229,10 +1236,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "تمّ اكتشاف أكثر من تجزيء ميكروسوفت على قرصك الصّلب.\n" @@ -1289,7 +1298,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1860,8 +1870,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/ast.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/ast.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4478b0e7a --- /dev/null +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/ast.po @@ -0,0 +1,1138 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) YEAR THE PACKAGE'S COPYRIGHT HOLDER +# This file is distributed under the same license as the PACKAGE package. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2008-09-12 12:22+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2024-09-04 17:33+0000\n" +"Language-Team: Asturian (https://app.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/teams/9361/" +"ast/)\n" +"Language: ast\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" + +#: ../help.pm:14 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"Before continuing, you should carefully read the terms of the license. It\n" +"covers the entire Mageia distribution. If you agree with all the\n" +"terms it contains, check the \"%s\" box. If not, clicking on the \"%s\"\n" +"button will reboot your computer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:20 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"GNU/Linux is a multi-user system which means each user can have his or her\n" +"own preferences, own files and so on. But unlike \"root\", who is the\n" +"system administrator, the users you add at this point will not be " +"authorized\n" +"to change anything except their own files and their own configurations,\n" +"protecting the system from unintentional or malicious changes which could\n" +"impact on the system as a whole. You'll have to create at least one regular\n" +"user for yourself -- this is the account which you should use for routine,\n" +"day-to-day usage. Although it's very easy to log in as \"root\" to do\n" +"anything and everything, it may also be very dangerous! A very simple\n" +"mistake could mean that your system will not work any more. If you make a\n" +"serious mistake as a regular user, the worst that can happen is that you'll\n" +"lose some information, but you will not affect the entire system.\n" +"\n" +"The first field asks you for a real name. Of course, this is not mandatory\n" +"-- you can actually enter whatever you like. DrakX will use the first word\n" +"you type in this field and copy it to the \"%s\" one, which is the name\n" +"this user will enter to log onto the system. If you like, you may override\n" +"the default and change the user name. The next step is to enter a password.\n" +"From a security point of view, a non-privileged (regular) user password is\n" +"not as crucial as the \"root\" password, but that's no reason to neglect it\n" +"by making it blank or too simple: after all, your files could be the ones\n" +"at risk.\n" +"\n" +"Once you click on \"%s\", you can add other users. Add a user for each one\n" +"of your friends, your father, your sister, etc. Click \"%s\" when you're\n" +"finished adding users.\n" +"\n" +"Clicking the \"%s\" button allows you to change the default \"shell\" for\n" +"that user (bash by default).\n" +"\n" +"When you're finished adding users, you'll be asked to choose a user who\n" +"will be automatically logged into the system when the computer boots up. If\n" +"you're interested in that feature (and do not care much about local\n" +"security), choose the desired user and window manager, then click on\n" +"\"%s\". If you're not interested in this feature, uncheck the \"%s\" box." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:54 +#, c-format +msgid "User name" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:54 +#, c-format +msgid "Accept user" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:54 +#, c-format +msgid "Do you want to use this feature?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:57 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" +"You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" +"common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" +"root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" +"be able to install enough software. If you want to store your data on a\n" +"separate partition, you will also need to create a \"/home\" partition\n" +"(only possible if you have more than one Linux partition available).\n" +"\n" +"Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" +"\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" +"\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" +"\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" +"\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" +"\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" +"hard disk drives:\n" +"\n" +" * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" +"\n" +" * \"b\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" +"\n" +" * \"c\" means \"master hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\";\n" +"\n" +" * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" +"\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" +"\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:88 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"The Mageia installation is distributed on several CD-ROMs. If a\n" +"selected package is located on another CD-ROM, DrakX will eject the current\n" +"CD and ask you to insert the required one. If you do not have the requested\n" +"CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" +"installed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:95 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"It's now time to specify which programs you wish to install on your system.\n" +"There are thousands of packages available for Mageia, and to make it\n" +"simpler to manage, they have been placed into groups of similar\n" +"applications.\n" +"\n" +"Mageia sorts package groups in four categories. You can mix and\n" +"match applications from the various categories, so a ``Workstation''\n" +"installation can still have applications from the ``Server'' category\n" +"installed.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": if you plan to use your machine as a workstation, select one or\n" +"more of the groups in the workstation category.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": if you plan on using your machine for programming, select the\n" +"appropriate groups from that category. The special \"LSB\" group will\n" +"configure your system so that it complies as much as possible with the\n" +"Linux Standard Base specifications.\n" +"\n" +" Selecting the \"LSB\" group will ensure 100%%-LSB compliance\n" +"of the system. However, if you do not select the \"LSB\" group you will\n" +"still have a system which is nearly 100%% LSB-compliant.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": if your machine is intended to be a server, select which of the\n" +"more common services you wish to install on your machine.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": this is where you will choose your preferred graphical\n" +"environment. At least one must be selected if you want to have a graphical\n" +"interface available.\n" +"\n" +"Moving the mouse cursor over a group name will display a short explanatory\n" +"text about that group.\n" +"\n" +"You can check the \"%s\" box, which is useful if you're familiar with the\n" +"packages being offered or if you want to have total control over what will\n" +"be installed.\n" +"\n" +"If you start the installation in \"%s\" mode, you can deselect all groups\n" +"and prevent the installation of any new packages. This is useful for\n" +"repairing or updating an existing system.\n" +"\n" +"If you deselect all groups when performing a regular installation (as\n" +"opposed to an upgrade), a dialog will pop up suggesting different options\n" +"for a minimal installation:\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": install the minimum number of packages possible to have a\n" +"working graphical desktop.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": installs the base system plus basic utilities and their\n" +"documentation. This installation is suitable for setting up a server.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": will install the absolute minimum number of packages necessary\n" +"to get a working Linux system. With this installation you will only have a\n" +"command-line interface. The total size of this installation is about 65\n" +"megabytes." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:149 ../help.pm:591 +#, c-format +msgid "Upgrade" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:149 +#, c-format +msgid "With basic documentation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:149 +#, c-format +msgid "Truly minimal install" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:152 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"If you choose to install packages individually, the installer will present\n" +"a tree containing all packages classified by groups and subgroups. While\n" +"browsing the tree, you can select entire groups, subgroups, or individual\n" +"packages.\n" +"\n" +"Whenever you select a package on the tree, a description will appear on the\n" +"right to let you know the purpose of that package.\n" +"\n" +"!! If a server package has been selected, either because you specifically\n" +"chose the individual package or because it was part of a group of packages,\n" +"you'll be asked to confirm that you really want those servers to be\n" +"installed. By default Mageia will automatically start any installed\n" +"services at boot time. Even if they are safe and have no known issues at\n" +"the time the distribution was shipped, it is entirely possible that\n" +"security holes were discovered after this version of Mageia was\n" +"finalized. If you do not know what a particular service is supposed to do " +"or\n" +"why it's being installed, then click \"%s\". Clicking \"%s\" will install\n" +"the listed services and they will be started automatically at boot time. !!\n" +"\n" +"The \"%s\" option is used to disable the warning dialog which appears\n" +"whenever the installer automatically selects a package to resolve a\n" +"dependency issue. Some packages depend on others and the installation of\n" +"one particular package may require the installation of another package. The\n" +"installer can determine which packages are required to satisfy a dependency\n" +"to successfully complete the installation.\n" +"\n" +"The tiny floppy disk icon at the bottom of the list allows you to load a\n" +"package list created during a previous installation. This is useful if you\n" +"have a number of machines that you wish to configure identically. Clicking\n" +"on this icon will ask you to insert the floppy disk created at the end of\n" +"another installation. See the second tip of the last step on how to create\n" +"such a floppy." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:183 +#, c-format +msgid "Automatic dependencies" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:185 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"This dialog is used to select which services you wish to start at boot\n" +"time.\n" +"\n" +"DrakX will list all services available on the current installation. Review\n" +"each one of them carefully and uncheck those which are not needed at boot\n" +"time.\n" +"\n" +"A short explanatory text will be displayed about a service when it is\n" +"selected. However, if you're not sure whether a service is useful or not,\n" +"it is safer to leave the default behavior.\n" +"\n" +"!! At this stage, be very careful if you intend to use your machine as a\n" +"server: you probably do not want to start any services which you do not " +"need.\n" +"Please remember that some services can be dangerous if they're enabled on a\n" +"server. In general, select only those services you really need. !!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:209 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"GNU/Linux manages time in GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) and translates it to\n" +"local time according to the time zone you selected. If the clock on your\n" +"motherboard is set to local time, you may deactivate this by unselecting\n" +"\"%s\", which will let GNU/Linux know that the system clock and the\n" +"hardware clock are in the same time zone. This is useful when the machine\n" +"also hosts another operating system.\n" +"\n" +"The \"%s\" option will automatically regulate the system clock by\n" +"connecting to a remote time server on the Internet. For this feature to\n" +"work, you must have a working Internet connection. We recommend that you\n" +"choose a time server located near you. This option actually installs a time\n" +"server which can be used by other machines on your local network as well." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:213 +#, c-format +msgid "Hardware clock set to GMT" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:213 +#, c-format +msgid "Automatic time synchronization" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:223 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"Graphic Card\n" +"\n" +" The installer will normally automatically detect and configure the\n" +"graphic card installed on your machine. If this is not correct, you can\n" +"choose from this list the card you actually have installed.\n" +"\n" +" In the situation where different servers are available for your card,\n" +"with or without 3D acceleration, you're asked to choose the server which\n" +"best suits your needs." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:234 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"X (for X Window System) is the heart of the GNU/Linux graphical interface\n" +"on which all the graphical environments (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep,\n" +"WindowMaker, etc.) bundled with Mageia rely upon.\n" +"\n" +"You'll see a list of different parameters to change to get an optimal\n" +"graphical display.\n" +"\n" +"Graphic Card\n" +"\n" +" The installer will normally automatically detect and configure the\n" +"graphic card installed on your machine. If this is not correct, you can\n" +"choose from this list the card you actually have installed.\n" +"\n" +" In the situation where different servers are available for your card,\n" +"with or without 3D acceleration, you're asked to choose the server which\n" +"best suits your needs.\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"Monitor\n" +"\n" +" Normally the installer will automatically detect and configure the\n" +"monitor connected to your machine. If it is not correct, you can choose\n" +"from this list the monitor which is connected to your computer.\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"Resolution\n" +"\n" +" Here you can choose the resolutions and color depths available for your\n" +"graphics hardware. Choose the one which best suits your needs (you will be\n" +"able to make changes after the installation). A sample of the chosen\n" +"configuration is shown in the monitor picture.\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"Test\n" +"\n" +" Depending on your hardware, this entry might not appear.\n" +"\n" +" The system will try to open a graphical screen at the desired\n" +"resolution. If you see the test message during the test and answer \"%s\",\n" +"then DrakX will proceed to the next step. If you do not see it, then it\n" +"means that some part of the auto-detected configuration was incorrect and\n" +"the test will automatically end after 12 seconds and return you to the\n" +"menu. Change settings until you get a correct graphical display.\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"Options\n" +"\n" +" This steps allows you to choose whether you want your machine to\n" +"automatically switch to a graphical interface at boot. Obviously, you may\n" +"want to check \"%s\" if your machine is to act as a server, or if you were\n" +"not successful in getting the display configured." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:291 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"Monitor\n" +"\n" +" Normally the installer will automatically detect and configure the\n" +"monitor connected to your machine. If it is not correct, you can choose\n" +"from this list the monitor which is connected to your computer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:298 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"Resolution\n" +"\n" +" Here you can choose the resolutions and color depths available for your\n" +"graphics hardware. Choose the one which best suits your needs (you will be\n" +"able to make changes after the installation). A sample of the chosen\n" +"configuration is shown in the monitor picture." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:306 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"In the situation where different servers are available for your card, with\n" +"or without 3D acceleration, you're asked to choose the server which best\n" +"suits your needs." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:311 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"Options\n" +"\n" +" This steps allows you to choose whether you want your machine to\n" +"automatically switch to a graphical interface at boot. Obviously, you may\n" +"want to check \"%s\" if your machine is to act as a server, or if you were\n" +"not successful in getting the display configured." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:319 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" +"existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" +"partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" +"logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" +"Mageia system.\n" +"\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" +"and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" +"for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" +"simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" +"rest of this section and above all, take your time.\n" +"\n" +"Depending on the configuration of your hard disk drive, several options are\n" +"available:\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". This option will perform an automatic partitioning of your blank\n" +"drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" +"be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" +"The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" +"a good idea to keep them.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" +"all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" +"GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" +"data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" +"FAT or NTFS partition. Resizing can be performed without the loss of any\n" +"data, provided you've previously defragmented the Windows partition.\n" +"Backing up your data is strongly recommended. Using this option is\n" +"recommended if you want to use both Mageia and Microsoft Windows on\n" +"the same computer.\n" +"\n" +" Before choosing this option, please understand that after this\n" +"procedure, the size of your Microsoft Windows partition will be smaller\n" +"than when you started. You'll have less free space under Microsoft Windows\n" +"to store your data or to install new software.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". If you want to delete all data and all partitions present on\n" +"your hard disk drive and replace them with your new Mageia system, choose\n" +"this option. Be careful, because you will not be able to undo this " +"operation\n" +"after you confirm.\n" +"\n" +" !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" +"Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" +"drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" +"\n" +" !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be lost. !!\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Choose this option if you want to manually partition your hard\n" +"drive. Be careful -- it is a powerful but dangerous choice and you can very\n" +"easily lose all your data. That's why this option is really only\n" +"recommended if you have done something like this before and have some\n" +"experience. For more instructions on how to use the DiskDrake utility,\n" +"refer to the ``Managing Your Partitions'' section in the ``Starter Guide''." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:377 +#, c-format +msgid "Use existing partition" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:370 +#, c-format +msgid "Use the free space on the Microsoft Windows® partition" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:370 +#, c-format +msgid "Erase entire disk" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:380 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"There you are. Installation is now complete and your GNU/Linux system is\n" +"ready to be used. Just click on \"%s\" to reboot the system. Do not forget\n" +"to remove the installation media (CD-ROM or floppy). The first thing you\n" +"should see after your computer has finished doing its hardware tests is the\n" +"boot-loader menu, giving you the choice of which operating system to start.\n" +"\n" +"The \"%s\" button shows two more buttons to:\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": enables you to create an installation floppy disk which will\n" +"automatically perform a whole installation without the help of an operator,\n" +"similar to the installation you've just configured.\n" +"\n" +" Note that two different options are available after clicking on that\n" +"button:\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". This is a partially automated installation. The partitioning\n" +"step is the only interactive procedure.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Fully automated installation: the hard disk is completely\n" +"rewritten, all data is lost.\n" +"\n" +" This feature is very handy when installing on a number of similar\n" +"machines. See the Auto install section on our web site for more\n" +"information.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\"(*): saves a list of the packages selected in this installation.\n" +"To use this selection with another installation, insert the floppy and\n" +"start the installation. At the prompt, press the [F1] key, type >>linux\n" +"defcfg=\"floppy\"<< and press the [Enter] key.\n" +"\n" +"(*) You need a FAT-formatted floppy. To create one under GNU/Linux, type\n" +"\"mformat a:\", or \"fdformat /dev/fd0\" followed by \"mkfs.vfat\n" +"/dev/fd0\"." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:412 +#, c-format +msgid "Generate auto-install floppy" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:405 +#, c-format +msgid "Replay" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:405 +#, c-format +msgid "Automated" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:405 +#, c-format +msgid "Save packages selection" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:408 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"If you chose to reuse some legacy GNU/Linux partitions, you may wish to\n" +"reformat some of them and erase any data they contain. To do so, please\n" +"select those partitions as well.\n" +"\n" +"Please note that it's not necessary to reformat all pre-existing\n" +"partitions. You must reformat the partitions containing the operating\n" +"system (such as \"/\", \"/usr\" or \"/var\") but you do not have to " +"reformat\n" +"partitions containing data that you wish to keep (typically \"/home\").\n" +"\n" +"Please be careful when selecting partitions. After the formatting is\n" +"completed, all data on the selected partitions will be deleted and you\n" +"will not be able to recover it.\n" +"\n" +"Click on \"%s\" when you're ready to format the partitions.\n" +"\n" +"Click on \"%s\" if you want to choose another partition for your new\n" +"Mageia operating system installation.\n" +"\n" +"Click on \"%s\" if you wish to select partitions which will be checked for\n" +"bad blocks on the disk." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:437 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"By the time you install Mageia, it's likely that some packages will\n" +"have been updated since the initial release. Bugs may have been fixed,\n" +"security issues resolved. To allow you to benefit from these updates,\n" +"you're now able to download them from the Internet. Check \"%s\" if you\n" +"have a working Internet connection, or \"%s\" if you prefer to install\n" +"updated packages later.\n" +"\n" +"Choosing \"%s\" will display a list of web locations from which updates can\n" +"be retrieved. You should choose one near to you. A package-selection tree\n" +"will appear: review the selection, and press \"%s\" to retrieve and install\n" +"the selected package(s), or \"%s\" to abort." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:450 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"At this point, DrakX will allow you to choose the security level you desire\n" +"for your machine. As a rule of thumb, the security level should be set\n" +"higher if the machine is to contain crucial data, or if it's to be directly\n" +"exposed to the Internet. The trade-off that a higher security level is\n" +"generally obtained at the expense of ease of use.\n" +"\n" +"If you do not know what to choose, keep the default option. You'll be able\n" +"to change it later with the draksec tool, which is part of Mageia\n" +"Control Center.\n" +"\n" +"Fill the \"%s\" field with the e-mail address of the person responsible for\n" +"security. Security messages will be sent to that address." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:461 +#, c-format +msgid "Security Administrator" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:464 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" +"installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" +"defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" +"partitions must be defined.\n" +"\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" +"the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" +"``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" +"\n" +"To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" +"partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" +"\n" +"\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": saves the partition table to a floppy. Useful for later\n" +"partition-table recovery if necessary. It is strongly recommended that you\n" +"perform this step.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": allows you to restore a previously saved partition table from a\n" +"floppy disk.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": if your partition table is damaged, you can try to recover it\n" +"using this option. Please be careful and remember that it does not always\n" +"work.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": discards all changes and reloads the partition table that was\n" +"originally on the hard disk drive.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": un-checking this option will force users to manually mount and\n" +"unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" +"partitioning.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" +"and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" +"save your changes back to disk.\n" +"\n" +"When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" +"size by using the Arrow keys of your keyboard.\n" +"\n" +"Note: you can reach any option using the keyboard. Navigate through the\n" +"partitions using [Tab] and the [Up/Down] arrows.\n" +"\n" +"When a partition is selected, you can use:\n" +"\n" +" * Ctrl-c to create a new partition (when an empty partition is selected)\n" +"\n" +" * Ctrl-d to delete a partition\n" +"\n" +" * Ctrl-m to set the mount point\n" +"\n" +"To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" +"read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:526 +#, c-format +msgid "Save partition table" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:526 +#, c-format +msgid "Restore partition table" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:526 +#, c-format +msgid "Rescue partition table" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:526 +#, c-format +msgid "Removable media auto-mounting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:526 +#, c-format +msgid "Wizard" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:526 +#, c-format +msgid "Undo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:526 +#, c-format +msgid "Toggle between normal/expert mode" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:536 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" +"Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" +"Mageia operating system.\n" +"\n" +"Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" +"\"Capacity\".\n" +"\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" +"\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" +"\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" +"\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" +"\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" +"hard disk drives:\n" +"\n" +" * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" +"\n" +" * \"b\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" +"\n" +" * \"c\" means \"master hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\";\n" +"\n" +" * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" +"\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" +"\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" +"\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" +"disk or partition is called \"C:\")." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:567 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"\"%s\": check the current country selection. If you're not in this country,\n" +"click on the \"%s\" button and choose another. If your country is not in " +"the\n" +"list shown, click on the \"%s\" button to get the complete country list." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:572 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"This step is activated only if an existing GNU/Linux partition has been\n" +"found on your machine.\n" +"\n" +"DrakX now needs to know if you want to perform a new installation or an\n" +"upgrade of an existing Mageia system:\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" +"However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" +"your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" +"the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" +"currently installed on your Mageia system. Your current partitioning\n" +"scheme and user data will not be altered. Most of the other configuration\n" +"steps remain available and are similar to a standard installation.\n" +"\n" +"Using the ``Upgrade'' option should work fine on Mageia systems\n" +"running version \"8.1\" or later. Performing an upgrade on versions prior\n" +"to Mageia version \"8.1\" is not recommended." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:594 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"Depending on the language you chose (), DrakX will automatically select a\n" +"particular type of keyboard configuration. Check that the selection suits\n" +"you or choose another keyboard layout.\n" +"\n" +"Also, you may not have a keyboard which corresponds exactly to your\n" +"language: for example, if you are an English-speaking Swiss native, you may\n" +"have a Swiss keyboard. Or if you speak English and are located in Quebec,\n" +"you may find yourself in the same situation where your native language and\n" +"country-set keyboard do not match. In either case, this installation step\n" +"will allow you to select an appropriate keyboard from a list.\n" +"\n" +"Click on the \"%s\" button to be shown a list of supported keyboards.\n" +"\n" +"If you choose a keyboard layout based on a non-Latin alphabet, the next\n" +"dialog will allow you to choose the key binding which will switch the\n" +"keyboard between the Latin and non-Latin layouts." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:612 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"The first step is to choose your preferred language.\n" +"\n" +"Your choice of preferred language will affect the installer, the\n" +"documentation, and the system in general. First select the region you're\n" +"located in, then the language you speak.\n" +"\n" +"Clicking on the \"%s\" button will allow you to select other languages to\n" +"be installed on your workstation, thereby installing the language-specific\n" +"files for system documentation and applications. For example, if Spanish\n" +"users are to use your machine, select English as the default language in\n" +"the tree view and \"%s\" in the Advanced section.\n" +"\n" +"About UTF-8 (unicode) support: Unicode is a new character encoding meant to\n" +"cover all existing languages. However full support for it in GNU/Linux is\n" +"still under development. For that reason, Mageia's use of UTF-8 will\n" +"depend on the user's choices:\n" +"\n" +" * If you choose a language with a strong legacy encoding (latin1\n" +"languages, Russian, Japanese, Chinese, Korean, Thai, Greek, Turkish, most\n" +"iso-8859-2 languages), the legacy encoding will be used by default;\n" +"\n" +" * Other languages will use unicode by default;\n" +"\n" +" * If two or more languages are required, and those languages are not using\n" +"the same encoding, then unicode will be used for the whole system;\n" +"\n" +" * Finally, unicode can also be forced for use throughout the system at a\n" +"user's request by selecting the \"%s\" option independently of which\n" +"languages were been chosen.\n" +"\n" +"Note that you're not limited to choosing a single additional language. You\n" +"may choose several, or even install them all by selecting the \"%s\" box.\n" +"Selecting support for a language means translations, fonts, spell checkers,\n" +"etc. will also be installed for that language.\n" +"\n" +"To switch between the various languages installed on your system, you can\n" +"launch the \"localedrake\" command as \"root\" to change the language used\n" +"by the entire system. Running the command as a regular user will only\n" +"change the language settings for that particular user." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:650 +#, c-format +msgid "Espanol" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:643 +#, c-format +msgid "Use Unicode by default" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:646 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"Usually, DrakX has no problems detecting the number of buttons on your\n" +"mouse. If it does, it assumes you have a two-button mouse and will\n" +"configure it for third-button emulation. The third-button mouse button of a\n" +"two-button mouse can be obtained by simultaneously clicking the left and\n" +"right mouse buttons. DrakX will automatically know whether your mouse uses\n" +"a PS/2, serial or USB interface.\n" +"\n" +"If you have a 3-button mouse without a wheel, you can choose a \"%s\"\n" +"mouse. DrakX will then configure your mouse so that you can simulate the\n" +"wheel with it: to do so, press the middle button and move your mouse\n" +"pointer up and down.\n" +"\n" +"If for some reason you wish to specify a different type of mouse, select it\n" +"from the list provided.\n" +"\n" +"You can select the \"%s\" entry to chose a ``generic'' mouse type which\n" +"will work with nearly all mice.\n" +"\n" +"If you choose a mouse other than the default one, a test screen will be\n" +"displayed. Use the buttons and wheel to verify that the settings are\n" +"correct and that the mouse is working correctly. If the mouse is not\n" +"working well, press the space bar or [Return] key to cancel the test and\n" +"you will be returned to the mouse list.\n" +"\n" +"Occasionally wheel mice are not detected automatically, so you will need to\n" +"select your mouse from a list. Be sure to select the one corresponding to\n" +"the port that your mouse is attached to. After selecting a mouse and\n" +"pressing the \"%s\" button, a mouse image will be displayed on-screen.\n" +"Scroll the mouse wheel to ensure that it is activating correctly. As you\n" +"scroll your mouse wheel, you will see the on-screen scroll wheel moving.\n" +"Test the buttons and check that the mouse pointer moves on-screen as you\n" +"move your mouse about." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:684 +#, c-format +msgid "with Wheel emulation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:684 +#, c-format +msgid "Universal | Any PS/2 & USB mice" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:687 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"Please select the correct port. For example, the \"COM1\" port under\n" +"Windows is named \"ttyS0\" under GNU/Linux." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:684 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"A boot loader is a little program which is started by the computer at boot\n" +"time. It's responsible for starting up the whole system. Normally, the boot\n" +"loader installation is totally automated. DrakX will analyze the disk boot\n" +"sector and act according to what it finds there:\n" +"\n" +" * if a Windows boot sector is found, it will replace it with a GRUB/LILO\n" +"boot sector. This way you'll be able to load either GNU/Linux or any other\n" +"OS installed on your machine.\n" +"\n" +" * if a GRUB or LILO boot sector is found, it'll replace it with a new one.\n" +"\n" +"If DrakX cannot determine where to place the boot sector, it'll ask you\n" +"where it should place it. Generally, the \"%s\" is the safest place.\n" +"Choosing \"%s\" will not install any boot loader. Use this option only if " +"you\n" +"know what you're doing." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:745 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"Now, it's time to select a printing system for your computer. Other\n" +"operating systems may offer you one, but Mageia offers two. Each of\n" +"the printing systems is best suited to particular types of configuration.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\" -- which is an acronym for ``print, do not queue'', is the choice\n" +"if you have a direct connection to your printer, you want to be able to\n" +"panic out of printer jams, and you do not have networked printers. (\"%s\"\n" +"will handle only very simple network cases and is somewhat slow when used\n" +"within networks.) It's recommended that you use \"pdq\" if this is your\n" +"first experience with GNU/Linux.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\" stands for `` Common Unix Printing System'' and is an excellent\n" +"choice for printing to your local printer or to one halfway around the\n" +"planet. It's simple to configure and can act as a server or a client for\n" +"the ancient \"lpd\" printing system, so it's compatible with older\n" +"operating systems which may still need print services. While quite\n" +"powerful, the basic setup is almost as easy as \"pdq\". If you need to\n" +"emulate a \"lpd\" server, make sure you turn on the \"cups-lpd\" daemon.\n" +"\"%s\" includes graphical front-ends for printing or choosing printer\n" +"options and for managing the printer.\n" +"\n" +"If you make a choice now, and later find that you do not like your printing\n" +"system you may change it by running PrinterDrake from the Mageia\n" +"Control Center and clicking on the \"%s\" button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:768 +#, c-format +msgid "pdq" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:724 +#, c-format +msgid "CUPS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:724 +#, c-format +msgid "Expert" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:771 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"DrakX will first detect any IDE devices present in your computer. It will\n" +"also scan for one or more PCI SCSI cards on your system. If a SCSI card is\n" +"found, DrakX will automatically install the appropriate driver.\n" +"\n" +"Because hardware detection is not foolproof, DrakX may fail in detecting\n" +"your hard disk drives. If so, you'll have to specify your hardware by hand.\n" +"\n" +"If you had to manually specify your PCI SCSI adapter, DrakX will ask if you\n" +"want to configure options for it. You should allow DrakX to probe the\n" +"hardware for the card-specific options which are needed to initialize the\n" +"adapter. Most of the time, DrakX will get through this step without any\n" +"issues.\n" +"\n" +"If DrakX is not able to probe for the options to automatically determine\n" +"which parameters need to be passed to the hardware, you'll need to manually\n" +"configure the driver." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:789 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"\"%s\": if a sound card is detected on your system, it'll be displayed\n" +"here. If you notice the sound card is not the one actually present on your\n" +"system, you can click on the button and choose a different driver." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:794 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"As a review, DrakX will present a summary of information it has gathered\n" +"about your system. Depending on the hardware installed on your machine, you\n" +"may have some or all of the following entries. Each entry is made up of the\n" +"hardware item to be configured, followed by a quick summary of the current\n" +"configuration. Click on the corresponding \"%s\" button to make the change.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": check the current keyboard map configuration and change it if\n" +"necessary.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": check the current country selection. If you're not in this\n" +"country, click on the \"%s\" button and choose another. If your country\n" +"is not in the list shown, click on the \"%s\" button to get the complete\n" +"country list.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": by default, DrakX deduces your time zone based on the country\n" +"you have chosen. You can click on the \"%s\" button here if this is not\n" +"correct.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": verify the current mouse configuration and click on the button\n" +"to change it if necessary.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": if a sound card is detected on your system, it'll be displayed\n" +"here. If you notice the sound card is not the one actually present on your\n" +"system, you can click on the button and choose a different driver.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": if you have a TV card, this is where information about its\n" +"configuration will be displayed. If you have a TV card and it is not\n" +"detected, click on \"%s\" to try to configure it manually.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": you can click on \"%s\" to change the parameters associated with\n" +"the card if you feel the configuration is wrong.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": by default, DrakX configures your graphical interface in\n" +"\"800x600\" or \"1024x768\" resolution. If that does not suit you, click on\n" +"\"%s\" to reconfigure your graphical interface.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": if you wish to configure your Internet or local network access,\n" +"you can do so now. Refer to the printed documentation or use the\n" +"Mageia Control Center after the installation has finished to benefit\n" +"from full in-line help.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": allows to configure HTTP and FTP proxy addresses if the machine\n" +"you're installing on is to be located behind a proxy server.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": this entry allows you to redefine the security level as set in a\n" +"previous step ().\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": if you plan to connect your machine to the Internet, it's a good\n" +"idea to protect yourself from intrusions by setting up a firewall. Consult\n" +"the corresponding section of the ``Starter Guide'' for details about\n" +"firewall settings.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": if you wish to change your bootloader configuration, click this\n" +"button. This should be reserved to advanced users. Refer to the printed\n" +"documentation or the in-line help about bootloader configuration in the\n" +"Mageia Control Center.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": through this entry you can fine tune which services will be run\n" +"on your machine. If you plan to use this machine as a server it's a good\n" +"idea to review this setup." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:809 +#, c-format +msgid "TV card" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:809 +#, c-format +msgid "ISDN card" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:858 +#, c-format +msgid "Graphical Interface" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:861 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"Choose the hard disk drive you want to erase in order to install your new\n" +"Mageia partition. Be careful, all data on this drive will be lost\n" +"and will not be recoverable!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:866 +#, c-format +msgid "" +"Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" +"any Windows data.\n" +"\n" +"Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" +"present on this hard disk drive." +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:872 +#, c-format +msgid "Next ->" +msgstr "" + +#: ../help.pm:872 +#, c-format +msgid "<- Previous" +msgstr "" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/az.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/az.po index 2562ec127..48844f4d9 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/az.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/az.po @@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2005-03-31 14:21+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Mətin Əmirov <metin@karegen.com>\n" "Language-Team: Azerbaijani <translation-team-az@lists.sourceforge.net>\n" +"Language: az\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -140,7 +141,8 @@ msgstr "Bu xüsusiyyəti istifadə etmək istəyirsiniz?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -150,13 +152,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -167,7 +172,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Burada sürücünüzdə tapılan Linuks bölmələri sıralanıb.\n" @@ -387,8 +393,7 @@ msgstr "" "verici\n" "seçilsə, sizə bu vericini həqiqətən də qurmaq istədiyinizi soruşan və " "sizdən\n" -"təsdiq istəyən pəncərə göstəriləcək. Əsas olaraq Mageia bütün " -"qurulu\n" +"təsdiq istəyən pəncərə göstəriləcək. Əsas olaraq Mageia bütün qurulu\n" "olan xidmətləri açılışda fəal edir. Distribusiyanın çıxdığı vaxt onların " "bilinən heç bir\n" "xətası ya da təhlükəli yanı olmasa da, mümkündür ki, müəyyən vaxt sonra\n" @@ -712,13 +717,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -731,12 +738,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -759,7 +768,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -810,8 +820,7 @@ msgstr "" "'Scandisk' və\n" "'Defraq' əmrlərinin icra edilməsinir. Eyni zamanda mə'lumatlarınızın ehtiyat " "nüsxəsini almayı\n" -"da qətiyyən unutmayın. Kompüteriniz üstündə həm Mageia həm də " -"Microsoft\n" +"da qətiyyən unutmayın. Kompüteriniz üstündə həm Mageia həm də Microsoft\n" "Windows ƏS'lərini işlətmək istəyirsinizsə bu seçənəyi seçin. Unutmayın ki " "Microsoft\n" "Windows bölmənizin böyüklüyünü Windows altında da bəzi (PartitionMagic) " @@ -1064,18 +1073,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1098,7 +1110,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1106,7 +1119,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1125,12 +1139,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Bu nöqtədə siz Mageia yüklənəcək bölmə(lər)i seçməlisiniz. Əgər\n" "bölmələr əvvəldən mövcuddursa (sistemdə əvvəllər qurulu olan GNU/Linuks \n" @@ -1148,7 +1156,7 @@ msgstr "" " * \"%s\": Bu seçim seçili sabit disk üstündəki bütün bölmələri silər\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": Bu seçim sizə avtomatik olaraq sabit diskinizin boş sahəsində\n" -"ext3 və dəyiş-toqquş sahəsi yaratma imkanı verəcək\n" +"ext4 və dəyiş-toqquş sahəsi yaratma imkanı verəcək\n" "\n" "\"%s\": Əlavə xüsusiyyətlərə yetişmə imkanı verir\n" "\n" @@ -1205,12 +1213,6 @@ msgstr "" "Fərqli fayl sistem növləri haqqında daha ətraflı mə'lumat üçün, xahiş " "edirik,\n" "``Reference Manual'' kitabının ext2FS bölümünü oxuyun.\n" -"\n" -"Əgər PPC kompüterdə qurulum aparırsınızsa, ən az 1 MBlıq balaca bir HFS \n" -"``bootstrap'' bölməsini yaboot açılış yükləyicisi üçün seçmək " -"istəyəcəksiniz.\n" -"Əgər daha çox yeriniz varsa, məsələn 50 MB, onda bütün kernel və ramdisk \n" -"açılış əkslərinizi təcili hallar üçün burada saxlaya bilərsiniz." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1250,20 +1252,24 @@ msgstr "Normal modla mütəxəssis modu arasında keç" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1274,10 +1280,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Sürücünüzdə bir və ya daha çox Microsoft bölməsi tapıldı.\n" @@ -1335,7 +1343,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1360,8 +1369,7 @@ msgstr "" "bu seçimi seçin. Yalnız, bölmələndirmə sxeminizdən aslı olaraq bə'zi mövcud\n" "mə'lumatlarınızın üstündən yazılmasının qabağını ala bilərsiniz.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": Hazırkı Mageia sisteminizdə qurulu olan paketləri " -"yeniləmə\n" +" * \"%s\": Hazırkı Mageia sisteminizdə qurulu olan paketləri yeniləmə\n" "imkanı verir. Qurulum hazırkı bölmələmə sxemi və istifadəçi mə'lumat və " "sənədlərinə\n" "dəyməyəcək və dəyişdirməyəcək. Digər qurulum addımlarının çoxu isə standart\n" @@ -1870,8 +1878,10 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/be.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/be.po index 66494c5ed..265ccde90 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/be.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/be.po @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2000-09-24 12:30 +0100\n" "Last-Translator: Alexander Bokovoy <ab@avilink.net>\n" "Language-Team: be\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -82,7 +83,8 @@ msgstr "Вы жадаеце выкарыстоўваць aboot?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -92,13 +94,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -109,7 +114,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" @@ -406,13 +412,15 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -425,12 +433,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -453,7 +463,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -610,18 +621,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -644,7 +658,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -652,7 +667,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -671,12 +687,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:526 @@ -717,20 +727,24 @@ msgstr "Звычайны рэжым" #: ../help.pm:536 #, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -741,10 +755,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" @@ -769,7 +785,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1097,8 +1114,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/bg.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/bg.po index 90099a83f..ed19a7912 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/bg.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/bg.po @@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2004-09-15 13:27+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Boyan Ivanov <boyan17@bulgaria.com>\n" "Language-Team: Bulgarian <dict@linux.zonebg.com>\n" +"Language: bg\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -30,8 +31,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Преди да продължите, трябва внимателно да прочетете условията на лиценза. " "Той\n" -"покрива цялата Mageia дистрибуция, и, ако сте съгласни с всички " -"условия\n" +"покрива цялата Mageia дистрибуция, и, ако сте съгласни с всички условия\n" "в него, сложете отметка на \"%s\".Ако не сте съгласни,просто спрете " "компютъра си." @@ -137,7 +137,8 @@ msgstr "Искате ли да използвате тази особеност? #: ../help.pm:57 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -147,13 +148,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -164,7 +168,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "По-горе са изброени засечените Linux дялове съществуващи\n" @@ -384,8 +389,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "!! Ако е избран сървърен пакет, било то умишлено или защото е част от цяла\n" "група, ще бъдете помолени за потвърждение, че наистина искате този сървър\n" -"да бъде инсталиран. В Mageia, всички сървъри тръгват по " -"подразбиране\n" +"да бъде инсталиран. В Mageia, всички сървъри тръгват по подразбиране\n" "при зареждане.Даже ако са сигурни и нямат известни проблеми, когато\n" "дистрибуцията се разпространява, може да се случи така, че да се появят\n" "дупки в сигурността, след като версията на Mageia е завършена. Ако\n" @@ -600,13 +604,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -619,12 +625,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -647,7 +655,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -948,18 +957,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -982,7 +994,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -990,7 +1003,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1009,12 +1023,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "В този момент трябва да изберете кой дялове да бъдат използвани за " "инсталация\n" @@ -1075,13 +1083,6 @@ msgstr "" " * Ctrl-d, за да изтриете дял;\n" "\n" " * Ctrl-m, за да установите точка на монтиране.\n" -"\n" -"Ако инсталите на PPC машина, сигурно ще искате да създадете малък HFS\n" -"\"bootstrap\" дял от поне 1 МБ, който ще бъде използват от boot loader-ът\n" -"yaboot. Ако смятате да направите дяла по-голям, например 50 МБ, можете да " -"го\n" -"намерите за полезно място, където да съхранявате някое ядро или image на\n" -"ramdisk в случай на извънредни ситуации." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1121,20 +1122,24 @@ msgstr "Премини в нормален/експертен режим" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1145,10 +1150,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Беше засечен повече от един Microsoft Windows дял\n" @@ -1207,7 +1214,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1606,16 +1614,18 @@ msgid "" "and will not be recoverable!" msgstr "" "Изберете твърдия диск, който искате да изтриете, за да\n" -"инсталирам новия ви Mageia дял. Внимание, всички данни на него ще " -"бъдат загубени\n" +"инсталирам новия ви Mageia дял. Внимание, всички данни на него ще бъдат " +"загубени\n" "и няма да могат да се възстановят." #: ../help.pm:866 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/bn.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/bn.po index d6a350751..3aa3fd073 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/bn.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/bn.po @@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2005-03-19 23:18+0600\n" "Last-Translator: Samia <mailsamia2001@yahoo.com>\n" "Language-Team: Bangla <mdk-translation@bengalinux.org>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -135,7 +136,8 @@ msgstr "এই সুবিধাটি কি আপনি ব্যবহা #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -145,13 +147,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -162,7 +167,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "আপনার হার্ড ড্রাইভে বর্তমানে নিম্নলিখিত লিনাক্স পার্টিশনগুলো বিদ্যমান।\n" @@ -274,8 +280,7 @@ msgid "" "megabytes." msgstr "" "এখন আপনাকে নির্বাচন করতে হবে আপনি কোন কোন প্রোগ্রাম সিস্টেমে ইনস্টল করতে চান।\n" -"Mageia এর জন্য কয়েক হাজার প্যাকেজ রয়েছে, এবং ব্যাবস্থাপনার সুবিধার্থে " -"সেগুলোকে\n" +"Mageia এর জন্য কয়েক হাজার প্যাকেজ রয়েছে, এবং ব্যাবস্থাপনার সুবিধার্থে সেগুলোকে\n" "অ্যাপ্লিকেশনের ধরন অনুযায়ী ভাগ করা হয়েছে।\n" "\n" "Mageia সব প্যাকেজগ্রুপসমূহ চারটি শ্রেণীতে ভাগ করে। আপনি বিভিন্ন শ্রেণীর\n" @@ -602,13 +607,15 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -621,12 +628,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -649,7 +658,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -776,8 +786,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "পার্টিশন ফরম্যাট শুরু করতে \"%s\" চাপুন।\n" "\n" -"আপনার নতুন Mageia অপারেটিং সিস্টেম ইনস্টেশনের জন্য আপনি যদি অন্য একটি " -"পার্টিশন নির্বাচন করতে, তবে \"%s\" ক্লিক করুন।\n" +"আপনার নতুন Mageia অপারেটিং সিস্টেম ইনস্টেশনের জন্য আপনি যদি অন্য একটি পার্টিশন " +"নির্বাচন করতে, তবে \"%s\" ক্লিক করুন।\n" "\n" "যদি আপনি পার্টিশনের জন্য ডিস্কের খারাপ ব্লক সনাক্ত করাতে চান তাহলে \"%s\" ক্লিক " "করুন।" @@ -851,18 +861,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -885,7 +898,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -893,7 +907,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -912,12 +927,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "এই সময়ে আপনাকে Mageia যে পার্টিশনে ইনস্টল হবে তা নির্বাচন\n" "করতে হবে। যদি আগে থেকেই পার্টিশন তৈরী থাকে, (GNU/Linux এর পুর্বের\n" @@ -932,7 +941,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\": এই অপশনটি নির্বাচিত ড্রাইভের সব পার্টিশন মুছে দিবে\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": এই অপশনটি আপনার হার্ডড্রাইভের খালি অংশে স্বয়ংক্রিয়ভাবে ext3 এবং\n" +" * \"%s\": এই অপশনটি আপনার হার্ডড্রাইভের খালি অংশে স্বয়ংক্রিয়ভাবে ext4 এবং\n" "swap পার্টিশন তৈরী করতে দিবে।\n" "\n" "\"%s\": আরও ফিচার ব্যবহার করার সুযোগ দেয়:\n" @@ -980,12 +989,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "বিদ্যমান ফাইল সিস্টেমের ধরন সম্পর্কে জানতে হলে \"Reference Manual\" এর\n" "ext2FS অধ্যায়টি পড়ুন।\n" -"\n" -"আপনি যদি PPC মেশিনে ইনস্টল করেন, তাহলে আপনাকে yaboot বুটলোডারের\n" -"ব্যবহারের জন্য একটি ছোট অন্তত ১ এমবি এর HFS \"বুটস্ট্র্যাপ\" পার্টিশন তৈরী করতে " -"হবে।\n" -"আপনি যদি পার্টিশনটি আরও বড় করতে চান, যেমন ৫০ MB, আপনি কোন জরুরী বুট সমস্যার\n" -"জন্য একটি আলাদা কার্নেল এবং ramdisk তৈরী করে এই পার্টিশনে রাখতে পারেন।" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1027,20 +1030,24 @@ msgstr "সাধারণ/দক্ষ মোডের মধ্যে পর #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1051,10 +1058,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "আপনার হার্ড ড্রাইভে বর্তমানে নিম্নলিখিত লিনাক্স পার্টিশনগুলো বিদ্যমান।\n" @@ -1114,7 +1123,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1355,8 +1365,7 @@ msgstr "" "ইন্টারফেস রয়েছে।\n" "\n" "আপনার বাছাইকৃত প্রিন্টিং সিস্টেমটি যদি আপনার পরে পছন্দ না হয়,\n" -"তবে আপনি Mageia নিয়ন্ত্রন কেন্দ্র থেকে PrinterDrake চালিয়ে ও \"%s\" বাটন " -"ক্লিক\n" +"তবে আপনি Mageia নিয়ন্ত্রন কেন্দ্র থেকে PrinterDrake চালিয়ে ও \"%s\" বাটন ক্লিক\n" "করে তা বদল করতে পারেন।" #: ../help.pm:768 @@ -1520,8 +1529,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/br.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/br.po index 5e74dab04..62a4b0104 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/br.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/br.po @@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -681,12 +681,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:526 diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/bs.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/bs.po index 11083dce1..9e40d9b94 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/bs.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/bs.po @@ -12,12 +12,13 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2005-02-26 11:13+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Vedran Ljubovic <vljubovic@smartnet.ba>\n" "Language-Team: Bosanski <lokal@lugbih.org>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Generator: KBabel 1.3\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n%" -"10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n" +"%10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" #: ../help.pm:14 #, fuzzy, c-format @@ -138,7 +139,8 @@ msgstr "Da li želite koristiti ovu mogućnost?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -148,13 +150,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -165,7 +170,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Ovdje su navedene Linux particije koje već postoje na vašem hard disku.\n" @@ -706,13 +712,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -725,12 +733,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -753,7 +763,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1050,18 +1061,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1084,7 +1098,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1092,7 +1107,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1111,12 +1127,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Sada trebate izabrati koje particije želite koristiti za instalaciju vašeg\n" "Mageia sistema. Ako su particije već definisane, iz prijašnje\n" @@ -1133,7 +1143,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\": ova opcija briše sve particije na izabranom hard disku\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": ova opcija vam omogućuje da automatski napravite ext3\n" +" * \"%s\": ova opcija vam omogućuje da automatski napravite ext4\n" "i swap particije u slobodnom prostoru vašeg hard diska\n" "\n" "\"%s\" omogućuje pristup dodatnim mogućnostima:\n" @@ -1184,12 +1194,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Da biste dobili informacije o raznim tipovima datotečnog sistema koji\n" "su dostupni, pročitajte poglavlje o ext2FS iz ''Referentnog priručnika''.\n" -"\n" -"Ako instalirate na PPC računar, trebate napraviti malu HFS ''bootstrap''\n" -"particiju od najmanje 1 MB koju će koristiti yaboot bootloader. Ako se\n" -"odlučite da ovu particiju učinite nešto većom, npr. 50 MB, primjetićete\n" -"da je ona korisno mjesto za čuvanje rezervnog kernela ili ramdisk slika\n" -"za hitne slučajeve." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1229,20 +1233,24 @@ msgstr "Prekidač normalnog/ekspertnog moda" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1253,10 +1261,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Na vašem hard disku ustanovljeno je više od jedne Microsoft particije.\n" @@ -1314,7 +1324,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1887,8 +1898,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/ca.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/ca.po index 050ebec4c..ed1b8b6be 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/ca.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/ca.po @@ -1,26 +1,30 @@ -# translation of ca.po to Catalan -# translation of DrakX.po to Catalan -# Copyright (C) 2000-2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. -# Softcatala, softcatala.org, 2000-2003 -# Albert Astals Cid <astals11@terra.es>, 2003-2004, 2005. +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) YEAR THE PACKAGE'S COPYRIGHT HOLDER +# This file is distributed under the same license as the PACKAGE package. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. # +# Translators: +# Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2024 +# Davidmp <medipas@gmail.com>, 2024 # +#, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: ca\n" +"Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2008-09-12 12:22+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2005-09-13 23:24+0200\n" -"Last-Translator: Albert Astals Cid <astals11@terra.es>\n" -"Language-Team: Catalan <kde-i18n-ca@kde.org>\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2024-09-04 17:33+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Davidmp <medipas@gmail.com>, 2024\n" +"Language-Team: Catalan (https://app.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/teams/9361/" +"ca/)\n" +"Language: ca\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"X-Generator: KBabel 1.9.1\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n!=1;\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" #: ../help.pm:14 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Before continuing, you should carefully read the terms of the license. It\n" "covers the entire Mageia distribution. If you agree with all the\n" @@ -29,10 +33,9 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Abans de continuar, llegiu atentament les clàusules de la llicència. " "Cobreix\n" -"tota la distribució Mageia. Si esteu d'acord amb tots els termes de " -"la\n" -"llicència, feu clic al quadre \"%s\"; si no, prémer el botó \"%s\"\n" -"reiniciarà el vostre ordinador." +"tota la distribució de Mageia. Si esteu d'acord en tots els termes de la\n" +"llicència, feu clic al quadre %s; si no, si premeu el botó %s\n" +"es reiniciarà l'ordinador." #: ../help.pm:20 #, c-format @@ -75,77 +78,73 @@ msgid "" "\"%s\". If you're not interested in this feature, uncheck the \"%s\" box." msgstr "" "El GNU/Linux és un sistema multiusuari; això vol dir que cada usuari pot\n" -"tenir les seves pròpies preferències, els seus propis fitxers, etc. Podeu " -"llegir\n" -"la ``Guia d'iniciació''\n" -" per aprendre més coses sobre els sistemes\n" -"multiusuari. Però, a diferència del \"root\", que és l'administrador del " +"tenir les pròpies preferències, els propis fitxers, etc. Podeu llegir-ne\n" +"la Guia d'iniciació\n" +"per aprendre més coses sobre els sistemes\n" +"multiusuari. Però, a diferència de root (arrel), que és l'administrador del " "sistema,\n" -"als usuaris que afegiu aquí no se'ls permetrà modificar res tret dels seus " +"als usuaris que afegiu aquí no se'ls permetrà modificar res tret dels " "propis\n" -"fitxers i configuracions, protegint així el sistema de canvis, intencionats " -"o no, \n" -" que tenen efecte sobre tot el sistema . Cal que us creeu, com a mínim, un " +"fitxers i configuracions, i així el sistema es protegeix de canvis, " +"intencionats o no, \n" +"que tenen efecte sobre tot el sistema . Cal que us creeu, com a mínim, un " "usuari\n" -"normal, i és aquest compte el que heu d'utilitzar per a l'ús quotidià. Tot i " -"que\n" -"és molt fàcil entrar com a \"root\" per a tot, també pot ser molt perillós: " -"la més\n" +"normal, i és aquest compte el que heu d'usar per a l'ús quotidià. Tot i que\n" +"és molt fàcil entrar com a arrel per a tot, també pot ser molt perillós: la " +"més\n" "petita errada podria significar que el sistema deixés de funcionar. Si " "cometeu\n" "una errada greu com a usuari normal el pitjor que pot passar és que perdeu\n" -"algunes daDES, però sense afectar a tot el sistema.\n" -"\n" -"Primer, heu d'introduir el vostre nom real. Per suposat, això no és " -"obligatori,\n" -"ja que podeu introduir el que vulgueu. DrakX agafarà la primera paraula\n" -"que heu introduït en aquest camp i la copiarà en el camp \"%s\", que serà " -"el\n" -"nom que utilitzarà aquest usuari per entrar al sistema (ho podeu canviar si\n" +"algunes dades, però sense que això afecti tot el sistema.\n" +"\n" +"Primer, heu d'introduir el nom real. Per descomptat, això no és obligatori,\n" +"ja que podeu introduir-hi el que vulgueu. El DrakX agafarà la primera " +"paraula\n" +"que heu introduït en aquest camp i la copiarà al camp %s, que serà el\n" +"nom que usarà aquest usuari per entrar al sistema (ho podeu canviar si\n" "voleu). Després cal que introduïu una contrasenya. Des del punt de vista de\n" "la seguretat, una contrasenya d'un usuari no privilegiat (habitual) no és " "tan\n" -"important com la del \"root\" des del punt de vista de la seguretat, però no " -"hi\n" -"ha cap raó per menystenir-la, deixant-la en blanc o fent-la massa senzilla: " +"important com la d'arrel des del punt de vista de la seguretat, però no hi\n" +"ha cap raó per menystenir-la deixant-la en blanc o fent-la massa senzilla: " "al\n" -"cap i a la fi, els vostres fitxers poden estar en joc.\n" +"cap i a la fi, els vostres fitxers poden estar en risc.\n" "\n" -"Un cop hagueu fet clic a \"%s\" podreu afegir altres usuaris. Afegiu-ne un\n" -"per a tothom que hagi de fer servir l'ordinador. Feu clic a \"%s\" quan " -"hagueu\n" -"acabat d'afegir-ne.\n" +"Un cop hàgiu fet clic a %s podreu afegir-hi altres usuaris. Afegiu-ne un\n" +"per a cada persona que hagi de fer servir l'ordinador. Feu clic a %s quan " +"hàgiu\n" +"acabat.\n" "\n" -"Feu clic al botó \"%s\" per canviar l'intèrpret d'ordres (\"shell\") per " -"defecte\n" +"Feu clic al botó %s per canviar l'intèrpret d'ordres (shell) per defecte\n" "(bash) de l'usuari seleccionat. \n" "\n" -"Quan hagueu acabat d'afegir usuaris, se us proposarà decidir quin usuari\n" -"entrarà automàticament en el sistema en arrencar l'ordinador. Si us\n" +"Quan hàgiu acabat d'afegir-hi usuaris, se us proposarà decidir quin usuari\n" +"entrarà automàticament al sistema en arrencar l'ordinador. Si us\n" "interessa aquesta característica (i no us importa gaire la seguretat " "local), \n" -"trieu l'usuari i el gestor de finestres desitjat i feu clic a \"%s\".\n" -"Si no hi esteu interessat, desactiveu el quadre \"%s\"." +"trieu l'usuari i el gestor de finestres desitjat i feu clic a %s.\n" +"Si no hi esteu interessats, desactiveu el quadre %s." #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "User name" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Nom d'usuari" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "Accept user" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Accepta l'usuari" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "Do you want to use this feature?" -msgstr "Voleu utilitzar aquesta característica?" +msgstr "Voleu usar aquesta funció?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -155,13 +154,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -172,7 +174,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Aquestes són les particions de Linux existents que s'han detectat al disc " @@ -181,43 +184,38 @@ msgstr "" "adequades\n" "per a les instal·lacions més habituals. Si hi feu algun canvi, com a mínim " "heu\n" -"de definir una partició arrel (\"/\"). No trieu una partició massa petita " +"de definir una partició d'arrel (/). No trieu una partició massa petita " "perquè\n" "no podríeu instal·lar-hi prou programari. Si voleu emmagatzemar les dades en " "una\n" -"altra partició, us caldrà crear una partició \"/home\" (això només serà " +"altra partició, us caldrà crear una partició /home (això només serà " "possible\n" "si hi ha més d'una partició de Linux disponible).\n" "\n" -"Cada partició està identificada d'aquesta manera: \"Nom\", \"Capacitat\".\n" +"Cada partició està identificada d'aquesta manera: nom, capacitat.\n" "\n" -"\"Nom\" es compon de: \"tipus d'unitat de disc\", \"número d'unitat de disc" -"\",\n" -"\"número de la partició\" (per exemple, \"hda1\").\n" +"El nom es compon del tipus d'unitat de disc, el número d'unitat de disc i\n" +"el número de la partició (per exemple, hda1).\n" "\n" -"El \"Tipus d'unitat de disc\" és \"hd\" si la vostre unitat de disc és IDE i " -"\"sd\" si és SCSI.\n" +"El tipus d'unitat de disc és hd si la unitat de disc és IDE i sd si és " +"SCSI.\n" "\n" -"El \"Número de la unitat de disc\" és sempre una lletra després d'\"hd\" o " -"\"sd\".\n" +"El número de la unitat de disc és sempre una lletra després d'hd o sd.\n" "Per a unitats de disc IDE:\n" "\n" -" * \"a\" significa \"unitat de disc mestra en el controlador IDE primari\",\n" +" * \"a\" significa 'unitat de disc mestra al controlador IDE primari',\n" "\n" -" * \"b\" significa \"unitat de disc esclava en el controlador IDE primari" -"\",\n" +" * \"b\" significa 'unitat de disc esclava al controlador IDE primari',\n" "\n" -" * \"c\" significa \"unitat de disc mestra en el controlador IDE secundari" -"\",\n" +" * \"c\" significa 'unitat de disc mestra al controlador IDE secundari',\n" "\n" -" * \"d\" significa \"unitat de disc esclava en el controlador IDE secundari" -"\".\n" +" * \"d\" significa 'unitat de disc esclava al controlador IDE secundari'.\n" "\n" -"Amb unitats de disc SCSI, una \"a\" significa \"ID SCSI més baixa\",\n" -"una \"b\" significa \"segona ID SCSI més baixa\", etc." +"Amb unitats de disc SCSI, una a significa 'ID SCSI més baixa',\n" +"una b significa 'segona ID SCSI més baixa', etc." #: ../help.pm:88 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The Mageia installation is distributed on several CD-ROMs. If a\n" "selected package is located on another CD-ROM, DrakX will eject the current\n" @@ -226,12 +224,12 @@ msgid "" "installed." msgstr "" "La instal·lació del Mageia està repartida en diversos CD-ROM. Si\n" -"un dels paquets escollits està en un altre CD-ROM, DrakX expulsarà el CD\n" +"un dels paquets triats és en un altre CD-ROM, el DrakX expulsarà el CD\n" "actual i us demanarà que n'inseriu un altre. Si no teniu el CD necessari a\n" -"mà, premeu \"%s\" i els paquets corresponents no s'instal·laran." +"mà, premeu %s i els paquets corresponents no s'instal·laran." #: ../help.pm:95 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "It's now time to specify which programs you wish to install on your system.\n" "There are thousands of packages available for Mageia, and to make it\n" @@ -289,25 +287,25 @@ msgid "" "megabytes." msgstr "" "Ha arribat el moment d'indicar els programes que voleu instal·lar en el\n" -"sistema. Mageia té milers de paquets, i per facilitar-ne la\n" +"sistema. Mageia té milers de paquets, i per a facilitar-ne la\n" "gestió s'han distribuït en grups d'aplicacions similars.\n" "\n" "Mageia agrupa els paquets en quatre categories. Podeu mesclar i fer\n" "coincidir aplicacions de grups diversos, de manera que una instal·lació\n" -"d'``Estació de treball'' pot perfectament tenir instal·lades aplicacions\n" -"de la categoria ``Servidor'' \n" +"d'«Estació de treball» pot perfectament tenir instal·lades aplicacions\n" +"de la categoria «Servidor» \n" +"\n" " * \"%s\": si voleu utilitzar l'ordinador com a estació de treball,\n" "seleccioneu un o més grups de la categoria estació de treball.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": si penseu utilitzar la vostra màquina per programar, escolliu\n" -"els grups adients d'aquesta categoria. El grup especial \"LSB\"\n" +" * \"%s\": si penseu utilitzar la vostra màquina per a programar, escolliu\n" +"els grups adients d'aquesta categoria. El grup especial «LSB»\n" "configurarà el vostre sistema per tal que compleixi tant com sigui\n" -"possible amb les especificacions Linux Standard Base.\n" +"possible les especificacions Linux Standard Base.\n" "\n" -" Seleccionar el grup \"LSB\" també instal·larà un kernel \"2.4\",\n" -"en comptes del \"2.6\". Això es fa per assegurar que els sistema\n" -"compleixi al 100%% amb LSB. Si no seleccioneu el grup \"LSB\"\n" -"encara tindreu un sistema que compleix la LSB quasi al 100%%.\n" +" Si seleccioneu el grup «LSB» s'assegura que els sistema\n" +"compleix al 100%% amb LSB. Si no seleccioneu el grup «LSB»\n" +"encara tindreu un sistema que compleix la LSB gairebé al 100%%.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": si l'ordinador s'ha d'utilitzar com a servidor, seleccioneu\n" "quins dels serveis més habituals voleu instal·lar\n" @@ -319,28 +317,29 @@ msgstr "" "Si moveu el cursor per sobre d'un nom de grup veureu una breu explicació\n" "d'aquest grup.\n" "\n" -"Podeu marcar la casella \"%s\", que és útil si esteu familiaritzat amb els\n" -"diversos paquets o si voleu tenir un control total sobre el que " +"Podeu marcar la casella «%s», que és útil si esteu familiaritzats amb els\n" +"diversos paquets o si voleu tenir un control total sobre allò que " "s'instal·larà.\n" "\n" -"Si heu començat la instal·lació en el mode \"%s\", podeu desseleccionar \n" +"Si comenceu la instal·lació en el mode «%s», podeu desseleccionar \n" "tots els grups si voleu evitar que s'instal·li cap paquet nou. Això és\n" "útil per reparar o actualitzar un sistema existent.\n" +"\n" "Si desseleccioneu tots els grups quan estigueu fent una\n" "instal·lació normal (i no una actualització), se us presentarà un diàleg \n" "proposant-vos diferents opcions per a una instal·lació mínima:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": instal·la els mínims paquets necessaris per tenir un\n" +" * «%s»: instal·la els mínims paquets necessaris per a tenir un\n" "entorn gràfic funcional\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": instal·la el sistema base i les utilitats bàsiques amb la seva\n" -"documentació. Aquesta instal·lació és adequada per configurar un servidor;\n" +" * «%s»: instal·la el sistema base i les utilitats bàsiques amb la seva\n" +"documentació. Aquesta instal·lació és adequada per a configurar un " +"servidor;\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": instal·la el nombre mínim de paquets necessari per aconseguir un\n" +" * «%s»: instal·la el nombre mínim de paquets necessari per a aconseguir un\n" "sistema Linux operatiu, només amb una interfície de línia d'ordres. Aquesta\n" "instal·lació ocupa uns 65 MB." -# #: ../help.pm:149 ../help.pm:591 #, c-format msgid "Upgrade" @@ -351,14 +350,13 @@ msgstr "Actualitza" msgid "With basic documentation" msgstr "Amb la documentació bàsica" -# #: ../help.pm:149 #, c-format msgid "Truly minimal install" -msgstr "Instal·lació mínima real" +msgstr "Instal·lació realment mínima" #: ../help.pm:152 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you choose to install packages individually, the installer will present\n" "a tree containing all packages classified by groups and subgroups. While\n" @@ -403,19 +401,19 @@ msgstr "" "Cada cop que seleccioneu un paquet de l'arbre, apareixerà una descripció a \n" "la dreta que us informarà de la finalitat del paquet.\n" "\n" -"!! Si heu seleccionat un paquet de servidor, intencionadament o perquè\n" +"Atenció! Si heu seleccionat un paquet de servidor, intencionadament o " +"perquè\n" "formava part d'un grup, se us demanarà que confirmeu si realment voleu\n" -"instal·lar aquests servidors. Per defecte, Mageia " -"iniciaràautomàticament qualsevol servidor durant l'arrencada. Tot i que\n" +"instal·lar aquests servidors. Per defecte, Mageia iniciarà \n" +"automàticament qualsevol servidor durant l'arrencada. Tot i que\n" "siguin segurs i no tinguin cap problema conegut quan es publica la\n" "distribució, és totalment possible que es descobreixin forats de seguretat\n" -"després que aquesta versió de Mageia quedi finalitzada.\n" -"Si no sabeu què se suposa que fa un servei en particular, o per què s'està\n" -"instal·lant, feu clic a \"%s\". Per defecte, si feu clic a \"%s\" els " -"serveis\n" -"llistats s'instal·laran i s'iniciaran automàticament durant l'arrencada. !!\n" +"després que aquesta versió de Mageia quedi acabada.\n" +"Si no sabeu què se suposa que fa un servei particular, o per què s'està\n" +"instal·lant, feu clic a %s. Per defecte, si feu clic a %s els serveis\n" +"llistats s'instal·laran i s'iniciaran automàticament durant l'arrencada.\n" "\n" -"L'opció \"%s\" s'utilitza per inhabilitar el diàleg d'advertència que\n" +"L'opció %s s'usa per inhabilitar el diàleg d'advertència que\n" "apareix quan l'instal·lador selecciona automàticament un paquet per " "resoldre\n" "dependències. Alguns paquets estan relacionats els uns amb els\n" @@ -424,15 +422,15 @@ msgstr "" "calen\n" "per satisfer una dependència i completar la instal·lació satisfactòriament.\n" "\n" -"La diminuta icona d'un disquet al peu de la llista us permet carregar una\n" +"La icona diminuta d'un disquet al peu de la llista us permet carregar una\n" "llista de paquets creada en una instal·lació anterior. Això és útil si " "teniu\n" "un cert nombre d'ordinadors que voleu configurar de manera idèntica. Si feu\n" -"clic a aquesta icona se us demanarà que inseriu un disquet creat " +"clic en aquesta icona se us demanarà que inseriu un disquet creat " "anteriorment\n" "al final d'una altra instal·lació. Vegeu el segon suggeriment de l'últim " "pas\n" -"per saber com crear aquest disquet." +"per a saber com crear aquest disquet." #: ../help.pm:183 #, c-format @@ -462,22 +460,21 @@ msgstr "" "En aquest diàleg escollireu els serveis que voleu que s'iniciïn durant " "l'arrencada.\n" "\n" -"DrakX farà una llista de tots els serveis disponibles en la instal·lació " +"El DrakX farà una llista de tots els serveis disponibles a la instal·lació " "actual.\n" -"Reviseu-los amb cura i desmarqueu aquells que no siguin necessaris durant " +"Reviseu-los amb cura i desmarqueu els que no siguin necessaris durant " "l'arrencada.\n" "\n" "Podeu obtenir una explicació breu sobre un servei si el seleccioneu. Si no\n" -"esteu segur de la utilitat d'un servei, el més segur és deixar el " -"comportament\n" +"teniu clara la utilitat d'un servei, el més segur és deixar el comportament\n" "per defecte.\n" "\n" -"!! Aneu especialment amb cura en aquest pas si penseu utilitzar l'ordinador " +"Atenció! Aneu especialment amb cura en aquest pas si penseu usar l'ordinador " "com\n" "a servidor: segurament no voldreu iniciar serveis que no necessiteu.\n" "Recordeu que hi ha diversos serveis que poden ser perillosos si s'habiliten\n" "en un servidor. En general, seleccioneu només els serveis que realment " -"necessiteu. !!" +"necessiteu." #: ../help.pm:209 #, c-format @@ -495,26 +492,24 @@ msgid "" "choose a time server located near you. This option actually installs a time\n" "server which can be used by other machines on your local network as well." msgstr "" -"GNU/Linux gestiona l'hora en GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) i el tradueix a\n" +"El GNU / Linux gestiona l'hora en GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) i el tradueix a\n" "l'hora local d'acord amb la zona horària seleccionada. Si el rellotge de la\n" -"placa base indica l'hora local, podeu desactivar-ho desseleccionant \"%s\", " -"i\n" -"això informarà a GNU/Linux que el rellotge del sistema i el rellotge del\n" +"placa base indica l'hora local, podeu desactivar-ho desmarcant %s, i\n" +"això informarà al GNU / Linux que el rellotge del sistema i el rellotge del\n" "maquinari són a la mateixa zona horària. Això és convenient quan la màquina\n" "també té instal·lat un altre sistema operatiu.\n" "\n" -"L'opció \"%s\" regularà automàticament l'hora connectant-se a un servidor\n" +"L'opció %s regularà automàticament l'hora connectant-se a un servidor\n" "horari remot d'Internet. Per tal que funcioni aquesta funció us caldrà " "tenir\n" -"connexió a Internet. És millor triar un servidor que estigui ubicat a prop\n" -"vostre. De fet, aquesta opció instal·la un servidor d'hora que altres " -"màquines\n" -"de la vostra xarxa local també podran utilitzar." +"connexió a Internet. És millor triar un servidor que estigui ubicat a prop.\n" +"De fet, aquesta opció instal·la un servidor d'hora que altres màquines\n" +"de la vostra xarxa local també podran usar." #: ../help.pm:213 #, c-format msgid "Hardware clock set to GMT" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Rellotge de maquinari establert a GMT" #: ../help.pm:213 #, c-format @@ -538,14 +533,14 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " Normalment, l'instal·lador detectarà automàticament i configurarà la\n" "targeta gràfica que tingueu instal·lada a l'ordinador. Si no fos així, la\n" -"podeu seleccionar d'aquesta llista.\n" +"podeu seleccionar en aquesta llista.\n" "\n" " Cas que hi hagi diferents servidors per a la targeta, amb o sense\n" "acceleració 3D, se us demanarà que trieu el servidor que us sigui\n" "més convenient." #: ../help.pm:234 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "X (for X Window System) is the heart of the GNU/Linux graphical interface\n" "on which all the graphical environments (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep,\n" @@ -603,7 +598,7 @@ msgid "" "want to check \"%s\" if your machine is to act as a server, or if you were\n" "not successful in getting the display configured." msgstr "" -"X (per sistema X Window) és el cor de la interfície gràfica de GNU/Linux\n" +"X (el sistema X Window) és el cor de la interfície gràfica de GNU / Linux\n" "de què depenen tots els entorns gràfics (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep, \n" "WindowMaker, etc.) que venen amb Mageia.\n" "\n" @@ -613,11 +608,11 @@ msgstr "" "Targeta gràfica\n" "\n" " Normalment, l'instal·lador detectarà i configurarà automàticament la\n" -"targeta gràfica instal·lada a l'ordinador. Si no fos així, podeu escollir\n" -"de la llista la targeta que realment tingueu instal·lada.\n" +"targeta gràfica instal·lada a l'ordinador. Si no fos així, podeu triar a\n" +"la llista la targeta que realment tingueu instal·lada.\n" "\n" " En cas que hi hagi diferents servidors disponibles per a la vostra\n" -"targeta, amb o sense acceleració 3D, se us demanarà que escolliu el que\n" +"targeta, amb acceleració 3D o sense, se us demanarà que trieu el que\n" "més us convingui.\n" "\n" "\n" @@ -633,7 +628,7 @@ msgstr "" "Resolució\n" "\n" " Aquí podeu triar les resolucions i profunditats de color disponibles per\n" -"al vostre maquinari. Trieu la que us vagi més bé (tot i que podreu\n" +"al maquinari. Trieu la que us vagi més bé (tot i que podreu\n" "canviar-la després de la instal·lació). Al monitor veureu una mostra de la\n" "configuració triada.\n" "\n" @@ -641,21 +636,21 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Prova\n" "\n" -" Depenent del maquinari aquesta entrada pot no aparèixer.\n" +" Segons el maquinari aquesta entrada pot no aparèixer.\n" "\n" " El sistema intentarà obrir una pantalla gràfica amb la resolució\n" -"desitjada. Si podeu veure el missatge durant la prova i responeu \"%s\",\n" -"DrakX passarà al pas següent. Si no el podeu veure, vol dir que la\n" +"desitjada. Si podeu veure el missatge durant la prova i responeu %s,\n" +"el DrakX passarà al pas següent. Si no el podeu veure, vol dir que la\n" "configuració detectada automàticament no era del tot correcta i la prova\n" -"finalitzarà automàticament al cap de 12 segons, portant-vos de nou al menú.\n" -"Canvieu els paràmetres fins que obtingueu una pantalla gràfica correcta.\n" +"acabarà automàticament al cap de 12 segons, i us tornarà al menú.\n" +"Canvieu els paràmetres fins que obtingueu una visulització correcta.\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" "Opcions\n" "\n" " Aquí podeu decidir si voleu que l'ordinador canviï automàticament a una\n" -"interfície gràfica en arrencar. Òbviament, voldreu activar \"%s\" si\n" +"interfície gràfica en arrencar. Òbviament, voldreu activar %s si\n" "l'ordinador ha d'actuar com a servidor, o si no heu aconseguit\n" "configurar la pantalla." @@ -687,7 +682,7 @@ msgstr "" "Resolució\n" "\n" " Aquí podeu triar les resolucions i profunditats de color disponibles per\n" -"al vostre maquinari. Trieu la que us vagi més bé (tot i que podreu\n" +"al maquinari. Trieu la que us vagi més bé (tot i que podreu\n" "canviar-la després de la instal·lació). Al monitor veureu una mostra de la\n" "configuració triada." @@ -699,7 +694,7 @@ msgid "" "suits your needs." msgstr "" "En cas que hi hagi diferents servidors disponibles per a la vostra\n" -"targeta, amb o sense acceleració 3D, se us demanarà que escolliu\n" +"targeta, amb o sense acceleració 3D, se us demanarà que trieu\n" "el servidor que més us convingui." #: ../help.pm:311 @@ -715,20 +710,22 @@ msgstr "" "Opcions\n" "\n" " Aquí podeu decidir si voleu que l'ordinador canviï automàticament a una\n" -"interfície gràfica en arrencar. Òbviament, activareu \"%s\" si l'ordinador\n" +"interfície gràfica en arrencar. Òbviament, activareu %s si l'ordinador\n" "ha de ser un servidor, o si no heu pogut configurar la pantalla." #: ../help.pm:319 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -741,12 +738,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -769,7 +768,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -784,76 +784,77 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Ara és quan heu de decidir en quin lloc del vostre disc dur voleu\n" "instal·lar el sistema operatiu Mageia. Si el disc és buit,\n" -"o si un sistema operatiu existent n'utilitza tot l'espai disponible,\n" +"o si un sistema operatiu existent n'usa tot l'espai disponible,\n" "us caldrà particionar-lo. Bàsicament, particionar un disc dur\n" "consisteix a dividir-lo de manera lògica per crear espai on\n" -"instal·lar el nou sistema Mageia.\n" +"instal·lar el nou sistema.\n" "\n" "Atès que els efectes d'aquest procés solen ser irreversibles i poden\n" -"implicar pèrdua de dades si ja teniu un sistema operatiu instal·lat, el\n" -"particionament us pot espantar si sou un usuari sense experiència.\n" -"Per sort, DrakX inclou un auxiliar que simplifica aquest procés.\n" +"implicar pèrdua de dades si ja teniu un sistema operatiu instal·lat,\n" +"fer particions us pot espantar si sou un usuari sense experiència.\n" +"Per sort, el DrakX inclou un auxiliar que simplifica aquest procés.\n" "Abans de continuar, però, llegiu la resta d'aquesta secció i,\n" "sobre tot, preneu-vos el temps que calgui.\n" "\n" -"Segons la configuració del vostre disc dur, hi ha diverses opcions\n" +"Segons la configuració del disc dur, hi ha diverses opcions\n" "possibles:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": aquesta opció particionarà automàticament les unitats buides.\n" +" * %s: aquesta opció particionarà automàticament les unitats buides.\n" "Amb aquesta opció no se us farà cap pregunta més.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": l'auxiliar ha detectat una o més particions de Linux al vostre\n" -"disc dur. Si voleu utilitzar-les, escolliu aquesta opció. Se us demanarà\n" +" * %s: l'auxiliar ha detectat una o més particions de Linux al\n" +"disc dur. Si voleu usar-les, trieu aquesta opció. Se us demanarà\n" "que trieu els punts de muntatge associats a cadascuna de les particions.\n" "Els punts de muntatge existents se seleccionen per defecte, i en la\n" "majoria dels casos és bona idea conservar-los.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\" Si teniu el Microsoft Windows instal·lat al disc dur i n'ocupa\n" -"tot l'espai disponible, caldrà crear espai lliure per a GNU/Linux. Per\n" +" * %s: si teniu el Microsoft Windows instal·lat al disc dur i n'ocupa\n" +"tot l'espai disponible, caldrà crear espai lliure per a GNU / Linux. Per\n" "fer-ho, podeu suprimir la partició i les dades del Windows\n" -"(consulteu la solució ``Esborrar completament el disc'') o canviar\n" +"(consulteu la solució Esborrar completament el disc) o canviar\n" "la mida de la partició FAT o NTFS de Windows. Aquest canvi de mida\n" "es pot dur a terme sense cap pèrdua de dades, sempre que la\n" "partició de Windows hagi estat desfragmentada prèviament.\n" -"És molt recomanable, fer una còpia de seguretat de les dades.\n" -"Aquesta opció és la més recomanable si voleu utilitzar tant\n" +"És molt recomanable fer una còpia de seguretat de les dades.\n" +"Aquesta opció és la més recomanable si voleu usar tant\n" "Mageia com Microsoft Windows al mateix ordinador.\n" "\n" " Abans de decidir-vos per aquesta opció, penseu que en acabar la partició\n" -"de Microsoft Windows serà més petita que anteriorment. Tindreu menys espai\n" +"de Microsoft Windows serà més petita que abans. Tindreu menys espai\n" "lliure a Microsoft Windows per emmagatzemar-hi dades o instal·lar-hi més " "programari.\n" "\n" -" *\"%s\": si voleu suprimir totes les dades i particions que teniu al disc\n" -"dur i substituir-les pel sistema Mageia, podeu escollir aquesta\n" +" *%s: si voleu suprimir totes les dades i particions que teniu al disc\n" +"dur i substituir-les pel sistema Mageia, podeu triar aquesta\n" "opció. Aneu amb compte, però, perquè, un cop la confirmeu, no podreu\n" "fer-vos enrere.\n" "\n" -" ¡¡ Si trieu aquesta opció, totes les dades del disc s'esborraran !!.\n" +" Atenció! Si trieu aquesta opció, totes les dades del disc s'esborraran.\n" "\n" -" *\"%s\": aquesta opció apareix quan el disc dur està completament ple\n" -"per Microsoft Windows. Escollir aquest opció esborrarà tot el contingut del " +" *%s: aquesta opció apareix quan el disc dur està completament ocupat\n" +"pel Microsoft Windows. Triar aquest opció esborrarà tot el contingut del " "disc i\n" -"començarà de nou, particionant des de zero.\n" -" ¡¡ Si trieu aquesta opció, totes les dades del disc s'esborraran !!.\n" +"començarà de nou i es faran les particions des de zero.\n" +" Atenció! Si trieu aquesta opció, totes les dades del disc s'esborraran.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": si voleu particionar el disc dur manualment, podeu triar aquesta\n" +" * %s: si voleu fer les particions del disc dur manualment, podeu triar " +"aquesta\n" "opció. Aneu amb compte: és una opció molt potent però també perillosa, ja\n" -"que podeu perdre fàcilment totes les dades. Per tant, aquesta opció només " +"que podeu perdre'n fàcilment totes les dades. Per tant, aquesta opció només " "és\n" "recomanable si heu fet abans alguna cosa similar i teniu una mica\n" "d'experiència. Trobareu més instruccions sobre la utilitat DiskDrake a la\n" -"secció ``Gestió de les particions'' de la ``Guia d'iniciació''." +"secció Gestió de les particions de la Guia d'iniciació." #: ../help.pm:377 #, c-format msgid "Use existing partition" -msgstr "Utilitza les particions existents" +msgstr "Usa les particions existents" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format msgid "Use the free space on the Microsoft Windows® partition" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Usa l'espai lliure a la partició Microsoft Windows®" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format @@ -897,63 +898,64 @@ msgid "" "\"mformat a:\", or \"fdformat /dev/fd0\" followed by \"mkfs.vfat\n" "/dev/fd0\"." msgstr "" -"Ja ho teniu. S'ha completat la instal·lació i el vostre sistema GNU/Linux\n" -"està preparat per fer-se servir. Simplement premeu \"%s\" per reiniciar el\n" +"Ja ho teniu. S'ha completat la instal·lació i el sistema GNU / Linux\n" +"està preparat per funcionar. Simplement premeu %s per reiniciar el\n" "sistema. No oblideu treure la font d'instal·lació (CD-ROM o disquet).\n" -"La primera cosa que veureu, després que l'ordinador hagi finalitzat les\n" +"La primera cosa que veureu, després que l'ordinador hagi acabat les\n" "comprovacions de maquinari, és el menú del carregador d'arrencada, que us\n" "deixa triar el sistema operatiu amb què voleu iniciar.\n" "\n" -"El botó \"%s\" mostra dos botons més per:\n" +"El botó %s mostra dos botons més:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": per crear un disquet d'instal·lació que realitzarà\n" +" * %s: per crear un disquet d'instal·lació que farà\n" "automàticament una instal·lació completa sense l'ajuda d'un operador,\n" "semblant a la instal·lació que acabeu de configurar.\n" "\n" " Tingueu en compte que hi ha dues opcions diferents després de fer clic al " "botó:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". Aquesta és una instal·lació parcialment automatitzada; el pas\n" -"de particionament és l'únic procediment interactiu.\n" +" * %s: aquesta és una instal·lació parcialment automatitzada; el pas\n" +"de fer les particions és l'únic procediment interactiu.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". Instal·lació completament automatitzada: el disc dur es\n" +" * %s: instal·lació completament automatitzada: el disc dur es\n" "reescriu completament i totes les dades es perden.\n" "\n" -" Aquesta característica és força útil quan es fa una instal·lació a un\n" +" Aquesta característica és força útil quan es fa una instal·lació en un\n" "cert nombre d'ordinadors similars. En trobareu més informació a la secció\n" "d'instal·lació automàtica del nostre lloc web.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": desa una llista dels paquets seleccionats en aquesta\n" -"instal·lació. Per utilitzar aquesta selecció en una altra instal·lació,\n" +" * %s: desa una llista dels paquets seleccionats en aquesta\n" +"instal·lació. Per usar aquesta selecció en una altra instal·lació,\n" "inseriu el disquet i inicieu la instal·lació. A l'indicador, premeu la\n" -"tecla F1, i escriviu >>linux defcfg=\"floppy\"<< i premeu la tecla [Enter].\n" +"tecla F1, i escriviu >>linux defcfg=\"floppy\"<< i premeu la tecla de " +"retorn.\n" "\n" -"(*) Cal un disquet formatejat amb FAT. Per crear-ne un a GNU/Linux, \n" -"escriviu \"mformat a:\", o \"fdformat /dev/fd0\" seguit de\n" +"(*) Cal un disquet formatat amb FAT. Per crear-ne un a GNU / Linux, \n" +"escriviu \"mformat a:\" o \"fdformat /dev/fd0\" seguit de\n" "\"mkfs.vfat /dev/fd0\"." #: ../help.pm:412 #, c-format msgid "Generate auto-install floppy" -msgstr "Genera un disquet per a la instal·lació automàtica" +msgstr "Genera un disquet per a instal·lació automàtica" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Replay" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Repeteix" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Automated" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Automatitzat" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Save packages selection" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Desa la selecció de paquets" #: ../help.pm:408 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you chose to reuse some legacy GNU/Linux partitions, you may wish to\n" "reformat some of them and erase any data they contain. To do so, please\n" @@ -977,31 +979,28 @@ msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you wish to select partitions which will be checked for\n" "bad blocks on the disk." msgstr "" -"Per poder utilitzar les particions que s'acaben de definir cal formatar-les\n" -"(la formatació consisteix a crear-hi un sistema de fitxers).\n" -"\n" -"En aquest punt, potser voldreu tornar a formatar algunes de les particions\n" -"existents per eliminar les dades que contenen. Si és així, seleccioneu\n" -"també aquestes particions.\n" +"Si heu triat la reutilització d'algunes de les particions de GNU / Linux,\n" +"potser voleu reformatar-ne algunes i esborrar les dades que contenen.\n" +"Per a fer-ho, seleccioneu també aquestes particions.\n" "\n" "Tingueu en compte que no cal tornar a formatar totes les particions que ja\n" "existien; heu de tornar a formatar les particions que continguin el sistema\n" -"operatiu (com ara \"/\", \"/usr\" o \"/var\"), però no les que contenen\n" -"dades que voleu conservar (habitualment, \"/home\").\n" +"operatiu (com ara /, /usr o /var), però no les que contenen\n" +"dades que voleu conservar (habitualment /home).\n" "\n" -"Aneu amb compte en seleccionar les particions; després de la formatació,\n" +"Aneu amb compte a l'hora de seleccionar les particions; després de la " +"formatació,\n" "totes les dades s'hauran suprimit i no en podreu recuperar cap.\n" "\n" -"Feu clic a \"%s\" quan estigueu a punt per formatar les particions.\n" +"Feu clic a %s quan estigueu a punt per formatar les particions.\n" "\n" -"Feu clic a \"%s\" si voleu seleccionar una altra partició per instal·lar\n" +"Feu clic a %s si voleu seleccionar una altra partició per instal·lar\n" "el nou sistema Mageia.\n" "\n" -"Feu clic a \"%s\" si voleu seleccionar particions on cercar-hi blocs " -"defectuosos." +"Feu clic a %s si voleu seleccionar particions on cercar-hi blocs defectuosos." #: ../help.pm:437 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "By the time you install Mageia, it's likely that some packages will\n" "have been updated since the initial release. Bugs may have been fixed,\n" @@ -1015,20 +1014,21 @@ msgid "" "will appear: review the selection, and press \"%s\" to retrieve and install\n" "the selected package(s), or \"%s\" to abort." msgstr "" -"Ara esteu instal·lant Mageia, és probable que alguns paquets\n" +"En el moment d'instal·lar Mageia, és probable que alguns paquets\n" "hagin estat actualitzats des de la data de llançament. Alguns errors poden\n" -"haver estat resolts, i problemes de seguretat poden estar ja corregits.\n" +"haver estat resolts, i alguns problemes de seguretat poden estar ja " +"corregits.\n" "Per beneficiar-vos d'aquestes actualitzacions, les podeu baixar d'Internet.\n" -"Trieu \"%s\" si teniu una connexió a Internet operativa, o \"%s\" si\n" +"Marqueu %s si teniu una connexió a Internet operativa, o bé %s si\n" "preferiu instal·lar-les més tard.\n" "\n" -"Si trieu \"%s\" apareixerà una llista de llocs des d'on podeu baixar les\n" -"actualitzacions. Escolliu la ubicació més propera. Aleshores, apareixerà\n" -"un arbre de selecció de paquets: comproveu la selecció i premeu \"%s\" per\n" -"baixar i instal·lar els paquets seleccionats, o \"%s\" per abandonar." +"Si trieu %s apareixerà una llista de llocs des d'on podeu baixar les\n" +"actualitzacions. Trieu la ubicació més propera. Aleshores, apareixerà\n" +"un arbre de selecció de paquets: comproveu la selecció i premeu %s per\n" +"baixar i instal·lar els paquets seleccionats, o bé %s per sortir-ne." #: ../help.pm:450 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, DrakX will allow you to choose the security level you desire\n" "for your machine. As a rule of thumb, the security level should be set\n" @@ -1049,11 +1049,11 @@ msgstr "" "Tanmateix, un nivell alt de seguretat sovint comporta una disminució de la\n" "facilitat d'ús.\n" "\n" -"Si no sabeu quin escollir, deixeu l'opció per defecte.. Podreu canviar\n" +"Si no sabeu quin triar, deixeu l'opció per defecte.. Podreu canviar\n" "el nivell de seguretat més tard amb l'eina draksec del\n" "Centre de Control Mageia.\n" "\n" -"Ompliu el camp \"%s\" amb l'adreça electrònica de la persona responsable\n" +"Ompliu el camp %s amb l'adreça electrònica de la persona responsable\n" "de la seguretat. Els missatges de seguretat s'enviaran a aquesta adreça." #: ../help.pm:461 @@ -1062,23 +1062,26 @@ msgid "Security Administrator" msgstr "Administrador de seguretat" #: ../help.pm:464 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1101,7 +1104,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1109,7 +1113,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1128,105 +1133,91 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" -"Ara és quan heu de decidir quina(es) partició(ns) voleu utilitzar per\n" +"Ara és quan heu de decidir quines particions voleu usar per\n" "instal·lar el sistema Mageia. Si ja s'han definit les particions\n" -"en una instal·lació anterior de GNU/Linux o mitjançant una altra eina de\n" -"particionament, podeu utilitzar les particions existents. En cas contrari,\n" -"s'han de definir particions al disc dur.\n" +"en una instal·lació anterior de GNU / Linux o mitjançant una altra eina de\n" +"partiment, podeu usar les particions existents. En cas contrari,\n" +"cal definir particions al disc dur.\n" "\n" "Per crear particions, primer heu de seleccionar un disc dur. Podeu\n" -"seleccionar el disc que s'ha de particionar fent clic a ``hda'' per a la\n" -"primera unitat IDE, ``hdb'' per a la segona, ``sda'' per a la primera " -"unitat\n" +"seleccionar el disc que s'ha de particionar fent clic a hda per a la\n" +"primera unitat IDE, hdb per a la segona, sda per a la primera unitat\n" "SCSI, etc.\n" "\n" -"Per particionar el disc dur seleccionat, podeu utilitzar aquestes opcions:\n" +"Per particionar el disc dur seleccionat, podeu usar aquestes opcions:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": aquesta opció suprimeix totes les particions que hi ha al\n" +" * %s: aquesta opció suprimeix totes les particions que hi ha al\n" "disc dur seleccionat.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": aquesta opció us permet crear automàticament les particions\n" -"ext3 i d'intercanvi en l'espai lliure del disc dur.\n" +" * %s: aquesta opció us permet crear automàticament les particions\n" +"ext4 i d'intercanvi en l'espai lliure del disc dur.\n" "\n" -"\"%s\": dóna accés a funcions addicionals:\n" +"*%s: dóna accés a funcions addicionals:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": desa la taula de particions en un disquet. És útil per a una\n" +" * %s: desa la taula de particions en un disquet. És útil per a una\n" "recuperació posterior de la taula de particions si fos necessari. És molt\n" -"recomanable que efectueu aquesta operació.\n" +"recomanable que feu aquesta operació.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": permet restaurar d'un disquet una taula de particions que hi\n" +" * %s: permet restaurar d'un disquet una taula de particions que hi\n" "hagueu desat prèviament.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": si la taula de particions està malmesa, podeu provar de\n" -"recuperar-la utilitzant aquesta opció. Aneu amb compte i recordeu que no\n" +" * %s: si la taula de particions està malmesa, podeu provar de\n" +"recuperar-la usant aquesta opció. Aneu amb compte i recordeu que no\n" "sempre funciona.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": descarta tots els canvis fets i torna a carregar la taula\n" +" * %s: descarta tots els canvis fets i torna a carregar la taula\n" "de particions original.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": si desseleccioneu aquesta opció fareu que els usuaris hagin\n" +" * %s: si desseleccioneu aquesta opció fareu que els usuaris hagin\n" "de muntar i desmuntar manualment les unitats de suports extraïbles, com ara\n" "els disquets i els CD-ROM.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": utilitzeu aquesta opció si voleu utilitzar un auxiliar per\n" -"particionar el vostre disc dur. Es recomana que l'utilitzeu si no teniu\n" -"sòlids coneixements sobre particionament.\n" +" * %s: useu aquesta opció si voleu un auxiliar per\n" +"particionar el disc dur. Es recomana que l'useu si no teniu\n" +"coneixements sòlids sobre particions.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": utilitzeu aquesta opció per cancel·lar els canvis.\n" +" * %s: useu aquesta opció per cancel·lar els canvis.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": permet accions addicionals en les particions (tipus,\n" +" * %s: permet accions addicionals en les particions (tipus,\n" "opcions, format) i dóna més informació sobre el disc dur.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": quan hagueu acabat de particionar el disc dur, aquesta opció\n" +" * %s: quan hàgiu acabat de partir el disc dur, aquesta opció\n" "desarà els canvis al disc.\n" "\n" "En definir la mida d'una partició, podeu acabar d'afinar-la mitjançant\n" -"les tecles de fletxa del teclat.\n" +"les tecles de fletxes del teclat.\n" " \n" "Nota: podeu accedir a qualsevol opció mitjançant el teclat. Moveu-vos per\n" -"les particions amb les tecles Tab i Fletxa amunt/Fletxa avall.\n" -"\n" -"Quan seleccioneu una partició, podeu utilitzar:\n" +"les particions amb les tecles Tab i Fletxa amunt / Fletxa avall.\n" "\n" -" * Ctrl+c per crear una nova partició (quan se n'ha seleccionat una de " -"buida)\n" +"Quan seleccioneu una partició, podeu usar el següent:\n" "\n" -" * Ctrl+d per suprimir una partició\n" +" * Ctrl+c per crear una partició nova (quan se n'ha seleccionat una de " +"buida).\n" "\n" -" * Ctrl+m per definir el punt de muntatge\n" +" * Ctrl+d per suprimir una partició.\n" "\n" -"Per a més informació sobre els diferents sistemes de fitxers disponibles,\n" -"llegiu el capítol sobre ext2FS del ``Manual de Referència''.\n" +" * Ctrl+m per definir el punt de muntatge.\n" "\n" -"Si esteu fent la instal·lació en un ordinador PPC, voldreu crear una\n" -"petita partició ``bootstrap'' HFS d'un mínim d'1 MB per a ús del carregador\n" -"d'arrencada yaboot. Si decidiu fer-la una mica més gran, per exemple de\n" -"50 MB, us serà d'utilitat per emmagatzemar un nucli de recanvi i imatges\n" -"del disc RAM per a situacions d'emergència durant l'arrencada." +"Per a més informació sobre els diversos sistemes de fitxers disponibles,\n" +"llegiu el capítol sobre ext2FS del Manual de Referència.\n" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Save partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Desa la taula de particions" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Restore partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Recupera la taula de particions" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Rescue partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Rescata la taula de particions" -# #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Removable media auto-mounting" @@ -1235,12 +1226,12 @@ msgstr "Muntatge automàtic dels dispositius extraïbles" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Wizard" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Auxiliar" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Undo" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Desfés" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1248,22 +1239,26 @@ msgid "Toggle between normal/expert mode" msgstr "Commuta entre els modes normal i expert" #: ../help.pm:536 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1274,45 +1269,44 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "S'ha detectat més d'una partició de Microsoft a la unitat de disc.\n" -"Si us plau, trieu quina d'elles voleu redimensionar per instal·lar el nou\n" +"Si us plau, trieu quina voleu canviar de mida per instal·lar-hi el nou\n" "sistema operatiu Mageia.\n" "\n" -"Cada partició està identificada d'aquesta manera: \"Nom Linux\",\n" -"\"Nom Windows\" \"Capacitat\".\n" +"Cada partició està identificada d'aquesta manera: nom de Linux,\n" +"nom de Windows, capacitat.\n" "\n" -"\"Nom Linux\" es compon de: \"tipus d'unitat de disc dur\",\n" -"\"número d'unitat de disc dur\", \"número de la partició\"\n" -"(per exemple, \"hda1\").\n" +"El Nom Linux es compon del tipus d'unitat de disc dur,\n" +"el número d'unitat de disc dur i el número de la partició\n" +"(per exemple: hda1).\n" "\n" -"\"Tipus d'unitat de disc dur\" és \"hd\" si la vostre unitat de disc dur és\n" -"IDE i \"sd\" si és SCSI.\n" +"El tipus d'unitat de disc dur és hd si la unitat de disc dur és\n" +"IDE i sd si és SCSI.\n" "\n" -"\"Número de la unitat de disc dur\" és sempre una lletra després d'\"hd\" o\n" -"\"sd\". Amb unitats de disc IDE:\n" +"El número de la unitat de disc dur és sempre una lletra després d'hd o\n" +"bé sd. Amb unitats de disc IDE:\n" "\n" -" * \"a\" significa \"unitat de disc mestra en el controlador IDE primari\",\n" +" * «a» significa 'unitat de disc mestra al controlador IDE primari',\n" "\n" -" * \"b\" significa \"unitat de disc esclava en el controlador IDE primari" -"\",\n" +" * «b» significa 'unitat de disc esclava al controlador IDE primari',\n" "\n" -" * \"c\" significa \"unitat de disc mestra en el controlador IDE secundari" -"\",\n" +" * «c» significa 'unitat de disc mestra al controlador IDE secundari',\n" "\n" -" * \"d\" significa \"unitat de disc esclava en el controlador IDE secundari" -"\".\n" +" * «d» significa 'unitat de disc esclava al controlador IDE secundari'.\n" "\n" -"Amb les unitats de disc SCSI, una \"a\" significa \"ID SCSI més baixa\",\n" -"una \"b\" significa \"segona ID SCSI més baixa\", etc.\n" +"Amb les unitats de disc SCSI, una a significa 'ID SCSI més baixa',\n" +"una b significa 'segona ID SCSI més baixa', etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Nom Windows\" és la lletra de la vostra unitat de disc sota Windows (el\n" -"primer disc o partició s'anomena \"C:\")." +"El nom de Windows és la lletra de la vostra unitat de disc a Windows (el\n" +"primer disc o partició s'anomena C:)." #: ../help.pm:567 #, c-format @@ -1322,13 +1316,13 @@ msgid "" "the\n" "list shown, click on the \"%s\" button to get the complete country list." msgstr "" -"\"%s\": comproveu que la selecció del país és correcta. Si no sou a\n" -"aquest país, feu clic al botó \"%s\" i seleccioneu-ne un altre.\n" -"Si el vostre país no és a la primera llista, feu clic al botó \"%s\" per\n" +"%s: comproveu que la selecció del país és correcta. Si no sou en\n" +"aquest país, feu clic al botó %s i seleccioneu-ne un altre.\n" +"Si el país no és a la primera llista, feu clic al botó %s per\n" "obtenir una llista de països completa." #: ../help.pm:572 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "This step is activated only if an existing GNU/Linux partition has been\n" "found on your machine.\n" @@ -1339,7 +1333,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1351,30 +1346,30 @@ msgid "" "running version \"8.1\" or later. Performing an upgrade on versions prior\n" "to Mageia version \"8.1\" is not recommended." msgstr "" -"Aquest pas només s'activa si s'ha trobat una partició GNU/Linux antiga\n" -"al vostre ordinador.\n" +"Aquest pas només s'activa si s'ha trobat una partició GNU / Linux existent\n" +"a l'ordinador.\n" "\n" -"DrakX necessita saber si voleu realitzar una instal·lació nova o\n" +"El DrakX necessita saber si voleu fer una instal·lació nova o bé\n" "una actualització d'un sistema Mageia existent:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": aquesta opció destrueix gairebé del tot el sistema antic. Si\n" +" * %s: aquesta opció destrueix gairebé del tot el sistema existent. Si\n" "voleu canviar les particions dels discs durs, o el sistema de fitxers,\n" -"heu d'utilitzar aquesta opció. No obstant això, i depenent de l'esquema de\n" -"particionament que tingueu, podeu evitar que part de les dades existents\n" -"(per exemple els directoris \"home\") se sobreescriguin.\n" +"heu d'usar aquesta opció. No obstant això, i depenent de l'esquema de\n" +"particions que tingueu, podeu evitar que part de les dades existents\n" +"(per exemple els directoris home) se sobreescriguin.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": aquest tipus d'instal·lació us permet actualitzar els paquets\n" +" * %s: aquest tipus d'instal·lació us permet actualitzar els paquets\n" "que ja estan instal·lats al sistema Mageia. L'esquema de\n" -"particionament actual i les dades d'usuari no queden afectades. La\n" +"particions actual i les dades d'usuari no queden afectades. La\n" "majoria de les altres fases de configuració queden disponibles, de\n" "manera similar a una instal·lació estàndard.\n" "\n" -"L'opció “Actualitza” ha de funcionar correctament en sistemes Mandriva\n" -"Linux amb la versió \"8.1\" o posteriors. No es recomana realitzar una\n" -"actualització en versions de Mageia anteriors a la \"8.1\"." +"L'opció Actualitza hauria de funcionar correctament en sistemes Mandriva\n" +"Linux amb la versió 8.1 o posteriors. No es recomana fer una\n" +"actualització en versions de Mandriva anteriors a la 8.1." #: ../help.pm:594 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Depending on the language you chose (), DrakX will automatically select a\n" "particular type of keyboard configuration. Check that the selection suits\n" @@ -1393,28 +1388,26 @@ msgid "" "dialog will allow you to choose the key binding which will switch the\n" "keyboard between the Latin and non-Latin layouts." msgstr "" -"DrakX seleccionarà automàticament la configuració de teclat correcta\n" -"segons l'idioma que hagueu escollit a Secció. Comproveu que la selecció\n" -"us vagi bé o escolliu una altra configuració de teclat.\n" -"\n" -"Tanmateix, pot ser que tingueu un teclat que no correspongués exactament al\n" -"vostre idioma: per exemple, si sou un suís que parla anglès, potser teniu " -"un\n" -"teclat suís. O, si parleu anglès però viviu al Quebec, us podeu trobar en " -"la\n" -"mateixa situació i el vostre teclat no coincidirà amb el vostre idioma. En\n" -"tots dos casos, aquesta fase de la instal·lació us permetrà triar un teclat\n" +"El DrakX seleccionarà automàticament la configuració de teclat correcta\n" +"segons la llengua que hàgiu triat. Comproveu que la selecció\n" +"us vagi bé o trieu una altra configuració de teclat.\n" +"\n" +"Tanmateix, pot ser que tingueu un teclat que no correspongui exactament\n" +"amb la llengua: per exemple, si sou un suís que parla anglès, potser teniu\n" +"un teclat suís. O, si parleu anglès però viviu al Quebec, us podeu trobar\n" +"en la mateixa situació i el teclat no coincidirà amb la llengua. En tots " +"dos\n" +"casos, aquesta fase de la instal·lació us permetrà triar un teclat\n" "adequat d'una llista.\n" "\n" -"Feu clic al botó \"%s\" per veure la llista completa de teclats " -"disponibles.\n" +"Feu clic al botó %s per veure la llista completa de teclats disponibles.\n" "\n" "Si trieu una disposició de teclat basada en un alfabet no llatí, el diàleg\n" -"següent us permetrà escollir la tecla que servirà per canviar entre les\n" +"següent us permetrà triar la tecla que servirà per canviar entre les\n" "configuracions llatina i no llatina." #: ../help.pm:612 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The first step is to choose your preferred language.\n" "\n" @@ -1456,43 +1449,43 @@ msgid "" "by the entire system. Running the command as a regular user will only\n" "change the language settings for that particular user." msgstr "" -"L'idioma preferit que trieu afectarà a l'idioma de la documentació,\n" -"l'instal·lador i a tot el sistema en general. Seleccioneu primer la\n" -"regió on us trobeu i després l'idioma que parleu.\n" +"El primer pas consisteix a triar la llengua preferida.\n" "\n" -"Si feu clic al botó \"%s\" podreu seleccionar altres idiomes que vulgueu\n" -"instal·lar a la vostra estació de treball. S'instal·laran els fitxers\n" -"d'idioma específics de la documentació i de les aplicacions. Per exemple,\n" +"La llengua que trieu afectarà la llengua de la documentació,\n" +"l'instal·lador i tot el sistema en general. Seleccioneu primer la\n" +"regió on us trobeu i després la llengua que parleu.\n" +"\n" +"Si feu clic al botó %s podreu seleccionar altres llengües que vulgueu\n" +"instal·lar a l'estació de treball. S'instal·laran els fitxers de llengua\n" +"específics de la documentació i de les aplicacions. Per exemple,\n" "si heu de tenir usuaris espanyols a l'ordinador, podeu triar l'anglès com a\n" -"idioma per defecte a la vista d'arbre i marcar \"%s\" a la secció Avançat.\n" +"llengua per defecte a la vista d'arbre i %s a la secció Avançat.\n" "\n" -"En quant al suport UTF-8 (unicode): Unicode és una nova codificació de\n" -"caràcters que cobreix tots els idiomes existents. El suport complet a\n" -"GNU/Linux encara està sota desenvolupament. Per aquesta raó, Mageia\n" +"Quant al suport UTF-8 (unicode): Unicode és una codificació nova de\n" +"caràcters que cobreix totes les llengües existents. El suport complet a\n" +"GNU / Linux encara està en desenvolupament. Per aquesta raó, Mageia\n" "l'usarà o no depenent de les opcions que esculli l'usuari:\n" "\n" -" * Si escolliu un idioma amb una codificació existent forta(idiomes\n" -"llatins, rus, japonès, xinès, coreà, thai, grec, turc, la majoria dels\n" -"idiomes iso-8859-2), la codificació existent s'usarà per defecte;\n" +" * Si trieu una llengua amb una codificació existent forta (llengües\n" +"llatines, rus, japonès, xinès, coreà, thai, grec, turc, la majoria de les\n" +"llengües iso-8859-2), la codificació existent s'usarà per defecte.\n" "\n" -" * La resta d'idiomes usaran unicode per defecte;\n" +" * La resta de llengües usaran unicode per defecte.\n" "\n" -" * Si s'instal·len dos o més idiomes i aquests idiomes no usen la mateixa\n" -"codificació, llavors s'usarà unicode per tot el sistema;\n" +" * Si s'instal·len dues o més llengües i no usen la mateixa\n" +"codificació, llavors s'usarà unicode per a tot el sistema.\n" "\n" -" * Finalment, es pot forçar l'ús de unicode si s'escull la opció\"%s\"\n" -"independentment dels idiomes escollits.\n" +" * Finalment, es pot forçar l'ús d'unicode si es tria la opció %s\n" +"independentment de les llengües triades.\n" "\n" -"Noteu que no esteu limitats a escollir només un idioma addicional. Podeu\n" -"triar diversos idiomes addicionals, i fins i tot instal·lar-los tots\n" -"activant la casella \"%s\". Si habiliteu un idioma esteu instal·lant les\n" -"traduccions, els tipus de lletra, els verificadors ortogràfics, etc. " -"d'aquest idioma.\n" +"Noteu que no esteu limitats a escollir només una llengua addicional. Podeu\n" +"triar-ne diverses, i fins i tot instal·lar-les totes activant la casella\n" +"%s. Si habiliteu una llengua n'esteu instal·lant les\n" +"traduccions, els tipus de lletra, els verificadors ortogràfics, etc.\n" "\n" -"Per passar d'un dels idiomes a un altre, podeu executar com a \"root\"\n" -"l'ordre \"/usr/sbin/localedrake\" per canviar l'idioma de tot el sistema. " -"Si\n" -"l'executeu com a usuari normal, només es canviarà l'idioma d'aquest\n" +"Per passar d'una llengua a una altra, podeu executar com a arrel\n" +"l'ordre /usr/sbin/localedrake per canviar la llengua de tot el sistema.\n" +"Si l'executeu com a usuari normal, només es canviarà la d'aquest\n" "usuari concret." #: ../help.pm:650 @@ -1503,10 +1496,10 @@ msgstr "Espanyol" #: ../help.pm:643 #, c-format msgid "Use Unicode by default" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Usa unicode per defecte" #: ../help.pm:646 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Usually, DrakX has no problems detecting the number of buttons on your\n" "mouse. If it does, it assumes you have a two-button mouse and will\n" @@ -1541,32 +1534,34 @@ msgid "" "Test the buttons and check that the mouse pointer moves on-screen as you\n" "move your mouse about." msgstr "" -"DrakX generalment detecta el nombre de botons que té el vostre ratolí.\n" +"El DrakX generalment detecta el nombre de botons que té el ratolí.\n" "Si no pot, assumeix que teniu un ratolí de dos botons i el configurarà per\n" -"emular el tercer botó. Es pot ``prémer' ' el tercer botó d'un ratolí de dos\n" -"botons fent clic simultàniament als botons dret i esquerre. DrakX\n" -"detectarà automàticament si el ratolí utilitza la interfície PS/2, sèrie o " -"USB.\n" +"emular el tercer botó. Es pot prémer el tercer botó d'un ratolí de dos\n" +"botons fent clic simultàniament als botons dret i esquerre. El DrakX\n" +"detectarà automàticament si el ratolí usa la interfície PS/2, sèrie o USB.\n" "\n" "En cas que tingueu un ratolí de 3 botons sense rodeta, podeu escollir\n" -"\"%s\". DrakX configurarà el ratolí per tal de simular la rodeta,\n" +"%s. El DrakX configurarà el ratolí per tal de simular la rodeta,\n" "per fer-ho premeu el botó central i moveu el ratolí a dalt i a baix.\n" "\n" "Si per alguna raó voleu especificar un altre tipus de ratolí,\n" "seleccioneu-lo a la llista.\n" "\n" -"Si escolliu un ratolí diferent del ratolí per defecte, es mostrarà una\n" -"pantalla de prova. Utilitzeu els botons i la roda per verificar que la\n" +"Podeu seleccionar l'entrada %s per a triar un ratolí de tipus\n" +"genèric, que funcionarà amb gairebé qualsevol ratolí.\n" +"\n" +"Si trieu un ratolí diferent del ratolí per defecte, es mostrarà una\n" +"pantalla de prova. Useu els botons i la roda per verificar que la\n" "configuració és correcta i que el ratolí funciona bé. Si el ratolí no\n" -"funciona bé, premeu la barra d'espai o la tecla [Intro] per cancel·lar la\n" +"funciona bé, premeu la barra d'espai o la tecla de retorn per cancel·lar la\n" "prova i tornar a la llista.\n" "\n" -"De vegaDES, la roda del ratolí no es detecta automàticament. En aquest cas,\n" +"De vegades, la roda del ratolí no es detecta automàticament. En aquest cas,\n" "haureu de seleccionar-lo a la llista. Assegureu-vos de triar el que\n" -"correspon al port a què esta connectat el ratolí. Després de seleccionar un\n" -"ratolí i prémer el botó \"%s\", a la pantalla apareixerà un ratolí. Mogueu " -"la\n" -"roda del ratolí per assegurar-vos que s'ha activat correctament, comprovant\n" +"correspon al port on està connectat el ratolí. Després de seleccionar un\n" +"ratolí i prémer el botó %s, a la pantalla apareixerà un ratolí. Moveu la\n" +"roda del ratolí per assegurar-vos que s'ha activat correctament, i " +"comproveu\n" "que es mou també a la pantalla; després comproveu els botons i que el " "cursor\n" "de la pantalla es mou quan moveu el ratolí." @@ -1587,11 +1582,11 @@ msgid "" "Please select the correct port. For example, the \"COM1\" port under\n" "Windows is named \"ttyS0\" under GNU/Linux." msgstr "" -"Si us plau, seleccioneu el port correcte. Per exemple, el port \"COM1\" a\n" -"Windows s'anomena \"ttyS0\" a GNU/Linux." +"Si us plau, seleccioneu el port correcte. Per exemple, el port COM1 a\n" +"Windows s'anomena ttyS0 a GNU / Linux." #: ../help.pm:684 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "A boot loader is a little program which is started by the computer at boot\n" "time. It's responsible for starting up the whole system. Normally, the boot\n" @@ -1610,24 +1605,26 @@ msgid "" "you\n" "know what you're doing." msgstr "" -"LILO i GRUB són carregadors d'arrencada de GNU/Linux. Normalment,\n" -"aquesta fase es realitza de manera totalment automàtica. DrakX analitzarà\n" -"el sector d'arrencada del disc i actuarà conforme al que hi trobi:\n" +"Un carregador d'arrencada és un petit programa que l'ordinador executa\n" +"durant l'arrencada. És l'encarregat d'iniciar tot el sistema. Normalment, \n" +"la instal·lació del carregador d'arrencada es fa de manera \n" +"totalment automàtica. El DrakX analitzarà el sector d'arrencada del disc \n" +"i actuarà conforme al que hi trobi:\n" "\n" -" * si troba un sector d'arrencada del Windows, el reemplaçarà amb un sector\n" -"d'arrencada de GRUB/LILO. D'aquesta manera podreu carregar GNU/Linux\n" -"o un altre SO.\n" +" * si troba un sector d'arrencada de Windows, el reemplaçarà amb un sector\n" +"d'arrencada de GRUB/LILO. D'aquesta manera podreu carregar GNU / Linux\n" +"o bé un altre SO.\n" "\n" -" * si troba un sector d'arrencada grub o LILO, el reemplaçarà amb un nou.\n" +" * si troba un sector d'arrencada GRUB o LILO, el reemplaçarà amb un de " +"nou.\n" "\n" -"Si no pot prendre una decisió, DrakX us preguntarà on ha de col·locar el\n" -"carregador d'arrencada. Normalment, \"%s\" és el lloc més segur. Si " -"escolliu\n" -"\"%s\" no s'instal·larà cap carregador d'arrencada. Utilitzeu-lo només si\n" -"sabeu que esteu fent." +"Si no pot prendre una decisió, el DrakX us preguntarà on ha de col·locar el\n" +"carregador d'arrencada. Normalment, %s és el lloc més segur. Si escolliu\n" +"%s no s'instal·larà cap carregador d'arrencada. Trieu-ho només si\n" +"sabeu què feu." #: ../help.pm:745 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Now, it's time to select a printing system for your computer. Other\n" "operating systems may offer you one, but Mageia offers two. Each of\n" @@ -1654,35 +1651,34 @@ msgid "" "system you may change it by running PrinterDrake from the Mageia\n" "Control Center and clicking on the \"%s\" button." msgstr "" -"Ara cal seleccionar el sistema d'impressió del vostre ordinador. Altres\n" -"sistemes operatius us poden oferir un, però el Mageia n'ofereix\n" +"Ara cal seleccionar el sistema d'impressió de l'ordinador. Altres\n" +"sistemes operatius us en poden oferir un, però el Mageia n'ofereix\n" "dos. Cada sistema d'impressió és el més convenient per a un tipus de\n" "configuració determinat.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\", acrònim de \"print, do not queue\" (imprimeix, no facis cua), és\n" +" * %s, acrònim de «print, do not queue» (imprimeix, no facis cua), és\n" "la millor opció si teniu una connexió directa amb la impressora i voleu\n" "evitar els embussos a l'hora d'imprimir, i no teniu impressores de xarxa.\n" -"(\"%s\" només gestionarà xarxes molt senzilles i és una mica lenta quan\n" -"s'usa en xarxa.) Escolliu \"pdq\" si és la vostra primera incursió\n" -"en GNU/Linux.\n" +"(%s només gestionarà xarxes molt senzilles i és una mica lenta quan\n" +"s'usa en xarxa.) Escolliu pdq si és la vostra primera incursió\n" +"a GNU / Linux.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\" `` Common Unix Printing System'', Sistema d'impressió comú de\n" -"Unix, és una elecció excel·lent tant si voleu imprimir a la vostra\n" +" * %s, «Common Unix Printing System» (sistema d'impressió comú\n" +"d'Unix), és una elecció excel·lent tant si voleu imprimir a la\n" "impressora local com a l'altra punta del món. És senzilla de configurar i\n" -"pot actuar com a servidor o client per a l'antic sistema d'impressió \"lpd" -"\"\n" +"pot actuar com a servidor o client per a l'antic sistema d'impressió lpd\n" "i, per tant, és compatible amb sistemes operatius antics que encara\n" "necessitin serveis d'impressió. És força potent, però la configuració " "bàsica\n" -"és gairebé tan senzilla com la de \"pdq\". Si necessiteu emular un servidor\n" -"\"lpd\", heu d'habilitar el dimoni \"cups-lpd\". \"%s\" inclou frontals\n" -"gràfics per a la impressió o per escollir les opcions d'impressió\n" -"i per gestionar la impressora.\n" +"és gairebé tan senzilla com la de pdq. Si necessiteu emular un servidor\n" +"lpd, heu d'habilitar el dimoni cups-lpd. %s inclou interfícies\n" +"gràfiques per a la impressió o per a triar les opcions d'impressió\n" +"i per a gestionar la impressora.\n" "\n" "Si ara feu una tria, i després veieu que el sistema d'impressió no us\n" "agrada, podeu canviar-lo executant el PrinterDrake des del Centre de " -"control\n" -"de Mageia i fent clic al botó Expert." +"Control\n" +"de Mageia i fent clic al botó %s." #: ../help.pm:768 #, c-format @@ -1692,7 +1688,7 @@ msgstr "pdq" #: ../help.pm:724 #, c-format msgid "CUPS" -msgstr "" +msgstr "CUPS" #: ../help.pm:724 #, c-format @@ -1719,41 +1715,40 @@ msgid "" "which parameters need to be passed to the hardware, you'll need to manually\n" "configure the driver." msgstr "" -"Primer, DrakX detectarà qualsevol dispositiu IDE en l'ordinador. També\n" -"cercarà una o més targetes SCSI PCI. Si troba una targeta SCSI, DrakX\n" +"Primer, el DrakX detectarà qualsevol dispositiu IDE a l'ordinador. També\n" +"cercarà una o més targetes SCSI PCI. Si troba una targeta SCSI, el DrakX\n" "instal·larà automàticament el controlador adequat.\n" "\n" -"Com que la detecció de maquinari no és infal·lible, pot ser que DrakX no " +"Com que la detecció de maquinari no és infal·lible, pot ser que el DrakX no " "trobi\n" -"els discos durs; si és així, caldrà que indiqueu el vostre maquinari " -"manualment.\n" +"els discos durs; si és així, caldrà que indiqueu el maquinari manualment.\n" "\n" -"Si heu de seleccionar l'adaptador SCSI PCI manualment, DrakX us preguntarà " -"si\n" -"voleu configurar-ne les opcions. Convé que deixeu que DrakX comprovi\n" +"Si heu de seleccionar l'adaptador SCSI PCI manualment, el DrakX us " +"preguntarà si\n" +"voleu configurar-ne les opcions. Convé que deixeu que el DrakX comprovi\n" "el maquinari per saber les opcions específiques de la targeta que calen per " "inicialitzar\n" -"l'adaptador. La majoria de vegaDES, DrakX realitzarà aquest pas sense " +"l'adaptador. La majoria de vegades, el DrakX farà aquest pas sense " "problemes.\n" "\n" -"Si DrakX no pot comprovar les opcions per determinar automàticament els " +"Si el DrakX no pot comprovar les opcions per determinar automàticament els " "paràmetres\n" "que s'han de passar al maquinari, us caldrà configurar el controlador " "manualment." #: ../help.pm:789 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "\"%s\": if a sound card is detected on your system, it'll be displayed\n" "here. If you notice the sound card is not the one actually present on your\n" "system, you can click on the button and choose a different driver." msgstr "" -"\"%s\": si es detecta una targeta de so al vostre sistema, es mostra aquí.\n" +"%s: si es detecta una targeta de so al sistema, es mostra aquí.\n" "Si veieu que la targeta de so que es mostra no és la que realment teniu al\n" -"sistema, podeu fer clic al botó i seleccionar un altre programa de control." +"sistema, podeu fer clic al botó i seleccionar un altre controlador." #: ../help.pm:794 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "As a review, DrakX will present a summary of information it has gathered\n" "about your system. Depending on the hardware installed on your machine, you\n" @@ -1816,71 +1811,73 @@ msgid "" "on your machine. If you plan to use this machine as a server it's a good\n" "idea to review this setup." msgstr "" -"Com a revisió, DrakX presentarà un resum de la informació que\n" +"Com a revisió, el DrakX presentarà un resum de la informació que\n" "té sobre el vostre sistema. Segons el maquinari instal·lat, podeu\n" "tenir algunes o totes les entrades següents. Cada entrada consta\n" "de l'element de configuració que cal configurar, seguit d'un breu\n" "resum de la configuració actual.\n" -"Feu clic al botó \"%s\" corresponent per canviar-ho.\n" +"Feu clic al botó %s corresponent per canviar-ho.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": comproveu la configuració actual del mapa de teclat i\n" +" * %s: comproveu la configuració actual del mapa de teclat i\n" "canvieu-la si és necessari.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": comproveu la selecció actual de país. Si no sou a aquest\n" -"país, feu clic al botó \"%s\" i escolliu-ne un altre. Si el vostre\n" -"país no és a la primera llista que es mostra, feu clic al botó \"%s\"\n" +" * %s: comproveu la selecció actual de país. Si no sou a aquest\n" +"país, feu clic al botó %s i escolliu-ne un altre. Si el vostre\n" +"país no és a la primera llista que es mostra, feu clic al botó %s\n" "per obtenir una llista de països completa.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": per defecte, DrakX dedueix la vostra zona horària en\n" -"funció del país que hagueu escollit. Aquí podeu fer clic al botó \"%s\"\n" -"si no fos correcta.\n" +" * %s: per defecte, el DrakX dedueix la zona horària en\n" +"funció del país que hàgiu triat. Aquí podeu fer clic al botó %s\n" +"si no és correcta.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": comproveu la configuració actual del ratolí i feu clic al\n" +" * %s: comproveu la configuració actual del ratolí i feu clic al\n" "botó per canviar-la si fos necessari.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": feu clic al botó \"%s\" per obrir l'auxiliar de configuració\n" -"de la impressora. Consulteu el capítol corresponent de la ``Guia d'\n" -"iniciació'' per tenir més informació sobre la configuració d'una nova\n" -"impressora. Aquesta interfície és similar a la utilitzada durant la\n" -"instal·lació.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": si es detecta una targeta de so al vostre sistema, es\n" +" * %s: si es detecta una targeta de so al sistema, es\n" "mostra aquí. Si veieu que que no és la que realment teniu al sistema,\n" "podeu fer clic al botó per triar un altre controlador.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": per defecte, DrakX configura la vostra interfície\n" -"gràfica a una resolució de \"800x600\" or \"1024x768\". Si no us\n" -"va bé, feu clic a \"%s\" per reconfigurar la interfície gràfica.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": si es detecta una targeta de TV al sistema, es mostra\n" -"aquí. Si en teniu una però no és detectada, feu clic a \"%s\" per\n" +" * %s: si es detecta una targeta de TV al sistema, es mostra\n" +"aquí. Si en teniu una però no és detectada, feu clic a %s per\n" "intentar configurar-la manualment.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": si es detecta una targeta XDSI al sistema, es mostra\n" -"aquí. Podeu fer clic a \"%s\" per canviar els paràmetres associats\n" -"amb la targeta.\n" +" * %s: feu clic al botó %s per a canviar els paràmetres associats\n" +"amb la targeta si penseu que la configuració no és correcta.\n" +"\n" +" * %s: per defecte, el DrakX configura la vostra interfície\n" +"gràfica a una resolució de 800x600 o bé 1024x768. Si no us\n" +"va bé, feu clic a %s per reconfigurar la interfície gràfica.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": si voleu configurar ara l'accés a Internet o a la xarxa local.\n" +" * %s: si voleu configurar ara l'accés a Internet o a la xarxa local.\n" +"Adreceu-vos a la documentació impresa o feu servir el Centre de Control\n" +"de Mageia un cop acabada la instal·lació per a gaudir de l'ajuda en\n" +"línia completa.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": aquesta entrada un permet redefinir el nivell de seguretat\n" -"definit en un pas anterior ().\n" +" * %s: permet la configuració de les adreces dels servidors intermediaris\n" +"HTTP i FTP si la màquina que esteu configurant és darrere d'un servidor\n" +"intermediari.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": si teniu previst connectar-vos a Internet, és bona idea\n" -"protegir-vos d'intrusions instal·lant un tallafocs. Consulteu-ne\n" -"els detalls a la secció corresponent de la ``Guia d'iniciació''.\n" +" * %s: aquesta opció us permet redefinir el nivell de seguretat definit\n" +"en un pas anterior ().\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": si voleu canviar la configuració del carregador d'arrencada,\n" -"feu clic a aquest botó. Es recomana que això només ho facin els usuaris\n" -"avançats.\n" +" * %s: si teniu previst connectar-vos a Internet, és bona idea\n" +"protegir-vos d'intrusions instal·lant un tallafoc. Consulteu-ne\n" +"els detalls a la secció corresponent de la Guia d'iniciació.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": aquí podreu acabar d'ajustar els serveis que s'executaran\n" -"en el vostre ordinador. Si teniu previst utilitzar aquesta màquina com\n" +" * %s: si voleu canviar la configuració del carregador d'arrencada,\n" +"feu clic en aquest botó. Es recomana que això només ho facin els usuaris\n" +"avançats. Adreceu-vos a la documentació impresa o bé l'ajuda en línia\n" +"sobre la configuració del carregador d'arrencada del Centre de Control\n" +"de Mageia.\n" +"\n" +" * %s: aquí podreu acabar d'ajustar els serveis que s'executaran\n" +"a l'ordinador. Si teniu previst usar aquesta màquina com\n" "a servidor, és aconsellable que reviseu aquesta configuració." #: ../help.pm:809 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "TV card" -msgstr "Targeta XDSI" +msgstr "Targeta de TV" #: ../help.pm:809 #, c-format @@ -1893,13 +1890,13 @@ msgid "Graphical Interface" msgstr "Interfície gràfica" #: ../help.pm:861 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Choose the hard disk drive you want to erase in order to install your new\n" "Mageia partition. Be careful, all data on this drive will be lost\n" "and will not be recoverable!" msgstr "" -"Escolliu el disc dur que voleu buidar per instal·lar la nova partició\n" +"Trieu el disc dur que voleu buidar per instal·lar-hi la nova partició\n" "Mageia. Aneu amb compte, totes les dades actuals es perdran i no\n" "es podran recuperar!" @@ -1907,19 +1904,21 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" "present on this hard disk drive." msgstr "" -"Feu clic a \"%s\" si voleu suprimir totes les dades i particions\n" +"Feu clic a %s si voleu suprimir totes les dades i particions\n" "que hi ha en aquest disc dur. Aneu amb compte perquè, un cop\n" -"hagueu fet clic a \"%s\", no podreu recuperar cap dada ni partició\n" -"del disc, incloent les dades del Windows.\n" +"hàgiu fet clic a %s, no podreu recuperar cap dada ni partició\n" +"del disc, incloses les dades de Windows.\n" "\n" -"Feu clic a \"%s\" per aturar aquesta operació sense perdre cap dada\n" +"Feu clic a %s per aturar aquesta operació sense perdre cap dada\n" "ni partició d'aquest disc." #: ../help.pm:872 @@ -1931,121 +1930,3 @@ msgstr "Següent ->" #, c-format msgid "<- Previous" msgstr "<- Anterior" - -#~ msgid "" -#~ "\"%s\": clicking on the \"%s\" button will open the printer " -#~ "configuration\n" -#~ "wizard. Consult the corresponding chapter of the ``Starter Guide'' for " -#~ "more\n" -#~ "information on how to set up a new printer. The interface presented in " -#~ "our\n" -#~ "manual is similar to the one used during installation." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "\"%s\": feu clic al botó \"%s\" per obrir l'auxiliar de configuració de " -#~ "la\n" -#~ "impressora. Consulteu el capítol corresponent de la ``Guia d'iniciació''\n" -#~ "per tenir més informació en quant a la configuració de noves " -#~ "impressores.\n" -#~ "La interfície que apareix és similar a la que s'utilitza durant la " -#~ "instal·lació." - -#, fuzzy -#~ msgid "" -#~ "This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your GNU/" -#~ "Linux\n" -#~ "system: you must enter the \"root\" password. \"Root\" is the system\n" -#~ "administrator and is the only user authorized to make updates, add " -#~ "users,\n" -#~ "change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short, \"root\" " -#~ "can\n" -#~ "do everything! That's why you must choose a password which is difficult " -#~ "to\n" -#~ "guess: DrakX will tell you if the password you chose is too simple. As " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "can see, you're not forced to enter a password, but we strongly advise\n" -#~ "against this. GNU/Linux is just as prone to operator error as any other\n" -#~ "operating system. Since \"root\" can overcome all limitations and\n" -#~ "unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly accessing the\n" -#~ "partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to become\n" -#~ "\"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password should be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and at least " -#~ "8\n" -#~ "characters long. Never write down the \"root\" password -- it makes it " -#~ "far\n" -#~ "too easy to compromise your system.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "One caveat: do not make the password too long or too complicated because " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "must be able to remember it!\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password will not be displayed on screen as you type it. To reduce " -#~ "the\n" -#~ "chance of a blind typing error you'll need to enter the password twice. " -#~ "If\n" -#~ "you do happen to make the same typing error twice, you'll have to use " -#~ "this\n" -#~ "``incorrect'' password the first time you'll try to connect as \"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you want an authentication server to control access to your computer,\n" -#~ "click on the \"%s\" button.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If your network uses either LDAP, NIS, or PDC Windows Domain " -#~ "authentication\n" -#~ "services, select the appropriate one for \"%s\". If you do not know " -#~ "which\n" -#~ "one to use, you should ask your network administrator.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you happen to have problems with remembering passwords, or if your\n" -#~ "computer will never be connected to the Internet and you absolutely " -#~ "trust\n" -#~ "everybody who uses your computer, you can choose to have \"%s\"." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Aquesta és la decisió més important quant a la seguretat del vostre " -#~ "sistema\n" -#~ "GNU/Linux: heu d'introduir la contrasenya de l'usuari \"root\". El \"root" -#~ "\"\n" -#~ "és l'administrador del sistema i és l'únic autoritzat a fer " -#~ "actualitzacions,\n" -#~ "afegir usuaris, canviar la configuració del tot el sistema, etc. En " -#~ "poques\n" -#~ "paraules, el \"root\" ho pot fer tot! És per això que heu d'escollir una\n" -#~ "contrasenya que sigui difícil d'endevinar; DrakX us avisarà si és massa\n" -#~ "fàcil. Com veieu, podeu optar per no introduir cap contrasenya, però us\n" -#~ "aconsellem vivament que no ho feu. GNU/Linux és tan vulnerable als " -#~ "errors\n" -#~ "de l'operador com qualsevol altre sistema operatiu. Com que l'usuari\n" -#~ "\"root\" pot superar totes les limitacions i esborrar accidentalment " -#~ "totes\n" -#~ "les dades de qualsevol partició com a conseqüència d'accedir-hi sense\n" -#~ "precaucions, és molt important que sigui difícil esdevenir \"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "La contrasenya ha de ser una mescla de caràcters alfanumèrics i, com a\n" -#~ "mínim, de 8 caràcters de longitud. No apunteu enlloc la contrasenya de\n" -#~ "\"root\" ja que és molt fàcil comprometre el sistema si ho feu.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Tot i això, no feu la contrasenya massa llarga o complicada perquè heu " -#~ "de\n" -#~ "poder recordar-la!\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "La contrasenya no es mostrarà per pantalla quan la teclegeu. Per tant,\n" -#~ "haureu d'escriure-la dues vegades per reduir la probabilitat d'errors en\n" -#~ "l'escriptura. Si, malauradament, feu el mateix error dues vegaDES, " -#~ "haureu\n" -#~ "d'usar aquesta contrasenya ``incorrecta'' el primer cop que us " -#~ "connecteu.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Si voleu que aquest ordinador sigui controlat per un servidor\n" -#~ "d'autenticació, feu clic al botó \"%s\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Si la vostra xarxa usa els serveis d'autenticació LDAP, NIS o Windows\n" -#~ "Domain, seleccioneu l'adient per a \"%s\" . Si no sabeu quin utilitzar,\n" -#~ "pregunteu-ho al vostre administrador de xarxa.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Si teniu problemes per recordar les contrasenyes, si l'ordinador mai no " -#~ "es\n" -#~ "connectarà a Internet o si confieu absolutament en tothom que utilitza\n" -#~ "l'ordinador, podeu triar tenir \"%s\"." - -#~ msgid "authentication" -#~ msgstr "autenticació" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/cs.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/cs.po index e41461edf..60d039484 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/cs.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/cs.po @@ -12,11 +12,12 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2005-09-19 00:26+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Michal Bukovjan <bukm@centrum.cz>\n" "Language-Team: Czech <cs@li.org>\n" +"Language: cs\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n%" -"10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n" +"%10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" "X-Generator: KBabel 1.10.2\n" #: ../help.pm:14 @@ -129,7 +130,8 @@ msgstr "Chcete použít tuto vlastnost?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -139,13 +141,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -156,7 +161,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Zde je vypsán seznam již existujících detekovaných oddílů na pevném disku.\n" @@ -692,13 +698,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -711,12 +719,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -739,7 +749,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1040,18 +1051,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1074,7 +1088,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1082,7 +1097,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1101,12 +1117,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "V této chvíli je potřeba určit, který(é) oddíl(y) budou použity pro " "instalaci\n" @@ -1176,12 +1186,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Více informací o jednotlivých druzích souborových systémů naleznete\n" "v kapitole o ext2fs v \"Referenční příručce\".\n" -"\n" -"Pokud instalujete na počítač PPC, je potřeba vytvořit malý oddíl HFS,\n" -"tzv. \"bootstrap\" o minimální velikosti 1MB, který bude použit pro zavaděč\n" -"Yaboot. Pokud vytvoříte tento oddíl větší, např. 50 MB, je to dobré místo " -"pro\n" -"uložení ramdisku a jádra pro situace záchrany disku." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1221,20 +1225,24 @@ msgstr "Přepne mezi normální/expertním režimem" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1245,10 +1253,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Instalační program nalezl na disku více než jeden oddíl s Microsoft " @@ -1308,7 +1318,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1888,8 +1899,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/cy.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/cy.po index f93f3cadc..64e34acb4 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/cy.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/cy.po @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2006-03-08 19:38-0000\n" "Last-Translator: Rhoslyn Prys <post@meddal.com>\n" "Language-Team: Cymraeg <post@meddal.com>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -135,7 +136,8 @@ msgstr "Ydych chi eisiau defnyddio'r nodwedd?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -145,13 +147,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -162,7 +167,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Dyma'r rhaniadau Linux sydd wedi canfod ar eich disg caled.\n" @@ -663,13 +669,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -682,12 +690,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -710,7 +720,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1001,18 +1012,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1035,7 +1049,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1043,7 +1058,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1062,12 +1078,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Yn awr mae angen i chi ddewis pa raniadau i'w defnyddio ar gyfer gosodiad\n" "eich system Mageia. Os oes rhaniadau wedi eu diffinio eisoes, un\n" @@ -1131,14 +1141,6 @@ msgstr "" "I dderbyn gwybodaeth am yr amrywiol systemau ffeil sydd ar gael, darllenwch " "y\n" " pennawd ar ext2fs yn y ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"Os ydych yn gosod ar beiriant PPC, bydd angen i chi greu \"ymlwythwr\" \n" -" bychan o leiaf 1MB o faint, fydd yn cael ei ddefnyddio gan ymlwythwr " -"yaboot.\n" -"Os ydych yn dewis gwneud y rhaniad rhywfaint yn fwy, dyweder tua 50MB, yna\n" -"gall fod yn le defnyddiol i gadw cnewyllyn sbâr a delweddau ramdisk ar " -"gyfer\n" -" sefyllfaoedd cychwyn argyfyngus!" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1178,20 +1180,24 @@ msgstr "Amnewid rhwng modd arferol/arbenigol" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1202,10 +1208,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Mae mwy nag un rhaniad Microsoft wedi ei ganfod ar eich disg caled.\n" @@ -1262,7 +1270,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1844,8 +1853,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/da.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/da.po index eba796401..6126805cb 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/da.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/da.po @@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2006-03-05 18:46+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Keld Simonsen <keld@rap.dk>\n" "Language-Team: <da@li.org>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -30,9 +31,9 @@ msgid "" "button will reboot your computer." msgstr "" "Før du går videre bør du læse betingelserne i licensen omhyggeligt. Den " -"omfatter hele Mageia distributionen. Hvis du er enig i alle " -"betingelserne i den, så klik på '%s'-boksen. Hvis ikke, så vil klikning på " -"\"%s\"-knappen genstarte din maskine." +"omfatter hele Mageia distributionen. Hvis du er enig i alle betingelserne i " +"den, så klik på '%s'-boksen. Hvis ikke, så vil klikning på \"%s\"-knappen " +"genstarte din maskine." #: ../help.pm:20 #, c-format @@ -110,9 +111,9 @@ msgstr "" "Når du er færdig med at tilføje brugere, vil du blive spurgt om at vælge en " "bruger som automatisk kan logge ind på systemet når maskinen startes op. " "Hvis du er interesseret i denne facilitet (og ikke kærer dig synderligt om " -"lokal sikkerhed), så vælg den ønskede bruger og vindueshåndtering og klik '%" -"s'. Hvis du ikke er interesseret i denne facilitet, så afmarkér boksen med '%" -"s'." +"lokal sikkerhed), så vælg den ønskede bruger og vindueshåndtering og klik " +"'%s'. Hvis du ikke er interesseret i denne facilitet, så afmarkér boksen med " +"'%s'." #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format @@ -132,7 +133,8 @@ msgstr "Ønsker du at bruge denne facilitet?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -142,13 +144,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -159,7 +164,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Her er listet de eksisterende Linux-partitioner genkendt på din disk. Du kan " @@ -199,11 +205,11 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"Mageia installationen bliver distribueret på flere cdrom-er. Hvis en " -"valgt pakke ligger på en anden cdrom, vil DrakX udskyde den nuværende cd og " -"bede dig om at isætte den forespurgte cd. Hvis du ikke har den forespurgte " -"cd ved hånden, så klik bare på '%s' - de tilsvarende pakker vil da ikke " -"blive installerede." +"Mageia installationen bliver distribueret på flere cdrom-er. Hvis en valgt " +"pakke ligger på en anden cdrom, vil DrakX udskyde den nuværende cd og bede " +"dig om at isætte den forespurgte cd. Hvis du ikke har den forespurgte cd ved " +"hånden, så klik bare på '%s' - de tilsvarende pakker vil da ikke blive " +"installerede." #: ../help.pm:95 #, fuzzy, c-format @@ -264,8 +270,8 @@ msgid "" "megabytes." msgstr "" "Det er nu tid til at angive hvilke pakker du vil installere på dit system. " -"Der er tusindvis af pakker til dit Mageia system, og for at gøre det " -"nemmere at håndtere dem er pakkerne blevet placeret i grupper af lignende " +"Der er tusindvis af pakker til dit Mageia system, og for at gøre det nemmere " +"at håndtere dem er pakkerne blevet placeret i grupper af lignende " "programmer.\n" "\n" "Mageia opdeler pakkegrupper i fire kategorier. Du kan vælge og vrage " @@ -382,13 +388,13 @@ msgstr "" "!! Når en server-pakke er blevet valgt, enten fordi du specielt valgte den " "individuelle pakke, eller fordi den var en del af en gruppe af pakker, vil " "du blive spurgt om at bekræfte at du virkelig ønsker at installere disse " -"servere. Som standard under Mageia bliver installerede servere " -"startet op ved opstart af maskinen. Selvom de er sikre og ikke har nogen " -"kendte problemer på udgivelsestidspunktet for distributionen, er det absolut " -"muligt at sikkerhedshuller blev opdaget efter at denne version af Mandriva " -"Linux blev færdiggjort. Hvis du ikke véd hvad en bestemt tjeneste vil gøre " -"eller hvorfor den skal installeres, så klik '%s' her. Et klik med '%s' her " -"vil installere de nævnte servere og de vil blive startet automatisk under " +"servere. Som standard under Mageia bliver installerede servere startet op " +"ved opstart af maskinen. Selvom de er sikre og ikke har nogen kendte " +"problemer på udgivelsestidspunktet for distributionen, er det absolut muligt " +"at sikkerhedshuller blev opdaget efter at denne version af Mandriva Linux " +"blev færdiggjort. Hvis du ikke véd hvad en bestemt tjeneste vil gøre eller " +"hvorfor den skal installeres, så klik '%s' her. Et klik med '%s' her vil " +"installere de nævnte servere og de vil blive startet automatisk under " "opstarten!!\n" "\n" "'%s'-valget deaktiverer advarselsdialogen, som vises hver gang " @@ -686,13 +692,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -705,12 +713,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -733,7 +743,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -776,8 +787,8 @@ msgstr "" "Windows-FAT- eller NTFS-partition. Størrelsesændringen kan fortages uden tab " "af data, hvis du i forvejen har defragmenteret Windows-partitionen. Det " "anbefales på det kraftigste at du laver en sikkerhedskopi først. Denne " -"mulighed anbefales hvis du vil bruge både Mageia og Microsoft " -"Windows på samme maskine.\n" +"mulighed anbefales hvis du vil bruge både Mageia og Microsoft Windows på " +"samme maskine.\n" "\n" " Før du vælger denne løsning, bør du forstå at størrelsen på din Microsoft " "Windows partition vil blive mindre end da du startede. Du vil have mindre " @@ -785,9 +796,9 @@ msgstr "" "nyt programmel.\n" "\n" " * '%s': Hvis du vil slette alle data på alle partitioner på denne disk og " -"erstatte dem med dit nye Mageia-system, kan du vælge denne mulighed. " -"Vær forsigtig, for du vil ikke være i stand til at fortryde denne handling " -"efter at du har sagt ja.\n" +"erstatte dem med dit nye Mageia-system, kan du vælge denne mulighed. Vær " +"forsigtig, for du vil ikke være i stand til at fortryde denne handling efter " +"at du har sagt ja.\n" "\n" " !! Hvis du bruger denne mulighed vil alle eksisterende data på din disk " "gå tabt. !!\n" @@ -975,13 +986,12 @@ msgid "" "will appear: review the selection, and press \"%s\" to retrieve and install\n" "the selected package(s), or \"%s\" to abort." msgstr "" -"På det tidspunkt hvor du installerer Mageia er det sandsynligt at " -"nogen af pakkerne er blevet opdaterede siden den oprindelige udgivelse. Fejl " -"er måske blevet rettet, og sikkerhedsproblemer måske løst. Det er nu muligt " -"for dig at hente disse ned fra internettet for at disse opdateringer kan " -"komme dig til gode. Vælg '%s' hvis du har en fungerende internet- " -"forbindelse eller '%s' hvis du foretrækker at installere opdaterede pakker " -"senere.\n" +"På det tidspunkt hvor du installerer Mageia er det sandsynligt at nogen af " +"pakkerne er blevet opdaterede siden den oprindelige udgivelse. Fejl er måske " +"blevet rettet, og sikkerhedsproblemer måske løst. Det er nu muligt for dig " +"at hente disse ned fra internettet for at disse opdateringer kan komme dig " +"til gode. Vælg '%s' hvis du har en fungerende internet- forbindelse eller " +"'%s' hvis du foretrækker at installere opdaterede pakker senere.\n" "\n" "Valg af '%s' viser en liste af netsteder hvorfra opdateringer kan hentes. Du " "bør vælge en der er nær ved dig. Så vil et træ med pakkevalg blive vist: " @@ -1028,18 +1038,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1062,7 +1075,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1070,7 +1084,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1089,16 +1104,10 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Nu skal du vælge hvilke partitioner som skal bruges til installering af dit " -"Mageia system. Hvis partitionerne allerede er blevet defineret, " -"enten fra en tidligere installation af GNU/Linux eller med et andet " +"Mageia system. Hvis partitionerne allerede er blevet defineret, enten fra en " +"tidligere installation af GNU/Linux eller med et andet " "partitioneringsværktøj, kan du bruge de eksisterende partitioner. Ellers " "skal disk-partitionerne defineres først.\n" "\n" @@ -1159,12 +1168,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "For at få information om de forskellige tilgængelige filsystemstyper kan du " "læse kapitlet ext2fs i 'Referencemanualen'.\n" -"\n" -"Hvis du er i gang med at installere på en PPC-maskine skal du lave en lille " -"HFS-'bootstrap'-partition på mindst 1 MB til Yaboot-systemstarteren. Hvis du " -"vælger at lave partitionen en smule større, f.eks. 50 MB kan den være nyttig " -"til at gemme en ekstra kerne og ramdisk-billede for nødsituationer ved " -"opstart." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1204,20 +1207,24 @@ msgstr "Skift mellem normal og ekspert-tilstand" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1228,10 +1235,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Mere end én Microsoft Windows partition er blevet genkendt på dit diskdrev. " @@ -1288,7 +1297,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1318,9 +1328,9 @@ msgstr "" "konfigurationstrin forbliver tilgængelige, i lighed med en " "standardinstallation.\n" "\n" -"\"Opgradér\"-valget bør fungere fint på Mageia-systemer som kører " -"version '8.1' eller nyere. Udførelse af Opgradér på versioner tidligere end " -"Mageia '8.1' er ikke anbefalet." +"\"Opgradér\"-valget bør fungere fint på Mageia-systemer som kører version " +"'8.1' eller nyere. Udførelse af Opgradér på versioner tidligere end Mageia " +"'8.1' er ikke anbefalet." #: ../help.pm:594 #, c-format @@ -1415,8 +1425,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Om UTF-8 (ISO 10646)-understøttelse. ISO 10646 er en ny tegnkodning som er " "beregnet til at dække alle eksiterende sprog. Dog er fuld understøttelse for " -"dette i GNU/Linux stadig under udvikling. Af denne årsag vil Mageia' " -"brug af UTF-8 afhænge af brugerens valg:\n" +"dette i GNU/Linux stadig under udvikling. Af denne årsag vil Mageia' brug af " +"UTF-8 afhænge af brugerens valg:\n" "\n" " * Hvis du vælger et sprog som har en lang tradition for tegnkodning (latin1 " "sprog, russisk, japansk, kinesisk, koreansk, thai, græsk, tyrkisk, de fleste " @@ -1791,13 +1801,13 @@ msgstr "" "hvis du synes at konfigurationen er forkert.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": Som standard vil DrakX opsætte din grafiske grænseflade i " -"opløsningen 800x600 eller 1024x768. Hvis dette ikke passer dig, så klik på '%" -"s'-knappen for at ændre på opsætningen.\n" +"opløsningen 800x600 eller 1024x768. Hvis dette ikke passer dig, så klik på " +"'%s'-knappen for at ændre på opsætningen.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": Hvis du ønsker at konfigurere din adgang til internet eller " "lokalnet, kan du gøre dette nu. Kig i den trykte dokumentation eller brug " -"Mageia Kontrolcenter efter installationen er afsluttet for at drage " -"nytte af den fulde indbyggede vejledning. \n" +"Mageia Kontrolcenter efter installationen er afsluttet for at drage nytte af " +"den fulde indbyggede vejledning. \n" "\n" " * \"%s\": lader dig konfigurere HTTP- og FTP-proxyadresser, hvis maskinen, " "du installerer på, skal placeres bag en proxyserver.\n" @@ -1849,8 +1859,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/de.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/de.po index 1f39ad3d4..cccce7edf 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/de.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/de.po @@ -1,35 +1,30 @@ -# translation of de.po to deutsch -# translation of DrakX-de.po to deutsch -# translation of de.po to Deutsch -# translation of DrakX-de.po to german -# german translation of the MandrivaInstaller. -# Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Mandriva S.A. -# Stefan Siegel <siegel@linux-mandrake.com>, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003. -# Sebastian Deutscher <sebastian_deutscher@web.de>, 2003,2004. -# Gerhard Ortner <gerhard.ortner@aon.at>, 2003, 2004. -# Roy Steuber <roysteuber@mittweida-net.de>, 2004. -# Marcus Fischer <i18n@marcusfischer.com>, 2004. -# Frank Köster <frank@dueppel13.de>, 2004, 2005. -# Ronny Standtke <Ronny.Standtke@gmx.de>, 2003, 2004. -# Ronny Standtke <Ronny.Standtke@gmx.net>, 2004, 2005. -# Nicolas Bauer <webmaster@mandrakeusers.de>, 2005. -# Frank Koester <frank@dueppel13.de>, 2005. +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) YEAR THE PACKAGE'S COPYRIGHT HOLDER +# This file is distributed under the same license as the PACKAGE package. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2024 +# psyca, 2024 +# +#, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: DrakX-de\n" +"Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2008-09-12 12:22+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2005-09-20 17:12+0200\n" -"Last-Translator: Frank Koester <frank@dueppel13.de>\n" -"Language-Team: deutsch\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2024-09-04 17:33+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: psyca, 2024\n" +"Language-Team: German (https://app.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/teams/9361/" +"de/)\n" +"Language: de\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"X-Generator: KBabel 1.10.2\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" #: ../help.pm:14 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Before continuing, you should carefully read the terms of the license. It\n" "covers the entire Mageia distribution. If you agree with all the\n" @@ -37,10 +32,9 @@ msgid "" "button will reboot your computer." msgstr "" "Lesen Sie bitte aufmerksam die Lizenz, bevor Sie fortfahren. Sie umfasst\n" -"die gesamte Mageia Distribution. Sollten Sie nicht in allen Punkten\n" -"zustimmen, betätigen Sie bitte die Schaltfläche „%s“, um die Installation\n" -"abzubrechen. Um mit der Installation fortzufahren, betätigen Sie die\n" -"Schaltfläche „%s“." +"die gesamte Mageia Distribution. Sollten Sie in allen Punkten\n" +"zustimmen, betätigen Sie bitte die Schaltfläche „%s“. Wenn nicht wird ein\n" +"Betätigen der Schaltfläche „%s“ ihren Computer neu starten." #: ../help.pm:20 #, c-format @@ -125,12 +119,12 @@ msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "User name" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Benutzername" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "Accept user" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Benutzer akzeptieren" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format @@ -140,7 +134,8 @@ msgstr "Möchten Sie diese Möglichkeit nutzen?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -150,13 +145,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -167,7 +165,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Sie erhalten die Liste, der auf Ihren Festplatten gefundenen GNU/Linux\n" @@ -201,10 +200,8 @@ msgstr "" "Bei SCSI-Platten steht „a“ für „niedrigste SCSI-ID“, „b“ für\n" "„zweitniedrigste SCSI-ID“, etc." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:88 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The Mageia installation is distributed on several CD-ROMs. If a\n" "selected package is located on another CD-ROM, DrakX will eject the current\n" @@ -212,17 +209,15 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"Die Mageia-Distribution wird auf mehreren CD-ROMs ausgeliefert. Es\n" -"kann daher vorkommen, dass DrakX Pakete von anderen, als der\n" -"Installations-CD-ROM installieren will. In diesem Fall wird es die aktuelle\n" -"CD auswerfen und nach einer anderen fragen. Wenn Sie dieses CD nicht haben,\n" -"klicken Sie einfach auf „%s“. Die entsprechenden Pakete werden in dem Fall\n" -"nicht installiert." - -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml +"Die Mageia-Distribution wird auf mehreren CD-ROMs ausgeliefert. Wenn\n" +"ein ausgewähltes Paket sich auf einer anderen CD-ROM befindet, wird DrakX\n" +"die aktuelle CD-ROM auswerfen und nach einer anderen fragen. Wenn Sie diese\n" +"nicht zur Hand haben sollten, betätigen Sie die Schaltfläche „%s“, die " +"entsprechenden\n" +"Pakete werden dann nicht installiert." + #: ../help.pm:95 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "It's now time to specify which programs you wish to install on your system.\n" "There are thousands of packages available for Mageia, and to make it\n" @@ -279,25 +274,27 @@ msgid "" "command-line interface. The total size of this installation is about 65\n" "megabytes." msgstr "" -"Nun ist es Zeit sich zu entscheiden, welche Programme Sie auf Ihrem Rechner\n" -"installieren wollen. Es gibt tausende von Paketen für Mageia, und\n" -"Sie müssen sie nicht alle auswendig kennen.\n" +"Nun ist es Zeit sich zu entscheiden, welche Programme Sie auf Ihrem Rechner " +"installieren wollen.\n" +"Es gibt tausende von Paketen für Mageia, und um die Verwaltung zu " +"vereinfachen sind diese, zusammen mit ähnlichen Anwendungen, in Kategorien " +"sortiert.\n" "\n" -"Die Pakete sind nach ihrer Verwendung in vier Kategorien eingeteilt. Sie\n" +"Die Pakete sind in vier Kategorien eingeteilt. Sie\n" "können Pakete aus verschiedenen Kategorien nach Belieben mischen, sodass\n" "beispielsweise eine „Workstation“-Installation auch Bestandteile einer\n" "„Server“-Installation aufweisen kann.\n" "\n" " * „%s“: Falls Ihr Rechner als Arbeitsplatzrechner verwendet werden soll,\n" -"markieren Sie eine oder mehrere Gruppen.\n" +"markieren Sie eine oder mehrere Gruppen dieser Kategorie.\n" "\n" " * „%s“: Falls Sie mit Ihrem Rechner programmieren wollen, sollten Sie\n" "diese Gruppe markieren. Die spezielle Gruppe „LSB“ wird Ihr System\n" "möglichst eng an den Vorgaben der Linux Standard Base ausrichten.\n" "\n" -" Die Auswahl der „LSB“-Gruppe bewirkt auch, dass der Kernel „2.4“\n" -"anstelle des standardmäßigen Kernel „2.6“ installiert wird, um die 100%%ige\n" -"Einhaltung der-LSB-Bedingungen zu garantieren. Allerdings erhalten Sie auch\n" +" Die Auswahl der „LSB“-Gruppe bewirkt auch, eine 100%%ige\n" +"Einhaltung der-LSB-Bedingungen des Systems zu garantieren. Allerdings " +"erhalten Sie auch\n" "ohne die Auswahl der „LSB“-Gruppe ein nahezu 100%%ig LSB-konformes System.\n" "\n" " * „%s“: Wenn Ihre Maschine ein Server werden soll, können Sie hier die\n" @@ -320,19 +317,22 @@ msgstr "" "Hierdurch werden nur bereits installierte Pakete aktualisiert oder\n" "repariert.\n" "\n" -"Wenn Sie bei einer normalen Installation alle Gruppen de-markieren\n" +"Wenn Sie bei einer normalen Installation (im Gegensatz zu einem Upgrade) " +"alle Gruppen de-markieren\n" "erscheint ein Dialog, der Ihnen verschiedene Optionen für eine\n" "Minimal-Installation anbietet:\n" "\n" -" * „%s“ Installiert eine rudimentäre grafische Oberfläche;\n" +" * „%s“ Installiert eine minimale Anzahl an Paketen um mindestens eine " +"funktionale grafische Oberfläche zu erhalten;\n" "\n" " * „%s“ Installiert das Basissystem zuzüglich grundlegender Werkzeuge\n" "inklusive deren Dokumentation. Dies ist die sinnvollste Wahl für eine\n" "Serverinstallation.\n" "\n" -" * „%s“ Sie erhalten eine komplett „nackte“ 65MB große\n" -"GNU/Linux-Distribution. Es versteht sich von selbst, dass das nur eine\n" -"Kommandozeileninstallation sein kann." +" * „%s“ Installiert das absolute Minimum an Paketen die nötig sind um ein " +"funktionierendes Linux System zu erhalten. Mit dieser Installation erhalten " +"Sie nur eine Kommandozeile. Die gesamte Größe dieser Installation beträgt um " +"die 65 Megabyte." #: ../help.pm:149 ../help.pm:591 #, c-format @@ -349,10 +349,8 @@ msgstr "Mit minimaler Dokumentation (Empfohlen)" msgid "Truly minimal install" msgstr "Minimal-Installation" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:152 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you choose to install packages individually, the installer will present\n" "a tree containing all packages classified by groups and subgroups. While\n" @@ -395,31 +393,38 @@ msgstr "" "Pakete\n" "auswählen.\n" "\n" -"Wenn Sie ein Paket auswählen, erscheint rechts eine kurze Beschreibung.\n" +"Wenn Sie ein Paket auswählen, erscheint rechts eine kurze Beschreibung, " +"damit Sie den Zweck des Pakets in Erfahrung bringen können.\n" "\n" -"!! Es kommt vor, dass Server- und Dienst-Pakete angewählt wurden - entweder\n" -"absichtlich, oder als Paket einer ganzen Gruppe; sollte das der Fall sein,\n" -"werden Sie nun gefragt, ob Sie diese wirklich installiert haben wollen.\n" -"Unter Mageia werden installierte Server und Dienste automatisch " -"beim\n" +"!! Wenn ein Server-Paket angewählt wurde, entweder\n" +"absichtlich oder als Paket einer ganzen Gruppe, \n" +"werden Sie gefragt, ob Sie dieses wirklich installiert haben wollen.\n" +"Unter Mageia werden installierte Dienste automatisch beim\n" "Betriebssystemstart gestartet. Selbst wenn zum Zeitpunkt, als die\n" "Distribution zusammengestellt wurde, keine Sicherheitslücken oder Fehler in\n" "diesen Paketen bekannt waren, ist natürlich nicht auszuschließen, dass\n" "später solche Fehler gefunden werden. Sollten Sie also nicht wissen, wovon\n" "hier die Rede ist, wählen Sie sicherheitshalber lieber „%s“. Falls Sie mit\n" -"„%s“ antworten, werden die Dienste und Server installiert und stehen Ihnen\n" +"„%s“ antworten, werden die aufgelisteten Dienste installiert und stehen " +"Ihnen\n" "nach der Installation standardmäßig zur Verfügung. !!\n" "\n" -"Die Option „%s“ unterdrückt nur die Warnungen, die erscheinen, wenn das\n" +"Die Option „%s“ unterdrückt die Warnungen, die erscheinen, wenn das\n" "Installationsprogramm Pakete automatisch markiert, um Paketabhängigkeiten\n" "aufzulösen, wenn Sie ein Paket auswählen. Einige Pakete hängen von der\n" "Existenz anderer Pakete ab und die Installation eines Pakets mag die\n" -"Installation eines anderen voraussetzen. Das Installprogramm ist in der\n" -"Lage, diese Abhängigkeiten zu erkennen und zu erfüllen.\n" +"Installation eines anderen voraussetzen. Das Installationsprogramm ist in " +"der\n" +"Lage, diese Abhängigkeiten zu erkennen um die Installation vollständig " +"durchzuführen.\n" "\n" "Das kleine Diskettensymbol am unteren Rand der Liste ermöglicht es Ihnen,\n" "die während einer vorangegangenen Installation gespeicherte Paketauswahl\n" -"erneut zu verwenden. Durch Betätigen der Schaltfläche öffnen Sie einen\n" +"erneut zu verwenden. Dies ist nützlich, wenn Sie eine eine größere Anzahl " +"an\n" +"Systemen zu installieren haben, welche identisch eingerichtet werden " +"sollen.\n" +"Durch Betätigen der Schaltfläche öffnen Sie einen\n" "Dialog, der Sie auffordert, die Diskette einzulegen, die die Auswahl der\n" "früheren Installation enthält. Um zu erfahren, wie Sie diese Diskette\n" "erstellen, lesen Sie bitte den zweiten Tipp des vorangegangenen\n" @@ -502,7 +507,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:213 #, c-format msgid "Hardware clock set to GMT" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Die Hardware-Uhr ist auf GMZ gestellt" #: ../help.pm:213 #, c-format @@ -532,10 +537,8 @@ msgstr "" "und ohne 3D-Beschleunigung, werden Sie gebeten, den zu wählen, der Ihren\n" "Bedürfnissen am besten entspricht." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:234 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "X (for X Window System) is the heart of the GNU/Linux graphical interface\n" "on which all the graphical environments (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep,\n" @@ -593,65 +596,6 @@ msgid "" "want to check \"%s\" if your machine is to act as a server, or if you were\n" "not successful in getting the display configured." msgstr "" -"X (das X Window System) ist das Herz der grafischen Benutzeroberfläche von\n" -"GNU/Linux. Es bildet die Grundlage für die Vielzahl grafischer\n" -"Benutzerumgebungen, die Mageia Ihnen anbietet (wie etwa KDE, GNOME,\n" -"AfterStep oder WindowMaker).\n" -"\n" -"Sie erhalten eine Liste möglicher Parameter, mit deren Hilfe Sie die\n" -"Grafikausgabe ändern können:\n" -"\n" -"Grafikkarte\n" -"\n" -" DrakX erkennt normalerweise automatisch Ihre Grafikkarte und richtet sie\n" -"entsprechend ein. Sollten dabei Probleme auftreten, können Sie in der hier\n" -"aufgeführten Liste Ihr Modell auswählen.\n" -"\n" -" Falls für Ihre Karte verschiedene Server zur Verfügung stehen, etwa mit\n" -"und ohne 3D-Beschleunigung, werden Sie gebeten, den zu wählen, der Ihren\n" -"Bedürfnissen am besten entspricht.\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"Monitor\n" -"\n" -" DrakX erkennt normalerweise automatisch Ihren Monitor. Sollten dabei\n" -"Probleme auftreten, können Sie in der hier aufgeführten Liste Ihr Modell\n" -"auswählen.\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"Auflösung\n" -"\n" -" Sie können hier Auflösung und Farbtiefe für Ihre Hardware wählen.\n" -"Entscheiden Sie sich, welche Variante Ihren Wünschen am ehesten entspricht\n" -"(Sie können diese Angaben natürlich nach der Installation noch ändern).\n" -"Anhand des abgebildeten Monitors können Sie sich einen sofortigen Eindruck\n" -"bilden.\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"Test\n" -"\n" -" Je nach Hardware kann es sein, dass dieser Eintrag nicht erscheint.\n" -"\n" -" DrakX versucht eine Testbild mit denen von Ihnen gewünschten\n" -"Einstellungen zu öffnen. Falls Sie während des Tests einen Dialog sehen, in\n" -"dem Sie gefragt werden, ob sie die getroffenen Einstellungen behalten\n" -"wollen, antworten Sie mit „%s“, damit DrakX mit dem nächsten\n" -"Installationsschritt fortfährt. Sollten Sie die Nachricht nicht sehen,\n" -"bedeutet das, dass eine oder mehrere getroffene Einstellungen nicht korrekt\n" -"sind. Nach 12 Sekunden sollten Sie wieder das Installationsmenü sehen. Sie\n" -"können nun die Einstellungen ändern, bis Sie das Testbild sehen.\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"Optionen\n" -"\n" -" Sie können direkt bei Betriebssystemstart die grafische Umgebung\n" -"aktivieren. Durch Betätigen der Schaltfläche „%s“ wird in eine reine\n" -"Textumgebung gestartet. Das ist sinnvoll für Server oder wenn Sie bei dem\n" -"Versuch die grafische Umgebung zu konfigurieren erfolglos waren." #: ../help.pm:291 #, c-format @@ -713,19 +657,19 @@ msgstr "" "Textumgebung gestartet. Das ist sinnvoll für Server oder wenn Sie bei dem\n" "Versuch die grafische Umgebung zu konfigurieren erfolglos waren." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:319 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -738,12 +682,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -766,7 +712,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -779,69 +726,6 @@ msgid "" "experience. For more instructions on how to use the DiskDrake utility,\n" "refer to the ``Managing Your Partitions'' section in the ``Starter Guide''." msgstr "" -"Sie müssen nun entscheiden, wo auf Ihrer Festplatte Ihr Mageia\n" -"System installiert werden soll. Sofern alles leer ist bzw. ein\n" -"Betriebssystem alles belegt, muss die Festplatte neu partitioniert werden.\n" -"Prinzipiell besteht das Partitionieren der Festplatte darin, den\n" -"Plattenplatz so aufzuteilen, dass Ihr Mageia darauf installiert\n" -"werden kann.\n" -"\n" -"Da dieser Schritt normalerweise irreversibel ist und auch zu Datenverlusten\n" -"führen kann, haben manche unerfahrenen Benutzer Hemmungen, diesen Schritt\n" -"auszuführen. Glücklicherweise enthält DrakX einen Assistenten, der den\n" -"Prozess sehr vereinfacht. Lesen Sie dennoch vor Beginn im Handbuch die\n" -"entsprechenden Passagen und lassen Sie sich Zeit mit der Entscheidung.\n" -"\n" -"Abhängig vom aktuellen Zustand Ihrer Festplatte haben Sie verschiedene\n" -"Alternativen:\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Dies führt einfach dazu, dass Ihre leere(n) Festplatte(n)\n" -"automatisch partitioniert werden; Sie müssen sich also um nichts weiter\n" -"kümmern.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Der Assistent hat eine oder mehrere existierende Linux-Partitionen\n" -"auf Ihrer Platte gefunden. Wählen Sie diese Schaltfläche, falls Sie sie\n" -"behalten wollen. Sie werden dann gebeten, die Einhängpunkte der Partitionen\n" -"anzugeben. Als Vorgabe erhalten Sie die Einhängpunkte der gefundenen\n" -"Distribution, normalerweise ist es nicht nötig diese zu ändern.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Falls der gesamte Plattenplatz aktuell für Microsoft Windows™\n" -"verschwendet ist, müssen Sie für GNU/Linux Platz schaffen. Um dies zu\n" -"erreichen, können Sie entweder Ihre Microsoft Windows™ Partition(en)\n" -"samt Daten löschen (siehe „Komplette Platte löschen“) oder Ihre Microsoft\n" -"Windows NTFS oder FAT Partition verkleinern. Letzteres geht ohne\n" -"Datenverlust, vorausgesetzt Sie haben ihre Windows Partition(en) vorher\n" -"defragmentiert. Dennoch sollten Sie vor diesem Schritt eine Sicherungskopie\n" -"Ihrer Daten auf einem anderem Medium als der zu verändernden Festplatte\n" -"vornehmen. Sie sollten diese Variante wählen, falls Sie beide\n" -"Betriebssysteme (Microsoft Windows und Mageia) nebeneinander nutzen\n" -"wollen.\n" -"\n" -" Bevor Sie sich für diese Variante entscheiden, sei hier noch einmal\n" -"betont, dass das bedeutet, Sie haben weniger Platz für Microsoft Windows\n" -"als momentan.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Falls Sie alle Daten Ihrer Platte verlieren, und sie durch Ihr\n" -"neues Mageia System ersetzen wollen, wählen Sie diese Schaltfläche.\n" -"Beachten Sie, dass dieser Schritt nicht rückgängig gemacht werden kann.\n" -"\n" -" !! Wenn Sie diese Variante wählen, werden alle Ihre Daten auf der Platte\n" -"gelöscht! !!\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Diese Option erscheint, wenn der gesamte Platz von Microsoft\n" -"Windows eingenommen wird. Bei der Auswahl der Option wird einfach der\n" -"gesamte Inhalt der Platte gelöscht und neu partitioniert.\n" -"\n" -" !! Wenn Sie diese Variante wählen, werden alle Ihre Daten auf der Platte\n" -"gelöscht! !!\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Wenn Sie Ihre Festplatte selbst von Hand partitionieren wollen,\n" -"dann können Sie diese Option wählen. Seien Sie bitte sehr sorgfältig, wenn\n" -"Sie diese Lösung wählen, da Sie zwar alle möglichen Einstellungen\n" -"vornehmen, aber gleichzeitig auch sehr leicht Daten verlieren können. Diese\n" -"Option ist nur geeignet, wenn Sie wissen, was Sie tun. Um zu erfahren, wie\n" -"Sie DiskDrake verwenden können, lesen Sie bitte das Kapitel „Ihre\n" -"Partitionen verwalten“ im „Starter Handbuch“." #: ../help.pm:377 #, c-format @@ -851,7 +735,7 @@ msgstr "Verwende existierende Partition(en)" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format msgid "Use the free space on the Microsoft Windows® partition" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Den freien Platz auf der Microsoft-Windows®-Partition nutzen" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format @@ -941,22 +825,20 @@ msgstr "Erstellen einer Autoinstallations-Diskette" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Replay" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Erneut durchführen" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Automated" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Automatisch" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Save packages selection" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Paketauswahl speichern" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:408 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you chose to reuse some legacy GNU/Linux partitions, you may wish to\n" "reformat some of them and erase any data they contain. To do so, please\n" @@ -980,32 +862,32 @@ msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you wish to select partitions which will be checked for\n" "bad blocks on the disk." msgstr "" -"Sie erhalten hier die Möglichkeit bereits existierende Partitionen neu zu\n" -"formatieren, um die darauf vorhandenen Daten zu löschen. Markieren Sie\n" -"diese einfach ebenfalls in der Liste.\n" +"Wenn Sie auswählen bereits existierende GNU/Linux Partitionen zu verwenden,\n" +"möchten Sie diese möglicherweise neu formatieren, um die darauf " +"vorhandenen \n" +"Daten zu löschen. Markieren Sie diese Partitionen einfach ebenfalls in der " +"Liste.\n" "\n" "Es sei angemerkt, dass nicht alle Partitionen neu formatiert werden müssen.\n" "Sie sollten normalerweise nur die Partitionen neu formatieren, die\n" "Systemdateien, jedoch keine Privatdaten enthalten (etwa „/“, „/usr“ oder\n" -"„/var“). Partitionen wie etwa „/home“ sollten Sie normalerweise nicht neu\n" +"„/var“). Partitionen wie etwa „/home“ müssen Sie normalerweise nicht neu\n" "formatieren.\n" "\n" "Seien Sie sorgfältig bei der Auswahl der Partitionen. Nach dem Formatieren\n" "sind alle zuvor darauf existierenden Daten unwiederbringlich verloren.\n" "\n" -"Wenn Sie alle Einstellungen vorgenommen haben, betätigen Sie die\n" -"Schaltfläche „%s“, um mit dem Formatieren der Partitionen zu beginnen.\n" +"Betätigen Sie die Schaltfläche „%s“, um mit dem Formatieren der \n" +"Partitionen zu beginnen.\n" "\n" "Betätigen Sie „%s“, wenn Sie eine andere Partition für Ihr neues\n" -"Mageia vorgesehen haben.\n" +"Mageia Betriebssystem vorgesehen haben.\n" "\n" -"Betätigen Sie die Schaltfläche „%s“, falls Sie Partitionen auf defekte\n" -"Blöcke untersuchen wollen." +"Betätigen Sie „%s“, falls Sie Partitionen auswählen möchten, um diese auf \n" +"defekte Blöcke zu untersuchen." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:437 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "By the time you install Mageia, it's likely that some packages will\n" "have been updated since the initial release. Bugs may have been fixed,\n" @@ -1020,26 +902,25 @@ msgid "" "the selected package(s), or \"%s\" to abort." msgstr "" "Es ist sehr wahrscheinlich, dass zum Zeitpunkt Ihrer Mageia\n" -"Installation bereits einige Pakete aktualisiert wurden, etwa da noch Fehler\n" -"entdeckt und beseitigt wurden oder da in Paketen Sicherheitslücken entdeckt\n" -"wurden, für die bereits Lösungen existieren. Um von diesen aktualisierten\n" -"Paketen Gebrauch zu machen, wird Ihnen nun angeboten, diese aus dem\n" -"Internet nachzuladen. Betätigen Sie die Schaltfläche „%s“, wenn Sie einen\n" -"Internetzugang haben, um die Pakete zu installieren, andernfalls betätigen\n" -"Sie die Schaltfläche „%s“. Sie können diese Pakete natürlich auch jederzeit\n" -"nach der Installation noch installieren.\n" +"Installation bereits einige Pakete aktualisiert wurden, etwa weil Fehler " +"beseitigt \n" +"oder Sicherheitslücken behoben wurden.\n" +"Um von diesen aktualisierten Paketen Gebrauch zu machen, \n" +"wird Ihnen nun angeboten, diese aus dem Internet nachzuladen. \n" +"Betätigen Sie die Schaltfläche „%s“, wenn Sie einen\n" +"Internetzugang haben, andernfalls betätigen Sie die Schaltfläche „%s“ falls " +"Sie\n" +"diese später installieren möchten.\n" "\n" "Betätigen der Schaltfläche „%s“ zeigt Ihnen eine Liste von Servern, von\n" "denen Sie die Aktualisierungen herunterladen können. Wählen Sie einen in\n" "Ihrer Nähe. Sie erhalten dann einen Paketauswahldialog: Kontrollieren Sie\n" "die Auswahl und bestätigen Sie diese durch Betätigen von „%s“. Die Pakete\n" "werden nun angefordert und installiert. Sollten Sie das nicht wünschen,\n" -"betätigen Sie einfach die Schaltfläche „%s“." +"betätigen Sie die Schaltfläche „%s“." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:450 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, DrakX will allow you to choose the security level you desire\n" "for your machine. As a rule of thumb, the security level should be set\n" @@ -1055,44 +936,46 @@ msgid "" "security. Security messages will be sent to that address." msgstr "" "Nun ist es an der Zeit, mittels DrakX die gewünschte Sicherheitsebene für\n" -"Ihr System festzulegen. Als Faustregel sollte hier dienen: Je zugänglicher\n" -"die Maschine ist und je kritischer die auf ihr gesicherten Daten sind,\n" -"desto höher sollte die Sicherheitsebene sein. Andererseits geht die\n" +"Ihr System festzulegen. Als Faustregel sollte hier dienen: Je kritischer die " +"auf ihr gesicherten Daten sind oder wenn diese direkt mit dem Internet " +"verbunden ist, desto höher sollte die Sicherheitsebene sein. Andererseits " +"geht die\n" "gewonnene Sicherheit zulasten der Benutzerfreundlichkeit und Einfachheit.\n" "\n" "Sollten Sie sich an dieser Stelle nicht sicher sein, so behalten Sie die\n" "Standardeinstellung bei. Sie können die Ebene später noch mittels draksec\n" -"im Mageia Control Center anpassen.\n" +"im Mageia Kontrollzentrum anpassen.\n" "\n" "Das Feld „%s“ dient dazu, dem System mitzuteilen, wer für die Sicherheit\n" -"dieses Rechners verantwortlich ist. An dieses Kennzeichen/diese E-Mail\n" -"Adresse werden sicherheitsrelevante Informationen per E-Mail versandt." +"dieses Rechners verantwortlich ist. An die dort angegebene E-Mail Adresse " +"werden sicherheitsrelevante Informationen versandt." #: ../help.pm:461 #, c-format msgid "Security Administrator" msgstr "Sicherheitsadministrator:" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:464 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1115,7 +998,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1123,7 +1007,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1142,104 +1027,22 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" -"Sie müssen nun entscheiden, auf welche(n) Partition(en) Ihr neues Mandriva\n" -"Linux System installiert werden soll. Falls bereits Partitionen existieren\n" -"(etwa von einer früheren Installation von GNU/Linux oder durch das Erzeugen\n" -"mit einem anderen Partitionierungswerkzeug), können Sie diese verwenden.\n" -"Anderenfalls müssen Sie Partitionen definieren.\n" -"\n" -"Um Partitionen zu erzeugen müssen Sie erst eine Festplatte wählen. Sie\n" -"können die Platte wählen in dem Sie „hda“ für die erste IDE-Platte wählen,\n" -"„sda“ für die erste SCSI-Platte, usw.\n" -"\n" -"Um die gewählte Platte zu partitionieren stehen folgende Möglichkeiten zur\n" -"Verfügung:\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Betätigen dieser Schaltfläche löscht alle Partitionen auf der\n" -"markierten Festplatte.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Dieser Punkt aktiviert die automatische ext3- und\n" -"Swap-Partitionen-Erstellung im ungenutzten Bereich Ihrer Festplatte.\n" -"\n" -"„%s“: bietet Zugriff auf weitere Möglichkeiten:\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Sie können hiermit Ihre aktuelle Partitionstabelle auf Diskette\n" -"speichern.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Mit dieser Schaltfläche können Sie eine vorher auf Diskette\n" -"gesicherte Partitionstabelle wieder herstellen.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Sollte Ihre Partitionstabelle zerstört worden sein, können Sie\n" -"versuchen, mit dieser Schaltfläche eine Restaurierung vorzunehmen. Seien\n" -"Sie vorsichtig! Es ist nicht unwahrscheinlich, dass dieser Versuch fehl\n" -"schlägt.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Alle Änderungen verwerfen und mit der ursprünglichen\n" -"Partitionstabelle neu beginnen.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Entfernen dieser Markierung führt dazu, dass die Anwender\n" -"hinterher die Wechselmedien manuell ein- und aushängen müssen.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Falls Sie keine Ahnung haben wie Sie die Festplatte partitionieren\n" -"sollen, wählen Sie diese Schaltfläche. Sie überlassen damit die gesamte\n" -"Arbeit unserem Assistenten, der mittels „Abra Kadabra“™ Ihre Platte\n" -"partitioniert.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Mit dieser Schaltfläche können Sie alle Einstellungen rückgängig\n" -"machen.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Anbieten bzw. Maskieren von Zusatzmöglichkeiten.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Nachdem Sie das Partitionieren Ihrer Festplatte beendet haben,\n" -"aktivieren Sie diese Schaltfläche, um Ihre Änderungen zu speichern.\n" -"\n" -"Wenn Sie die Größe einer Partition festlegen wollen, können Sie die\n" -"Feineinstellungen mit den Rechts- / Links-Pfeiltasten Ihrer Tastatur\n" -"vornehmen.\n" -"\n" -"Information: Sie können alle Einstellungen per Tastatur vornehmen. Mittels\n" -"[Tab] und den Hoch-/Runter-Pfeiltasten können Sie sich bewegen.\n" -"\n" -"Wenn eine Partition ausgewählt ist, können Sie mittels:\n" -"\n" -" * Strg-C - eine neue Partition erstellen (wenn Sie auf einer leeren\n" -"Partition sind)\n" -"\n" -" * Strg-D - die Partition löschen\n" -"\n" -" * Strg-M - den Einhängpunkt festlegen.\n" -"\n" -"Um mehr Informationen über die verschiedenen Dateisystemtypen zu erhalten,\n" -"lesen Sie bitte das Kapitel ext2FS in der „Referenz“.\n" -"\n" -"Falls Sie die Installation auf einem PPC-Rechner vornehmen, sollten Sie\n" -"eine mindestens 1MB, große HFS Start-Partition für den\n" -"Betriebssystemstarter yaboot erstellen. Wenn Sie diese Partition etwas\n" -"größer dimensionieren, etwa 50MB, haben Sie einen geeigneten Platz, um\n" -"einen Rettungskern samt RamDisk abzulegen, um in Notfällen starten zu\n" -"können." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Save partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Partitionstabelle speichern" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Restore partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Partitionstabelle wiederherstellen" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Rescue partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Partitionstabelle retten" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1249,37 +1052,39 @@ msgstr "Wechselmedien automatisch einhängen" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Wizard" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Assistent" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Undo" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Rückgängig machen" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Toggle between normal/expert mode" msgstr "In den Normal-Modus wechseln" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:536 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1290,14 +1095,17 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" -"Es wurde mehr als eine Windows-Partition gefunden. Wählen Sie bitte, welche\n" -"Sie verkleinern wollen, um Platz für Ihr neues Mageia zu schaffen.\n" +"Es wurde mehr als eine Windows-Partition auf Ihrem Laufwerk gefunden.\n" +"Wählen Sie bitte, welche Sie verkleinern wollen, um Platz für Ihr neues " +"Mageia Betriebssystem zu schaffen.\n" "\n" "Die Partitionen werden folgendermaßen aufgelistet: „Linux-Name“,\n" "„Windows-Name“, „Kapazität“.\n" @@ -1305,7 +1113,7 @@ msgstr "" "„Linux-Name“ hat folgende Struktur: „Festplattentyp“, „Festplattennummer“,\n" "„Partitionsnummer“ (etwa „hda1“).\n" "\n" -"„Festplattentyp“ ist „hd“, falls Ihre Platte eine IDE/ATAPI-Platte ist, und\n" +"„Festplattentyp“ ist „hd“, falls Ihre Platte eine IDE-Platte ist, und\n" "„sd“, wenn es sich um eine SCSI-Platte handelt.\n" "\n" "„Festplattennummer“ ist immer der Buchstabe hinter dem Festplattentyp. Bei\n" @@ -1319,11 +1127,12 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * „d“ ist „Slave-Platte am sekundären IDE-Controller“;\n" "\n" -"Bei SCSI-Platten steht „a“ für „niedrigste SCSI-ID“, „b“ für\n" -"„zweitniedrigste SCSI-ID“, etc.\n" +"Bei SCSI-Platten steht „a“ für die „niedrigste SCSI-ID“, „b“ für\n" +"die „zweitniedrigste SCSI-ID“, etc.\n" "\n" -"„Windows-Name“ ist der Buchstabe, den die Partition (vermutlich) unter\n" -"Windows erhalten würde (die erste Partition der ersten Platte heißt „C:“)." +"„Windows-Name“ ist der Buchstabe, den die Partition unter\n" +"Windows erhalten würde (das erste Laufwerk oder die erste Partition heißt " +"„C:“)." #: ../help.pm:567 #, c-format @@ -1338,10 +1147,8 @@ msgstr "" "„%s“ und wählen Sie den richtigen. Ist Ihr Staat nicht in der Liste, können\n" "Sie über die Schaltfläche „%s“ eine vollständigere Liste erzwingen." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:572 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "This step is activated only if an existing GNU/Linux partition has been\n" "found on your machine.\n" @@ -1352,7 +1159,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1368,15 +1176,15 @@ msgstr "" "Partition auf Ihren Festplatten gefunden wird.\n" "\n" "DrakX fragt Sie nun nach der gewünschten Installationsart. Sie haben die\n" -"Wahl zwischen einer Aktualisierung einer bereits vorhandenen\n" -"Mageia-Version oder einer kompletten Neuinstallation:\n" +"Wahl zwischen einer kompletten Neuinstallation oder der Aktualisierung einer " +"bereits vorhandenen Mageia-Version :\n" "\n" -" * „%s“: Entfernt komplett ältere Versionen von Mageia, die noch\n" -"installiert sind - um genau zu sein, können Sie je nach aktuellem Inhalt\n" -"Ihrer Platte auch einige ältere Linux- oder anderweitige Partitionen\n" -"unangetastet behalten. Diese Installationsart ist gut, wenn Sie die\n" +" * „%s“: Entfernt vollständig ältere Versionen, die noch\n" +"installiert sind. Abhängig vom Partitionsschema Ihres Laufwerks können Sie " +"das Überschreiben einiger Ihrer bestehenden Dateien (vor allem der \"home\" " +"Verzeichnisse) verhindern. Diese Installationsart ist gut, wenn Sie die\n" "Partitionseinteilung auf Ihrer Festplatte sowieso ändern oder das benutzte\n" -"Dateisystem austauschen wollen\n" +"Dateisystem austauschen wollen.\n" "\n" " * „%s“: Mit dieser Variante können Sie eine existierende Mageia\n" "Version aktualisieren. Die Partitionstabellen sowie die persönlichen\n" @@ -1425,10 +1233,8 @@ msgstr "" "Tastenkombination Sie zwischen dem von Ihnen gewählten und dem lateinischen\n" "Layout umschalten wollen." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:612 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The first step is to choose your preferred language.\n" "\n" @@ -1472,13 +1278,15 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Als ersten Schritt wählen Sie bitte die gewünschte Sprache.\n" "\n" -"Wählen Sie Ihre bevorzugte Sprache für den Installationsvorgang und\n" -"Systemlaufzeit. Wählen Sie zuerst die Region, in der Sie sich befinden,\n" +"Diese Auswahl betrifft die Sprache des Installationsvorgangs, der " +"Dokumentetion und das gesamte System. Wählen Sie zuerst die Region, in der " +"Sie sich befinden,\n" "anschließend die Sprache, die Sie sprechen.\n" "\n" -"Durch Betätigen der Schaltfläche „%s“ erhalten Sie die Möglichkeit, weitere\n" -"Sprachen auf Ihrem Rechner zu installieren, um diese später verwenden zu\n" -"können. Wollen Sie etwa Spaniern muttersprachlichen Zugang zu Ihrem System\n" +"Durch Betätigen der Schaltfläche „%s“ erhalten Sie die Möglichkeit, weitere " +"Sprachen auszuwählen, welche auf Ihrem System für die Dokumentationen und " +"Anwendungen installiert werden sollen. Wollen Sie etwa Spaniern " +"muttersprachlichen Zugang zu Ihrem System\n" "erlauben, wählen Sie Deutsch als Hauptsprache in der Liste und im\n" "Fortgeschrittenen-Bereich „%s“.\n" "\n" @@ -1488,28 +1296,31 @@ msgstr "" "leider immer noch nicht gegeben. Daher verwendet Mageia diese\n" "Kodierung nur auf Wunsch des Anwenders:\n" "\n" -" * Falls Sie eine Sprache nutzen, die eine gut unterstütztes Kodierung\n" -"verwendet (Sprachen mit Lateinischen Zeichen, Russisch, Griechisch,\n" -"Japanisch, Chinesisch, Koreanisch, Thailändisch), wird standardmäßig das\n" +" * Falls Sie eine Sprache nutzen, die eine gut unterstützte Kodierung\n" +"verwendet (Sprachen mit lateinischen Zeichen - latin1, Russisch, Japanisch, " +"Chinesisch, Koreanisch, Thailändisch, Griechisch, Türkisch, die meisten " +"ISO-8859-2 Sprachen), wird standardmäßig die\n" "klassische Kodierung beibehalten;\n" "\n" " * Alle anderen Sprachen verwenden standardmäßig Unicode;\n" "\n" -" * Fall Sie zwei oder mehr Sprachen verwenden wollen, die unterschiedliche\n" -"klassische Kodierungen verwenden, wird ebenfalls Unicode verwendet;\n" +" * Falls Sie zwei oder mehr Sprachen verwenden wollen, die unterschiedliche\n" +"klassische Kodierungen verwenden, wird ebenfalls Unicode für das gesamte " +"System verwendet;\n" "\n" " * Schlussendlich kann Unicode vom Anwender auch für Sprachen mit\n" -"klassischer Kodierung ausgewählt werden, indem er den Punkt „%s“ markiert.\n" +"klassischer Kodierung festgelegt werden, indem er den Punkt „%s“ markiert.\n" "\n" -"Sie sind nicht auf eine weitere Sprache begrenzt. Sie können so viele\n" -"auswählen, wie Sie wollen, ja sogar alle, indem Sie die Schaltfläche „%s“\n" +"Beachten Sie, dass Sie nicht auf eine weitere Sprache begrenzt sind. Sie " +"können so viele zusätzliche Sprachen auswählen, wie Sie wollen oder sogar " +"alle Sprachen indem Sie die Schaltfläche „%s“\n" "verwenden. Das Auswählen einer Sprache beeinflusst die installierten\n" "Übersetzungen der Programme, Schriften, Rechtschreibkorrekturen, etc.\n" "\n" "Um die Spracheinstellungen des ganzen Systems zwischen verschiedenen\n" "Sprachen umzuschalten, starten Sie einfach „localedrake“ unter dem\n" -"privilegierten Kennzeichen „root“. Wollen Sie die Einstellungen nur für ein\n" -"Kennzeichen ändern starten Sie denselben Befehl mit eben diesem\n" +"privilegierten Kennzeichen „root“. Wollen Sie die Einstellungen nur für " +"einen Zugang ändern starten Sie denselben Befehl mit eben diesem\n" "Kennzeichen." #: ../help.pm:650 @@ -1520,10 +1331,8 @@ msgstr "Spanisch" #: ../help.pm:643 #, c-format msgid "Use Unicode by default" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Standardmäßig Unicode benutzen" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:646 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -1602,8 +1411,6 @@ msgstr "mit Mausrad Emulation" msgid "Universal | Any PS/2 & USB mice" msgstr "Universal | Alle PS/2 & USB-Mäuse" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:687 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -1613,8 +1420,6 @@ msgstr "" "Wählen Sie bitte den richtigen Anschluss. So ist etwa der unter Windows\n" "„COM1“ genannte Anschluss in GNU/Linux unter „ttyS0“ erreichbar." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:684 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -1655,10 +1460,8 @@ msgstr "" "kein Starter installiert. Verwenden Sie diese Möglichkeit nur, wenn Sie\n" "genau wissen was Sie tun." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:745 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Now, it's time to select a printing system for your computer. Other\n" "operating systems may offer you one, but Mageia offers two. Each of\n" @@ -1687,7 +1490,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Hier können Sie das Drucksystem für Ihren Rechner wählen. Andere\n" "Betriebssysteme bieten Ihnen nur eines, bei Mageia können Sie\n" -"zwischen zwei verschiedenen wählen. jedes dieser Systeme ist für eine\n" +"zwischen zwei verschiedenen wählen. Jedes dieser Systeme ist für eine\n" "bestimmte Konfiguration des Systems am besten geeignet.\n" "\n" " * „%s“ -- Es steht für „print, do not queue“ (engl. für „Drucken ohne\n" @@ -1703,14 +1506,14 @@ msgstr "" "Drucker drucken, wie auf einem Drucker, der an einem Server auf der anderen\n" "Seite der Welt hängt. Es ist einfach zu bedienen und kann sowohl als Server\n" "als auch als Klient für das alte „lpd“-Drucksystem verwendet werden - Es\n" -"ist somit rückwärtskompatibel. Es ist sehr mächtig, in seiner\n" +"ist somit rückwärtskompatibel zu älteren Betriebssystemen welche " +"möglicherweise Druckerdienste benötigen. Es ist sehr mächtig, in seiner\n" "Grundeinstellung verhält es sich jedoch genau wie „pdq“. Wenn Sie einen\n" "„lpd“ Server benötigen, müssen Sie einfach nur den „cups-lpd“ Dämon\n" "starten. „%s“ bietet grafische Konfigurations- und Druckmenüs.\n" "\n" "Sie können diese Wahl später immer wieder ändern, indem Sie PrinterDrake\n" -"aus dem Mageia Control Center starten und dort die Schaltfläche „%" -"s“\n" +"aus dem Mageia Kontrollzentrum starten und dort die Schaltfläche „%s“\n" "betätigen." #: ../help.pm:768 @@ -1721,15 +1524,13 @@ msgstr "pdq" #: ../help.pm:724 #, c-format msgid "CUPS" -msgstr "" +msgstr "CUPS" #: ../help.pm:724 #, c-format msgid "Expert" msgstr "Expertenmodus" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:771 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -1770,8 +1571,6 @@ msgstr "" "Adapter erhalten haben oder von den Web-Seiten des Hardware-Anbieters\n" "(sofern Sie einen WWW-Zugang haben)." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:789 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -1783,10 +1582,8 @@ msgstr "" "angezeigt. Sollte die von DrakX getroffene Auswahl nicht korrekt sein,\n" "betätigen Sie einfach die Schaltfläche, um sie zu korrigieren." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:794 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "As a review, DrakX will present a summary of information it has gathered\n" "about your system. Depending on the hardware installed on your machine, you\n" @@ -1849,81 +1646,11 @@ msgid "" "on your machine. If you plan to use this machine as a server it's a good\n" "idea to review this setup." msgstr "" -"Nun bekommen Sie eine Zusammenfassung verschiedener Informationen Ihres\n" -"Systems. Je nach vorhandener Hardware sehen Sie hier (oder eben nicht) die\n" -"folgende Einträge. Jeder Eintrag besteht aus einem konfigurierbaren Gerät\n" -"gefolgt vom dessen aktuellen Zustand. Durch Betätigen der Schaltfläche „%s“\n" -"können Sie diesen ändern.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Kontrollieren Sie die aktuelle Tastaturvorgabe und wählen Sie die\n" -"Schaltfläche, falls Sie die Vorgabe ändern wollen.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Kontrollieren Sie, ob die Auswahl des Staates, in dem Sie sich\n" -"befinden korrekt ist. Falls nicht, betätigen Sie bitte die Schaltfläche\n" -"„%s“ und wählen Sie den richtigen. Ist Ihr Staat nicht in der Liste, können\n" -"Sie über die Schaltfläche „%s“ eine vollständigere Liste erzwingen.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: DrakX versucht die Zeitzone anhand des gewählten Staates zu\n" -"setzen. Sollte diese Auswahl nicht korrekt sein können Sie durch Betätige\n" -"der Schaltfläche „%s“ Ihre lokale Zeitzone setzen.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Kontrollieren Sie die konfigurierte Maus und betätigen Sie, falls\n" -"notwendig, die Schaltfläche.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Durch Anwahl der Schaltfläche „%s“ startet den Druckerassistenten.\n" -"Weitere Informationen zu diesem Assistenten erhalten Sie im Drucker-Kapitel\n" -"des „Starter Handbuch“. Das dort vorgestellte Programm entspricht dem\n" -"während der Installation angebotenen.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Falls eine Soundkarte in Ihrem Rechner gefunden wurde, wird sie\n" -"hier angezeigt. Sollte die von DrakX getroffene Auswahl nicht korrekt sein,\n" -"betätigen Sie einfach die Schaltfläche, um sie zu korrigieren.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Falls eine TV-Karte in Ihrem Rechner gefunden wurde, wird sie hier\n" -"angezeigt. Falls Sie eine TV-Karte besitzen, die hier nicht richtig erkannt\n" -"wurde, können Sie versuchen, diese manuell einzurichten. Betätigen Sie\n" -"einfach die Schaltfläche „%s“.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Falls eine ISDN Karte in Ihrem Rechner gefunden wurde, wird sie\n" -"hier angezeigt. Durch Anwahl der Schaltfläche „%s“ können Sie die Parameter\n" -"ändern.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: DrakX richtet Ihre Grafikumgebung normalerweise in der Auflösung\n" -"„800×600“ bzw. „1024×768“ ein. Sollte Ihnen das nicht zusagen, können Sie\n" -"es durch betätigen der Schaltfläche „%s“ ändern.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Falls Sie Ihren Internetzugang oder Ihr lokales Netzwerk nun\n" -"einrichten wollen, können Sie das hier tun. Lesen Sie sich dazu die\n" -"gedruckte Dokumentation durch oder benutzen Sie das Mageia Control\n" -"Center nachdem die Installation beendet ist.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Hier können Sie HTTP- und FTP-Proxyadressen eintragen falls Ihre\n" -"Maschine die Verbindung über einen Proxyserver abwickelt.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Dieser Eintrag ermöglicht es Ihnen, die Sicherheitsebene Ihres\n" -"Systems zu ändern, die Sie in einem früheren Installationsschritt ()\n" -"gewählt haben.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Falls Sie Ihren Rechner mit dem Internet verbinden wollen, ist es\n" -"sinnvoll sich vor ungebetenen Eindringlingen durch Einrichten einer\n" -"Firewall zu schützen. Weitere Informationen erhalten Sie im „Starter\n" -"Handbuch“.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Falls Sie die Konfiguration Ihres Betriebssystemstarters\n" -"(„Bootloader“) ändern wollen, wählen Sie diese Schaltfläche. Es sei\n" -"angemerkt, dass dieser Punkt sich an fortgeschrittenere Nutzer richtet.\n" -"Hilfe finden Sie in der gedruckten Dokumentation oder im integrierten\n" -"Hilfeteil des Mageia Control Center.\n" -"\n" -" * „%s“: Sie können hier die Dienste wählen, die ab dem Start von\n" -"Mageia zur Verfügung gestellt werden sollen. Wollen Sie den Rechner\n" -"als Server verwenden, sollten Sie unbedingt einen Blick auf diese Liste\n" -"werfen." #: ../help.pm:809 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "TV card" -msgstr "ISDN-Karte" +msgstr "TV-Karte" #: ../help.pm:809 #, c-format @@ -1935,10 +1662,8 @@ msgstr "ISDN-Karte" msgid "Graphical Interface" msgstr "Grafikumgebung" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:861 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Choose the hard disk drive you want to erase in order to install your new\n" "Mageia partition. Be careful, all data on this drive will be lost\n" @@ -1948,14 +1673,14 @@ msgstr "" "Mageia zu installieren. Bedenken Sie dabei, dass alle Daten auf\n" "dieser Platte nach diesem Schritt unwiederbringlich verloren sind!" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:866 #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" @@ -1977,123 +1702,3 @@ msgstr "Weiter ->" #, c-format msgid "<- Previous" msgstr "<- Zurück" - -#~ msgid "" -#~ "\"%s\": clicking on the \"%s\" button will open the printer " -#~ "configuration\n" -#~ "wizard. Consult the corresponding chapter of the ``Starter Guide'' for " -#~ "more\n" -#~ "information on how to set up a new printer. The interface presented in " -#~ "our\n" -#~ "manual is similar to the one used during installation." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "„%s“: Durch Anwahl der Schaltfläche „%s“ startet den Druckerassistenten.\n" -#~ "Weitere Informationen zu diesem Assistenten erhalten Sie im Drucker-" -#~ "Kapitel\n" -#~ "des „Starter Handbuch“. Das dort vorgestellte Programm entspricht dem\n" -#~ "während der Installation angebotenen." - -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/de/drakx-chapter.xml -#~ msgid "" -#~ "This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your GNU/" -#~ "Linux\n" -#~ "system: you must enter the \"root\" password. \"Root\" is the system\n" -#~ "administrator and is the only user authorized to make updates, add " -#~ "users,\n" -#~ "change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short, \"root\" " -#~ "can\n" -#~ "do everything! That's why you must choose a password which is difficult " -#~ "to\n" -#~ "guess: DrakX will tell you if the password you chose is too simple. As " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "can see, you're not forced to enter a password, but we strongly advise\n" -#~ "against this. GNU/Linux is just as prone to operator error as any other\n" -#~ "operating system. Since \"root\" can overcome all limitations and\n" -#~ "unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly accessing the\n" -#~ "partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to become\n" -#~ "\"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password should be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and at least " -#~ "8\n" -#~ "characters long. Never write down the \"root\" password -- it makes it " -#~ "far\n" -#~ "too easy to compromise your system.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "One caveat: do not make the password too long or too complicated because " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "must be able to remember it!\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password will not be displayed on screen as you type it. To reduce " -#~ "the\n" -#~ "chance of a blind typing error you'll need to enter the password twice. " -#~ "If\n" -#~ "you do happen to make the same typing error twice, you'll have to use " -#~ "this\n" -#~ "``incorrect'' password the first time you'll try to connect as \"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you want an authentication server to control access to your computer,\n" -#~ "click on the \"%s\" button.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If your network uses either LDAP, NIS, or PDC Windows Domain " -#~ "authentication\n" -#~ "services, select the appropriate one for \"%s\". If you do not know " -#~ "which\n" -#~ "one to use, you should ask your network administrator.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you happen to have problems with remembering passwords, or if your\n" -#~ "computer will never be connected to the Internet and you absolutely " -#~ "trust\n" -#~ "everybody who uses your computer, you can choose to have \"%s\"." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Dies ist der wichtigste Punkt in der Absicherung Ihres neuen\n" -#~ "GNU/Linux-Systems: Sie müssen das Passwort für „root“ eingeben. „root“ " -#~ "ist\n" -#~ "der Systemadministrator. Er ist der einzige der berechtigt ist, neue\n" -#~ "Software zu installieren, Systemdateien zu ändern oder neue\n" -#~ "Benutzer anzulegen. Kurz gesagt: „root“ darf alles! Daher müssen\n" -#~ "Sie auch ein Passwort auswählen, was nicht leicht zu erraten ist; DrakX\n" -#~ "teilt Ihnen mit, wenn das Passwort zu einfach ist. Sie sehen, dass es " -#~ "auch\n" -#~ "möglich ist, kein Passwort zu vergeben. Wir raten Ihnen jedoch dringend\n" -#~ "davon ab! GNU/Linux ist genauso anfällig für Fehler wie jedes andere \n" -#~ "Betriebssystem. »root« hat keine Beschränkungen. Er könnte beispielsweise\n" -#~ "unbeabsichtigterweise alle Daten auf allen Partitionen löschen. Also " -#~ "sollte\n" -#~ "es schwierig gemacht werden, „root“ zu werden!\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Das Passwort sollte eine Mischung aus alphanumerischen Zeichen sein und\n" -#~ "mindestens acht Zeichen lang. Es sollte niemals irgendwo aufgeschrieben\n" -#~ "werden.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Machen Sie das Passwort aber nicht zu lang oder zu kompliziert: Sie " -#~ "sollten\n" -#~ "es sich ohne großen Aufwand merken können.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Bei der Eingabe des Passwortes wird nichts angezeigt. Um ein " -#~ "Verschreiben\n" -#~ "bei dieser „Blindeingabe“ zu vermeiden müssen Sie das Passwort zweimal\n" -#~ "eingeben - ein Tippfehler beim ersten Versuch könnte sonst zu einem " -#~ "Problem\n" -#~ "werden, da Sie anschließend das „falsche“ Passwort bei der Verbindung " -#~ "mit\n" -#~ "dem System eingeben müssten.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Wenn Sie wollen, dass der Zugang zu diesem Rechner über einen\n" -#~ "Authentifizierungsserver verwaltet wird, betätigen Sie die Schaltfläche\n" -#~ "„%s“.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Falls in Ihrem Netzwerk LDAP, NIS oder PDC zur Authentifizierung " -#~ "verwendet\n" -#~ "wird, wählen Sie bitte den entsprechenden Menüpunkt für „%s“. Falls Sie " -#~ "nicht\n" -#~ "wissen, welches Protokoll Sie verwenden sollen, fragen Sie Ihren\n" -#~ "Netzwerkadministrator.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Wenn Sie Probleme haben, sich Passwörter zu merken, oder Ihr Computer " -#~ "nie\n" -#~ "mit dem Internet verbunden wird und Sie allen Benutzern Ihres Computers\n" -#~ "absolut vertrauen, können Sie die Option „%s“ wählen." - -#~ msgid "authentication" -#~ msgstr "Authentifizierung" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/el.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/el.po index 40794d802..7e352e7a6 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/el.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/el.po @@ -1,38 +1,43 @@ -# translation of DrakX-el.po to Greek -# Greek translation for drakfloppy. -# Copyright (C) 2001,2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc. -# Thanos Kyritsis <djart@hellug.gr>, 2001. -# Νίκος Νύκταρης (Nick Niktaris) <niktarin@yahoo.com>, 2003 +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) YEAR THE PACKAGE'S COPYRIGHT HOLDER +# This file is distributed under the same license as the PACKAGE package. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. # +# Translators: +# Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2024 +# Dimitrios Glentadakis <dglent@free.fr>, 2025 +# +#, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: DrakX-el\n" +"Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2008-09-12 12:22+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2004-09-15 13:28+0200\n" -"Last-Translator: Νίκος Νύκταρης (Nick Niktaris) <niktarin@yahoo.com>\n" -"Language-Team: Greek <nls@tux.hellug.gr>\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2024-09-04 17:33+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Dimitrios Glentadakis <dglent@free.fr>, 2025\n" +"Language-Team: Greek (https://app.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/teams/9361/el/)\n" +"Language: el\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"X-Generator: KBabel 1.0.1\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" #: ../help.pm:14 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Before continuing, you should carefully read the terms of the license. It\n" "covers the entire Mageia distribution. If you agree with all the\n" "terms it contains, check the \"%s\" box. If not, clicking on the \"%s\"\n" "button will reboot your computer." msgstr "" -"\n" -" Linux\n" -" Αποδοχή\n" -"." +"Πριν συνεχίσετε θα πρέπει να διαβάσετε προσεκτικά τους όρους της άδειας " +"χρήσης.\n" +"Καλύπτουν ολόκληρη την διανομή Mageia. Αν συμφωνείτε, επιλέξτε το πλαίσιο " +"\"%s\" , \n" +"διαφορετικά, πιέζοντας το κουμπί \"%s\" θα γίνει επανεκκίνηση του υπολογιστή." #: ../help.pm:20 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "GNU/Linux is a multi-user system which means each user can have his or her\n" "own preferences, own files and so on. But unlike \"root\", who is the\n" @@ -71,63 +76,86 @@ msgid "" "security), choose the desired user and window manager, then click on\n" "\"%s\". If you're not interested in this feature, uncheck the \"%s\" box." msgstr "" -"Linux χρήστης χρήστης\n" -"\n" -" χρήστης\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" χρήστης\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" χρήστης\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Χρήστης\n" -" χρήστης\n" -" εξ' ορισμού\n" -" χρήστης\n" -"\n" -" απλό\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Αποδοχή χρήστης Προσθήκη χρήστης\n" -"\n" -" Επόμενο\n" -"\n" -" Για Προχωρημένους εξ' ορισμού\n" -" χρήστης εξ' ορισμού\n" -"\n" -" Πότε χρήστης\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" χρήστης Επόμενο\n" -" Ολοκληρώθηκε\n" -"." +"GNU/Linux είναι ένα σύστημα πολλαπλών χρηστών, που σημαίνει ότι κάθε " +"χρήστης\n" +"μπορεί να έχει τις δικές του προτιμήσεις, τα δικά του αρχεία κλπ. Όμως, εν " +"αντιθέσει με\n" +"τον χρήστη \"root\", ο οποίος είναι ο διαχειριστής του συστήματος, οι " +"χρήστες που προσθέτετε\n" +"εδώ, δεν θα είναι εξουσιοδοτημένοι να αλλάξουν οτιδήποτε εκτός από τα δικά " +"τους αρχεία\n" +"και διαμορφώσεις, προστατεύοντας έτσι το σύστημα από ακούσιες ή κακόβουλες " +"αλλαγές\n" +"που θα μπορούσαν να επηρεάσουν ολόκληρο το σύστημα. Θα πρέπει να " +"δημιουργήσετε\n" +"τουλάχιστον έναν τυπικό χρήστη για τον εαυτό σας -- αυτός είναι ο " +"λογαριασμός που θα πρέπει\n" +"να χρησιμοποιείτε για καθημερινή χρήση. Αν και είναι πολύ εύκολο να " +"συνδεθείτε ως \"root\"\n" +"και να κάνετε τα πάντα, μπορεί επίσης να είναι και πολύ επικίνδυνο! Ένα πολύ " +"απλό λάθος\n" +"θα μπορούσε να θέσει και εκτός λειτουργίας το σύστημά σας. Αν κάνετε ένα " +"σοβαρό λάθος ως\n" +"τυπικός χρήστης, το χειρότερο που μπορεί να συμβεί είναι να χάσετε μερικές " +"πληροφορίες,\n" +"αλλά δεν θα επηρεάσετε ολόκληρο το σύστημα.\n" +"\n" +"Στο πρώτο πεδίο σας ζητείται το πραγματικό σας όνομα. Φυσικά, αυτό δεν είναι " +"υποχρεωτικό\n" +"-- μπορείτε να εισάγετε το όνομα που επιθυμείτε. Το DrakX θα χρησιμοποιήσει " +"την πρώτη λέξη\n" +"που πληκτρολογείτε σε αυτό το πεδίο και θα την αντιγράψει στο πεδίο \"%s\", " +"το οποίο είναι το όνομα\n" +"που θα χρησιμοποιεί αυτός ο χρήστης για να συνδεθεί στο σύστημα. Εάν θέλετε, " +"μπορείτε να παρακάμψετε\n" +"την προεπιλογή αυτή και να αλλάξετε το όνομα χρήστη. Το επόμενο βήμα αφορά " +"τον κωδικό πρόσβασης.\n" +"Από άποψη ασφάλειας, ο κωδικός πρόσβασης ενός μη προνομιούχου (τυπικού) " +"χρήστη δεν είναι τόσο κρίσιμος\n" +"όσο ο κωδικός πρόσβασης του διαχειριστή \"root\", αλλά αυτό δεν είναι λόγος " +"να τον παραμελήσετε, αφήνοντάς τον\n" +"κενό ή πολύ απλό γιατί μπορεί να θέσετε σε κίνδυνο τα αρχεία του " +"συγκεκριμένου χρήστη.\n" +"\n" +"Με κλικ στο κουμπί \"%s\", μπορείτε να προσθέσετε άλλους χρήστες. Προσθέστε " +"έναν χρήστη\n" +"για κάθε έναν πχ από τους φίλους σας, τον πατέρα σας, την αδερφή σας κλπ. " +"Κάντε κλικ\n" +"στο \"%s\" όταν τελειώσετε την προσθήκη χρηστών.\n" +"\n" +"Κάνοντας κλικ στο κουμπί \"%s\", μπορείτε να αλλάξετε το προεπιλεγμένο " +"\"κέλυφος\" για τον χρήστη\n" +"(το προκαθορισμένο κέλυφος είναι το bash).\n" +"\n" +"Όταν τελειώσετε με την προσθήκη χρηστών, θα σας ζητηθεί να επιλέξετε έναν " +"χρήστη\n" +"που θα συνδέεται αυτόματα στο σύστημα κατά την εκκίνηση του υπολογιστή.\n" +"Εάν σας ενδιαφέρει αυτή η δυνατότητα (και δεν ανησυχείτε ιδιαίτερα για την " +"τοπική ασφάλεια),\n" +"επιλέξτε τον επιθυμητό χρήστη και τον διαχειριστή παραθύρων και στη " +"συνέχεια, κάντε κλικ στο \"%s\".\n" +"Εάν δεν σας ενδιαφέρει αυτή η δυνατότητα, αποεπιλέξτε το πλαίσιο \"%s\"." #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "User name" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Όνομα χρήστη" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "Accept user" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Αποδοχή χρήστη" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "Do you want to use this feature?" -msgstr "Θέλετε να χρησιμοποιήσετε αυτή τη λειτουργία;" +msgstr "Θέλετε να χρησιμοποιήσετε αυτήν την λειτουργία;" #: ../help.pm:57 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -137,13 +165,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -154,41 +185,53 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" -"Linux ανιχνεύθηκε\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Ολοκληρώθηκε\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Linux\n" -"\n" -" Όνομα\n" +"Παρατίθενται εδώ οι υπάρχουσες κατατμήσεις Linux που ανιχνεύθηκαν στον " +"σκληρό σας δίσκο.\n" +"Μπορείτε να διατηρήσετε τις επιλογές που έκανε ο οδηγός, καθώς είναι " +"κατάλληλες για τις\n" +"περισσότερες τυπικές εγκαταστάσεις. Εάν κάνετε αλλαγές, πρέπει τουλάχιστον " +"να ορίσετε\n" +"μια κατάτμηση root (\"/\"). Μην επιλέξετε μια πολύ μικρή κατάτμηση, διότι " +"δεν θα μπορέσετε\n" +"να εγκαταστήσετε αρκετές εφαρμογές. Εάν θέλετε να αποθηκεύσετε τα δεδομένα " +"σας\n" +"σε ξεχωριστή κατάτμηση, θα χρειαστεί επίσης να δημιουργήσετε μια κατάτμηση " +"\"/home\"\n" +"(εφικτό μόνον εάν έχετε περισσότερες από μία κατατμήσεις Linux διαθέσιμες).\n" "\n" -" Όνομα\n" +"Κάθε κατάτμηση παρατίθεται ως εξής: \"Όνομα\", \"Χωρητικότητα\".\n" "\n" +"Το \"Όνομα\" έχει τη δομή: \"τύπος σκληρού δίσκου\", \"αριθμός σκληρού " +"δίσκου\",\n" +"\"αριθμός κατάτμησης\" (για παράδειγμα, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -" IDE\n" +"Ο \"Τύπος του σκληρού δίσκου\" είναι \"hd\" εάν ο σκληρός σας δίσκος είναι " +"IDE και\n" +"\"sd\" εάν είναι SCSI.\n" "\n" +"Ο \"Αριθμός σκληρού δίσκου\" είναι πάντα ένα γράμμα μετά το \"hd\" ή το " +"\"sd\".\n" +"Για τους IDE σκληρούς δίσκους:\n" "\n" -" IDE\n" +" * \"a\" σημαίνει \"κύριος σκληρός δίσκος στον κύριο ελεγκτή IDE\".\n" "\n" +" * \"b\" σημαίνει \"δευτερεύων σκληρός δίσκος στον κύριο ελεγκτή IDE\".\n" "\n" -" πρωτεύουσα IDE\n" +" * \"c\" σημαίνει \"κύριος σκληρός δίσκος στον δευτερεύοντα ελεγκτή IDE\".\n" "\n" -" πρωτεύουσα IDE\n" +" * \"d\" σημαίνει \"δευτερεύων σκληρός δίσκος στον δευτερεύοντα ελεγκτή " +"IDE\".\n" "\n" -" δευτερεύουσα IDE\n" -"\n" -" δευτερεύουσα IDE\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"." +"Για τους σκληρούς δίσκους SCSI, το \"a\" σημαίνει \"χαμηλότερο SCSI ID\", το " +"\"b\"\n" +"σημαίνει \"δεύτερο χαμηλότερο SCSI ID\", κλπ." #: ../help.pm:88 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The Mageia installation is distributed on several CD-ROMs. If a\n" "selected package is located on another CD-ROM, DrakX will eject the current\n" @@ -196,12 +239,15 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"Η εγκατάσταση του Mageia είναι μοιρασμένο σε αρκετά CD-ROM. Το \n" -"DrakX ξέρει αν ένα επιλεγμένο πακέτο υπάρχει σε άλλο CD-ROM, θα εξάγει το \n" -"τρέχον CD και θα ζητήσει να εισάγετε ένα άλλο όταν αυτό θα χρειαστεί." +"Η εγκατάσταση της Mageia διανέμεται σε περισσότερα CD-ROM.\n" +"Εάν ένα επιλεγμένο πακέτο βρίσκεται σε άλλο CD-ROM, το DrakX θα εξαγάγει\n" +"το τρέχον CD και θα σας ζητήσει να εισαγάγετε το απαιτούμενο. Εάν δεν το " +"έχετε\n" +"στη διάθεσή σας, απλώς κάντε κλικ στο \"%s\"· τα πακέτα που αντιστοιχούν δεν " +"θα εγκατασταθούν." #: ../help.pm:95 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "It's now time to specify which programs you wish to install on your system.\n" "There are thousands of packages available for Mageia, and to make it\n" @@ -258,56 +304,76 @@ msgid "" "command-line interface. The total size of this installation is about 65\n" "megabytes." msgstr "" -"\n" -" Linux\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Linux\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Σταθμός Εργασίας\n" -" Ανάπτυξη\n" -"\n" -" Σταθμός Εργασίας\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Ανάπτυξη\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Εξυπηρετητής εξυπηρετητής\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Μετακίνηση σε εξέλιξη Ομάδα εργασίας:\n" -" Ομάδα εργασίας:\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" εξυπηρετητής\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Linux\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Αναβάθμιση\n" -" νέο\n" -"." +"Τώρα θα πρέπει να προσδιορίσετε ποια προγράμματα θέλετε να εγκαταστήσετε\n" +"στο σύστημά σας. Υπάρχουν χιλιάδες διαθέσιμα πακέτα για τη Mageia,\n" +"τα οποία είναι κατηγοριοποιημένα σε ομάδες εφαρμογών για να διευκολυνθεί η " +"διαχείρισή τους.\n" +"\n" +"Η Mageia ταξινομεί τις ομάδες πακέτων σε τέσσερις κατηγορίες. Μπορείτε να " +"συνδυάσετε\n" +"και να ταιριάξετε εφαρμογές μεταξύ των κατηγοριών ούτως ώστε μια εγκατάσταση " +"«Σταθμού Εργασίας»\n" +"να μπορεί να περιλαμβάνει εφαρμογές από την κατηγορία «Διακομιστής».\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": αν σκοπεύετε να χρησιμοποιήσετε το μηχάνημά σας ως σταθμό " +"εργασίας, επιλέξτε\n" +"μία ή περισσότερες ομάδες από την κατηγορία σταθμού εργασίας.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": αν σκοπεύετε να χρησιμοποιήσετε το μηχάνημά σας για " +"προγραμματισμό, επιλέξτε\n" +"τις κατάλληλες ομάδες από αυτήν την κατηγορία. Η ειδική ομάδα \"LSB\" θα " +"ρυθμίσει\n" +"το σύστημά σας κατά τρόπο ώστε να συμμορφώνεται όσο το δυνατόν περισσότερο\n" +"με τις προδιαγραφές του Linux Standard Base.\n" +"\n" +" Η επιλογή της ομάδας \"LSB\" θα διασφαλίσει 100%% συμμόρφωση του " +"συστήματος με το LSB.\n" +"Ωστόσο, ακόμα και αν δεν επιλέξετε την ομάδα \"LSB\", θα έχετε εξίσου ένα " +"σύστημα που είναι\n" +"σχεδόν 100%% συμμορφωμένο με το LSB.\n" +"* \"%s\": αν το μηχάνημά σας προορίζεται για διακομιστή, επιλέξτε ποιες από " +"τις\n" +"πιο κοινές υπηρεσίες θέλετε να εγκαταστήσετε στο μηχάνημά σας.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": εδώ θα επιλέξετε το προτιμώμενο γραφικό περιβάλλον σας.\n" +"Πρέπει να επιλέξετε τουλάχιστον ένα εάν θέλετε να έχετε διαθέσιμη γραφική " +"διεπαφή.\n" +"\n" +"Μετακινώντας τον δρομέα του ποντικιού πάνω από το όνομα μιας ομάδας,\n" +"θα εμφανιστεί ένα σύντομο επεξηγηματικό κείμενο για την ομάδα αυτή.\n" +"\n" +"Μπορείτε να επιλέξετε το πλαίσιο \"%s\", το οποίο είναι χρήσιμο αν είστε " +"εξοικειωμένοι\n" +"με τα προσφερόμενα πακέτα ή αν θέλετε να έχετε πλήρη έλεγχο για το τι θα " +"εγκατασταθεί.\n" +"\n" +"Αν ξεκινήσετε την εγκατάσταση σε λειτουργία \"%s\", μπορείτε να " +"αποεπιλέξετε\n" +"όλες τις ομάδες και να αποτρέψετε την εγκατάσταση νέων πακέτων.\n" +"Αυτό είναι χρήσιμο για την επιδιόρθωση ή την ενημέρωση μιας υπάρχουσας " +"εγκατάστασης.\n" +"\n" +"Αν αποεπιλέξετε όλες τις ομάδες κατά την πραγματοποίηση μιας τυπικής " +"εγκατάστασης\n" +"(αντί αυτήν της αναβάθμισης), θα εμφανιστεί ένα παράθυρο διαλόγου " +"προτείνοντας\n" +"διάφορες επιλογές για μια ελάχιστη εγκατάσταση:\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": εγκαθιστά τον ελάχιστο αριθμό πακέτων που είναι απαραίτητα για να " +"έχετε ένα\n" +"λειτουργικό γραφικό περιβάλλον.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": εγκαθιστά το βασικό σύστημα μαζί με βασικά εργαλεία και την " +"τεκμηρίωσή τους.\n" +"Αυτή η εγκατάσταση είναι κατάλληλη για τη ρύθμιση ενός διακομιστή.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": θα εγκαταστήσει τον απόλυτα ελάχιστο αριθμό πακέτων που " +"απαιτούνται\n" +"για να έχετε ένα λειτουργικό σύστημα Linux. Με αυτού του τύπου την " +"εγκατάσταση θα έχετε\n" +"μόνο μια διεπαφή γραμμής εντολών. Το συνολικό μέγεθος αυτής της " +"εγκατάστασης\n" +"είναι περίπου 65 MB." #: ../help.pm:149 ../help.pm:591 #, c-format @@ -315,17 +381,17 @@ msgid "Upgrade" msgstr "Αναβάθμιση" #: ../help.pm:149 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "With basic documentation" -msgstr "Με την βασική τεκμηρίωση (συνιστάται!)" +msgstr "Με την βασική τεκμηρίωση" #: ../help.pm:149 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "Truly minimal install" -msgstr "Ελάχιστη Εγκατάσταση" +msgstr "Πραγματικά ελάχιστη εγκατάσταση" #: ../help.pm:152 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you choose to install packages individually, the installer will present\n" "a tree containing all packages classified by groups and subgroups. While\n" @@ -361,47 +427,64 @@ msgid "" "another installation. See the second tip of the last step on how to create\n" "such a floppy." msgstr "" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" εξυπηρετητής\n" -" Ομάδα εργασίας:\n" -"\n" -" εξ' ορισμού Linux\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Linux\n" -"\n" -" Όχι Ναι\n" -"\n" -" εξ' ορισμού\n" -"\n" -" απενεργοποίηση\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"." +"Αν επιλέξετε να εγκαταστήσετε πακέτα μεμονωμένα, ο εγκαταστάτης θα σας\n" +"παρουσιάσει ένα δέντρο που περιέχει όλα τα πακέτα ταξινομημένα κατά ομάδες\n" +"και υποομάδες. Κατά την περιήγησή σας στο δέντρο, μπορείτε να επιλέξετε " +"ολόκληρες\n" +"ομάδες, υποομάδες ή μεμονωμένα πακέτα.\n" +"\n" +"Κάθε φορά που επιλέγετε ένα πακέτο στο δέντρο, θα εμφανίζεται μια περιγραφή " +"στα δεξιά\n" +"για να σας ενημερώνει σχετικά με το συγκεκριμένο πακέτο.\n" +"\n" +"!! Αν έχει επιλεγεί κάποιο πακέτο εξυπηρετητή, είτε επειδή το επιλέξατε " +"εσείς είτε επειδή\n" +"ήταν μέρος μιας ομάδας πακέτων, θα σας ζητηθεί να επιβεβαιώσετε την " +"εγκατάσταση\n" +"αυτών των εξυπηρετητών. Εξ ορισμού, η Mageia θα ξεκινήσει αυτόματα " +"οποιαδήποτε\n" +"εγκατεστημένη υπηρεσία κατά την εκκίνηση του συστήματος. Ακόμα και αν είναι " +"ασφαλείς\n" +"και δεν υπάρχουν γνωστοποιημένα προβλήματα κατά την κυκλοφορία της " +"διανομής,\n" +"είναι πιθανό να ανακαλύφθηκαν προβλήματα ασφαλείας μετά την ολοκλήρωση " +"αυτής\n" +"της έκδοσης της Mageia. Αν δεν γνωρίζετε τι ακριβώς κάνει μια συγκεκριμένη " +"υπηρεσία\n" +"και γιατί εγκαθίσταται, τότε κάντε κλικ στο \"%s\". Κάνοντας κλικ στο \"%s\" " +"θα εγκαταστήσετε\n" +"τις υπηρεσίες στο κατάστιχο και αυτές θα ξεκινήσουν αυτόματα κατά την " +"εκκίνηση του συστήματος. !!\n" +"\n" +"Η επιλογή \"%s\" χρησιμοποιείται για να απενεργοποιηθεί το προειδοποιητικό " +"μήνυμα που εμφανίζεται\n" +"κάθε φορά που ο εγκαταστάτης επιλέγει αυτόματα ένα πακέτο για την επίλυση " +"μιας εξάρτησης.\n" +"Ορισμένα πακέτα εξαρτώνται από άλλα και η εγκατάσταση ενός συγκεκριμένου " +"πακέτου μπορεί\n" +"να απαιτεί την εγκατάσταση κάποιου άλλου πακέτου. Ο εγκαταστάτης μπορεί να " +"προσδιορίσει\n" +"ποια πακέτα απαιτούνται για να καλύψουν μια εξάρτηση και να ολοκληρώσει " +"επιτυχώς την εγκατάσταση.\n" +"\n" +"Το μικρό εικονίδιο δισκέτας στη βάση του κατάστιχου σας επιτρέπει να " +"φορτώσετε ένα κατάστιχο πακέτων\n" +"που δημιουργήθηκε σε μια προηγούμενη εγκατάσταση. Αυτό είναι χρήσιμο αν " +"έχετε αρκετούς υπολογιστές\n" +"που θέλετε να διαμορφώσετε με τον ίδιο τρόπο. Κάνοντας κλικ σε αυτό το " +"εικονίδιο, θα σας ζητηθεί\n" +"να εισαγάγετε την δισκέτα που δημιουργήθηκε στο τέλος μιας άλλης " +"εγκατάστασης.\n" +"Δείτε τη δεύτερη συμβουλή του τελευταίου βήματος για το πώς να δημιουργήσετε " +"μια τέτοια δισκέτα." #: ../help.pm:183 #, c-format msgid "Automatic dependencies" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Αυτόματες εξαρτήσεις" #: ../help.pm:185 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "This dialog is used to select which services you wish to start at boot\n" "time.\n" @@ -420,24 +503,30 @@ msgid "" "Please remember that some services can be dangerous if they're enabled on a\n" "server. In general, select only those services you really need. !!" msgstr "" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" εξ' ορισμού\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" εξυπηρετητής\n" -"\n" -" εξυπηρετητής\n" -"!" +"Αυτός ο διάλογος χρησιμοποιείται για να επιλέξετε τις υπηρεσίες θέλετε\n" +"να ξεκινούν κατά την εκκίνηση.\n" +"\n" +"Το DrakX θα εμφανίσει όλες τις διαθέσιμες υπηρεσίες στην τρέχουσα " +"εγκατάσταση.\n" +"Εξετάστε προσεκτικά καθεμία από αυτές και αποεπιλέξτε όσες δεν χρειάζονται " +"κατά την εκκίνηση.\n" +"\n" +"Όταν επιλέγετε μια υπηρεσία, θα εμφανίζεται ένα σύντομο επεξηγηματικό " +"κείμενο. Ωστόσο,\n" +"αν δεν είστε σίγουρος-η αν μια υπηρεσία είναι χρήσιμη ή όχι, είναι πιο " +"ασφαλές να το αφήσετε ως έχει.\n" +"\n" +"!! Σε αυτό το στάδιο, να είστε πολύ προσεκτικός-η αν σκοπεύετε να " +"χρησιμοποιήσετε τον υπολογιστή\n" +"σας ως διακομιστή: λογικά δεν θέλετε να ξεκινούν υπηρεσίες που δεν " +"χρειάζεστε.\n" +"Να θυμάστε ότι ορισμένες υπηρεσίες μπορεί να είναι επικίνδυνες αν είναι " +"ενεργοποιημένες\n" +"σε έναν διακομιστή. Γενικά, επιλέξτε μόνο τις υπηρεσίες που πραγματικά " +"χρειάζεστε. !!" #: ../help.pm:209 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "GNU/Linux manages time in GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) and translates it to\n" "local time according to the time zone you selected. If the clock on your\n" @@ -452,31 +541,36 @@ msgid "" "choose a time server located near you. This option actually installs a time\n" "server which can be used by other machines on your local network as well." msgstr "" -"Linux\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" HardDrake Linux\n" -"\n" -" Τομέας Windows \n" -"\n" -"\n" -" εξυπηρετητής Διαδίκτυο\n" -" Διαδίκτυο\n" -" εξυπηρετητής\n" -" εξυπηρετητής." +"Το GNU/Linux διαχειρίζεται τον χρόνο σε GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) και τον\n" +"μεταφράζει σε τοπική ώρα σύμφωνα με τη ζώνη ώρας που έχετε επιλέξει.\n" +"Αν η ώρα στη μητρική σας κάρτα είναι ρυθμισμένη στην τοπική ώρα,\n" +"μπορείτε να απενεργοποιήσετε αυτήν την επιλογή αποεπιλέγοντας το \"%s\",\n" +"το οποίο θα ενημερώσει το GNU/Linux ότι η ώρα του συστήματος και της " +"μητρικής κάρτας\n" +"είναι στην ίδια ζώνη ώρας. Αυτό είναι χρήσιμο επίσης όταν περισσότερα " +"λειτουργικά\n" +"συστήματα είναι εγκατεστημένα στο μηχάνημα.\n" +"\n" +"Η επιλογή \"%s\" θα ρυθμίσει αυτόματα την ώρα του συστήματος μέσω ενός " +"απομακρυσμένου\n" +"διακομιστή ώρας στο διαδίκτυο. Αυτό απαιτεί μια διαδικτυακή σύνδεση.\n" +"Συνιστάται η επιλογή ενός διακομιστή ώρας που βρίσκεται κοντά σας.\n" +"Αυτή η επιλογή εγκαθιστά στην πραγματικότητα έναν διακομιστή ώρας, ο οποίος " +"μπορεί\n" +"να χρησιμοποιηθεί και από άλλες μηχανές στο τοπικό σας δίκτυο." #: ../help.pm:213 #, c-format msgid "Hardware clock set to GMT" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Το ρολόι του υλικού είναι ρυθμισμένο σε ώρα GMT" #: ../help.pm:213 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "Automatic time synchronization" -msgstr "Αυτόματος συγχρονισμός ώρας (χρήση NTP)" +msgstr "Αυτόματος συγχρονισμός της ώρας" #: ../help.pm:223 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Graphic Card\n" "\n" @@ -488,18 +582,18 @@ msgid "" "with or without 3D acceleration, you're asked to choose the server which\n" "best suits your needs." msgstr "" +"Κάρτα γραφικών\n" "\n" +"Ο εγκαταστάτης θα εντοπίσει και θα ρυθμίσει αυτόματα την κάρτα γραφικών\n" +"που είναι εγκατεστημένη στο μηχάνημά σας. Σε περίπτωση που η επιλογή\n" +"δεν είναι σωστή, μπορείτε να επιλέξετε από αυτό το κατάστιχο την κάρτα σας.\n" "\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" εξυπηρετητής\n" -"." +"Σε περίπτωση που διατίθενται διαφορετικοί διακομιστές για την κάρτα σας,\n" +"με ή χωρίς επιτάχυνση 3D, θα σας ζητηθεί να επιλέξετε τον διακομιστή\n" +"που ταιριάζει καλύτερα στις ανάγκες σας." #: ../help.pm:234 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "X (for X Window System) is the heart of the GNU/Linux graphical interface\n" "on which all the graphical environments (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep,\n" @@ -557,60 +651,72 @@ msgid "" "want to check \"%s\" if your machine is to act as a server, or if you were\n" "not successful in getting the display configured." msgstr "" -"Σύστημα Linux\n" -"\n" -" Linux\n" -"\n" -"\n" +"Το X (X Window System) είναι η καρδιά του γραφικού περιβάλλοντος\n" +"του GNU/Linux, στην οποία βασίζονται όλα τα γραφικά περιβάλλοντα\n" +"(KDE, GNOME, AfterStep, WindowMaker, κ.λπ.) που περιλαμβάνονται στη Mageia.\n" "\n" +"Θα δείτε ένα κατάστιχο με διάφορες παραμέτρους ώστε να επιτύχετε\n" +"την βέλτιστη γραφική απεικόνιση.\n" "\n" +"Κάρτα γραφικών\n" "\n" +" Ο εγκαταστάτης συνήθως ανιχνεύει και ρυθμίζει αυτόματα την κάρτα " +"γραφικών\n" +"που είναι εγκατεστημένη στον υπολογιστή σας. Αν η ανίχνευση δεν είναι " +"σωστή,\n" +"μπορείτε να επιλέξετε την σωστή κάρτα από το κατάστιχο.\n" "\n" +" Στην περίπτωση που υπάρχουν διαφορετικοί διαθέσιμοι εξυπηρετητές για την " +"κάρτα σας,\n" +"με ή χωρίς επιτάχυνση 3D, θα σας ζητηθεί να επιλέξετε αυτόν που θεωρείτε τον " +"πιο κατάλληλο.\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" -" εξυπηρετητής\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Οθόνη\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Ανάλυση\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Δοκιμή\n" +"Οθόνη\n" "\n" +" Κανονικά, ο εγκαταστάτης θα ανιχνεύσει και θα ρυθμίσει αυτόματα την " +"οθόνη.\n" +"Αν η ανίχνευση δεν είναι σωστή, μπορείτε να επιλέξετε την σωστή οθόνη από το " +"κατάστιχο.\n" "\n" -" Ναι\n" "\n" "\n" +"Ανάλυση \n" +" Εδώ μπορείτε να επιλέξετε τις διαθέσιμες αναλύσεις και βάθη χρώματος για\n" +"το γραφικό σας υλικό. Επιλέξτε αυτήν που ταιριάζει καλύτερα στις ανάγκες " +"σας\n" +"(μπορείτε να την αλλάξετε και μετά την εγκατάσταση). Μια προεπισκόπηση\n" +"της επιλεγμένης διαμόρφωσης εμφανίζεται στην εικόνα της οθόνης.\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" +"Δοκιμή \n" +" Ανάλογα με το υλικό σας, αυτή η επιλογή μπορεί να μην εμφανιστεί.\n" "\n" +" Το σύστημα θα προσπαθήσει να ανοίξει μια γραφική οθόνη στη ζητούμενη " +"ανάλυση.\n" +"Αν δείτε το δοκιμαστικό μήνυμα κατά τη διάρκεια της δοκιμής και απαντήσετε " +"\"%s\",\n" +"τότε το DrakX θα προχωρήσει στο επόμενο βήμα. Αν δεν το δείτε, αυτό " +"σημαίνει\n" +"ότι κάποιο μέρος της αυτόματης διαμόρφωσης ήταν λανθασμένο και η δοκιμή\n" +"θα τερματιστεί αυτόματα μετά από 12 δευτερόλεπτα, επιστρέφοντάς σας στο " +"μενού.\n" +"Αλλάξτε τις ρυθμίσεις μέχρι να επιτύχετε την σωστή γραφική απεικόνιση.\n" "\n" -" Επιλογές\n" "\n" "\n" +"Επιλογές\n" "\n" -" Όχι εξυπηρετητής\n" -"." +" Σε αυτό το στάδιο, μπορείτε να επιλέξετε αν θέλετε το σύστημά σας να\n" +"μεταβαίνει αυτόματα σε γραφικό περιβάλλον κατά την εκκίνηση.\n" +"Προφανώς, μπορεί να θέλετε να επιλέξετε \"%s\" αν ο υπολογιστής σας\n" +"προορίζεται να λειτουργήσει ως διακομιστής ή αν δεν καταφέρατε\n" +"να ρυθμίσετε σωστά την οθόνη." #: ../help.pm:291 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Monitor\n" "\n" @@ -620,12 +726,13 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Οθόνη\n" "\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"." +" Κανονικά, ο εγκαταστάτης θα εντοπίσει και θα ρυθμίσει αυτόματα\n" +"την οθόνη που είναι συνδεδεμένη στο μηχάνημά σας. Αν δεν κάνει την\n" +"σωστή επιλογή, μπορείτε να επιλέξετε από αυτό το κατάστιχο την\n" +"οθόνη που είναι συνδεδεμένη στον υπολογιστή σας." #: ../help.pm:298 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Resolution\n" "\n" @@ -636,24 +743,25 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Ανάλυση\n" "\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"." +" Εδώ μπορείτε να επιλέξετε τις διαθέσιμες αναλύσεις και τα βάθη χρώματος\n" +"για το γραφικό σας υλικό. Επιλέξτε αυτό που ταιριάζει καλύτερα στις ανάγκες " +"σας\n" +"(θα μπορείτε να κάνετε αλλαγές μετά την εγκατάσταση).\n" +"Ένα δείγμα της επιλεγμένης διαμόρφωσης εμφανίζεται στην εικόνα της οθόνης." #: ../help.pm:306 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "In the situation where different servers are available for your card, with\n" "or without 3D acceleration, you're asked to choose the server which best\n" "suits your needs." msgstr "" -"\n" -" εξυπηρετητής\n" -"." +"Στην περίπτωση που υπάρχουν διαθέσιμοι διαφορετικοί διακομιστές\n" +"για την κάρτα σας, με ή χωρίς επιτάχυνση 3D, θα σας ζητηθεί να επιλέξετε\n" +"τον διακομιστή που εξυπηρετεί καλύτερα τις ανάγκες σας." #: ../help.pm:311 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Options\n" "\n" @@ -662,23 +770,27 @@ msgid "" "want to check \"%s\" if your machine is to act as a server, or if you were\n" "not successful in getting the display configured." msgstr "" +"Επιλογές\n" "\n" -"\n" -" Όχι\n" -" εξυπηρετητής\n" -"." +" Σε αυτό το στάδιο, μπορείτε να επιλέξετε αν θέλετε το σύστημά σας να\n" +"μεταβαίνει αυτόματα σε γραφικό περιβάλλον κατά την εκκίνηση.\n" +"Προφανώς, μπορεί να θέλετε να επιλέξετε \"%s\" αν ο υπολογιστής σας\n" +"προορίζεται να λειτουργήσει ως διακομιστής ή αν δεν καταφέρατε\n" +"να ρυθμίσετε σωστά την οθόνη." #: ../help.pm:319 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -691,12 +803,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -719,7 +833,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -732,77 +847,99 @@ msgid "" "experience. For more instructions on how to use the DiskDrake utility,\n" "refer to the ``Managing Your Partitions'' section in the ``Starter Guide''." msgstr "" -"\n" -" Linux\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" νέο\n" -" Linux\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" χρήστης\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" ανιχνεύθηκε\n" -" Linux\n" -"\n" -" εξ' ορισμού\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Τομέας Windows Τομέας Windows \n" -"\n" -" Linux Διαγραφή\n" -" Τομέας Windows \n" -" Τομέας Windows Αλλαγή μεγέθους\n" -"\n" -" Τομέας Windows \n" -"\n" -" Linux Τομέας Windows \n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Τομέας Windows \n" -"\n" -" Τομέας Windows νέο\n" -"\n" -" Διαγραφή\n" -" νέο Linux\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Λίστα Αφαίρεσης Τομέας Windows \n" -" Όλα\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Προσαρμοσμένο\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Ολοκληρώθηκε\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"." +"Τώρα πρέπει να αποφασίσετε πού θέλετε να εγκαταστήσετε το λειτουργικό\n" +"σύστημα Mageia στον σκληρό σας δίσκο. Αν ο σκληρός σας δίσκος είναι κενός\n" +"ή αν ένα υπάρχον λειτουργικό σύστημα χρησιμοποιεί όλον τον διαθέσιμο χώρο,\n" +"θα χρειαστεί να τον διαμερίσετε. Βασικά, η κατάτμηση ενός σκληρού δίσκου " +"σημαίνει\n" +"την λογική διαίρεσή του για την δημιουργία του απαραίτητου χώρου για την " +"εγκατάσταση\n" +"του νέου σας συστήματος Mageia.\n" +"\n" +"Επειδή η διαδικασία της κατάτμησης ενός σκληρού δίσκου είναι συνήθως μη " +"αναστρέψιμη\n" +"και μπορεί να οδηγήσει σε απώλεια δεδομένων, μπορεί να φανεί τρομακτική και " +"αγχωτική\n" +"για έναν άπειρο χρήστη. Ευτυχώς, το DrakX περιλαμβάνει έναν οδηγό που " +"απλοποιεί\n" +"αυτήν την διαδικασία. Πριν προχωρήσετε σε αυτό το βήμα, διαβάστε προσεκτικά\n" +"την υπόλοιπη ενότητα και, πάνω απ’ όλα, πάρτε τον χρόνο σας.\n" +"\n" +"Ανάλογα με τη διαμόρφωση του σκληρού σας δίσκου, υπάρχουν διάφορες " +"διαθέσιμες επιλογές:\n" +"\n" +" *.\"%s\". Αυτή η επιλογή θα εκτελέσει αυτόματη κατάτμηση των κενών σας " +"δίσκων.\n" +"Αν επιλέξετε αυτήν την επιλογή, δεν θα εμφανιστούν περαιτέρω προτροπές.\n" +"\n" +" *.\"%s\". Ο οδηγός έχει εντοπίσει μία ή περισσότερες υπάρχουσες κατατμήσεις " +"Linux\n" +"στον σκληρό σας δίσκο. Αν θέλετε να τις χρησιμοποιήσετε, επιλέξτε αυτήν την " +"επιλογή.\n" +"Στη συνέχεια, θα σας ζητηθεί να επιλέξετε τα σημεία προσάρτησης που " +"σχετίζονται\n" +"με κάθε κατάτμηση. Τα κληρονομημένα σημεία προσάρτησης είναι ήδη επιλεγμένα\n" +"και ως επί το πλείστον είναι καλή ιδέα να τα διατηρήσετε.\n" +"\n" +" *.\"%s\". Αν τα Microsoft Windows είναι εγκατεστημένα στον σκληρό σας " +"δίσκο\n" +"και καταλαμβάνουν όλον τον διαθέσιμο χώρο, θα χρειαστεί να δημιουργήσετε\n" +"ελεύθερο χώρο για το GNU/Linux. Για να το κάνετε αυτό, μπορείτε είτε να " +"διαγράψετε\n" +"την κατάτμηση των Microsoft Windows και όλα τα δεδομένα της\n" +"(δείτε την επιλογή ``Διαγραφή ολόκληρου του δίσκου\") είτε να αλλάξετε το " +"μέγεθος\n" +"της κατάτμησης FAT ή NTFS των Windows. Η αλλαγή μεγέθους μπορεί να γίνει\n" +"χωρίς απώλεια δεδομένων, εφόσον έχετε προηγουμένως εκτελέσει ανασυγκρότηση\n" +"του δίσκου στα Windows. Συνιστάται να δημιουργήσετε αντίγραφα ασφαλείας\n" +"των δεδομένων σας πριν προχωρήσετε. Αυτή η επιλογή προτείνεται αν θέλετε\n" +"να χρησιμοποιείτε και την Mageia και τα Windows στον ίδιο υπολογιστή.\n" +"\n" +" Πριν επιλέξετε αυτήν την επιλογή, κατανοήστε ότι μετά την διαδικασία " +"αυτή,\n" +"το μέγεθος της κατάτμησης των Windows θα είναι μικρότερο, οπότε θα έχετε\n" +"λιγότερο ελεύθερο χώρο για αποθήκευση δεδομένων ή εγκατάσταση νέου " +"λογισμικού.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Αν θέλετε να διαγράψετε όλα τα δεδομένα και όλες τις κατατμήσεις\n" +"που υπάρχουν στον σκληρό σας δίσκο και να τον αντικαταστήσετε πλήρως με το " +"νέο σας\n" +"σύστημα Mageia, επιλέξτε αυτήν την επιλογή. Προσέξτε διότι δεν θα μπορείτε " +"να αναιρέσετε\n" +"αυτήν την διαδικασία μόλις την επιβεβαιώσετε.\n" +"\n" +" !! Αν επιλέξετε αυτήν την επιλογή, όλα τα δεδομένα στον δίσκο σας θα " +"διαγραφούν.!!\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Αυτή η επιλογή εμφανίζεται όταν ο σκληρός σας δίσκος " +"καταλαμβάνεται\n" +"εξ ολοκλήρου από τα Microsoft Windows. Αν την επιλέξετε, όλα τα δεδομένα\n" +"στον δίσκο θα διαγραφούν και η διαδικασία εγκατάστασης θα ξεκινήσει από την " +"αρχή\n" +"με νέα κατάτμηση.\n" +"\n" +" !! Αν επιλέξετε αυτήν την επιλογή, όλα τα δεδομένα στον δίσκο σας θα " +"χαθούν. !!\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Επιλέξτε αυτήν την επιλογή αν θέλετε να διαμερίσετε χειροκίνητα " +"τον σκληρό σας δίσκο.\n" +"Προσοχή, αυτή είναι μια ισχυρή αλλά επικίνδυνη επιλογή και μπορεί πολύ " +"εύκολα\n" +"να οδηγήσει σε οριστική απώλεια όλων των δεδομένων σας.\n" +"Συνιστάται μόνο αν έχετε προηγούμενη εμπειρία με διαμερίσεις δίσκων.\n" +"Για περισσότερες οδηγίες σχετικά με τη χρήση του εργαλείου DiskDrake,\n" +"ανατρέξτε στην ενότητα ``Διαχείριση των κατατμήσεών σας\" στον ``Οδηγό " +"Εκκίνησης\"." #: ../help.pm:377 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "Use existing partition" -msgstr "Χρήση υπαρχουσών κατατμήσεων" +msgstr "Χρήση μιας υπάρχουσας κατάτμησης" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format msgid "Use the free space on the Microsoft Windows® partition" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Χρήση του ελεύθερου χώρου στην κατάτμηση Microsoft Windows®" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format @@ -810,7 +947,7 @@ msgid "Erase entire disk" msgstr "Διαγραφή ολόκληρου του δίσκου" #: ../help.pm:380 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "There you are. Installation is now complete and your GNU/Linux system is\n" "ready to be used. Just click on \"%s\" to reboot the system. Do not forget\n" @@ -846,58 +983,76 @@ msgid "" "\"mformat a:\", or \"fdformat /dev/fd0\" followed by \"mkfs.vfat\n" "/dev/fd0\"." msgstr "" -"Linux\n" -" Επόμενο\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Για Προχωρημένους\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Επαναφόρτωση\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Αυτόματο\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Αποθήκευση\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Linux\n" +"Η εγκατάσταση ολοκληρώθηκε και το σύστημά σας GNU/Linux είναι\n" +"έτοιμο προς χρήση. Απλώς κάντε κλικ στο \"%s\" για να επανεκκινήσετε το " +"σύστημα.\n" +"Μην ξεχάσετε να αφαιρέσετε το μέσο εγκατάστασης (CD-ROM ή δισκέτα).\n" +"Το πρώτο πράγμα που θα δείτε αφού ο υπολογιστής σας ολοκληρώσει τις δοκιμές " +"υλικού\n" +"είναι το μενού εκκίνησης, το οποίο σας δίνει την επιλογή του λειτουργικού " +"συστήματος που θέλετε να εκκινήσετε.\n" +"\n" +"Το κουμπί \"%s\" εμφανίζει δύο ακόμα κουμπιά για να:\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": σας επιτρέπει να δημιουργήσετε μια δισκέτα εγκατάστασης η οποία " +"θα\n" +"εκτελέσει αυτόματα μια ολόκληρη εγκατάσταση χωρίς τη βοήθεια ενός χειριστή,\n" +"παρομοίως με την εγκατάσταση που μόλις διαμορφώσατε.\n" +"\n" +" Σημειώστε ότι υπάρχουν δύο διαφορετικές επιλογές αφού κάνετε κλικ σε " +"αυτό\n" +"το κουμπί:\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Αυτή είναι μια ημι-αυτοματοποιημένη εγκατάσταση. Το βήμα της " +"κατάτμησης\n" +"είναι η μόνη διαδραστική διαδικασία.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Πλήρως αυτοματοποιημένη εγκατάσταση: ο σκληρός δίσκος " +"ξαναγράφεται εντελώς,\n" +"όλα τα δεδομένα χάνονται.\n" +"\n" +" Αυτή η δυνατότητα είναι πολύ χρήσιμη όταν εγκαθιστάτε σε πολλές " +"παρόμοιες\n" +"μηχανές. Δείτε την ενότητα Auto install στην ιστοσελίδα μας για " +"περισσότερες\n" +"πληροφορίες.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\"(*): αποθηκεύει μια λίστα από τα πακέτα που επιλέχθηκαν σε αυτήν " +"την εγκατάσταση.\n" +"Για να χρησιμοποιήσετε αυτήν την επιλογή με άλλη εγκατάσταση, εισαγάγετε τη " +"δισκέτα και\n" +"ξεκινήστε την εγκατάσταση. Στην προτροπή, πατήστε το πλήκτρο [F1], " +"πληκτρολογήστε >>linux\n" +"defcfg=\"floppy\"<< και πατήστε το πλήκτρο [Enter].\n" +"\n" +"(*) Χρειάζεστε μια δισκέτα διαμορφωμένη σε FAT. Για να δημιουργήσετε μία σε " +"GNU/Linux,\n" +"πληκτρολογήστε \"mformat a:\", ή \"fdformat /dev/fd0\" ακολουθούμενο από " +"\"mkfs.vfat\n" +"/dev/fd0\"." #: ../help.pm:412 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "Generate auto-install floppy" msgstr "Δημιουργία δισκέτας αυτόματης εγκατάστασης" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Replay" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Επανάληψη" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Automated" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Αυτοματοποιημένος" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Save packages selection" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Αποθήκευση της επιλογής των πακέτων" #: ../help.pm:408 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you chose to reuse some legacy GNU/Linux partitions, you may wish to\n" "reformat some of them and erase any data they contain. To do so, please\n" @@ -921,33 +1076,38 @@ msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you wish to select partitions which will be checked for\n" "bad blocks on the disk." msgstr "" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Επόμενο\n" -"\n" -" Προηγούμενο\n" -" νέο Linux\n" -"\n" -" Για Προχωρημένους\n" -"." +"Αν επιλέξατε να επαναχρησιμοποιήσετε κάποιες παλιές κατατμήσεις GNU/Linux, " +"ίσως θέλετε να\n" +"τις επαναμορφοποιήσετε και να διαγράψετε τα δεδομένα που περιέχουν. Για να " +"το κάνετε, παρακαλώ\n" +"επιλέξτε και αυτές τις κατατμήσεις.\n" +"\n" +"Σημειώστε ότι δεν είναι απαραίτητο να επαναμορφοποιήσετε όλες τις " +"προϋπάρχουσες\n" +"κατατμήσεις. Πρέπει να επαναμορφοποιήσετε τις κατατμήσεις που περιέχουν το " +"λειτουργικό\n" +"σύστημα (όπως \"/\", \"/usr\" ή \"/var\"), αλλά δεν χρειάζεται να " +"επαναμορφοποιήσετε\n" +"κατατμήσεις που περιέχουν δεδομένα που θέλετε να διατηρήσετε (συνήθως \"/" +"home\").\n" +"\n" +"Παρακαλώ να είστε προσεκτικοί κατά την επιλογή των κατατμήσεων. Μετά την " +"ολοκλήρωση της μορφοποίησης,\n" +"όλα τα δεδομένα στις επιλεγμένες κατατμήσεις θα διαγραφούν και δεν θα " +"μπορείτε να τα ανακτήσετε.\n" +"\n" +"Κάντε κλικ στο \"%s\" όταν είστε έτοιμοι να μορφοποιήσετε τις κατατμήσεις.\n" +"\n" +"Κάντε κλικ στο \"%s\" αν θέλετε να επιλέξετε άλλη κατάτμηση για την " +"εγκατάσταση του νέου\n" +"λειτουργικού συστήματος Mageia.\n" +"\n" +"Κάντε κλικ στο \"%s\" αν επιθυμείτε να επιλέξετε κατατμήσεις οι οποίες θα " +"ελεγχθούν για\n" +"κατεστραμμένα μπλοκ στον δίσκο." #: ../help.pm:437 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "By the time you install Mageia, it's likely that some packages will\n" "have been updated since the initial release. Bugs may have been fixed,\n" @@ -961,20 +1121,25 @@ msgid "" "will appear: review the selection, and press \"%s\" to retrieve and install\n" "the selected package(s), or \"%s\" to abort." msgstr "" -"Linux\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Διαδίκτυο\n" -" Ναι Διαδίκτυο Όχι\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Ναι\n" -"\n" -" Εγκατάσταση\n" -" Άκυρο." +"Μέχρι τη στιγμή που θα εγκαταστήσετε τη Mageia, είναι πιθανό\n" +"να έχουν γίνει κάποιες ενημερώσεις σε πακέτα από την αρχική έκδοση.\n" +"Μπορεί να έχουν διορθωθεί σφάλματα και να έχουν επιλυθεί ζητήματα\n" +"ασφαλείας. Για να μπορέσετε να επωφεληθείτε από αυτές τις ενημερώσεις,\n" +"μπορείτε να τις λάβετε από το διαδίκτυο. Επιλέξτε \"%s\" αν έχετε μια " +"λειτουργική\n" +"σύνδεση στο διαδίκτυο, ή \"%s\" αν προτιμάτε να εγκαταστήσετε τα ενημερωμένα " +"πακέτα αργότερα.\n" +"\n" +"Η επιλογή \"%s\" θα εμφανίσει μια λίστα με τοποθεσίες ιστού από τις οποίες " +"μπορούν\n" +"να ληφθούν ενημερώσεις. Θα πρέπει να επιλέξετε μία που να είναι κοντά σας.\n" +"Θα εμφανιστεί ένα δέντρο επιλογής πακέτων: εξετάστε την επιλογή και πατήστε " +"\"%s\"\n" +"για να λάβετε και να εγκαταστήσετε το επιλεγμένο πακέτο(α), ή \"%s\" για να " +"το ακυρώσετε." #: ../help.pm:450 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, DrakX will allow you to choose the security level you desire\n" "for your machine. As a rule of thumb, the security level should be set\n" @@ -989,39 +1154,50 @@ msgid "" "Fill the \"%s\" field with the e-mail address of the person responsible for\n" "security. Security messages will be sent to that address." msgstr "" -"επίπεδο\n" -" επίπεδο\n" -"\n" -" Διαδίκτυο επίπεδο\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" εξ' ορισμού." +"Σε αυτό το σημείο, το DrakX θα σας επιτρέψει να επιλέξετε το επίπεδο " +"ασφαλείας\n" +"που επιθυμείτε για το μηχάνημά σας. Ως γενικός κανόνας, το επίπεδο " +"ασφαλείας\n" +"θα πρέπει να είναι υψηλότερο εάν το μηχάνημα πρόκειται να περιέχει κρίσιμα " +"δεδομένα\n" +"ή να εκτίθεται απευθείας στο Διαδίκτυο. Ένα υψηλότερο επίπεδο ασφαλείας " +"επιτυγχάνεται\n" +"γενικά σε βάρος της ευκολίας χρήσης.\n" +"\n" +"Εάν δεν ξέρετε τι να επιλέξετε, κρατήστε την προεπιλεγμένη επιλογή.\n" +"Θα μπορείτε να την αλλάξετε αργότερα με το εργαλείο draksec,\n" +"που είναι μέρος του Κέντρου Ελέγχου Mageia.\n" +"\n" +"Συμπληρώστε το πεδίο «%s» με τη διεύθυνση ηλεκτρονικού ταχυδρομείου\n" +"του υπεύθυνου για την ασφάλεια. Τα μηνύματα ασφαλείας θα αποστέλλονται\n" +"σε αυτήν τη διεύθυνση." #: ../help.pm:461 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "Security Administrator" -msgstr "Διαχειριστής Ασφαλείας:" +msgstr "Διαχειριστής ασφαλείας" #: ../help.pm:464 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1044,7 +1220,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1052,7 +1229,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1071,139 +1249,149 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" +"Σε αυτό το σημείο, πρέπει να επιλέξετε ποιες κατατμήσεις θα χρησιμοποιηθούν\n" +"για την εγκατάσταση του συστήματος Mageia. Εάν έχουν ήδη οριστεί οι " +"κατατμήσεις,\n" +"είτε από προηγούμενη εγκατάσταση του GNU/Linux είτε από κάποιο άλλο εργαλείο " +"κατάτμησης,\n" +"μπορείτε να χρησιμοποιήσετε τις υπάρχουσες κατατμήσεις.\n" +"Διαφορετικά, πρέπει να ορίσετε τις κατατμήσεις του σκληρού δίσκου.\n" "\n" -" Linux\n" -" Linux\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" IDE\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Άλλα\n" -"\n" -" Αποθήκευση\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Επαναφορά\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" +"Για την δημιουργία των κατατμήσεων, πρέπει πρώτα να επιλέξετε έναν σκληρό " +"δίσκο.\n" +"Μπορείτε να επιλέξετε τον δίσκο για κατάτμηση κάνοντας κλικ στο ``hda'' για " +"τον πρώτο IDE δίσκο,\n" +"στο ``hdb'' για τον δεύτερο, ``sda'' για τον πρώτο SCSI δίσκο κ.ο.κ.\n" "\n" +"Για την κατάτμηση του επιλεγμένου σκληρού δίσκου, μπορείτε να " +"χρησιμοποιήσετε τις εξής επιλογές:\n" "\n" +" * \"%s\": αυτή η επιλογή διαγράφει όλες τις κατατμήσεις στον επιλεγμένο " +"σκληρό δίσκο.\n" "\n" +" * \"%s\": αυτή η επιλογή σας επιτρέπει να δημιουργήσετε αυτόματα " +"κατατμήσεις ext4 και swap\n" +"στον ελεύθερο χώρο του σκληρού σας δίσκου.\n" "\n" +"\"%s\": παρέχει πρόσβαση σε επιπλέον λειτουργίες:\n" "\n" -" μετά βίας\n" +" * \"%s\": αποθηκεύει τον πίνακα κατατμήσεων σε μια δισκέτα. Χρήσιμο για " +"μελλοντική επαναφορά\n" +"του πίνακα κατατμήσεων εάν χρειαστεί. Συνιστάται ανεπιφύλακτα να εκτελέσετε " +"αυτό το βήμα.\n" "\n" +" * \"%s\": επιτρέπει την επαναφορά ενός προηγουμένως αποθηκευμένου πίνακα " +"κατατμήσεων από μια δισκέτα.\n" "\n" +" * \"%s\": εάν ο πίνακας κατατμήσεων είναι κατεστραμμένος, μπορείτε να " +"προσπαθήσετε να τον ανακτήσετε\n" +"χρησιμοποιώντας αυτήν την επιλογή. Παρακαλώ να είστε προσεκτικοί, καθώς δεν " +"λειτουργεί πάντα.\n" "\n" -" Οδηγός\n" +" * \"%s\": ακυρώνει όλες τις αλλαγές και επαναφορτώνει τον αρχικό πίνακα " +"κατατμήσεων του σκληρού δίσκου.\n" "\n" +" * \"%s\": αποεπιλέγοντας αυτήν την επιλογή, οι χρήστες θα πρέπει να " +"προσαρτούν\n" +"και να αποπροσαρτούν χειροκίνητα τα αφαιρούμενα μέσα, όπως δισκέτες και CD-" +"ROM.\n" "\n" +" * \"%s\": χρησιμοποιήστε αυτήν την επιλογή εάν θέλετε να χρησιμοποιήσετε " +"έναν οδηγό\n" +"για την κατάτμηση του σκληρού σας δίσκου. Συνιστάται εάν δεν έχετε καλή " +"κατανόηση\n" +"της λειτουργίας κατάτμησης.\n" "\n" -" Αναίρεση\n" +" * \"%s\": χρησιμοποιήστε αυτήν την επιλογή για να ακυρώσετε τις αλλαγές " +"σας.\n" "\n" +" * \"%s\": επιτρέπει επιπλέον ενέργειες στις κατατμήσεις (τύπος, επιλογές, " +"μορφοποίηση)\n" +"και παρέχει περισσότερες πληροφορίες για τον σκληρό δίσκο.\n" "\n" +" * \"%s\": όταν ολοκληρώσετε την κατάτμηση του σκληρού σας δίσκου, αυτή η " +"επιλογή\n" +"θα αποθηκεύσει τις αλλαγές σας στον δίσκο.\n" "\n" +"Κατά τον ορισμό του μεγέθους μιας κατάτμησης, μπορείτε να καθορίσετε\n" +"με ακρίβεια το μέγεθός της χρησιμοποιώντας τα πλήκτρα βέλους του " +"πληκτρολογίου σας.\n" "\n" +"Σημείωση: μπορείτε να επιλέξετε οποιαδήποτε επιλογή χρησιμοποιώντας το " +"πληκτρολόγιο.\n" +"Περιηγηθείτε στις κατατμήσεις χρησιμοποιώντας το [Tab] και τα βέλη [Πάνω/" +"Κάτω].\n" "\n" -" Ολοκληρώθηκε\n" +"Όταν μια κατάτμηση είναι επιλεγμένη, μπορείτε να χρησιμοποιήσετε:\n" "\n" +" * Ctrl-c για να δημιουργήσετε μια νέα κατάτμηση (όταν έχει επιλεγεί μια " +"κενή κατάτμηση).\n" "\n" -" Πότε\n" +" * Ctrl-d για να διαγράψετε μια κατάτμηση.\n" "\n" +" * Ctrl-m για να ορίσετε το σημείο προσάρτησης.\n" "\n" -"\n" -" Ολοκληρώθηκε\n" -"\n" -" Πότε\n" -"\n" -" νέο\n" -"\n" -" Διαγραφή\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" HFS\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"." +"Για να λάβετε πληροφορίες σχετικά με τους διαθέσιμους τύπους συστημάτων " +"αρχείων,\n" +"παρακαλώ διαβάστε το κεφάλαιο ext2FS από το ``Εγχειρίδιο Αναφοράς''.\n" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Save partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Αποθήκευση του πίνακα κατάτμησης" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Restore partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Επαναφορά του πίνακα κατάτμησης" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Rescue partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Διάσωση του πίνακα της κατάτμησης" #: ../help.pm:526 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "Removable media auto-mounting" -msgstr "Αυτόματη σύνδεση αποσπώμενων μονάδων" +msgstr "Αυτόματη προσάρτηση του αφαιρουμένου μέσου" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Wizard" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Οδηγός" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Undo" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Αναίρεση" #: ../help.pm:526 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "Toggle between normal/expert mode" -msgstr "Αλλαγή σε κανονικό τρόπο λειτουργίας" +msgstr "Εναλλαγή μεταξύ τυπικής/προχωρημένης λειτουργίας" #: ../help.pm:536 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1214,56 +1402,61 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" -"Περισσότερες των μία κατατμήσεις Windows βρέθηκαν στον δίσκο σας. Παρακαλώ \n" -"επιλέξτε ποια θέλετε να συρρικνώσετε για να εγκαταστήσετε το Mandriva " -"Linux.\n" +"Έχουν εντοπιστεί περισσότερες από μία κατατμήσεις Microsoft στον σκληρό σας " +"δίσκο.\n" +"Παρακαλώ επιλέξτε την κατάτμηση που θέλετε να αλλάξετε μέγεθος για να " +"εγκαταστήσετε\n" +"το νέο σας λειτουργικό σύστημα Mageia.\n" "\n" -"Κάθε κατάτμηση αναφέρεται ως: \"Όνομα Linux\", \"Όνομα Windows\"\n" +"Κάθε κατάτμηση παρατίθεται ως εξής: \"Όνομα Linux\", \"Όνομα Windows\", " "\"Χωρητικότητα\".\n" "\n" -"Το όνομα Linux σημαίνει τα εξής: \"Τύπος δίσκου\",\"αριθμός δίσκου\",\n" -"\"αριθμός κατάτμησης για παράδειγμα, \"hda1\").\n" -"\n" -"Ο \"Τύπος δίσκου\" είναι \"hd\" εάν πρόκειται για δίσκο IDE και \"sd\" \n" -"για SCSI δίσκο.\n" +"\"Δομή του \"Ονόματος Linux\": \"Τύπος σκληρού δίσκου\", \"Αριθμός σκληρού " +"δίσκου\", \"Αριθμός κατάτμησης\" (π.χ., hda1).\n" "\n" -"Ο \" αριθμός δίσκου\"είναι πάντα ένα γράμμα μετά το \"hd\" ή \"sd\". Για\n" -"τους IDE δίσκους: \n" +"Ο \"Τύπος σκληρού δίσκου\" είναι \"hd\" αν είναι IDE σκληρός δίσκος και " +"\"sd\" αν είναι SCSI σκληρός δίσκος.\n" "\n" -" * \"a\" είναι ο \"master δίσκος στον πρώτο ελεγκτή IDE\",\n" +"\"Αριθμός σκληρού δίσκου: Πρόκειται πάντα για ένα γράμμα μετά το hd ή το " +"sd.\n" "\n" -" * \"b\" είναι ο \"slave δίσκος στον πρώτο ελεγκτή IDE\",\n" +"Για IDE σκληρούς δίσκους:\n" +" - \"a\" κύριος δίσκος στον πρωτεύοντα IDE ελεγκτή.\n" +" - \"b\" βοηθητικός δίσκος στον πρωτεύοντα IDE ελεγκτή.\n" +" - \"c\" κύριος δίσκος στον δευτερεύοντα IDE ελεγκτή.\n" +" - \"d\" βοηθητικός δίσκος στον δευτερεύοντα IDE ελεγκτή.\n" "\n" -" * \"c\" είναι ο \"master δίσκος στον δεύτερο ελεγκτή IDE\",\n" +"Για SCSI σκληρούς δίσκους:\n" +" -\"a\" ο δίσκος με το χαμηλότερο SCSI ID.\n" +" - \"b\" ο δίσκος με το δεύτερο χαμηλότερο SCSI ID, κ.ο.κ.\n" "\n" -" * \"d\" είναι ο \"slave δίσκος στον δεύτερο ελεγκτή IDE\".\n" -"\n" -"Για δίσκους SCSI, \"a\" είναι ο πρώτος δίσκος, \"b\" είναι ο δεύτερος " -"δίσκος\n" -" κλπ...\n" -"\n" -"Το \"Όνομα Windows\" είναι το γράμμα της κατάτμησης όπως φαίνεται από τα\n" -"Windows (ο πρώτος δίσκος ή κατάτμηση λέγεται \"C:\")." +"- Όνομα Windows:\n" +" Είναι το γράμμα που αντιστοιχεί στον σκληρό δίσκο στα Windows (ο πρώτος " +"δίσκος ή η πρώτη κατάτμηση ονομάζεται \"C:\")." #: ../help.pm:567 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "\"%s\": check the current country selection. If you're not in this country,\n" "click on the \"%s\" button and choose another. If your country is not in " "the\n" "list shown, click on the \"%s\" button to get the complete country list." msgstr "" -"\"Χώρα\": ελέγξτε την επιλογή χώρας. Αν δεν είστε σε αυτή τη χώρα,\n" -"κάντε κλικ στο πλήκτρο και επιλέξτε μια άλλη." +"«%s»: ελέγξτε την τρέχουσα επιλογή χώρας. Αν δεν βρίσκεστε σε αυτήν τη χώρα," +"κάντε κλικ στο κουμπί «%s» και επιλέξτε άλλη. Αν η χώρα σας δεν υπάρχει " +"στοκατάστιχο, κάντε κλικ στο κουμπί «%s» για να δείτε το πλήρες κατάστιχο " +"χωρών." #: ../help.pm:572 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "This step is activated only if an existing GNU/Linux partition has been\n" "found on your machine.\n" @@ -1274,7 +1467,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1286,29 +1480,34 @@ msgid "" "running version \"8.1\" or later. Performing an upgrade on versions prior\n" "to Mageia version \"8.1\" is not recommended." msgstr "" -"ενεργοποίηση τώρα Linux\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" νέο\n" -" Linux\n" -"\n" -" Εγκατάσταση\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Αναβάθμιση\n" -" Linux\n" -" χρήστης\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Αναβάθμιση Linux\n" -" εκτελείται Αναβάθμιση\n" -" Linux." +"Αυτό το βήμα ενεργοποιείται μόνο αν έχει εντοπιστεί υπάρχουσα κατάτμηση\n" +"GNU/Linux στον υπολογιστή σας.\n" +"\n" +"Το DrakX χρειάζεται τώρα να γνωρίζει αν επιθυμείτε να πραγματοποιήσετε μια\n" +"νέα εγκατάσταση ή μια αναβάθμιση ενός υπάρχοντος συστήματος Mageia:\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Στις περισσότερες περιπτώσεις, αυτή η επιλογή διαγράφει πλήρως το " +"παλιό σύστημα.\n" +"Ωστόσο, ανάλογα με το υπάρχον σχήμα κατάτμησης, μπορείτε να αποτρέψετε τη " +"διαγραφή\n" +"ορισμένων δεδομένων σας (ιδίως των προσωπικών καταλόγων home).\n" +"Αν επιθυμείτε να αλλάξετε τον τρόπο κατάτμησης των σκληρών σας δίσκων ή να " +"τροποποιήσετε\n" +"το σύστημα αρχείων, θα πρέπει να επιλέξετε αυτήν την επιλογή.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Αυτή η κλάση εγκατάστασης σας επιτρέπει να ενημερώσετε τα πακέτα\n" +"που είναι ήδη εγκατεστημένα στο Mageia σύστημά σας.\n" +"Το υπάρχον σχήμα κατάτμησης και τα προσωπικά δεδομένα σας δεν θα " +"τροποποιηθούν.\n" +"Τα περισσότερα από τα υπόλοιπα βήματα ρύθμισης παραμένουν διαθέσιμα\n" +"και είναι παρόμοια με αυτά μιας κανονικής εγκατάστασης.\n" +"\n" +"Η χρήση της επιλογής \"Αναβάθμιση\" συνιστάται μόνο για συστήματα Mageia " +"έκδοσης 8.1 ή νεότερης.Η αναβάθμιση από παλαιότερες εκδόσεις του Mageia δεν " +"συνιστάται." #: ../help.pm:594 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Depending on the language you chose (), DrakX will automatically select a\n" "particular type of keyboard configuration. Check that the selection suits\n" @@ -1327,24 +1526,32 @@ msgid "" "dialog will allow you to choose the key binding which will switch the\n" "keyboard between the Latin and non-Latin layouts." msgstr "" -"εξ' ορισμού\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Άλλα\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"." +"Ανάλογα με τη γλώσσα που επιλέξατε (), το DrakX θα επιλέξει αυτόματα\n" +"έναν συγκεκριμένο τύπο ρύθμισης πληκτρολογίου.\n" +"Ελέγξτε αν η επιλογή σας εξυπηρετεί ή επιλέξτε μια διαφορετική διάταξη " +"πληκτρολογίου.\n" +"\n" +"Επίσης, μπορεί να μην έχετε πληκτρολόγιο που να αντιστοιχεί ακριβώς στη " +"γλώσσα σας\n" +"για παράδειγμα, αν είστε Ελβετός που μιλάει αγγλικά, μπορεί να έχετε " +"ελβετικό πληκτρολόγιο.\n" +"Ή αν μιλάτε αγγλικά και βρίσκεστε στο Κεμπέκ, μπορεί να βρεθείτε σε παρόμοια " +"κατάσταση,\n" +"όπου η μητρική σας γλώσσα και η χώρα στην οποία αντιστοιχεί το πληκτρολόγιό " +"σας δεν ταιριάζουν.\n" +"Σε κάθε περίπτωση, αυτό το βήμα της εγκατάστασης σάς επιτρέπει να επιλέξετε " +"κατάλληλο\n" +"πληκτρολόγιο από μια λίστα.\n" +"\n" +"Κάντε κλικ στο κουμπί «%s» για να εμφανιστεί η λίστα με τα υποστηριζόμενα " +"πληκτρολόγια.\n" +"\n" +"Αν επιλέξετε διάταξη πληκτρολογίου που βασίζεται σε μη λατινικό αλφάβητο,\n" +"το επόμενο παράθυρο διαλόγου θα σας επιτρέψει να ορίσετε το πλήκτρο που\n" +"θα αλλάζει τη διάταξη μεταξύ λατινικής και μη λατινικής." #: ../help.pm:612 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The first step is to choose your preferred language.\n" "\n" @@ -1386,38 +1593,66 @@ msgid "" "by the entire system. Running the command as a regular user will only\n" "change the language settings for that particular user." msgstr "" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Για Προχωρημένους\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Ισπανία\n" -" εξ' ορισμού Για Προχωρημένους\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Επόμενο\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" χρήστης\n" -" χρήστης." +"Το πρώτο βήμα είναι να επιλέξετε τη γλώσσα της προτίμησής σας.\n" +"\n" +"Η επιλογή γλώσσας επηρεάζει τον εγκαταστάτη, την τεκμηρίωση και\n" +"γενικά ολόκληρο το σύστημα. Πρώτα επιλέξτε την περιοχή στην οποία\n" +"βρίσκεστε και στη συνέχεια τη γλώσσα που μιλάτε.\n" +"\n" +"Κάνοντας κλικ στο κουμπί «%s», μπορείτε να επιλέξετε και άλλες γλώσσες\n" +"για εγκατάσταση στον σταθμό εργασίας σας, ώστε να εγκατασταθούν τα " +"αντίστοιχα\n" +"αρχεία για την τεκμηρίωση του συστήματος και τις εφαρμογές.\n" +"Για παράδειγμα, αν το σύστημά σας πρόκειται να χρησιμοποιηθεί και από\n" +"ισπανόφωνους χρήστες, επιλέξτε τα αγγλικά ως προεπιλεγμένη γλώσσα\n" +"από την προβολή δέντρου και το «%s» στην ενότητα για προχωρημένους.\n" +"\n" +"Σχετικά με την υποστήριξη UTF-8 (Unicode):\n" +"Το Unicode είναι μια νέα κωδικοποίηση χαρακτήρων που αποσκοπεί στην κάλυψη\n" +"όλων των γλωσσών. Ωστόσο, η πλήρης υποστήριξή του στο GNU/Linux εξακολουθεί\n" +"να βρίσκεται υπό ανάπτυξη. Για τον λόγο αυτό, η χρήση του UTF-8 στο Mageia\n" +"εξαρτάται από τις επιλογές του χρήστη:\n" +"\n" +" * Αν επιλέξετε μια γλώσσα με ισχυρή υποστήριξη παλαιότερης κωδικοποίησης\n" +"(όπως οι λατινικές γλώσσες με latin1, τα ρωσικά, ιαπωνικά, κινεζικά, " +"κορεατικά,\n" +"ταϊλανδέζικα, ελληνικά, τουρκικά, οι περισσότερες γλώσσες του iso-8859-2),\n" +"θα χρησιμοποιηθεί αυτή η παλαιότερη κωδικοποίηση από προεπιλογή.\n" +"\n" +" * Άλλες γλώσσες θα χρησιμοποιούν το Unicode από προεπιλογή.\n" +"\n" +" * Αν απαιτούνται δύο ή περισσότερες γλώσσες και αυτές δεν χρησιμοποιούν\n" +"την ίδια κωδικοποίηση, τότε θα χρησιμοποιηθεί το Unicode για ολόκληρο το " +"σύστημα.\n" +"\n" +" * Τέλος, μπορείτε να επιβάλετε τη χρήση του Unicode σε όλο το σύστημα " +"επιλέγοντας\n" +"την επιλογή «%s», ανεξαρτήτως των γλωσσών που έχουν επιλεγεί.\n" +"\n" +"Σημειώστε ότι δεν περιορίζεστε στην επιλογή μιας μόνο επιπλέον γλώσσας.\n" +"Μπορείτε να επιλέξετε περισσότερες ή ακόμα και να τις εγκαταστήσετε όλες,\n" +"ενεργοποιώντας το πεδίο «%s».\n" +"Η υποστήριξη για μια γλώσσα περιλαμβάνει μεταφράσεις, γραμματοσειρές,\n" +"ορθογραφικούς ελέγχους κ.λπ.\n" +"\n" +"Για να αλλάξετε τη γλώσσα του συστήματος μεταξύ των γλωσσών που έχουν " +"εγκατασταθεί,\n" +"μπορείτε να εκτελέσετε την εντολή localedrake ως root.\n" +"Αυτό θα αλλάξει τη γλώσσα σε ολόκληρο το σύστημα. Εκτελώντας την εντολή ως\n" +"απλός χρήστης, η αλλαγή θα ισχύει μόνο για τον συγκεκριμένο λογαριασμό." #: ../help.pm:650 #, c-format msgid "Espanol" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Ισπανικά" #: ../help.pm:643 #, c-format msgid "Use Unicode by default" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Χρήση του Unicode ως προεπιλογή" #: ../help.pm:646 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Usually, DrakX has no problems detecting the number of buttons on your\n" "mouse. If it does, it assumes you have a two-button mouse and will\n" @@ -1452,40 +1687,55 @@ msgid "" "Test the buttons and check that the mouse pointer moves on-screen as you\n" "move your mouse about." msgstr "" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" σειριακό\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" εξ' ορισμού\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Με ροδάκι ανιχνεύθηκε\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" Επόμενο\n" -" ενεργοποίηση τώρα\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"." +"Συνήθως, το DrakX δεν αντιμετωπίζει πρόβλημα στον εντοπισμό του αριθμού\n" +"των κουμπιών του ποντικιού σας. Αν δεν τα καταφέρει, θα υποθέσει ότι " +"διαθέτετε\n" +"ποντίκι δύο κουμπιών και θα το ρυθμίσει για εξομοίωση τρίτου κουμπιού.\n" +"Το τρίτο κουμπί σε ένα ποντίκι δύο κουμπιών μπορεί να προσομοιωθεί πατώντας\n" +"ταυτόχρονα το αριστερό και το δεξί κουμπί. Το DrakX θα αναγνωρίσει αυτόματα\n" +"αν το ποντίκι σας χρησιμοποιεί διεπαφή PS/2, σειριακή ή USB.\n" +"\n" +"Αν έχετε ποντίκι με 3 κουμπιά χωρίς τροχό κύλισης, μπορείτε να επιλέξετε\n" +"ένα ποντίκι τύπου «%s». Το DrakX θα το ρυθμίσει έτσι ώστε να μπορείτε να\n" +"προσομοιώσετε τον τροχό κύλισης: για να το κάνετε αυτό, πατήστε το μεσαίο " +"κουμπί\n" +"και μετακινήστε τον δείκτη του ποντικιού πάνω και κάτω.\n" +"\n" +"Αν για οποιονδήποτε λόγο επιθυμείτε να καθορίσετε διαφορετικό τύπο " +"ποντικιού,\n" +"επιλέξτε τον από την παρεχόμενη λίστα.\n" +"\n" +"Μπορείτε να επιλέξετε την καταχώριση «%s» για να χρησιμοποιήσετε έναν\n" +"«γενικό» τύπο ποντικιού, ο οποίος λειτουργεί με σχεδόν όλα τα ποντίκια.\n" +"\n" +"Αν επιλέξετε ποντίκι διαφορετικό από το προεπιλεγμένο, θα εμφανιστεί οθόνη " +"δοκιμής.\n" +"Χρησιμοποιήστε τα κουμπιά και τον τροχό για να ελέγξετε ότι οι ρυθμίσεις " +"είναι σωστές\n" +"και ότι το ποντίκι λειτουργεί κανονικά. Αν το ποντίκι δεν λειτουργεί σωστά,\n" +"πατήστε το πλήκτρο διαστήματος ή το πλήκτρο [Enter] για να ακυρώσετε\n" +"τη δοκιμή και θα επιστρέψετε στη λίστα ποντικιών.\n" +"\n" +"Ορισμένες φορές τα ποντίκια με τροχό δεν εντοπίζονται αυτόματα, οπότε θα " +"χρειαστεί\n" +"να επιλέξετε το ποντίκι σας από τη λίστα. Βεβαιωθείτε ότι επιλέγετε αυτό " +"που\n" +"αντιστοιχεί στη θύρα στην οποία είναι συνδεδεμένο το ποντίκι σας.\n" +"Αφού επιλέξετε ένα ποντίκι και πατήσετε το κουμπί «%s», θα εμφανιστεί\n" +"μια εικόνα ποντικιού στην οθόνη. Κυλήστε τον τροχό για να βεβαιωθείτε\n" +"ότι ανταποκρίνεται σωστά. Καθώς γυρίζετε τον τροχό, θα βλέπετε και τον\n" +"τροχό στην οθόνη να κινείται. Δοκιμάστε και τα κουμπιά και ελέγξτε ότι\n" +"ο δείκτης κινείται στην οθόνη όταν μετακινείτε το ποντίκι." #: ../help.pm:684 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "with Wheel emulation" -msgstr "Προσομοίωση Κουμπιών" +msgstr "με προσομοίωση τροχού" #: ../help.pm:684 #, c-format msgid "Universal | Any PS/2 & USB mice" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Γενικό | Οποιοδήποτε PS/2 & USB ποντίκι" #: ../help.pm:687 #, c-format @@ -1494,7 +1744,7 @@ msgid "" "Windows is named \"ttyS0\" under GNU/Linux." msgstr "" "Παρακαλώ επιλέξτε την κατάλληλη θύρα. Για παράδειγμα,\n" -"η\"COM1\" στα Windows ονομάζεται \"ttyS0\" στο GNU/Linux." +"η \"COM1\" στα Windows ονομάζεται \"ttyS0\" στο GNU/Linux." #: ../help.pm:684 #, c-format @@ -1516,9 +1766,33 @@ msgid "" "you\n" "know what you're doing." msgstr "" +"Ένας φορτωτής εκκίνησης (boot loader) είναι ένα μικρό πρόγραμμα που " +"εκτελείται\n" +"από τον υπολογιστή κατά την εκκίνηση. Είναι υπεύθυνος για την εκκίνηση\n" +"ολόκληρου του συστήματος. Συνήθως, η εγκατάσταση του φορτωτή εκκίνησης\n" +"γίνεται εντελώς αυτόματα. Το DrakX θα αναλύσει τον τομέα εκκίνησης του " +"δίσκου\n" +"και θα ενεργήσει ανάλογα με το τι θα εντοπίσει εκεί:\n" +"\n" +" * Αν εντοπιστεί τομέας εκκίνησης των Windows, θα αντικατασταθεί με έναν " +"τομέα εκκίνησης\n" +"GRUB ή LILO. Με αυτόν τον τρόπο, θα μπορείτε να εκκινήσετε είτε το GNU/" +"Linux\n" +"είτε οποιοδήποτε άλλο λειτουργικό σύστημα είναι εγκατεστημένο στον " +"υπολογιστή σας.\n" +"\n" +" * Αν εντοπιστεί τομέας εκκίνησης GRUB ή LILO, θα αντικατασταθεί με έναν " +"νέο.\n" +"\n" +"Αν το DrakX δεν μπορεί να προσδιορίσει πού να εγκαταστήσει τον τομέα " +"εκκίνησης,\n" +"θα σας ρωτήσει πού θέλετε να τον τοποθετήσει. Γενικά, η επιλογή «%s» είναι η " +"ασφαλέστερη.\n" +"Η επιλογή «%s» δεν εγκαθιστά κανέναν φορτωτή εκκίνησης.\n" +"Επιλέξτε την μόνο αν γνωρίζετε τι κάνετε." #: ../help.pm:745 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Now, it's time to select a printing system for your computer. Other\n" "operating systems may offer you one, but Mageia offers two. Each of\n" @@ -1545,48 +1819,60 @@ msgid "" "system you may change it by running PrinterDrake from the Mageia\n" "Control Center and clicking on the \"%s\" button." msgstr "" -"Άλλο\n" -" Linux\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" απλό\n" -"\n" -" Linux\n" -"\n" -" CUPS Εκτύπωση Σύστημα\n" -"\n" -" απλό εξυπηρετητής\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" εξυπηρετητής\n" -" CUPS\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" εκτελείται\n" -"." +"Τώρα είναι η στιγμή να επιλέξετε ένα σύστημα εκτύπωσης για τον υπολογιστή " +"σας.\n" +"Άλλα λειτουργικά συστήματα ενδέχεται να σας προσφέρουν ένα μόνο,\n" +"αλλά το Mageia προσφέρει δύο. Κάθε ένα από τα συστήματα εκτύπωσης\n" +"είναι καλύτερα προσαρμοσμένο σε συγκεκριμένα είδη ρυθμίσεων.\n" +"\n" +" * «%s» -- που είναι ακρωνύμιο του «print, do not queue» (εκτύπωση χωρίς " +"ουρά),\n" +"είναι η κατάλληλη επιλογή αν έχετε άμεση σύνδεση με τον εκτυπωτή σας,\n" +"θέλετε να μπορείτε να διακόπτετε την εκτύπωση σε περίπτωση εμπλοκής χαρτιού\n" +"και δεν έχετε εκτυπωτές στο δίκτυο.\n" +" * Το «%s» μπορεί να χειριστεί μόνο πολύ απλές περιπτώσεις δικτύωσης\n" +"και είναι σχετικά αργό όταν χρησιμοποιείται μέσω δικτύου.\n" +"Συνιστάται να χρησιμοποιήσετε το pdq αν αυτή είναι η πρώτη σας εμπειρία με " +"το GNU/Linux.\n" +"\n" +" * «%s» σημαίνει Common Unix Printing System και είναι εξαιρετική επιλογή\n" +"είτε εκτυπώνετε σε τοπικό εκτυπωτή είτε σε κάποιον στην άλλη άκρη του " +"κόσμου.\n" +"Είναι εύκολο στη ρύθμιση και μπορεί να λειτουργήσει ως διακομιστής ή " +"πελάτης\n" +"για το παλαιότερο σύστημα εκτύπωσης lpd, οπότε είναι συμβατό με παλαιότερα\n" +"λειτουργικά συστήματα που ίσως εξακολουθούν να χρειάζονται υπηρεσίες " +"εκτύπωσης.\n" +"Αν και αρκετά ισχυρό, η βασική ρύθμιση είναι σχεδόν τόσο εύκολη όσο και με " +"το pdq.\n" +"Αν χρειάζεται να προσομοιώσετε διακομιστή τύπου lpd, φροντίστε να " +"ενεργοποιήσετε\n" +"τον δαίμονα cups-lpd. Το «%s» περιλαμβάνει γραφικές διεπαφές για εκτύπωση,\n" +"επιλογή ρυθμίσεων εκτυπωτή και διαχείριση εκτυπωτών.\n" +"\n" +"Αν κάνετε τώρα μια επιλογή και αργότερα διαπιστώσετε ότι δεν σας ικανοποιεί " +"το σύστημα\n" +"εκτύπωσης που χρησιμοποιείτε, μπορείτε να το αλλάξετε εκτελώντας το " +"PrinterDrake\n" +"από το Κέντρο Ελέγχου του Mageia και κάνοντας κλικ στο κουμπί «%s»." #: ../help.pm:768 #, c-format msgid "pdq" -msgstr "" +msgstr "pdq" #: ../help.pm:724 #, c-format msgid "CUPS" -msgstr "" +msgstr "CUPS" #: ../help.pm:724 #, c-format msgid "Expert" -msgstr "Εξπέρ" +msgstr "Ειδήμονας" #: ../help.pm:771 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "DrakX will first detect any IDE devices present in your computer. It will\n" "also scan for one or more PCI SCSI cards on your system. If a SCSI card is\n" @@ -1605,39 +1891,36 @@ msgid "" "which parameters need to be passed to the hardware, you'll need to manually\n" "configure the driver." msgstr "" -"IDE\n" -" PCI\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -" PCI Ναι\n" -" Όχι\n" -"\n" -" ανιχνεύθηκε\n" -" Επόμενο Επόμενο\n" -"\n" +"Το DrakX θα εντοπίσει πρώτα οποιεσδήποτε συσκευές IDE υπάρχουν\n" +"τον υπολογιστή σας. Θα σαρώσει επίσης για μία ή περισσότερες κάρτες\n" +"PCI SCSI στο σύστημά σας. Αν εντοπιστεί κάρτα SCSI, το DrakX θα\n" +"εγκαταστήσει αυτόματα τον κατάλληλο οδηγό.\n" "\n" -" PCI\n" +"Επειδή ο εντοπισμός υλικού δεν είναι πάντοτε αλάνθαστος, είναι πιθανό το " +"DrakX\n" +"να αποτύχει να εντοπίσει τους σκληρούς σας δίσκους. Σε αυτή την περίπτωση,\n" +"θα χρειαστεί να καθορίσετε το υλικό σας με το χέρι.\n" "\n" +"Αν χρειάστηκε να ορίσετε χειροκίνητα τον PCI SCSI προσαρμογέα σας,\n" +"το DrakX θα σας ρωτήσει αν θέλετε να ρυθμίσετε επιλογές για αυτόν.\n" +"Συνιστάται να επιτρέψετε στο DrakX να ελέγξει το υλικό για τις επιλογές που\n" +"απαιτούνται για την αρχικοποίηση της κάρτας. Τις περισσότερες φορές,\n" +"το DrakX θα ολοκληρώσει αυτό το βήμα χωρίς προβλήματα.\n" "\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"." +"Αν το DrakX δεν μπορέσει να εντοπίσει αυτόματα τις απαραίτητες παραμέτρους\n" +"για το υλικό, θα χρειαστεί να ρυθμίσετε τον οδηγό χειροκίνητα." #: ../help.pm:789 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "\"%s\": if a sound card is detected on your system, it'll be displayed\n" "here. If you notice the sound card is not the one actually present on your\n" "system, you can click on the button and choose a different driver." msgstr "" -"ανιχνεύθηκε\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"." +"«%s»: αν εντοπιστεί κάρτα ήχου στο σύστημά σας, θα εμφανιστεί εδώ.\n" +"Αν παρατηρήσετε ότι η κάρτα ήχου που εμφανίζεται δεν είναι αυτή που\n" +"υπάρχει πραγματικά στο σύστημα, μπορείτε να κάνετε κλικ στο κουμπί\n" +"και να επιλέξετε διαφορετικό οδηγό." #: ../help.pm:794 #, c-format @@ -1703,52 +1986,131 @@ msgid "" "on your machine. If you plan to use this machine as a server it's a good\n" "idea to review this setup." msgstr "" +"Ως ανασκόπηση, το DrakX θα σας παρουσιάσει μια σύνοψη των πληροφοριών\n" +"που έχει συγκεντρώσει σχετικά με το σύστημά σας. Ανάλογα με το υλικό που " +"είναι\n" +"εγκατεστημένο στον υπολογιστή σας, ενδέχεται να δείτε μερικές ή όλες από " +"τις\n" +"παρακάτω καταχωρίσεις. Κάθε καταχώριση αποτελείται από το στοιχείο υλικού\n" +"που πρέπει να ρυθμιστεί και μια σύντομη περίληψη της τρέχουσας ρύθμισης.\n" +"Κάντε κλικ στο αντίστοιχο κουμπί «%s» για να κάνετε αλλαγές.\n" +"\n" +" * «%s»: ελέγξτε την τρέχουσα ρύθμιση του πληκτρολογίου και αλλάξτε την αν " +"χρειάζεται.\n" +"\n" +" * «%s»: ελέγξτε την τρέχουσα επιλογή χώρας. Αν δεν βρίσκεστε σε αυτή τη " +"χώρα,\n" +"κάντε κλικ στο κουμπί «%s» και επιλέξτε άλλη. Αν η χώρα σας δεν εμφανίζεται " +"στη λίστα,\n" +"κάντε κλικ στο κουμπί «%s» για να δείτε την πλήρη λίστα χωρών.\n" +"\n" +" * «%s»: από προεπιλογή, το DrakX προσδιορίζει τη ζώνη ώρας με βάση τη χώρα " +"που επιλέξατε.\n" +"Μπορείτε να κάνετε κλικ στο κουμπί «%s» αν αυτό δεν είναι σωστό.\n" +"\n" +" * «%s»: ελέγξτε την τρέχουσα ρύθμιση του ποντικιού και κάντε αλλαγές αν " +"χρειάζεται.\n" +"\n" +" * «%s»: αν εντοπιστεί κάρτα ήχου στο σύστημά σας, θα εμφανιστεί εδώ.\n" +"Αν παρατηρήσετε ότι δεν είναι η σωστή, μπορείτε να κάνετε κλικ στο κουμπί " +"και να επιλέξετε διαφορετικό οδηγό.\n" +"\n" +" * «%s»: αν έχετε κάρτα τηλεόρασης, οι πληροφορίες ρύθμισής της θα " +"εμφανιστούν εδώ.\n" +"Αν δεν εντοπιστεί, κάντε κλικ στο «%s» για να προσπαθήσετε να την ρυθμίσετε " +"χειροκίνητα.\n" +"\n" +" * «%s»: μπορείτε να κάνετε κλικ στο «%s» για να αλλάξετε τις παραμέτρους " +"της κάρτας,\n" +"αν θεωρείτε ότι η ρύθμιση είναι λανθασμένη.\n" +"\n" +" * «%s»: από προεπιλογή, το DrakX ρυθμίζει το γραφικό περιβάλλον σε ανάλυση " +"«800x600»\n" +"ή «1024x768». Αν αυτό δεν σας εξυπηρετεί, κάντε κλικ στο «%s» για να " +"επαναρυθμίσετε τη γραφική διεπαφή.\n" +"\n" +" * «%s»: αν επιθυμείτε να ρυθμίσετε τη σύνδεση στο διαδίκτυο ή σε τοπικό " +"δίκτυο, μπορείτε να το κάνετε τώρα.\n" +"Συμβουλευτείτε την έντυπη τεκμηρίωση ή χρησιμοποιήστε το Κέντρο Ελέγχου του " +"Mageia μετά\n" +"την εγκατάσταση για αναλυτική βοήθεια.\n" +"\n" +" * «%s»: σας επιτρέπει να ρυθμίσετε τις διευθύνσεις διαμεσολαβητή (proxy) " +"για HTTP και FTP,\n" +"αν ο υπολογιστής σας βρίσκεται πίσω από διακομιστή μεσολάβησης.\n" +"\n" +" * «%s»: αυτή η καταχώριση σας επιτρέπει να επανακαθορίσετε το επίπεδο " +"ασφαλείας,\n" +"όπως είχε οριστεί σε προηγούμενο βήμα ().\n" +"\n" +" * «%s»: αν σκοπεύετε να συνδέσετε τον υπολογιστή σας στο διαδίκτυο,\n" +"είναι καλή ιδέα να προστατευτείτε από εισβολές ρυθμίζοντας τείχος προστασίας " +"(firewall).\n" +"Δείτε τη σχετική ενότητα του «Οδηγού Ξεκινήματος» για λεπτομέρειες σχετικά\n" +"με τη ρύθμιση του τείχους προστασίας.\n" +"\n" +" * «%s»: αν επιθυμείτε να αλλάξετε τις ρυθμίσεις του φορτωτή εκκίνησης " +"(bootloader),\n" +"κάντε κλικ σε αυτό το κουμπί. Αυτή η ενέργεια προτείνεται μόνο για " +"προχωρημένους χρήστες.\n" +"Συμβουλευτείτε την έντυπη τεκμηρίωση ή τη σχετική ενσωματωμένη βοήθεια στο " +"Κέντρο Ελέγχου του Mageia.\n" +"\n" +" * «%s»: από αυτή την καταχώριση μπορείτε να ρυθμίσετε λεπτομερώς ποιες " +"υπηρεσίες\n" +"θα εκτελούνται στον υπολογιστή σας. Αν σκοπεύετε να χρησιμοποιήσετε αυτό το " +"σύστημα\n" +"ως διακομιστή, είναι καλό να ελέγξετε προσεκτικά αυτές τις ρυθμίσεις." #: ../help.pm:809 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "TV card" -msgstr "Εσωτερική κάρτα ISDN" +msgstr "Κάρτα τηλεόρασης" #: ../help.pm:809 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "ISDN card" -msgstr "Εσωτερική κάρτα ISDN" +msgstr "Κάρτα ISDN" #: ../help.pm:858 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "Graphical Interface" msgstr "Γραφικό περιβάλλον" #: ../help.pm:861 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Choose the hard disk drive you want to erase in order to install your new\n" "Mageia partition. Be careful, all data on this drive will be lost\n" "and will not be recoverable!" msgstr "" -"Επιλέξτε τον δίσκο που θέλετε να διαγράψετε για να εγκαταστήσετε \n" -"την νέα κατάτμηση Mageia. ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ: Όλα τα δεδομένα θα διαγραφούν\n" -"και θα είναι αδύνατη η επαναφορά τους!" +"Επιλέξτε τον σκληρό δίσκο που θέλετε να διαγράψετε για να εγκαταστήσετε\n" +"τη νέα κατάτμηση Mageia. Προσέξτε, όλα τα δεδομένα σε αυτόν τον δίσκο\n" +"θα χαθούν και δεν θα είναι ανακτήσιμα!" #: ../help.pm:866 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" "present on this hard disk drive." msgstr "" -"Κάντε κλικ στο \"Επόμενο ->\" εάν θέλετε να διαγράψετε όλα τα δεδομένα\n" -"τις κατατμήσεις που βρίσκονται στον σκληρό σας δίσκο. Προσοχή μετά\n" -"που θα κλικ στο \"Επόμενο ->\"δεν θα μπορείτε να ανακτήσετε τα δεδομένα\n" -"και τις κατατμήσεις που βρίσκονται στον δίσκο μαζί και τα Windows\n" -" Επόμενο\n" +"Κάντε κλικ στο «%s» αν θέλετε να διαγράψετε όλα τα δεδομένα και τις " +"κατατμήσεις\n" +"που υπάρχουν σε αυτόν τον σκληρό δίσκο. Προσοχή: μετά το πάτημα του «%s»,\n" +"δεν θα μπορείτε να ανακτήσετε κανένα από τα δεδομένα και τις κατατμήσεις " +"που\n" +"βρίσκονταν σε αυτόν τον δίσκο, συμπεριλαμβανομένων των δεδομένων των " +"Windows.\n" "\n" -"Κάντε κλικ στο \"<- Προηγούμενο\" για να τερματίσετε τη λειτουργία αυτή\n" -"χωρίς να χάσετε τα δεδομένα και τις κατατμήσεις σας στο δίσκο." +"Κάντε κλικ στο «%s» για να ακυρώσετε αυτή τη διαδικασία χωρίς να χαθούν\n" +"δεδομένα και κατατμήσεις από αυτόν τον σκληρό δίσκο." #: ../help.pm:872 #, c-format @@ -1759,109 +2121,3 @@ msgstr "Επόμενο ->" #, c-format msgid "<- Previous" msgstr "<- Προηγούμενο" - -#, fuzzy -#~ msgid "" -#~ "\"%s\": clicking on the \"%s\" button will open the printer " -#~ "configuration\n" -#~ "wizard. Consult the corresponding chapter of the ``Starter Guide'' for " -#~ "more\n" -#~ "information on how to set up a new printer. The interface presented in " -#~ "our\n" -#~ "manual is similar to the one used during installation." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Εκτυπωτής Όχι Εκτυπωτής\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ " νέο\n" -#~ "." - -#, fuzzy -#~ msgid "" -#~ "This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your GNU/" -#~ "Linux\n" -#~ "system: you must enter the \"root\" password. \"Root\" is the system\n" -#~ "administrator and is the only user authorized to make updates, add " -#~ "users,\n" -#~ "change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short, \"root\" " -#~ "can\n" -#~ "do everything! That's why you must choose a password which is difficult " -#~ "to\n" -#~ "guess: DrakX will tell you if the password you chose is too simple. As " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "can see, you're not forced to enter a password, but we strongly advise\n" -#~ "against this. GNU/Linux is just as prone to operator error as any other\n" -#~ "operating system. Since \"root\" can overcome all limitations and\n" -#~ "unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly accessing the\n" -#~ "partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to become\n" -#~ "\"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password should be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and at least " -#~ "8\n" -#~ "characters long. Never write down the \"root\" password -- it makes it " -#~ "far\n" -#~ "too easy to compromise your system.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "One caveat: do not make the password too long or too complicated because " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "must be able to remember it!\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password will not be displayed on screen as you type it. To reduce " -#~ "the\n" -#~ "chance of a blind typing error you'll need to enter the password twice. " -#~ "If\n" -#~ "you do happen to make the same typing error twice, you'll have to use " -#~ "this\n" -#~ "``incorrect'' password the first time you'll try to connect as \"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you want an authentication server to control access to your computer,\n" -#~ "click on the \"%s\" button.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If your network uses either LDAP, NIS, or PDC Windows Domain " -#~ "authentication\n" -#~ "services, select the appropriate one for \"%s\". If you do not know " -#~ "which\n" -#~ "one to use, you should ask your network administrator.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you happen to have problems with remembering passwords, or if your\n" -#~ "computer will never be connected to the Internet and you absolutely " -#~ "trust\n" -#~ "everybody who uses your computer, you can choose to have \"%s\"." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Linux\n" -#~ " Root\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ " Linux\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ " σημαντικό\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ " εξυπηρετητής Για Προχωρημένους\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ " LDAP NIS Τομέας Windows Τομέας\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ " Όχι Διαδίκτυο\n" -#~ "." - -#, fuzzy -#~ msgid "authentication" -#~ msgstr "Πιστοποίηση" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/eo.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/eo.po index e2e006b72..24b9180c0 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/eo.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/eo.po @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-03-14 18:27+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Vilhelmo Lutermano <vlutermano@free.fr>\n" "Language-Team: <eo@li.org>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -27,8 +28,8 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Antaŭ ol daŭrigi, legu zorge la patent-regulojn. Ili kovras la tutan\n" "eldonaĵon de Mandriva Linukso. Se vi konsentas kun ĉiuj reguloj, kiujn\n" -"la teksto enhavas, alklaku la keston \"%s\". Se ne, alklakante la butonon \"%" -"s\"\n" +"la teksto enhavas, alklaku la keston \"%s\". Se ne, alklakante la butonon " +"\"%s\"\n" "restartigos vian komputilon." #: ../help.pm:20 @@ -135,7 +136,8 @@ msgstr "Ĉu vi deziras uzi tiun funkcion?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -145,13 +147,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -162,7 +167,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Ĉi tie estas listigitaj la ekzistantaj linuksaj subdiskoj detektitaj sur via " @@ -207,8 +213,7 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"La instalado de Mageia estas eldonita sur pluraj KD-ROM-oj. Se " -"elektita\n" +"La instalado de Mageia estas eldonita sur pluraj KD-ROM-oj. Se elektita\n" "pakaĵo troviĝas sur alia KD-ROM-o, DrakX elĵetos la aktualan KD kaj petos " "vin enigi\n" "la postulatan. Se vi ne havas la postulatan kompaktdiskon ĉemane,\n" @@ -293,8 +298,8 @@ msgstr "" "konfiguros vian sistemon tiel ke ĝi kongruas kiom eble plej kun la\n" "agordoj de Linux Standard Base.\n" "\n" -" Selekto de la grupo \"LSB\" instalos ankaŭ la seriojn de la kerno \"2.4" -"\",\n" +" Selekto de la grupo \"LSB\" instalos ankaŭ la seriojn de la kerno " +"\"2.4\",\n" "anstataŭ la defaŭltan \"2.6\". Tio estas por certigi centelcentan LSB-" "kongruecon\n" "de la sistemo. Tamen, se vi ne selektas la grupon \"LSB\", vi ja\n" @@ -718,13 +723,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -737,12 +744,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -765,7 +774,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1074,18 +1084,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1108,7 +1121,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1116,7 +1130,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1135,12 +1150,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Nun vi devas elekti kiuj subdisko(j) estu uzata(j) por instalado\n" "de via Mandriva-Linuksa sistemo. Se jam estas difinitaj subdiskoj,\n" @@ -1156,7 +1165,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\": tiu opcio forviŝas ĉiujn subdiskojn sur la selektita fiksdisko.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": Tiu opcio ebligas vin krei aŭtomate subdiskojn de ext3 kaj swap\n" +" * \"%s\": Tiu opcio ebligas vin krei aŭtomate subdiskojn de ext4 kaj swap\n" "en la libera spaco de via fiksdisko\n" "\n" "\"%s\": donas aliron al kromaj eblecoj:\n" @@ -1207,13 +1216,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Por akiri informojn pri la diversaj haveblaj dosier-sistem-tipoj, bonvolu\n" "legi la ĉapitron ext2FS en la ''Referenca Manlibro''.\n" -"\n" -"Se vi instalas sur PPC-maŝinon, vi deziros krei malgrandan HFS-\n" -"''praŝargo''-subdiskon de almenaŭ 1 MB kiu uzotas de la yaboot-\n" -"startigilo. Se vi volas iomete pligrandigi tiun subdiskon, ni diru 50 MB, " -"vi\n" -"povas ankaŭ uzi ĝin por stoki tie kromajn kerno- kaj ramdisk-bildojn por\n" -"paneaj situacioj de startigo." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1253,20 +1255,24 @@ msgstr "Ŝanĝu inter normala/fakula reĝimo" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1277,10 +1283,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Pli ol unu Microsoft-subdisko estas detektitaj sur via fiksdisko.\n" @@ -1338,7 +1346,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1940,8 +1949,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/es.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/es.po index c8cd692bf..d1ac36b90 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/es.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/es.po @@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2005-04-24 11:46+0200\n" "Last-Translator: José Manuel Pérez <jmprodu@hotmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Español <es@li.org>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -140,7 +141,8 @@ msgstr "¿Desea usar esta característica?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -150,13 +152,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -167,7 +172,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Aquí se listan las particiones Linux existentes que se detectaron en su\n" @@ -283,8 +289,7 @@ msgid "" "megabytes." msgstr "" "Ahora es el momento de especificar los programas que desea instalar en su\n" -"sistema. Hay miles de paquetes disponibles para Mageia, y para " -"hacer\n" +"sistema. Hay miles de paquetes disponibles para Mageia, y para hacer\n" "más simple el manejo de los paquetes, los mismos se han puesto en grupos de\n" "aplicaciones similares.\n" "\n" @@ -736,13 +741,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -755,12 +762,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -783,7 +792,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1094,18 +1104,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1128,7 +1141,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1136,7 +1150,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1155,12 +1170,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Ahora necesita elegir qué particiones se utilizarán para la instalación de\n" "su sistema Mageia. Si ya se han definido particiones, ya sea por\n" @@ -1179,7 +1188,7 @@ msgstr "" " * \"%s\": esta opción borra todas las particiones sobre el disco\n" "seleccionado.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": esta opción le permite crear particiones ext3 y swap\n" +" * \"%s\": esta opción le permite crear particiones ext4 y swap\n" "automáticamente en el espacio libre de su disco rígido.\n" "\n" "\"%s\": le da acceso a características adicionales:\n" @@ -1233,12 +1242,6 @@ msgstr "" "Para obtener información sobre los distintos tipos de sistemas de archivos\n" "disponibles, por favor lea el capítulo acerca de ext2FS del \"Manual de\n" "Referencia\".\n" -"\n" -"Si está instalando en una máquina PPC, querrá crear una pequeña partición\n" -"HFS de \"bootstrap\" de al menos 1 MB que será utilizada por el cargador de\n" -"arranque yaboot. Si opta por hacer la partición un poco más grande, digamos\n" -"50 MB, puede ver que es un lugar útil para almacenar un núcleo y ramdisk\n" -"alternativos para arrancar en situaciones de emergencia." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1280,20 +1283,24 @@ msgstr "Cambiar entre el modo normal/experto" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1304,10 +1311,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Se ha detectado más de una partición Microsoft Windows en su disco rígido.\n" @@ -1373,7 +1382,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1398,15 +1408,13 @@ msgstr "" "particionan sus discos, debería usar esta opción.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": Esta clase de instalación le permite actualizar los paquetes que\n" -"en este momento están instalados en su sistema Mageia. No se " -"alteran\n" +"en este momento están instalados en su sistema Mageia. No se alteran\n" "las particiones corrientes de sus discos ni los datos de los usuarios. La\n" "mayoría de los otros pasos de configuración permanecen disponibles y son\n" "similares a una instalación estándar.\n" "\n" "El uso de la opción \"Actualizar\" debería funcionar sin problemas para los\n" -"sistemas Mageia que corren la versión \"8.1\" o una posterior. No " -"se\n" +"sistemas Mageia que corren la versión \"8.1\" o una posterior. No se\n" "recomienda realizar una actualización sobre versiones anteriores a\n" "Mageia versión \"8.1\"." @@ -1980,8 +1988,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/et.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/et.po index 38e5c9510..5346876da 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/et.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/et.po @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2009-03-23 16:08+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Marek Laane <bald@starman.ee>\n" "Language-Team: Estonian <linux-ee@lists.eenet.ee>\n" +"Language: et\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -130,7 +131,8 @@ msgstr "Kas soovite seda lubada?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -140,13 +142,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -157,7 +162,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Ülal on toodud kõik Teie kõvakettal olemasolevad Linuxi partitsioonid.\n" @@ -380,12 +386,10 @@ msgstr "" "NB! Kui tahtlikult või seetõttu, et asi kuulus gruppi,\n" "on valitud mõni serveripakett, palutakse Teilt kinnitust,\n" "et Te ikka tõesti soovite neid servereid paigaldada.\n" -"Mageia käivitab kõik paigaldatud serverid vaikimisi alglaadimise " -"ajal.\n" +"Mageia käivitab kõik paigaldatud serverid vaikimisi alglaadimise ajal.\n" "Isegi kui nad olid turvalised ja teadaolevalt probleemivabad ajal,\n" "mis valmis distributsioon, võib kergesti juhtuda,\n" -"et pärast Mageiai praeguse versiooni valmimist leiti neist " -"turvaauke.\n" +"et pärast Mageiai praeguse versiooni valmimist leiti neist turvaauke.\n" "Kui Te ei tea, mida konkreetne teenus pakub või miks see üldse " "paigaldatakse,\n" "klõpsake nupul \"%s\", sest klõps nupul \"%s\" paigaldab loetletud serverid\n" @@ -691,13 +695,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -710,12 +716,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -738,7 +746,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -796,8 +805,7 @@ msgstr "" "paigaldamiseks.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": kui soovite kustutada kõik andmed ja partitsioonid, mis\n" -"kõvakettal parajasti on, ning asendada need uue Mageiai süsteemiga, " -"on\n" +"kõvakettal parajasti on, ning asendada need uue Mageiai süsteemiga, on\n" "see õige valik. Aga tasub olla ettevaatlik, sest pärast selle valiku " "langetamist\n" "tagasiteed enam ei ole...\n" @@ -906,8 +914,8 @@ msgstr "" ">>linux defcfg=\"floppy\"<< ja vajutades seejärel klahvi [Enter].\n" "\n" "(*) Teil läheb vaja FAT-vorminduses disketti. Sellise loomiseks GNU/Linuxi\n" -"keskkonnas andke käsureal korraldus \"mformat a:\" või \"fdformat /dev/fd0" -"\"\n" +"keskkonnas andke käsureal korraldus \"mformat a:\" või \"fdformat /dev/" +"fd0\"\n" "ning seejärel \"mkfs.vfat /dev/fd0\"." #: ../help.pm:412 @@ -1033,8 +1041,7 @@ msgstr "" "enamasti kasutamise mõnevõrra keerukamaks.\n" "\n" "Kui Te ei tea, mida valida, jätke kehtima vaikimisi pakutud valik. Hiljem\n" -"saate turvataset muuta Mageiai juhtimiskeskuses abivahendiga " -"Draksec.\n" +"saate turvataset muuta Mageiai juhtimiskeskuses abivahendiga Draksec.\n" "\n" "Väli \"%s\" on mõeldud süsteemi turvalisuse eest vastutava kasutaja\n" "teavitamiseks. Turvalisusega seotud teated saadetakse sellele aadressile." @@ -1050,18 +1057,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1084,7 +1094,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1092,7 +1103,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1111,12 +1123,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Nüüd peate valima partitsiooni(d), kuhu soovite Mageiai paigaldada.\n" "Kui need on juba olemas kas GNU/Linuxi varasema paigalduse või mõne muu\n" @@ -1188,12 +1194,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Lähemat infot erinevate failisüsteemitüüpide kohta leiab \"Süvateadmiste\n" "käsiraamatu\" (\"Reference Manual\") peatükist \"Linuxi failisüsteem\".\n" -"\n" -"Kui paigaldamine toimub PPC-masinas, tuleks luua vähemalt 1MB suurune\n" -"väike HFS \"bootstrap\"-partitsioon, mida kasutab alglaadur yaboot. Kui Te\n" -"aga teete selle partitsiooni natukene suuremaks (näiteks nii umbes 50MB),\n" -"on see päris hea koht, kuhu hädaolukorraks paigutada tagavarakernel\n" -"ja ramdisk-laadepildid." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1233,20 +1233,24 @@ msgstr "Tava- ja ekspertrežiimi lülitamine" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1257,10 +1261,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Teie arvuti kõvakettal on rohkem kui üks Microsoft Windowsi partitsioon.\n" @@ -1316,7 +1322,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1341,8 +1348,7 @@ msgstr "" "ülekirjutamise eest päästa.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": see paigaldamisviis võimaldab uuendada praegu olemasolevasse\n" -"Mageiai süsteemi paigaldatud pakette. Kettajagamisskeemi ega " -"kasutajate\n" +"Mageiai süsteemi paigaldatud pakette. Kettajagamisskeemi ega kasutajate\n" "andmeid ei muudeta. Enamik seadistussamme on kasutatavad sarnaselt " "tavapärasele\n" "paigaldamisele.\n" @@ -1871,8 +1877,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/eu.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/eu.po index 949aa45ba..e2b20246e 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/eu.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/eu.po @@ -11,25 +11,26 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: DrakX-eu\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2008-09-12 12:22+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2005-12-31 14:02+0100\n" -"Last-Translator: Iñigo Salvador Azurmendi <xalba@euskalnet.net>\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-10-05 15:08+0100\n" +"Last-Translator: Egoitz Rodriguez Obieta <egoitzro@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: EUSKARA <itzulpena@euskalgnu.org>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"X-Generator: KBabel 1.10.2\n" +"X-Generator: Poedit 1.5.7\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" #: ../help.pm:14 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Before continuing, you should carefully read the terms of the license. It\n" "covers the entire Mageia distribution. If you agree with all the\n" "terms it contains, check the \"%s\" box. If not, clicking on the \"%s\"\n" "button will reboot your computer." msgstr "" -"Aurrera jarraitu aurretik lizentziaren baldintzak arretaz irakurri. \n" -"Mageia banaketa osoa hartzen du. Baldintza guztiekin ados \n" +"Aurrera jarraitu aurretik lizentziaren baldintzak arretaz irakurri.\n" +"Mageia banaketa osoa hartzen du. Baldintza guztiekin ados\n" "bazaude, hautatu \"%s\" laukia. Onartzen ez badituzu, \"%s\" botoian klik\n" "egin eta ordenagailua berrabiaraziko da." @@ -116,12 +117,12 @@ msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "User name" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Erabiltzaile izena" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "Accept user" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Erabiltzailea onartu" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format @@ -133,7 +134,8 @@ msgstr "Eginbide hau erabili nahi duzu?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -143,13 +145,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -160,7 +165,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Hemen dituzu zure disko zurrunean detektatutako Linux partizioak.\n" @@ -201,7 +207,7 @@ msgstr "" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manual/literal/drakx/eu/drakx-help.xml #: ../help.pm:88 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The Mageia installation is distributed on several CD-ROMs. If a\n" "selected package is located on another CD-ROM, DrakX will eject the current\n" @@ -218,7 +224,7 @@ msgstr "" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manual/literal/drakx/eu/drakx-help.xml #: ../help.pm:95 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "It's now time to specify which programs you wish to install on your system.\n" "There are thousands of packages available for Mageia, and to make it\n" @@ -348,7 +354,7 @@ msgstr "Instalazio minimo-minimoa" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manual/literal/drakx/eu/drakx-help.xml #: ../help.pm:152 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you choose to install packages individually, the installer will present\n" "a tree containing all packages classified by groups and subgroups. While\n" @@ -499,7 +505,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:213 #, c-format msgid "Hardware clock set to GMT" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Hardware-erlojua GMT-an jarri " #: ../help.pm:213 #, c-format @@ -530,7 +536,7 @@ msgstr "" "aukeratu beharko duzu." #: ../help.pm:234 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "X (for X Window System) is the heart of the GNU/Linux graphical interface\n" "on which all the graphical environments (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep,\n" @@ -710,16 +716,18 @@ msgstr "" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manual/literal/drakx/eu/drakx-help.xml #: ../help.pm:319 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -732,12 +740,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -760,7 +770,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -844,7 +855,7 @@ msgstr "Erabili lehendik dagoen partizioa" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format msgid "Use the free space on the Microsoft Windows® partition" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Microsoften Windows-eko ® partizioko espazio librea erabili ezazu" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format @@ -935,22 +946,22 @@ msgstr "Sortu auto-instalazioko disketea" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Replay" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Errepikatu" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Automated" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Automatizatuta" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Save packages selection" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Pakete-hautaketa gorde ezazu" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manual/literal/drakx/eu/drakx-help.xml #: ../help.pm:408 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you chose to reuse some legacy GNU/Linux partitions, you may wish to\n" "reformat some of them and erase any data they contain. To do so, please\n" @@ -990,8 +1001,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Klikatu \"%s\" partizioak eratzeko prest zaudenean.\n" "\n" -"Klikatu \"%s\" Mageia sistema eragile berria instalatzeko beste " -"partizio\n" +"Klikatu \"%s\" Mageia sistema eragile berria instalatzeko beste partizio\n" " bat aukeratu nahi baduzu.\n" "\n" "Klikatu \"%s\" diskoan hondatutako blokeak aurkitzeko egiaztatuko diren\n" @@ -1000,7 +1010,7 @@ msgstr "" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manual/literal/drakx/eu/drakx-help.xml #: ../help.pm:437 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "By the time you install Mageia, it's likely that some packages will\n" "have been updated since the initial release. Bugs may have been fixed,\n" @@ -1030,7 +1040,7 @@ msgstr "" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manual/literal/drakx/eu/drakx-help.xml #: ../help.pm:450 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, DrakX will allow you to choose the security level you desire\n" "for your machine. As a rule of thumb, the security level should be set\n" @@ -1066,23 +1076,26 @@ msgstr "Segurtasun-administratzailea" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manual/literal/drakx/eu/drakx-help.xml #: ../help.pm:464 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1105,7 +1118,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1113,7 +1127,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1132,12 +1147,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Orain, Mageia sistema instalatzeko zein partizio erabiliko\n" "d(ir)en aukeratu behar duzu. Partizioak jadanik definituta badaude,\n" @@ -1156,7 +1165,7 @@ msgstr "" " * \"%s\": aukera honek hautatutako disko zurruneko partizio guztiak \n" "ezabatzen ditu\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": aukera honekin automatikoki sor ditzakezu ext3 eta\n" +" * \"%s\": aukera honekin automatikoki sor ditzakezu ext4 eta\n" "swap partizioak disko zurruneko leku librean\n" "\n" "\"%s\": eginbide gehiagotarako aukera ematen du:\n" @@ -1209,27 +1218,21 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Erabil daitezkeen fitxategi-sistema desberdinei buruzko informazioa\n" "lortzeko, irakurri ``Erreferentzia Eskuliburuko'' ext2FS kapitulua.\n" -"\n" -"PPC makina batean instalatu behar baduzu, gutxienez 1 Mbko HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partizio txiki bat sortzea komeni zaizu, yaboot\n" -"abioko kargatzaileak erabil dezan. Partizioa handixeagoa egitea hautatzen \n" -"baduzu, adibidez 50 MBkoa, leku egokia izan daiteke ordezko nukleo bat\n" -"eta ramdisk imajinak biltegiratzeko emergentziazko abioa egin ahal izateko." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Save partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Partizio taula gorde" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Restore partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Partizio taula berritu" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Rescue partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Partizio taula berrezkuratu" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1239,12 +1242,12 @@ msgstr "Euskarri aldagarriak automuntatzea" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Wizard" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Morroia" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Undo" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Desegin" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1254,22 +1257,26 @@ msgstr "Aldatu modu normalera/aditu modura" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manual/literal/drakx/eu/drakx-help.xml #: ../help.pm:536 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1280,10 +1287,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Microsoft partizio bat baino gehiago aurkitu dira zure disko zurrunean.\n" @@ -1335,7 +1344,7 @@ msgstr "" "jasotzeko." #: ../help.pm:572 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "This step is activated only if an existing GNU/Linux partition has been\n" "found on your machine.\n" @@ -1346,7 +1355,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1423,7 +1433,7 @@ msgstr "" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manual/literal/drakx/eu/drakx-help.xml #: ../help.pm:612 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The first step is to choose your preferred language.\n" "\n" @@ -1481,8 +1491,7 @@ msgstr "" "UTF-8 (unicode) euskarriari buruz: Unicode karaktere kodeketa berri bat da,\n" "existitzen diren hizkuntza guztiak hartu nahi dituena. Hala ere, " "berarentzako\n" -"erabateko euskarria oraindik garatzen ari da GNU/Linux-en, Mageia-" -"en\n" +"erabateko euskarria oraindik garatzen ari da GNU/Linux-en, Mageia-en\n" "UTF-8 erabilera erabiltzailearen hautaketen araberakoa da:\n" "\n" " * Jatorrizko kodeketa ahaltsua duen hizkuntza bat aukeratzen baduzu \n" @@ -1518,7 +1527,7 @@ msgstr "Gaztelania" #: ../help.pm:643 #, c-format msgid "Use Unicode by default" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Modu lehenetsian Erabili Unikodea" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manual/literal/drakx/eu/drakx-help.xml @@ -1651,7 +1660,7 @@ msgstr "" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manual/literal/drakx/eu/drakx-help.xml #: ../help.pm:745 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Now, it's time to select a printing system for your computer. Other\n" "operating systems may offer you one, but Mageia offers two. Each of\n" @@ -1679,8 +1688,7 @@ msgid "" "Control Center and clicking on the \"%s\" button." msgstr "" "Inprimatzeko sistema bat hautatzeko unea da orain.Eeste sistema eragile \n" -"batzuk bakarra eskainiko dizute, baina Mageia-ek bi eskaintzen " -"ditu.\n" +"batzuk bakarra eskainiko dizute, baina Mageia-ek bi eskaintzen ditu.\n" "Inprimaketa sistema bakoitza egokiago da konfigurazio mota batzuetarako.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\" -- ``print, do not queue'' esapidearen akronimoa da, eta aukera\n" @@ -1712,7 +1720,7 @@ msgstr "pdq" #: ../help.pm:724 #, c-format msgid "CUPS" -msgstr "" +msgstr "CUPS" #: ../help.pm:724 #, c-format @@ -1772,7 +1780,7 @@ msgstr "" "botoian klik egin eta beste gidari bat hauta dezakezu." #: ../help.pm:794 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "As a review, DrakX will present a summary of information it has gathered\n" "about your system. Depending on the hardware installed on your machine, you\n" @@ -1858,11 +1866,6 @@ msgstr "" " * \"%s\": egiaztatu uneko sagu konfigurazioa eta klikatu botoia aldatzea\n" "beharrezka bada.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": \"%s\" botoian klikatzeak inprimagailu konfigurazio morroia\n" -"irekiko du. Kontsultatu ``Hasiberrien Gida''n dagokion atala inprimagailu\n" -"berri bat nola ezarri jakiteko. Bertan azaldutako interfazea instalazioan\n" -" erabiltzen denaren antzekoa da.\n" -"\n" " * \"%s\": zure sisteman soinu txartel bat detektatzen bada, hemen\n" " bistaratuko da. Bistaratutako soinu-txartela zure sisteman instalatuta " "dagoena ez dela Ikusten baduzu, botoian klikatu eta beste gidari bat\n" @@ -1902,15 +1905,12 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\": sarrera honen bitartez zehatz doitu dezakezu zure makinan\n" "zein zerbitzu exekutatuko diren. Makina hau zerbitzari moduan erabiltzeko\n" -"asmoa badaukazu ona litzateke ezarpen hau errepasatzea.zure makinan zein " -"zerbitzu exekutatuko diren doitasunez \n" -"kontrola dezakezu hemendik. Makina hau zerbitzari gisa erabiltzeko asmoa \n" -"baduzu, konfigurazio hau berrikustea komeni zaizu." +"asmoa badaukazu ona litzateke ezarpen hau errepasatzea." #: ../help.pm:809 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "TV card" -msgstr "ISDN txartela" +msgstr "TB txartela" #: ../help.pm:809 #, c-format @@ -1925,7 +1925,7 @@ msgstr "Interfaze grafikoa" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manual/literal/drakx/eu/drakx-help.xml #: ../help.pm:861 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Choose the hard disk drive you want to erase in order to install your new\n" "Mageia partition. Be careful, all data on this drive will be lost\n" @@ -1941,8 +1941,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" @@ -1966,117 +1968,3 @@ msgstr "Hurrengoa ->" #, c-format msgid "<- Previous" msgstr "<- Aurrekoa" - -#~ msgid "" -#~ "\"%s\": clicking on the \"%s\" button will open the printer " -#~ "configuration\n" -#~ "wizard. Consult the corresponding chapter of the ``Starter Guide'' for " -#~ "more\n" -#~ "information on how to set up a new printer. The interface presented in " -#~ "our\n" -#~ "manual is similar to the one used during installation." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "\"%s\": \"%s\" botoian klik eginda inprimagailuak konfiguratzeko morroia\n" -#~ "irekiko da. Begiratu \"Starter Guide\"/\"Hasiberrien Gida\"-n dagokion\n" -#~ "kapitulua inprimagailu berria nola ezarri jakiteko. Gure eskuliburuan \n" -#~ "aurkeztutako interfazea instalazio garaian erabilitakoaren antzekoa da." - -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manual/literal/drakx/eu/drakx-help.xml -#~ msgid "" -#~ "This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your GNU/" -#~ "Linux\n" -#~ "system: you must enter the \"root\" password. \"Root\" is the system\n" -#~ "administrator and is the only user authorized to make updates, add " -#~ "users,\n" -#~ "change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short, \"root\" " -#~ "can\n" -#~ "do everything! That's why you must choose a password which is difficult " -#~ "to\n" -#~ "guess: DrakX will tell you if the password you chose is too simple. As " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "can see, you're not forced to enter a password, but we strongly advise\n" -#~ "against this. GNU/Linux is just as prone to operator error as any other\n" -#~ "operating system. Since \"root\" can overcome all limitations and\n" -#~ "unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly accessing the\n" -#~ "partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to become\n" -#~ "\"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password should be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and at least " -#~ "8\n" -#~ "characters long. Never write down the \"root\" password -- it makes it " -#~ "far\n" -#~ "too easy to compromise your system.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "One caveat: do not make the password too long or too complicated because " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "must be able to remember it!\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password will not be displayed on screen as you type it. To reduce " -#~ "the\n" -#~ "chance of a blind typing error you'll need to enter the password twice. " -#~ "If\n" -#~ "you do happen to make the same typing error twice, you'll have to use " -#~ "this\n" -#~ "``incorrect'' password the first time you'll try to connect as \"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you want an authentication server to control access to your computer,\n" -#~ "click on the \"%s\" button.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If your network uses either LDAP, NIS, or PDC Windows Domain " -#~ "authentication\n" -#~ "services, select the appropriate one for \"%s\". If you do not know " -#~ "which\n" -#~ "one to use, you should ask your network administrator.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you happen to have problems with remembering passwords, or if your\n" -#~ "computer will never be connected to the Internet and you absolutely " -#~ "trust\n" -#~ "everybody who uses your computer, you can choose to have \"%s\"." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Hau da erabaki puntu garrantzitsuena zure GNU/Linux sistemaren\n" -#~ " segurtasunerako: \"root\" pasahitza idatzi behar duzu. \"Root\" sistema\n" -#~ " administratzailea da eta berak bakarrik dauka sistema eguneratu,\n" -#~ " erabiltzaileak erantsi, konfigurazio orokorra aldatu eta " -#~ "horrelakoetarako\n" -#~ " baimena. Labur esateko, \"root\"ek guztia egin dezake! Horregatik " -#~ "aukeratu\n" -#~ "behar duzu asmatzeko zaila den pasahitza. DrakX-k esango dizu aukeratzen\n" -#~ "duzun pasahitza errazegia den. Ikus dezakezunez ez zaude pasahitz bat\n" -#~ "sartzera behartuta, baino biziki gomendatzen dizugu horrelakorik ez " -#~ "egitea.\n" -#~ "GNU/Linux, erabilzaileen akatsetara beste edozein sistema eragilek adina\n" -#~ " joera dauka. \"root\"-ek muga guztiak gaindi ditzakeenez eta nahi gabe\n" -#~ " partizioetako datu guztiak ezaba ditzakeenez beraietara behar bezain\n" -#~ "kontuz ez sartzeagatik, garrantzi handia dauka \"root\" gisa sartzea\n" -#~ "zaila izatea.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Pasahitzak karaktere alfanumerikoen nahasketa izan behar luke, gutxienez\n" -#~ "8 karakterekoa. Ez idatzi inon \"root\" pasahitza - zure sistema " -#~ "arriskuan\n" -#~ "jartzea izugarri errazten du.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Oharra - ez egin pasahitza luzeegia edo konplexuegia, gero zuk " -#~ "gogoratzeko\n" -#~ "modukoa izan behar baitu!\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Pasahitza ez da pantailan bistaratuko zuk idatzi bitartean. Tekleatzean\n" -#~ "egindako akatsak saihesteko, pasahitza bi aldiz idatzi beharko duzu.\n" -#~ "Akats tipografiko bera bil aldiz egiten baduzu, pasahitz ``oker'' hori " -#~ "erabili\n" -#~ " beharko duzu \"root\" bezela konektatzen zaren lehen aldian.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Ordenagailu honen sarbidea autentifikazio-zerbitzari batek kontrolatzea\n" -#~ "nahi baduzu, egin klik \"%s\" botoian.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Zure sareak LDAP, NIS, edo PDC Windows domeinuen autentifikazio\n" -#~ " zerbitzuak erabiltzen baditu, hautatu \"%s\"ri dagokiona. Zein erabili " -#~ "ez\n" -#~ " badakizu, galdetu sare-administratzaileari.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Pasahitzak gogoratzeko arazoak badituzu, edo zure ordenagailua inoiz ez\n" -#~ " bada Internetera konektatuta egongo eta konfiantza osoa baduzu\n" -#~ " ordenagailua erabiltzen duten guztiengan, \"%s\" hauta dezakezu." - -#~ msgid "authentication" -#~ msgstr "egiaztatzea" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/fa.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/fa.po index 5b735b028..220fd90a2 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/fa.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/fa.po @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2005-02-26 06:31+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Abbas Izad <abbasizad@hotmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -132,7 +133,8 @@ msgstr "آیا میخواهید از این قابلیت استفاده کن #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -142,13 +144,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -159,7 +164,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "قسمتبندیهای لینوکس شناسائی شدهی موجود بر دیسک شما در اینجا فهرست شدهاند.\n" @@ -201,8 +207,8 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "نصب لینوکس ماندریبا در چند سیدی پخش شده است. اگر بسته انتخاب شده بر روی\n" "سیدی دیگری قرار دارد DrakX سیدی کنونی را بیرون زده و از شما میخواهد که\n" -"سیدی خواسته شده را داخل کنید. اگر آن سیدی مورد تقاضا را ندارید فقط بر روی \"%" -"s\"\n" +"سیدی خواسته شده را داخل کنید. اگر آن سیدی مورد تقاضا را ندارید فقط بر روی " +"\"%s\"\n" "کلیک کنید و بستههای مربوطه نصب نخواهند شد." #: ../help.pm:95 @@ -284,8 +290,8 @@ msgstr "" "از آن رده انتخاب کنید. گروه مخصوص \"LSB\" سیستمتان را طوری پیکربندی\n" "خواهد کرد تا هر چه بیشتر با مقررات پایه استاندارد لینوکس مطابقت داشته باشد.\n" "\n" -" انتخاب گروه \"LSB\" همچنین سریال هسته \"2.4\" را نیز بجای پیش فرض \"2.6" -"\" \n" +" انتخاب گروه \"LSB\" همچنین سریال هسته \"2.4\" را نیز بجای پیش فرض " +"\"2.6\" \n" "نصب خواهد کرد. این برای اطمینان ۱۰۰٪٪-مطابقت سیستم است. هر چند، اگر گروه\n" "\"LSB\" را انتخاب نکنید سیستمی خواهید داشت که تقریبا ۱۰۰٪٪ LSB-تطبیق دارد.\n" "\n" @@ -698,13 +704,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -717,12 +725,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -745,7 +755,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1038,18 +1049,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1072,7 +1086,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1080,7 +1095,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1099,12 +1115,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "در این نقطه، شما مجبور به انتخاب قسمتبندی(های) که برای نصب سیستم لینوکس \n" "ماندریبا استفاده خواهد شد هستید.اگر قسمتبندیهایی که یا از یک نصب قبلی \n" @@ -1121,7 +1131,7 @@ msgstr "" " * \"%s\": این گزینه تمام قسمتبندیهای روی دیسک انتخاب شده را حذف میکند\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": این گزینه بر روی فضای آزاد دیسک شما بطور خودکار قسمتبندیهای\n" -"ext3 و حافظه مبادله را ایجاد میکند\n" +"ext4 و حافظه مبادله را ایجاد میکند\n" "\n" "\"%s\": دسترسی به قابلیتهای دیگر را فراهم میسازد\n" "\n" @@ -1171,12 +1181,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "برای دریافت اطلاعات درباره انواع سیستم پرونده موجود، لطفاً فصل ext2FS \n" "را از ` دستورالعمل مرجع'' بخوانید.\n" -"\n" -"اگر شما بر یک ماشین PPC نصب میکنید، شما باید یک قسمتبندی کوچک HFS \n" -"``bootstrap'' حداقل ۱ مگابایت که برای بارگذار آغازگر yaboot\n" -"استفاده میشود را ایجاد کنید اگر شما بطور اختیاری آن قسمتبندی را بزرگتر\n" -"بسازید، مثلاً ۵۰ مگابایت، شما آن را برای انبار یک هسته یدک و تصاویر ramdisk\n" -"در شرایط آغازگری اضطراری مفید خواهید یافت." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1216,20 +1220,24 @@ msgstr "تعویض بین حالت عادی/کارشناسی" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1240,10 +1248,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "بیش از یک قسمتبندی مایکروسافت بر دیسک شما شناسایی شده است. \n" @@ -1302,7 +1312,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1879,8 +1890,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/fi.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/fi.po index b16291e0e..8f2f5d961 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/fi.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/fi.po @@ -1,39 +1,35 @@ -# DrakX-fi - Finnish Translation -# -# Copyright (C) 2002,2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. -# Copyright (C) 2002 Mandriva -# Matias Griese <mahagr@utu.fi>, 2001. -# Taisto Kuikka <69319@batman.jypoly.fi>, 2003,2004. -# Esa Linna <denzo@mbnet.fi>, 2004. -# Thomas Backlund <tmb@mandrake.org>, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005. +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) YEAR THE PACKAGE'S COPYRIGHT HOLDER +# This file is distributed under the same license as the PACKAGE package. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. # +# Translators: +# Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2024 # +#, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: DrakX-fi - LE2005 Release\n" +"Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2008-09-12 12:22+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2005-04-03 20:59+0300\n" -"Last-Translator: Thomas Backlund <tmb@mandrake.org>\n" -"Language-Team: Finnish <fi@li.org>\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2024-09-04 17:33+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2024\n" +"Language-Team: Finnish (https://app.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/teams/9361/" +"fi/)\n" +"Language: fi\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"X-Generator: KBabel 1.9.1\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" #: ../help.pm:14 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Before continuing, you should carefully read the terms of the license. It\n" "covers the entire Mageia distribution. If you agree with all the\n" "terms it contains, check the \"%s\" box. If not, clicking on the \"%s\"\n" "button will reboot your computer." msgstr "" -"Ennen jatkamista sinun pitäisi lukea huolellisesti lisenssin ehdot.\n" -"Lisenssi kattaa koko Mageia jakelun. Jos hyväksyt kaikki\n" -"ehdot, valitse \"%s\" valinta. Jos et hyväksy ehtoja, painamalla \n" -"\"%s\" painiketta tietokoneesi käynnistyy uudestaan." #: ../help.pm:20 #, c-format @@ -92,8 +88,8 @@ msgstr "" "kirjoittaa mitä tahansa. DrakX kopioi ensimmäisen kirjoittamasi sanan\n" "kenttään \"%s\". Tämä on se nimi jolla kyseinen käyttäjä kirjautuu\n" "järjestelmään. Voit muuttaa sitä halutessasi. Sinun pitää myös syöttää\n" -"salasana. Tavallisen käyttäjän salasana ei ole niin kriittinen kuin \"root" -"\"\n" +"salasana. Tavallisen käyttäjän salasana ei ole niin kriittinen kuin " +"\"root\"\n" "-käyttäjän turvallisuusnäkökulmasta, mutta tämä ei ole syy tietoturvan\n" "laiminlyömiseen: Onhan kysymys tiedostojesi turvasta.\n" "\n" @@ -130,7 +126,8 @@ msgstr "Haluatko käyttää tätä ominaisuutta?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -140,13 +137,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -157,7 +157,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Tässä on listaus olemassa olevista tunnistetuista Linux-osioista\n" @@ -193,7 +194,7 @@ msgstr "" "\"toiseksi pienin SCSI ID\", jne..." #: ../help.pm:88 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The Mageia installation is distributed on several CD-ROMs. If a\n" "selected package is located on another CD-ROM, DrakX will eject the current\n" @@ -201,14 +202,9 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"Mageiain asennus koostuu useasta CD-ROM-levystä. DrakX tietää,\n" -"onko valittu paketti toisella CD:llä ja osaa syöttää nykyisen levyn ulos\n" -"ja pyytää sinua asettamaan oikean levyn tarvittaessa. Jos sinulla ei ole\n" -"kyseistä CD-levyä käytettävissä, klikkaa vain \"%s\", ja kyseiset paketit\n" -"ei asenneta." #: ../help.pm:95 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "It's now time to specify which programs you wish to install on your system.\n" "There are thousands of packages available for Mageia, and to make it\n" @@ -265,64 +261,6 @@ msgid "" "command-line interface. The total size of this installation is about 65\n" "megabytes." msgstr "" -"Nyt on aika valita mitä ohjelmia haluat asentaa järjestelmääsi. Tarjolla\n" -"on tuhansia paketteja Mageia jakelussa, ja pakettien\n" -"hallinnan helpottamiseksi ne on koottu samanlaisten ohjelmistojen\n" -"ryhmiin.\n" -"\n" -"Paketit on ryhmitelty ryhmiin koneesi käyttötarkoituksen mukaisesti.\n" -"Mageia sisältää neljä eri ennakkoon määriteltyä asennustapaa.\n" -"Voit verrata asennustapoja pakettiryhmiin. Voit tietysti asentaa paketteja\n" -"eri ryhmistä niin halutessasi, joten ``Työasema''-asennus voi sisältää\n" -"ohjelmia esimerkiksi ``Kehitysympäristö''-ryhmästä.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": Jos aiot käyttää konettasi työasemana, valitse yksi tai useampi\n" -" ohjelma tästä ryhmästä.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": Jos konettasi aiotaan käyttää ohjelmakehitykseen, valitse yksi " -"tai\n" -"useampi haluttu paketti tästä ryhmästä. Erillinen \"LSB\" ryhmä asettaa\n" -"järjestelmäsi seuraamaan Linux Standard Base määritykset \n" -"mahdollisimman tarkoin.\n" -"\n" -" Valitsemalla \"LSB\" ryhmää asentaa myös \"2.4\" sarjan ytimet, vakiona\n" -"olevien \"2.6\" sarjan ytimien sijasta. Tämä jotta varmistetaan 100%% LSB-\n" -"yhteensopivuutta järjestelmässä. Huomioi, vaikka jätät \"LSB\" ryhmää\n" -"valitsematta, sinulla on kummiskin järjestelmä joka on melkein 100%%\n" -"\"LSB\"-yhteensopiva.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": Jos koneesi on tarkoitettu toimimaan palvelimena' valitse yksi " -"tai\n" -"useampi haluttu palvelu tai palvelinohjelma tästä ryhmästä.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": täältä valitset haluamasi graafisen ympäristön. Ainakin yksi " -"pitää\n" -"olla valittu jos haluat graafisen työaseman!\n" -"\n" -"Jos siirrät hiiren kohdistinta ryhmänimen yläpuolella, lyhyt selostus " -"ryhmän\n" -"sisällöstä tulee näkyviin. Jos poistat kaikki ryhmävalinnat kun teet \n" -"tavallisen asennuksen (päivityksen sijasta), esille tulee dialogi, joka \n" -"ehdottaa kolmea eri optiota vähimmäisasennukseen:\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": asenna vain tarvittavat paketit, joilla saat toimivan graafisen\n" -"työpöydän;\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": asentaa perusjärjestelmän ja perustyökalut sekä niiden\n" -"dokumentaatiot. Tämä valinta sopii palvelinasennukseen;\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": asentaa ainoastaan tarvittavat osat saadaksesi toimivan\n" -"komentorivipohjaisen Linux-järjestelmän. Tämä asennus vie vain noin \n" -"65 Mt tilaa.\n" -"\n" -"Voit valita \"%s\" jos tarjolla olevat paketit ovat tuttuja sinulle tai jos " -"haluat\n" -"täydellisen hallinnan asennettaviin paketteihin.\n" -"\n" -"Jos aloitit asennuksen \"%s\"-tilassa, voit poistaa kaikkien ryhmien " -"valinnat\n" -"välttääksesi uusien pakettien asentamisen. Tämä on hyödyllistä jos haluat\n" -"korjata tai päivittää olemassa olevaa järjestelmää." #: ../help.pm:149 ../help.pm:591 #, c-format @@ -334,14 +272,13 @@ msgstr "Päivitä" msgid "With basic documentation" msgstr "Perusdokumentaation kanssa" -# Asennuksen sivuvalikko #: ../help.pm:149 #, c-format msgid "Truly minimal install" msgstr "Todella minimaalinen asennus" #: ../help.pm:152 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you choose to install packages individually, the installer will present\n" "a tree containing all packages classified by groups and subgroups. While\n" @@ -377,39 +314,6 @@ msgid "" "another installation. See the second tip of the last step on how to create\n" "such a floppy." msgstr "" -"Jos valitsit mahdollisuuden valita yksittäisiä paketteja, sinulle\n" -"näytetään hakemistopuu, jossa kaikki paketit ovat luokiteltuina\n" -"ryhmien ja alaryhmien mukaan. Kun selaat puuta, voit valita koko\n" -"ryhmät, alaryhmät tai yksittäiset paketit.\n" -"\n" -"Kun valitset paketin hakemistopuussa, sen kuvaus näkyy oikean-\n" -"puoleisessa ikkunassa, jotta tietäisit paketin tarkoituksen.\n" -"\n" -"!! Jos palvelinpaketti on valittu, joko tarkoituksella tai koska se kuului\n" -"johonkin valitsemaasi ryhmään, sinulta pyydetään vahvistusta,\n" -"haluatko varmasti asentaa palvelimen. Oletuksena Mageia\n" -"käynnistää jokaisen asennetun palvelin koneen käynnistyksen\n" -"yhteydessä. Vaikka ne ovat turvallisia eikä niillä ole tunnettuja\n" -"ongelmia jakelun julkaisuajankohtana, niistä voi löytyä turvallisuus-\n" -"reikiä jakelun valmistumisen jälkeen. Jos et tiedä mihin joku tietty\n" -"palvelu on tarkoitettu, tai miksi sitä asennetaan, paina \"%s\". Jos\n" -"painat \"%s\" listatut palvelut asennetaan sekä käynnistetään\n" -"automaattisesti oletuksena koneen käynnistyksessä !!\n" -"\n" -"Optio \"%s\" estää virhedialogin\n" -"joka ilmestyy joka kerta kun asennusohjelma automaattisesti\n" -"valitsee paketin riippuvuuksien täyttämiseksi. Jotkut paketit sisältävät\n" -"riippuvuuksia jotka vaativat että joku toinen paketti on jo asennettu\n" -"ennen kuin se voidaan asentaa. Asennusohjelma osaa itse huolehtia\n" -"siitä että nämä riippuvuudet on täytetty jotta asennus valmistuisi\n" -"onnistuneesti.\n" -"\n" -"Listan alla olevalla levykkeen kuvakkeella voit hakea pakettilistan\n" -"joka on luotu edellisessä asennuksessa. Tämä on hyödyllistä jos\n" -"sinulla on monta konetta joihin haluat suorittaa samanlaisen asennuksen.\n" -"Jos painat tätä kuvaketta, sinua pyydetään asettamaan levyke joka on\n" -"luotu toisen asennuksen lopussa. Katso edellisen vaiheen toisesta\n" -"vihjeestä, miten luot sellaisen levykkeen." #: ../help.pm:183 #, c-format @@ -517,7 +421,7 @@ msgstr "" "sinua pyydetään valitsemaan palvelin joka vastaa tarpeitasi." #: ../help.pm:234 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "X (for X Window System) is the heart of the GNU/Linux graphical interface\n" "on which all the graphical environments (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep,\n" @@ -575,57 +479,6 @@ msgid "" "want to check \"%s\" if your machine is to act as a server, or if you were\n" "not successful in getting the display configured." msgstr "" -"X (eli X Ikkunointijärjestelmä) on GNU/Linuxin graafisen käyttöliittymän\n" -"sydän jota kaikki graafiset ympäristöt (KDE, Gnome, AfterStep,\n" -"WindowMaker jne.), jotka seuraavat Mageiain mukana,\n" -"käyttävät alustanaan.\n" -"\n" -"Sinulle näytetään lista eri parametreista joita voit asettaa saadaksesi\n" -"optimaalisen graafisen näytön:\n" -"\n" -"Näytönohjain\n" -"\n" -" Asennusohjelma yleensä tunnistaa ja asettaa koneeseesi asennetun\n" -"näytönohjaimen. Mikäli tämä ei onnistunut, voit itse valita oikean mallin\n" -"listasta omistamasi korttisi mukaisesti.\n" -"\n" -" Mikäli eri palvelimia on käytettävissä kortillesi, 3D tuella vai ilman,\n" -"sinua pyydetään valitsemaan palvelin joka parhaiten vastaa tarpeitasi.\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"Näyttö\n" -"\n" -" Asennusohjelma normaalisti tunnistaa ja asettaa koneeseesi liitetyn\n" -"näytön automaattisesti. Jos tunnistus epäonnistuu voit valita oikean\n" -"näytön listasta.\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"Näyttötila\n" -"\n" -" Tässä voit valita näyttötilan ja värisyvyyden jota laitteistosi tukee.\n" -"Valitse se joka parhaiten vastaa tarpeitasi (voit tietysti vaihtaa sitä\n" -"asennuksen jälkeenkin). Malli valitusta asetuksesta näytetään näytössä.\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"Testi\n" -"\n" -" Järjestelmä yrittää avata graafisen tilan halutussa näyttötilassa.\n" -"Jos näet viestin testauksen aikana ja vastaat \"%s\", DrakX jatkaa\n" -"seuraavaan vaiheeseen. Jos et näe viestiä, se tarkoittaa että jokin osa\n" -"automaattisesti tunnistetusta asetuksesta oli virheellistä, ja testi\n" -"loppuu automaattisesti 12 sekunnin jälkeen, jolloin pääset takaisin\n" -"asetusvalikkoon. Muuta asetuksia kunnes saat oikean graafisen näytön.\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"Optiot\n" -"\n" -" Täällä voit valita haluatko järjestelmän automaattisesti käynnistävän\n" -"graafisen käyttöliittymän. Luonnollisesti valitset \"%s\" jos koneesi\n" -"toimii palvelimena tai jos et pystynyt määrittämään toimivaa graafista tilaa." #: ../help.pm:291 #, c-format @@ -686,16 +539,18 @@ msgstr "" "on tarkoitettu palvelimeksi tai jos näytön asetus epäonnistui." #: ../help.pm:319 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -708,12 +563,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -736,7 +593,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -749,65 +607,6 @@ msgid "" "experience. For more instructions on how to use the DiskDrake utility,\n" "refer to the ``Managing Your Partitions'' section in the ``Starter Guide''." msgstr "" -"Nyt sinun pitää valita miten haluat asentaa Mageia käyttö-\n" -"järjestelmän kiintolevyllesi. Jos kiintolevysi on tyhjä, tai nykyinen\n" -"käyttöjärjestelmäsi käyttää siltä kaiken vapaan tilan, sinun pitää osioida\n" -"se. Käytännössä osiointi tarkoittaa kiintolevyn loogista jakamista\n" -"osiin tehdäksesi tilaa Mageia-järjestelmän asennukselle.\n" -"\n" -"Koska osiointiprosessin muutoksia ei yleensä voi peruuttaa, ja se voi\n" -"johtaa tietojen häviämiseen jos toinen käyttöjärjestelmä on jo asennettuna,\n" -"osiointi voi olla pelottavaa ja stressaavaa jos olet kokematon käyttäjä.\n" -"Onneksi DrakX sisältää velhon, joka yksinkertaistaa tämän prosessin.\n" -"Ennen kuin aloitat, lue nämä ohjeet rauhassa.\n" -"\n" -"Riippuen kiintolevyasetuksistasi, tarjolla on useita eri vaihtoehtoja:\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": tämä vaihtoehto suorittaa vapaana olevan tilan\n" -"automaattisen osioinnon. Sinulta ei kysytä mitään muuta.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": velho on tunnistanut olemassa olevat\n" -"Linux-osiot. Jos haluat käyttää niitä, valitse tämä vaihtoehto. Sinua\n" -"pyydetään seuraavaksi valitsemaan osioiden liitospisteet. Ennestään\n" -"käytettyjä liitoskohtia ehdotetaan oletuksena ja yleensä niitä ei kannata\n" -"muuttaa.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": jos Microsoft Windows on\n" -"asennettu kiintolevyllesi ja se vie kaiken tilan, sinun pitää luoda vapaata\n" -"tilaa Linuxille. Tehdäksesi tämän voit joko poistaa Windows-osion (katso\n" -"``Tyhjennä koko levy''-vaihtoehto) tai muuttaa FAT-osion kokoa. Osion\n" -"koon muuttaminen voidaan tehdä ilman tietojen hävittämistä, kunhan olet\n" -"eheyttänyt sen ja se käyttää FAT-tiedostojärjestelmää. Tietojen varmistus\n" -"on kuitenkin suotavaa. Tämä vaihtoehto on suositeltu jos haluat käyttää\n" -"Mageiaia ja Microsoft Windowsia samassa koneessa.\n" -"\n" -" Ennen kuin valitset tämän vaihtoehdon, sinun pitää ymmärtää että tämän\n" -"toimenpiteen jälkeen Windows-osiosi on pienempi kuin tällä hetkellä.\n" -"Sinulla tulee olemaan vähemmän vapaata tilaa Windowsille, johon voit\n" -"tallentaa tietojasi tai asentaa uusia ohjelmia.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": valitse tämä jos haluat poistaa kaikki tiedot\n" -"ja osiot ja asentaa Mageia -järjestelmäsi niiden tilalle. Ole\n" -"varovainen tämän valinnan kanssa, koska et pysty peruuttamaan\n" -"valintaasi kun olet hyväksynyt tämän toimenpiteen.\n" -"\n" -" !! Jos valitset tämän vaihtoehdon, kaikki tiedot kiintolevylläsi " -"tuhoutuu !!\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": tämä vaihtoehto näkyy ainoastaan jos koko kovalevysi on\n" -"Microsoft Windowsin käytössä. Tämä yksinkertaisesti poistaa kaikki\n" -"tiedot kiintolevyltä ja aloittaa puhtaalta levyltä osioimalla kaikki alusta\n" -"asti. Kaikki tiedot kiintolevylläsi tuhoutuu.\n" -"\n" -" !! Jos valitset tämän vaihtoehdon, kaikki tiedot kiintolevylläsi " -"tuhoutuu !!\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": valitse tämä vaihtoehto, jos haluat itse\n" -"määrittää kiintolevysi osioinnin. Ole varovainen - tämä on tehokas mutta\n" -"vaarallinen vaihtoehto. Voit helposti menettää kaikki tietosi. Eli,\n" -"älä käytä tätä vaihtoehtoa, jos et tiedä tarkalleen mitä teet. Jos haluat\n" -"lisätietoja DiskDrake työkalun käytöstä, katso osaa ``Managing Your \n" -"Partitions'' osiota ``Starter Guidessa''." #: ../help.pm:377 #, c-format @@ -915,7 +714,7 @@ msgid "Save packages selection" msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:408 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you chose to reuse some legacy GNU/Linux partitions, you may wish to\n" "reformat some of them and erase any data they contain. To do so, please\n" @@ -939,31 +738,9 @@ msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you wish to select partitions which will be checked for\n" "bad blocks on the disk." msgstr "" -"Kaikki vasta määritellyt osiot täytyy alustaa käyttöä varten (alustaminen\n" -"tarkoittaa tiedostojärjestelmän luomista).\n" -"\n" -"Samalla voit haluta alustaa uudelleen myös olemassaolevia osioita\n" -"poistaaksesi kaiken niissä olevan tiedon. Jos haluat haluat tehdä niin,\n" -"valitse myös ne osiot.\n" -"\n" -"Huomaa, että sinun ei ole pakko alustaa kaikkia jo olemassa olevia\n" -"osioita. Sinun pitää alustaa ne osiot, joilla käyttöjärjestelmä\n" -"sijaitsee (kuten \"/\", \"/usr\" ja \"/var\"), mutta voit säilyttää osiot,\n" -"joilla henkilökohtaiset tiedostosi sijaitsevat (tavallisesti \"/home\").\n" -"\n" -"Ole huolellinen osioita valitessasi. Alustamisen jälkeen kaikki tieto\n" -"valituilla osioilla on poissa eikä niiden palauttaminen enää onnistu.\n" -"\n" -"Valitse \"%s\" kun olet valmis alustamaan osiot.\n" -"\n" -"Valitse \"%s\", jos haluat valita toisen osion Mageiain\n" -"asentamiseen.\n" -"\n" -"Valitse \"%s\", jos haluat valita osiot, jotka tarkistetaan\n" -"levyllä olevien viallisten lohkojen varalta." #: ../help.pm:437 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "By the time you install Mageia, it's likely that some packages will\n" "have been updated since the initial release. Bugs may have been fixed,\n" @@ -977,21 +754,9 @@ msgid "" "will appear: review the selection, and press \"%s\" to retrieve and install\n" "the selected package(s), or \"%s\" to abort." msgstr "" -"Tässä vaiheessa, kun asennat Mageiaia, on todennäköistä että\n" -"jotkut paketit on päivitetty alkujulkaisun jälkeen. Joitakin virheitä voi " -"olla\n" -"korjattu ja turvallisuusaukkoja paikattu. Hyödyntääksesi näitä päivityksiä,\n" -"sinulla on nyt mahdollisuus hakea ne Internetistä. Valitse \"%s\" jos\n" -"sinulla on toimiva Internet yhteys, tai \"%s\" jos haluat asentaa\n" -"päivitykset myöhemmin.\n" -"\n" -"Valitsemalla \"%s\" sinulle näytetään lista päivityspalvelimista.\n" -"Valitse lähin palvelin. Sen jälkeen sinulle näytetään lista päivityksistä:\n" -"tarkista valinnat ja paina \"%s\" jolloin paketit haetaan ja\n" -"asennetaan, tai \"%s\" poistuaksesi päivityksestä." #: ../help.pm:450 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, DrakX will allow you to choose the security level you desire\n" "for your machine. As a rule of thumb, the security level should be set\n" @@ -1006,19 +771,6 @@ msgid "" "Fill the \"%s\" field with the e-mail address of the person responsible for\n" "security. Security messages will be sent to that address." msgstr "" -"Tässä vaiheessa DrakX antaa sinun valita tietokoneellesi sopivan\n" -"turvatason. Yleisesti mitä enemmän tärkeää tietoa on tallennettu\n" -"koneellesi, tai jos se on kytketty Internetiin, sitä korkeampi turvatason\n" -"pitäisi olla. Huomaa kuitenkin, että korkeampi turvallisuustaso\n" -"saavutetaan yleensä käytettävyyden kustannuksella.\n" -"\n" -"Jos et tiedä mitä valita, käytä oletuksena olevaa vaihtoehtoa. Voit\n" -"myöhemmin vaihtaa turvatason Mandriva Ohjauskeskuksesta löytyvällä\n" -"draksec-työkalulla.\n" -"\n" -"\"%s\" asetus kertoo järjestelmälle käyttäjän, joka vastaa turvasta.\n" -"Turvaan liittyvät viestit lähetetään hänelle kyseiseen " -"sähköpostiosoitteeseen." #: ../help.pm:461 #, c-format @@ -1026,23 +778,26 @@ msgid "Security Administrator" msgstr "Tietoturvan ylläpitäjä:" #: ../help.pm:464 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1065,7 +820,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1073,7 +829,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1092,84 +849,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" -"Tässä vaiheessa sinun pitää määrittää mitkä osiot käytetään Mageia\n" -"-järjestelmäsi asennuksessa. Jos osioita on jo määritelty, joko\n" -"edellisestä GNU/Linux-asennuksesta tai jonkun toisen osiointityökalun\n" -"tekeminä, niin voit käyttää olemassa olevia osioita. Muussa tapauksissa\n" -"osiot pitää luoda.\n" -"\n" -"Luodaksesi osioita, sinun pitää ensin valita kiintolevy. Voit valita " -"osioitavan\n" -"levyn painamalla 'hda' ensimmäiselle IDE-levylle, 'hdb' toiselle, 'sda'\n" -"ensimmäiselle SCSI-levylle ja niin edelleen.\n" -"\n" -"Osioidaksesi valitun levyn voit valita näistä vaihtoehdoista:\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": tämä toiminto poistaa kaikki osiot kiintolevyllä\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": tämä toiminto luo automaattisesti\n" -"tarvittavat ext3-osiot ja sivutusosion levyn tyhjästä tilasta\n" -"\n" -"\"%s\": näyttää seuraavat lisätoiminnot:\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": tallentaa osiotaulun levykkeelle. Tämä on\n" -"hyödyllinen levyke, jos pitää palauttaa osiotaulu. Suosittelemme\n" -"tämän levykkeen tekoa\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": palauttaa aikaisemmin tallennetun osiotaulun\n" -"levykkeeltä\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": jos osiotaulusi on viottunut, voit kokeilla sen\n" -"korjaamista tällä toiminnolla. Ole varovainen, ja muista että tämä\n" -"voi epäonnistua\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": hylkää kaikki tekemäsi muutokset ja\n" -"palauta alkuperäinen osiotaulu\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": tämän valinnan\n" -"poistaminen pakottaa käyttäjät itse liittämään ja irrottamaan\n" -"vaihdettavat levyt, esim. levykkeet ja CD-levyt\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": valitse tämä vaihtoehto jos haluat velhon osioimaan\n" -"kiintolevysi. Tämä on suositeltua sinulle jos osiointi ei ole tuttua\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": tämä vaihtoehto poistaa tekemäsi muutokset\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": sallii lisätoimintoja\n" -"osioille (tyyppi, optiot, formaatti) ja näyttää lisätietoja\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": kun kiintolevyn osiointi on valmis, tämä toiminto\n" -"tallentaa tekemäsi muutokset levylle ja jatkaa asennusta.\n" -"\n" -"Kun määrität osion kokoa, voit hienosäätää kokoa käyttämällä\n" -"näppäimistön nuolinäppäimiä.\n" -"\n" -"Huom!: Voit myös käyttää kaikkia toimintoja näppäimistöllä. Siirry\n" -"osioiden ja toimintojen välillä käyttämällä [Tab] ja [Ylös/Alas] näppäimiä.\n" -"\n" -"Kun osio tai tyhjä tila on valittu voit käyttää:\n" -"\n" -" * Ctrl-C luodaksesi uuden osion (kun tyhjä tila on valittu)\n" -"\n" -" * Ctrl-D poistaaksesi osion\n" -"\n" -" * Ctrl-M valitaksesi liitospisteen\n" -"\n" -"Saadaksesi lisätietoja käytettävissä olevista tiedostojärjestelmistä,\n" -"lue lisää ``Reference Manual'':sta osasta ext2FS.\n" -"\n" -"Jos olet asentamassa PPC-koneelle, sinun pitää luoda pieni HFS\n" -"``bootstrap''-osio kooltaan vähintään 1Mt, joka tulee Yaboot\n" -"käynnistyslataajan käyttöön. Jos päätät tehdä osiosta vähän suuremman,\n" -"esim. 50Mt, on hyvä ajatus asentaa ylimääräinen ydin ja ramdisk-kuva\n" -"virhetilanteiden käynnistystarpeeseen." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1207,22 +887,26 @@ msgid "Toggle between normal/expert mode" msgstr "Vaihda vakio-/asiantuntijatilan välillä" #: ../help.pm:536 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1233,43 +917,14 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" -"Useampi kuin yksi Microsoft-osio on löydetty kiintolevyltäsi. Ole hyvä\n" -"ja valitse osio jonka kokoa haluat muuttaa asentaaksesi uuden\n" -"Mageia -käyttöjärjestelmäsi.\n" -"\n" -"Jokainen osio on lueteltu seuraavasti: \"Linux nimi\", Windows nimi\", \"Koko" -"\".\n" -"\n" -"\"Linux nimi\" rakenne on seuraava: \"kiintolevytyyppi\". \"kiintolevynumero" -"\", \n" -"\"osionumero\" (esim. \"hda1\").\n" -"\n" -"\"kiintolevytyyppi\" on \"hd\" jos kiintolevysi on IDE-tyyppinen ja \"sd\" " -"jos\n" -"se on SCSI-tyyppinen.\n" -"\n" -"\"kiintolevynumero\" on aina kirjain \"hd\":n tai \"sd\":n perässä.\n" -"IDE-kiintolevyille: \n" -"\n" -" * \"a\" tarkoittaa \"isäntälevy ensisijaisella IDE ohjaimella\";\n" -"\n" -" * \"b\" tarkoittaa \"orjalevy ensisijaisella IDE ohjaimella\";\n" -"\n" -" * \"c\" tarkoittaa \"isäntälevy toissijaisella IDE ohjaimella\";\n" -"\n" -" * \"d\" tarkoittaa \"orjalevy toissijaisella IDE ohjaimella\";\n" -"\n" -"SCSI kiintolevyillä \"a\" tarkoittaa \"pienin SCSI ID\", \"b\" tarkoittaa\n" -"\"toiseksi pienin SCSI ID\", jne.\n" -"\n" -"\"Windows nimi\" on Windowsissa näkyvä osiota vastaava kirjain\n" -"(ensimmäinen osio on \"C:\", seuraava \"D:\" jne.)." #: ../help.pm:567 #, c-format @@ -1284,7 +939,7 @@ msgstr "" "listassa, paina \"%s\" painiketta jolloin näet listan kaikista maista." #: ../help.pm:572 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "This step is activated only if an existing GNU/Linux partition has been\n" "found on your machine.\n" @@ -1295,7 +950,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1307,26 +963,6 @@ msgid "" "running version \"8.1\" or later. Performing an upgrade on versions prior\n" "to Mageia version \"8.1\" is not recommended." msgstr "" -"Tämä vaihe asennuksesta näytetään ainoastaan jos vanha GNU/Linux-\n" -"osio on löydetty koneestasi.\n" -"\n" -"DrakX haluaa nyt tietää, haluatko suorittaa uuden asennuksen vai vanhan\n" -"Mageia -järjestelmän päivityksen:\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": oletuksena tämä tapa poistaa vanhan asennuksen. Jos haluat\n" -"muuttaa miten kiintolevysi on osioitu tai vaihtaa tiedostojärjestelmää, " -"sinun\n" -"kannattaa valita tämä vaihtoehto. Riippuen nykyisestä osioinnistasi, voit\n" -"ehkä valita niin ettei kaikkia tietojasi hävitetä.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": tämä vaihtoehto sallii sinun päivittää paketteja\n" -"nykyisessä Mageia -järjestelmässäsi. Nykyistä osiointiasi\n" -"eikä käyttäjien tietoja muuteta. Suurin osa muista asennuksen\n" -"vaiheista on käytössäsi niin kuin ne ovat vakioasennuksessa.\n" -"\n" -"``Päivitä''-ominaisuuden pitäisi toimia Mageia\n" -"-järjestelmän versiosta \"8.1\" eteenpäin. Vanhemman version\n" -"kuin \"8.1\" päivittämistä ei suositella." #: ../help.pm:594 #, c-format @@ -1369,7 +1005,7 @@ msgstr "" "järjestyksen välillä." #: ../help.pm:612 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The first step is to choose your preferred language.\n" "\n" @@ -1411,44 +1047,6 @@ msgid "" "by the entire system. Running the command as a regular user will only\n" "change the language settings for that particular user." msgstr "" -"Ensimmäinen askel on valita toivottu kieli.\n" -"\n" -"Valitsemasi oletuskieli päättää minkä kielinen dokumentaatio\n" -"asennetaan, kuten myös asennusohjelman ja järjestelmän\n" -"kielen. Valitse ensin missä asut ja sitten mitä kieltä käytät.\n" -"\n" -"Valitsemalla \"%s\" saat mahdollisuuden valita\n" -"myös muita kieliä asennettavaksi työasemallesi. Muiden kielten\n" -"valitseminen asentaa kielikohtaiset tiedostot järjestelmän\n" -"dokumentoinnista ja ohjelmistoista. Esimerkiksi jos sinulla\n" -"koneessasi espanjalaisia käyttäjiä, valitse suomi (tai englanti)\n" -"pääkieleksi ja lisäasetusten puolelta \"%s\".\n" -"\n" -"Tietoja UTF-8 (unicode) tuesta: Unicode on uusi kirjasinten \n" -"määrittelytapa joka on määrä kattaa kaikki olemassa olevat kielet.\n" -"Huomaa etttä täysi tuki GNU/Linuxissa on viellä työn alla. Tästä syystä\n" -"Mageiain UTF-8 käyttö riippuu käyttäjän valinnasta:\n" -"\n" -" * Jos valitset kielen jossa on vahva \"vanhanaikainen\" kirjasinmäärittely\n" -"(latin1 kielet, Venäjä, Japani, Kiina, Korea, Thai, Kreikka, Turkki, suurin " -"osa\n" -"iso-8859-2 kielet), \"vanhanaikainen koodaus käytettään oletuksena.\n" -"\n" -" * Muut kielet käyttävät unicode oletuksena.\n" -"\n" -" * Jos kaksi (tai enemmän) kieltä tarvitaan, ja ne eivät käytä samaa\n" -"koodausta, käytetään unicode koko järjestelmälle.\n" -"\n" -" * Viimeisenä, voit myös pakottaa järjestelmän käyttämään Unicodea \n" -"(UTF-8) valitsemalla \"%s\"\n" -"\n" -"Huomaa, että voit valita useita ylimääräisiä kieliä tai jopa kaikki\n" -"valitsemalla \"%s\". Kielituen valinta tarkoittaa käännösten,\n" -"kirjasinten, oikolukuohjelmien jne. asentamista kyseiselle kielelle.\n" -"\n" -"Vaihtaaksesi eri kielten välillä voit suorittaa \"/usr/bin/localedrake\"\n" -"\"root\"-käyttäjänä, jolloin vaihdat koko järjestelmän kieltä, tai\n" -"tavallisena käyttäjänä, jolloin vaihdat vain sen käyttäjän vakiokielen." #: ../help.pm:650 #, c-format @@ -1580,7 +1178,7 @@ msgstr "" "käynnistyslataajaa ei asenneta. Tee tämä vain mikäli tiedät mitä teet." #: ../help.pm:745 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Now, it's time to select a printing system for your computer. Other\n" "operating systems may offer you one, but Mageia offers two. Each of\n" @@ -1607,34 +1205,6 @@ msgid "" "system you may change it by running PrinterDrake from the Mageia\n" "Control Center and clicking on the \"%s\" button." msgstr "" -"Nyt on aika valita tulostusjärjestelmä tietokoneellesi. Muut " -"käyttöjärjestelmät\n" -"saattavat tarjota sinulle yhden järjestelmän, mutta Mageia tarjoaa\n" -"kaksi. Kukin tulostusjärjestelmä sopii parhaiten tietyille asetuksille.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\" -- joka tarkoittaa ``tulosta, älä jonota'' (print, do not " -"queue).\n" -"Tämä on sopiva valinta jos sinulla on suora yhteys tulostimeesi ja haluat\n" -"mahdollisuuden 'hätäkatkaisuun' jos tulostin menee tukkoon, eikä sinulla\n" -"ole verkkoon liitettyjä tulostimia. (\"%s\" tukee ainoastaan " -"yksinkertaisimpia\n" -"verkkoasetelmia ja on hidas verkkokäyttöön.) Valitse \"pdq\" jos tämä on\n" -"ensimmäinen GNU/Linux tuttavuutesi.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\" -- ``Common Unix Printing System'', eli Yleinen Unix Tulostus-\n" -"järjestelmä, on mainio tulostettaessa paikalliseen tulostimeen tai\n" -"vaikkapa maapallon toiselle puolelle. Se on yksinkertainen järjestelmä\n" -"ja voi toimia tulostuspalvelimena tai asiakkaana vanhalle \"lpd\"-\n" -"tulostusjärjestelmälle. Näin ollen, se on yhteensopiva vanhempien\n" -"järjestelmien kanssa. Se on monitaitoinen, mutta perusasetuksen\n" -"teko on melkein yhtä helppoa kuin \"pdq\". Jos tarvitset \"lpd\"-palvelimen\n" -"emulointia, sinun pitää käynnistää \"cups-lpd\" -demoni. \"%s\"\n" -"sisältää graafisen käyttöliittymän jota voidaan käyttää tulostamiseen\n" -"tai asetuksien tekoon.\n" -"\n" -"Jos teet valinnan nyt, ja myöhemmin huomaat ettet pidä nykyisestä\n" -"tulostusjärjestelmästä voit muuttaa valintaasi Mandrivan Ohjauskeskuksesta\n" -"löytyvässä PrinterDrakessa valitsemalla \"%s\"-painikkeen." #: ../help.pm:768 #, c-format @@ -1701,7 +1271,7 @@ msgstr "" "ajurin." #: ../help.pm:794 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "As a review, DrakX will present a summary of information it has gathered\n" "about your system. Depending on the hardware installed on your machine, you\n" @@ -1764,72 +1334,11 @@ msgid "" "on your machine. If you plan to use this machine as a server it's a good\n" "idea to review this setup." msgstr "" -"DrakX näyttää yhteenvedon laitteistoasi koskevista tiedoista\n" -"jotka se on kerännyt. Asennetusta laitteistosta riippuen, näet joitakin\n" -"tai kaikki seuraavista tietueista. Jokainen tietue koostuu asetettavasta\n" -"laitteesta ja lyhyestä selostuksesta laitteen asetuksien nykytilasta.\n" -"Paina tietuetta vastaavaa \"%s\" painiketta jos haluat muuttaa sitä.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": tarkista näppäinasettelu ja vaihda sitä tarvittaessa.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": tarkista maa-asetukset. Jos et ole maassa, joka on valittu,\n" -"paina \"%s\"-painiketta ja valitse oikea. Jos maasi ei ole\n" -"listassa paina \"%s\"-painiketta, jolloin näet listan kaikista maista.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": DrakX oletuksena arvioi aikavyöhykkeesi riippuen\n" -"siitä, minkä kielen olet valinnut. Jos tämä ei ole oikea, voit muuttaa sitä\n" -"painamalla \"%s\".\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": tarkista nykyiset hiiriasetukset ja muuta niitä tarvittaessa.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": painamalla \"%s\"-painiketta avaat tulostuksen\n" -"asetusvelhon. Lue lisää asiaa koskevasta luvusta ``Aloitusoppaasta''\n" -"saadaksesi lisätietoa miten asettaa uusi tulostin. Käyttöliittymä\n" -"joka oppaassa esitetään on vastaava kuin se jota käytetään asennuksen\n" -"aikana.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": jos äänikortti on tunnistettu järjestelmässäsi, se\n" -"näytetään täällä. Jos huomaat että näytetty äänikortti ei vastaa sitä\n" -"joka on asennettu koneeseesi, voit nappia painamalla valita toisen\n" -"ajurin.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": jos TV-kortti on tunnistettu järjestelmässäsi, se\n" -"näytetään täällä. Jos sinulla on TV-kortti eikä sitä ole tunnistettu,\n" -"voit painaa \"%s\" ja yrittää asettaa sen itse.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": paina \"%s\" jos haluat muuttaa parametreja joka\n" -"koskee korttia jaka mielestäsi on väärin asetettu.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": oletuksena DrakX asettaa graafisen\n" -"käyttöliittymäsi käyttämään \"800x600\" tai \"1024x768\" näyttötilaa.\n" -"Jos tämä ei sovi sinulle, paina \"%s\" muuttaaksesi asetuksia.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": jos haluat asettaa Internet- tai paikallisverkkoasetuksesi,\n" -"voit tehdä sen nyt. Katso ohjekirjasta, tai käytä Mageia\n" -"Ohjauskeskus asennuksen jälkeen hyödyntääksesi sisäiset ohjeet.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": sallii sinua asettamaan HTTP ja FTP välityspalvelimia jos\n" -"asentamasi kone on välitysåpalvelimen takana.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": tässä voit muuttaa asennuksen alussa asettamaasi\n" -"turvatasoa jos haluat.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": Jos aiot yhdistää koneesi Internetiin, kannattaa\n" -"suojautua verkon vaaroilta asettamalla palomuuri. Katso\n" -"``Aloitusoppaasta'' tätä aihetta vastaavaa lukua saadaksesi lisätietoa\n" -"palomuurin asetuksista.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": jos haluat muuttaa käynnistyslataajan asetuksia,\n" -"paina vastaavaa nappia. Tätä ei kannata muuttaa jos et ole asiantuntija.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": täällä voit määrittää mitä palveluja järjestelmässäsi\n" -"toimii. Jos aiot käyttää tätä konetta palvelimena, kannattaa nämä\n" -"asetukset tarkistaa." #: ../help.pm:809 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "TV card" -msgstr "ISDN-kortti" +msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:809 #, c-format @@ -1842,22 +1351,21 @@ msgid "Graphical Interface" msgstr "Graafinen käyttöliittymä" #: ../help.pm:861 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Choose the hard disk drive you want to erase in order to install your new\n" "Mageia partition. Be careful, all data on this drive will be lost\n" "and will not be recoverable!" msgstr "" -"Valitse kiintolevy, jonka haluat tyhjentää uudelle Mageia\n" -"-asennusosiolle. Ole varovainen, koska kaikki asemalla oleva tieto\n" -"tuhoutuu eikä ole enää palautettavissa!" #: ../help.pm:866 #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" @@ -1881,114 +1389,3 @@ msgstr "Seuraava ->" #, c-format msgid "<- Previous" msgstr "<- Edellinen" - -#~ msgid "" -#~ "\"%s\": clicking on the \"%s\" button will open the printer " -#~ "configuration\n" -#~ "wizard. Consult the corresponding chapter of the ``Starter Guide'' for " -#~ "more\n" -#~ "information on how to set up a new printer. The interface presented in " -#~ "our\n" -#~ "manual is similar to the one used during installation." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "\"%s\": painamalla \"%s\" painiketta avautuu tulostimen\n" -#~ "asetusvelho. Katso tätä vastaava lukua ``Aloitusoppaasta'' saadaksesi\n" -#~ "lisätietoa miten asetat uuden tulostimen. Oppaassa näytetty\n" -#~ "käyttöliittymä on vastaava kuin asennuksen aikana käytetty." - -#~ msgid "" -#~ "This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your GNU/" -#~ "Linux\n" -#~ "system: you must enter the \"root\" password. \"Root\" is the system\n" -#~ "administrator and is the only user authorized to make updates, add " -#~ "users,\n" -#~ "change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short, \"root\" " -#~ "can\n" -#~ "do everything! That's why you must choose a password which is difficult " -#~ "to\n" -#~ "guess: DrakX will tell you if the password you chose is too simple. As " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "can see, you're not forced to enter a password, but we strongly advise\n" -#~ "against this. GNU/Linux is just as prone to operator error as any other\n" -#~ "operating system. Since \"root\" can overcome all limitations and\n" -#~ "unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly accessing the\n" -#~ "partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to become\n" -#~ "\"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password should be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and at least " -#~ "8\n" -#~ "characters long. Never write down the \"root\" password -- it makes it " -#~ "far\n" -#~ "too easy to compromise your system.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "One caveat: do not make the password too long or too complicated because " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "must be able to remember it!\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password will not be displayed on screen as you type it. To reduce " -#~ "the\n" -#~ "chance of a blind typing error you'll need to enter the password twice. " -#~ "If\n" -#~ "you do happen to make the same typing error twice, you'll have to use " -#~ "this\n" -#~ "``incorrect'' password the first time you'll try to connect as \"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you want an authentication server to control access to your computer,\n" -#~ "click on the \"%s\" button.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If your network uses either LDAP, NIS, or PDC Windows Domain " -#~ "authentication\n" -#~ "services, select the appropriate one for \"%s\". If you do not know " -#~ "which\n" -#~ "one to use, you should ask your network administrator.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you happen to have problems with remembering passwords, or if your\n" -#~ "computer will never be connected to the Internet and you absolutely " -#~ "trust\n" -#~ "everybody who uses your computer, you can choose to have \"%s\"." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Tämä on tärkein päätös joka koskee GNU/Linux-järjestelmäsi " -#~ "turvallisuutta:\n" -#~ "sinun pitää syöttää \"root\" salasana. \"Root\" on järjestelmän " -#~ "ylläpitäjä\n" -#~ "ja ainoa, jolla on oikeudet päivittää järjestelmää, lisätä käyttäjiä, " -#~ "muuttaa\n" -#~ "järjestelmän asetuksia jne. Lyhyesti, \"root\" voi tehdä mitä vain! " -#~ "Tämän\n" -#~ "vuoksi sinun pitää valita salasana joka on vaikea arvata - DrakX kertoo\n" -#~ "sinulle jos salasana on liian helppo. Kuten huomaat, voit jättää " -#~ "salasanan\n" -#~ "syöttämättä, mutta suosittelemme ettet tee niin, ainakin yhdestä syystä:\n" -#~ "GNU/Linux on yhtä altis käyttäjän virheille kuin muutkin " -#~ "käyttöjärjestelmät.\n" -#~ "Koska \"root\" voi ohittaa kaikki rajoitukset ja vahingossa poistaa " -#~ "kaikki\n" -#~ "tiedot osioilta on tärkeää, että on vaikea päästä \"root\"-käyttäjäksi.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Salasanan pitäisi koostua kirjaimista ja numeroista sekä olla vähintään\n" -#~ "8 merkkiä pitkä. Älä koskaan kirjoita \"root\" salasanaa paperille - se\n" -#~ "tekisi järjestelmään murtautumisesta liian helppoa.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Älä myöskään valitse liian pitkää tai monimutkaista salasanaa koska " -#~ "sinun\n" -#~ "pitää itse muistaa se ongelmitta.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Salasanaa ei näytetä kun syötät sitä ja tästä syystä sinun pitää syöttää\n" -#~ "se kahdesti, jolla pyritään ehkäisemään kirjoitusvirheitä. Jos " -#~ "sattumalta\n" -#~ "teet saman kirjoitusvirheen kahdesti, joudut käyttämään tätä ``väärää''\n" -#~ "salasanaa ensimmäisessä sisäänkirjautumisessa.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Jos haluat että pääsyä tähän koneeseen hallitaan tunnistuspalvelimen\n" -#~ "kautta, paina \"%s\"-painiketta.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Jos verkkosi käyttää LDAP, NIS tai PDC Windows verkkoalueen\n" -#~ "tunnistuspalvelua, valitse oikea \"%s\" vaihtoehto.\n" -#~ "Jos sinulla ei ole tietoa, kysy verkon ylläpitäjältä.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Jos sinulla on ongelmia muistaa salasanoja, jos koneesi ei ole\n" -#~ "yhteydessä Internetiin tai jos uskot kaikkiin koneesi käyttäjiin,\n" -#~ "voit valita \"%s\"." - -#~ msgid "authentication" -#~ msgstr "tunnistustapa" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/fr.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/fr.po index 149d13bf3..b6db93b4a 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/fr.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/fr.po @@ -75,19 +75,20 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: DrakX-fr\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2008-09-12 12:22+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2008-09-24 15:29+0200\n" -"Last-Translator: Christophe Berthelé <cpjc@free.fr>\n" -"Language-Team: French <cooker-i18n@mandrivalinux.org>\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-04-25 17:02+0100\n" +"Last-Translator: Yann Ciret <mageia@zamiz.net>\n" +"Language-Team: French <i18n-fr@ml.mageia.org>\n" +"Language: fr\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"X-Generator: KBabel 1.11.4\n" +"X-Generator: Poedit 1.5.5\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2;plural=(n>1);\n" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/fr/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:14 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Before continuing, you should carefully read the terms of the license. It\n" "covers the entire Mageia distribution. If you agree with all the\n" @@ -195,7 +196,8 @@ msgstr "Voulez-vous utiliser cette fonctionnalité ?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -205,13 +207,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -222,7 +227,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "La liste présentée plus haut identifie les partitions GNU/Linux détectées\n" @@ -244,7 +250,8 @@ msgstr "" "Le « type de disque dur » correspond à hd si votre disque est IDE. Pour un\n" "disque SCSI, vous lirez « sd ».\n" "\n" -"Le « numéro du disque » est toujours listé après le « hd » ou « sd ». Pour les\n" +"Le « numéro du disque » est toujours listé après le « hd » ou « sd ». Pour " +"les\n" "disques durs IDE :\n" "\n" " * « a » signifie « disque primaire maître sur le premier contrôleur IDE »;\n" @@ -264,7 +271,7 @@ msgstr "" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/fr/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:88 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The Mageia installation is distributed on several CD-ROMs. If a\n" "selected package is located on another CD-ROM, DrakX will eject the current\n" @@ -272,8 +279,7 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"Les paquetages requis à l'installation de Mageia sont distribués " -"sur\n" +"Les paquetages requis à l'installation de Mageia sont distribués sur\n" "plusieurs CD-ROM. Si un paquetage requis se trouve sur un autre CD-ROM,\n" "DrakX éjectera celui présent dans le lecteur et vous demandera d'insérer le\n" "CD-ROM approprié. Si vous ne possédez pas le CD demandé, cliquez tout\n" @@ -283,7 +289,7 @@ msgstr "" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/fr/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:95 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "It's now time to specify which programs you wish to install on your system.\n" "There are thousands of packages available for Mageia, and to make it\n" @@ -354,15 +360,14 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * « %s » : si votre système doit être utilisé pour la programmation,\n" "choisissez les groupes désirés. Le groupe spécial « LSB » configurera votre\n" -"système de manière à ce qu'il corresponde le plus possible avec la Linux\n" -"Standard Base.\n" +"système de manière à ce qu'il corresponde le plus possible\n" +"aux spécifications Linux Standard Base.\n" "\n" -" Si vous choisissez le groupe « LSB », cela assurera\n" -"une compatibilité LSB maximale. Cependant, si vous ne sélectionnez pas ce\n" -"groupe « LSB » vous aurez quand même un système presque entièrement\n" -"compatible LSB.\n" +" Si vous choisissez le groupe « LSB », cela assurera une compatibilité\n" +"LSB maximale. Cependant, si vous ne sélectionnez pas ce groupe « LSB »\n" +"vous aurez quand même un système presque entièrement compatible LSB.\n" "\n" -" * « %s » : enfin, si votre système doit fonctionner en tant que serveur,\n" +" * « %s » : si votre système doit fonctionner en tant que serveur,\n" "vous pourrez sélectionner les services que vous voulez installer.\n" "\n" " * « %s » : ce groupe vous permettra de déterminer quel environnement\n" @@ -372,8 +377,8 @@ msgstr "" "En plaçant votre souris au-dessus d'un nom de groupe, vous verrez\n" "apparaître une courte description de ce groupe.\n" "\n" -"Vous pouvez enfin cocher l'option « %s ». Cette option est à utiliser si\n" -"vous connaissez exactement le paquetage désiré ou si vous voulez avoir le\n" +"Vous pouvez cocher l'option « %s ». Cette option est à utiliser si vous\n" +"connaissez exactement le paquetage désiré ou si vous voulez avoir le\n" "contrôle total de votre installation.\n" "\n" "Si vous avez démarré l'installation en mode « %s », vous pouvez\n" @@ -412,7 +417,7 @@ msgid "Truly minimal install" msgstr "Installation réellement minimale" #: ../help.pm:152 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you choose to install packages individually, the installer will present\n" "a tree containing all packages classified by groups and subgroups. While\n" @@ -448,7 +453,7 @@ msgid "" "another installation. See the second tip of the last step on how to create\n" "such a floppy." msgstr "" -"Enfin, si vous avez choisi de sélectionner individuellement les paquetages\n" +"Si vous avez choisi de sélectionner individuellement les paquetages\n" "à installer, DrakX vous présentera un arbre contenant tous les paquetages,\n" "classés par groupes et sous-groupes. En navigant à travers l'arbre, vous\n" "pouvez sélectionner des groupes, des sous-groupes ou des paquetages\n" @@ -464,8 +469,8 @@ msgstr "" "est possible que certaines failles de sécurité affectent les serveurs\n" "installés au-delà de la date de publication. Si vous ne savez pas\n" "précisément à quoi sert un service en particulier ou pourquoi il est\n" -"installé, cliquez sur « %s ». En cliquant sur « %s », le serveur sera\n" -"installé et le service rendu disponible au démarrage. !!\n" +"installé, cliquez sur « %s ». En cliquant sur « %s », les services listés\n" +"seront installés et rendus disponible au démarrage. !!\n" "\n" "L'option « %s » désactive les avertissements qui apparaissent à chaque fois\n" "que l'installeur sélectionne un nouveau paquetage. Parfois, pour qu'un\n" @@ -593,7 +598,7 @@ msgstr "" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/fr/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:234 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "X (for X Window System) is the heart of the GNU/Linux graphical interface\n" "on which all the graphical environments (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep,\n" @@ -672,10 +677,10 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Moniteur\n" "\n" -" Le programme d'installation détecte et configure automatiquement les\n" -"moniteurs connectés à votre unité centrale. Si ce n'est pas le cas, vous\n" -"pouvez choisir dans cette liste le moniteur que vous utilisez\n" -"effectivement.\n" +" Normalement le programme d'installation détecte et configure\n" +"automatiquement les moniteurs connectés à votre machine. Si ce\n" +"n'est pas le cas, vous pouvez choisir dans cette liste le moniteur que\n" +"vous utilisez effectivement.\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" @@ -684,7 +689,7 @@ msgstr "" " Vous pouvez choisir ici la résolution et nombre de couleurs parmi celles\n" "disponibles pour votre matériel. Choisissez la configuration optimale pour\n" "votre utilisation (vous pourrez néanmoins modifier cela après\n" -"l'installation). Un échantillon de la configuration choisie apparaît dans\n" +"l'installation). Un exemple de la configuration choisie apparaît dans\n" "le dessin du moniteur.\n" "\n" "\n" @@ -697,14 +702,15 @@ msgstr "" "choisie. Si vous pouvez voir le message pendant le test, et répondez\n" "« %s », alors DrakX passera à l'étape suivante. Si vous ne pouvez pas voir\n" "de message, cela signifie que vos paramètres sont incompatibles, et le test\n" -"se terminera automatiquement après 12 secondes. Changez la configuration\n" -"jusqu'à obtenir un affichage correct lors du test.\n" +"se terminera automatiquement après 12 secondes et vous ramènera au\n" +"menu. Changez la configuration jusqu'à obtenir un affichage correct lors\n" +"du test.\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" "Options\n" "\n" -" Vous pourrez également choisir ici de démarrer l'interface graphique au\n" +" Vous pourrez choisir ici de démarrer l'interface graphique au\n" "lancement de la machine. Il est préférable de choisir « %s » si vous êtes\n" "en train d'installer un serveur, ou si vous n'avez pas réussi à configurer\n" "l'écran correctement." @@ -780,16 +786,18 @@ msgstr "" "l'écran correctement." #: ../help.pm:319 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -802,12 +810,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -830,7 +840,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -847,29 +858,29 @@ msgstr "" "installation de Mageia. Si votre disque est vide ou utilisé par un\n" "autre système d'exploitation, vous devrez repartitionner votre disque.\n" "Partitionner un disque désigne l'opération consistant à le diviser\n" -"précisément afin de créer un espace pour votre installation.\n" +"logiquement afin de créer un espace pour votre installation.\n" "\n" -"Comme les effets du partitionnement sont irréversibles (l'ensemble du\n" -"disque est effacé), le partitionnement est généralement intimidant et\n" -"stressant pour un utilisateur inexpérimenté. Heureusement, un assistant a\n" -"été prévu à cet effet. Avant de commencer, lisez le reste de ce document et\n" -"surtout, prenez votre temps.\n" +"Comme les effets du partitionnement sont généralement irréversibles, \n" +"le partitionnement est généralement intimidant et stressant pour un\n" +"utilisateur inexpérimenté. Heureusement, un assistant a été prévu à cet\n" +"effet. Avant de commencer, lisez le reste de ce document et surtout, \n" +"prenez votre temps.\n" "\n" "Selon la configuration de votre disque, plusieurs options sont " "disponibles :\n" "\n" "\n" -" * « %s » : cette option tentera simplement de partitionner automatiquement\n" -"l'espace inutilisé sur votre disque. Il n'y aura pas d'autre question.\n" +" * « %s » : cette option tentera de partitionner automatiquement l'espace\n" +"inutilisé sur votre disque. Il n'y aura pas d'autre question.\n" "\n" " * « %s » : l'assistant a détecté une ou plusieurs partitions Linux\n" -"existant sur votre disque. Si vous voulez les utiliser, choisissez cette\n" +"existantes sur votre disque. Si vous voulez les utiliser, choisissez cette\n" "option. Il vous sera alors demandé de choisir les points de montage\n" "associés à chacune des partitions. Les anciens points de montage sont\n" "sélectionnés par défaut, et vous devriez généralement les garder.\n" "\n" " * « %s » : si Microsoft Windows est installé sur votre disque et en prend\n" -"toute la place vous devez faire de la place pour votre installation\n" +"toute la place, vous devez faire de la place pour votre installation\n" "GNU/Linux. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez tout effacer (voir « effacer tout le\n" "disque ») ou vous pouvez redimensionner la partition Windows FAT ou NTFS.\n" "Le redimensionnement peut être effectué sans pertes de données, à condition\n" @@ -886,19 +897,20 @@ msgstr "" " * « %s » : si vous voulez effacer toutes les données et les applications\n" "installées sur votre système et les remplacer par votre nouveau système\n" "Mageia, choisissez cette option. Soyez prudent, car ce choix est\n" -"irréversible et permanent. Il vous sera impossible de retrouver vos données\n" -"effacées.\n" +"irréversible et permanent une fois confirmé. Il vous sera impossible de\n" +"retrouver vos données effacées.\n" "\n" " !! En choisissant cette option, l'ensemble du contenu de votre disque\n" "sera détruit. !!\n" "\n" -" * « %s » : ce choix apparaît lorsque l'intégralité du disque dur est occupé\n" +" * « %s » : ce choix apparaît lorsque l'intégralité du disque dur est " +"occupé\n" "par Microsoft Windows. Choisir cette option effacera tout simplement ce que\n" "contient le disque et recommencera à zéro. Toutes les données et les\n" "programmes présents sur le disque seront effacés.\n" "\n" " !! En choisissant cette option, l'ensemble de votre disque sera effacé\n" -"!!\n" +"et les données perdues. !!\n" "\n" " * « %s » : permet de partitionner manuellement votre disque. Soyez\n" "prudent, car bien que plus puissante, cette option est dangereuse. Vous\n" @@ -1014,7 +1026,7 @@ msgid "Save packages selection" msgstr "Sauvegarder la sélection des paquetages" #: ../help.pm:408 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you chose to reuse some legacy GNU/Linux partitions, you may wish to\n" "reformat some of them and erase any data they contain. To do so, please\n" @@ -1061,7 +1073,7 @@ msgstr "" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/fr/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:437 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "By the time you install Mageia, it's likely that some packages will\n" "have been updated since the initial release. Bugs may have been fixed,\n" @@ -1089,7 +1101,7 @@ msgstr "" "à jour sélectionnées, ou « %s » pour abandonner." #: ../help.pm:450 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, DrakX will allow you to choose the security level you desire\n" "for your machine. As a rule of thumb, the security level should be set\n" @@ -1113,7 +1125,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Si vous ne savez pas quel niveau choisir, gardez la sélection par défaut.\n" "Vous pourrez le modifier ultérieurement avec l'outil draksec, qui se trouve\n" -"dans le Centre de Contrôle Mageia\n" +"dans le Centre de Contrôle Mageia.\n" "\n" "Remplissez le champ « %s » avec l'adresse électronique de l'utilisateur qui\n" "sera responsable de la sécurité. Les messages de sécurité lui seront\n" @@ -1125,23 +1137,26 @@ msgid "Security Administrator" msgstr "Administrateur sécurité" #: ../help.pm:464 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1164,7 +1179,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1172,7 +1188,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1191,18 +1208,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "À cette étape, vous devez sélectionner quelle partition sera utilisée pour\n" -"votre système Mageia. Si votre disque est déjà partitionné, soit " -"par\n" +"votre système Mageia. Si votre disque est déjà partitionné, soit par\n" "une autre installation GNU/Linux ou par un autre outil de partitionnement,\n" -"vous pourrez les utiliser. Sinon, les partitions devront être créées.\n" +"vous pourrez utiliser les partitions existantes. Sinon, elles devront être " +"créées.\n" "\n" "Pour créer une partition, vous devez d'abord sélectionner le disque à\n" "utiliser. Vous pouvez le sélectionner en cliquant sur « hda » pour le\n" @@ -1213,16 +1224,16 @@ msgstr "" "options suivantes :\n" "\n" " * « %s » : cette option effacera toutes les partitions sur le disque\n" -"sélectionné;\n" +"sélectionné ;\n" "\n" -" * « %s » : cette option permet de créer un système de ficher ext3 et\n" -"« Swap » dans l'espace libre sur votre disque;\n" +" * « %s » : cette option permet de créer des partitions ext4 et\n" +"« swap » dans l'espace libre sur votre disque ;\n" "\n" "« %s » : permet d'accéder à des fonctionnalités supplémentaires :\n" "\n" " * « %s » : sauvegarde la table de partition sur un disque amovible. Cette\n" "option s'avère particulièrement pratique pour réparer des partitions\n" -"endommagées. Il est fortement recommandé de procéder ainsi;\n" +"endommagées. Il est fortement recommandé de procéder ainsi ;\n" "\n" " * « %s » : permet de restaurer une table de partition sauvegardée au\n" "préalable sur une disquette.\n" @@ -1231,21 +1242,23 @@ msgstr "" "de la récupérer avec ces options. Soyez prudent et sachez que cela ne\n" "fonctionne pas à coup sûr.\n" "\n" -" * « %s » : écarte les changements et charge la table de partition initiale;\n" +" * « %s » : annule les changements et charge la table de partition " +"initiale ;\n" "\n" " * « %s » : en cochant cette case, les CD-ROM et disquettes (et autres\n" -"supports) seront chargés automatiquement.\n" +"supports amovibles) seront chargés automatiquement.\n" "\n" " * « %s » : utilisez cette option si vous souhaitez utiliser un assistant\n" "pour partitionner votre disque. Cette option est particulièrement\n" "recommandée si vous faites vos premiers pas avec les partitions.\n" "\n" -" * « %s » : utilisez cette option pour annuler vos changements;\n" +" * « %s » : utilisez cette option pour annuler vos changements ;\n" "\n" " * « %s » : permet des actions supplémentaires sur les partitions (type,\n" -"options, format) et donne plus d'informations;\n" +"options, format) et donne plus d'informationssur le disque ;\n" "\n" -" * « %s » : une fois le partitionnement terminé, ce bouton vous permettra de\n" +" * « %s » : une fois le partitionnement terminé, ce bouton vous permettra " +"de\n" "sauvegarder vos changements sur le disque.\n" "\n" "Lorsque vous définissez la taille d'une partition, vous pouvez choisir\n" @@ -1253,25 +1266,21 @@ msgstr "" "clavier.\n" "\n" "Note : vous pouvez atteindre toutes les options en utilisant le clavier.\n" -"Naviguer avec les flèches et [Tab].\n" +"Naviguer avec les flèches [haut/bas] et [Tab].\n" "\n" "Une fois la partition sélectionnée, vous pouvez utiliser :\n" "\n" " * Ctrl-c pour créer un nouvelle partition (lorsqu'une partition vide est\n" -"sélectionnée;\n" +"sélectionnée ;\n" "\n" -" * Ctrl-d pour effacer une partition;\n" +" * Ctrl-d pour effacer une partition ;\n" "\n" -" * Ctrl-m pour définir le « mount point »\n" +" * Ctrl-m pour définir le « point de montage »\n" "\n" -"Pour obtenir plus d'information sur les systèmes de fichiers, veuillez lire\n" -"sur le système de fichier ext2FS dans « Manuel de Référence ».\n" -"\n" -"Si vous installez sur un poste PPC, vous devrez créer une petite partition\n" -"HFS « bootstrap » d'au moins 1 Mo qui sera utilisée par le chargeur de\n" -"démarrage (« bootloader ») yaboot. Si vous optez pour une partition plus\n" -"grande, disons 50Mo, vous trouverez utile d'y placer des noyaux et des\n" -"images « ramdisk » accessibles en cas de problème." +"Pour obtenir plus d'informations sur les systèmes de fichiers, veuillez " +"lire\n" +"le chapitre sur le système de fichier ext2FS dans le « Manuel de\n" +"Référence ».\n" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1311,22 +1320,26 @@ msgstr "Basculer entre les modes expert et normal" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/fr/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:536 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1337,43 +1350,47 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Plus d'une partition Windows a été détectée sur votre disque dur. Veuillez\n" -"choisir celle que vous choisissez pour votre nouvelle installation de\n" -"Mageia.\n" +"choisir celle que vous voulez redimensionner pour votre nouvelle " +"installation\n" +"de Mageia.\n" "\n" -"Chaque partition est identifiée comme suit : « Nom Linux », « Nom Windows »,\n" +"Chaque partition est identifiée comme suit : « Nom Linux », « Nom " +"Windows »,\n" "« Capacité ».\n" "\n" -"Le « Nom » est structuré ainsi : « type de disque dur », « numéro du disque\n" -"dur », « numéro de partition ». Par exemple, « hda1 ».\n" +"Le « Nom Linux » est structuré ainsi : « type de disque dur », « numéro du\n" +"disque dur », « numéro de partition ». Par exemple, « hda1 ».\n" "\n" "Le « Type de disque dur » correspond à « hd » si votre disque est IDE. Pour " "un\n" -"disque SCSI, vous lirez « sd ».\n" +"disque SCSI, vous aurez « sd ».\n" "\n" -"Le numéro du disque est toujours listé après le « hd » ou « fd ». Pour les\n" +"Le numéro du disque est toujours listé après le « hd » ou « sd ». Pour les\n" "disques IDE :\n" "\n" -" * « a » signifie « disque primaire maître sur le premier contrôleur IDE »;\n" +" * « a » signifie « disque maître sur le premier contrôleur IDE »;\n" "\n" -" * « b » signifie « disque primaire esclave sur le premier contrôleur\n" +" * « b » signifie « disque esclave sur le premier contrôleur\n" "IDE »;\n" "\n" -" * « c » indique « disque primaire maître sur le second contrôleur IDE »;\n" +" * « c » indique « disque maître sur le second contrôleur IDE »;\n" "\n" -" * « d » signifie « disque primaire esclave sur le second contrôleur IDE »;\n" +" * « d » signifie « disque esclave sur le second contrôleur IDE »;\n" "\n" -"Avec les disques SCSI, le « a » indique le plus petit SCSI ID, et ainsi de\n" +"Avec les disques SCSI, le « a » indique le plus petit ID SCSI, et ainsi de\n" "suite.\n" "\n" -"« Nom Windows » c'est la lettre assignée à votre disque, (le premier\n" -"disque ou partition « C: »)" +"Le « Nom Windows » est la lettre assignée à votre disque sous\n" +"Windows (le premier disque ou partition est appelé « C: »)." #: ../help.pm:567 #, c-format @@ -1391,7 +1408,7 @@ msgstr "" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/fr/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:572 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "This step is activated only if an existing GNU/Linux partition has been\n" "found on your machine.\n" @@ -1402,7 +1419,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1434,8 +1452,7 @@ msgstr "" "sont accessibles.\n" "\n" "La mise à jour devrait fonctionner correctement pour les systèmes\n" -"Mageia à partir de la version « 8.1 ». Essayer de lancer une mise à\n" -"jour sur les versions antérieures à « 8.1 » n'est pas recommandé." +"Mageia à partir de la version « 2 »." #: ../help.pm:594 #, c-format @@ -1478,7 +1495,7 @@ msgstr "" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/fr/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:612 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The first step is to choose your preferred language.\n" "\n" @@ -1531,24 +1548,24 @@ msgstr "" "choisissant des langues supplémentaires, le programme vous installera toute\n" "la documentation et les applications nécessaires à l'utilisation de ces\n" "langues. Par exemple, si vous prévoyez d'accueillir des utilisateurs\n" -"d'Espagne sur votre machine, choisissez le français comme langue principale\n" +"espagnols sur votre machine, choisissez le français comme langue principale\n" "dans l'arborescence, et « %s », dans la section avancée.\n" "\n" "À propos de l'encodage UTF-8 (unicode) : Unicode est un nouveau système\n" -"d'encodage des caractères censé couvrir tous les langues existantes.\n" +"d'encodage des caractères censé couvrir toutes les langues existantes.\n" "Cependant son intégration dans GNU/Linux est encore imparfaite. Pour cette\n" "raison, Mageia l'utilisera ou non selon les critères suivants :\n" "\n" " * Si vous choisissez une langue avec un encodage ayant une longue histoire\n" "(langues associées à « latin1 », Russe, Japonais, Chinois, Coréen, Thaï,\n" "Grec, Turc, et la plupart des langues « iso-8859-2 »), l'encodage\n" -"historique sera utilisé;\n" +"historique sera utilisé ;\n" "\n" -" * Les autres langues entraîneront l'utilisation d'unicode par défaut;\n" +" * Les autres langues entraîneront l'utilisation d'unicode par défaut ;\n" "\n" " * Si vous demandez l'installation de plus d'une langue, et que ces langues\n" "n'utilisent pas le même encodage, alors unicode sera utilisé pour tout le\n" -"système;\n" +"système ;\n" "\n" " * Enfin, unicode peut aussi être utilisé quelque soit votre configuration\n" "des langues à utiliser, en sélectionnant l'option « %s ».\n" @@ -1561,7 +1578,7 @@ msgstr "" "Pour passer d'une langue à l'autre, vous pouvez lancer l'utilitaire\n" "« /usr/sbin/localedrake » en tant que « root » pour changer la langue\n" "utilisée dans tout le système ; connectez-vous en simple utilisateur pour\n" -"ne changer que la langue de cet utilisateur." +"changer la langue uniquement pour cet utilisateur." #: ../help.pm:650 #, c-format @@ -1703,7 +1720,7 @@ msgstr "" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/fr/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:745 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Now, it's time to select a printing system for your computer. Other\n" "operating systems may offer you one, but Mageia offers two. Each of\n" @@ -1730,37 +1747,36 @@ msgid "" "system you may change it by running PrinterDrake from the Mageia\n" "Control Center and clicking on the \"%s\" button." msgstr "" -"Maintenant, il faut choisir un système d'impression pour votre ordinateur. " -"D'autres\n" -"systèmes d'exploitation en offrent un, mais Mageia en propose deux. " -"Chaque système\n" -"d'impression convient le mieux à un type différent de configuration.\n" +"Maintenant, il faut choisir un système d'impression pour votre ordinateur.\n" +"D'autres systèmes d'exploitation en offrent un, mais Mageia en propose\n" +"deux. Chaque système d'impression convient mieux à un type différent\n" +"de configuration.\n" "\n" " * « %s » - qui veut dire « print, do not queue », (ou, impression sans\n" "passer par la file d'attente) est un bon choix si votre imprimante est\n" "branchée directement sur votre poste, que vous voulez pouvoir arrêter\n" "l'impression directement en cas de problème et que vous n'avez pas\n" -"d'imprimante réseau. « %s » prendra en charge des configurations simples en " -"réseau, mais\n" -"les performances sont plutôt mauvaises dans ces cas. Choisissez «pdq» si " -"vous\n" -"débutez sous GNU/Linux.\n" +"d'imprimante réseau. « %s » prendra en charge des configurations simples\n" +"en réseau, mais les performances sont plutôt mauvaises dans ces cas.\n" +"Choisissez « pdq » si vous débutez sous GNU/Linux.\n" "\n" " * « %s » - « Common Unix Printing System », est fabuleux autant pour une\n" "imprimante locale que pour imprimer à l'autre bout du monde. C'est simple\n" -"et il peut agir comme un serveur ou un client avec l'ancien système " -"d'impression « lpd », de ce fait il est compatible avec les anciens\n" -" systèmes d'exploitations qui nécessitent encore un service d'impression. Il " -"s'agit d'un outil très puissant et les\n" -"configurations de base sont aussi simples que « pdq ». Pour émuler un serveur " -"« lpd », lancez le démon (« daemon ») « cups-lpq ». « %s » qui offre une " -"interface graphique simple pour imprimer sur et administrer les " -"imprimantes.\n" -"\n" -"Si vous choisissez votre système d'impression maintenant et que par la suite " -"vous n'en êtes pas content, vous pourrez le changer\n" -"ultérieurement en lançant PrinterDrake depuis le Centre de contrôle\n" -"Mageia en cliquant sur le bouton « %s »." +"à configurer et il peut agir comme un serveur ou un client avec l'ancien\n" +"système d'impression « lpd ». De ce fait il est compatible avec les anciens\n" +" systèmes d'exploitations qui nécessitent encore un service d'impression. " +"Il\n" +"s'agit d'un outil très puissant et les configurations de base sont aussi " +"simples\n" +"que « pdq ». Pour émuler un serveur « lpd », lancez le démon (« daemon »)\n" +"« cups-lpq ». « %s » offre une interface graphique simple pour imprimer,\n" +"choisir les options d'impression et administrer les imprimantes.\n" +"\n" +"Si vous choisissez votre système d'impression maintenant et que par la " +"suite\n" +"vous n'en êtes pas content, vous pourrez le changer ultérieurement en\n" +"lançant PrinterDrake depuis le Centre de contrôle Mageia en cliquant sur le\n" +"bouton « %s »." #: ../help.pm:768 #, c-format @@ -1832,7 +1848,7 @@ msgstr "" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/fr/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:794 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "As a review, DrakX will present a summary of information it has gathered\n" "about your system. Depending on the hardware installed on your machine, you\n" @@ -1908,7 +1924,7 @@ msgstr "" "ne se trouve pas dans la première liste, cliquez sur « %s » pour avoir la\n" "liste complète.\n" "\n" -" * « %s » : DrakX, par défaut, configure le fuseau horaire selon le pays\n" +" * « %s » : par défaut, DrakX configure le fuseau horaire selon le pays\n" "dans lequel vous vous trouvez. Cliquez sur le bouton « %s » si ce n'est pas\n" "le bon.\n" "\n" @@ -1925,8 +1941,8 @@ msgstr "" "détectée, cliquez sur « %s » pour la configurer à la main.\n" "\n" " * « %s » : si une carte RNIS (ISDN) est détectée, elle apparaîtra ici.\n" -"Vous pouvez cliquer sur le bouton « %s » pour en modifier les paramètres si\n" -"vous estimez que la configuration actuelle est inexacte.\n" +"Vous pouvez cliquer sur le bouton « %s » pour en modifier les paramètres\n" +"si vous estimez que la configuration actuelle est inexacte.\n" "\n" " * « %s » : par défaut, DrakX configure votre interface graphique avec une\n" "résolution de « 800x600 » ou « 1024x768 ». Si cela ne vous convient pas,\n" @@ -1935,12 +1951,11 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * « %s » : si vous souhaitez configurer votre accès Internet ou réseau\n" "local dès maintenant. Lisez la documentation fournie ou exécutez\n" -"le Centre de Contrôle Mageia après l'installation pour avoir droit à " -"une\n" +"le Centre de Contrôle Mageia après l'installation pour avoir droit à une\n" "aide complète en ligne.\n" "\n" " * « %s » : permet de configurer les adresses proxy HTTP et FTP si la\n" -"machine que vous installez se trouve derrière un serveur proxy.\n" +"machine que vous installez se trouve derrière un serveur mandataire.\n" "\n" " * « %s » : il vous est ici proposé de redéfinir votre niveau de sécurité\n" "tel que défini dans une étape précédente ().\n" @@ -1977,15 +1992,15 @@ msgstr "Interface graphique" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/fr/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:861 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Choose the hard disk drive you want to erase in order to install your new\n" "Mageia partition. Be careful, all data on this drive will be lost\n" "and will not be recoverable!" msgstr "" -"Choisissez le disque dur à effacer pour installer votre partition\n" -"GNU/Linux. Soyez prudent, toute l'information stockée sur le disque sera\n" -"détruite." +"Choisissez le disque dur à effacer pour installer votre nouvelle partition\n" +"Mageia. Soyez prudent, toute les informations stockées sur le disque\n" +"seront détruites." # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: # cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/fr/drakx-chapter.xml @@ -1993,8 +2008,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/fur.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/fur.po index 189a0a0a5..86dfc776d 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/fur.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/fur.po @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2004-06-28 17:41+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Andrea Gracco <graccoandrea@tin.it>\n" "Language-Team: furlan <gft@freelists.org>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -84,7 +85,8 @@ msgstr "Vuelistu doprâ cheste fature?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -94,13 +96,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -111,7 +116,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" @@ -408,13 +414,15 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -427,12 +435,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -455,7 +465,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -612,18 +623,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -646,7 +660,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -654,7 +669,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -673,12 +689,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:526 @@ -719,20 +729,24 @@ msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:536 #, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -743,10 +757,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" @@ -771,7 +787,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1099,8 +1116,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/ga.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/ga.po index 5ec9220eb..d2e402780 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/ga.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/ga.po @@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2005-09-12 18:04+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Alastair McKinstry <mckinstry@computer.org>\n" "Language-Team: Irish <ga@li.org>\n" +"Language: ga\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -81,7 +82,8 @@ msgstr "An mian leat an gné seo a úsáid?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -91,13 +93,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -108,7 +113,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" @@ -405,13 +411,15 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -424,12 +432,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -452,7 +462,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -609,18 +620,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -643,7 +657,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -651,7 +666,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -670,12 +686,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:526 @@ -716,20 +726,24 @@ msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:536 #, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -740,10 +754,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" @@ -768,7 +784,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1096,8 +1113,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/gl.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/gl.po index 79df1441a..7354ed534 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/gl.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/gl.po @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2006-07-08 20:57+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Leandro Regueiro <leandro.regueiro@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: <gl@li.org>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -127,7 +128,8 @@ msgstr "Desexa usar esta funcionalidade?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -137,13 +139,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -154,7 +159,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "As particións listadas aquí son as particións Linux existentes detectadas\n" @@ -689,13 +695,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -708,12 +716,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -736,7 +746,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1039,18 +1050,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1073,7 +1087,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1081,7 +1096,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1100,12 +1116,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Neste punto cómpre que escolla que partición(s) se van usar para a\n" "instalación do seu sistema Mageia. Se as particións xa se\n" @@ -1124,7 +1134,7 @@ msgstr "" "seleccionado\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": esta opción permítelle crear automáticamente particións\n" -"ext3 e swap no espacio baleiro do disco duro\n" +"ext4 e swap no espacio baleiro do disco duro\n" "\n" "\"%s\": dálle acceso a funcionalidades adicionais:\n" "\n" @@ -1174,13 +1184,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Para obter información sobre os diferentes tipos de sistemas de ficheiros\n" "dispoñibles, lea o capítulo sobre ext2FS do ``Manual de Referencia''.\n" -"\n" -"Se está instalando nunha máquina PPC, quererá crear unha pequena\n" -"partición HFS para ``bootstrap'' de como mínimo 1MB a cal vai ser usada\n" -"polo cargador de arrinque yaboot. Se opta por facer a partición un pouco\n" -"máis grande, digamos de 50MB, podería darse conta de que é un sitio útil\n" -"para almacenar un kernel de reserva e imaxes ramdisk para situacións de\n" -"arrinques de emerxencia." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1220,20 +1223,24 @@ msgstr "Cambiar entre modo normal/experto" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1244,10 +1251,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Detectouse máis dunha partición Microsoft no seu disco duro. Elixa a que\n" @@ -1304,7 +1313,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1884,8 +1894,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/he.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/he.po index 71becdebf..4bea8e723 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/he.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/he.po @@ -18,6 +18,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2008-02-01 20:34+0200\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Hebrew <he@li.org>\n" +"Language: he\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -133,7 +134,8 @@ msgstr "האם להפעיל אפשרות זו?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -143,13 +145,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -160,7 +165,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "להלן רשומות מחיצות הלינוקס שזוהו בכונן הקשיח שלך. \n" @@ -684,13 +690,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -703,12 +711,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -731,7 +741,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1026,18 +1037,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1060,7 +1074,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1068,7 +1083,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1087,12 +1103,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "בשלב זה, עליך לבחור היכן תותקן מערכת מנדריבה לינוקס בכונן הקשיח\n" "שלך. אם כבר הוגדרו מחיצותמתאימות, בין אם על ידי התקנה קודמת\n" @@ -1109,7 +1119,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\": אפשרות זו תמחק את כל המחיצות המוגדרות בכונן הקשיח\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": אפשרות זו מאפשרת לך ליצור באופן אוטומטי מחיצתext3\n" +" * \"%s\": אפשרות זו מאפשרת לך ליצור באופן אוטומטי מחיצתext4\n" "ומחיצת החלפה בשטח הפנוי של הכונן הקשיח שלך\n" "\n" "\"%s\": מאפשר לך לבחור באפשרויות נוספות:\n" @@ -1202,20 +1212,24 @@ msgstr "מעבר בין מצבי רגיל\"מומחה " #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1226,10 +1240,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "יותר ממחיצה אחת של מיקרוסופט זוהתה בכונן הקשיח שלך.\n" @@ -1284,7 +1300,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1415,8 +1432,8 @@ msgstr "" "של מנדריבה-לינוקס ב-UTF-8 יהיה תלוי בהגדרות המשתמש:\n" "\n" " * אם נבחרה שפה שהשימוש בקידוד הישן שלה נפוץ (לדוגמה שפות עם latin1, רוסית,\n" -"יפנית, סינית, קוריאנית, תאילנדית, יוונית, תורכית ורוב השפות שמשתמשות ב-iso-" -"8859-2)\n" +"יפנית, סינית, קוריאנית, תאילנדית, יוונית, תורכית ורוב השפות שמשתמשות ב-" +"iso-8859-2)\n" "יעשה שימוש בקידוד הישן כברירת מחדל;\n" "\n" " * עבור שפות אחרות יעשה שימוש ביוניקוד כברירת מחדל;\n" @@ -1530,8 +1547,8 @@ msgid "" "Please select the correct port. For example, the \"COM1\" port under\n" "Windows is named \"ttyS0\" under GNU/Linux." msgstr "" -"נא לבחור את היציאה הנכונה. לדוגמה, יציאה \"COM1\" תחת Windows תקרא, \"ttyS0" -"\"\n" +"נא לבחור את היציאה הנכונה. לדוגמה, יציאה \"COM1\" תחת Windows תקרא, " +"\"ttyS0\"\n" "תחת GNU/Linux." #: ../help.pm:684 @@ -1846,8 +1863,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/hi.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/hi.po index a11b07d41..f44d14888 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/hi.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/hi.po @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2004-04-04 21:54+0530\n" "Last-Translator: धनञ्जय शर्मा (Dhananjaya Sharma) <dysxhi@yahoo.co.in>\n" "Language-Team: हिन्दी (Hindi) <dysxhi@yahoo.co.in>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -100,8 +101,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "जब आप \"%s\" पर क्लिक करते है, तब आप अन्य उपयोगकर्ताओं को जोड़ सकते है। अपने मित्रों में " "से\n" -"हर एक के लिए, एक उपयोगकर्ता को जोड़ें । उदाहरण हेतु अपने पिता या अपनी बहन के लिए । \"%" -"s\"\n" +"हर एक के लिए, एक उपयोगकर्ता को जोड़ें । उदाहरण हेतु अपने पिता या अपनी बहन के लिए । " +"\"%s\"\n" "पर क्लिक करें जब आप उपयोगकर्ताओं का जोड़ना समाप्त कर लें ।\n" "\n" "\"%s\" बटन पर क्लिक करके आप डिफ़ाल्ट \"shell\" को उस उपयोगकर्ता के लिए\n" @@ -132,7 +133,8 @@ msgstr "क्या आप इस लक्षण का उपयोग कर #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -142,13 +144,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -159,7 +164,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "आपकी हार्ड डिस्क पर खोजे गये विद्यमान लिनक्स विभाजनों की यह सूची है । \n" @@ -169,8 +175,8 @@ msgstr "" " चयन ना करें अन्यथा आप इस पर अधिक सॉफ़्टवेयर को संसाधित नहीं कर पायेगें । यदि आप अपनी\n" "सूचनाओं को एक अलग विभाजन पर सुरक्षित रखने चाहते है, तो आपको एक होम \"/home\" विभाजन " "का \n" -"भी निर्माण करना होगा (तभी सम्भव है यदि आपके पास एक से अधिक लिनक्स विभाजन उपलब्ध हो)" -"।\n" +"भी निर्माण करना होगा (तभी सम्भव है यदि आपके पास एक से अधिक लिनक्स विभाजन उपलब्ध " +"हो)।\n" "\n" "प्रत्येक विभाजन निम्न तौर पर सूचीबद्ध है: \"नाम\", \"क्षमता\"।\n" "\n" @@ -694,13 +700,15 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -713,12 +721,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -741,7 +751,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -898,18 +909,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -932,7 +946,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -940,7 +955,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -959,12 +975,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:526 @@ -1005,20 +1015,24 @@ msgstr "सामान्य/विशेषज्ञ विधा के म #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1029,10 +1043,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "आपकी हार्ड डिस्क पर एक से अधिक माइक्रोसाफ़्ट विभाजनों को खोजा गया है । \n" @@ -1090,7 +1106,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1445,8 +1462,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/hr.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/hr.po index 3af796f2c..aacd0c630 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/hr.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/hr.po @@ -9,11 +9,12 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2005-01-04 21:25+CET\n" "Last-Translator: auto\n" "Language-Team: Croatian <lokalizacija@linux.hr>\n" +"Language: hr\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n%" -"10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2;;\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n" +"%10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2;;\n" "X-Generator: TransDict server\n" #: ../help.pm:14 @@ -123,7 +124,8 @@ msgstr "Da li želite koristiti aboot?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -133,13 +135,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -150,7 +155,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Gore su popisane postojeće Linux particije pronađene na\n" @@ -397,14 +403,12 @@ msgstr "" "grupi,\n" "bit ćete upitani da potvrdite da li želite stvarno instalirati te " "poslužitelje.\n" -"Kod Mageiaa, svi instalirani poslužitelji se pokreću prilikom " -"podizanja\n" +"Kod Mageiaa, svi instalirani poslužitelji se pokreću prilikom podizanja\n" "sustava. Čak iako su sigurni, bez poznatih problema u vrijeme izlaska " "distribucije,\n" "može se dogoditi da se otkriju sigurnosne rupe nakon zgotovljenja ove " "inačice\n" -"Mageiaa. Ako ne znate što bi pojedini servis trebao raditi ili " -"zašto \n" +"Mageiaa. Ako ne znate što bi pojedini servis trebao raditi ili zašto \n" "se instalira, pritisnite \"Ne\". Pritiskanjem na \"Da\"instalirat će se " "navedeni\n" "servisi i pokretat će se automatski. !!\n" @@ -645,13 +649,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -664,12 +670,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -692,7 +700,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -706,8 +715,7 @@ msgid "" "refer to the ``Managing Your Partitions'' section in the ``Starter Guide''." msgstr "" "U ovom trenutku, trebate izabrati gdje ćete instalirati vaš\n" -"Mageia operativni sustav na vašem tvrdom disku. Ukoliko je prazan " -"ili \n" +"Mageia operativni sustav na vašem tvrdom disku. Ukoliko je prazan ili \n" "ako postojeći operativni sustav koristi čitav prostor na disku, trebate ga\n" "particionirati. Jednostavno, particioniranje hard diska sastoji se od\n" "logičkog dijeljenja kako bi napravili prostor za instalaciju vašeg novog\n" @@ -1005,18 +1013,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1039,7 +1050,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1047,7 +1059,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1066,12 +1079,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "U ovoj točki instalacije, trebate izabrati koje partiticije ćete koristiti " "za\n" @@ -1135,12 +1142,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Za informacije o raznim dostupnim datotečnim sustavima, pročitajte ext2fs\n" "poglavlje u ``Reference Manual''\n" -"\n" -"Ukoliko instalirate na PPC računalo, željet ćete napraviti malu HFS\n" -"'bootstrap' particiju od najmanje 1MB koju će koristiti\n" -"yaboot bootloader. Ukoliko se odlučite za pravljenje malo veće \n" -"particije, recimo 50MB, možete ju pronaći korisnom za stavljanje\n" -"dodatnog kernela i ramdisk slike u slučaju nužde." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1180,20 +1181,24 @@ msgstr "Prebaci u normalni mod" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1204,10 +1209,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Više od jedne Microsoft Windows particije su pronađene\n" @@ -1263,7 +1270,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1697,8 +1705,10 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/hu.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/hu.po index 5cb60a73e..dd53fab85 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/hu.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/hu.po @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2006-03-05 14:45+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Arpad Biro\n" "Language-Team: Hungarian\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -131,7 +132,8 @@ msgstr "Szeretné használni ezt a lehetőséget?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -141,13 +143,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -158,7 +163,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Itt láthatók a lemezen talált, már létező linuxos partíciók.\n" @@ -202,8 +208,7 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"A Mageia telepítőanyag több CD-n helyezkedik el. Ha egy " -"kiválasztott\n" +"A Mageia telepítőanyag több CD-n helyezkedik el. Ha egy kiválasztott\n" "csomag egy másik CD-n található, akkor a telepítő kiadja az\n" "aktuális CD-t, és megkéri Önt, hogy helyezze be a megfelelőt.\n" "Ha a szóban forgó lemez nincs kéznél, akkor kattintson a(z) \"%s\" gombra,\n" @@ -697,13 +702,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -716,12 +723,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -744,7 +753,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -757,8 +767,7 @@ msgid "" "experience. For more instructions on how to use the DiskDrake utility,\n" "refer to the ``Managing Your Partitions'' section in the ``Starter Guide''." msgstr "" -"Ebben a lépésben kell megadni, hogy a Mageia telepítése a " -"merevlemez\n" +"Ebben a lépésben kell megadni, hogy a Mageia telepítése a merevlemez\n" "melyik részére történjen. Ha a lemez még teljesen üres, vagy a korábban\n" "telepített operációs rendszer(ek) miatt nincs elég szabad hely, akkor újra\n" "kell partícionálni a lemezt. A partícionálás a lemezterület logikai\n" @@ -1052,18 +1061,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1086,7 +1098,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1094,7 +1107,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1113,12 +1127,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Ebben a lépésben kell kiválasztani a Mageia rendszer telepítéséhez\n" "használni kívánt partíciókat. Ha a kívánt partíciók már létre lettek hozva\n" @@ -1236,20 +1244,24 @@ msgstr "Váltás a normál és a szakértői módok közt" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1260,10 +1272,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Egynél több microsoftos partíció van a lemezen.\n" @@ -1323,7 +1337,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1904,8 +1919,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/id.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/id.po index e098a39ba..4f1442552 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/id.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/id.po @@ -20,6 +20,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2006-03-11 10:45+0700\n" "Last-Translator: Willy Sudiarto Raharjo <willysr@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Indonesia <mdk-id@yahoogroups.com>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -140,7 +141,8 @@ msgstr "Apakah Anda ingin menggunakan fitur ini?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -150,13 +152,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -167,10 +172,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" -"Berikut adalah daftar partisi Linux yang terdeteksi pada hard disk drive Anda.\n" +"Berikut adalah daftar partisi Linux yang terdeteksi pada hard disk drive " +"Anda.\n" "Anda dapat memakai pilihan yg dibuatkan, karena itu baik untuk installasi\n" "umum. Bila Anda mengubah pilihan, setidaknya Anda perlu mendefinisikan\n" "partisi root (\"/\"). Jangan pilih partisi yang terlalu kecil agar dapat\n" @@ -184,8 +191,8 @@ msgstr "" "\"Nama\" berstruktur: \"tipe hard disk drive\", \"nomor hard disk drive\",\n" "\"nomor partisi\" (misalnya \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Tipe hard disk drive\" adalah \"hd\" untuk drive IDE dan \"sd\" untuk drive " -"SCSI.\n" +"\"Tipe hard disk drive\" adalah \"hd\" untuk drive IDE dan \"sd\" untuk " +"drive SCSI.\n" "\n" "\"Nomor Hard Drive\", selalu berupa huruf setelah \"hd\" atau \"sd\". Bila " "berupa IDE, maka:\n" @@ -210,8 +217,8 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"Installasi Mageia didistribusikan pada beberapa CDROM. DrakX tahu " -"jika paket\n" +"Installasi Mageia didistribusikan pada beberapa CDROM. DrakX tahu jika " +"paket\n" "terpilih berada di CDROM lain dan akan mengeluarkan CD yang ada untuk " "kemudian\n" "meminta Anda memasukkan CD yg diperlukan. Jika Anda tidak memiliki CD yang " @@ -278,12 +285,10 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Sekarang waktunya untuk menentukan program yang akan diinstal. Terdapat " "ribuan \n" -"pada Mageia, dan untuk mempermudah, mereka telah diletakkan pada " -"grup \n" +"pada Mageia, dan untuk mempermudah, mereka telah diletakkan pada grup \n" "aplikasi yang sejenis.\n" "\n" -"Mageia mengurutkan paket dalam empat kategori. Anda bisa " -"menggabungkan \n" +"Mageia mengurutkan paket dalam empat kategori. Anda bisa menggabungkan \n" "menyesuaikan aplikasi dari berbagai kategori, sehingga installasi " "``Workstation''\n" "tetap dapat memiliki aplikasi pada installasi ``Server''\n" @@ -402,8 +407,7 @@ msgstr "" "grup besar, akan ada pertanyaan konfirmasi installasi paket tersebut. Pada\n" "Mageia, secara default semua server terinstal dijalankan saat boot.\n" "Meski aman saat distribusi diluncurkan, ada kemungkinan lubang keamanan\n" -"ditemukan setelah versi Mageia ini selesai. Jika Anda tidak tahu " -"apa\n" +"ditemukan setelah versi Mageia ini selesai. Jika Anda tidak tahu apa\n" "yang dilakukan oleh suatu layanan atau mengapa ia diinstal, klik \"%s\".\n" "Jika Anda menekan \"%s\" layanan terdaftar akan diinstal dan akan " "dijalankan\n" @@ -733,13 +737,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -752,12 +758,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -780,7 +788,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -795,8 +804,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Sekarang Anda harus menentukan dimana Anda hendak menginstall sistem " "operasi\n" -"Mageia pada harddisk Anda. Jika harddisk Anda kosong atau jika " -"sebuah\n" +"Mageia pada harddisk Anda. Jika harddisk Anda kosong atau jika sebuah\n" "sistem operasi menggunakan semua tempat, Anda harus mempartisi drive.\n" "Pada dasarnya, mempartisi harddisk berarti membaginya secara logical\n" "untuk membuat ruang yang diperlukan sistem Mageia baru Anda.\n" @@ -836,8 +844,7 @@ msgstr "" "dengan sebelumnya Anda sudah mendefrag partisi Windows.\n" "Membackup data sangat disarankan. Penggunaan opsi ini sangat " "direkomendasikan jika Anda\n" -"ingin menggunakan Mageia dan Microsoft Windows pada komputer yang " -"sama.\n" +"ingin menggunakan Mageia dan Microsoft Windows pada komputer yang sama.\n" "\n" " Sebelum memilih opsi ini, harap dipahami bahwa setelah prosedur ini, " "ukuran partisi \n" @@ -849,8 +856,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\". Jika Anda hendak menghapus seluruh data dan semua partisi yang " "ada pada harddisk\n" -"Anda dan menggantinya dengan sistem Mageia yang baru, pilih opsi " -"ini. Hati-hati, karena\n" +"Anda dan menggantinya dengan sistem Mageia yang baru, pilih opsi ini. Hati-" +"hati, karena\n" "Anda tidak bisa membatalkan opsi ini setelah Anda mengkonfirmasikan.\n" "\n" " !! Jika Anda memilih opsi ini, semua data pada harddisk Anda akan " @@ -1096,18 +1103,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1130,7 +1140,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1138,7 +1149,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1157,12 +1169,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Saat ini, Anda harus memilih partisi yang akan digunakan untuk installasi\n" "sistem Mageia Anda. Jika partisi telah didefinisikan, baik dari\n" @@ -1178,7 +1184,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\": opsi ini menghapus seluruh partisi pada drive terpilih\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": opsi ini memungkinkan Anda membuat partisi ext3 dan swap\n" +" * \"%s\": opsi ini memungkinkan Anda membuat partisi ext4 dan swap\n" "secara otomatis pada ruang kosong dari hard disk Anda.\n" "\n" "\"%s\": memberi akses pada fitur tambahan:\n" @@ -1228,11 +1234,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Untuk mendapatkan informasi tentang jenis sistem file yang ada, \n" "silahkan membaca bab ext2FS dari ``Referensi Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"Jika Anda menginstall pada komputer PPC, Anda harus membuat partisi\n" -"``bootstrap'' HFS kecil paling tidak 1 MB yang akan digunakan oleh\n" -"bootloader yaboot. Jika Anda membuatnya lebih besar, misalkan 50MB\n" -"Anda bisa menyimpan kernel dan citra ramdisk untuk situasi darurat." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1272,20 +1273,24 @@ msgstr "Ubah ke modus normal/ahli" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1296,10 +1301,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Terdapat lebih dari satu partisi Microsoft yang terdeteksi pada harddisk\n" @@ -1309,10 +1316,12 @@ msgstr "" "Tiap partisi terdaftar sebagai: \"Nama Linux\",\"Nama windows\",\"Kapasitas" "\".\n" "\n" -"\"Nama Linux\" berstruktur: \"tipe hard disk drive\", \"nomor hard disk drive\",\n" +"\"Nama Linux\" berstruktur: \"tipe hard disk drive\", \"nomor hard disk drive" +"\",\n" "\"nomor partisi\" (misalnya \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Tipe hard disk drive\" adalah \"hd\" bila drive bertipe IDE dan \"sd\" jika\n" +"\"Tipe hard disk drive\" adalah \"hd\" bila drive bertipe IDE dan \"sd\" " +"jika\n" "berupa drive SCSI.\n" "\n" "\"Nomor Hard Drive\", selalu berupa huruf setelah \"hd\" atau \"sd\". Jika\n" @@ -1329,7 +1338,8 @@ msgstr "" "Pada drive SCSI, \"a\" berarti \"ID SCSI terkecil, \"b\" berarti \"ID SCSI\n" "terkecil kedua\", dst.\n" "\n" -"\"Nama windows\" adalah huruf hard disk drive Anda pada Windows (disk pertama\n" +"\"Nama windows\" adalah huruf hard disk drive Anda pada Windows (disk " +"pertama\n" "pada partisi disebut \"C:\")." #: ../help.pm:567 @@ -1356,7 +1366,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1919,8 +1930,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/is.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/is.po index 9555ff79e..eafd3f1a2 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/is.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/is.po @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2006-03-07 18:42+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Pjetur G. Hjaltason <pjetur@pjetur.net>\n" "Language-Team: <is@li.org>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -134,7 +135,8 @@ msgstr "Viltu nota þennan eiginleika?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -144,13 +146,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -161,7 +166,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Hér er listi af núverandi Linux disksneiðum sem fundust á disknum.\n" @@ -389,8 +395,7 @@ msgstr "" "!! Ef miðlara-pakki hefur verið valinn, annað hvort af því að þú valdir " "stakan\n" "pakka eða hann var hluti af hóp, verður þú beðinn um að staðfesta að\n" -"þú viljir fá þessa miðlara uppsetta. Sjálfgefið mun Mageia ræsa " -"allar\n" +"þú viljir fá þessa miðlara uppsetta. Sjálfgefið mun Mageia ræsa allar\n" "uppsettar þjónustur og miðlara við kerfisræsingu. Jafnvel þó að þeir séu\n" "öruggir og engar þekktar villur þegar kerfinu var dreift þá er möguleiki að\n" "öryggisholur hafi uppgötvast eftir að gengið var frá þessari útgáfu af\n" @@ -696,13 +701,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -715,12 +722,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -743,7 +752,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1039,18 +1049,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1073,7 +1086,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1081,7 +1095,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1100,12 +1115,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Hér þarft þú að ákveða hvaða disksneið þú vilt nota fyrir Mageia\n" "stýrikerfið. Ef disksneiðar hafa þegar verið skilgreindar, annað hvort\n" @@ -1122,7 +1131,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\": þessi valkostur eyðir öllum disksneiðum á disknum\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": þessi valkostur býr sjálfkrafa til ext3 og diskminnis-sneið\n" +" * \"%s\": þessi valkostur býr sjálfkrafa til ext4 og diskminnis-sneið\n" "á lausu plássi á disknum.\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gefur þér aðgang að aukavalkostum:\n" @@ -1171,12 +1180,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Til að fá upplýsingar um mismunandi skráakerfi, vinsamlega lestu\n" "kaflann um ext2FS í ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"Ef þú ert að setja upp á PPC tölvu, þá ættir þú að búa til litla HFS\n" -"``ræsi-disksneið'' sem er að minnsta kosti 1M. Þessi disksneið\n" -"verður notuð af yaboot ræsistjóranum. Ef þú gerir disksneiðina\n" -"svolítið stærri t.d. 50MB þá er það góður staður til að geyma auka\n" -"kjarna og ræsidisk-ímyndir fyrir óvæntar uppákomur." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1217,20 +1220,24 @@ msgstr "Víxla milli venjulegs/sérfræðings-hams" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1241,10 +1248,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Fleiri en ein Microsoft disksneið hefur fundist á disknum.\n" @@ -1301,7 +1310,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1862,8 +1872,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/it.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/it.po index bd1863de0..3d1c9fd98 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/it.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/it.po @@ -17,6 +17,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2006-02-03 21:33+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Andrea Celli <a.celli@caltanet.it>\n" "Language-Team: Italian <kde-i18n-it@kde.org>\n" +"Language: it\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -136,7 +137,8 @@ msgstr "Vuoi sfruttare questa possibilità?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -146,13 +148,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -163,7 +168,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "In alto puoi vedere l'elenco delle partizioni Linux individuate sul\n" @@ -738,13 +744,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -757,12 +765,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -785,7 +795,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1109,18 +1120,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1143,7 +1157,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1151,7 +1166,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1170,12 +1186,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "A questo punto, dovete decidere quali partizioni devono essere usate per\n" "l'installazione del vostro sistema Mageia. Se sono già state\n" @@ -1195,7 +1205,7 @@ msgstr "" " * \"%s\": questa opzione cancella tutte le partizioni presenti sul disco\n" "selezionato.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": vi permette di creare automaticamente partizioni ext3 e di swap\n" +" * \"%s\": vi permette di creare automaticamente partizioni ext4 e di swap\n" "nello spazio libero presente sul vostro disco rigido.\n" "\n" "\"%s\": permette di accedere a ulteriori funzionalità:\n" @@ -1249,13 +1259,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Per ulteriori informazioni in merito ai diversi tipi di filesystem\n" "disponibili, consultate il capitolo ext2FS del ''Manuale di riferimento''.\n" -"\n" -"Se state effettuando l'installazione su una macchina PPC, sarà meglio\n" -"creare una piccola partizione HFS di ''bootstrap'' di almeno 1 MB, che\n" -"verrà utilizzata dal bootloader yaboot. Se decidete di creare una\n" -"partizione più grande, diciamo sui 50 MB, essa potrebbe rappresentare un\n" -"utile deposito in cui conservare un kernel di riserva e immagini di avvio\n" -"da utilizzare in caso di emergenza." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1297,20 +1300,24 @@ msgstr "Scambio tra modo normale e esperto" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1321,10 +1328,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Sul vostro disco rigido è stata individuata più di una partizione\n" @@ -1386,7 +1395,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1731,8 +1741,7 @@ msgid "" "Control Center and clicking on the \"%s\" button." msgstr "" "Qui potrete scegliere il sistema di stampa da usare con il vostro computer;\n" -"altri sistemi operativi ve ne offrono uno, ma Mageia ve ne offre " -"ben\n" +"altri sistemi operativi ve ne offrono uno, ma Mageia ve ne offre ben\n" "due. Ciascuno di essi è adatto a un particolare tipo di configurazione.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\" -- che sta per \"\"print, do not queue\"\" (\"stampa, non mettere\n" @@ -2003,8 +2012,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/ja.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/ja.po index 49ce74933..765b07786 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/ja.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/ja.po @@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-03-03 08:00+0900\n" "Last-Translator: Yukiko Bando <ybando@k6.dion.ne.jp>\n" "Language-Team: Japanese <cooker-i18n@mandrivalinux.org>\n" +"Language: ja\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -123,7 +124,8 @@ msgstr "この機能を使いますか？" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -133,13 +135,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -150,7 +155,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "ハードドライブ内で検出した既存の Linux パーティションのリストです。\n" @@ -659,13 +665,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -678,12 +686,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -706,7 +716,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -990,18 +1001,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1024,7 +1038,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1032,7 +1047,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1051,12 +1067,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "ここでは Mageia をインストールするパーティションを選びます。\n" "以前にインストールした GNU/Linux システムが残っていたり、別のツールを\n" @@ -1072,7 +1082,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * %s: 選択したドライブのすべてのパーティションを削除する\n" "\n" -" * %s: ハードドライブの空き領域に自動的に ext3 と swap を\n" +" * %s: ハードドライブの空き領域に自動的に ext4 と swap を\n" "作成する\n" "\n" "%s: ここから拡張機能を利用できます:\n" @@ -1122,11 +1132,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "使用可能な他のファイルシステムについては、Reference Manual の\n" "'ext2FS' の章をお読みください。\n" -"\n" -"PPC マシンにインストールする場合は最低 1 MB の HFS bootstrap \n" -"パーティションを作成してください。yaboot ブートローダが使用します。\n" -"このパーティションをもう少し大きくしておくと (例えば 50 MB くらい)、\n" -"スペアカーネルや緊急ブート用の ramdisk イメージを保存するのに利用できます。" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1166,20 +1171,24 @@ msgstr "標準/エキスパートモードの切り替え" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1190,10 +1199,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "ハードドライブに Microsoft のパーティションがいくつか検出されました。\n" @@ -1250,7 +1261,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1265,8 +1277,7 @@ msgstr "" "このステップは既存の GNU/Linux パーティションが検出されたときにのみ表示\n" "されます。\n" "\n" -"DrakX は既存の Mageia システムを更新するかそれとも新規にインストー" -"ル\n" +"DrakX は既存の Mageia システムを更新するかそれとも新規にインストール\n" "するかを尋ねます:\n" "\n" " * %s: 基本的には古いシステムを完全に消去してしまいます。\n" @@ -1788,8 +1799,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/ko.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/ko.po index 6c22306f9..b1aa3c2ff 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/ko.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/ko.po @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2002-09-09 09:08+0900\n" "Last-Translator: Jaegeum Cze <baedaron@hanafos.com>\n" "Language-Team: Korean <beadaron@hanafos.com>\n" +"Language: ko\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -89,7 +90,8 @@ msgstr "aboot를 사용하시겠습니까?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -99,13 +101,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -116,7 +121,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "선택된 하드디스크상의 기존 리눅스 파티션이 위에 열거되어 있습니다.\n" @@ -508,13 +514,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -527,12 +535,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -555,7 +565,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -846,18 +857,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -880,7 +894,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -888,7 +903,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -907,12 +923,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "이제 어느 파티션이 맨드리바 리눅스의 설치용으로 사용되어야 할지를\n" "선택해야 합니다. 이전에 다른 GNU/리눅스를 설치한 적이 있거나, 다른 파티션\n" @@ -965,13 +975,6 @@ msgstr "" " ○ 「Ctrl + d」: 파티션 삭제하기.\n" "\n" " ○ 「Ctrl + m」: 마운트 위치 지정하기.\n" -"\n" -"만약 PPC 컴퓨터에서 설치하고 있는 중이라면, YABOOT 부트로더가 사용할 최소 " -"1MB\n" -"의 HFS 「부트스트랩」파티션을 만들 필요가 있습니다. 만약 그 파티션을 보다 크" -"게\n" -"(가령, 50MB) 만들면, 응급 상황시에 사용할 여분의 커널과 램디스크 이미지를\n" -"저장할 수 있는 유용한 장소가 될 것입니다." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1011,20 +1014,24 @@ msgstr "일반 모드로 전환" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1035,10 +1042,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "둘 이상의 MS 윈도우즈 파티션이 디스크상에서 발견되었습니다.\n" @@ -1092,7 +1101,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1486,8 +1496,10 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/ky.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/ky.po index f41fd4517..61f9a2c4b 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/ky.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/ky.po @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2005-04-20 20:27+0500\n" "Last-Translator: Nurlan Borubaev <nurlan@tamga.info>\n" "Language-Team: Kyrgyz\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -128,7 +129,8 @@ msgstr "Мындай мүмкүнчүлүктү каалайсызбы?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -138,13 +140,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -155,7 +160,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Жогорудагы тизме сиздин катуу дискиңиздеги табылган Linux бөлүмдөрү.\n" @@ -264,8 +270,7 @@ msgid "" "megabytes." msgstr "" "Эми системаңызга кайсы программаларды орнотууну кааларыңызды аныктоого\n" -"убакыт келип жетти. Mageia менен кошо миңдеген пакеттер сунуш " -"кылынат,\n" +"убакыт келип жетти. Mageia менен кошо миңдеген пакеттер сунуш кылынат,\n" "тандоону жеңилдетүү үчүн алар жакындыгынакарата топторго бөлүнгөн.\n" "\n" "Пакеттер машинаңыздын колдонуу спецификасына дал келе тургандай\n" @@ -687,13 +692,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -706,12 +713,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -734,7 +743,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1031,18 +1041,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1065,7 +1078,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1073,7 +1087,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1092,12 +1107,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:526 @@ -1138,20 +1147,24 @@ msgstr "Нормалдык/эксперттик режимдерин алмаш #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1162,10 +1175,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Жогорудагы тизме сиздин катуу дискиңиздеги табылган Linux бөлүмдөрү.\n" @@ -1221,7 +1236,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1551,8 +1567,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/lt.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/lt.po index 0753b4658..4863a095e 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/lt.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/lt.po @@ -9,11 +9,12 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2000-12-23 13:50+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Mykolas Norvaias <Myka@centras.lt>\n" "Language-Team: Lithuanian <komp_lt@konferencijos.lt>\n" +"Language: lt\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && (n%" -"100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && (n" +"%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" #: ../help.pm:14 #, c-format @@ -83,7 +84,8 @@ msgstr "Ar nori naudoti aboot?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -93,13 +95,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -110,7 +115,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Aukščiau yra sąrašas Linux skirsnių, kuriuos pavyko rasti tavo\n" @@ -460,13 +466,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -479,12 +487,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -507,7 +517,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -555,8 +566,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "* Išvalyti visą diską: jei tu nori sunaikinti visus duomenis ir skirsnius, " "esančius kietajame diske, ir pakeisti juos\n" -" nauja Mageia sistema, gali pasirinkti šį variantą. Būk atsargus su " -"šiuo sprendimu, nes jei sutiksi,\n" +" nauja Mageia sistema, gali pasirinkti šį variantą. Būk atsargus su šiuo " +"sprendimu, nes jei sutiksi,\n" " nebegalėsi apsigalvoti ir sugrįžti.\n" "\n" "\n" @@ -754,18 +765,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -788,7 +802,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -796,7 +811,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -815,12 +831,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Dabar tu turi pasirinkti, kuriuos skirsnius naudoti tavo naujai Mandriva " "Linux \n" @@ -932,20 +942,24 @@ msgstr "Pakeisti į normalų režimą" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -956,10 +970,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Tavo kietajame diske buvo aptiktas vienas ar daugiau Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -1026,7 +1042,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1385,8 +1402,10 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/ltg.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/ltg.po index 3ce74efdf..9f7c78800 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/ltg.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/ltg.po @@ -769,7 +769,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -819,12 +819,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Pašlaik jums ir jāizvēlas, kurā(s) diska sadaļā(s) instalēt Mageia\n" "operētājsistēmu. Ja sadaļas jau ir izveidotas (agrākas GNU/Linux " diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/lv.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/lv.po index ec450f37b..1e45799d9 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/lv.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/lv.po @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2002-09-27 17:45+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Raivo Saars <spaiks@inbox.lv>\n" "Language-Team: Latvian <ll10nt@listes.murds.lv>\n" +"Language: lv\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -90,7 +91,8 @@ msgstr "Vai vēlaties izmantot aboot?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -100,13 +102,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -117,7 +122,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Augstāk ir uzskaitītas eksistējošās Linux sadaļas, kas ir atrastas uz jūsu\n" @@ -464,13 +470,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -483,12 +491,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -511,7 +521,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -557,8 +568,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "* Izdzēst visu disku: ja vēlaties izdzēst visus uz diska esošos datus un " "sadaļas un aizstāt tās ar jaunu\n" -" Mageia sistēmu, varat izvēlēties šo opciju. Esiet uzmanīgi, " -"izvēloties šo risinājumu, jo pēc\n" +" Mageia sistēmu, varat izvēlēties šo opciju. Esiet uzmanīgi, izvēloties šo " +"risinājumu, jo pēc\n" " apstiprināšanas jūs vairs nevarēsit atteikties no šīs izvēles.\n" "\n" "\n" @@ -570,8 +581,7 @@ msgstr "" "vai izmainīt Microsoft\n" " Windows sadaļas izmēru. Sadaļas izmēru var izmainīt bez datu zaudēšanas. " "Šis risinājums ir ieteicams, ja\n" -" jūs savā datorā vēlaties izmantot gan Mageia, gan Microsoft " -"Windows.\n" +" jūs savā datorā vēlaties izmantot gan Mageia, gan Microsoft Windows.\n" "\n" "\n" " Pirms izvēlaties šo risinājumu, ņemiet vērā, ka Microsoft Windows sadaļas " @@ -757,18 +767,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -791,7 +804,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -799,7 +813,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -818,12 +833,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Pašlaik jums ir jāizvēlas, kurā(s) diska sadaļā(s) instalēt Mageia\n" "operētājsistēmu. Ja sadaļas jau ir izveidotas (agrākas GNU/Linux " @@ -931,20 +940,24 @@ msgstr "Pārslēgt normālajā režīmā" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -955,10 +968,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Uz jūsu cietā diska ir atrasta vairāk nekā viena Microsoft Windows sadaļa.\n" @@ -1015,7 +1030,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1382,8 +1398,10 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/mk.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/mk.po index 1d31fdd61..0b6d3065b 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/mk.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/mk.po @@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2006-09-19 23:36-0700\n" "Last-Translator: Zoran Dimovski <zoki.dimovski@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Macedonian\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -138,7 +139,8 @@ msgstr "Дали сакате да ja користите оваа опција?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -148,13 +150,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -165,7 +170,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Горе се наведени постоечките „Linux“ партиции што се откриени на вашиот " @@ -277,8 +283,7 @@ msgstr "" "Постојат илјадници пакети за „Mageia“, и за да полесно се снајдете\n" "тие се поделени во групи со слични апликации.\n" "\n" -"„Mageia“ ги дели групите на пакети во четири категории. Може да " -"избирате\n" +"„Mageia“ ги дели групите на пакети во четири категории. Може да избирате\n" "и да мешате паќети од различни категории, така што инсталација на „Работна " "станица“\n" "може да има инсталирано и апликации од категоријата „Сервер“.\n" @@ -399,16 +404,16 @@ msgstr "" "!! Ако е избран серверски пакет, дали вие го имате изберено пакетот или\n" "затоа што е дел од цела група, ќе бидете запрашани да потврдите дали " "навистина\n" -"сакате да се инсталираат тие сервери. Како стандард, во „Mageia“, " -"сите инсталирани\n" +"сакате да се инсталираат тие сервери. Како стандард, во „Mageia“, сите " +"инсталирани\n" "сервиси автоматски ќе видат вклучени при подигнување. Дури и ако тие се " "безбедни\n" "и немаат проблеми во време на излегување на дистрибуцијата, може да се " "случи\n" "да бидат откриени безбедносни дупки по излегувањето на оваа верзија на " "„Mageia“. \n" -"Ако не знаете што прави одреден сервис или зошто се инсталира, притиснете „%" -"s“.\n" +"Ако не знаете што прави одреден сервис или зошто се инсталира, притиснете " +"„%s“.\n" "Со притискање на „%s“ ќе се инсталираат излистаните сервиси и тие\n" "автоматски ќе се вклучуваат при подигнување. !!\n" "\n" @@ -640,8 +645,8 @@ msgstr "" "Зависно вашиот хардвер, овој внес може и да не се појави.\n" "\n" " Системот ќе се обиде да отвори графичкиот екран со бараната\n" -"резолуција. Ако можете да ја прочитате прикажаната пораката и одговорете „%" -"s“,\n" +"резолуција. Ако можете да ја прочитате прикажаната пораката и одговорете " +"„%s“,\n" "тогаш „DrakX“ ќе продолжи со следниот чекор. Ако не можете да ја прочитате " "пораката,\n" "тогаш нешто не е во ред со конфигурацијата на автоматската детекција и\n" @@ -723,13 +728,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -742,12 +749,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -770,7 +779,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -803,8 +813,8 @@ msgstr "" "Во зависност од конфигурацијата на вашиот хард диск, достапни се\n" "повеќе опции:\n" "\n" -" * „%s“: оваа опција ќе изведе автоматско партиционирање на празниот(те) диск" -"(ови).\n" +" * „%s“: оваа опција ќе изведе автоматско партиционирање на празниот(те) " +"диск(ови).\n" "Ако ја користете оваа опција, понатаму нема да сте запрашувани.\n" "\n" " * „%s“: волшебникот детектирал една или повеќе постоечки „Linux“ партиции\n" @@ -841,8 +851,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * „%s“: ако сакате да ги избришете сите податоци и сите партиции присутни " "на\n" -"вашиот диск и да ги замените со вашиот нов „Mageia“ систем, изберете " -"ја\n" +"вашиот диск и да ги замените со вашиот нов „Mageia“ систем, изберете ја\n" "оваа опција. Внимавајте, откако ќе потврдите оваа операција не може да\n" "биде вратена.\n" "\n" @@ -865,8 +874,8 @@ msgstr "" "правено\n" "вакво нешто и имате малку искуство. За повеќе инструкции како да ја " "користите\n" -"алатката „DiskDrake“, обратете се на секцијата „Менаџирање на вашите партиции" -"„ во\n" +"алатката „DiskDrake“, обратете се на секцијата „Менаџирање на вашите " +"партиции„ во\n" "„Почетен водич“." #: ../help.pm:377 @@ -1097,18 +1106,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1131,7 +1143,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1139,7 +1152,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1158,17 +1172,10 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Во овој момент треба да изберете која партициja или партиции ќе ги користите " "за\n" -"инсталација на системот „Mageia“. Ако партициите се веќе " -"дефинирани,\n" +"инсталација на системот „Mageia“. Ако партициите се веќе дефинирани,\n" "од претходна инсталација на „GNU/Linux“ или од друга алатка за поделба на " "дискот,\n" "може да ги користите веќе постоечките партиции. Во спротивно, партициите\n" @@ -1182,7 +1189,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * „%s“: оваа опција ги брише сите партиции на избраниот хард диск\n" "\n" -" * „%s“: оваа опција ви овозможува автоматски да создадете „ext3“ и „swap“\n" +" * „%s“: оваа опција ви овозможува автоматски да создадете „ext4“ и „swap“\n" "партиции во слободниот простор од вашиот хард диск\n" "\n" "„%s“: ви дава пристап до додатни карактеристики: \n" @@ -1233,15 +1240,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "За да добиете информации за различните типови на датотечни системи,\n" "прочитајте го одделот за „ext2FS“ од „Упатство за употреба“.\n" -"\n" -"Ако инсталирате на „PPC“ машина, ќе сакате да создадете мала „HFS " -"bootstrap“\n" -"партиција од барем 1МБ, која ќе се користи од подигнувачот „yaboot“. Ако " -"сакате\n" -"да ја направите партицијата малку поголема, на пример 50МБ, тоа може да " -"биде\n" -"корисно како место за чување резервен кернел и „ramdisk“ слики за итни " -"случаи." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1281,20 +1279,24 @@ msgstr "Префрлање помеѓу нормален/експертски р #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1305,10 +1307,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "На вашиот диск е пронајдено повеќе од една „Microsoft“ партиција.\n" @@ -1364,7 +1368,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1391,16 +1396,15 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * „%s“: Оваа класа на инсталација ви овозможува да ги надградите пакетите " "кои\n" -"се тековно инсталирани на вашиот „Mageia“ систем. Вашата тековна " -"шема на\n" +"се тековно инсталирани на вашиот „Mageia“ систем. Вашата тековна шема на\n" "поделба на дискот и корисничките податоци нема да бидат променети. Повеќето " "од\n" "останатите конфигурациски чекори остануваат достапни и се слични со " "стандардната\n" "инсталацијата.\n" "\n" -"Користењето на опцијата „Надгради“ работи одлично на „Mageia“ " -"системи кои имаат\n" +"Користењето на опцијата „Надгради“ работи одлично на „Mageia“ системи кои " +"имаат\n" "верзија „8.1“ или понова. Извршување на надградба на „Mageia“ верзии " "постари\n" "од верзија „8.1“ е строго непрепорачлива." @@ -1501,8 +1505,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "За „UTF-8“ (повеќекодна) подршка: Повеќекодната подршка е ново кодирање\n" "на знаци наменето да ги покрие сите постоечки јазици. Но, комплетна подршка\n" -"во „GNU/Linux“ е сеуште во развој. Поради оваа причина, употребата на „UTF-" -"8“ во\n" +"во „GNU/Linux“ е сеуште во развој. Поради оваа причина, употребата на " +"„UTF-8“ во\n" "„Mageia“ ќе зависи од изборот на корисникот:\n" "\n" " * Ако изберете јазик со силно наследно кодирање („latin1“ јазици,\n" @@ -1971,8 +1975,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/mn.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/mn.po index 107978083..a0a7aed9f 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/mn.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/mn.po @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2004-01-02 00:35+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Sanlig Badral <Badral@openmn.org>\n" "Language-Team: Mongolian <openmn-core@lists.sf.net>\n" +"Language: mn\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -86,7 +87,8 @@ msgstr "Та энэ чанарыг ашиглахыг хүсэж байна уу #: ../help.pm:57 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -96,13 +98,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -113,7 +118,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "вы вы вы вы вы г вы г бол Нэр г г Нэр бол төрөл г г г Erfitt төрөл бол бол г " @@ -444,13 +450,15 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -463,12 +471,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -491,7 +501,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -655,18 +666,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -689,7 +703,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -697,7 +712,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -716,12 +732,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:526 @@ -762,20 +772,24 @@ msgstr "Ердийн/мэргэжлийн горимын хооронд шилж #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -786,10 +800,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "вы ямх шинэ г бол нэр Цонхнууд нэр г г г нэр бол төрөл г г г Erfitt төрөл " @@ -820,7 +836,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1177,8 +1194,10 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/ms.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/ms.po index 88b8a0048..ec4e83d26 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/ms.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/ms.po @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2006-02-19 14:09+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Sharuzzaman Ahmat Raslan <sharuzzaman@myrealbox.com>\n" "Language-Team: Malay <translation-team-ms@lists.sourceforge.net>\n" +"Language: ms\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -86,7 +87,8 @@ msgstr "Anda mahu memadam masukan ini dari buku telefon?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -96,13 +98,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -113,7 +118,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "on on Nama Nama dan\n" @@ -441,13 +447,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -460,12 +468,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -488,7 +498,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -662,18 +673,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -696,7 +710,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -704,7 +719,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -723,12 +739,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "on dan on\n" " on\n" @@ -784,20 +794,24 @@ msgstr "normal" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -808,10 +822,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "on dalam Tetingkap dan\n" @@ -841,7 +857,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1195,8 +1212,10 @@ msgstr "dalam on dan!" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/mt.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/mt.po index 03e248f33..bd5e0e9ea 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/mt.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/mt.po @@ -1029,7 +1029,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1079,12 +1079,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "F'dan il-punt trid tagħżel liema partizzjoni(jiet) se jintużaw għall-\n" "installazzjoni tas-sistema Mageia. Jekk diġà ġew definiti xi\n" @@ -1103,7 +1097,7 @@ msgstr "" "mill-ħard disk magħżula.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": din l-għażla awtomatikament toħloqlok partizzjonijiet\n" -"ext3 u swap fl-ispazju vojt tad-diska.\n" +"ext4 u swap fl-ispazju vojt tad-diska.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\" jagħtik aċċess għal iżjed faċilitajiet:\n" "\n" @@ -1154,11 +1148,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Biex tikseb iżjed informazzjoni dwar il-filesystems differenti disponibbli,\n" "jekk jogħġbok aqra l-kapitlu ext2fs fil-Manwal ta' Referenza.\n" -"\n" -"Jekk qed tinstalla fuq kompjuter PPC, tkun trid toħloq partizzjoni żgħira\n" -"HFS \"bootstrap\", ta' l-inqas 1MB, li tintuża mill-bootloader yaboot. Jekk\n" -"tiddeċiedi li tagħmlu ftit ikbar, ngħidu aħna 50MB, tista' ssibu post utli\n" -"fejn tqiegħed kernel u ramdisk \"spare\" għal emerġenzi." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/nb.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/nb.po index 272d8a84e..2efa2febd 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/nb.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/nb.po @@ -1,46 +1,41 @@ -# translation of nb.po to Norwegian Bokmål -# translation of nb.po to Norsk Bokmål -# translation of DrakX-nb.po to Norwegian Bokmål -# KTranslator Generated File -# Translation file of Mageia graphic install -# Copyright (C) 1999 Mandriva -# Terje Bjerkelia <terje@bjerkelia.com>, 1999-2000. -# Andreas Bergstrøm <abergstr@halden.net>, 2000. -# Kenneth Rørvik <kenneth@argon.no-ip.com>, 2003. -# Per Øyvind Karlsen <peroyvind@sintrax.net>, 2003, 2004. -# Keld Simonsen <keld@dkuug.dk>, 2004. -# Per Øyvind Karlsen <peroyvind@mandrivalinux.org>, 2004, 2005. -# Eskild Hustvedt <eskild@goldenfiles.com>, 2004. -# Eskild Hustvedt <zerodogg@skolelinux.no>, 2004, 2005. -# Per Øyvind Karlsen <pkarlsen@mandriva.com>, 2005. +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) YEAR THE PACKAGE'S COPYRIGHT HOLDER +# This file is distributed under the same license as the PACKAGE package. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. # +# Translators: +# Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2024 +# Karl Morten Ramberg <karl.m.ramberg@gmail.com>, 2024 +# +#, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: nb\n" +"Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2008-09-12 12:22+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2005-09-21 23:11+0200\n" -"Last-Translator: Per Øyvind Karlsen <pkarlsen@mandriva.com>\n" -"Language-Team: Norwegian Bokmål <cooker-i18n@mandrivalinux.com>\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2024-09-04 17:33+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Karl Morten Ramberg <karl.m.ramberg@gmail.com>, 2024\n" +"Language-Team: Norwegian Bokmål (https://app.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/" +"teams/9361/nb/)\n" +"Language: nb\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"X-Generator: KBabel 1.10.2\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" #: ../help.pm:14 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Before continuing, you should carefully read the terms of the license. It\n" "covers the entire Mageia distribution. If you agree with all the\n" "terms it contains, check the \"%s\" box. If not, clicking on the \"%s\"\n" "button will reboot your computer." msgstr "" -"Før du går videre bør du lese betingelsene i lisensen nøye. Den dekker hele\n" -"Mageia-distribusjonen. Hvis du er enig med alle betingelsene,\n" -"sjekk av \"%s\"-boksen- Hvis ikke, så vil det år trykke på '%s'k-knappen " -"starte\n" -"maskinen din på nytt." +"Før du fortsetter, bør du lese vilkårene for lisensen nøye. Den\n" +"dekker hele Mageia-distribusjonen. Hvis du er enig i alle\n" +"vilkårene den inneholder, merk av for \"%s\"-boksen. Hvis ikke, klikk på " +"\"%s\"\n" +"knappen vil starte datamaskinen på nytt." #: ../help.pm:20 #, c-format @@ -131,12 +126,12 @@ msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "User name" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Brukernavn" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "Accept user" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Godta bruker" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format @@ -146,7 +141,8 @@ msgstr "Ønsker du å bruke denne finessen?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -156,13 +152,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -173,7 +172,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Her er de eksisterende Linux-partisjonene som ble oppdaget på din harddisk.\n" @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ msgstr "" "\"nest laveste SCSI-ID\", etc." #: ../help.pm:88 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The Mageia installation is distributed on several CD-ROMs. If a\n" "selected package is located on another CD-ROM, DrakX will eject the current\n" @@ -220,13 +220,14 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"Mageia-installasjonen er spredd ut over flere CD-ROMer. \n" -"Hvis en valgt pakke er på en annen CDROM, vil DrakX løse ut den nåværende\n" -"CD og be deg sette i en den rette CDen som kreves. Hvis du ikke har den som\n" -"trengs nå, bare klikk på «%s», pakken(e) vil da ikke bli installert." +"Mageia-installasjonen er distribuert på flere CD-ROM-er. Hvis en\n" +"valgt pakke er plassert på en annen CD-ROM, vil DrakX løse ut strømmen\n" +"CD og ber deg sette inn den nødvendige. Hvis du ikke har den forespurte\n" +"CD for hånden, bare klikk på \"%s\", de tilsvarende pakkene vil ikke\n" +"installeres." #: ../help.pm:95 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "It's now time to specify which programs you wish to install on your system.\n" "There are thousands of packages available for Mageia, and to make it\n" @@ -283,62 +284,62 @@ msgid "" "command-line interface. The total size of this installation is about 65\n" "megabytes." msgstr "" -"Det er nå på tide å spesifisere hvilke programmer du ønsker å installere på\n" -"systemet ditt. Det er tusenvis av pakker tilgjengelig for Mageia, " -"for\n" -"å gjøre det enklere å håndtere pakkene så har de blitt plassert i grupper " -"med\n" -"lignende applikasjoner.\n" +"Det er nå på tide å spesifisere hvilke programmer du ønsker å installere på " +"systemet ditt.\n" +"Det er tusenvis av pakker tilgjengelig for Mageia, og for å lage det\n" +"enklere å administrere, de har blitt plassert i grupper med lignende\n" +"applikasjoner..\n" +"\n" +"Mageia sorterer pakkegrupper i fire kategorier. Du kan blande og\n" +"matche applikasjoner fra de forskjellige kategoriene, så en " +"\"arbeidsstasjon\"\n" +"installasjonen kan fortsatt ha applikasjoner fra kategorien ``Server''\n" +"installert.\n" "\n" -"Pakkene er delt inn i grupper som svarer til forskjellig typisk bruk av din " -"maskin.\n" -"Mageia har fire forhåndsdefinerte installasjoner tilgjengelig.\n" -"Du kan mikse og matche applikasjoner fra forskjellige grupper, så en\n" -"``Arbeidsstasjon''-installasjon kan fortsatt ha applikasjoner fra\n" -"``Utvikling''-gruppa installert.\n" +" * \"%s\": if you plan to use your machine as a workstation, select one or\n" +"more of the groups in the workstation category.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": hvis du planlagger å bruke din maskin som arbeidsstasjon, velg\n" -"en eller flere av applikasjonene som er i arbeidsstasjon-gruppen.\n" +" * \"%s\": if you plan on using your machine for programming, select the\n" +"appropriate groups from that category. The special \"LSB\" group will\n" +"configure your system so that it complies as much as possible with the\n" +"Linux Standard Base specifications.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": hvis du planlegger å bruke maskinen til programmering, velg\n" -"ønskede grupper fra den kategorien. Den spesielle «LSB»-gruppen vil\n" -"sette opp systemet ditt slik at den samsvarer mest mulig med\n" -"Linux Standard Base spesifikasjonene.\n" +" Selecting the \"LSB\" group will ensure 100%%-LSB compliance\n" +"of the system. However, if you do not select the \"LSB\" group you will\n" +"still have a system which is nearly 100%% LSB-compliant.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": hvis maskinen skal brukes som tjener, velg hvilke av de mer " -"vanlige\n" -"tjenestene som du ønsker installert på din maskin.\n" +" * \"%s\": if your machine is intended to be a server, select which of the\n" +"more common services you wish to install on your machine.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": det er her du kan velge ditt ønskede grafiske miljø. Du\n" -"må velge minst ett hvis du ønsker å ha ett grafisk grensesnitt " -"tilgjengelig.\n" +" * \"%s\": this is where you will choose your preferred graphical\n" +"environment. At least one must be selected if you want to have a graphical\n" +"interface available.\n" "\n" -"Ved å flytte musepekeren over et gruppenavn vil en kort forklarende tekst\n" -"dukke opp over den gruppen.\n" +"Moving the mouse cursor over a group name will display a short explanatory\n" +"text about that group.\n" "\n" -"Du kan merke av i «%s»-boksen, som er nyttig hvis du er kjent med\n" -"pakkene som blir tilbudt, ellr du vil ha total kontroll over hva som vil " -"bli\n" -"installert.\n" -"Hvis du starter installasjonen i «%s»-modus trenger du ikke å velge noen " -"grupper\n" -"og hindre installasjon av alle nye pakker. Dette er nyttig for å reparere\n" -"eller oppdatere et allerede installert system.\n" +"You can check the \"%s\" box, which is useful if you're familiar with the\n" +"packages being offered or if you want to have total control over what will\n" +"be installed.\n" "\n" -"Hvis du ikke velger noen grupper når du utfører en normal installasjon (i\n" -"motsetning til en oppgradering) vil en dialogboks dukke opp og foreslå\n" -"forskjellige valg for en minimal installasjon:\n" +"If you start the installation in \"%s\" mode, you can deselect all groups\n" +"and prevent the installation of any new packages. This is useful for\n" +"repairing or updating an existing system.\n" "\n" -"* \"%s\": installer et minimum av pakker som trengs for å ha et fungerende\n" -"grafisk skrivebord.\n" +"If you deselect all groups when performing a regular installation (as\n" +"opposed to an upgrade), a dialog will pop up suggesting different options\n" +"for a minimal installation:\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": install the minimum number of packages possible to have a\n" +"working graphical desktop.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": installerer basesystemet pluss standard verktøy og dokumentasjon\n" -"for disse. Denne installasjonen passer til å sette opp en server.\n" +" * \"%s\": installs the base system plus basic utilities and their\n" +"documentation. This installation is suitable for setting up a server.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\" vil installere det absolutte minimum som er nødvendig for å få\n" -"Linux systemet opp og gå. Med denne installasjonen så vil du\n" -"kun ha et kommandolinje-grensesnitt. Denne installasjonen er på rundt 65 " -"megabyte." +" * \"%s\": will install the absolute minimum number of packages necessary\n" +"to get a working Linux system. With this installation you will only have a\n" +"command-line interface. The total size of this installation is about 65\n" +"megabytes." #: ../help.pm:149 ../help.pm:591 #, c-format @@ -356,7 +357,7 @@ msgid "Truly minimal install" msgstr "Virkelig minimal installasjon" #: ../help.pm:152 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you choose to install packages individually, the installer will present\n" "a tree containing all packages classified by groups and subgroups. While\n" @@ -392,43 +393,47 @@ msgid "" "another installation. See the second tip of the last step on how to create\n" "such a floppy." msgstr "" -"Hvis du fortalte installasjonsrutinen at du ønsket å velge enkeltpakker,\n" -"så vil du få se ett tre som innholder alle pakkene sortert etter grupper\n" -"og undergrupper. Når du blar gjennom treet, kan du velge grupper, \n" -"undergrupper eller individuelle pakker.\n" -"\n" -"Når du velger en pakke i treet, vil en beskrivelse dukke opp til høyre\n" -"side for å la deg vite hva pakkens hensikt er.\n" -"\n" -"!! Hvis en tjenerpakke har blitt valgt, enten på grunn av at du valgte den " -"spesifikt\n" -"eller fordi den var medlem av en gruppe pakker, vil du bli bedt om å " -"bekrefte at du\n" -"virkelig ønsker å installere de valgte tjenerne.\n" -"Som standard i Mageia vil alle installerte tjenere bli startet ved " -"oppstart.\n" -"Selv om de er sikre og ikke har noen kjente sikkerhetshull når denne " -"distribusjonen\n" -"ble sluppet,\n" -"så kan det være at sikkerhetshull ble oppdaget etter at denne versjonen\n" -"av Mageia ble sluppet. Hvis du ikke vet hva en type tjener gjør, " -"eller\n" -"hvorfor den blir installert, klikk «%s».\n" -"«%s» vil installere de listede tjenerene og de vil bli\n" -"startet automatisk som standard under oppstart. !!\n" -"\n" -"«%s»-valget er brukt for å deaktivere advarselsdialogen som vises\n" -"når installasjonen automatisk velger en pakke for å løse avhengigheter.\n" -"Noen pakker er avhengig av at andre pakker er installert.\n" -"Installasjonsprogrammet kan finne ut hvilke pakker som trengs for å\n" -"oppfylle avhengigheten til en pakke for å utføre en vellykket installasjon.\n" -"\n" -"Det lille diskett-ikonet på bunnen av denne listen lar deg laste en\n" -"pakkeliste lagd under en tidligere installasjon. Dette er nyttig hvis du\n" -"har flere maskiner som du vil sette opp identisk. Ved å klikke på dette\n" -"ikonet vil du bli bedt om å sette inn disketten laget ved slutten av\n" -"en annen installasjon. Se det andre tipset i det siste steget om hvordan du\n" -"kan lage en slik diskett." +"Hvis du velger å installere pakker individuelt, vil installasjonsprogrammet " +"vises\n" +"et tre som inneholder alle pakker klassifisert etter grupper og " +"undergrupper. Mens\n" +"Når du blar gjennom treet, kan du velge hele grupper, undergrupper eller " +"enkeltpersoner\n" +"pakker.\n" +"\n" +"Hver gang du velger en pakke i treet, vil en beskrivelse vises på\n" +"høyre side som viser deg formålet med den pakken.\n" +"\n" +"!! Hvis en serverpakke er valgt, enten fordi du spesifikt\n" +"valgte den individuelle pakken eller fordi den er en del av en gruppe av " +"pakker,\n" +"vil du bli bedt om å bekrefte at du virkelig vil at disse pakkene skal " +"installeres. Som standard vil Mageia automatisk starte alle installerte\n" +"tjenester ved oppstart. Selv om de er trygge og ikke har noen kjente " +"problemer på\n" +"den tiden distribusjonen ble sendt, er det fullt mulig at\n" +"sikkerhetshull ble oppdaget etter at denne versjonen av Mageia ble utgitt. " +"Hvis du ikke vet hva en bestemt tjeneste skal gjøre eller\n" +"hvorfor det blir installert, klikk deretter \"%s\". Ved å klikke på \"%s\" " +"installeres\n" +"de listede tjenestene, og de vil startes automatisk ved oppstart. !!\n" +"\n" +"Alternativet \"%s\" brukes til å deaktivere advarselsdialogen som vises\n" +"når installasjonsprogrammet automatisk velger en pakke for å løse et\n" +"avhengighetsproblem. Noen pakker avhenger av andre og installasjonen av\n" +"én bestemt pakke kan kreve installasjon av en annen pakke. De\n" +"installasjonsprogrammet kan bestemme hvilke pakker som kreves for å " +"tilfredsstille en avhengighet for å fullføre installasjonen.\n" +"\n" +"Det lille diskettikonet nederst på listen lar deg laste inn en\n" +"pakkeliste opprettet under en tidligere installasjon. Dette er nyttig hvis " +"du\n" +"har en rekke maskiner som du ønsker å konfigurere identisk. Klikker\n" +"på dette ikonet vil du be deg om å sette inn disketten som ble opprettet på " +"slutten av\n" +"en annen installasjon. Se det andre tipset i det siste trinnet om hvordan du " +"oppretter\n" +"en slik diskett." #: ../help.pm:183 #, c-format @@ -511,7 +516,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:213 #, c-format msgid "Hardware clock set to GMT" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Maskinvareklokke satt til GMT" #: ../help.pm:213 #, c-format @@ -545,7 +550,7 @@ msgstr "" "best." #: ../help.pm:234 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "X (for X Window System) is the heart of the GNU/Linux graphical interface\n" "on which all the graphical environments (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep,\n" @@ -603,72 +608,64 @@ msgid "" "want to check \"%s\" if your machine is to act as a server, or if you were\n" "not successful in getting the display configured." msgstr "" -"X (for X Window System) er hjertet i GNU/Linux sitt grafiske grensesnitt " -"som\n" -"alle de grafiske miljøene (KDE, GNOME Afterstep, Windowmaker osv.)\n" -"som følger med Mageia er avhengige av.\n" +"X (for X Window System) er hjertet i GNU/Linux grafiske grensesnitt\n" +"der alle de grafiske miljøene (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep,\n" +"WindowMaker, etc.) sammen med Mageia stole på.\n" "\n" -"Du vil få en liste med forkjellige parametre som kan forandres for å få et\n" -"optimalt grafisk grensesnitt: \n" +"Du vil se en liste over forskjellige parametere som skal endres for å få en " +"optimal\n" +"grafisk visning.\n" "\n" -"Skjermkort\n" +"Grafikkort\n" "\n" -" Installasjonsrutinen kan vanligvis automatisk oppdage og sette opp\n" -"skjermkortet som er installert i din maskin. Dersom dette ikke er tilfellet, " -"kan\n" -"du velge det kortet du faktisk har installert, fra denne listen.\n" +"Installasjonsprogrammet vil normalt automatisk oppdage og konfigurere\n" +"grafikkortet installert på maskinen din. Hvis dette ikke er riktig, kan du\n" +"velg fra denne listen kortet du faktisk har installert.\n" "\n" -" I tilfelle det er flere tjenere tilgjengelig for ditt kort, med eller " -"uten\n" -"3D-akselerasjon, vil du så kunne velge den tjeneren som best passer\n" -"dine behov.\n" +"I situasjonen der forskjellige servere er tilgjengelige for kortet ditt,\n" +"med eller uten 3D-akselerasjon, blir du bedt om å velge hvilken server\n" +"passer best til dine behov.\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" -"Skjerm\n" +"Overvåk\n" "\n" -" Installasjonsrutinen kan normalt automatisk oppdage og sette opp " -"skjermen\n" -"som er koblet til din maskin. Hvis dette ikke er korrekt, kan du velge " -"skjermen du\n" -"faktisk har fra listen.\n" +"Normalt vil installasjonsprogrammet automatisk oppdage og konfigurere\n" +"monitor koblet til maskinen din. Hvis det ikke er riktig, kan du velge\n" +"fra denne listen skjermen som er koblet til datamaskinen.\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" "Oppløsning\n" "\n" -" Her kan du velge hvilke oppløsninger og fargedybder du vil bruke fra de " -"som\n" -"er tilgjengelige for din maskinvare. Velg den kombinasjonen som best passer\n" -"dine behov (Du kan forandre dette etter installasjon). En prøve av det " -"valgte\n" -"oppsettet vil vises i skjermen.\n" +"Her kan du velge oppløsninger og fargedybder som er tilgjengelige for din\n" +"grafikk maskinvare. Velg den som best passer dine behov (det vil du være\n" +"kan gjøre endringer etter installasjonen). Et utvalg av de utvalgte\n" +"konfigurasjonen vises på monitorbildet.\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" "Test\n" "\n" -" Avhengig av din maskinvare vil denne oppføringen kanskje ikke vises.\n" +"Avhengig av maskinvaren din, kan det hende at denne oppføringen ikke vises.\n" "\n" -" systemet vil forsøke å starte en grafisk skjerm med den valgte\n" -"oppløsningen. Dersom du kan se meldingen som vises under testen og \n" -"svarer \"%s\" vil DrakX fortsette til neste trinn. Hvis du ikke kan se " -"meldingen\n" -"betyr det at en del av oppsettet er gal, og testen vil avsluttes etter 12\n" -"sekunder. Du vil da bli tatt tilbake til menyen. Forandre innstillingene til " -"du får\n" -"et oppsett som fungerer. \n" +"Systemet vil prøve å åpne en grafisk skjerm på ønsket\n" +"oppløsning. Hvis du ser testmeldingen under testen og svarer \"%s\",\n" +"så vil DrakX gå videre til neste trinn. Hvis du ikke ser det, så det\n" +"betyr at en del av den automatisk oppdagede konfigurasjonen var feil og\n" +"testen avsluttes automatisk etter 12 sekunder og returnerer deg til\n" +"meny. Endre innstillinger til du får en korrekt grafisk visning.\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" -"Valg\n" +"Alternativer\n" "\n" -" Her kan du velge om du vil at maskinen automatisk skal starte det " -"grafiske\n" -"grensesnittet når maskinen starter. Du vil selvsagt ønske å sjekke av for \"%" -"s\"\n" -"dersom maskinen skal fungere som en tjener, eller om du ikke fikk satt opp\n" -"det grafiske grensesnittet riktig." +"Disse trinnene lar deg velge om du vil at maskinen skal gjøre det\n" +"automatisk bytte til et grafisk grensesnitt ved oppstart. Det er klart du " +"kan\n" +"ønsker å sjekke \"%s\" om maskinen din skal fungere som en server, eller om " +"du var det\n" +"ikke lykkes med å få skjermen konfigurert." #: ../help.pm:291 #, c-format @@ -732,16 +729,18 @@ msgstr "" "grensesnittet." #: ../help.pm:319 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -754,12 +753,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -782,7 +783,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -795,79 +797,63 @@ msgid "" "experience. For more instructions on how to use the DiskDrake utility,\n" "refer to the ``Managing Your Partitions'' section in the ``Starter Guide''." msgstr "" -"Du må nå avgjøre hvor du ønsker å installere Mageia-" -"operativsystemet\n" -"på din harddisk. Hvis din harddisk er tom, eller et eksisterende\n" -"operativsystem benytter all plassen som er tilgjengelig, vil du bli nødt til " -"å\n" -"ompartisjonere disken. Partisjonering av en harddisk vil si å dele den inn " -"i\n" -"logiske enheter for å skape plassen som trengs for å installere ditt nye\n" -"Mageia-system.\n" -"\n" -"Ettersom partisjoneringsprosessen ikke kan tilbakestilles, og kan føre til " -"tapte\n" -"data hvis det allerede finnes et operativsystem på disken, kan " -"partisjonering\n" -"virke skremmendes dersom du er en uerfaren bruker. Heldigvis har DrakX en\n" -"veiviser som forenkler denne prosessen. Før du fortsetter installasjonen, " -"bør\n" -"du lese gjennom resten av denne teksten, og ikke minst: Ta deg god tid.\n" -"\n" -"Avhengig av ditt harddiskoppsett, er flere valg tilgjengelige:\n" -"\n" -" *«%s»: dette valget utfører automatisk partisjonering av dine\n" -"harddisker. Dersom du velger dette, vil det ikke ble stilt flere spørsmål.\n" -"\n" -" * «%s»: veiviseren har funnet en eller flere linux-partisjoner på " -"harddisken\n" -"din. Hvis du vil bruke disse, velg dette valget. Du vil bli spurt om å angi\n" -"monteringspunkter for hver partisjon. De allerede oppsatte " -"monteringspunktene\n" -"er valgt som standard, og det er normalt lurt å beholde disse.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": hvis Microsoft Windows er installert på din harddisk, og tar all " -"tilgjengelig\n" -"plass, må du lage ledig plass for GNU/Linux. For å oppnå dette, kan du enten " -"slette\n" -"hele Microsoft Windows-partisjonen med tilhørende data (Se ``Slett hele " -"disken''-valget),\n" -"eller forandre størrelsen på din Microsoft Windows FAT- eller NTFS-" -"partisjon.\n" -"Forandring av diskstørrelse kan utføres uten tap av data forutsatt at du " -"har\n" -"defragmentert Windows-partisjonen. Det anbefales sterkt at du tar \n" -"sikkerhetskopi av dine data. Dette valget er anbefalt, dersom du ønsker \n" -"å kjøre både Mageia og Microsoft Windows på samme maskin.\n" -"\n" -" Før du velger dette valget, må du være klar over at størrelsen på din\n" -"Microsoft Windows-partisjon vil være mindre enn når du startet. Du vil \n" -"dermed ha mindre ledig plass under Microsoft Windows til å lagre data \n" -"og installere programvare på.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": hvis du ønsker å slette alle partisjoner og data, og erstatte dem " -"med ditt\n" -"nye Mageia-system, så velg dette valget. Vær forsiktig, du vil ikke " -"kunne gjøre\n" -"om dette etter at du har bekreftet valget.\n" -"\n" -" !! Hvis du velger dette valget, vil alle data på harddisken bli " -"slettet. !!\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": dette vil enkelt og greit slette alt fra harddisken og starte en " -"ny partisjonering\n" -"fra bunn av. Alle data på harddisken vil bli tapt.\n" -"\n" -" !! Hvis du velger dette valget, vil du miste alle data på harddisken. !!\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": velg dette dersom du vil partisjonere disken manuelt.\n" -"Vær forsiktig -- dette er en kraftig, men farlig operasjon, og du kan lett " -"miste alle\n" -"dine eksisterende data. Derfor er dette valget kun anbefalt dersom du har " -"gjort\n" -"dette før, og har en del erfaring. For mer veiledning i bruk av DiskDrake-" -"verktøyet\n" -"se kapittelet ``Managing Your Partitions''-seksjonen i ``Starter Guide''." +"Du må nå bestemme hvor på harddisken du vil installere Mageia " +"operativsystemet. Hvis harddisken er tom eller hvis et eksisterende " +"operativsystem bruker all tilgjengelig plass må du partisjonere enheten. I " +"utgangspunktet betyr partisjonering av en harddisk logisk å dele den for å " +"skape plassen som trengs for å installere den nye Mageia systemet.\n" +"\n" +"Fordi prosessen med å partisjonere en harddisk vanligvis er irreversibel og " +"kan føre til tap av data, kan partisjoneringen være skremmende og stressende " +"for en uerfarne bruker. Heldigvis inkluderer DrakX en veiviser som forenkler " +"denne prosessen. Før du fortsetter med dette trinnet, les gjennom resten av " +"denne delen og fremfor alt, ta deg god tid.\n" +"\n" +"Avhengig av konfigurasjonen av harddisken, er det flere alternativer " +"tilgjengelig: \n" +" * \"%s\". Dette alternativet vil utføre en automatisk partisjonering av den " +"tomme delen disk(er). Hvis du bruker dette alternativet vil det ikke være " +"flere spørsmål.\n" +" * \"%s\". Veiviseren har oppdaget en eller flere eksisterende Linux-" +"partisjoner på harddisken din. Hvis du vil bruke dem, velg dette " +"alternativet. Du vil da bli bedt om å velge monteringspunktene knyttet til " +"hver enkelt av partisjonene.\n" +"De eldre monteringspunktene er valgt som standard, og for det meste er det " +"det en god idé å beholde dem.\n" +"* \"%s\". Hvis Microsoft Windows er installert på harddisken og tar all " +"plassen som er tilgjengelig på den, må du frigjøre ledig plass forGNU/Linux. " +"For å gjøre det kan du slette Microsoft Windows-partisjonen og data (se " +"løsningen ``Slett hele disken'') eller endre størrelsen på Microsoft " +"Windows\n" +"FAT- eller NTFS-partisjon. Endre størrelse kan utføres uten tap av data, " +"forutsatt at du tidligere har defragmentert Windows-partisjonen.\n" +"\n" +"Det anbefales på det sterkeste å sikkerhetskopiere dataene dine. Å bruke " +"dette alternativet anbefales hvis du vil bruke både Mageia og Microsoft " +"Windows på samme datamaskin.\n" +"\n" +"Før du velger dette alternativet, vennligst forstå at det etter denne " +"prosedyren, vil størrelsen på Microsoft Windows-partisjonen være mindre enn " +"da du startet. Du vil ha mindre ledig plass under Microsoft Windows til å " +"lagre dataene dine eller for å installere ny programvare.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Hvis du ønsker å slette alle data og alle partisjoner som finnes " +"på harddisken og erstatte dem med ditt nye Mageia-system, velg dette " +"alternativet. Vær forsiktig, for du vil ikke kunne angre denne operasjonen " +"etter at du har bekreftet.\n" +"\n" +" !! Hvis du velger dette alternativet, vil alle data på disken slettes. !!\n" +" * \"%s\". Dette alternativet vises når harddisken er fullstendig tatt av " +"Microsoft Windows. Å velge dette alternativet vil ganske enkelt slette alt.\n" +"\n" +" !! Hvis du velger dette alternativet, vil alle data på disken gå tapt. !!\n" +"\n" +" * \"\"%s. Velg dette alternativet hvis du vil manuelt partisjonere disken. " +"Vær forsiktig - det er et kraftig, men farlig valg, og du kan veldig fort " +"miste alle dataene dine. Derfor kan dette alternativet egentlig bare " +"anbefales hvis du har gjort noe slikt før og har erfaring. For flere " +"instruksjoner om hvordan du bruker DiskDrake-verktøyet, Se avsnittet " +"``Administrere partisjonene dine'' i ``Starter Guide''." #: ../help.pm:377 #, c-format @@ -877,7 +863,7 @@ msgstr "Bruk eksisterende partisjon" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format msgid "Use the free space on the Microsoft Windows® partition" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Bruk den ledige plassen på Microsoft Windows®-partisjonen" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format @@ -939,8 +925,8 @@ msgstr "" " * «%s»: Dette er en delvis automatisert installasjon. Partisjonering er\n" "den eneste interaktive prosedyren.\n" "\n" -" * «%s»: Dette er en fullstendig automatisert installasjon: harddisken vil " -"bli\n" +" * «%s»: Dette er en fullstendig automatisert installasjon: harddisken " +"vil bli\n" "helt overskrevet, og alle data vil bli overskrevet.\n" "\n" " Denne funksjonen er nyttig når du skal installere et antall identiske " @@ -968,20 +954,20 @@ msgstr "Generer autoinstallasjonsdiskett" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Replay" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Spill på nytt" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Automated" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Automatisert" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Save packages selection" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Lagre pakkevalg" #: ../help.pm:408 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you chose to reuse some legacy GNU/Linux partitions, you may wish to\n" "reformat some of them and erase any data they contain. To do so, please\n" @@ -1005,32 +991,30 @@ msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you wish to select partitions which will be checked for\n" "bad blocks on the disk." msgstr "" -"Hvis du valgte å bruke noen gamle GNU/Linux-partisjoner, kan det\n" -" hende du ønsker å omformatere enkelte\n" -"eksisterende partisjoner for å slette data på disse. Hvis du ønsker å\n" -"gjøre dette, kan du velge disse partisjonene også.\n" -"(å formatere betyr å opprette ett filsystem)\n" +"Hvis du velger å gjenbruke eldre GNU/Linux-partisjoner, kan det være lurt å " +"re- formatere de på nytt og slett alle data de inneholder. For å gjøre det, " +"velg disse partisjonene også.\n" "\n" -"Legg merke til at det ikke er nødvendig å formatere alle eksisterende\n" -"partisjoner. Du må reformatere partisjonene som skal innholde\n" -"operativsystemet (som «/», «/usr» eller «/var»), men du trenger ikke\n" -"å omformatere partisjoner som inneholder data du vil beholde\n" -"(typisk «/home»).\n" +"Vær oppmerksom på at det ikke er nødvendig å re-formatere alle eksisterende\n" +"partisjoner. Du må formatere partisjonene som inneholder operativsystemet " +"(som \"/\", \"/usr\" eller \"/var\"), men du trenger ikke å formatere på " +"nytt partisjoner som inneholder data du ønsker å beholde (vanligvis \"/" +"home\").\n" "\n" -"Vær forsiktig når du velger partisjoner. Etter formatering vil alle data\n" -"på de valgte partisjonene bli slettet uten at du kan hente dataene\n" -"tilbake.\n" +"Vær forsiktig når du velger partisjoner. Etter formateringen er fullført, " +"vil alle data på de valgte partisjonene bli slettet og du vil ikke kunne " +"gjenopprette den.\n" "\n" -"Klikk «%s» når du er klar til å formatere partisjonene.\n" +"Klikk på \"%s\" når du er klar til å formatere partisjonene.\n" "\n" -"Klikk «%s» om du vil velge andre partisjoner for din nye\n" -"Mageia-operativsysteminstallasjon. \n" +"Klikk på \"%s\" hvis du vil velge en annen partisjon for din nye " +"Installasjon av Mageia operativsystemet.\n" "\n" -"Klikk på «%s» hvis du ønsker å velge partisjoner som skal sjekkes for\n" -"ødelagte blokker på disken." +"Klikk på \"%s\" hvis du ønsker å velge partisjoner som skal sjekkes for " +"dårlige blokker på disken." #: ../help.pm:437 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "By the time you install Mageia, it's likely that some packages will\n" "have been updated since the initial release. Bugs may have been fixed,\n" @@ -1044,20 +1028,20 @@ msgid "" "will appear: review the selection, and press \"%s\" to retrieve and install\n" "the selected package(s), or \"%s\" to abort." msgstr "" -"Når du installerer Mageia, er det sannsynlig at enkelte pakker\n" -"er blitt oppdatert siden denne versjonen ble sluppet. Noen feil kan ha\n" -"blitt fikset, eller sikkerhetsproblemer løst. For at du skal få utnytte\n" -"disse forbedringene kan du nå laste dem ned fra internett. Kryss av «%s»\n" -"dersom du har en fungerende internettforbindelse, eller «%s» dersom\n" -"du heller vil installere oppdateringene senere.\n" -"\n" -"Når du velger «%s» får du en liste over tjenere som oppdateringene kan\n" -"lastes ned fra. Velg en som er nærmest deg. Et pakkevalgstre vil da\n" -"dukke opp. Gå gjennom valgene, og klikk «%s» for å hente og installere\n" -"de(n) valgte pakkene(ne), eller «%s» for å avbryte." +"Før du installerer Mageia, er det sannsynlig at noen pakker har blitt " +"oppdatert siden den første utgivelsen. Feil kan ha blitt fikset, " +"sikkerhetsproblemer løst. For å la deg dra nytte av disse oppdateringene, " +"kan du nå laste dem ned fra Internett. Sjekk \"%s\" hvis du\n" +"har en fungerende Internett-tilkobling, eller \"\"%s hvis du foretrekker å " +"installere oppdaterte pakker senere.\n" +"\n" +"Hvis du velger \"%s\" vil du vise en liste over nettplasseringer som " +"oppdateringer kan fra bli hentet. Du bør velge en nær deg. Et tre for " +"pakkevalg vil vises: gå gjennom utvalget, og trykk \"%s\" for å hente og " +"installere den(ne) valgte pakken(e), eller \"%s\" for å avbryte." #: ../help.pm:450 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, DrakX will allow you to choose the security level you desire\n" "for your machine. As a rule of thumb, the security level should be set\n" @@ -1072,19 +1056,18 @@ msgid "" "Fill the \"%s\" field with the e-mail address of the person responsible for\n" "security. Security messages will be sent to that address." msgstr "" -"På dette punktet vil DrakX la deg velge sikkerhetsnivået som er ønsket for\n" -"maskinen. Som en tommelfingerregel bør sikkerhetsnivået settes høyere,\n" -"hvis maskinen skal ha viktige data lagret der, eller hvis den skal være\n" -"direkte tilgjengelig på internettet. Men, et høyere sikkerhetsnivå går \n" -"gjerne på bekostning av brukervennligheten.\n" -"\n" -"Hvis du ikke vet hva du skal velge, behold standardvalget. Du vil kunne\n" -"endre sikkerhetsnivået senere med verktøyet draksec fra Mageia\n" +"På dette tidspunktet lar DrakX deg velge sikkerhetsnivået du ønsker\n" +"for maskinen din. Som en tommelfingerregel bør sikkerhetsnivået settes " +"høyere hvis maskinen skal inneholde kritiske data, eller om den skal være " +"direkte eksponert mot Internett. Avveiningen om et høyere sikkerhetsnivå er " +"vanligvis oppnådd på bekostning av brukervennlighet.\n" +"\n" +"Hvis du ikke vet hva du skal velge, beholder du standardalternativet. Du vil " +"kunne endre det senere med draksec-verktøyet, som er en del av Mageia " "Kontrollsenter.\n" "\n" -"'%s'-feltet kan informere systemet om den bruker på systemet som\n" -"vil være ansvarlig for sikkerheten. Sikkerhetsbeskjeder vil bli sendt til\n" -"denne adressen." +"Fyll \"%s\"-feltet med e-postadressen til den ansvarlige for sikkerhet. " +"Sikkerhetsmeldinger vil bli sendt til den adressen." #: ../help.pm:461 #, c-format @@ -1092,23 +1075,26 @@ msgid "Security Administrator" msgstr "Sikkerhetsadministrator" #: ../help.pm:464 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1131,7 +1117,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1139,7 +1126,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1158,107 +1146,94 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" -"På dette punktet må du velge hvilke partisjon(er) som skal brukes til å\n" -"installere ditt nye Mageia-system på. Hvis partisjoner allerede har\n" -"blitt definert enten fra en tidligere installasjon av GNU/Linux eller fra et " +"På dette tidspunktet må du velge hvilken(e) partisjon(er) som skal brukes " +"til\n" +"installasjonen av ditt Mageia-system. Hvis partisjoner allerede har vært\n" +"definert, enten fra en tidligere installasjon av GNU/Linux eller av et " "annet\n" -"partisjoneringsverktøy, kan du bruke eksisterende partisjoner. I andre\n" -"tilfeller må harddiskpartisjoner defineres.\n" +"partisjoneringsverktøy, kan du bruke eksisterende partisjoner. Ellers må " +"disk\n" +"partisjoner defineres.\n" "\n" -"For å opprette partisjoner må du først velge en harddisk. Du kan velge disk\n" -"for partisjonering ved å klikke på ``hda'' for den første IDE-disken,\n" -"``hdb'' for den andre eller ``sda'' for den første SCSI-disken osv.\n" +"For å lage partisjoner må du først velge en harddisk. Du kan velge disken " +"for partisjonering ved å klikke på ``hda'' for den første IDE-stasjonen," +"``hdb'' for den andre, ``sda'' for den første SCSI-stasjonen og så videre.\n" "\n" -"For å partisjonere den valgte harddisken kan du bruke disse valgene:\n" +"For å partisjonere den valgte harddisken kan du bruke disse alternativene:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": dette valget sletter alle partisjoner tilgjengelig på den valgte " -"harddisken.\n" +"* \"%s\": dette alternativet sletter alle partisjoner på den valgte " +"harddisken\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": dette valget lar deg automatisk opprette ext3 og\n" -"swappartisjoner på din harddisk's ledige plass.\n" +"* \"%s\": dette alternativet lar deg automatisk opprette ext4 og bytte\n" +"partisjoner i den ledige plassen på harddisken\n" "\n" -"\"%s\": gir deg tilgang til ekstra finesser:\n" +"\"%s\": gir tilgang til tilleggsfunksjoner:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\":lagrer partisjonstabellen din på en diskett. Nyttig hvis " -"partisjonen\n" -"trengs å gjenopprettes senere. Det anbefales på det sterkeste at du utfører " -"dette trinn.\n" +"* \"%s\": lagrer partisjonstabellen til en diskett. Nyttig for senere " +"gjenoppretting av partisjonstabell om nødvendig. Det anbefales på det " +"sterkeste at du utfører dette trinnet.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": gir deg muligheten til å gjenopprette en tidligere lagret " -"partisjonstabell\n" -"fra en diskett.\n" +"* \"%s\": lar deg gjenopprette en tidligere lagret partisjonstabell fra en " +"diskett.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": hvis partisjonstabellen din er skadet kan du forsøke å redde den " -"ved å\n" -"bruke dette valget. Vær forsiktig og husk at det kan gå galt.\n" +"* \"%s\": hvis partisjonstabellen din er skadet, kan du prøve å gjenopprette " +"den\n" +"ved å bruke dette alternativet. Vær forsiktig og husk at det ikke alltid " +"fungerer\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": ignorerer alle forandringer og laster inn harddiskens " -"opprinnelige\n" -"partisjonstabell på nytt.\n" +"* \"%s\": forkaster alle endringer og laster inn partisjonstabellen som var\n" +"opprinnelig på harddisken.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": ved å sjekke vekk dette valget, så vil brukere bli nødt til å " -"manuelt montere\n" -"og avmontere flyttbare medium som disketter og CDer.\n" +"* \"%s\": fjerner du merket for dette alternativet tvinges brukere til å " +"montere, og manuelt\n" +"demonter flyttbare medier som disketter og CD-ROMer.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": bruk dette valget om du vil bruke en veiviser for å partisjonere\n" -"harddisken din. Dette er anbefalt om du ikke har gode nok kunnskaper om\n" +"* \"%s\": bruk dette alternativet hvis du ønsker å bruke en veiviser for å " +"partisjonere\n" +"harddisken din. Dette anbefales hvis du ikke har god forståelse for " "partisjonering.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": du kan bruke dette valget til å forkaste endringene dine.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": gir deg ekstra valg under partisjoneringen (type, instillinger, " -"format)\n" -"og gir deg mere informasjon om harddisken.\n" +"* \"%s\": bruk dette alternativet for å avbryte endringene.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": når du er ferdig med å partisjonere harddisken din, så bruk dette " -"valget\n" -"for å lagre endringene dine på disken.\n" +"* \"%s\": tillater flere handlinger på partisjoner (type, alternativer, " +"format) og gir mer informasjon om harddisken.\n" "\n" -"Når du definerer størrelsen på en partisjon, så kan du finjustere størrelsen " -"med\n" -"piltastene på tastaturet ditt.\n" +"* \"%s\": når du er ferdig med å partisjonere harddisken, vil dette\n" +"lagre endringene tilbake til disken.\n" "\n" -"Merk: du kan nå valgene ved å bruke tastaturet. . Naviger gjennom " -"partisjonene ved å bruke [Tab] og [Opp/Ned]-piltastene.\n" +"Når du definerer størrelsen på en partisjon, kan du fint angi partisjonen\n" +"størrelse ved å bruke piltastene på tastaturet.\n" "\n" -"Når en partisjon er valgt kan du bruke:\n" +"Merk: du kan nå alle alternativer ved å bruke tastaturet. Naviger gjennom\n" +"partisjoner ved å bruke [Tab] og [Opp/Ned]-pilene.\n" "\n" -" * Ctrl-c for å opprette en ny partisjon (når en tom partisjon er valgt).\n" +"Når en partisjon er valgt, kan du bruke:\n" "\n" -" * Ctrl-d for å slette en partisjon.\n" +"* Ctrl-c for å opprette en ny partisjon (når en tom partisjon er valgt)\n" "\n" -" * Ctrl-m for å sette monteringspunktet.\n" +"* Ctrl-d for å slette en partisjon\n" "\n" -"For å få informasjon om de forskjellige filsystemene som er tilgjengelige,\n" -"vennlist les ext2FS-kapittelet fra ``Reference Manual''.\n" +"* Ctrl-m for å angi monteringspunktet\n" "\n" -"Hvis du installerer på en PPC-maskin, så vil du nok lage en liten\n" -"HFS-'bootstrap-partisjon' på minst en megabyte for bruk av\n" -"yaboot-oppstartslasteren. Hvis du ønsker å lage partisjonen litt større,\n" -"la oss si 50 MB, så kan du lagre en ekstra kjerne og ramdiskbilde for " -"nødsituasjoner." +"For å få informasjon om de forskjellige filsystemtypene som er " +"tilgjengelige, vennligst\n" +"les ext2FS-kapittelet fra ``Reference Manual''.\n" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Save partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Lagre partisjonstabell" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Restore partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Gjenopprett partisjonstabell" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Rescue partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Redningspartisjonstabell" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1268,12 +1243,12 @@ msgstr "Automontering av fjernbart media" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Wizard" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Veiviser" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Undo" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Angre" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1281,22 +1256,26 @@ msgid "Toggle between normal/expert mode" msgstr "Skift mellom normal-/ekspert-modus" #: ../help.pm:536 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1307,42 +1286,44 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" -"Mer enn en Microsoft Windows-partisjon har blitt oppdaget på harddisken " -"din.\n" -"Velg den du ønsker å endre størrelsen på for å installere ditt nye\n" -"Mageia-operativsystem.\n" +"Mer enn én Microsoft-partisjon har blitt oppdaget på harddisken.\n" +"Vennligst velg den du vil endre størrelsen på for å installere det nye\n" +"Operativsystemet Mageia.\n" "\n" -"Hver partisjon er listet som følger: \"Linux-navn\",\n" -" \"Windows-navn\", \"Kapasitet\".\n" +"Hver partisjon er oppført som følger: \"Linux-navn\", \"Windows-navn\"\n" +"\"Kapasitet\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux-navn\" er kodet som følger: \"harddisktype\", \"harddisknummer\",\n" -"\"partisjonsnummer\" (f.eks., \"hda1\").\n" +"\"Linux-navn\" er strukturert: \"harddiskstasjonstype\", " +"\"harddiskstasjonsnummer\",\n" +"\"partisjonsnummer\" (for eksempel \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Harddisktype\" er \"hd\" hvis harddisken din er en IDE harddisk og\n" -"\"sd\" hvis det er en SCSI harddisk.\n" +"\"Harddisk drive type\" er \"hd\" hvis harddisken din er en IDE-harddisk og\n" +"\"sd\" hvis det er en SCSI-harddisk.\n" "\n" -"\"Harddisknummer\" er alltid en bokstav etter \"hd\" eller \"sd\". Med\n" -"IDE-harddisker:\n" +"\"Harddisknummer\" er alltid en bokstav etter \"hd\" eller \"sd\". Med IDE\n" +"harddisker:\n" "\n" -" * \"a\" betyr \"master-harddisk på primær IDE kontroller\",\n" +"* \"a\" betyr \"hovedharddisk på den primære IDE-kontrolleren\";\n" "\n" -" * \"b\" betyr \"slave-harddisk på primær IDE kontroller\",\n" +"* \"b\" betyr \"slave-harddisk på den primære IDE-kontrolleren\";\n" "\n" -" * \"c\" betyr \"master-harddisk på sekundær IDE kontroller\",\n" +"* \"c\" betyr \"hovedharddisk på den sekundære IDE-kontrolleren\";\n" "\n" -" * \"d\" betyr \"slave-harddisk på sekundær IDE kontroller\".\n" +"* \"d\" betyr \"slave-harddisk på den sekundære IDE-kontrolleren\".\n" "\n" -"Med SCSI-harddisker betyr en \"a\" en \"primær harddisk\", en \"b\" betyr " -"\"sekundær harddisk\", osv.\n" +"Med SCSI-harddisker betyr en \"a\" \"laveste SCSI-ID\", en \"b\" betyr\n" +"\"nest laveste SCSI ID\" osv.\n" "\n" "\"Windows-navn\" er bokstaven på harddisken din under Windows (den første\n" -"disken eller partisjonen er kalt \"C:\")." +"disk eller partisjon kalles \"C:\")." #: ../help.pm:567 #, c-format @@ -1358,7 +1339,7 @@ msgstr "" " over land." #: ../help.pm:572 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "This step is activated only if an existing GNU/Linux partition has been\n" "found on your machine.\n" @@ -1369,7 +1350,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1381,28 +1363,32 @@ msgid "" "running version \"8.1\" or later. Performing an upgrade on versions prior\n" "to Mageia version \"8.1\" is not recommended." msgstr "" -"Dette trinnet blir bare aktivert dersom det blir funnet en eksisterende\n" -"GNU/Linux-partisjon på maskinen din.\n" -"\n" -"DrakX trenger nå å vite om du vil utføre en ny installasjon eller en " -"oppgradering\n" -"av et eksisterende Mageia-system:\n" -"\n" -" * «%s»: Dette vil stort sett slette hele det gamle systemet. Dersom du\n" -"ønsker å forandre hvordan harddiskene blir partisjonert, eller forandre på\n" -"filsystemene, bør du velge dette. Men avhengig av hvordan du partisjonerer " -"kan\n" -"du avverge at noen av de gamle dataene blir overskrevet.\n" -"\n" -" * «%s»: Denne installasjonsklassen lar deg oppgradere pakkene som\n" -"er installert på ditt nåværende Mageia-system. Dine nåværende\n" -"partisjonsoppdelinger og brukerdata blir ikke berørt. De fleste andre " -"oppsettstrinn\n" -"forblir tilgjengelige, i likhet med en standard installasjon.\n" -"\n" -"«Oppgrader»-valget bør fungere fint på Mageia systemer som kjører\n" -"versjon «8.1» eller nyere. Oppgradering av versjoner tidligere enn «8.1» er\n" -" ikke anbefalt. " +"Dette trinnet aktiveres bare hvis en eksisterende GNU/Linux-partisjon har " +"blitt\n" +"funnet på maskinen din.\n" +"\n" +"DrakX trenger nå å vite om du vil utføre en ny installasjon eller en\n" +"oppgradering av et eksisterende Mageia-system:\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\". For det meste utsletter dette det gamle systemet fullstendig.\n" +"Avhengig av partisjoneringsskjemaet ditt kan du imidlertid forhindre noen " +"av\n" +"dine eksisterende data (spesielt \"hjemmekataloger\") fra å bli " +"overskrevet.\n" +"Hvis du ønsker å endre hvordan harddiskstasjonene er partisjonert, eller å " +"endre\n" +"filsystemet, bør du bruke dette alternativet.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\". Denne installasjonsklassen lar deg oppdatere pakkene\n" +"installert på ditt Mageia-system. Din nåværende partisjonering\n" +"skjema og brukerdata vil ikke bli endret. Det meste av den andre " +"konfigurasjonen\n" +"trinn forblir tilgjengelige og ligner på en standardinstallasjon.\n" +"\n" +"Å bruke alternativet \"Oppgradering\" bør fungere fint på Mageia-systemer\n" +"kjører versjon \"8.1\" eller nyere. Utføre en oppgradering på tidligere " +"versjoner\n" +"til Mageia versjon \"8.1\" anbefales ikke." #: ../help.pm:594 #, c-format @@ -1445,7 +1431,7 @@ msgstr "" "som vil bytte mellom latin og ikke-latinsk tastaturoppsett." #: ../help.pm:612 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The first step is to choose your preferred language.\n" "\n" @@ -1489,46 +1475,48 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Det første trinnet er å velge ditt foretrukne språk.\n" "\n" -"Ditt valg av foretrukket språk vil påvirke språket til dokumentasjonen,\n" -"installasjonsrutinen og systemet generelt. Velg først regionen du befinner\n" -"deg i, og deretter språket du bruker.\n" +"Ditt valg av foretrukket språk vil påvirke installasjonsprogrammet\n" +"dokumentasjon og systemet generelt. Velg først regionen du er i, deretter " +"språket du snakker.\n" "\n" -"Om du klikker på «%s»-knappen får du mulighet til å velge andre\n" -"språk som du ønsker å installere på din arbeidsstasjon. Du installerer da\n" -"samtidig de språkspesifikke filene for systemdokumentasjon og\n" -"applikasjoner. Hvis du ønsker norsk som standardspråk, men også\n" -"ønsker å tilrettelegge for spanske brukere på maskinen, kan du velge\n" -"norsk som standardspråk i trevisningen, og «%s» i det avanserte avsnitt.\n" +"Ved å klikke på \"%s\"-knappen kan du velge andre språksom skal\n" +"installeres på arbeidsstasjonen din, og installerer derved de " +"språkspesifikke\n" +"filer for systemdokumentasjon og applikasjonene. For eksempel hvis spanske\n" +"brukere skal bruke maskinen din, velg engelsk som standardspråk på\n" +"trevisningen og \"%s\" i Avansert-delen.\n" "\n" -"Om UTF-8 (ISO 10646) støtte. ISO 10646 er en ny tegnsettskoding det\n" -"er ment til å dekke alle eksisterende språk. Men full støtte for det i GNU/" -"Linux er\n" -"stadig under utvikling. Av denne grunnen vil Mageia bruke det\n" -"eller ei avhengig av brukerens valg:\n" +"Om UTF-8 (unicode) støtte: Unicode er en ny tegnkoding ment å\n" +"dekker alle eksisterende språk. Men full støtte for det i GNU/Linux er\n" +"fortsatt under utvikling. Av den grunn vil Mageias bruk av UTF-8\n" +"avhenger av brukerens valg:\n" "\n" -" * Hvis du velger et språk med sterk binding til gammel kodnng (latin1-\n" +"* Hvis du velger et språk med en sterk eldre koding (latin1\n" "språk, russisk, japansk, kinesisk, koreansk, thai, gresk, tyrkisk, de " "fleste\n" -"ISO-8859-2-språk) vil den gamle kodingen bli brukt som standard;\n" +"iso-8859-2 språk), vil den eldre kodingen brukes som standard;\n" "\n" -"Andre språk vil bruke ISO 10646 som standard;\n" +"* Andre språk vil bruke unicode som standard;\n" "\n" -" * Hvis to eller flere språk er krevd, og ikke disse språk bruker samme " -"koding,\n" -"vil ISO 10646 bli brukt for hele systemet;\n" +"* Hvis to eller flere språk kreves, og disse språkene ikke brukes\n" +"den samme kodingen, så vil unicode brukes for hele systemet;\n" "\n" -" * Endelig kan ISO 10646 også bli påtvunget systemet ved brukervalg\n" -"ved å velge '%s'-valget uavhengig av hvilke språk som er valgt.\n" +"* Til slutt kan unicode også tvinges til bruk i hele systemet på en\n" +"brukerens forespørsel ved å velge alternativet \"%s\" uavhengig av hvilket\n" +"språk som ble valgt.\n" "\n" -"Legg merke til at du ikke er begrenset til et enkelt tilleggsspråk. Du\n" -"kan velge flere, eller til og med alle ved å sjekke av i «%s»-boksen.\n" -"Valg av språkstøtte betyr at oversettelser, skrifttyper, stavekontroller,\n" -"osv. for språket også vil bli installert.\n" +"Merk at du ikke er begrenset til å velge ett enkelt ekstra språk. Du\n" +"kan velge flere, eller til og med installere dem alle ved å velge \"%s\"-" +"boksen.\n" +"Å velge støtte for et språk betyr oversettelser, fonter, stavekontroller,\n" +"etc. vil også bli installert for det språket.\n" "\n" -"For å bytte mellom de installerte språkene på systemet, kan du starte\n" -"programmet «/usr/sbin/localedrake» som «root» for å bytte språket som\n" -"systemet bruker. Dersom dette programmet kjøres under en vanlig bruker,\n" -"vil bare språket for denne brukeren endres." +"For å bytte mellom de forskjellige språkene som er installert på systemet " +"ditt, kan du\n" +"start \"localedrake\"-kommandoen som \"root\" for å endre språket som " +"brukes\n" +"av hele systemet. Å kjøre kommandoen som en vanlig bruker vil bare\n" +"endre språkinnstillingene for den aktuelle brukeren." #: ../help.pm:650 #, c-format @@ -1538,7 +1526,7 @@ msgstr "Spansk" #: ../help.pm:643 #, c-format msgid "Use Unicode by default" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Bruk Unicode som standard" #: ../help.pm:646 #, c-format @@ -1673,7 +1661,7 @@ msgstr "" "hvis du vet hva du gjør." #: ../help.pm:745 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Now, it's time to select a printing system for your computer. Other\n" "operating systems may offer you one, but Mageia offers two. Each of\n" @@ -1700,33 +1688,34 @@ msgid "" "system you may change it by running PrinterDrake from the Mageia\n" "Control Center and clicking on the \"%s\" button." msgstr "" -"Nå er det på tide å velge utskriftsystemet for din maskin. Andre\n" -"operativsystemer tilbyr kanskje en, men Mageia tilbyr to.\n" -"Hvert av systemene er best for et spesiell type oppsett.\n" -"\n" -" * «%s» -- som står for ``print, do not queue'', er valget hvis du har en\n" -"direkte tilkobling til din printer og du vil ha muligheten til å flykte fra\n" -"printerkræsj, og du ikke har nettverksskrivere. («%s» vil bare håndtere\n" -"veldig enkle nettverkstilfeller og er nogenlunde treg for nettverk.) Det er\n" -"anbefalt at du bruker «pdq» hvis dette er din første erfaring med GNU/Linux.\n" -"\n" -" * «%s» står for ``Common Unix Printing System'', er perfekt til å skrive " -"til\n" -"din egen lokale skriver, og også til skrivere på andre siden av kloden.\n" -"Den er simpel og kan opptrå som både skriver og klient for det " -"forhistoriske\n" -"«lpd»-utskriftssystemet, så den er kompatibel med de eldre operativsystemer\n" -"som fortsatt trenger utskriftstjenester. Selv om den er ganske kraftig, så " -"er\n" -"basisoppsettet nesten like enkelt som «pdq». Hvis du trenger å emulere en\n" -"«lpd»-tjener, må du slå på «cups-lpd»-tjenesten. «%s» inkluderer et grafisk " -"grensesnitt for utskrift eller oppsett av skriver og styring av skriver.\n" -"\n" -"Hvis du gjør et valg nå, og så senere finner ut at du ikke liker ditt " -"utskriftssystem,\n" -"så kan du endre det ved å kjøre PrinterDrake fra Mageia " -"Kontrollsenter og\n" -"klikke på «%s»-knappen. " +"Nå er det på tide å velge et utskriftssystem for datamaskinen. Andre\n" +"operativsystemer kan tilby deg ett, men Mageia tilbyr to. Hver av\n" +"utskriftssystemene er best egnet til bestemte typer konfigurasjoner.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\" -- som er et akronym for \"skriv ut, ikke kø\" er valget\n" +"hvis du har en direkte tilkobling til skriveren din, og du vil kunne\n" +"panikk avbryte skriverstopp, og ikke har nettverksskrivere. (\"%s\"\n" +"vil kun håndtere svært enkle nettverkstilfeller og er noe treg når den " +"brukes\n" +"innenfor et nettverk.) Det anbefales at du bruker \"pdq\" hvis dette er din\n" +"første erfaring med GNU/Linux.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\" står for `` Common Unix Printing System'' og er et utmerket\n" +"valg for utskrift til din lokale skriver eller til en annen skriver " +"halvveis rundt\n" +"verden. Den er enkel å konfigurere og kan fungere som en server eller klient " +"for\n" +"det gamle \"lpd\"-utskriftssystemet, så det er kompatibelt med eldre\n" +"operativsystemer som fortsatt trenger utskriftstjenester. Det er kraftfult. " +"Grunnoppsettet er nesten like enkelt som \"pdq\". Hvis du trenger detkan " +"du \n" +"emulere en \"lpd\"-server, sørg for at du slår på \"cups-lpd\"-demonen.\n" +"\"%s\" inkluderer grafiske frontender for utskrift eller valg av skriver\n" +"alternativer og for å administrere skriveren.\n" +"\n" +"Hvis du tar et valg nå, og senere finner ut at du ikke liker " +"utskriftssystemet kan du endre det ved å kjøre PrinterDrake fra Mageia\n" +"Kontrollsenter og klikk på \"%s\"-knappen." #: ../help.pm:768 #, c-format @@ -1736,7 +1725,7 @@ msgstr "pdq" #: ../help.pm:724 #, c-format msgid "CUPS" -msgstr "" +msgstr "CUPS" #: ../help.pm:724 #, c-format @@ -1795,7 +1784,7 @@ msgstr "" "å velge en annen driver." #: ../help.pm:794 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "As a review, DrakX will present a summary of information it has gathered\n" "about your system. Depending on the hardware installed on your machine, you\n" @@ -1858,86 +1847,81 @@ msgid "" "on your machine. If you plan to use this machine as a server it's a good\n" "idea to review this setup." msgstr "" -"Som en oppsummering vil DrakX gi deg en oversikt over informasjon som\n" -"den har om systemet ditt. Avhengig av installert maskinvare, kan du ha et\n" -"eller flere av de følgende punktene. Hvert punkt består av en overskrift " -"fulgt\n" -"av en kort oppsummering av det nåværende oppsettet. Klikk på\n" -"den korresponderende «%s»-knappen for å endre på det.\n" -"\n" -" * «%s»: sjekk ditt gjeldende tastaturoppsett og endre om nødvendig.\n" -"\n" -" * «%s»: sjekk ditt gjeldende valg av land. Hvis du ikke er i dette landet,\n" -"klikk på «%s»-knappen og velg et annet land. Hvis landet ditt ikke er i\n" -"den først viste listen, klikk «%s»-knappen for å få en fullstendig liste over " -"land.\n" -"\n" -" ' «%s»\": som standard bestemmer DrakX din tidssone ut i fra hvilket land " -"du\n" -"har valgt. Du kan klikke på «%s»-knappen her om dette ikke er korrekt.\n" -"\n" -" * «%s» :sjekk det gjeldende museoppsettet og klikk på knappen for å endre\n" -"om nødvendig.\n" -"\n" -" * «%s»: ved å klikke på «%s»-knappen åpnes skriveroppsett-veiviseren.\n" -"Konsulter det tilhørende kapittelet i oppstartsguiden for mer\n" -"informasjon om hvordan en skriver kan settes opp. Grensesnittet som er vist\n" -"der er likt det som benyttes under installasjonen.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": hvis det er funnet et lydkort i ditt system, er det vist her. " -"Hvis du\n" -"finner ut at lydkortet som er vist ikke stemmer overens med det som faktisk " -"er\n" -"installert i din maskin, kan du klikke på knappen og velge en annen driver.\n" -"\n" -" * «%s»: hvis du har ett TV-kort, dette er der informasjonen om oppsettet til " -"det\n" -"vil blir vist. Hvis du har et TV-kort og det ikke er oppdaget, klikk på «%s»\n" -"for å forsøke å sette det opp manuelt\n" -"\n" -" * «%s»: Du kan klikke på «%s» for å forandre parameterene til kortet hvis du\n" -"syntes at oppsettet er feil.\n" -"\n" -" * «%s»: Vanligvis setter DrakX opp ditt grafiske grensesnitt i\n" -"«800x600» eller «1024x768» oppløsning. Hvis det ikke er det du vil ha\n" -"klikk på «%s« for å sette opp ditt grafiske grensesnitt.\n" -"\n" -" * «%s»: hvis du vil sette opp din internett- eller lokale " -"nettverkstilkobling\n" -"kan du gjøre det nå. Sjekk den utskrevne dokumentasjonen eller bruk\n" -"Mageia Kontrollsenter etter at installasjonen er ferdig for å\n" -"få full hjelp med oppsettet.\n" -"\n" -" * «%s»: lar deg sette opp HTTP og FTP mellomtjener-adresser hvis maskinen\n" -"du installerer på er bak en mellomtjener.\n" -"\n" -" * «%s»: dette valget lar deg omdefinere sikkerhetsnivået som ble satt i et " -"tidligere\n" -"steg ().\n" -"\n" -" * «%s»: hvis du planlegger å koble din maskin til internett er det en god " -"idé\n" -"å beskytte deg selv fra inntrengere ved å sette opp en brannmur. Se den\n" -"korresponderende seksjonen i ``Starter Guiden\" for detaljer om brannmur\n" -"innstillinger.\n" -"\n" -" * «%s»: dersom du ønsker å endre ditt oppstartslaster-oppsett, klikk på " +"Som en gjennomgang vil DrakX presentere et sammendrag av informasjonen den " +"har samlet inn\n" +"om systemet ditt. Avhengig av maskinvaren som er installert på maskinen din, " +"kan du\n" +"kan ha noen eller alle av følgende oppføringer. Hver oppføring består av\n" +"maskinvareelement som skal konfigureres, etterfulgt av et kort sammendrag av " +"gjeldende\n" +"konfigurasjon. Klikk på den tilsvarende \"%s\"-knappen for å gjøre " +"endringen.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": sjekk gjeldende tastaturkartkonfigurasjon og endre den hvis\n" +"nødvendig.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": kontroller gjeldende landvalg. Hvis du ikke vil ha dette\n" +"landet, klikk på \"%s\"-knappen og velg et annet. Hvis landet ditt\n" +"ikke er i listen som vises, klikk på \"%s\"-knappen for å få den komplette\n" +"landliste.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": som standard utleder DrakX tidssonen din basert på landet\n" +"du har valgt. Du kan klikke på \"%s\"-knappen hvis dette ikke er\n" +"korrekt.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": bekreft gjeldende musekonfigurasjon og klikk på knappen\n" +"for å endre den om nødvendig.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": hvis det oppdages et lydkort på systemet ditt, vil det vises\n" +"her. Hvis lydkortet ikke er det som faktisk finnes på\n" +"systemet ditt, kan du klikke på knappen og velge en annen driver.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": hvis du har et TV-kort, vises informasjon om\n" +"konfigurasjonen her. Hvis du har et TV-kort og det ikke\n" +"oppdages, klikk på \"%s\" for å prøve å konfigurere den manuelt.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": du kan klikke på \"%s\" for å endre parameterne knyttet til\n" +"kortet hvis du mener at konfigurasjonen er feil.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": som standard konfigurerer DrakX ditt grafiske grensesnitt i\n" +"\"800x600\" eller \"1024x768\" oppløsning. Hvis det ikke passer deg, klikk " +"videre\n" +"\"%s\" for å rekonfigurere det grafiske grensesnittet ditt.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": hvis du ønsker å konfigurere Internett- eller " +"lokalnettverkstilgang,\n" +"du kan gjøre det nå. Se den trykte dokumentasjonen eller bruk\n" +"Mageia Control Center etter at installasjonen er fullført.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": lar deg konfigurere HTTP- og FTP-proxy-adresser hvis maskinen\n" +"du installerer på skal være plassert bak en proxy-server.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": denne oppføringen lar deg omdefinere sikkerhetsnivået som angitt i " +"en\n" +"forrige trinn ().\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": hvis du planlegger å koble maskinen til Internett, er det en god\n" +"idé å beskytte deg selv mot inntrenging ved å sette opp en brannmur. " +"Konsultere\n" +"den tilsvarende delen av ``Starter Guide'' for detaljer om\n" +"brannmurinnstillinger.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": hvis du ønsker å endre oppstartslasterkonfigurasjonen, klikk på " "denne\n" -"knappen. Dette er kun for avanserte brukere. Sjekk den utskrevne " -"dokumentasjonen\n" -"eller innebygd hjelp om oppstartslaster-oppsettet i Mageia " -"Kontrollsenter.\n" +"knappen. Dette er forbeholdt avanserte brukere. Se den trykte\n" +"dokumentasjon eller in-line hjelpen om oppstartslasterkonfigurasjon i\n" +"Mageia kontrollsenter.\n" "\n" -" * «%s»: igjennom dette valget kan du finjustere hvilke tjenester som skal " -"kjøre på din\n" -"maskin. Hvis du planlegger å bruke maskinen som en tjener er det en god ide " -"å se\n" -"igjennom dette." +"* \"%s\": gjennom denne oppføringen kan du finjustere hvilke tjenester som " +"skal kjøres\n" +"på maskinen din. Hvis du planlegger å bruke denne maskinen som en server, er " +"det en god\n" +"idé å vurdere dette oppsettet." #: ../help.pm:809 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "TV card" -msgstr "ISDN-kort" +msgstr "TV-kort" #: ../help.pm:809 #, c-format @@ -1950,23 +1934,24 @@ msgid "Graphical Interface" msgstr "Grafisk grensesnitt" #: ../help.pm:861 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Choose the hard disk drive you want to erase in order to install your new\n" "Mageia partition. Be careful, all data on this drive will be lost\n" "and will not be recoverable!" msgstr "" -"Velg den harddisken du ønsker å slette for å installere din nye\n" -"Mageia-partisjon. Vær forsiktig, alle data på denne partisjonen vil " -"gå tapt\n" +"Velg harddisken du vil slette for å installere den nye\n" +"Mageia partisjon. Vær forsiktig, alle data på denne stasjonen vil gå tapt\n" "og vil ikke kunne gjenopprettes!" #: ../help.pm:866 #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" @@ -1989,113 +1974,3 @@ msgstr "Neste ->" #, c-format msgid "<- Previous" msgstr "<- Forrige" - -#~ msgid "" -#~ "\"%s\": clicking on the \"%s\" button will open the printer " -#~ "configuration\n" -#~ "wizard. Consult the corresponding chapter of the ``Starter Guide'' for " -#~ "more\n" -#~ "information on how to set up a new printer. The interface presented in " -#~ "our\n" -#~ "manual is similar to the one used during installation." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "«%s»: Klikk på «%s»-knappen for å åpne skriverveiviseren.\n" -#~ "Konsulter det korresponderende kapitlet i oppstartsguiden for mer\n" -#~ "informasjon om hvordan du setter opp en skriver. Grensesnittet som\n" -#~ "brukes her er tilsvarende det som benyttes under installasjon." - -#~ msgid "" -#~ "This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your GNU/" -#~ "Linux\n" -#~ "system: you must enter the \"root\" password. \"Root\" is the system\n" -#~ "administrator and is the only user authorized to make updates, add " -#~ "users,\n" -#~ "change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short, \"root\" " -#~ "can\n" -#~ "do everything! That's why you must choose a password which is difficult " -#~ "to\n" -#~ "guess: DrakX will tell you if the password you chose is too simple. As " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "can see, you're not forced to enter a password, but we strongly advise\n" -#~ "against this. GNU/Linux is just as prone to operator error as any other\n" -#~ "operating system. Since \"root\" can overcome all limitations and\n" -#~ "unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly accessing the\n" -#~ "partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to become\n" -#~ "\"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password should be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and at least " -#~ "8\n" -#~ "characters long. Never write down the \"root\" password -- it makes it " -#~ "far\n" -#~ "too easy to compromise your system.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "One caveat: do not make the password too long or too complicated because " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "must be able to remember it!\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password will not be displayed on screen as you type it. To reduce " -#~ "the\n" -#~ "chance of a blind typing error you'll need to enter the password twice. " -#~ "If\n" -#~ "you do happen to make the same typing error twice, you'll have to use " -#~ "this\n" -#~ "``incorrect'' password the first time you'll try to connect as \"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you want an authentication server to control access to your computer,\n" -#~ "click on the \"%s\" button.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If your network uses either LDAP, NIS, or PDC Windows Domain " -#~ "authentication\n" -#~ "services, select the appropriate one for \"%s\". If you do not know " -#~ "which\n" -#~ "one to use, you should ask your network administrator.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you happen to have problems with remembering passwords, or if your\n" -#~ "computer will never be connected to the Internet and you absolutely " -#~ "trust\n" -#~ "everybody who uses your computer, you can choose to have \"%s\"." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Dette er det mest kritisike valget med hensyn til sikkerheten på ditt\n" -#~ "GNU/Linux-system: du må skrive inn «root»-passordet. «Root» er\n" -#~ "systemadministratoren og er den eneste som er autorisert til å gjøre\n" -#~ "oppdateringer, legge til brukere, endre på generellt oppsett, etc.\n" -#~ "Kort sagt, «root» kan gjøre alt! Derfor er det viktig at du velger et\n" -#~ "root-passord som er vanskelig å gjette -- DrakX vil si i fra hvis det er\n" -#~ "for enkelt. Som du ser, så kan du velge å ikke skrive inn noe passord,\n" -#~ "men det er noe vi anbefaler på det sterkeste å ikke gjøre. Man kan lage\n" -#~ "feil på GNU/Linux så lett som på ethvert annet operativsystem.\n" -#~ "Siden «root» kan omgå alle begrensninger og ved uhell kan slette\n" -#~ "alle data på en partisjon ved ubetenksomt bare å røre partisjonene selv,\n" -#~ "så er det viktig å gjøre det vanskelig å bli «root».\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Passordet bør være en blanding av alfanummeriske tegn og være på minst 8\n" -#~ "tegn. Aldri skriv ned «roo»\"-passordet -- det gjør det for enkelt å bryte " -#~ "seg\n" -#~ "inn på systemet ditt. \n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Uansett -- du bør ikke lage passordet for langt og komplisert siden du " -#~ "må \n" -#~ "være i stand til å huske det uten altfor mye trøbbel.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Passordet vil ikke bli vist på skjermen når du skriver det. Dermed må du\n" -#~ "skrive inn passordet to ganger for å minske sjansen for å skrive feil. " -#~ "Hvis\n" -#~ "du klarer å skrive passordet feil to ganger, så må dette ``feilaktige'' " -#~ "passordet\n" -#~ "bli brukt første gang du logger inn.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Hvis du ønsker å autentisere deg via en autentiserings-tjener, klikk på\n" -#~ "«%s»-knappen.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Hvis nettverket ditt bruker enten LDAP-, NIS- eller PDC Windows-\n" -#~ "domenepåloggingstjeneste, så velg det tilsvarende til\n" -#~ "«%s». Har du ingen anelse, så spørr nettverksadministratoren din.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Hvis du skulle ha problemer med å huske passord, hvis maskinen din aldri " -#~ "vil\n" -#~ "brukes for å koble til internett, eller at du stoler på absolutt alle som " -#~ "bruker din\n" -#~ "maskin, så kan du velge «%s»." - -#~ msgid "authentication" -#~ msgstr "autentisering" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/nl.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/nl.po index c11ed5dca..e3c6f38e4 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/nl.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/nl.po @@ -1,22 +1,21 @@ -# translation of DrakX-nl.po to Nederlands -# Dutch translation of DrakX. -# Copyright (c) 2000 Mandriva -# Copyright (c) 2011 Mageia -# Niels Gras <niels.gras@wanadoo.nl>, 2000. -# Jeroen ten Berge <j.ten.berge@twinbit.nl>, 2002. -# Reinout van Schouwen <reinout@cs.vu.nl>, 2002-2005. -# Peter Bosch <peter.bosch@hccnet.nl>, 2002. -# Rob Teng <mandrake.tips@free.fr>, 2005. -# Remco Rijnders <remco@webconquest.com>, 2011. +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) YEAR THE PACKAGE'S COPYRIGHT HOLDER +# This file is distributed under the same license as the PACKAGE package. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. # +# Translators: +# Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2024 +# +#, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: DrakX-nl\n" +"Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2008-09-12 12:22+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2011-05-01 14:15+0100\n" -"Last-Translator: Remco Rijnders <remco@webconquest.com>\n" -"Language-Team: Dutch <i18n-nl@ml.mageia.org>\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2024-09-04 17:33+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2024\n" +"Language-Team: Dutch (https://app.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/teams/9361/nl/)\n" +"Language: nl\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -41,7 +40,8 @@ msgstr "" msgid "" "GNU/Linux is a multi-user system which means each user can have his or her\n" "own preferences, own files and so on. But unlike \"root\", who is the\n" -"system administrator, the users you add at this point will not be authorized\n" +"system administrator, the users you add at this point will not be " +"authorized\n" "to change anything except their own files and their own configurations,\n" "protecting the system from unintentional or malicious changes which could\n" "impact on the system as a whole. You'll have to create at least one regular\n" @@ -75,7 +75,8 @@ msgid "" "security), choose the desired user and window manager, then click on\n" "\"%s\". If you're not interested in this feature, uncheck the \"%s\" box." msgstr "" -"GNU/Linux is een multi-gebruikerssysteem, dit betekent dat iedere gebruiker \n" +"GNU/Linux is een multi-gebruikerssysteem, dit betekent dat iedere " +"gebruiker \n" "haar eigen voorkeuren, bestanden enzovoort kan hebben. U kunt de \n" "''Beginnershandleiding'' lezen om hierover meer te weten te komen. Maar \n" "in tegenstelling tot \"root\", de beheerder, zullen de gebruikers die\n" @@ -98,7 +99,7 @@ msgstr "" "Desgewenst kunt u de voorgestelde gebruikersnaam veranderen.\n" "De volgende stap is het invoeren van een wachtwoord. Het \n" "wachtwoord van een (gewone) gebruiker zonder privileges is niet zo \n" -"cruciaal als dat van de \"root\"-gebruiker vanuit veiligheidsperspectief, \n" +"cruciaal als dat van de \"root\"-gebruiker vanuit beveiligingsperspectief, \n" "maar dat is geen reden om het te verwaarlozen door het leeg te laten of het\n" "te eenvoudig te maken: tenslotte staan uw bestanden op het spel.\n" "\n" @@ -135,7 +136,8 @@ msgstr "Wilt u van deze mogelijkheid gebruik maken?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -145,13 +147,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -162,7 +167,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Hier zijn de bestaande Linuxpartities afgebeeld die op uw harde\n" @@ -209,7 +215,8 @@ msgstr "" "De Mageia-installatie is verdeeld over meerdere CD-ROMs. Als een \n" "geselecteerd pakket te vinden is op een andere CD-ROM, zal het \n" "installatieprogramma de huidige CD uitwerpen en u vragen om de\n" -"correcte CD in te leggen. Mocht u de betreffende CD niet bij de hand hebben,\n" +"correcte CD in te leggen. Mocht u de betreffende CD niet bij de hand " +"hebben,\n" "klik dan gewoon op \"%s\", de corresponderende pakketten zullen dan niet\n" "worden geïnstalleerd." @@ -305,7 +312,8 @@ msgstr "" "omgeving kunt aangeven. Tenminste één moet geselecteerd zijn als u een\n" "grafische werkomgeving wilt hebben.\n" "\n" -"Bij het bewegen van de muispijl boven een groepnaam zal er een korte verklarende tekst over die groep getoond worden. \n" +"Bij het bewegen van de muispijl boven een groepnaam zal er een korte " +"verklarende tekst over die groep getoond worden. \n" "\n" "U kunt het \"%s\"-vakje aankruisen, wat nuttig is wanneer u bekend bent \n" "met de aangeboden pakketten of wanneer u volledige controle wilt hebben \n" @@ -320,7 +328,8 @@ msgstr "" "installatie (in tegenstelling tot opwaarderen), dan zal een dialoogvenster\n" "verschijnen met verscheidene opties voor een minimale installatie:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": installeert zo min mogelijk pakketten met behoud van een werkende grafische werkomgeving.\n" +" * \"%s\": installeert zo min mogelijk pakketten met behoud van een werkende " +"grafische werkomgeving.\n" " \n" " * \"%s\" installeert het basissysteem plus algemene hulpprogramma's\n" "en bijbehorende documentatie. Deze installatie is geschikt om een\n" @@ -331,8 +340,7 @@ msgstr "" "zult u slechts een opdrachtregelinterface hebben.\n" "Deze installatie is in totaal ongeveer 65 megabyte groot." -#: ../help.pm:149 -#: ../help.pm:591 +#: ../help.pm:149 ../help.pm:591 #, c-format msgid "Upgrade" msgstr "Opwaardering" @@ -365,7 +373,8 @@ msgid "" "services at boot time. Even if they are safe and have no known issues at\n" "the time the distribution was shipped, it is entirely possible that\n" "security holes were discovered after this version of Mageia was\n" -"finalized. If you do not know what a particular service is supposed to do or\n" +"finalized. If you do not know what a particular service is supposed to do " +"or\n" "why it's being installed, then click \"%s\". Clicking \"%s\" will install\n" "the listed services and they will be started automatically at boot time. !!\n" "\n" @@ -441,14 +450,16 @@ msgid "" "it is safer to leave the default behavior.\n" "\n" "!! At this stage, be very careful if you intend to use your machine as a\n" -"server: you probably do not want to start any services which you do not need.\n" +"server: you probably do not want to start any services which you do not " +"need.\n" "Please remember that some services can be dangerous if they're enabled on a\n" "server. In general, select only those services you really need. !!" msgstr "" "In dit dialoogvenster kunt u kiezen welke diensten u wenst te starten\n" "tijdens de opstartfase van uw computer.\n" "\n" -"Het installatieprogramma toont alle diensten die beschikbaar zijn in de huidige\n" +"Het installatieprogramma toont alle diensten die beschikbaar zijn in de " +"huidige\n" "installatie. Kijk ze aandachtig na en de-selecteer degenen die niet \n" "nodig zijn bij het opstarten.\n" "\n" @@ -588,10 +599,12 @@ msgid "" "not successful in getting the display configured." msgstr "" "X (voor X Window System) is het hart van de grafische interface van GNU/\n" -"Linux waarvan alle grafische omgevingen (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep, WindowMaker,\n" +"Linux waarvan alle grafische omgevingen (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep, " +"WindowMaker,\n" "etc.) die bij Mageia worden geleverd, afhankelijk zijn.\n" "\n" -"U krijgt een lijst te zien van verschillende parameters die u kunt aanpassen\n" +"U krijgt een lijst te zien van verschillende parameters die u kunt " +"aanpassen\n" "om een optimale grafische weergave te verkrijgen:\n" "Grafische kaart\n" "\n" @@ -632,7 +645,8 @@ msgstr "" "antwoordt, dan gaat de installatie door naar de volgende stap. Als u het \n" "bericht niet kunt zien, dan betekent dat dat een gedeelte van de gevonden\n" "configuratie niet klopt en zal de test automatisch na 12 seconden eindigen,\n" -"waarmee u terugkomt in het menu. Pas de instellingen aan totdat u een correcte grafische weergave krijgt.\n" +"waarmee u terugkomt in het menu. Pas de instellingen aan totdat u een " +"correcte grafische weergave krijgt.\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" @@ -707,13 +721,15 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -726,12 +742,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -748,12 +766,14 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"%s\". If you want to delete all data and all partitions present on\n" "your hard disk drive and replace them with your new Mageia system, choose\n" -"this option. Be careful, because you will not be able to undo this operation\n" +"this option. Be careful, because you will not be able to undo this " +"operation\n" "after you confirm.\n" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -795,7 +815,8 @@ msgstr "" "als u deze behoudt.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": indien Microsoft Windows\n" -"op uw harde schijf is geïnstalleerd en alle beschikbare ruimte in beslag neemt,\n" +"op uw harde schijf is geïnstalleerd en alle beschikbare ruimte in beslag " +"neemt,\n" "dient u vrije ruimte te creëren voor GNU/Linux. Om dat te doen, kunt u\n" "uw Microsoft Windows-partitie en -gegevens wissen (zie het punt\n" "``Gehele schijf wissen'') of uw Microsoft Windows FAT- of NTFS-partitie\n" @@ -816,14 +837,16 @@ msgstr "" "systeem, kiest u deze optie. Weest u voorzichtig met deze oplossing omdat u\n" "na bevestiging deze keuze niet meer ongedaan kunt maken.\n" "\n" -" !! Als u deze optie kiest, zullen alle gegevens op uw schijf verloren gaan. !!\n" +" !! Als u deze optie kiest, zullen alle gegevens op uw schijf verloren " +"gaan. !!\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": Deze optie verschijnt wanneer de harde schijf volledig in \n" "beslag genomen is door Microsoft Windows. Het kiezen van deze optie wist\n" "simpelweg alles op de schijf en begint van voren af aan met\n" "partitioneren.\n" "\n" -" !! Als u deze optie kiest, zullen alle gegevens op uw schijf verloren gaan. !!\n" +" !! Als u deze optie kiest, zullen alle gegevens op uw schijf verloren " +"gaan. !!\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": kies deze optie indien u handmatig\n" "uw harde schijf wenst te partitioneren. Weest u voorzichtig - het is een\n" @@ -951,7 +974,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Please note that it's not necessary to reformat all pre-existing\n" "partitions. You must reformat the partitions containing the operating\n" -"system (such as \"/\", \"/usr\" or \"/var\") but you do not have to reformat\n" +"system (such as \"/\", \"/usr\" or \"/var\") but you do not have to " +"reformat\n" "partitions containing data that you wish to keep (typically \"/home\").\n" "\n" "Please be careful when selecting partitions. After the formatting is\n" @@ -1061,18 +1085,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1095,7 +1122,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1103,7 +1131,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1122,12 +1151,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Op dit punt dient u te kiezen welke partitie(s) gebruikt zullen worden voor\n" "de installatie van uw Mageia systeem. Indien er reeds partities\n" @@ -1135,8 +1158,10 @@ msgstr "" "ander partitioneringsprogramma, kunt u bestaande partities gebruiken.\n" "In andere gevallen moeten er harde schijf-partities gedefinieerd worden.\n" "\n" -"Om partities te creëren, dient u eerst een harde schijf te kiezen. U kunt de\n" -"te partitioneren schijf selecteren door op \"hda\" te klikken voor de eerste\n" +"Om partities te creëren, dient u eerst een harde schijf te kiezen. U kunt " +"de\n" +"te partitioneren schijf selecteren door op \"hda\" te klikken voor de " +"eerste\n" "IDE-schijf, \"hdb\" voor de tweede, \"sda\" voor de eerste SCSI-schijf\n" "enzovoort.\n" "\n" @@ -1146,13 +1171,14 @@ msgstr "" " * \"%s\": deze optie verwijdert alle partities op de\n" "geselecteerde harde schijf.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": deze optie creëert automatisch ext3- en swap-\n" +" * \"%s\": deze optie creëert automatisch ext4- en swap-\n" "partities in de vrije ruimte op uw harde schijf.\n" "\n" " \"%s\": geeft toegang tot extra opties:\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": slaat de partitietabel op op een diskette. Nuttig om\n" -"later zonodig de partitietabel te herstellen. Het is sterk aanbevolen deze stap uit\n" +"later zonodig de partitietabel te herstellen. Het is sterk aanbevolen deze " +"stap uit\n" "te voeren.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": deze optie stelt u in staat om een eerder opgeslagen\n" @@ -1170,7 +1196,8 @@ msgstr "" "CD-ROMs te koppelen en te ontkoppelen.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": gebruik deze optie indien u een wizard wenst te gebruiken om\n" -"uw harde schijf mee te partitioneren. Dit is aanbevolen als u geen brede kennis\n" +"uw harde schijf mee te partitioneren. Dit is aanbevolen als u geen brede " +"kennis\n" "heeft over partitioneren.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": gebruik deze optie om uw wijzigingen te annuleren.\n" @@ -1178,31 +1205,30 @@ msgstr "" " * \"%s\" laat extra handelingen toe op\n" "partities (type, opties, formaat) en geeft meer informatie over de schijf.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": wanneer u klaar bent met het partitioneren van uw harde schijf, zal dit\n" +" * \"%s\": wanneer u klaar bent met het partitioneren van uw harde schijf, " +"zal dit\n" "de wijzigingen wegschrijven naar schijf.\n" "\n" "Bij het definiëren van de partitiegrootte kunt u de grootte fijnafregelen\n" "met de pijltjestoetsen op uw toetsenbord.\n" "\n" -"Merk op: u kunt iedere optie met behulp van het toetsenbord bereiken. Navigeer door\n" +"Merk op: u kunt iedere optie met behulp van het toetsenbord bereiken. " +"Navigeer door\n" "de partities met behulp van [Tab] en [Omhoog/Omlaag] pijlen.\n" "\n" -"Wanneer een partitie is geselecteerd, kunt u deze toetscombinaties gebruiken:\n" +"Wanneer een partitie is geselecteerd, kunt u deze toetscombinaties " +"gebruiken:\n" "\n" -" * Ctrl+c om een nieuwe partitie te creëren (als een lege ruimte is geselecteerd)\n" +" * Ctrl+c om een nieuwe partitie te creëren (als een lege ruimte is " +"geselecteerd)\n" "\n" " * Ctrl+d om een partitie te verwijderen\n" "\n" " * Ctrl+m om het koppelpunt in te stellen\n" "\n" -"Voor meer informatie over de verschillende types bestandssystemen die er zijn,\n" +"Voor meer informatie over de verschillende types bestandssystemen die er " +"zijn,\n" "leest u het hoofdstuk 'ext2FS' van de ``Referentiehandleiding''.\n" -"\n" -"In het geval dat u op een PPC computer aan het installeren bent, zult u een kleine\n" -"HFS \"bootstrap\"-partitie van tenminste 1MB willen creëren voor gebruik\n" -"door de yaboot-opstartlader. Indien u liever de partitie wat groter maakt,\n" -"zeg 50MB, dan vindt u het misschien een nuttige plek om een reserve kernel-\n" -"en ramdisk beeldbestand in op te slaan voor opstart-noodgevallen." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1242,20 +1268,24 @@ msgstr "Normale/expert-modus" #: ../help.pm:536 #, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1266,10 +1296,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Er is meer dan één Microsoft-partitie op uw harde schijf gevonden.\n" @@ -1296,7 +1328,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"d\" betekent \"slave harde schijf op de secundaire IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"Bij SCSI harde schijven betekent een \"a\" \"laagste SCSI ID\", een \"b\" \"op één na laagste SCSI ID\", enzovoort.\n" +"Bij SCSI harde schijven betekent een \"a\" \"laagste SCSI ID\", een \"b\" " +"\"op één na laagste SCSI ID\", enzovoort.\n" "\n" "\"Windows naam\" is de letter van uw harde schijf onder Windows (de\n" "eerste schijf of partitie wordt \"C:\" genoemd)." @@ -1305,11 +1338,13 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "\"%s\": check the current country selection. If you're not in this country,\n" -"click on the \"%s\" button and choose another. If your country is not in the\n" +"click on the \"%s\" button and choose another. If your country is not in " +"the\n" "list shown, click on the \"%s\" button to get the complete country list." msgstr "" "\"%s\": de huidige landselectie nagaan. Indien u zich niet in dit land\n" -"bevindt, klik dan op de \"%s\"-knop en kies een ander land. Als uw land niet in de getoonde lijst staat, klik dan op de \"%s\"-knop om de complete\n" +"bevindt, klik dan op de \"%s\"-knop en kies een ander land. Als uw land niet " +"in de getoonde lijst staat, klik dan op de \"%s\"-knop om de complete\n" "landenlijst op te vragen." #: ../help.pm:572 @@ -1324,7 +1359,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1360,7 +1396,6 @@ msgstr "" "Mageia versie \"8.1\" of recenter. Het uitvoeren van een\n" "opwaardering op versies eerder dan Mageia versie \"8.1\" is afgeraden." -# Extra stukje toegevoegd over Nederlandse layout #: ../help.pm:594 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -1382,12 +1417,16 @@ msgid "" "keyboard between the Latin and non-Latin layouts." msgstr "" "Afhankelijk van de taal die u heeft gekozen, selecteert DrakX automatisch\n" -"een bepaalde toetsenbordindeling. Ga na of de geselecteerde indeling u bevalt, en zoniet kies dan een andere toetsenbordindeling.\n" +"een bepaalde toetsenbordindeling. Ga na of de geselecteerde indeling u " +"bevalt, en zoniet kies dan een andere toetsenbordindeling.\n" "\n" "Merk op dat de getoonde lijst toetsenbordindelingen bevat, en geen talen.\n" -"Wanneer u in Nederland woont, heeft u waarschijnlijk een toetsenbord van het\n" -"type \"VS (internationaal)\". Toetsenborden met een \"Nederlandse\" indeling\n" -"komen niet veel voor. Het kan ook zijn dat u een Nederlands sprekende inwoner\n" +"Wanneer u in Nederland woont, heeft u waarschijnlijk een toetsenbord van " +"het\n" +"type \"VS (internationaal)\". Toetsenborden met een \"Nederlandse\" " +"indeling\n" +"komen niet veel voor. Het kan ook zijn dat u een Nederlands sprekende " +"inwoner\n" "van België bent en gebruik maakt van een toetsenbord met Franse indeling.\n" "Deze installatiestap zorgt ervoor dat u in alle gevallen de juiste\n" "toetsenbordindeling kunt kiezen.\n" @@ -1601,7 +1640,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "If DrakX cannot determine where to place the boot sector, it'll ask you\n" "where it should place it. Generally, the \"%s\" is the safest place.\n" -"Choosing \"%s\" will not install any boot loader. Use this option only if you\n" +"Choosing \"%s\" will not install any boot loader. Use this option only if " +"you\n" "know what you're doing." msgstr "" "Een opstartlader is een klein programmaatje dat door de computer gestart\n" @@ -1610,11 +1650,15 @@ msgstr "" "opstartlader volkomen automatisch. Het installatieprogramma analyseert de\n" "bootsector van de schijf handelt naar bevind van zaken:\n" "\n" -" * als een Windows-bootsector is gevonden, dan zal het deze vervangen door een GRUB/LILO bootsector. Op deze manier zult u de mogelijkheid hebben om ofwel GNU/Linux te starten, ofwel een ander besturingssysteem.\n" +" * als een Windows-bootsector is gevonden, dan zal het deze vervangen door " +"een GRUB/LILO bootsector. Op deze manier zult u de mogelijkheid hebben om " +"ofwel GNU/Linux te starten, ofwel een ander besturingssysteem.\n" "\n" -" * als een GRUB- of LILO-bootsector is gevonden, dan zal het deze vervangen door een nieuwe.\n" +" * als een GRUB- of LILO-bootsector is gevonden, dan zal het deze vervangen " +"door een nieuwe.\n" "\n" -"Wanneer het installatieprogramma niet kan bepalen waar de bootsector geplaatst moet worden dan zal DrakX u vragen waar de\n" +"Wanneer het installatieprogramma niet kan bepalen waar de bootsector " +"geplaatst moet worden dan zal DrakX u vragen waar de\n" "opstartlader terecht moet komen. In het algemeen is \"%s\" de\n" "veiligste locatie. Met de keuze \"%s\" wordt er in het geheel geen \n" "opstartlader geïnstalleerd. Gebruik dit alleen als u weet wat u doet." @@ -1667,7 +1711,8 @@ msgstr "" "afdruksysteem, zodat het overweg kan met oudere besturingssystemen\n" "die wellicht afdrukdiensten vereisen. Alhoewel het behoorlijk krachtig is,\n" "is de basisinstallatie bijna net zo eenvoudig als \"pdq\". In het geval dat\n" -"u een \"lpd\"-server-emulatie nodig heeft, dient u de \"cups-lpd\"-voorziening\n" +"u een \"lpd\"-server-emulatie nodig heeft, dient u de \"cups-lpd\"-" +"voorziening\n" "in te schakelen. \"%s\" biedt grafische schillen voor het afdrukken en\n" "het beheren van de printer.\n" "\n" @@ -1823,7 +1868,8 @@ msgstr "" "van het land dat u gekozen heeft. U kunt op de \"%s\" knop\n" "drukken als dit incorrect is.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": de huidige muisconfiguratie nagaan. Zonodig kunt u op de knop klikken om hem aan te passen.\n" +" * \"%s\": de huidige muisconfiguratie nagaan. Zonodig kunt u op de knop " +"klikken om hem aan te passen.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": indien een geluidskaart gevonden is op uw systeem,\n" "wordt dat hier weergegeven. In het geval dat de aangegeven geluidskaart\n" @@ -1898,8 +1944,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" @@ -1908,7 +1956,8 @@ msgstr "" "Klik op \"%s\" wanneer u alle gegevens en partities die zich \n" "op deze harde schijf bevinden, wilt wissen. Wees voorzichtig, want na het\n" "klikken op \"%s\" zult u niet in staat zijn om enige op de schijf\n" -"aanwezige gegevens of partities terug te halen, met inbegrip van alle Windows-gegevens.\n" +"aanwezige gegevens of partities terug te halen, met inbegrip van alle " +"Windows-gegevens.\n" "\n" "Klik op \"%s\" om deze operatie te stoppen zonder daarbij \n" "gegevens of partities op de schijf te verliezen." @@ -1922,114 +1971,3 @@ msgstr "Volgende ->" #, c-format msgid "<- Previous" msgstr "<- Vorige" - -#~ msgid "" -#~ "\"%s\": clicking on the \"%s\" button will open the printer " -#~ "configuration\n" -#~ "wizard. Consult the corresponding chapter of the ``Starter Guide'' for " -#~ "more\n" -#~ "information on how to set up a new printer. The interface presented in " -#~ "our\n" -#~ "manual is similar to the one used during installation." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "\"%s\": klikken op de \"%s\"-knop zal de printerconfiguratie-\n" -#~ "wizard openen. Raadpleeg het overeenkomstige hoofdstuk uit de " -#~ "``Beginners-\n" -#~ "handleiding'' voor meer informatie over het instellen van een nieuwe " -#~ "printer.\n" -#~ "De in onze handleiding getoonde interface lijkt sterk op degene gebruikt\n" -#~ "tijdens de installatie." -#~ msgid "" -#~ "This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your GNU/" -#~ "Linux\n" -#~ "system: you must enter the \"root\" password. \"Root\" is the system\n" -#~ "administrator and is the only user authorized to make updates, add " -#~ "users,\n" -#~ "change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short, \"root\" " -#~ "can\n" -#~ "do everything! That's why you must choose a password which is difficult " -#~ "to\n" -#~ "guess: DrakX will tell you if the password you chose is too simple. As " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "can see, you're not forced to enter a password, but we strongly advise\n" -#~ "against this. GNU/Linux is just as prone to operator error as any other\n" -#~ "operating system. Since \"root\" can overcome all limitations and\n" -#~ "unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly accessing the\n" -#~ "partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to become\n" -#~ "\"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password should be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and at least " -#~ "8\n" -#~ "characters long. Never write down the \"root\" password -- it makes it " -#~ "far\n" -#~ "too easy to compromise your system.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "One caveat: do not make the password too long or too complicated because " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "must be able to remember it!\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password will not be displayed on screen as you type it. To reduce " -#~ "the\n" -#~ "chance of a blind typing error you'll need to enter the password twice. " -#~ "If\n" -#~ "you do happen to make the same typing error twice, you'll have to use " -#~ "this\n" -#~ "``incorrect'' password the first time you'll try to connect as \"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you want an authentication server to control access to your computer,\n" -#~ "click on the \"%s\" button.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If your network uses either LDAP, NIS, or PDC Windows Domain " -#~ "authentication\n" -#~ "services, select the appropriate one for \"%s\". If you do not know " -#~ "which\n" -#~ "one to use, you should ask your network administrator.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you happen to have problems with remembering passwords, or if your\n" -#~ "computer will never be connected to the Internet and you absolutely " -#~ "trust\n" -#~ "everybody who uses your computer, you can choose to have \"%s\"." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Dit is de meest cruciale beslissing voor de beveiliging van uw GNU/Linux\n" -#~ "systeem: u dient het \"root\"-wachtwoord in te voeren. \"Root\" is de\n" -#~ "systeembeheerder en is de enige die geautoriseerd is om vernieuwingen " -#~ "uit\n" -#~ "te voeren, gebruikers toe te voegen, de algehele systeemconfiguratie te\n" -#~ "wijzigen, enzovoort. Kortom, \"root\" kan alles doen! Daarom dient u een\n" -#~ "lastig te raden wachtwoord te kiezen - DrakX vertelt het u als het te \n" -#~ "makkelijk is. Zoals u kunt zien is het niet verplicht een wachtwoord in " -#~ "te\n" -#~ "vullen, maar dit raden wij sterk af. GNU/Linux is net zo gevoelig voor\n" -#~ "bedieningsfouten als andere besturingssystemen.\n" -#~ "Omdat \"root\" alle beperkingen kan overschrijden en onbedoeld alle\n" -#~ "gegevens op partities kan wissen door achteloos deze partities te\n" -#~ "benaderen, is het belangrijk dat het lastig is om \"root\" te worden.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Het wachtwoord behoort een mix van alfanumerieke tekens te zijn en\n" -#~ "tenminste 8 tekens lang. Schrijf nooit het \"root\"-wachtwoord op -\n" -#~ "dat maakt het te makkelijk om een systeem te compromitteren.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Het addertje onder het gras: maak ook het wachtwoord niet te lang of\n" -#~ "gecompliceerd omdat u het moet kunnen onthouden!\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Het wachtwoord zal niet op het scherm getoond worden wanneer u het\n" -#~ "intypt. Vandaar dat u het wachtwoord tweemaal moet intypen om de kans\n" -#~ "te verminderen dat u een typfout maakt. Indien u toevallig dezelfde " -#~ "typfout\n" -#~ "twee keer maakt, dan zal dit ``incorrecte'' wachtwoord gebruikt moeten\n" -#~ "worden bij de eerste keer dat u zich aanmeldt als \"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Indien u wenst dat de toegang tot deze computer gecontroleerd wordt door\n" -#~ "een aanmeldingscontrole-server, klik dan op de \"%s\"-knop.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Indien uw netwerk LDAP, NIS, of PDC Windows domeinaanmeldingscontrole-\n" -#~ "diensten gebruikt, selecteer dan de overeenkomende optie\n" -#~ "als \"%s\". In het geval dat u niet weet welke te kiezen,\n" -#~ "raadpleeg dan uw netwerkbeheerder.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Mocht u het lastig vinden wachtwoorden te onthouden, als uw computer\n" -#~ "nooit verbonden zal zijn met het internet of als u absoluut iedereen\n" -#~ "vertrouwt die toegang heeft tot uw computer, kunt u kiezen voor \"%s\"." -#~ msgid "authentication" -#~ msgstr "aanmeldingscontrole" - diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/nn.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/nn.po index fcef7438d..69519da74 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/nn.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/nn.po @@ -1036,7 +1036,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1086,12 +1086,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "No må du velja kva partisjonar du vil installera Mageia på. Om du " "allereie har ferdige partisjonar, frå tidlegare installasjonar av GNU/Linux " @@ -1106,7 +1100,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " – «%s»: Slettar alle partisjonar på harddisken.\n" "\n" -" – «%s»: Lagar automatisk ext3- og vekslepartisjonar på den ledige " +" – «%s»: Lagar automatisk ext4- og vekslepartisjonar på den ledige " "harddiskplassen.\n" "\n" "«%s»: Gjev tilgang til fleire funksjonar:\n" @@ -1153,11 +1147,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Du kan lesa meir om forskjellige filsystem i kapittelet «ext2FS» i " "referansehandboka.\n" -"\n" -"Om du installerer på ei PPC-maskin, bør du laga ein liten HFS-" -"oppstartslastarpartisjon på minst 1 MiB for yaboot. Vis du lagar partisjonen " -"større, kanskje 50 MiB, kan du bruka han til å lagra ein ekstra kjerne, og " -"eventuelt ramdisk-bilete for nødsituasjonar.r" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/pa_IN.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/pa_IN.po index 8e3ad9b0b..8bfdd2dad 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/pa_IN.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/pa_IN.po @@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -704,12 +704,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:526 diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/pl.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/pl.po index cc60eee65..4c151aeb5 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/pl.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/pl.po @@ -18,12 +18,13 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2005-10-22 14:46+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Tomasz Bednarski <tomasz.bednarski@mandriva.pl>\n" "Language-Team: polish <pl@li.org>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Generator: KBabel 1.10.2\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n%10<=4 && (n%" -"100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n==1 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n%10<=4 && (n" +"%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" #: ../help.pm:14 #, fuzzy, c-format @@ -136,7 +137,8 @@ msgstr "Czy chcesz wykorzystać tą funkcję?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -146,13 +148,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -163,7 +168,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Powyżej pokazano wykryte na Twoim dysku istniejące partycje linuksowe.\n" @@ -708,13 +714,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -727,12 +735,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -755,7 +765,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -917,8 +928,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "(*) Wymagana jest dyskietka sformatowana z systemem plików FAT. Aby\n" "utworzyć taką dyskietkę w systemie GNU/Linux, wpisz polecenie\n" -"\"mformat a:\", lub \"fdformat /dev/fd0\", a następnie \"mkfs.vfat /dev/fd0" -"\"." +"\"mformat a:\", lub \"fdformat /dev/fd0\", a następnie \"mkfs.vfat /dev/" +"fd0\"." #: ../help.pm:412 #, c-format @@ -1002,8 +1013,8 @@ msgid "" "will appear: review the selection, and press \"%s\" to retrieve and install\n" "the selected package(s), or \"%s\" to abort." msgstr "" -"W czasie, jaki upłynął od początkowego wydania Mageia, być może " -"niektóre pakietyzostały zaktualizowane. Niektóre błędy mogły\n" +"W czasie, jaki upłynął od początkowego wydania Mageia, być może niektóre " +"pakietyzostały zaktualizowane. Niektóre błędy mogły\n" "zostać naprawione, zaś problemy z bezpieczeństwem rozwiązane. Aby\n" "skorzystać z możliwości aktualizacji, dobrze jest pobrać część danych\n" "z Internetu. Wybierz \"%s\", jeśli posiadasz działające połączenie\n" @@ -1056,18 +1067,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1090,7 +1104,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1098,7 +1113,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1117,16 +1133,9 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "W tym etapie instalacji wybierasz partycje, na których będzie instalowany\n" -"Mageia. Jeśli partycje istnieją (np. pozostały po poprzedniej " -"instalacji,\n" +"Mageia. Jeśli partycje istnieją (np. pozostały po poprzedniej instalacji,\n" "lub też zostały założone innym narzędziem), to można ich użyć do " "instalacji.\n" "W innym przypadku należy je utworzyć.\n" @@ -1141,7 +1150,7 @@ msgstr "" " * \"%s\": ta opcja kasuje wszystkie partycje na wybranym dysku.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": ta opcja automatycznie tworzy partycje\n" -" ext3 oraz swap na wolnej (niespartycjonowanej) przestrzeni na dysku\n" +" ext4 oraz swap na wolnej (niespartycjonowanej) przestrzeni na dysku\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": daje dostęp do dodatkowych opcji:\n" "\n" @@ -1193,15 +1202,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Aby uzyskać informacje dotyczące różnych dostępnych rodzajów systemów\n" "plików, należy przeczytać rozdział ext2fs podręcznika.\n" -"\n" -"Jeśli instalacja odbywa się na komputerze PPC, system będzie wymagał\n" -"utworzenia małej partycji HFS \"rozruchowej\" (bootstrap) o wielkości\n" -"co najmniej 1MB, która będzie używana przez program rozruchowy yaboot.\n" -"Jeśli chcesz, aby ta partycja była większa, powiedzmy 50 MB, można\n" -"ją traktować jako użyteczne miejsce np. do przechowywania zapasowego\n" -"jądra oraz obrazów do uniknięcia skutków ewentualnych awarii " -"uniemożliwiających\n" -"rozruch systemu z normalnej partycji." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1241,20 +1241,24 @@ msgstr "Przełącz między trybem zwykłym a zaawansowanym" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1265,10 +1269,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Na dysku wykryto więcej niż jedną partycję Windows. Wybierz, którą\n" @@ -1323,7 +1329,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1913,8 +1920,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/pt.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/pt.po index e959247b8..80634cae5 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/pt.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/pt.po @@ -1,47 +1,41 @@ -# translation of pt.po to Português +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) YEAR THE PACKAGE'S COPYRIGHT HOLDER +# This file is distributed under the same license as the PACKAGE package. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. # -# Latest versions of po files are at http://www.mandrivalinux.com/l10n/pt.php3 +# Translators: +# Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2024 +# Michael Martins, 2024 # -# Copyright (C) 2000 Mandriva -# -# Fernando Moreira <fmoreira@netc.pt>, 1999. -# Jorge Costa <Jorgercosta@netc.pt>, 2001. -# José JORGE <jose.jorge@oreka.com>, 2002,2003. -# Jose Jorge <jjorge@free.fr>, 2003, 2004, 2005. -# Jose Carlos D. S. Saraiva <jose.d.s.saraiva@clix.pt>, 2004. -# Zé <mmodem00@netvisao.pt>, 2004, 2005, 2006. -# Américo José Melo <mmodem00@netvisao.pt>, 2004, 2005. -# Ze <mmodem00@netvisao.pt>, 2004. -# José Melo <mmodem00@gmail.com>, 2005. -# José Melo <mmodme00@gmail.com>, 2005. -# Jose JORGE <jjorge@free.fr>, 2005. -# Zé <mmodem00@gmail.com>, 2006, 2007. +#, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: pt\n" +"Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2008-09-12 12:22+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2007-02-18 17:17+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Zé <mmodem00@gmail.com>\n" -"Language-Team: Português <pt@li.org>\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2024-09-04 17:33+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Michael Martins, 2024\n" +"Language-Team: Portuguese (https://app.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/teams/9361/" +"pt/)\n" +"Language: pt\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"X-Generator: KBabel 1.11.4\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n == 0 || n == 1) ? 0 : n != 0 && n % " +"1000000 == 0 ? 1 : 2;\n" #: ../help.pm:14 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Before continuing, you should carefully read the terms of the license. It\n" "covers the entire Mageia distribution. If you agree with all the\n" "terms it contains, check the \"%s\" box. If not, clicking on the \"%s\"\n" "button will reboot your computer." msgstr "" -"Antes de continuar, deve ler atentamente os termos da licença. A licença\n" -"cobre toda a distribuição Mageia. Se concorda com todos os termos\n" -"presentes, active a caixa \"%s\". Se não concorda, clique no botão \"%s\"\n" -"para reiniciar o seu computador." +"Antes de continuar, você deve ler atentamente os termos da licença. Ela\n" +"cobre toda a distribuição do Mageia. Se você concordar com todos os\n" +"termos, marque a caixa \"%s\". Caso contrário, clicar no botão \"%s\"\n" +"reiniciará seu computador." #: ../help.pm:20 #, c-format @@ -124,12 +118,12 @@ msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "User name" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Nome de usuário" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "Accept user" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Aceitar o usuário" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format @@ -139,7 +133,8 @@ msgstr "Deseja usar esta opção?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -149,13 +144,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -166,7 +164,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Aqui estão listadas partições Linux existentes detectadas no seu disco.\n" @@ -205,7 +204,7 @@ msgstr "" "\"b\" significa \"ID SCSI segundo mais baixo\", etc." #: ../help.pm:88 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The Mageia installation is distributed on several CD-ROMs. If a\n" "selected package is located on another CD-ROM, DrakX will eject the current\n" @@ -213,13 +212,15 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"A instalação Mageia é distribuída em vários CD-ROMs. Se um pacote\n" -"seleccionado estiver localizado noutro CD-ROM, o DrakX irá ejectar o actual\n" -"CD e pedir para inserir o CD pedido. Se não tiver o CD em questão à mão,\n" -"clique apenas em \"%s\", os pacote correspondentes não será instalados." +"A instalação do Mageia é distribuída em vários CD-ROMs. Se um\n" +"pacote selecionado estiver localizado em outro CD-ROM, o DrakX irá ejetar\n" +"o CD atual e solicitar que você insira o CD necessário. Se você não tiver\n" +"o CD solicitado em mãos, basta clicar em \"%s\", e os pacotes " +"correspondentes\n" +"não serão instalados." #: ../help.pm:95 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "It's now time to specify which programs you wish to install on your system.\n" "There are thousands of packages available for Mageia, and to make it\n" @@ -276,59 +277,51 @@ msgid "" "command-line interface. The total size of this installation is about 65\n" "megabytes." msgstr "" -"É agora tempo de especificar que programas deseja instalar no seu\n" -"sistema. Há centenas de pacotes disponíveis para o Mageia, e para\n" -" simplificar a gestão, foram colocados em grupos de aplicações similares.\n" -"\n" -"O Mageia classifica os grupos de pacotes em quatro categorias.\n" -"Pode misturar e combinar aplicações de várias categorias, para que a\n" -"instalação de uma ``Estação de trabalho'' possa ainda ter aplicações da\n" -"categoria ``Servidor'' instaladas.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": se planeia usar a sua máquina como uma estação de trabalho,\n" -"escolha um ou mais dos grupos dessa mesma categoria.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": se planeia usar a sua máquina para programar, seleccione os\n" -"grupos apropriados dentro dessa categoria. O grupo especial \"LSB\" irá\n" -"configurar o seu sistema para que cumpra o mais possível com as \n" -"especificações Linux Standard Base.\n" -"\n" -" Ao seleccionar o grupo \"LSB\" irá também instalar as séries kernel \"2.4" -"\",\n" -"em vez do \"2.6\" predefinido. Isto é para garantir concordância 100%%- LSB\n" -"do sistema. No entanto, se não seleccionar o grupo \"LSB\", terá na mesma\n" -"um sistema que é 100%% LSB-concordante.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": se pretende que a sua máquina seja um servidor, seleccione\n" -"qual dos serviços comuns deseja instalar.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": aqui é onde irá escolher o seu ambiente gráfico preferido. Pelo\n" -" menos deve ser seleccionado se deseja ter um interface gráfico disponível.\n" -"\n" -"Movendo o cursor do rato sobre o nome de um grupo, irá mostrar um breve\n" -"texto explanatório acerca desse grupo.\n" -"\n" -"Pode seleccionar a caixa \"%s\", que é útil se está familiarizado com os\n" -"pacotes oferecidos ou se quer ter controlo total sobre o que é instalado.\n" -"\n" -"Se iniciar a instalação em modo \"%s\", pode desseleccionar todos os\n" -"grupos e prevenir a instalação de novos pacotes. Isto é útil para reparar\n" -"ou actualizar um sistema existente.\n" -"\n" -"Se desseleccionar todos os grupos quando executa uma instalação regular\n" -"(em oposição a uma actualização), um diálogo irá aparecer a sugestionar\n" -"opções diferentes para uma instalação mínima:\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": instala o número mínimo de pacotes possíveis para ter um\n" -"ambiente gráfico instalado.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": instala o sistema base mais utilidades básicas e a sua\n" -"documentação. Esta instalação é apropriada para configurar um servidor.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": irá instalar o número mínimo absoluto de pacotes necessários\n" -"para ter um sistema Linux funcional. Com esta instalação irá apenas ter um\n" -"interface de linha de comandos. O tamanho total desta instalação é cerca\n" -"de 65 megabytes." +"Agora é hora de especificar quais programas você deseja instalar em seu " +"sistema.\n" +"Existem milhares de pacotes disponíveis para o Mageia, e para simplificar o\n" +"gerenciamento, eles foram agrupados em categorias de aplicações similares.\n" +"\n" +"O Mageia classifica os grupos de pacotes em quatro categorias. Você pode\n" +"misturar e combinar aplicações das várias categorias, de modo que uma\n" +"instalação \"Estação de trabalho\" ainda possa ter aplicações da categoria\n" +"\"Servidor\" instaladas.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": se você planeja usar sua máquina como uma estação de trabalho,\n" +"selecione um ou mais dos grupos na categoria de estação de trabalho.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": se você planeja usar sua máquina para programação, selecione os\n" +"grupos apropriados dessa categoria. O grupo especial \"LSB\" configurará " +"seu\n" +"sistema para que ele esteja o mais próximo possível das especificações do\n" +"Linux Standard Base.\n" +"\n" +" Selecionar o grupo \"LSB\" garantirá 100% de conformidade com o\n" +"LSB do sistema. No entanto, se você não selecionar o grupo \"LSB\", ainda\n" +"terá um sistema quase 100% compatível com o LSB.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": se sua máquina for destinada a ser um servidor, selecione quais\n" +"dos serviços mais comuns você deseja instalar em sua máquina.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": aqui você escolherá seu ambiente gráfico preferido. Pelo menos\n" +"um deve ser selecionado se você quiser ter uma interface gráfica " +"disponível.\n" +"\n" +"Mover o cursor do mouse sobre um nome de grupo exibirá um texto explicativo " +"sobre esse grupo.Você pode marcar a caixa \"%s\", que é útil se você estiver " +"familiarizado com os pacotes oferecidos ou se desejar ter controle total " +"sobre o que será instalado.Se você iniciar a instalação no modo \"%s\", pode " +"desmarcar todos os grupos e evitar a instalação de novos pacotes. Isso é " +"útil para reparar ou atualizar um sistema existente.Se você desmarcar todos " +"os grupos ao realizar uma instalação regular (em vez de uma atualização), " +"uma caixa de diálogo será exibida sugerindo diferentes opções para uma " +"instalação mínima:\"%s\": instala o número mínimo de pacotes possível para " +"ter uma área de trabalho gráfica funcional.\"%s\": instala o sistema base " +"mais utilitários básicos e sua documentação. Esta instalação é adequada para " +"configurar um servidor.\"%s\": instalará o número absoluto mínimo de pacotes " +"necessários para obter um sistema Linux funcional. Com esta instalação, você " +"terá apenas uma interface de linha de comando. O tamanho total desta " +"instalação é de cerca de 65 megabytes." #: ../help.pm:149 ../help.pm:591 #, c-format @@ -346,7 +339,7 @@ msgid "Truly minimal install" msgstr "Verdadeira instalação mínima" #: ../help.pm:152 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you choose to install packages individually, the installer will present\n" "a tree containing all packages classified by groups and subgroups. While\n" @@ -382,39 +375,52 @@ msgid "" "another installation. See the second tip of the last step on how to create\n" "such a floppy." msgstr "" -"Se escolheu instalar pacotes individualmente, o instalador irá apresentar\n" +"Se você optar por instalar pacotes individualmente, o instalador " +"apresentará\n" "uma árvore contendo todos os pacotes classificados por grupos e subgrupos.\n" -"Enquanto pesquisa na árvore, pode seleccionar grupos inteiros, subgrupos,\n" +"Enquanto navega pela árvore, você pode selecionar grupos inteiros, " +"subgrupos\n" "ou pacotes individuais.\n" "\n" -"Sempre que seleccionar um pacote na árvore, uma descrição irá aparecer\n" -"à sua direita para o informar acerca do propósito desse pacote.\n" -"\n" -"!! Se um pacote servidor foi seleccionado, ou porque escolheu\n" -"especificamente o pacote individual ou porque fazia parte de um grupo de\n" -"pacotes, será-lhe pedido para confirmar que realmente quer que esses\n" -"servidores sejam instalados. Por omissão o Mageia irá\n" -"automaticamente iniciar qualquer serviço instalado no arranque. Mesmo\n" -"que sejam seguros e não tenham qualquer problema conhecido na altura\n" -"da saída da distribuição, é bem possível que sejam descobertos 'buracos'\n" -"na segurança a seguir à finalização desta versão Mageia. Se não\n" -"souber que serviço particular é suposto fazer ou porque é instalado, então\n" -"clique em \"%s\". Ao clicar em \"%s\" irá instalar os serviços listados e\n" -"serºao iniciados automaticamente no arranque. !!\n" -"\n" -"A opção \"%s\" é usada para desactivar o dialogo de aviso que\n" -"aparece sempre que o instalador escolhe automaticamente um pacote\n" -"para resolver problemas de dependências. alguns pacotes dependem de\n" -"outros e a instalação de um determinado pacote pode requerer a instalação\n" -"de outro pacote. O instalador pode determinar que pacotes são necessários\n" -"para satisfazer uma dependência para terminar com sucesso a instalação.\n" -"\n" -"O pequeno ícone de disquete no fundo desta lista permite-lhe carregar uma\n" -"lista de pacotes escolhida durante uma instalação anterior. Isto é útil se\n" -"tiver um número de máquinas que deseja configurar identicamente. Ao\n" -"clicar neste ícone irá-lhe pedir para inserir uma disquete criada no fim\n" -"de outra instalação. Veja a segunda dica do último passo sobre como criar\n" -"essa disquete." +"Sempre que você selecionar um pacote na árvore, uma descrição aparecerá\n" +"à direita para informar o propósito desse pacote.\n" +"\n" +" !! Se um pacote de servidor for selecionado, seja porque você escolheu\n" +"especificamente o pacote individual ou porque ele fazia parte de um grupo\n" +"de pacotes, será solicitado que você confirme se realmente deseja que esses\n" +"servidores sejam instalados. Por padrão, o Mageia iniciará automaticamente\n" +"quaisquer serviços instalados durante o tempo de inicialização. Mesmo que\n" +"eles sejam seguros e não tenham problemas conhecidos na época em que\n" +"a distribuição foi lançada, é possível que vulnerabilidades de segurança " +"tenham\n" +"sido descobertas após a finalização desta versão do Mageia. Se você não " +"souber\n" +"o que um serviço específico deve fazer ou por que está sendo instalado, " +"clique em \"%s\".\n" +"Clicar em \"%s\" instalará os serviços listados e eles serão iniciados " +"automaticamente\n" +"durante o tempo de inicialização. !!\n" +"\n" +"A opção \"%s\" é usada para desativar a caixa de diálogo de aviso que " +"aparece\n" +"sempre que o instalador seleciona automaticamente um pacote para resolver " +"um\n" +"problema de dependência. Alguns pacotes dependem de outros e a instalação " +"de\n" +"um pacote específico pode exigir a instalação de outro pacote. O instalador " +"pode\n" +"determinar quais pacotes são necessários para satisfazer uma dependência e " +"concluir\n" +"a instalação com sucesso.\n" +"\n" +"O ícone de disquete pequeno na parte inferior da lista permite carregar uma\n" +"lista de pacotes criada durante uma instalação anterior. Isso é útil se você " +"tiver\n" +"várias máquinas que deseja configurar de maneira idêntica. Clicar nesse " +"ícone\n" +"solicitará que você insira o disquete criado ao final de outra instalação. " +"Consulte\n" +"a segunda dica do último passo sobre como criar um disquete desse tipo." #: ../help.pm:183 #, c-format @@ -490,7 +496,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:213 #, c-format msgid "Hardware clock set to GMT" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Relógio do hardware configurado para GMT" #: ../help.pm:213 #, c-format @@ -522,7 +528,7 @@ msgstr "" "que melhor sirva as suas necessidades." #: ../help.pm:234 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "X (for X Window System) is the heart of the GNU/Linux graphical interface\n" "on which all the graphical environments (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep,\n" @@ -580,62 +586,68 @@ msgid "" "want to check \"%s\" if your machine is to act as a server, or if you were\n" "not successful in getting the display configured." msgstr "" -"X (para Sistema X Window) é o coração do interface gráfico GNU/Linux no\n" -"qual todos os ambientes gráficos (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep, WindowMaker,\n" -"etc.) fornecidos com o Mageia, funcionam.\n" +"X (para o X Window System) é o coração da interface gráfica do GNU/Linux,\n" +"sobre a qual todos os ambientes gráficos (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep,\n" +"WindowMaker, etc.) fornecidos com o Mageia dependem.\n" "\n" -"Irá ver uma lista de parâmetros diferentes para mudar, para poder\n" -"ter uma boa apresentação gráfica\n" +"Você verá uma lista de diferentes parâmetros para ajustar e obter uma " +"exibição\n" +"gráfica otimizada.\n" "\n" "Placa Gráfica\n" "\n" -" O instalador irá normalmente detectar e configurar automaticamente\n" -"a placa gráfica da sua máquina. Se isto não estiver correcto, pode\n" -"escolher da lista a placa gráfica que tem instalada.\n" +"O instalador normalmente detectará e configurará automaticamente a\n" +"placa gráfica instalada em sua máquina. Se isso não estiver correto, você\n" +"pode escolher na lista a placa que você realmente tem instalada.\n" "\n" -" Se na situação de haver diferentes servidores disponíveis para a sua\n" -"placa, com ou sem aceleração 3D, será-lhe dado a escolher o servidor\n" -"que melhor sirva as suas necessidades\n" +"Na situação em que diferentes drivers estão disponíveis para sua placa, com\n" +"ou sem aceleração 3D, você será solicitado a escolher o driver que melhor\n" +"atende às suas necessidades.\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" "Monitor\n" "\n" -" Normalmente o instalador irá automaticamente detectar e configurar o\n" -"ecrã/monitor ligado á sua máquina. Se não estiver correcto, pode escolher\n" -"da lista o monitor que está ligado ao seu computador.\n" +"Normalmente, o instalador detectará e configurará automaticamente o\n" +"monitor\n" +"conectado à sua máquina. Se isso não estiver correto, você pode escolher na\n" +"lista o monitor que está conectado ao seu computador.\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" "Resolução\n" "\n" -" Aqui pode escolher as resoluções e cores disponíveis para o seu\n" -"material gráfico. Escolha o que melhor sirva as suas necessidades\n" -"(poderá fazer alterações a seguir à instalação)\n" -"Um exemplo da configuração escolhida é mostrada no ecrã.\n" +"Aqui você pode escolher as resoluções e profundidades de cor disponíveis\n" +"para o seu hardware gráfico. Escolha a que melhor atende às suas " +"necessidades\n" +"(você poderá fazer alterações após a instalação). Uma amostra da " +"configuração\n" +"escolhida é exibida na imagem do monitor\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" "Teste\n" "\n" -" Dependendo do seu material, esta entrada poderá não apareder.\n" +" Dependendo do seu hardware, esta opção pode não aparecer.\n" +"\n" +" O sistema tentará abrir uma tela gráfica na resolução desejada. Se você\n" +"ver a mensagem de teste durante o teste e responder \"%s\", então o DrakX\n" +"prosseguirá para a próxima etapa. Se você não a ver, isso significa que " +"alguma\n" +"parte da configuração detecção automática estava incorreta e o teste será\n" +"automaticamente encerrado após 12 segundos, retornando ao menu. Altere\n" +"as configurações até obter uma exibição gráfica correta.\n" +"\n" "\n" -" S sistema irá tentar abrir um ecrã gráfico na resolução escolhida.\n" -"Se conseguir ver a mensagem teste durante o teste e responder \"%s\",\n" -"então o DrakX irá proceder á etapa seguinte. Se não o vir, então\n" -"significa que alguma parte da configuração auto detectada está\n" -"incorrecta e o teste irá acabar automáticamente ao fim de 12 segundos,\n" -"e retornará ao menu. Mude as configurações até obtenha a correcta\n" -"disposição gráfica.\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" "Opções\n" "\n" -" Aqui pode escolher se deseja que o computador arranque\n" -"automáticamente em modo gráfico. De facto, pode querer verificar\n" -"\"%s\" se a sua máquina é um servidor, ou se não conseguir obter\n" -"uma boa configuração de ecrã." +" Esta etapa permite escolher se você deseja que sua máquina mude\n" +"automaticamente para uma interface gráfica na inicialização. Obviamente,\n" +"você pode querer marcar \"%s\" se sua máquina for atuar como um servidor\n" +"ou se não conseguir configurar a exibição corretamente." #: ../help.pm:291 #, c-format @@ -700,16 +712,18 @@ msgstr "" "sucedido a configurar o monitor." #: ../help.pm:319 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -722,12 +736,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -750,7 +766,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -763,67 +780,79 @@ msgid "" "experience. For more instructions on how to use the DiskDrake utility,\n" "refer to the ``Managing Your Partitions'' section in the ``Starter Guide''." msgstr "" -"Agora precisa decidir onde deseja instalar o sistema operativo\n" -"Mageia no seu disco rígido. Se o seu disco rígido estiver vazio\n" -"ou, se um sistema operativo existente usa todo o espaço disponível,\n" -"irá ser preciso particionar o disco. Básicamente, particionar um disco\n" -"rígido significa dividi-lo de maneira lógica para criar o espaço\n" -"necessário para instalar o seu novo sistema Mageia.\n" -"\n" -"Como os efeitos da operação de particionamento são geralmente\n" -"irreversíveis, e pode levar a perda de dados, particionar pode ser\n" -"intimidante para um utilizador inexperiente. Felizmente, o DrakX tem\n" -"um assistente que simplifica o processo.Antes de avançar para o\n" -"próximo passo lê pelo resto da secção e todo o resto, leve o tempo\n" -"que achar necessário.\n" -"\n" -"Dependendo da configuração do disco rígido, várias opções\n" -"estão disponíveis.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\". Esta opção irá automaticamente particionar o(s) disco(s)\n" -"vazio(s). Se usar esta opção, não irão haver mais perguntas.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\". O assistente detectou uma ou mais partições Linux no disco\n" -"rígido. Se as deseja usar, escolha esta opção. Será-lhe então pedido\n" -"para escolher o ponto de montagem associado a cada partição. Os\n" -"pontos habituais de montagem são seleccionados por omissão, e para\n" -" a maioria é uma boa ideia mantê-los assim.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\". Se a Microsoft Windows é instalada no seu disco rígido e \n" -"utiliza todo o espaço disponível, irá ter que criar espaço livre para o\n" -"GNU/Linux. Para o fazer, pode apagar a sua partição Microsoft Windows\n" -"e dados (ver a solução ``Apagar o disco todo'') ou redimensionar a partição\n" -"FAT ou NTFS do Microsoft Windows. O redimensionamento pode ser feito\n" -"sem a perda de qualquer dado, desde que previamente tenha desfragmentado\n" -"a partição Windows. Recomenda-se que faça cópias de segurança.\n" -"Recomenda-se que use esta opção, se quer usar os dois sistemas\n" -"operativos, Mageia e Microsoft Windows no mesmo computador.\n" -"\n" -" Antes de escolher esta opção, por favor compreenda que a seguir a este\n" -"procedimento, o tamanho da partição do seu Microsoft Windows será mais\n" -"pequeno. Terá menos espaço livre no Microsoft Windows para gravar os\n" -"seus dados ou instalar novo software.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\". Se deseja apagar todos os dados e todas as partições presentes\n" -"no disco rígido e substituí-los pelo seu novo sistema Mageia,\n" -"escolha esta opção. Seja cuidadoso, porque não será mais capaz de\n" -"desfazer esta operação após ter confirmado.\n" -"\n" -" !! Se escolher esta opção, todos os dados no disco serão apagados!!\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": Esta opção aparece quando o disco rígido é inteiramente do\n" -"sistema Microsoft Windows. Escolher esta opção irá simplesmente apagar\n" -"tudo no disco e começar de novo a particionar tudo do princípio.\n" -"\n" -" !! Se escolher esta opção, todos os dados no disco vai ser perdidos. !!\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\". Escolha esta opção se deseja particionar manualmente o seu\n" -"disco rígido. Tenha cuidado -- é uma opção potente mas perigosa e pode\n" -"muito facilmente perder todos os seus dados. É por isso que esta opção\n" -"é apenas recomendada a alguém que já tenha feito alguma coisa parecida\n" -"anteriormente e tenha alguma experiência. Para mais instruções em como\n" -"usar a utilidade DiskDrake, refira-se à secção ``Gerir As Suas Partições''\n" -"no ``Guia Inicial''." +"Agora você precisa decidir onde deseja instalar o sistema operacional " +"Mageia\n" +"em seu disco rígido. Se o seu disco rígido estiver vazio ou se um sistema\n" +"operacional existente estiver usando todo o espaço disponível, você terá " +"que\n" +"particionar o disco. Basicamente, particionar um disco rígido significa " +"dividi-lo\n" +"logicamente para criar o espaço necessário para instalar o novo sistema " +"Mageia.\n" +"\n" +"Como o processo de particionamento de um disco rígido é geralmente " +"irreversível\n" +"e pode levar a perdas de dados, o particionamento pode ser intimidante e " +"estressante\n" +"para o usuário inexperiente. Felizmente, o DrakX inclui um assistente que " +"simplifica\n" +"esse processo. Antes de continuar com esta etapa, leia o restante desta " +"seção e,\n" +"acima de tudo, tome seu tempo.\n" +"\n" +"Dependendo da configuração do seu disco rígido, várias opções estão " +"disponíveis:\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Esta opção realizará um particionamento automático do(s) seu(s)\n" +"disco(s) vazio(s). Se você usar esta opção, não haverá mais solicitações.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". O assistente detectou uma ou mais partições Linux existentes\n" +"em seu disco rígido. Se você quiser usá-las, escolha esta opção. Você será\n" +"então solicitado a escolher os pontos de montagem associados a cada uma\n" +"das partições. Os pontos de montagem legados são selecionados por padrão e,\n" +"na maioria das vezes, é uma boa ideia mantê-los.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Se o Microsoft Windows estiver instalado em seu disco rígido e\n" +"ocupar todo o espaço disponível, você terá que criar espaço livre para o\n" +"GNU/Linux. Para fazer isso, você pode excluir a partição e os dados do\n" +"Microsoft Windows (veja a solução ``Apagar todo o disco'') ou redimensionar\n" +"a partição FAT ou NTFS do Microsoft Windows. O redimensionamento pode ser\n" +"realizado sem perda de dados, desde que você tenha desfragmentado a\n" +"partição do Windows anteriormente. É altamente recomendável fazer backup\n" +"dos seus dados. Usar esta opção é recomendado se você deseja utilizar tanto\n" +"o Mageia quanto o Microsoft Windows no mesmo computador.\n" +"\n" +" Antes de escolher esta opção, por favor, entenda que após este " +"procedimento,\n" +"o tamanho da sua partição do Microsoft Windows será menor do que era\n" +"inicialmente. Você terá menos espaço livre no Microsoft Windows para " +"armazenar\n" +"seus dados ou para instalar novos softwares.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Se você deseja excluir todos os dados e todas as partições\n" +"presentes em seu disco rígido e substituí-los pelo novo sistema Mageia,\n" +"escolha esta opção. Tenha cuidado, pois você não poderá desfazer esta\n" +"operação após confirmar.\n" +"\n" +" !! Se você escolher esta opção, todos os dados em seu disco serão " +"excluídos. !!\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Esta opção aparece quando o disco rígido é totalmente ocupado\n" +"pelo Microsoft Windows. Escolher esta opção excluirá tudo no disco e " +"começará\n" +"do zero, particionando tudo a partir do início.\n" +"\n" +" !! Se você escolher esta opção, todos os dados em seu disco serão " +"perdidos. !!\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Escolha esta opção se você deseja particionar seu disco rígido\n" +"manualmente. Tenha cuidado -- é uma escolha poderosa, mas perigosa, e você\n" +"pode facilmente perder todos os seus dados. Por isso, esta opção é " +"realmente\n" +"recomendada apenas se você já tiver feito algo semelhante antes e tiver " +"alguma\n" +"experiência. Para mais instruções sobre como usar a ferramenta DiskDrake,\n" +"consulte a seção Gerenciando Suas Partições'' no Guia do Iniciante''." #: ../help.pm:377 #, c-format @@ -833,7 +862,7 @@ msgstr "Usar partição existente" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format msgid "Use the free space on the Microsoft Windows® partition" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Usar o espaço livre da partição Microsoft Windows®" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format @@ -920,20 +949,20 @@ msgstr "Gerar disquete auto-instal" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Replay" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Replay" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Automated" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Automático" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Save packages selection" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Salvar a seleção de pacotes" #: ../help.pm:408 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you chose to reuse some legacy GNU/Linux partitions, you may wish to\n" "reformat some of them and erase any data they contain. To do so, please\n" @@ -957,30 +986,32 @@ msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you wish to select partitions which will be checked for\n" "bad blocks on the disk." msgstr "" -"Se escolher usar algumas partições GNU/Linux, pode querer formatar\n" -"algumas delas e apagar os dados nelas contidos. Para o fazer, por favor\n" -"escolha essas partições.\n" +"Se você optou por reutilizar algumas partições GNU/Linux legadas, pode\n" +"ser necessário reformatar algumas delas e apagar qualquer dado que\n" +"contenham. Para fazer isso, selecione essas partições também.\n" "\n" -"Por favor note que não é necessário formatar todas a partições já\n" -"existentes. Tem que formatar as partições que tenham sistemas\n" -"operativos (tais como \"/\", \"/usr\" ou \"/var\") mas não tem que\n" -"formatar partições que contenham dados que deseja manter\n" -"(tipicamente \"/home\").\n" +"Por favor, observe que não é necessário reformatar todas as partições\n" +"existentes. Você deve reformatar as partições que contêm o sistema " +"operacional\n" +"(como \"/\", \"/usr\" ou \"/var\"), mas não é necessário reformatar as " +"partições que\n" +"contêm dados que você deseja manter (tipicamente \"/home\").\n" "\n" -"Por favor tenha atenção quando seleccionar as partições. A seguir à\n" -"formatação estar completa, todos os dados nas partições seleccionadas\n" -"serão perdidos e não será capaz de os recuperar.\n" +"Tenha cuidado ao selecionar partições. Após a formatação ser concluída,\n" +"todos os dados nas partições selecionadas serão excluídos e não será " +"possível\n" +"recuperá-los.\n" "\n" -"Clique em \"%s\" quando estiver pronto para formatar as partições.\n" +"Clique em \"%s\" quando estiver pronto para formatar as partições\n" "\n" -"Clique em \"%s\" se deseja escolher outra partição para o seu novo\n" -"sistema operativo Mageia.\n" +"Clique em \"%s\" se desejar escolher outra partição para a nova instalação\n" +"do sistema operacional Mageia.\n" "\n" -"Clique em \"%s\" se deseja escolher partições para verificar se\n" -"fisicamente há blocos defeituosos (\"bad blocks\") no disco." +"Clique em \"%s\" se desejar selecionar partições que serão verificadas\n" +"quanto a blocos defeituosos no disco." #: ../help.pm:437 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "By the time you install Mageia, it's likely that some packages will\n" "have been updated since the initial release. Bugs may have been fixed,\n" @@ -994,22 +1025,21 @@ msgid "" "will appear: review the selection, and press \"%s\" to retrieve and install\n" "the selected package(s), or \"%s\" to abort." msgstr "" -"No momento que instala o Mageia, é quase certo que alguns\n" -"pacotes terão sido actualizados desde a distribuição inicial. Alguns\n" -"erros podem ter sido corrigidos, e problemas de segurança resolvidos.\n" -"Para lhe permitir beneficiar destas actualizações, está agora apto\n" -"a fazer a transferi-las da Internet. Escolha \"%s\" se tem uma\n" -"conexão Internet activa, ou \"%s\" se preferir instalar os\n" -"pacotes actualizados mais tarde.\n" -"\n" -"Ao escolher \"%s\" mostra uma lista das localizações web de onde as\n" -"actualizações podem ser transferidas. Deve escolher a que estiver\n" -"mais perto de si. Irá aparecer uma selecção de pacotes em árvore:\n" -"reveja a selecção, e clique em \"%s\" para transferir e instalar os\n" -"pacotes seleccionados, ou clique em \"%s\" para abortar." +"Ao instalar o Mageia, é provável que alguns pacotes tenham sido\n" +"atualizados desde o lançamento inicial. Bugs podem ter sido corrigidos,\n" +"questões de segurança resolvidas. Para permitir que você se beneficie\n" +"dessas atualizações, agora você pode baixá-las da Internet. Marque \"%s\"\n" +" se você tiver uma conexão com a Internet funcionando, ou \"%s\" se\n" +"preferir instalar pacotes atualizados mais tarde.\n" +"\n" +"Escolher \"%s\" exibirá uma lista de locais na web dos quais as " +"atualizações\n" +"podem ser recuperadas. Você deve escolher um próximo a você. Uma árvore\n" +"de seleção de pacotes aparecerá: revise a seleção e pressione \"%s\"para\n" +"recuperar e instalar os pacotes selecionados, ou \"%s\" para abortar." #: ../help.pm:450 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, DrakX will allow you to choose the security level you desire\n" "for your machine. As a rule of thumb, the security level should be set\n" @@ -1024,19 +1054,19 @@ msgid "" "Fill the \"%s\" field with the e-mail address of the person responsible for\n" "security. Security messages will be sent to that address." msgstr "" -"Nesta fase, o DrakX irá permitir-lhe escolher o nível de segurança desejado\n" -"para a sua máquina. Como regra de ouro, o nível de segurança deve ser maior\n" -"quando a máquina contém informação crucial, ou quando está directamente\n" -"exposta à internet. Porém, um nível de segurança superior, geralmente é\n" -"obtido á custa de menos facilidade de uso/manuseamento.\n" -"\n" -"Se não sabe o que escolher, deixe o valor predefinido. Poderá alterá-lo\n" -"mais tarde com a ferramenta draksec, que faz parte do Centro de Controlo\n" -"Mageia.\n" +"Neste ponto, o DrakX permitirá que você escolha o nível de segurança\n" +"desejado para sua máquina. Como regra geral, o nível de segurança deve ser\n" +"definido mais alto se a máquina contiver dados cruciais ou se estiver " +"diretamente\n" +"exposta à Internet. O compromisso é que um nível de segurança mais alto\n" +"geralmente é obtido à custa da facilidade de uso.\n" +"\n" +"Se você não souber o que escolher, mantenha a opção padrão. Você poderá\n" +"alterá-la posteriormente com a ferramenta draksec, que faz parte do\n" +"Centro de Controle do Mageia.\n" "\n" -"Preencha o campo \"%s\" com o endereço de correio electrónico da pessoa\n" -"responsável pela segurança. As mensagens de segurança serão enviadas\n" -"para esse endereço." +"Preencha o campo \"%s\" com o endereço de e-mail da pessoa responsável\n" +"pela segurança. Mensagens de segurança serão enviadas para esse endereço." #: ../help.pm:461 #, c-format @@ -1044,23 +1074,26 @@ msgid "Security Administrator" msgstr "Administrador de Segurança" #: ../help.pm:464 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1083,7 +1116,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1091,7 +1125,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1110,100 +1145,96 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" -"Neste fase, precisa escolher que partições vão ser utilizadas para a\n" -"instalação do seu sistema Mageia. Se já foram definidas partições,\n" -"seja por uma instalação anterior do GNU/Linux seja por outra ferramenta de\n" -"particionamento, pode utilizar-las . Senão, precisa definir partições no\n" -"disco rígido.\n" -"\n" -"Para criar partições, tem primeiro que escolher um disco rígido. Pode\n" -"escolher o disco que quer particionar clicando em ``hda'' para o primeiro\n" -"disco IDE, ``hdb'' para o segundo, ``sda'' para o primeiro disco SCSI e\n" -"por aí adiante.\n" +"Neste ponto, você precisa escolher quais partições serão usadas para a\n" +"instalação do seu sistema Mageia. Se as partições já foram definidas, seja\n" +"a partir de uma instalação anterior do GNU/Linux ou por outra ferramenta\n" +"de particionamento, você pode usar as partições existentes. Caso contrário,\n" +"as partições do disco rígido devem ser definidas.\n" "\n" -"Para particionar o disco selecionado, pode usar estas opções:\n" +"Para criar partições, você deve primeiro selecionar um disco rígido. Você\n" +"pode selecionar o disco para particionamento clicando em ``hda'' para o\n" +"primeiro disco IDE, ``hdb'' para o segundo, ``sda'' para o primeiro disco " +"SCSI\n" +"e assim por diante.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": esta opção apaga todas as partições do disco seleccionado\n" +"Para particionar o disco rígido selecionado, você pode usar estas opções:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": esta opção permite criar automaticamente partições\n" -"ext3 e partições swap no espaço livre do seu disco\n" +" * \"%s\": esta opção exclui todas as partições no disco rígido selecionado\n" "\n" -"\"%s\": dá acesso para opções adicionais:\n" +" * \"%s\": esta opção permite criar automaticamente partições ext4 e swap\n" +"no espaço livre do seu disco rígido\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": grava a tabela das partições para uma disquete. Útil para\n" -"mais tarde recuperar a tabela das partições, se necessário. É fortemente\n" -"recomendado que execute este passo.\n" +"\"%s\": oferece acesso a recursos adicionais:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": permite restaurar uma tabela de partições anteriormente\n" -"gravada numa disquete;\n" +" * \"%s\": salva a tabela de partições em um disquete. Útil para " +"recuperação\n" +"da tabela de partições mais tarde, se necessário. Recomenda-se fortemente\n" +"que você realize esta etapa.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": se a sua tabela das partições está danificada, pode-a tentar\n" -"recuperar com esta opção. Por favor esteja atento e lembre-se que isto\n" -"nem sempre resulta.\n" +" * \"%s\": permite restaurar uma tabela de partições previamente salva a\n" +"partir\n" +"de um disquete.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": apaga todas as alterações e recarrega a tabela de partições\n" -"que estava originalmente no disco.\n" +" * \"%s\": se a tabela de partições estiver danificada, você pode tentar " +"recuperá-la\n" +"usando esta opção. Por favor, tenha cuidado e lembre-se de que isso nem\n" +"sempre\n" +"funciona.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": desmarque esta opção para forçar os utilizadores a montar\n" -"e desmontar manualmente as médias amoviveis como disquetes e CD-ROMs.\n" +" * \"%s\": descarta todas as alterações e recarrega a tabela de partições " +"que\n" +"estava originalmente no disco rígido.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": use esta opção se deseja usar um assistente para particionar o\n" -"disco rígido. Isto é recomendado se não tem um bom conhecimento de \n" -"como se faz um bom particionamento do disco.\n" +" * \"%s\": esmarcar esta opção forçará os usuários a montar e desmontar\n" +"manualmente mídias removíveis, como disquetes e CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": use esta opção para cancelar as alterações.\n" +" * \"%s\": use esta opção se você deseja usar um assistente para particionar " +"seu\n" +"disco rígido. Isso é recomendado se você não tiver um bom entendimento de\n" +"particionamento.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": permite acções suplementares nas partições (tipo, opções,\n" -"formatar) e dá mais informações sobre o disco rígido.\n" +" * \"%s\": use esta opção para cancelar suas alterações.\n" +" \n" +" * \"%s\": permite ações adicionais em partições (tipo, opções, formato)\n" +"e fornece mais informações sobre o disco rígido.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": quando tiver acabado de particionar o seu disco rígido, isto irá\n" -"gravar as suas alterações no disco.\n" +" * \"%s\": quando você terminar de particionar seu disco rígido, isso " +"salvará\n" +"suas alterações no disco.\n" "\n" -"Quando a definir o tamanho de uma partição, pode finalmente configurar\n" -"o tamanho usando as teclas de setas do seu teclado.\n" +"Ao definir o tamanho de uma partição, você pode ajustar o tamanho da\n" +"partição com precisão usando as teclas de seta do teclado.\n" "\n" -"Nota: pode chegar a qualquer opção usando o teclado. Navegue através\n" -"das partições usando as teclas [Tab] e as setas [Subir/Descer].\n" +"Nota: você pode acessar qualquer opção usando o teclado. Navegue pelas\n" +"partições usando [Tab] e as setas [Para Cima/Para Baixo].\n" "\n" -"Quando uma partição é selecionada, pode usar:\n" +"Quando uma partição está selecionada, você pode usar:\n" "\n" -" * Ctrl-c para criar uma nova partição (quando escolhe uma partição vazia)\n" +" * Ctrl-c para criar uma nova partição (quando uma partição vazia está\n" +"selecionada)\n" "\n" -" * Ctrl-d para apagar uma partição\n" +" * Ctrl-d para excluir uma partição\n" "\n" " * Ctrl-m para definir o ponto de montagem\n" "\n" -"Para obter mais informações acerca dos diferentes tipos de sistemas de\n" -"ficheiros disponíveis, por favor leia o capítulo ext2FS do ``Manual de\n" -"Referência''.\n" -"\n" -"Se está a instalar numa máquina PPC, irá querer criar umas pequena partição\n" -"de arranque HFS com pelo menos 1MB, que será usada pelo carregador de\n" -"arranque yaboot. Se optar por criar uma partição maior, tipo 50MB, pode-lhe\n" -"ser útil para gravar um kernel e a uma imagem ramdisk para situações de\n" -"de emergência." +"Para obter informações sobre os diferentes tipos de sistemas de arquivos\n" +"disponíveis, consulte o capítulo ext2FS do ``Manual de Referência''.\n" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Save partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Salvar tabela de partições" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Restore partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Restaurar tabela de partições" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Rescue partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Recuperar tabela de partições" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1213,12 +1244,12 @@ msgstr "Automontagem dos dispositivos amovíveis" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Wizard" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Assistente" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Undo" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Desfazer" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1226,22 +1257,26 @@ msgid "Toggle between normal/expert mode" msgstr "Alterna entre os modos normal/perito" #: ../help.pm:536 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1252,41 +1287,50 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" -"Mais do que uma partição Microsoft foi detectada no seu disco rígido.\n" -"Por favor escolha qual deseja redimencionar para poder instalar o seu\n" -"novo sistema operativo Mageia.\n" +"Mais de uma partição Microsoft foi detectada no seu disco rígido. Por " +"favor,\n" +"escolha a que deseja redimensionar para instalar seu novo sistema " +"operacional\n" +"Mageia..\n" "\n" -"Cada partição é listada da seguinte maneira: \"Nome Linux\",\n" -"\"Nome Windows\", \"Capacidade\".\n" +"Cada partição é listada da seguinte forma: \"Nome do Linux\", \"Nome do " +"Windows\",\n" +" \"Capacidade\".\n" "\n" -"O \"Nome Linux\" é estruturado: \"tipo de disco rígido\",\n" -" \"numero de disco\", \"numero da partição\" (por exemplo, \"hda1\").\n" +"\"Nome do Linux\" é estruturado como: \"tipo de disco rígido\", \"número do " +"disco rígido\",\n" +"\"número da partição\" (por exemplo, \"hda1\")\n" "\n" -"O \"Tipo de Disco\" é \"hd\" se o disco rígido é IDE e \"sd\" se é um\n" -"disco rígido SCSI.\n" +"\"Tipo de disco rígido\" é \"hd\" se o seu disco rígido for IDE e \"sd\" se " +"for SCSI.\n" "\n" -"O \"Numero de disco\" é sempre uma letra depois de \"hd\" ou \"sd\".\n" -"Com os discos rígidos IDE:\n" +"\"Número do disco rígido\" é sempre uma letra após \"hd\" ou \"sd\". Com " +"discos\n" +"rígidos IDE:\n" "\n" -" * \"a\" significa \"disco rígido master no controlador IDE principal\";\n" +" * \"a\" significa \"disco rígido mestre no controlador IDE primário\";\n" "\n" -" * \"b\" significa \"disco rígido slave no controlador IDE principal\";\n" +" * \"b\" significa \"disco rígido escravo no controlador IDE primário\";\n" "\n" -" * \"c\" significa \"disco rígido master no controlador IDE segundario\";\n" +" * \"c\" significa \"disco rígido mestre no controlador IDE secundário\";\n" "\n" -" * \"d\" significa \"disco rígido slave no controlador IDE segundario\";\n" +" * \"d\" significa \"disco rígido escravo no controlador IDE secundário\"..\n" "\n" -"Com os discos rígidos SCSI, um \"a\" significa \"SCSI ID mais baixo\",\n" -"um \"b\" significa \"segundo SCSI ID mais baixo\", etc.\n" +"Com discos rígidos SCSI, um \"a\" significa \"ID SCSI mais baixo\", um \"b\" " +"significa\n" +"\"segundo ID SCSI mais baixo\", e assim por diante.\n" "\n" -"O \"nome Windows\" é a letra do seu disco rígido sob Windows\n" -"(o primeiro disco ou partição é chamado \"C:\")." +"\"Nome do Windows\" é a letra do seu disco rígido no Windows (o primeiro " +"disco\n" +"ou partição é chamado de \"C:\")." #: ../help.pm:567 #, c-format @@ -1301,7 +1345,7 @@ msgstr "" "clique no botão \"%s\" para obter a lista completa dos países." #: ../help.pm:572 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "This step is activated only if an existing GNU/Linux partition has been\n" "found on your machine.\n" @@ -1312,7 +1356,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1324,30 +1369,31 @@ msgid "" "running version \"8.1\" or later. Performing an upgrade on versions prior\n" "to Mageia version \"8.1\" is not recommended." msgstr "" -"Este passo só fica disponível se uma partição GNU/Linux existente for\n" -"encontrada na sua máquina.\n" -"\n" -"O DrakX agora precisa saber se deseja fazer uma nova instalação ou uma\n" -"actualização num sistema Mageia existente:\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": Para a maior parte, isto apaga completamente o sistema antigo.\n" -"No entanto, dependendo no seu esquema de particionamento, pode prevenir\n" -"que parte dos seus dados existentes (principalmente os directórios \"home" -"\")\n" -"sejam substituídos. Se desejar alterar como o particionamento dos seus\n" -"discos rígidos é feito, ou mudar o seu sistema de ficheiros, deve usar esta " -"opção.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": Este tipo de instalação permite actualizar os pacotes " -"actualmente\n" -"instalados no seu sistema Mageia. O seu actual esquema de\n" -"particionamento, assim como os dados dos utilizadores não serão alterados.\n" -"A maior parte dos outros passos da configuração permanece disponível e " -"similar a uma instalação standard.\n" -"\n" -"A opção ``Actualizar'' deverá funcionar correctamente nos sistemas\n" -"Mageia versão \"8.1\" ou superior. É desaconselhável actualizar\n" -"versões anteriores à versão \"8.1\" do Mageia." +"Esta etapa é ativada somente se uma partição GNU/Linux existente\n" +"foi encontrada em sua máquina.\n" +"\n" +"O DrakX agora precisa saber se você deseja realizar uma nova instalação\n" +"ou uma atualização de um sistema Mageia existente:\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Na maior parte, isso apaga completamente o sistema antigo.\n" +"No entanto, dependendo do seu esquema de particionamento, você pode\n" +"evitar que alguns dos seus dados existentes (notavelmente diretórios " +"\"home\")\n" +"sejam sobrescritos. Se você deseja alterar a forma como seus discos rígidos\n" +"estão particionados ou mudar o sistema de arquivos, deve usar esta opção.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". TEsta classe de instalação permite atualizar os pacotes " +"atualmente\n" +"instalados em seu sistema Mageia. Seu esquema de particionamento atual e\n" +"dados de usuário não serão alterados. A maioria das outras etapas de " +"configuração\n" +"permanece disponíveis e são semelhantes a uma instalação padrão.\n" +"\n" +"Usar a opção ``Atualizar'' deve funcionar bem em sistemas Mageia com a " +"versão\n" +"\"8.1\" ou posterior. Realizar uma atualização em versões anteriores à " +"\"8.1\" do Mageia,\n" +"não é recomendado." #: ../help.pm:594 #, c-format @@ -1386,7 +1432,7 @@ msgstr "" "lhe permita mudar o teclado entre uma disposição Latim uma não Latim." #: ../help.pm:612 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The first step is to choose your preferred language.\n" "\n" @@ -1428,46 +1474,52 @@ msgid "" "by the entire system. Running the command as a regular user will only\n" "change the language settings for that particular user." msgstr "" -"O primeiro passo, é escolher a sua linguagem preferida.\n" -"\n" -"A sua escolha da linguagem preferida irá afectar o instalador, a\n" -"documentação, e o sistema em geral. Primeiro seleccione a região\n" -"onde está localizado, depois a linguagem que fala.\n" -"\n" -"Ao clicar no botão \"%s\" irá permitir-lhe escolher outras linguagens\n" -"para instalar na sua área de trabalho, consequentemente instalará os\n" -"ficheiros para a documentação do sistema e aplicações referentes à\n" -"linguagem especificada . Porexemplo, se utilizadores espanhóis estão\n" -"para usar a sua máquina, escolha Inglês como linguagem predefinida\n" -"na vista em árvore e \"%s\" na secção Avançada.\n" -"\n" -"Sobre o suporte UTF-8 (unicode): Unicode é uma codificação de caracter\n" -"feito para cobrir todas as linguagens existentes. No entanto o seu suporte\n" -"completo em GNU/Linux ainda está a ser desenvolvido. Por essa razão,\n" -"o uso de UTF-8 em Mageia depende das escolhas do utilizador:\n" -"\n" -" * Se escolher uma linguagem com um forte legado de codificação\n" -"(linguagens latin1, Russo, Japonês, ChinêsCoreano, Tailandês, grego, turco,\n" -"maior parte de linguagens iso-8859-2), o legado da codificação será usado\n" -"por omissão\n" -"\n" -" * Outras linguagens irão usar unicode por omissão;\n" -"\n" -" * Finalmente, o unicode pode também ser forçado para uso através do\n" -"por um pedido do utilizador ao selecionar a opção \"%s\",\n" -"independentemente como as linguagens tenham sido escolhidas.\n" -"\n" -"Notar que não está limitado a escolher uma única linguagem adicional.\n" -"Pode escolher várias, ou até instala-las ao seleccionar a caixa\"%s\".\n" -"Seleccionar suporte para uma linguagem, quer dizer traduções, fontes,\n" -"verificadores de ortografia, etc., que será também instalados para essa\n" -"linguagem.\n" -"\n" -"Para trocar entre as várias linguagens instaladas no seu sistema, pode\n" -"correr o comando \"/usr/sbin/localedrake\" como \"root\" para mudar a\n" -"linguagem usada por todo o sistema. Correndo o comando como utilizador\n" -"normal , irá apenas mudar as configurações da linguagem para esse\n" -"utilizador em particular." +"O primeiro passo é escolher seu idioma preferido.\n" +"\n" +"Sua escolha de idioma preferido afetará o instalador, a documentação e o\n" +"sistema em geral. Primeiro, selecione a região em que você está localizado\n" +"e, em seguida, o idioma que você fala.\n" +"\n" +"Clicar no botão \"%s\" permitirá que você selecione outros idiomas a serem\n" +"instalados em sua estação de trabalho, instalando assim os arquivos " +"específicos\n" +"para documentação do sistema e aplicativos. Por exemplo, se usuários de\n" +"espanhol forem usar sua máquina, selecione o inglês como idioma padrão na\n" +"visualização em árvore e \"%s\" na seção Avançado.\n" +"\n" +"Sobre o suporte a UTF-8 (unicode): Unicode é uma nova codificação de " +"caracteres\n" +"destinada a cobrir todos os idiomas existentes. No entanto, o suporte " +"completo a\n" +"ela no GNU/Linux ainda está em desenvolvimento. Por essa razão, o uso de " +"UTF-8\n" +"no Mageia dependerá das escolhas do usuário:\n" +"\n" +" * Se você escolher um idioma com uma codificação legada forte (idiomas " +"latin1,\n" +"russo, japonês, chinês, coreano, tailandês, grego, turco, a maioria dos " +"idiomas\n" +"iso-8859-2), a codificação legada será usada por padrão;\n" +"\n" +" * Outros idiomas usarão unicode por padrão;\n" +"\n" +" * Se forem necessários dois ou mais idiomas, e esses idiomas não usarem\n" +"a mesma codificação, então unicode será usado para todo o sistema;\n" +"\n" +" * Finalmente, o unicode também pode ser forçado para uso em todo o\n" +"sistema a pedido do usuário, selecionando a opção \"%s\" independentemente\n" +"dos idiomas escolhidos.\n" +"\n" +"Observe que você não está limitado a escolher um único idioma adicional.\n" +"Você pode escolher vários ou até mesmo instalá-los todos selecionando a\n" +"caixa \"%s\". Selecionar o suporte para um idioma significa que traduções,\n" +"fontes, corretores ortográficos, etc., também serão instalados para esse " +"idioma.\n" +"\n" +"Para alternar entre os vários idiomas instalados em seu sistema, você pode\n" +"executar o comando \"localedrake\" como \"root\" para mudar o idioma usado\n" +"por todo o sistema. Executar o comando como um usuário regular alterará\n" +"apenas as configurações de idioma para esse usuário específico." #: ../help.pm:650 #, c-format @@ -1477,7 +1529,7 @@ msgstr "Espanhol" #: ../help.pm:643 #, c-format msgid "Use Unicode by default" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Usar Unicode por padrão" #: ../help.pm:646 #, c-format @@ -1605,7 +1657,7 @@ msgstr "" "esta opção apenas se souber o que está a fazer." #: ../help.pm:745 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Now, it's time to select a printing system for your computer. Other\n" "operating systems may offer you one, but Mageia offers two. Each of\n" @@ -1632,30 +1684,35 @@ msgid "" "system you may change it by running PrinterDrake from the Mageia\n" "Control Center and clicking on the \"%s\" button." msgstr "" -"Agora, é tempo de escolher o sistema de impressão para o seu computador.\n" -"Outros sistemas operativos podem oferecer um, mas o Mageia\n" -"oferece dois. Cada um dos sistemas de impressão é bem servido para tipos\n" -"particulares de configuração.\n" -"\n" -".*.\"%s\" -- que é um anacronismo para ``imprimir, não meter em fila'',\n" -"é a escolha se tem uma conexão directa à sua impressora e deseja poder\n" -"parar tudo nos erros de impressão, e não tem impressoras em rede.\n" -"(\"%s\" só irá gerir os casos mais simples de rede e é algo lento quando\n" -"usado em redes). Recomenda-se que use \"lpd\" se é a sua primeira\n" -"experiência com GNU/Linux.\n" -"\n" -".*.\"%s\" -- O `` Sistema de Impressão Comum Unix'', é excelente para\n" -"imprimir para a sua impressora local e também para o outro lado do\n" -"mundo. É simples e pode agir como servidor ou cliente para o antigo\n" -"sistema de impressão \"lpd\". Portanto, é compatível com os sistemas\n" -"anteriores. Pode fazer muitas coisas, mas a configuração de base é\n" -"quase tão simples como \"lpd\". Se precisa dele para emular um\n" -"servidor \"lpd\", tem que activar o servidor \"cups-lpd\". \"%s\" tem\n" -"interfaces gráficos para imprimir ou escolher as opções de impressão.\n" -"\n" -"Poderá mudar a sua escolha de sistema após a instalação correndo o\n" -"PrinterDrake a partir do Centro de Controlo Mageia e clicando\n" -"no botão \"%s\"." +"Agora é hora de selecionar um sistema de impressão para o seu\n" +"computador. Outros sistemas operacionais podem oferecer apenas\n" +"um, mas o Mageia oferece dois. Cada um dos sistemas de impressão\n" +"é mais adequado para determinados tipos de configuração.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\" -- que é uma sigla para \"print, do not queue\" (imprimir, não\n" +"enfileirar), é a escolha ideal se você tiver uma conexão direta com sua\n" +"impressora, quiser poder agir rapidamente em caso de atolamento de\n" +"papel, e não tiver impressoras em rede. (\"%s\" lida apenas com casos\n" +" muito simples de rede e é um pouco lento quando usado em redes).\n" +"Recomenda-se o uso de \"pdq\" se esta for sua primeira experiência com\n" +"GNU/Linux.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\" representa o \"Common Unix Printing System\" (Sistema Comum de\n" +"Impressão Unix) e é uma excelente escolha para imprimir na sua impressora\n" +"local ou em uma localizada do outro lado do planeta. É simples de " +"configurar\n" +"e pode atuar como servidor ou cliente para o antigo sistema de impressão\n" +"\"lpd\", sendo compatível com sistemas operacionais mais antigos que ainda\n" +"possam precisar de serviços de impressão. Embora bastante poderoso, a\n" +"configuração básica é quase tão fácil quanto \"pdq\". Se você precisar " +"emular\n" +"um servidor \"lpd\", certifique-se de ativar o daemon \"cups-lpd\".\n" +"\"%s\" inclui interfaces gráficas para impressão ou escolha de opções de\n" +"impressora e para gerenciamento da impressora.\n" +"\n" +"Se você fizer uma escolha agora e depois perceber que não gosta do sistema\n" +"de impressão escolhido, você pode alterá-lo executando o PrinterDrake no\n" +"Centro de Controle do Mageia e clicando no botão \"%s\"." #: ../help.pm:768 #, c-format @@ -1665,7 +1722,7 @@ msgstr "pdq" #: ../help.pm:724 #, c-format msgid "CUPS" -msgstr "" +msgstr "CUPS" #: ../help.pm:724 #, c-format @@ -1724,7 +1781,7 @@ msgstr "" "presente no seu sistema, pode clicar no botão e escolher outro controaldor." #: ../help.pm:794 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "As a review, DrakX will present a summary of information it has gathered\n" "about your system. Depending on the hardware installed on your machine, you\n" @@ -1787,77 +1844,75 @@ msgid "" "on your machine. If you plan to use this machine as a server it's a good\n" "idea to review this setup." msgstr "" -"Em revisão, o DrakX irá apresentar um sumário que junta a informação\n" -"recolhida sobre o seu sistema. Dependendo do material instalado na sua\n" -" máquina, poderá ter uma ou todas das seguintes entradas.\n" -"Cada entrada é feita sobre o item de material para ser configurado,\n" -"seguido de um rápido sumário da corrente configuração.\n" -"Clica no botão correspondente \"%s\" para fazer as alterações.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": verifique a configuração actual do mapa do teclado corrente\n" -"e mude-a se necessário.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": verifique a selecção de país actual. Se não estiver neste país,\n" -"clique no botão \"%s\" e escolha outro. Se o seu país não aparecer na lista\n" -"mostrada, clica no botão \"%s\" para obter a lista completa de países.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": por omissão, o DrakX escolhe o fuso horário do país\n" -"escolhido. Pode clicar no botão \"%s\" se esta não é a opção correcta.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": verifique a actual configuração do rato e clique no botão para\n" -"mudar se necessário.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": clique no botão \"%s\" para abrir o assistente de configuração\n" -"de impressoras. Consulte o capítulo correspondente do ``Guia do " -"Utilizador'',\n" -"para mais informação sobre como configurar uma nova impressora.\n" -"O interface apresentado no nosso manual, é similar ao usado na instalação.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": se uma placa de som for detectada no seu sistema,será mostrada\n" -"aqui. SE notar que a placa de som não é actualmente presente no seu\n" -"sistema, pode clicar no botão para escolher um controlador diferente.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": se tem uma placa de TV, é aqui que a informação acerca da\n" -"configuração é mostrada, Se tem uma placa de TV e não é detectada,\n" -"clique em \"%s\" para a tentar configurar manualmente.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": pode clicar em \"%s\" para mudar os parâmetros associados\n" -"com a placa se acha que a configuração está errada.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": por omissão, o DrakX configura o seu interface gráfico nas\n" -"resoluções \"800x600\" ou \"1024x768\". Se isso não lhe serve, pode\n" -"clicar em \"%s\" para configurar o seu interface gráfico.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": se deseja configurar a sua Internet ou acesso de rede local\n" -"pode fazê-lo. Refira-se a documentação impressa ou use o Centro de\n" -"Controlo do Mageia a seguir a instalação ter terminado de\n" -"beneficiar da ajuda incluída.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": permite-lhe configurar endereços HTTP e FTP proxy se a máquina\n" -"onde está a instalar é para ser localizada atrás de um servidor proxy.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": esta entrada permite-lhe redefinir o nível de segurança como\n" -"configurado num passo anterior.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": se planeia ligar a sua máquina à Internet, é uma boa ideia\n" -"proteger-se de intrusões ao configurar uma firewall. Consultar secção\n" -"correspondente do ``Guia de Utilizador'' para detalhes acerca de como\n" -"configurar uma firewall.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": se deseja mudar a configuração do carregador de arranque,\n" -"clique nesse botão. Isto deveria ser reservado aos utilizadores\n" -"avançados.Referira-se à documentação impressa, ou à linha de ajuda\n" -"sobre a configuração de carregador de arranque (bootloader) no\n" -"Centro de Controlo Mageia.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": através desta entrada pode ajustar quais os serviços que serão\n" -"executados na sua máquina. Se planeia configurar esta máquina como\n" -"um servidor, é uma boa ideia rever a configuração." +"Como revisão, o DrakX apresentará um resumo das informações que ele\n" +"coletou sobre o seu sistema. Dependendo do hardware instalado na sua\n" +"máquina, você poderá ver algumas ou todas as seguintes entradas. Cada\n" +"entrada é composta pelo item de hardware a ser configurado, seguido por\n" +"um breve resumo da configuração atual. Clique no botão \"%s\"\n" +"correspondente para fazer a alteração.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": verificar a configuração atual do mapa de teclado e altere-a se\n" +"necessário.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": verifique a seleção atual do país. Se você não estiver neste " +"país,\n" +"clique no botão \"%s\" e escolha outro. Se o seu país não estiver na lista\n" +"exibida, clique no botão \"%s\" para obter a lista completa de países.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": padrão, o DrakX deduz seu fuso horário com base no país " +"escolhido.\n" +"Você pode clicar no botão \"%s\" aqui se isso não estiver correto\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": verificar configuração atual do mouse e clique no botão para\n" +"alterá-la se necessário.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": se uma placa de som for detectada no seu sistema, ela será " +"exibida\n" +"aqui. Se você notar que a placa de som não é a que está presente no seu\n" +"sistema, você pode clicar no botão e escolher um driver diferente.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": se você tiver uma placa de TV, é aqui que as informações sobre a\n" +"sua configuração serão exibidas. Se você tiver uma placa de TV e ela não " +"for\n" +"detectada, clique em \"%s\" para tentar configurá-la manualmente.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": você pode clicar em \"%s\" para alterar os parâmetros associados " +"à\n" +"placa se achar que a configuração está errada..\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": por padrão, o DrakX configura sua interface gráfica em resolução\n" +"\"800x600\" ou \"1024x768\". Se isso não for adequado para você, clique\n" +"em \"%s\" para reconfigurar sua interface gráfica.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": se desejar configurar seu acesso à Internet ou rede local, você\n" +"pode fazê-lo agora. Consulte a documentação impressa ou use o Centro\n" +"de Controle do Mageia após a instalação ter sido concluída para aproveitar\n" +"a ajuda completa em linha.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": permite configurar endereços de proxy HTTP e FTP se a máquina\n" +"em que você está instalando estiver atrás de um servidor proxy.\n" +" * \"%s\": esta entrada permite redefinir o nível de segurança configurado\n" +"em uma etapa anterior .\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": se você planeja conectar sua máquina à Internet, é uma boa ideia\n" +"se proteger contra intrusões configurando um firewall. Consulte a seção\n" +"correspondente do ``Guia de Introdução'' para obter detalhes sobre as\n" +"configurações de firewall.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": se desejar alterar a configuração do carregador de " +"inicialização,\n" +"clique neste botão. Isso deve ser reservado para usuários avançados.\n" +"Consulte a documentação impressa ou a ajuda em linha sobre a configuração\n" +"do carregador de inicialização no Centro de Controle do Mageia.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": através desta entrada, você pode ajustar quais serviços serão\n" +"executados na sua máquina. Se planeja usar esta máquina como um servidor,\n" +"é uma boa ideia revisar essa configuração." #: ../help.pm:809 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "TV card" -msgstr "Placa ISDN" +msgstr "Placa de TV" #: ../help.pm:809 #, c-format @@ -1870,22 +1925,25 @@ msgid "Graphical Interface" msgstr "Interface gráfico" #: ../help.pm:861 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Choose the hard disk drive you want to erase in order to install your new\n" "Mageia partition. Be careful, all data on this drive will be lost\n" "and will not be recoverable!" msgstr "" -"Escolha o disco que deseja apagar para instalar a sua nova partição\n" -"Mageia. Tenha cuidado, todos os ficheiros no disco serão\n" -"perdidos de forma irrecuperável!" +"Escolha o disco rígido que você deseja apagar para instalar sua nova " +"partição\n" +"do Mageia. Cuidado, todos os dados neste disco serão perdidos e não poderão\n" +"ser recuperados!" #: ../help.pm:866 #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" @@ -1908,118 +1966,3 @@ msgstr "Próximo ->" #, c-format msgid "<- Previous" msgstr "<- Anterior" - -#~ msgid "" -#~ "\"%s\": clicking on the \"%s\" button will open the printer " -#~ "configuration\n" -#~ "wizard. Consult the corresponding chapter of the ``Starter Guide'' for " -#~ "more\n" -#~ "information on how to set up a new printer. The interface presented in " -#~ "our\n" -#~ "manual is similar to the one used during installation." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "\"%s\": ao clicar no botão \"%s\"irá iniciar o assistente de configuração " -#~ "de\n" -#~ "impressoras. Consulte o capítulo correspondente no ''Guia do " -#~ "Utilizador''\n" -#~ "para obter mais informações sobre como configurar uma nova impressora.\n" -#~ "O interface apresentado no nosso manual é semelhante ao usado durante\n" -#~ "a instalação." - -#~ msgid "" -#~ "This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your GNU/" -#~ "Linux\n" -#~ "system: you must enter the \"root\" password. \"Root\" is the system\n" -#~ "administrator and is the only user authorized to make updates, add " -#~ "users,\n" -#~ "change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short, \"root\" " -#~ "can\n" -#~ "do everything! That's why you must choose a password which is difficult " -#~ "to\n" -#~ "guess: DrakX will tell you if the password you chose is too simple. As " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "can see, you're not forced to enter a password, but we strongly advise\n" -#~ "against this. GNU/Linux is just as prone to operator error as any other\n" -#~ "operating system. Since \"root\" can overcome all limitations and\n" -#~ "unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly accessing the\n" -#~ "partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to become\n" -#~ "\"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password should be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and at least " -#~ "8\n" -#~ "characters long. Never write down the \"root\" password -- it makes it " -#~ "far\n" -#~ "too easy to compromise your system.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "One caveat: do not make the password too long or too complicated because " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "must be able to remember it!\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password will not be displayed on screen as you type it. To reduce " -#~ "the\n" -#~ "chance of a blind typing error you'll need to enter the password twice. " -#~ "If\n" -#~ "you do happen to make the same typing error twice, you'll have to use " -#~ "this\n" -#~ "``incorrect'' password the first time you'll try to connect as \"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you want an authentication server to control access to your computer,\n" -#~ "click on the \"%s\" button.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If your network uses either LDAP, NIS, or PDC Windows Domain " -#~ "authentication\n" -#~ "services, select the appropriate one for \"%s\". If you do not know " -#~ "which\n" -#~ "one to use, you should ask your network administrator.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you happen to have problems with remembering passwords, or if your\n" -#~ "computer will never be connected to the Internet and you absolutely " -#~ "trust\n" -#~ "everybody who uses your computer, you can choose to have \"%s\"." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Este é o ponto mais crucial de decisão para a segurança do seu sistema\n" -#~ "GNU/Linux: deve escolher a senha do \"root\". O \"root\" é o " -#~ "administrador\n" -#~ "do sistema e é o único utilizador autorizado para fazer actualizações,\n" -#~ "adicionar utilizadores, mudar a configuração global do sistema, e por aí " -#~ "a\n" -#~ " fora. Em poucas palavras, o \"root\" pode fazer tudo! É por isso que " -#~ "deve\n" -#~ "escolher uma senha que seja difícil de adivinhar: o DrakX irá-lhe dizer " -#~ "se\n" -#~ "a senha que escolheu é muito simples. Como pode ver, não é obrigado a\n" -#~ "digitar uma senha, mas aconselhamos vivamente a não o fazer.O GNU/Linux\n" -#~ "é tão propenso ao erro do operador como qualquer outro sistema " -#~ "operativo.\n" -#~ "Já que o \"root\" pode ultrapassar todas as limitações e " -#~ "involuntariamente\n" -#~ "apagar todos os dados nas partições ao aceder descuidadamente a estas,\n" -#~ "é muito importante que haja dificuldades em aceder/tornar-se \"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "A senha deve ser uma mistura de caracteres alfa numéricos e com pelos\n" -#~ "menos 8 caracteres de comprimento.Nunca aponte a senha do \"root\" --\n" -#~ "torna demasiado fácil comprometer o seu sistema.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Uma advertência: não faça a senha demasiado longa ou muito complicada\n" -#~ "para que seja capaz de se lembrar dela.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "A senha não vai ser mostrada no ecrã à medida que a escreve. Para " -#~ "reduzir\n" -#~ "a hipótese de ser mal digitado, é necessário que a senha seja digitada " -#~ "duas\n" -#~ "vezes. Se lhe acontecer o mesmo erro duas vezes, aí terá que usar essa\n" -#~ "senha ``incorrecta'' na primeira vez que tentar ligar-se como \"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Se deseja um servidor de autenticação para controlar o acesso ao seu\n" -#~ "computador, clique em \"%s\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Se a sua rede usa seja LDAP, NIS ou a autenticação de serviços para um\n" -#~ "domínio PDC Windows, seleccione o apropriado para \"%s\".\n" -#~ "Se não sabe qual usar, deve perguntar ao administrador da sua rede.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Se lhe acontecer ter problemas em relembrar senhas, ou se o seu\n" -#~ "computador nunca for conectado à Internet, se confia em toda a gente que\n" -#~ "usa o seu computador, aí pode escolher em ter \"%s\"." - -#~ msgid "authentication" -#~ msgstr "Autenticação" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/pt_BR.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/pt_BR.po index 9963f2803..4f0a4a43a 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/pt_BR.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/pt_BR.po @@ -1,46 +1,40 @@ -# translation of pt_BR.po to -# translation of pt_BR.po to Brazilian Portuguese -# tradução de DrakX-pt_BR.po para Português do Brasil -# DRAKX PT_BR PO FILE -# Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2005, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. -# Lisiane Sztoltz Teixeira <lisiane@mandriva.com> +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) YEAR THE PACKAGE'S COPYRIGHT HOLDER +# This file is distributed under the same license as the PACKAGE package. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. # -# Andrei Bosco Bezerra Torres <andrei_bosco@yahoo.com.br>, 2000, 2003. -# Bruno Dorfman Buys <brunobuys@zipmail.com.br>, 2002. -# Tiago da Cruz Bezerra <tiagocruz18@uol.com.br>,2002 2003, 2004. -# Ricardo de Castilho <cast_brasil@ig.com.br>, 2003. -# Carlinhos Cecconi <carlinux@terra.com.br>, 2003, 2004. -# Deivi Lopes Kuhn <deivikuhn@yahoo.com.br>, 2003, 2004. -# Cristiano Otto Von Trompczynski <cris@mandriva.com>, 2005. -# Arthur R. Mello <renato@conectiva.com.br>, 2005. -# Arthur Renato Mello <renato@conectiva.com.br>, 2005. -# Felipe Arruda <felipemiguel@gmail.com>, 2008. +# Translators: +# Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2024 +# Michael Martins, 2025 +# +#, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: pt_BR\n" +"Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2008-09-12 12:22+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2008-09-22 14:14-0300\n" -"Last-Translator: Felipe Arruda <felipemiguel@gmail.com>\n" -"Language-Team: Brazilian Portuguese <kde-i18n-pt_br@mail.kde.org>\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2024-09-04 17:33+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Michael Martins, 2025\n" +"Language-Team: Portuguese (Brazil) (https://app.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/" +"teams/9361/pt_BR/)\n" +"Language: pt_BR\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"X-Generator: KBabel 1.11.4\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n > 1);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n == 0 || n == 1) ? 0 : n != 0 && n % " +"1000000 == 0 ? 1 : 2;\n" #: ../help.pm:14 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Before continuing, you should carefully read the terms of the license. It\n" "covers the entire Mageia distribution. If you agree with all the\n" "terms it contains, check the \"%s\" box. If not, clicking on the \"%s\"\n" "button will reboot your computer." msgstr "" -"Antes de continuar, você deve ler com atenção os termos da licença. Ela \n" -"cobre a distribuição Mageia inteira. Se você concorda com todos os " -"termos,\n" -"clique em \"%s\". Se não concordar, clique no botão \"%s\"\n" +"Antes de continuar, você deve ler atentamente os termos da licença. Ela\n" +"cobre toda a distribuição Mageia. Se você concordar com todos os\n" +"termos, marque a caixa \"%s\". Caso contrário, clique no botão \"%s\"\n" "para reiniciar seu computador." #: ../help.pm:20 @@ -83,51 +77,49 @@ msgid "" "security), choose the desired user and window manager, then click on\n" "\"%s\". If you're not interested in this feature, uncheck the \"%s\" box." msgstr "" -"GNU/Linux é um sistema multiusuário, e isto significa que cada usuário pode\n" -"ter suas próprias preferências, seus próprios arquivos, e assim por diante. " -"Mas,\n" -"ao contrário do \"root\", que é o administrador do sistema, os usuários\n" -"adicionados aqui não terão direito de modificar nada, a não ser seus\n" -"próprios arquivos e suas próprias configurações, protegendo o sistema \n" -"contra mudanças involuntárias ou maliciosas, que poderiam impactar no " -"sistema como um todo. Você deverá criar ao menos uma\n" -"conta regular para você mesmo - esta é a conta que você deverá usar no seu\n" -"dia-a-dia. Embora seja muito prático acessar o sistema como \"root\" para " -"fazer tudo,\n" -"também pode ser muito perigoso! O menor engano pode fazer com que seu\n" -"sistema não funcione mais. Como usuário regular, mesmo cometendo um erro\n" -"sério, o pior que pode acontecer é você perder informação, mas não o " -"sistema\n" -"inteiro.\n" -"\n" -"Primeiro, você deve digitar o seu nome real. Isto não é obrigatório, é " -"claro,\n" -"pois você pode digitar, na verdade, o que você quiser.\n" -"O DrakX pegará a primeira palavra que você digitou na caixa e colocará\n" -"no campo \"%s\". Este é o nome que esse usuário específico utilizará para " -"acessar o sistema. Você pode mudá-lo, caso queira. Depois você deverá\n" -"digitar uma senha. Uma senha de usuário não-privilegiado (regular) não é " -"tão\n" -"crucial quanto a de \"root\", do ponto de vista da segurança. Mas isto não " -"é\n" -"razão para negligenciar esta senha, deixando-a em branco ou escolhendo uma\n" -"muito simples: mais tarde, seus arquivos poderão correr sérios riscos.\n" -"\n" -"Clicando em \"%s\" você poderá adicionar outros usuários. Adicione um\n" -"usuário para cada um dos seus amigos: seu pai ou sua irmã, por exemplo.\n" -"Depois que terminar de adicionar os usuários, clique em \"%s\".\n" -"\n" -"Clicando no botão \"%s\" você poderá mudar o \"shell\" padrão do usuário\n" -"(o padrão é o bash).\n" -"\n" -"Quando você terminar de adicionar usuários, você poderá escolher um usuário\n" -"para que ele acesse automaticamente o sistema quando o computador for " -"iniciado.\n" -"Caso você esteja interessado neste recurso (e não precisar de muita\n" -"segurança local), escolha o usuário e o gerenciador de janelas,\n" -"e então clique em \"%s\". Se não estiver interessado neste recurso, " +"GNU/Linux é um sistema multiusuário, o que significa que cada usuário pode\n" +"ter suas próprias preferências, seus próprios arquivos, e assim por diante.\n" +"Mas, ao contrário do \"root\", que é o administrador do sistema, os " +"usuários\n" +"que você adicionar neste ponto não terão autorização para alterar nada além\n" +"de seus próprios arquivos e configurações, protegendo o sistema de mudanças\n" +"não intencionais ou maliciosas que podem afetar o sistema como um todo.\n" +"Você precisa criar pelo menos um usuário comum para você mesmo -- essa\n" +"é a conta que deve ser usada no dia a dia. Embora seja muito\n" +"fácil entrar como \"root\" para fazer qualquer coisa, isso pode ser muito " +"perigoso!\n" +"Um erro simples pode fazer com que seu sistema não funcione mais. Se você\n" +"cometer um erro sério como usuário comum, o pior que pode acontecer é\n" +"perder algumas informações, mas não afetará todo o sistema.\n" +"\n" +"O primeiro campo pede um nome verdadeiro. Claro, isso não é obrigatório\n" +"-- você pode realmente digitar o que quiser. O DrakX usa a primeira\n" +"palavra que você digitar neste campo e a copia para o campo \"%s\",\n" +"que é o nome que esse usuário usará para fazer login no sistema.\n" +"Se quiser, você pode substituir o padrão e alterar o nome do usuário.\n" +"O próximo passo é inserir uma senha. Do ponto de vista de segurança,\n" +"a senha de um usuário não privilegiado (comum) não é tão crucial quanto\n" +"a senha do \"root\", mas isso não é motivo para negligenciá-la, deixando\n" +"em branco ou muito simples: afinal, seus arquivos podem estar em risco.\n" +"\n" +"Depois de clicar em \"%s\", você pode adicionar outros usuários. Adicione " +"um\n" +"usuário para cada um de seus amigos, seu pai, sua irmã, etc. Clique em " +"\"%s\"\n" +"quando terminar de adicionar.\n" +"\n" +"Clique no botão \"%s\" para alterar o \"shell\" padrão para esse\n" +"usuário (bash por padrão).\n" +"\n" +"Quando terminar de adicionar os usuários, você será solicitado a escolher " +"um\n" +"usuário que será conectado automaticamente ao sistema quando o computador\n" +"inicializar. Se estiver interessado nesse recurso (e não se importa muito " +"com a\n" +"segurança local), escolha o usuário e o gerenciador de janelas desejados, e\n" +"depois clique em \"%s\". Se não estiver interessado nesse recurso, " "desmarque\n" -"a opção \"%s\"" +"a caixa \"%s\"." #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format @@ -137,17 +129,18 @@ msgstr "Nome de usuário" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "Accept user" -msgstr "Aceitar o usuário" +msgstr "Aceitar usuário" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "Do you want to use this feature?" -msgstr "Você quer usar este recurso?" +msgstr "Deseja usar esta funcionalidade?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -157,13 +150,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -174,46 +170,46 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" -"Aqui estão listadas as partições Linux detectadas no seu disco rígido.\n" -"Você pode manter as opções feitas pelo assistente, elas são\n" -"boas para o uso diário. Se você quiser alterar estas opções, você deve ao\n" -"menos definir uma partição (\"/\"). Não escolha uma partição muito pequena\n" -"ou você não será capaz de instalar todos os softwares desejados. Se você\n" -"quiser guardar seus dados em uma partição separada, você precisa escolher\n" -"uma partição \"/home\" (apenas possível se você tiver mais de \n" -"uma partição Linux disponível).\n" +"Aqui estão listadas as partições Linux detectadas em seu disco rígido.\n" +"Você pode manter as escolhas feitas pelo assistente, pois elas são\n" +"adequadas para a maioria das instalações comuns. Se fizer alterações,\n" +"você deve pelo menos definir uma partição raiz (\"/\"). Não escolha uma " +"partição\n" +"muito pequena ou você não conseguirá instalar software suficiente. Se\n" +"quiser armazenar seus dados em uma partição separada, também será\n" +"necessário criar uma partição \"/home\" (o que só é possível se tiver mais\n" +"de uma partição Linux disponível).\n" "\n" "Cada partição é listada da seguinte forma: \"Nome\", \"Capacidade\".\n" "\n" -"\"Nome\" é codificado da seguinte maneira: \"tipo do disco rígido\", " -"\"número\n" -"do disco rígido\", \"número da partição\" (por exemplo, \"hda1\").\n" -"\n" -"\n" -"\"Tipo do disco rígido\" é \"hd\" se seu disco rígido for IDE e \"sd\"\n" -"se ele for um disco rígido SCSI.\n" +"\"Nome\" é estruturado como: \"tipo de disco rígido\", \"número do disco " +"rígido,\"\n" +"\"número da partição\" (por exemplo, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" +"\"Tipo de disco rígido\" é \"hd\" se seu disco rígido for IDE e \"sd\" se " +"for SCSI.\n" "\n" -"\"Número do disco rígido\" é sempre uma letra depois de \"hd\" ou \"sd\".\n" -"Para os discos rígidos IDE:\n" +"\"Número do disco rígido\" é sempre uma letra após \"hd\" ou \"sd\". Para\n" +"discos rígidos IDE:\n" "\n" -" * \"a\" significa \"disco rígido mestre na controladora IDE primária\",\n" +" * \"a\" significa \"disco rígido mestre no controlador IDE primário\",\n" "\n" -" * \"b\" significa \"disco rígido escravo na controladora IDE primária\",\n" +" * \"b\" significa \"disco rígido escravo no controlador IDE primário\",\n" "\n" -" * \"c\" significa \"disco rígido mestre na controladora IDE secundária\",\n" +" * \"c\" significa \"disco rígido mestre no controlador IDE secundário\",\n" "\n" -" * \"d\" significa \"disco rígido escravo na controladora IDE secundária\",\n" +" * \"d\" significa \"disco rígido escravo no controlador IDE secundário\",\n" "\n" "\n" -"Com discos rígidos SCSI, um \"a\" significa \"SCSI ID mais baixo\", um \"b\" " -"significa \"segundo SCSI ID mais baixo\", e assim por diante." +"Com discos rígidos SCSI, um \"a\" significa \"menor ID SCSI\", um \"b\"\n" +"significa \"segundo menor ID SCSI\", e assim por diante." #: ../help.pm:88 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The Mageia installation is distributed on several CD-ROMs. If a\n" "selected package is located on another CD-ROM, DrakX will eject the current\n" @@ -221,15 +217,14 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"O instalador do Mageia está espalhado em diferentes CD-ROMs.\n" -"Se o pacote selecionado estiver localizado em outro CD-ROM, O DrakX irá\n" -"ejetar o CD atual e pedir para você inserir o CD necessário. Se você não " -"tiver com o CD em mãos, basta clicar em \"%s\", e os pacotes correspondentes " -"não\n" -"serão instalados." +"A instalação do Mageia é distribuída em vários CD-ROMs. Se um\n" +"pacote selecionado estiver localizado em outro CD-ROM, o DrakX ejeta\n" +"o CD atual e solicita que você insira o CD necessário. Se não tiver o CD\n" +"solicitado em mãos, basta clicar em \"%s\", e os pacotes correspondentes\n" +"não serão instalados." #: ../help.pm:95 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "It's now time to specify which programs you wish to install on your system.\n" "There are thousands of packages available for Mageia, and to make it\n" @@ -286,66 +281,59 @@ msgid "" "command-line interface. The total size of this installation is about 65\n" "megabytes." msgstr "" -"Agora você deverá especificar quais programas você deseja instalar no\n" -"sistema. Existem centenas de pacotes disponíveis para o Mageia, e\n" -"para facilitar o gerenciamento, os pacotes foram agrupados em grupos de " -"aplicações\n" -"similares.\n" -"\n" -"O Mageia separou os pacotes em quatro categorias. Você pode\n" -"misturar as aplicações de outras categorias, assim uma \"Estação de Trabalho" -"\" pode ter aplicações do grupo \"Servidor\".\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": Se você planeja usar sua máquina como estação de trabalho,\n" -"selecione um ou mais dos grupos desta categoria.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": Se a máquina será usada para programação, selecione os pacotes " -"apropriados desta categoria. O grupo especial\n" -"\"LSB\" irá configurar seus sistema para que ele fique o mais compatível " -"possível\n" -"com as especificações da Linux Standard Base.\n" +"Agora é hora de especificar quais programas deseja instalar em seu sistema.\n" +"Existem milhares de pacotes disponíveis para o Mageia, e para simplificar o\n" +"gerenciamento, eles foram agrupados em categorias de aplicativos similares.\n" "\n" -" Selecionar o grupo \"LSB\" garantirá 100%% de compatibilidade com LSB no\n" -"sistema. No entanto, se você não selecionar o grupo \"LSB\" você ainda terá\n" -"um sistema próximo a 100%% de compatibilidade com a LSB.\n" +"O Mageia classifica os grupos de pacotes em quatro categorias. Você pode\n" +"misturar e combinar aplicativos de várias categorias, então uma instalação\n" +"``Estação de trabalho\" ainda pode ter aplicativos da categoria " +"``Servidor\"\n" +"instaladas.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": se a máquina será um servidor, você poderá escolher quais dos\n" -"serviços deseja instalar na máquina.\n" +" * \"%s\": se planeja usar sua máquina como uma estação de trabalho,\n" +"selecione um ou mais dos grupos na categoria de estação de trabalho.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s \": este é o grupo em que você escolherá seu ambiente\n" -"gráfico preferido. Pelo menos um tem que ser selecionado se você quiser\n" -"uma estação de trabalho com ambiente gráfico.\n" +" * \"%s\": se planeja usar sua máquina para programação, selecione os\n" +"grupos apropriados dessa categoria. O grupo especial \"LSB\" configura\n" +"seu sistema para que esteja o mais próximo possível das especificações da\n" +"Linux Standard Base.\n" "\n" -"Ao mover o ponteiro do mouse sobre um nome de grupo, uma pequena explicação\n" -"sobre seu conteúdo aparecerá.\n" +" Selecionar o grupo \"LSB\" garante 100%% de conformidade com a\n" +"LSB do sistema. No entanto, se não selecionar o grupo \"LSB\", ainda\n" +"terá um sistema quase 100%% compatível com a LSB.\n" "\n" -"Você pode marcar a caixa \"%s\", ela é útil se você tiver um pouco de " -"experiência\n" -"com o nome dos pacotes fornecidos ou se você deseja ter controle total " -"sobre\n" -"o que será instalado.\n" +" * \"%s\": se sua máquina for destinada a ser um servidor, selecione quais\n" +"dos serviços mais comuns você deseja instalar em sua máquina.\n" "\n" -"Se você iniciar uma instalação no modo \"%s\", você pode desmarcar todos\n" -"os grupos e prevenir a instalação de qualquer pacote adicional. Isto é útil " -"para\n" -"reparar ou atualizar um sistema já existente.\n" +" * \"%s\": aqui você escolhe seu ambiente gráfico preferido. Pelo menos\n" +"um deve ser selecionado se quiser uma interface gráfica disponível.\n" "\n" -"Se você não selecionar nenhum grupo ao fazer uma instalação (não uma " -"atualização),\n" -"uma caixa de diálogo aparecerá propondo diferentes\n" -"opções para uma instalação mínima:\n" +"Mover o cursor do mouse sobre um nome de grupo exibe um texto\n" +"explicativo sobre esse ele.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": Instala o mínimo de pacotes possíveis para se ter uma estação\n" -"de trabalho com ambiente gráfico.\n" +"Você pode marcar a caixa \"%s\", que é útil se estiver familiarizado com\n" +"os pacotes oferecidos ou se deseja ter controle total sobre o que é\n" +"instalado.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": Instala a base do sistema acrescida de utilitários básicos e " -"suas \n" -"respectivas documentações. Esta Instalação é útil para configurar um " -"servidor.\n" +"Se você iniciar a instalação no modo \"%s\", pode desmarcar todos os\n" +"grupos e evitar a instalação de novos pacotes. Isso é útil para reparar\n" +"ou atualizar um sistema existente.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": Instala os pacotes mínimos necessários para obter um sistema\n" -"Linux funcionando. Com esta instalação você terá somente a interface de\n" -"linha de comando. O tamanho total desta instalação é de 65 megabytes." +"Se você desmarcar todos os grupos ao realizar uma instalação comum\n" +"(em vez de uma atualização), um diálogo será exibido sugerindo\n" +"diferentes opções para uma instalação mínima:\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": instala o número mínimo de pacotes possível para ter um\n" +"desktop gráfico funcional.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": instala o sistema base, utilitários básicos e sua documentação.\n" +"Esta instalação é adequada para configurar um servidor.\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": instala o número absoluto mínimo de pacotes necessários\n" +"para obter um sistema Linux funcional. Com esta instalação, você\n" +"tem apenas uma interface de linha de comando. Esta instalação\n" +"tem cerca de 65 megabytes." #: ../help.pm:149 ../help.pm:591 #, c-format @@ -360,10 +348,10 @@ msgstr "Com documentação básica" #: ../help.pm:149 #, c-format msgid "Truly minimal install" -msgstr "Instalação mínima" +msgstr "Instalação realmente mínima" #: ../help.pm:152 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you choose to install packages individually, the installer will present\n" "a tree containing all packages classified by groups and subgroups. While\n" @@ -399,41 +387,47 @@ msgid "" "another installation. See the second tip of the last step on how to create\n" "such a floppy." msgstr "" -"Se você escolheu selecionar pacotes individualmente, será apresentada uma\n" -"árvore contendo todos os pacotes classificados por grupos e subgrupos.\n" -"Navegando nesta árvore, você poderá selecionar grupos inteiros, subgrupos\n" -" ou pacotes individuais.\n" -"\n" -"Quando você seleciona um pacote individual na árvore, uma breve \n" -"descrição sobre o pacote aparecerá na janela da direita.\n" -"\n" -"!! Quando um pacote de servidor foi selecionado, intencionalmente ou por\n" -"ser parte de um grupo, será pedido para que você confirme se realmente " -"deseja que\n" -"estes servidores sejam instalados. Por padrão, no Mageia qualquer\n" -"serviço instalado será iniciado quando a máquina for iniciada.\n" -"Mesmo que sejam seguros e não existam quaisquer dúvidas a respeito\n" -"da distribuição, é possível que brechas de segurança\n" -"sejam descobertas depois que esta versão do Mageia foi concluída.\n" -"Se você não sabe o que um determinado serviço faz ou porque está sendo\n" -"instalado, clique em \"%s\". Clicando em \"%s\", os serviços listados\n" -"serão instalados e serão iniciados automaticamente quando o\n" -"sistema for iniciado!!\n" -"\n" -"A opção \"%s\" desabilita a caixa de diálogo com o aviso que aparece quando\n" -"o instalador seleciona um pacote automaticamente por ter resolvido\n" -"dependências. Alguns pacotes dependem de outros e a instalação de \n" -"de um ou mais pacotes pode ser requisitada para que se instale um programa\n" -"específico. O instalador pode determinar quais pacotes são necessários\n" -"para satisfazer uma dependência e assim completar a instalação.\n" -"\n" -"O pequeno ícone de disco flexível no fim da lista permite gravar a lista\n" -"de pacotes escolhida durante uma instalação. Isto é útil quando você tiver\n" -"um número de máquinas que deseja configurar de forma idêntica. Ao clicar\n" -"neste ícone, será pedido a você que insira um disquete, criado no final de " -"outra\n" -"instalação. Veja a segunda dica no último passo sobre\n" -"como criar esse disquete." +"Se optar por instalar pacotes individualmente, o instalador apresenta\n" +"uma árvore contendo todos os pacotes classificados por grupos e subgrupos.\n" +"Ao navegar pela árvore, você pode selecionar grupos inteiros, subgrupos\n" +"ou pacotes individuais.\n" +"\n" +"Sempre que selecionar um pacote na árvore, uma descrição aparecer à\n" +"direita para informar o propósito desse pacote.\n" +"\n" +" !! Se um pacote de servidor for selecionado, seja porque você escolheu\n" +"especificamente o pacote individual ou porque ele fazia parte de um grupo\n" +"de pacotes, é solicitado que você confirme se realmente deseja que esses\n" +"servidores sejam instalados. Por padrão, o Mageia inicia automaticamente\n" +"quaisquer serviços instalados durante o tempo de inicialização. Mesmo que\n" +"eles sejam seguros e não tenham problemas conhecidos na época em que\n" +"a distribuição foi lançada, é possível que vulnerabilidades de segurança " +"sejam\n" +"descobertas após a finalização desta versão do Mageia. Se não souber\n" +"o que um serviço específico deve fazer ou por que está sendo instalado, " +"clique\n" +"em \"%s\". Clicar em \"%s\" instala os serviços listados e inicia esses " +"serviços\n" +"automaticamente durante o tempo de inicialização. !!\n" +"\n" +"A opção \"%s\" é usada para desativar o diálogo de aviso que aparece\n" +"sempre que o instalador seleciona automaticamente um pacote para resolver\n" +"um problema de dependência. Alguns pacotes dependem de outros e a " +"instalação\n" +"de um pacote específico pode exigir a instalação de outro pacote. O " +"instalador\n" +"pode determinar quais pacotes são necessários para satisfazer uma " +"dependência\n" +"e concluir a instalação.\n" +"\n" +"O ícone de disquete pequeno na parte inferior da lista, permite carregar " +"uma\n" +"lista de pacotes criada durante uma instalação anterior. Isso é útil se você " +"tem\n" +"várias máquinas que quer configurar de maneira idêntica. Clicar nesse ícone\n" +"solicita que você insira o disquete criado no final de outra instalação. " +"Consulte\n" +"a segunda dica do último passo sobre como criar um disquete desse tipo." #: ../help.pm:183 #, c-format @@ -460,25 +454,22 @@ msgid "" "Please remember that some services can be dangerous if they're enabled on a\n" "server. In general, select only those services you really need. !!" msgstr "" -"Esta janela é utilizada para selecionar quais serviços você deseja iniciar\n" -"durante o processo de inicialização (boot) da máquina.\n" -"\n" -"O DrakX irá listar todos os serviços disponíveis na instalação atual.\n" -"Reveja cuidadosamente e desabilite aqueles que não são sempre necessários \n" -"durante a inicialização.\n" -"\n" -"Um pequeno texto de ajuda descrevendo a função do serviço será mostrado \n" -"quando o mesmo for selecionado. Contudo, caso você não tenha certeza se um \n" -"serviço é útil ou não, é seguro manter o comportamento padrão.\n" -"\n" -"!! Tenha muito cuidado neste passo, caso você pretenda usar sua máquina como " -"um \n" -"servidor: você provavelmente vai querer que serviços indesejados não sejam " -"iniciados.\n" -"Lembre-se de que vários serviços podem ser perigosos se forem habilitados em " -"um\n" -"servidor. Em geral, selecione apenas os serviços que você realmente " -"precisa. !!" +"Este diálogo é usado para selecionar quais serviços você quer\n" +"iniciar automaticamente.\n" +"\n" +"O DrakX lista todos os serviços disponíveis na instalação atual. Revise\n" +"cada um deles com cuidado e desmarque aqueles que não são necessários\n" +"na inicialização.\n" +"\n" +"Um texto explicativo curto é exibido sobre um serviço quando ele for\n" +"selecionado. No entanto, se não tiver certeza se um serviço é útil ou não,\n" +"é mais seguro manter o comportamento padrão.\n" +"\n" +"!! Nesta etapa, tenha muito cuidado se você pretende usar sua máquina como\n" +"um servidor: você provavelmente não deseja iniciar nenhum serviço que não\n" +"seja necessário. Lembre-se de que alguns serviços podem ser perigosos se\n" +"forem ativados em um servidor. Em geral, selecione apenas os serviços que\n" +"realmente precisa. !!" #: ../help.pm:209 #, c-format @@ -496,31 +487,35 @@ msgid "" "choose a time server located near you. This option actually installs a time\n" "server which can be used by other machines on your local network as well." msgstr "" -"O GNU/Linux gerencia a hora em GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) e calcula a hora\n" -"local de acordo com o fuso horário que você escolheu. Se o relógio em sua\n" -"placa mãe está configurado para o horário local, é possível desativá-lo, " -"desmarcando\n" -"\"%s\", permitindo ao GNU/Linux saber que o relógio do hardware e o relógio " -"do\n" -"sistema são os mesmos. Isto é útil quando a máquina também tem outro sistema " -"operacional.\n" -"\n" -"A opção \"%s\" irá automaticamente ajustar o relógio, conectando-o a um\n" -"servidor remoto de hora na Internet. Obviamente, você deve dispor de uma\n" -"conexão na Internet para isso. Recomendamos que você escolha um servidor de " -"hora localizado próximo a você, na lista apresentada.\n" -"Esta opção, na verdade, instala um servidor de hora que poderá ser\n" -"usado também por outras máquinas de sua rede local." +"O GNU/Linux gerencia o tempo em GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) e o traduz\n" +"para o horário local de acordo com o fuso horário que você selecionou. Se o " +"relógio\n" +"na sua placa-mãe estiver configurado para o horário local, você pode " +"desativar\n" +"isso desmarcando \"%s\", o que informa ao GNU/Linux que o relógio do " +"sistema\n" +"e o relógio de hardware estão no mesmo fuso horário. Isso é útil quando a " +"máquina\n" +"também hospeda outro sistema operacional.\n" +"\n" +"A opção \"%s\" regula automaticamente o relógio do sistema conectando-se a\n" +"um servidor de horário remoto na internet. Para que este recurso funcione, " +"você\n" +"deve ter uma conexão com a internet funcionando. Recomendamos que\n" +"escolha um servidor de horário localizado próximo a você. Esta opção na\n" +"verdade instala um servidor de horário que pode ser usado por outras " +"máquinas\n" +"na sua rede local também." #: ../help.pm:213 #, c-format msgid "Hardware clock set to GMT" -msgstr "Relógio do hardware configurado para GMT" +msgstr "Relógio de hardware configurado para GMT" #: ../help.pm:213 #, c-format msgid "Automatic time synchronization" -msgstr "Sincronização automática da hora " +msgstr "Sincronização automática de horário" #: ../help.pm:223 #, c-format @@ -537,16 +532,16 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Placa de vídeo\n" "\n" -" O instalador normalmente detecta e configura automaticamente a placa de\n" -"vídeo instalada em seu computador. Se não for o caso, você pode escolher\n" -"na lista a placa que você possui atualmente instalada.\n" +" O instalador normalmente detecta e configurar automaticamente a\n" +"placa de vídeo instalada em sua máquina. Se isso não estiver correto, você\n" +"pode escolher na lista a placa que realmente tem instalada.\n" "\n" -" Em casos nos quais diferentes servidores são disponíveis para sua placa\n" -"de vídeo, com ou sem aceleração 3D, você será questionado para escolher\n" -"um servidor que atenda melhor às suas necessidades." +" Na situação em que diferentes drivers estão disponíveis para sua placa,\n" +"com ou sem aceleração 3D, você é solicitado a escolher o driver que\n" +"melhor atende às suas necessidades." #: ../help.pm:234 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "X (for X Window System) is the heart of the GNU/Linux graphical interface\n" "on which all the graphical environments (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep,\n" @@ -604,64 +599,64 @@ msgid "" "want to check \"%s\" if your machine is to act as a server, or if you were\n" "not successful in getting the display configured." msgstr "" -"X (para X Window System ou Sistema de Janelas X) é o coração da interface " -"gráfica do GNU/Linux\n" -"no qual todos os ambientes gráficos (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep,\n" -"WindowMaker, etc.) fornecidos com o Mageia se baseiam.\n" +"X (para X Window System) é o coração da interface gráfica do GNU/Linux,\n" +"sobre a qual todos os ambientes gráficos (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep,\n" +"WindowMaker, etc.) fornecidos com o Mageia dependem.\n" +"\n" +"É mostrada uma lista de diferentes parâmetros para ajustar e obter uma\n" +"exibição gráfica otimizada.\n" "\n" -"Você verá uma lista de parâmetros para alterações, para poder\n" -"obter uma ótima resolução gráfica. \n" -"Placa de Vídeo\n" +"Placa de vídeo\n" "\n" -" O instalador normalmente poderá detectar e configurar automaticamente \n" -"a placa de vídeo da sua máquina. Se esta configuração não estiver correta, " -"você pode\n" -"escolher na lista a placa correspondente instalada.\n" +" O instalador normalmente detecta e configura automaticamente a\n" +"placa de vídeo instalada em sua máquina. Se isso não estiver correto, você\n" +"pode escolher na lista a placa que realmente tem instalada.\n" "\n" -" Se existirem diferentes servidores possíveis para a sua placa, com ou " -"sem\n" -"aceleração 3D, será oferecido para você escolher o servidor que melhor " -"atenda as\n" -"necessidades.\n" +" Na situação em que diferentes drivers estão disponíveis para sua placa, " +"com\n" +"ou sem aceleração 3D, você será solicitado a escolher o driver que melhor\n" +"atende às suas necessidades.\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" "Monitor\n" "\n" -" O instalador pode normalmente detectar e configurar automaticamente\n" -"o monitor da sua máquina. Se não for o correto, você pode escolher na\n" -"lista o monitor que está conectado a seu computador.\n" +" Normalmente, o instalador detecta e configura automaticamente\n" +"o monitor conectado à sua máquina. Se isso não estiver correto, você\n" +"pode escolher na lista o monitor que está conectado ao seu computador.\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" "Resolução\n" "\n" -" Aqui você pode escolher a resolução e a profundidade das cores que seu\n" -"hardware pode exibir. Escolha a resolução que melhor lhe agrada (você\n" -"poderá alterá-la após a instalação). Um exemplo da configuração escolhida\n" -"é mostrada na tela.\n" +" Aqui você pode escolher as resoluções e profundidades de cor disponíveis\n" +"para o seu hardware gráfico. Escolha a que melhor atende às suas " +"necessidades\n" +"(você pode fazer alterações após a instalação). Uma amostra da configuração\n" +"escolhida é exibida na imagem do monitor.\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" "Teste\n" "\n" -" Dependendo do seu hardware, esta opção pode não ser mostrada.\n" +" Dependendo do seu hardware, esta opção pode não aparecer.\n" "\n" -" O sistema testará a resolução gráfica escolhida.\n" -"Se você ver a mensagem durante o teste e responder \"%s\",\n" -"o DrakX seguirá para a etapa seguinte. Se não puder ver a mensagem,\n" -"significa que algo na configuração está errado, e o teste vai acabar\n" -"automaticamente depois de 12 segundos, voltando ao menu. Mude\n" -"as configurações até obter uma boa resolução gráfica.\n" +" O sistema tenta abrir uma tela gráfica na resolução desejada.\n" +"Se vir a mensagem de teste durante o teste e responder \"%s\",\n" +"então o DrakX prossegue para a próxima etapa. Se não a ver, isso\n" +"significa que alguma parte da configuração de detecção automática estava\n" +"incorreta e o teste é automaticamente encerrado após 12 segundos,\n" +"retornando ao menu. Altere as configurações até obter uma exibição gráfica " +"correta.\n" "\n" "\n" "\n" "Opções\n" "\n" -" Aqui você pode escolher se deseja que o computador inicie\n" -"automaticamente em modo gráfico. Obviamente, você vai querer marcar o\n" -"\"%s\" se a sua máquina é um servidor, ou caso não tenha conseguido obter\n" -"uma boa configuração de vídeo." +" Esta etapa permite escolher se deseja que sua máquina mude\n" +"automaticamente para uma interface gráfica na inicialização. Obviamente,\n" +"você marcar \"%s\" se sua máquina for atuar como um servidor\n" +"ou se não conseguir configurar a exibição corretamente." #: ../help.pm:291 #, c-format @@ -674,10 +669,9 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Monitor\n" "\n" -" O instalador normalmente detecta e configura automaticamente o\n" -"monitor conectado ao seu computador. Se a configuração não estiver correta, " -"escolha \n" -"na lista o monitor correto que está conectado em seu computador." +" Normalmente, o instalador detecta e configura automaticamente\n" +"o monitor conectado à sua máquina. Se isso não estiver correto, você pode\n" +"escolher na lista o monitor que está conectado ao seu computador." #: ../help.pm:298 #, c-format @@ -691,12 +685,11 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Resolução\n" "\n" -" Você pode escolher aqui as resoluções e profundidade de cores disponíveis " -"para\n" -"o seu hardware. Escolha as que atendam melhor às suas necessidades (você\n" -"poderá alterar esta configuração após a instalação). Uma amostra da " -"configuração\n" -"será mostrada no monitor." +" Aqui você pode escolher as resoluções e profundidades de cor disponíveis\n" +"para o seu hardware gráfico. Escolha a que melhor atende às suas " +"necessidades\n" +"(você pode fazer alterações após a instalação). Uma amostra da configuração\n" +"escolhida é exibida na imagem do monitor." #: ../help.pm:306 #, c-format @@ -705,9 +698,9 @@ msgid "" "or without 3D acceleration, you're asked to choose the server which best\n" "suits your needs." msgstr "" -"No caso de existirem vários servidores disponíveis para a sua placa,\n" -"com ou sem aceleração 3D, escolha o servidor que melhor se adapta\n" -"às suas necessidades." +"Na situação em que diferentes drivers estão disponíveis para sua placa,\n" +"com ou sem aceleração 3D, você é solicitado a escolher o driver que\n" +"melhor atende às suas necessidades." #: ../help.pm:311 #, c-format @@ -721,22 +714,24 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Opções\n" "\n" -" Aqui você pode escolher se deseja que o computador inicie\n" -"automaticamente em modo gráfico. Obviamente, você vai querer marcar o\n" -"\"%s\" se a sua máquina é um servidor, ou caso não tenha conseguido obter\n" -"uma boa configuração de resolução de vídeo." +" Esta etapa permite escolher se deseja que sua máquina mude\n" +"automaticamente para uma interface gráfica na inicialização. Obviamente,\n" +"você marcar \"%s\" se a sua máquina é um servidor, ou caso\n" +"não tenha conseguido obter uma boa configuração de resolução de vídeo." #: ../help.pm:319 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -749,12 +744,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -777,7 +774,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -790,75 +788,73 @@ msgid "" "experience. For more instructions on how to use the DiskDrake utility,\n" "refer to the ``Managing Your Partitions'' section in the ``Starter Guide''." msgstr "" -"Neste ponto, você precisa escolher onde instalar o seu sistema\n" -"Mageia no seu disco rígido. Se seu disco estiver vazio ou se um\n" -"sistema operacional existente usa todo o espaço disponível, você terá que\n" -"particioná-lo. Basicamente, particionar um disco rígido consiste em\n" -"dividi-lo logicamente para criar espaço para o seu novo sistema Mandriva " -"Linux.\n" -"\n" -"Como os efeitos de um processo de particionamento são normalmente\n" -"irreversíveis, podendo levar à perda de dados do sistema operacional atual,\n" -"ele pode ser intimidante e estressante para um usuário inexperiente.\n" -"Felizmente, o DrakX traz um assistente que simplifica este processo. Antes\n" -"de continuar, leia o restante desta seção, e faça todos os passos\n" -"com calma.\n" -"\n" -"Dependendo da configuração do seu disco rígido, várias soluções podem estar\n" +"Agora você precisa decidir onde deseja instalar o sistema operacional " +"Mageia\n" +"em seu disco rígido. Se o seu disco rígido estiver vazio ou se um sistema\n" +"operacional existente estiver usando todo o espaço disponível, você deve\n" +"particionar o disco. Basicamente, particionar um disco rígido significa " +"dividi-lo\n" +"logicamente para criar o espaço necessário para instalar o novo sistema " +"Mageia.\n" +"\n" +"Como o processo de particionamento de um disco rígido é geralmente " +"irreversível\n" +"e pode levar a perdas de dados, o particionamento pode ser intimidante e " +"estressante\n" +"para o usuário inexperiente. Felizmente, o DrakX inclui um assistente que " +"simplifica\n" +"esse processo. Antes de continuar com esta etapa, leia o restante desta " +"seção e,\n" +"acima de tudo, sem pressa.\n" +"\n" +"Dependendo da configuração do seu disco rígido, várias opções estarão " "disponíveis:\n" "\n" -"* \"%s\": esta opção particionará automaticamente seu(s) disco(s) vazio(s).\n" -"Se você usar esta opção não haverá mais nenhum alerta adicional.\n" -"\n" -"* \"%s\": o assistente detectou uma ou mais partições Linux em seu disco\n" -"rígido. Se você deseja usá-las, escolha esta opção. Será pedido para que " -"você escolha os pontos de montagem associados\n" -"a cada uma das partições. Alguns pontos de montagem já existentes serão " -"selecionados\n" -"automaticamente, e na maioria das vezes é uma boa idéia mantê-los.\n" -"\n" -"* \"%s\": se o Microsoft Windows estiver instalado no seu disco rígido e\n" -"ocupar todo o espaço disponível, você terá que criar espaço livre para o\n" -"GNU/Linux. Para fazer isto, você pode remover a sua partição Microsoft " -"Windows\n" -"(leia-se: usar a opção 'Apagar disco inteiro') ou redimensionar a sua " -"partição Microsoft\n" -"Windows do tipo FAT ou NTFS. O redimensionamento pode ser feito sem a perda " -"de dados, desde\n" -"que você tenha desfragmentado previamente sua partição e a mesma esteja\n" -"formatada em FAT ou NTFS. Recomendamos fortemente o backup de seus\n" -"dados. Esta solução é útil se você quiser usar o Mageia e o\n" -"Microsoft Windows no mesmo computador.\n" -"\n" -"Antes de escolher esta solução, compreenda que o tamanho de sua partição\n" -"Microsoft Windows será menor do que é agora. Isto significa que você terá\n" -"menos espaço livre no Microsoft Windows para guardar os seus dados ou\n" -"instalar novos programas.\n" -"\n" -"* \"%s\": se você quiser apagar todos os dados e todas as partições\n" -"existentes no disco rígido e substituí-las pelo seu novo sistema Mandriva " -"Linux, você pode escolher esta opção. Tenha cuidado, pois\n" -"você não pode reverter sua escolha após a confirmação.\n" -"\n" -"!! Se você escolher esta opção, todos seus dados atuais serão perdidos. !!\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\" Esta opção aparecerá quando seu disco rígido estiver totalmente\n" -"ocupado pelo Microsoft Windows. Ao escolher esta opção, todo o conteúdo do " -"seu \n" -"disco rígido será apagado, sendo assim, todo ele particionado do início.\n" -"\n" -" !! Se você escolher esta opção, todo os dados do seu disco rígido serão " -"perdidos. !!\n" -"\n" -"* \"%s\": escolha esta opção se você quiser particionar manualmente o seu\n" -"disco rígido. Tenha cuidado -- ela é muito poderosa, mas muito perigosa. " -"Você\n" -"pode perder todos os seus dados facilmente. Escolha esta solução somente\n" -"se souber o que está fazendo ou já tiver experiência com particionamento. " -"Para mais\n" -"informações de como usar o utilitário DiskDrake, leia a seção 'Gerenciando " -"suas \n" -"Partições' do 'Guia do Iniciante'." +" * \"%s\". Esta opção realiza um particionamento automático do(s) seu(s)\n" +"disco(s) vazio(s). Se usar esta opção, não há mais solicitações.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". O assistente detectou uma ou mais partições Linux existentes\n" +"em seu disco rígido. Se quiser usá-las, escolha esta opção. Você é\n" +"solicitado a escolher os pontos de montagem associados a cada uma\n" +"das partições. Os pontos de montagem legados são selecionados por padrão e,\n" +"na maioria das vezes, é uma boa ideia mantê-los.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Se o Microsoft Windows estiver instalado em seu disco rígido e\n" +"ocupar todo o espaço disponível, você deve criar um espaço livre para o\n" +"GNU/Linux. Para fazer isso, você pode excluir a partição e os dados do\n" +"Microsoft Windows (veja a solução ``Apagar todo o disco'') ou redimensionar\n" +"a partição FAT ou NTFS do Microsoft Windows. O redimensionamento pode\n" +"ser realizado sem perda de dados, desde que tenha desfragmentado a partição\n" +"do Windows anteriormente. É altamente recomendável fazer backup dos seus\n" +"dados. Usar esta opção é recomendado se deseja usar tanto o Mageia\n" +"quanto o Microsoft Windows no mesmo computador.\n" +"\n" +" Antes de escolher esta opção, entenda que após este procedimento,\n" +"o tamanho da sua partição do Microsoft Windows será menor do que era\n" +"inicialmente. Você terá menos espaço livre no Microsoft Windows para\n" +"armazenar seus dados ou para instalar novos softwares.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Se deseja excluir todos os dados e todas as partições presentes\n" +"em seu disco rígido e substituí-los pelo novo sistema Mageia, escolha\n" +"esta opção. Tenha cuidado, pois você não pode desfazer esta operação\n" +"após confirmar.\n" +"\n" +" !! Se escolher esta opção, todos os dados em seu disco são excluídos. !!\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Esta opção aparece quando o disco rígido está totalmente ocupado " +"pelo\n" +"Microsoft Windows. Escolher esta opção exclui tudo no disco e começa\n" +"do zero, particionando tudo a partir do início.\n" +"\n" +" !! Se escolher esta opção, todos os dados em seu disco são perdidos. !!\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Escolha esta opção se deseja particionar seu disco rígido\n" +"manualmente. Tenha cuidado -- é uma escolha poderosa, mas perigosa, e\n" +"você pode facilmente perder todos os seus dados. Por isso, esta opção é\n" +"realmente recomendada apenas se você já tiver feito algo semelhante\n" +"antes e tiver alguma experiência. Para mais instruções sobre como usar\n" +"a ferramenta DiskDrake, consulte a seção ``Gerenciar suas partições'' no\n" +"``Guia do iniciante''." #: ../help.pm:377 #, c-format @@ -868,12 +864,12 @@ msgstr "Usar partição existente" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format msgid "Use the free space on the Microsoft Windows® partition" -msgstr "Usar o espaço livre da partição Microsoft Windows®" +msgstr "Usar o espaço livre na partição do Microsoft Windows®" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format msgid "Erase entire disk" -msgstr "Apagar disco inteiro" +msgstr "Apagar todo o disco" #: ../help.pm:380 #, c-format @@ -912,57 +908,56 @@ msgid "" "\"mformat a:\", or \"fdformat /dev/fd0\" followed by \"mkfs.vfat\n" "/dev/fd0\"." msgstr "" -"E aqui estamos! A instalação agora está completa e o seu GNU/Linux está\n" -"pronto para ser usado. Clique em \"%s\" para reiniciar o sistema. Não " -"esqueça\n" -"de remover a mídia de instalação (CD-ROM ou disquete). A primeira coisa\n" -"que você deverá ver, após seu computador terminar os testes de hardware,\n" -"será o menu do gerenciador de inicialização, que fornecerá para você uma " -"lista de opções, para que você escolha qual sistema\n" -"operacional iniciar.\n" -"\n" -"O botão \"%s\" mostra mais dois botões:\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": para criar um disco de instalação que automaticamente fará\n" -"uma instalação completa, sem a ajuda de um operador, semelhante à\n" -"instalação que você acabou de fazer.\n" -"\n" -" Note que duas opções diferentes estão disponíveis depois que você clicar\n" -"no botão:\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\". É uma instalação parcialmente automática, porque a seção\n" -"de particionamento (somente esta) permanece interativa.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\". Completamente automatizada: o disco rígido é completamente\n" -"reescrito, e todos os dados anteriores serão perdidos.\n" -"\n" -" Esta funcionalidade é muito adequada quando se deseja instalar o\n" -"sistema em um grande número de máquinas semelhantes. Veja a seção\n" -"de instalação automática do nosso website para mais informações.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": salva a seleção de pacotes feita nesta instalação.\n" -"Para usar esta seleção em outra instalação, insira o disquete e inicie\n" -"a instalação. No 'prompt', pressione a tecla F1 e digite >> linux\n" -"defcfg=\"floppy\" << e pressione [Enter].\n" -"\n" -"(*) Você precisa de um disquete formatado com FAT. Para criar um pelo\n" -"GNU/Linux, digite \"mformat a:\", ou \"fdformat /dev/fd0\" seguido por\n" +"Pronto. A instalação está completa e seu sistema GNU/Linux está pronto\n" +"para ser usado. Basta clicar em \"%s\" para reiniciar o sistema. Não se\n" +"esqueça de remover a mídia de instalação (CD-ROM ou pen drive). A primeira\n" +"coisa que deve ver depois que seu computador terminar os testes de\n" +"hardware é o menu do gerenciador de inicialização, oferecendo a opção de\n" +"qual sistema operacional iniciar.\n" +"\n" +"O botão \"%s\" exibe mais dois botões para:\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": permitir criar um disquete de instalação que realiza uma\n" +"instalação completa automaticamente, sem a ajuda de um operador,\n" +"semelhante à instalação que você acabou de configurar.\n" +"\n" +" Note que duas opções diferentes estão disponíveis após clicar nesse " +"botão:\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Esta é a instalação parcialmente automatizada. A etapa de\n" +"particionamento é o único procedimento interativo.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Instalação totalmente automatizada: o disco rígido é " +"completamente\n" +"regravado, todos os dados são perdidos.\n" +" \n" +" Este recurso é muito útil ao instalar em várias máquinas semelhantes. " +"Veja\n" +"a seção Instalação automática em nosso site para mais informações.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\"(*): salva uma lista dos pacotes selecionados nesta instalação.\n" +"Para usar esta seleção em outra instalação, insira o disco e inicie a\n" +"instalação. Na solicitação, pressione a tecla [F1], digite\n" +">>linux defcfg=\"floppy\"<< e pressione a tecla [Enter].\n" +"\n" +"(*) Você precisa de um disquete formatado em FAT. Para criar um no\n" +"GNU/Linux, digite \"mformat a:\", ou \"fdformat /dev/fd0\" seguido de\n" "\"mkfs.vfat /dev/fd0\"." #: ../help.pm:412 #, c-format msgid "Generate auto-install floppy" -msgstr "Criar disquete de instalação automática" +msgstr "Gerar disquete de instalação automática" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Replay" -msgstr "Replay" +msgstr "Repetir" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Automated" -msgstr "Automático" +msgstr "Automatizada" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format @@ -970,7 +965,7 @@ msgid "Save packages selection" msgstr "Salvar a seleção de pacotes" #: ../help.pm:408 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you chose to reuse some legacy GNU/Linux partitions, you may wish to\n" "reformat some of them and erase any data they contain. To do so, please\n" @@ -994,32 +989,31 @@ msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you wish to select partitions which will be checked for\n" "bad blocks on the disk." msgstr "" -"Se você escolher reutilizar algumas partições GNU/Linux existentes, poderá " -"reformatar algumas delas e \n" -"apagar os dados contidos nelas. Se você deseja fazer isto, por favor, " -"selecione\n" -"quais partições você deseja formatar.\n" -"\n" -"Note que não é necessário reformatar todas as partições já existentes.\n" -"Você deve reformatar as partições contendo o sistema operacional\n" -"(tais como \"/\",\"/usr\" ou \"/var\"), mas você não tem que\n" -"reformatar as partições contendo dados que você deseja manter\n" -"(a partição \"/home\" é exemplo típico).\n" -"\n" -"Tenha cuidado ao selecionar as partições. Após formatá-las, todos os\n" -"dados serão apagados e não poderão ser recuperados.\n" +"Se optou por reutilizar algumas partições GNU/Linux legadas, pode\n" +"ser necessário reformatar algumas delas e apagar qualquer dado que\n" +"contenham. Para fazer isso, selecione essas partições também.\n" +"\n" +"Note que não é necessário reformatar todas as partições pré-existentes.\n" +"Você deve reformatar as partições que contêm o sistema operacional\n" +"(como \"/\", \"/usr\" ou \"/var\"), mas não é necessário reformatar as " +"partições que\n" +"contêm dados que deseja manter (tipicamente \"/home\").\n" +"\n" +"Tenha cuidado ao selecionar partições. Após a formatação ser concluída,\n" +"todos os dados nas partições selecionadas serão excluídos e não será " +"possível\n" +"recuperá-los.\n" "\n" "Clique em \"%s\" quando estiver pronto para formatar as partições.\n" "\n" -"Clique em \"%s\" se você desejar escolher outras partições para instalar\n" -"o seu novo sistema operacional Mageia.\n" +"Clique em \"%s\" se quiser escolher outra partição para a nova instalação\n" +"do sistema operacional Mageia.\n" "\n" -"Clique em \"%s\" para selecionar partições as quais você deseja que sejam " -"verificadas, \n" -"para a busca por blocos defeituosos." +"Clique em \"%s\" se quer selecionar partições que serão verificadas\n" +"quanto a blocos defeituosos no disco." #: ../help.pm:437 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "By the time you install Mageia, it's likely that some packages will\n" "have been updated since the initial release. Bugs may have been fixed,\n" @@ -1033,22 +1027,20 @@ msgid "" "will appear: review the selection, and press \"%s\" to retrieve and install\n" "the selected package(s), or \"%s\" to abort." msgstr "" -"Neste momento em que você está instalando o Mageia, é possível que\n" -"alguns pacotes tenham sido atualizados após o lançamento inicial. Alguns\n" -"erros e falhas de seguranças podem ter sido corrigidos. Para poder se\n" -"beneficiar destas atualizações, você pode fazer o download destes pacotes\n" -"da Internet. Escolha \"%s\" se você possui uma conexão à Internet\n" -"funcionando, ou \"%s\" se você preferir instalar os pacotes atualizados\n" +"Ao instalar o Mageia, é provável que alguns pacotes tenham sido\n" +"atualizados desde o lançamento inicial. Bugs podem ter sido corrigidos,\n" +"erros de segurança resolvidos. Para permitir que se beneficie\n" +"dessas atualizações, você pode baixá-las da internet. Marque \"%s\"\n" +"se conectado à internet, ou \"%s\" se preferir instalar pacotes atualizados\n" "mais tarde.\n" "\n" -"Escolhendo \"%s\", aparecerá uma lista de locais de onde você poderá pegar\n" -"as atualizações. Escolha a mais próxima de você. Quando a árvore de\n" -"seleção de pacotes aparecer, marque o que desejar e pressione \"%s\" para\n" -"fazer o download e instalar o(s) pacote(s) selecionado(s), ou \"%s\" para\n" -"interromper." +"Escolher \"%s\" exibe uma lista de locais na web dos quais as atualizações\n" +"podem ser baixadas. Você deve escolher um próximo a você. Uma árvore\n" +"de seleção de pacotes aparece: revise a seleção e pressione \"%s\"para\n" +"baixar e instalar os pacotes selecionados, ou \"%s\" para cancelar." #: ../help.pm:450 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, DrakX will allow you to choose the security level you desire\n" "for your machine. As a rule of thumb, the security level should be set\n" @@ -1063,44 +1055,46 @@ msgid "" "Fill the \"%s\" field with the e-mail address of the person responsible for\n" "security. Security messages will be sent to that address." msgstr "" -"Neste ponto, o DrakX permite a escolha do nível de segurança desejado para\n" -"a máquina. Em geral, o nível da segurança deve ser ajustado para o mais alto " -"possível, \n" -"se a máquina contiver dados cruciais, ou se for uma máquina exposta\n" -"diretamente à Internet. Contudo, os níveis mais altos de segurança\n" -"diminuem a facilidade de uso do computador.\n" +"Neste ponto, o DrakX permite que você escolha o nível de segurança\n" +"que deseja para sua máquina. Como regra geral, o nível de segurança deve " +"ser\n" +"definido mais alto se a máquina conter dados cruciais ou se for exposta\n" +"diretamente à internet. A compensação é que um nível de segurança mais alto\n" +"geralmente é obtido à custa da facilidade de uso.\n" "\n" -"Se você não souber o que escolher, fique com a opção padrão. Você poderá\n" -"trocar o nível de segurança depois usando a ferramenta draksec, no Centro\n" -"de Controle Mageia.\n" +"Se não souber o que escolher, mantenha a opção padrão. Você pode\n" +"alterar mais tarde com a ferramenta draksec, que faz parte do\n" +"Centro de Controle Mageia.\n" "\n" -"Preencha o campo \"%s\" com o endereço de e-mail da pessoa responsável\n" -"pela segurança. Assim, mensagens de segurança serão enviadas para esse " -"endereço." +"Preencha o campo \"%s\" com o endereço de email da pessoa responsável\n" +"pela segurança. Mensagens de segurança serão enviadas para esse endereço." #: ../help.pm:461 #, c-format msgid "Security Administrator" -msgstr "Administrador de Segurança" +msgstr "Administrador de segurança" #: ../help.pm:464 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1123,7 +1117,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1131,7 +1126,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1150,89 +1146,77 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" -"Agora você precisa escolher qual(is) partição(ões) serão usadas para " -"instalar o\n" -"seu novo sistema Mageia. Se as partições já estiverem definidas \n" -"(através de uma instalação anterior do GNU/Linux ou outro software\n" -"particionador), você poderá utilizá-las. Caso contrário, as partições\n" -"devem ser definidas.\n" +"Neste ponto, você precisa escolher quais partições serão usadas para a\n" +"instalação do seu sistema Mageia. Se as partições já foram definidas,\n" +"seja a partir de uma instalação anterior do GNU/Linux ou por outra " +"ferramenta\n" +"de particionamento, você pode usar as partições existentes. Caso contrário,\n" +"as partições do disco rígido devem ser definidas.\n" "\n" "Para criar partições, você deve primeiro selecionar um disco rígido. Você\n" -"pode selecionar o disco clicando em \"hda\" para o primeiro drive IDE,\n" -"\"hdb\" para o segundo, \"sda\" para o primeiro drive SCSI e assim por\n" -"diante.\n" +"pode selecionar o disco para particionamento clicando em ``hda'' para o\n" +"primeiro disco IDE, ``hdb'' para o segundo, ``sda'' para o primeiro disco " +"SCSI\n" +"e assim por diante.\n" "\n" -"Para particionar o disco selecionado, você pode usar as seguintes opções:\n" +"Para particionar o disco rígido selecionado, você pode usar estas opções:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": esta opção removerá todas as partições do disco rígido " -"selecionado.\n" +" * \"%s\": esta opção exclui todas as partições no disco rígido selecionado\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": esta opção permite criar automaticamente partições ext3 e swap " -"no\n" -" espaço livre do seu disco rígido.\n" +" * \"%s\": esta opção permite criar automaticamente partições ext4 e swap\n" +"no espaço livre do seu disco rígido\n" "\n" -"\"%s\": acesso a características adicionais:\n" +"\"%s\": oferece acesso a funcionalidades adicionais:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": se você quiser salvar sua tabela de partição em um disquete para\n" -" poder recuperá-la, você pode usar esta opção. É altamente recomendável\n" -" utilizá-la.\n" +" * \"%s\": salva a tabela de partições em um disquete. Útil para " +"recuperação\n" +"da tabela de partições mais tarde, se necessário. Recomenda-se fortemente\n" +"que você realize esta etapa.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": se você salvou a sua tabela de partição em um disquete de uma\n" -"instalação anterior, você pode recuperá-la com esta opção.\n" +" * \"%s\": permite restaurar uma tabela de partições previamente salva a\n" +"partir de um disquete.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": se sua tabela de partição estiver danificada, você pode tentar\n" -"recuperá-la usando esta opção. Tenha cuidado e lembre-se de que isto pode\n" -"falhar.\n" +" * \"%s\": se a tabela de partições estiver danificada, você pode tentar\n" +"recuperá-la usando esta opção. Tenha cuidado e lembre-se de que isso\n" +"nem sempre funciona.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": descarta todas as alterações e carrega a tabela de partição que\n" +" * \"%s\": descarta todas as alterações e recarrega a tabela de partições " +"que\n" "estava originalmente no disco rígido.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": ao desmarcar esta opção, os usuários serão forçados a montar e " -"desmontar\n" -" manualmente as mídias removíveis, tais como discos flexíveis e CD-ROMs.\n" +" * \"%s\": desmarcar esta opção força os usuários a montar e desmontar\n" +"manualmente mídias removíveis, como disquetes e CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": se você desejar utilizar um assistente para particionar o seu\n" -" disco rígido, você pode usar esta opção. É recomendada caso não tenha\n" -" conhecimento sobre particionamento.\n" +" * \"%s\": use esta opção se quer usar um assistente para particionar\n" +"seu disco rígido. Isso é recomendado se você não tiver um bom\n" +"entendimento de particionamento.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": você pode usar esta opção para cancelar suas alterações.\n" +" * \"%s\": use esta opção para cancelar suas alterações.\n" +" \n" +" * \"%s\": permite ações adicionais em partições (tipo, opções, formato)\n" +"e fornece mais informações sobre o disco rígido.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": permite ações adicionais nas partições (tipo, opções, formato)\n" -" e fornece mais informações sobre o disco rígido\n" +" * \"%s\": quando terminar de particionar seu disco rígido, isso salva\n" +"suas alterações no disco.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": quando você terminar de particionar o seu disco rígido, use esta\n" -" opção para salvar as alterações.\n" +"Ao definir o tamanho de uma partição, você pode ajustar o tamanho da\n" +"partição com precisão usando as teclas de seta do teclado.\n" "\n" -"Quando definir o tamanho da partição, você pode fazê-lo com as setas\n" -"direcionais de seu teclado.\n" -"Nota: você pode utilizar qualquer opção usando o teclado: navegue entre as\n" -"partições usando [Tab] e as setas [para cima/baixo].\n" +"Nota: você pode acessar qualquer opção usando o teclado. Navegue pelas\n" +"partições usando [Tab] e as setas [para cima/para baixo].\n" "\n" -"Quando a partição estiver selecionada, você pode usar:\n" +"Quando uma partição é selecionada, você pode usar:\n" "\n" -" * Ctrl-c para criar uma nova partição (quando uma partição vazia estiver\n" -" selecionada)\n" +" * Ctrl-c para criar uma nova partição (quando uma partição vazia é\n" +"selecionada)\n" "\n" -" * Ctrl-d para apagar uma partição\n" +" * Ctrl-d para excluir uma partição\n" "\n" -" * Ctrl-m para especificar um ponto de montagem\n" +" * Ctrl-m para definir o ponto de montagem\n" "\n" -"Para mais informações sobre os diferentes tipos de sistemas de arquivos \n" -"disponíveis, por favor, leia o capítulo sobre ext2FS do \"Manual de " -"Referência\".\n" -"\n" -"Se você está instalando em uma Máquina PPC, você vai precisar criar uma\n" -"pequena partição \"bootstrap\" HFS de no mínimo 1MB para usar com o \n" -"gerenciador de boot yaboot. Se você quiser criar uma partição um\n" -"pouco maior, digamos 50MB, você pode usar o espaço para guardar\n" -"um kernel extra e uma imagem ramdisk para situações de emergência." +"Para obter informações sobre os diferentes tipos de sistemas de arquivos\n" +"disponíveis, consulte o capítulo ext2FS do ``manual de referência''.\n" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1252,7 +1236,7 @@ msgstr "Recuperar tabela de partições" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Removable media auto-mounting" -msgstr "Montagem automática de mídia removível" +msgstr "Montagem automática de mídias removíveis" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1267,25 +1251,29 @@ msgstr "Desfazer" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Toggle between normal/expert mode" -msgstr "Mudar entre modo normal/expert" +msgstr "Alternar entre modo normal/avançado" #: ../help.pm:536 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1296,42 +1284,45 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" -"Mais de uma partição Microsoft Windows foi detectada em seu disco\n" -"rígido. Por favor, escolha a que você quer redimensionar para instalar o " -"seu\n" -"novo sistema operacional Mageia.\n" +"Mais de uma partição Microsoft foi detectada em seu disco rígido. Escolha a\n" +"que quer redimensionar para instalar seu novo sistema operacional Mageia.\n" "\n" -"Cada partição é listada da seguinte forma: \"Nome Linux\", \"Nome\n" -"Windows\" \"Capacidade\".\n" +"Cada partição é listada da seguinte forma: \"nome Linux\", \"nome Windows\"\n" +"\"capacidade\".\n" "\n" -"\"Nome Linux\" é codificado da seguinte maneira: \"tipo do disco rígido\", " -"\"número do disco rígido\", \"número da partição\" (por exemplo, \"hda1\").\n" +"\"Nome Linux\" é estruturado como: \"tipo de disco rígido\", \"número do " +"disco rígido\",\n" +"\"número da partição\" (por exemplo, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Tipo do disco rígido\" é \"hd\" se seu disco rígido for IDE e \"sd\"\n" -"se ele for um disco rígido SCSI.\n" +"\"Tipo do disco rígido\" é \"hd\" se o seu disco rígido for IDE e \"sd\" se " +"for SCSI.\n" "\n" -"\"Número do disco rígido\" é sempre uma letra depois de \"hd\" ou \"sd\".Com " -"discos rígidos IDE:\n" +"\"Número do disco rígido\" é sempre uma letra após \"hd\" ou \"sd\". Com " +"discos\n" +"rígidos IDE:\n" "\n" -" * \"a\" significa \"disco rígido mestre na controladora IDE primária\",\n" +" * \"a\" significa \"disco rígido mestre no controlador IDE primário\";\n" "\n" -" * \"b\" significa \"disco rígido escravo na controladora IDE primária\",\n" +" * \"b\" significa \"disco rígido escravo no controlador IDE primário\";\n" "\n" -" * \"c\" , \"disco rígido mestre na controladora IDE secundária\",\n" +" * \"c\" significa \"disco rígido mestre no controlador IDE secundário\";\n" "\n" -" * \"d\" , \"disco rígido escravo na controladora IDE secundária\".\n" +" * \"d\" significa \"disco rígido escravo no controlador IDE secundário\".\n" "\n" -"Com discos rígidos SCSI, \"a\" significa \"SCSI ID mais baixo\", um \"b\"\n" -"significa \"segundo SCSI ID mais baixo\", etc.\n" +"Com discos rígidos SCSI, um \"a\" significa \"ID SCSI mais baixo\", um " +"\"b\"\n" +"significa \"segundo ID SCSI mais baixo\", e assim por diante.\n" "\n" -"O \"Nome Windows\" é a letra do seu disco rígido no Windows (o primeiro\n" -"disco ou partição é chamado \"C:\")." +"\"Nome Windows\" é a letra do seu disco rígido no Windows (o primeiro disco\n" +"ou partição é chamado de \"C:\")." #: ../help.pm:567 #, c-format @@ -1341,12 +1332,12 @@ msgid "" "the\n" "list shown, click on the \"%s\" button to get the complete country list." msgstr "" -"\"%s\": confere a seleção do país atual. Se você não está neste país,\n" -"clique no botão \"%s\" e escolha outro. Se seu país não está na \n" -"lista mostrada, clique no botão \"%s\" para pegar a lista completa de países." +"\"%s\": verifique a seleção atual do país. Se não estiver neste país,\n" +"clique no botão \"%s\" e escolha outro. Se seu país não estiver na lista\n" +"exibida, clique no botão \"%s\" para obter a lista completa de países." #: ../help.pm:572 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "This step is activated only if an existing GNU/Linux partition has been\n" "found on your machine.\n" @@ -1357,7 +1348,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1369,28 +1361,32 @@ msgid "" "running version \"8.1\" or later. Performing an upgrade on versions prior\n" "to Mageia version \"8.1\" is not recommended." msgstr "" -"Este passo só é mostrado quando uma partição antiga do GNU/Linux foi\n" -"encontrada em seu computador.\n" -"\n" -"O DrakX precisa saber agora se você quer executar uma nova instalação\n" -"ou fazer uma atualização do Mageia existente no seu sistema:\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": na maioria das vezes, isto remove completamente o sistema " -"antigo.\n" -"Porém, dependendo do seu modo de particionamento, você pode evitar que\n" -"alguns dos dados existentes sejam sobrescritos (como o diretório \"home\").\n" -"Se você deseja mudar o particionamento dos seus discos rígidos, ou mudar o " -"sistema de arquivos, você deve usar esta opção.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": este método de instalação lhe permite atualizar os pacotes\n" -"atualmente instalados em seu sistema Mageia. Seu esquema\n" -"atual de particionamento e dados de usuário não serão alterados. A maioria\n" -"dos outros passos de configuração permanecerão disponíveis, semelhantes a " -"uma instalação normal.\n" +"Esta etapa é ativada somente se uma partição GNU/Linux existente\n" +"for encontrada em sua máquina.\n" +"\n" +"O DrakX precisa saber se você deseja realizar uma nova instalação\n" +"ou uma atualização de um sistema Mageia existente:\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Para a maior parte, isso apaga completamente o sistema antigo.\n" +"No entanto, dependendo do seu esquema de particionamento, você pode\n" +"evitar que alguns dos seus dados existentes (principalmente diretórios " +"\"home\")\n" +"sejam sobrescritos. Se deseja alterar a forma como seus discos rígidos\n" +"são particionados ou mudar o sistema de arquivos, você deve usar esta " +"opção.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\". Esta classe de instalação permite atualizar os pacotes " +"atualmente\n" +"instalados em seu sistema Mageia. Seu esquema de particionamento atual e\n" +"dados de usuário não serão alterados. A maioria das outras etapas de " +"configuração\n" +"permanece disponíveis e são semelhantes a uma instalação padrão.\n" "\n" -"O uso da opção \"Atualizar\" deve funcionar bem em sistemas Mageia \n" -"versão \"8.1\" ou superior. Executar uma atualização de versões anteriores\n" -"ao Mageia \"8.1\" não é recomendado." +"Usar a opção ``Atualizar'' deve funcionar bem em sistemas Mageia com a " +"versão\n" +"\"8.1\" ou posterior. Realizar uma atualização em versões anteriores à " +"\"8.1\" do\n" +"Mageia, não é recomendada." #: ../help.pm:594 #, c-format @@ -1412,26 +1408,27 @@ msgid "" "dialog will allow you to choose the key binding which will switch the\n" "keyboard between the Latin and non-Latin layouts." msgstr "" -"Dependendo do idioma que você escolheu, o DrakX escolherá uma\n" -"configuração de teclado particular para você. Selecione esta opção ou\n" -"escolha um outro layout de teclado.\n" +"Dependendo do idioma que escolheu (), o DrakX seleciona \n" +"automaticamente um tipo específico de configuração de teclado. Verifique\n" +"se a seleção atende às suas necessidades ou escolha outro layout de " +"teclado.\n" "\n" -"Contudo, você pode ter um teclado que não corresponde exatamente\n" -"ao idioma que você escolheu: por exemplo, se você for um suíço, porém\n" -"o idioma é o inglês, você pode preferir continuar usando um teclado suíço.\n" -"Ou se você fala inglês mas mora em Quebec, você pode estar na mesma\n" -"situação quando sua língua nativa e seu teclado não são os mesmos. Nestes\n" -"casos, este passo da instalação permitirá que você escolha o teclado " -"apropriado na lista.\n" +"Além disso, você pode não ter um teclado que corresponda exatamente ao seu\n" +"idioma: por exemplo, se você é um suíço que fala inglês, pode ter um " +"teclado\n" +"suíço. Ou se fala inglês e está localizado no Quebec, pode encontrar a\n" +"mesma situação em que seu idioma nativo e o teclado configurado para o país\n" +"não correspondem. Em ambos os casos, esta etapa de instalação permite que\n" +"você selecione um teclado apropriado a partir de uma lista.\n" "\n" -"Clique em \"%s\" para ver uma lista completa com os teclados disponíveis. \n" +"Clique no botão \"%s\" para exibir uma lista de teclados suportados.\n" "\n" -"Se você escolher um layout baseado em um alfabeto não-latino, o próximo\n" -"diálogo permitirá que você escolha a tecla que irá vincular a troca entre o\n" -"teclado latino e o não-latino." +"Se escolher um layout de teclado baseado em um alfabeto não latino,\n" +"o próximo diálogo permite que você escolha a combinação de teclas que\n" +"alterna o teclado entre os layouts latino e não latino." #: ../help.pm:612 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The first step is to choose your preferred language.\n" "\n" @@ -1473,54 +1470,51 @@ msgid "" "by the entire system. Running the command as a regular user will only\n" "change the language settings for that particular user." msgstr "" -"O primeiro passo é escolher o seu idioma preferido.\n" -"\n" -"A escolha de seu idioma preferido afetará a documentação do sistema, o " -"instalador\n" -"e o sistema em geral. Selecione primeiro a região onde você está localizado\n" -"e o idioma que você fala.\n" -"\n" -"Clicando em \"%s\" você poderá selecionar outros idiomas para serem\n" -"instalados no seu sistema. Ao selecionar outros idiomas também serão \n" -"instalados os arquivos específicos para documentação e aplicativos. Por " -"exemplo, se\n" -"você pretende adicionar usuários espanhóis na sua máquina, selecione\n" -"Inglês como idioma padrão na árvore de visualização e \"%s\" na seção\n" -"Avançado.\n" -"\n" -"Sobre o suporte a UTF-8 (unicode): Unicode é o novo conjunto de codificação " -"de caracteres\n" -"para todas os idiomas existentes. O suporte completo em GNU/Linux ainda\n" -"está em desenvolvimento. Por esta razão, o uso dele no Mageia \n" -"dependerá da escolha do usuário:\n" -"\n" -"* Se você escolher idiomas legados, que possuem uma codificação forte " -"(idiomas\n" -"latinos, Russo, Japonês, Chinês, Coreano, Thai, Grego, Turco e a maioria dos " -"idiomas com iso-8859-2), a codificação legada será usada por padrão;\n" -"\n" -"* Outros idiomas usarão o unicode por padrão;\n" -"\n" -"* Se dois ou mais idiomas forem requeridos, e tais idiomas não\n" -"usarem a mesma codificação, então o unicode irá ser usado em todo o " -"sistema;\n" -"\n" -"* Finalmente, o uso do unicode poderá ser forçado para o sistema que o " -"usuário\n" -"solicitar, através da opção \"%s\". independente do(s) idioma(s)\n" -"selecionado(s).\n" -"\n" -"Note que você não está limitado a escolher um único idioma. Você pode\n" -"selecionar vários, ou instalar todos selecionando a opção \"%s\". Selecionar " -"o suporte para um idioma significa que as traduções, fontes, dicionários e " -"corretores ortográficos, entre outros itens, serão também instaladas para " -"este idioma.\n" -"\n" -"Para trocar entre os vários idiomas instalados no sistema, você pode\n" -"executar o comando \"/usr/sbin/localedrake\" como \"root\" para alterar o\n" -"idioma usado pelo sistema inteiro, e para todos os usuários. Executando o " -"comando como usuário\n" -"comum, a mudança apenas afetará o usuário em questão." +"O primeiro passo é escolher seu idioma preferido.\n" +"\n" +"Sua escolha de idioma preferido afeta o instalador, a documentação e o\n" +"sistema em geral. Primeiro, selecione a região em que você está localizado\n" +"e, em seguida, o idioma que fala.\n" +"\n" +"Clicar no botão \"%s\" permite que você selecione outros idiomas a serem\n" +"instalados em sua estação de trabalho, instalando assim os arquivos " +"específicos\n" +"para documentação do sistema e aplicativos. Por exemplo, se usuários\n" +"espanhóis forem usar sua máquina, selecione o inglês como idioma padrão na\n" +"visualização em árvore e \"%s\" na seção Avançado.\n" +"\n" +"Sobre o suporte a UTF-8 (unicode): Unicode é uma nova codificação de " +"caracteres\n" +"destinada a cobrir todos os idiomas existentes. No entanto, o suporte " +"completo a\n" +"ela no GNU/Linux ainda está em desenvolvimento. Por essa razão, o uso de " +"UTF-8\n" +"no Mageia depende das escolhas do usuário:\n" +"\n" +" * Se você escolher um idioma com uma codificação legada forte (idiomas " +"latin1,\n" +"russo, japonês, chinês, coreano, tailandês, grego, turco, a maioria dos " +"idiomas\n" +"iso-8859-2), a codificação legada será usada por padrão;\n" +"\n" +" * Outros idiomas usarão unicode por padrão;\n" +"\n" +" * Se forem necessários dois ou mais idiomas, e eles não usarem\n" +"a mesma codificação, então unicode será usado para todo o sistema;\n" +"\n" +" * Finalmente, o unicode também pode ser forçado para uso em todo o\n" +"sistema a pedido do usuário, selecionando a opção \"%s\" independentemente\n" +"dos idiomas escolhidos.\n" +"\n" +"Note que você não está limitado a escolher um único idioma adicional.\n" +"Você pode escolher vários ou até mesmo instalar todos selecionando a\n" +"caixa \"%s\". Selecionar o suporte para um idioma significa que traduções,\n" +"fontes, corretores ortográficos, etc., também serão instalados.\n" +"\n" +"Para alternar entre os vários idiomas instalados em seu sistema, você pode\n" +"executar o comando \"localedrake\" como \"root\" para mudar o idioma usado\n" +"por todo o sistema. Executar o comando como um usuário como\n" +"altera apenas as configurações de idioma para esse usuário específico." #: ../help.pm:650 #, c-format @@ -1530,7 +1524,7 @@ msgstr "Espanhol" #: ../help.pm:643 #, c-format msgid "Use Unicode by default" -msgstr "Usar Unicode por padrão" +msgstr "Usar unicode por padrão" #: ../help.pm:646 #, c-format @@ -1568,40 +1562,39 @@ msgid "" "Test the buttons and check that the mouse pointer moves on-screen as you\n" "move your mouse about." msgstr "" -"Normalmente, o DrakX não tem problemas em detectar o número de botões\n" -"de seu mouse. Caso isto ocorra, ele assume que você tem um mouse\n" -"de dois botões, e irá configurá-lo para emulação do terceiro botão. O\n" -"terceiro botão pode ser acionado pressionando simultaneamente os botões\n" -"esquerdo e direito do mouse. O DrakX saberá automaticamente se a interface\n" -"é PS/2, serial ou USB.\n" -"\n" -"Se você tiver um mouse com 3 botões que não possua roda (wheel), você pode\n" -"escolher um mouse \"%s\". DrakX irá então configurar seu mouse para que " -"você\n" -"possa simular o uso da roda da seguinte maneira: pressione o botão do meio " -"e\n" -"mova o ponteiro do seu mouse para cima e para baixo.\n" -"\n" -"Se por alguma razão você quiser especificar um tipo diferente de mouse,\n" -"selecione o tipo da lista.\n" -"\n" -"Você pode selecionar a entrada \"%s\" para escolher um tipo de mouse\n" -"\"genérico\" o qual deve funcionar com todos os mouses novos.\n" -"\n" -"Se você escolher um mouse diferente do padrão, uma tela será mostrada.\n" -"Use os botões e a roda para verificar se as configurações estão corretas\n" -"e se o mouse está configurado corretamente. Se o mouse não funcionar\n" -"corretamente, pressione a barra de espaços ou o [Enter] para \n" -"cancelar o teste e voltar para a lista de escolhas.\n" -"\n" -"Ocasionalmente, a roda do mouse (wheel) não será detectada automaticamente,\n" -"e então você necessitará selecionar seu mouse de uma lista. Escolha\n" -"corretamente a porta que seu mouse está conectado. Após selecionar\n" -"um mouse e ter pressionado no botão \"%s\", uma imagem do mouse será\n" -"mostrada na tela. Mova toda a roda do mouse para assegurar-se de que\n" -"esteja ativada corretamente. Após verificar o funcionamento da roda\n" -"do mouse, teste os botões e certifique-se de que o ponteiro do mouse\n" -"move-se junto com o mesmo." +"Normalmente, o DrakX não tem problemas para detectar o número de\n" +"botões do seu mouse. Se houver algum problema, ele assume que você\n" +"tem um mouse de dois botões e o configura para emulação do terceiro botão.\n" +"O terceiro botão de um mouse de dois botões pode ser obtido clicando\n" +"simultaneamente nos botões esquerdo e direito do mouse. O DrakX\n" +"identifica automaticamente se o seu mouse usa uma interface PS/2, serial\n" +"ou USB.\n" +"\n" +"Se tiver um mouse de 3 botões sem roda, pode escolher um mouse \"%s\".\n" +"O DrakX configura seu mouse para que você possa simular a roda\n" +"com ele: para fazer isso, pressione o botão do meio e mova o ponteiro do\n" +"mouse para cima e para baixo.\n" +"\n" +"Se por algum motivo você quer especificar um tipo diferente de mouse,\n" +"selecione na lista fornecida.\n" +"\n" +"Você pode selecionar a entrada \"%s\" para escolher um tipo \"genérico\",\n" +"que funciona com quase todos os mouses.\n" +"\n" +"Se escolher um mouse diferente do padrão, uma tela de teste é\n" +"exibida. Use os botões e a roda para verificar se as configurações estão\n" +"corretas e se o mouse está funcionando corretamente. Se o mouse não\n" +"estiver funcionando bem, pressione a barra de espaço ou a tecla [Enter]\n" +"para cancelar o teste e você será retornado à lista de mouses.\n" +"\n" +"Ocasionalmente, mouses com roda não são detectados automaticamente,\n" +"então você precisa selecioná-lo a partir de uma lista.\n" +"Certifique-se de selecionar aquele correspondente à porta à qual seu mouse\n" +"está conectado. Após selecionar e pressionar o botão \"%s\", uma imagem\n" +"do mouse é exibida na tela. Role a roda para garantir que ela esteja\n" +"ativando corretamente. À medida que rola a roda, você vê a roda de\n" +"rolagem na tela se movendo. Teste os botões e verifique se o ponteiro\n" +"se move na tela conforme movimenta o mouse." #: ../help.pm:684 #, c-format @@ -1619,8 +1612,8 @@ msgid "" "Please select the correct port. For example, the \"COM1\" port under\n" "Windows is named \"ttyS0\" under GNU/Linux." msgstr "" -"Por favor, selecione a porta correta. Por exemplo, a porta COM1\n" -"no MS Windows é chamada \"ttyS0\" no GNU/Linux." +"Selecione a porta correta. Por exemplo, a porta \"COM1\" no\n" +"Windows, é chamada de \"ttyS0\" no GNU/Linux." #: ../help.pm:684 #, c-format @@ -1642,30 +1635,30 @@ msgid "" "you\n" "know what you're doing." msgstr "" -"Um gerenciador de inicialização (ou boot loader) é um pequeno programa que é " -"mostrado na inicialização (boot)de um computador. Ele é responsável por\n" -"iniciar todo o sistema. Normalmente, a sua instalação é totalmente " -"automática.\n" -"O DrakX irá analisar o setor de boot de seu disco e proceder de acordo com\n" -"o que for encontrado nele:\n" -"\n" -" * se um setor de boot Windows for encontrado, ele será substituído por um\n" -"setor de boot GRUB/LILO. Desta forma, você será capaz de carregar qualquer\n" -"sistema GNU/Linux ou qualquer outro sistema operacional instalado em sua " -"máquina.\n" -"\n" -" * se um setor de boot GRUB ou LILO for encontrado, ele será substituído por " -"um novo.\n" -"\n" -"Se o DrakX não puder determinar aonde deverá ser armazenado o setor de " -"boot,\n" -"ele irá perguntar para você. Geralmente, o \"%s\" é o lugar mais seguro.\n" -"Escolhendo \"%s\", nenhum gerenciador de inicialização será instalado. Use " -"esta opção somente se\n" -"você souber o que está fazendo." +"Um gerenciador de inicialização é um pequeno programa que é iniciado\n" +"pelo computador na inicialização (boot). Ele é responsável por iniciar\n" +"todo o sistema. Normalmente, a instalação do gerenciador de inicialização\n" +"é totalmente automatizada. O DrakX analisa o setor de inicialização do\n" +"disco e age de acordo com o que encontrar:\n" +"\n" +" * se um setor de inicialização do Windows for encontrado, ele é " +"substituído\n" +"por um setor de inicialização GRUB/LILO. Dessa forma, você pode carregar\n" +"tanto o GNU/Linux quanto qualquer outro sistema operacional instalado em\n" +"sua máquina.\n" +"\n" +" * se um setor de inicialização GRUB ou LILO for encontrado, ele é " +"substituído\n" +"por um novo.\n" +"\n" +"Se o DrakX não conseguir determinar onde colocar o setor de inicialização, " +"ele\n" +"pergunta onde deve colocá-lo. Geralmente, \"%s\" é o local mais seguro.\n" +"Escolher \"%s\" não instala nenhum gerenciador de inicialização. Use esta\n" +"opção somente se souber o que está fazendo." #: ../help.pm:745 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Now, it's time to select a printing system for your computer. Other\n" "operating systems may offer you one, but Mageia offers two. Each of\n" @@ -1692,38 +1685,33 @@ msgid "" "system you may change it by running PrinterDrake from the Mageia\n" "Control Center and clicking on the \"%s\" button." msgstr "" -"Aqui você seleciona o sistema de impressão para o seu computador.\n" -"Outros sistemas operacionais podem oferecer-lhe apenas um, mas o Mandriva\n" -"Linux oferece dois. Cada um se encaixa melhor em um tipo particular de " -"configuração.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\" -- que significa 'print, do not queue' ou 'imprima não deixe na\n" -"fila', e é a escolha caso você tenha uma conexão direta com sua\n" -"impressora e você queira ser capaz decorrigir falhas na impressão, e\n" -"também se você não possuir impressoras em rede. (\"%s\" só funcionará em " -"redes\n" -"bem simples e se tornará lento quando usado em redes). É recomendado que vc " -"use \"pdq\"\n" -"se este é sua primeira experiência com GNU/Linux.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\" -- 'Common Unix Printing System' ou 'Sistema de Impressão Comum do " -"Unix', é excelente para imprimir em\n" -"sua impressora local e também através do mundo. É simples de se configurar\n" -"e pode agir como servidor ou cliente para o antigo sistema de impressão \"lpd" -"\".\n" -"Por isto, é compatível com os sistemas antigos que podem precisar de " -"serviços de\n" -"impressão. Pode fazer vários truques, mas a configuração é quase tão fácil " -"quanto a\n" -"do \"pdq\". Se você precisar emular um servidor \"lpd\", você deve ativar o " -"serviço chamado \"cups-lpd\".\n" -"\" \"%s\" possui várias interfaces gráficas para selecionar as opções de " -"impressão ou\n" -"gerenciar a impressão.\n" -"\n" -"Você poderá mudar a sua escolha após a instalação utilizando o\n" -"PrinterDrake no Centro de Controle Mageia, e clicando no botão \"%s" -"\"." +"Agora é hora de selecionar um sistema de impressão para o seu\n" +"computador. Outros sistemas operacionais podem oferecer apenas\n" +"um, mas o Mageia oferece dois. Cada um dos sistemas de impressão\n" +"é mais adequado para determinados tipos de configuração.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\" -- que significa ``imprimir, não enfileirar'', é a escolha ideal " +"se você\n" +"tiver uma conexão direta com sua impressora, quiser agir\n" +"rapidamente em caso de atolamento de papel, e não tiver impressoras\n" +"em rede. (\"%s\" lida apenas com casos muito simples de rede e é um pouco\n" +"lento quando usado em redes). Recomenda-se o uso de \"pdq\" se esta\n" +"for sua primeira experiência com GNU/Linux.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\" significa `` Common Unix Printing System'' e é uma excelente\n" +"escolha para imprimir na sua impressora local ou em uma localizada do\n" +"outro lado do planeta. É simples de configurar e pode atuar como servidor\n" +"ou cliente para o antigo sistema de impressão \"lpd\", sendo compatível\n" +"com sistemas operacionais mais antigos que ainda possam precisar de\n" +"serviços de impressão. Embora bastante poderoso, a configuração básica\n" +"é quase tão fácil quanto \"pdq\". Se precisar emular um servidor \"lpd\",\n" +"certifique-se de ativar o daemon \"cups-lpd\". \"%s\" inclui interfaces\n" +"gráficas para impressão ou escolha de opções de impressora e para\n" +"gerenciamento da impressora.\n" +"\n" +"Se fizer uma escolha agora e depois perceber que não gosta do\n" +"sistema de impressão escolhido, você pode alterá-lo executando\n" +"o PrinterDrake no Centro de Controle Mageia e clicando no botão \"%s\"." #: ../help.pm:768 #, c-format @@ -1738,7 +1726,7 @@ msgstr "CUPS" #: ../help.pm:724 #, c-format msgid "Expert" -msgstr "Expert" +msgstr "Avançado" #: ../help.pm:771 #, c-format @@ -1760,26 +1748,26 @@ msgid "" "which parameters need to be passed to the hardware, you'll need to manually\n" "configure the driver." msgstr "" -"O DrakX tentará localizar primeiramente qualquer dispositivo IDE presente " -"em\n" -"sua máquina. Ele também tentará encontrar um ou mais placas PCI SCSI. Se o\n" -"DrakX encontrar um adaptador SCSI ele instalará automaticamente o driver\n" -"apropriado.\n" -"\n" -"Como a detecção do hardware não é à prova de falhas, o DrakX pode falhar ao\n" -"tentar detectar seus discos. Se isto acontecer, você precisará especificar " -"seu\n" -"hardware manualmente. \n" -"\n" -"Se você tiver que especificar manualmente o seu adaptador, o DrakX\n" -"perguntará se você quer especificar opções para ele. Você pode deixar\n" -"que o DrakX examine o hardware para descobrir as opções. Isto\n" -"normalmente funciona bem.\n" -"\n" -"Se o DrakX não conseguir detectar as opções automaticamente para determinar\n" -"quais parâmetros são necessários passar ao hardware, você precisará " -"fornecer\n" -"configurar o para o driver manualmente." +"O DrakX primeiro detecta quaisquer dispositivos IDE presentes em seu\n" +"computador. Ele também busca uma ou mais placas PCI SCSI em seu\n" +"sistema. Se uma placa SCSI for encontrada, o DrakX instala\n" +"automaticamente o driver apropriado.\n" +"\n" +"Como a detecção de hardware não é infalível, o DrakX pode falhar ao " +"detectar\n" +"seus discos rígidos. Se isso ocorrer, você precisa especificar seu hardware\n" +"manualmente.\n" +"\n" +"Se teve que especificar manualmente seu adaptador PCI SCSI, o DrakX\n" +"pergunta se deseja configurar opções para ele. Você deve permitir que o\n" +"DrakX faça uma procura no hardware para obter as opções específicas\n" +"necessárias para inicializar o adaptador. Na maioria das vezes, o DrakX " +"passa\n" +"por esta etapa sem problemas.\n" +"\n" +"Se o DrakX não conseguir procurar as opções para determinar automaticamente\n" +"quais parâmetros precisam ser passados para o hardware, será necessário\n" +"configurar o driver manualmente." #: ../help.pm:789 #, c-format @@ -1788,13 +1776,13 @@ msgid "" "here. If you notice the sound card is not the one actually present on your\n" "system, you can click on the button and choose a different driver." msgstr "" -"\"%s\": se uma placa de som for detectada em seu sistema, ela estará\n" -"indicada aqui. Se você observar que a placa de som indicada não é a que\n" -"realmente está presente em seu sistema, você pode clicar no botão e escolher " -"outro driver." +"\"%s\": se uma placa de som for detectada em seu sistema, ela será exibida\n" +"aqui. Se perceber que a placa de som não é a que está realmente\n" +"presente em seu sistema, você pode clicar no botão e escolher um driver " +"diferente." #: ../help.pm:794 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "As a review, DrakX will present a summary of information it has gathered\n" "about your system. Depending on the hardware installed on your machine, you\n" @@ -1857,68 +1845,68 @@ msgid "" "on your machine. If you plan to use this machine as a server it's a good\n" "idea to review this setup." msgstr "" -"A título de revisão, o DrakX irá resumir em uma lista as informações \n" -"sobre o seu sistema. Dependendo do hardware instalado, você pode ter\n" -"algumas ou todas estas entradas. Cada uma delas é um elemento a ser\n" -"configurado, seguido de um breve resumo da configuração atual.\n" -"Clique no botão \"%s\" correspondente para fazer alguma alteração.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": verifica a configuração atual do mapa de teclado e modifica-a, \n" -"caso necessário.\n" +"Como revisão, o DrakX apresenta um resumo das informações que ele\n" +"coletou sobre seu sistema. Dependendo do hardware instalado em sua\n" +"máquina, você pode ver algumas ou todas as seguintes entradas. Cada\n" +"entrada é composta pelo item de hardware a ser configurado, seguido por\n" +"um breve resumo da configuração atual. Clique no botão \"%s\"\n" +"correspondente para fazer a alteração.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": verifique a configuração atual do mapa de teclado e altere se\n" +"necessário.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": verifica a seleção atual de país. Se não estiver neste país, " -"clique\n" -"no botão \"%s\" e escolha outro. Se o seu país não estiver nesta lista,\n" -"clique em \"%s\" para obter a lista completa dos\n" -"países.\n" +" * \"%s\": verifique a seleção atual do país. Se não estiver neste país,\n" +"clique no botão \"%s\" e escolha outro. Se seu país não estiver na lista\n" +"exibida, clique no botão \"%s\" para obter a lista completa de países.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": Por padrão, o DrakX deduz seu fuso horário baseado no país\n" -"escolhido. Pressione o botão \"%s\" para mudar, caso não esteja correto.\n" +" * \"%s\": padrão, o DrakX deduz seu fuso horário com base no país\n" +"escolhido. Você pode clicar no botão \"%s\" aqui se isso não estiver " +"correto.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": verifique a configuração do mouse atual e mude-a se for " -"necessário.\n" +" * \"%s\": verifique a configuração atual do mouse e clique no botão\n" +"para alterar se necessário.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": se uma placa de som for detectada no seu sistema, ela\n" -"será mostrada aqui. Se a placa for diferente daquela que se\n" -"encontra no seu sistema, clique no botão e escolha a correta.\n" +" * \"%s\": se uma placa de som for detectada em seu sistema, ela será\n" +"exibida aqui. Se notar que a placa de som não é a que está presente\n" +"em seu sistema, você pode clicar no botão e escolher um driver diferente.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\":se uma placa de TV foi detectada no seu sistema, ela será " -"indicada \n" -"aqui. Se existe uma placa e ela não foi detectada, clique\n" -"no botão \"%s\" para tentar configurá-la manualmente.\n" +" * \"%s\": se tiver uma placa de TV, é aqui que as informações sobre\n" +"sua configuração são exibidas. Se tiver uma placa de TV e ela não for\n" +"detectada, clique em \"%s\" para tentar configurá-la manualmente.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": você pode clicar em \"%s \" para mudar os parâmetros associados\n" -"com a placa, se você achar que a configuração está incorreta.\n" +" * \"%s\": você pode clicar em \"%s\" para alterar os parâmetros associados " +"à\n" +"placa se achar que a configuração está errada.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": por padrão, o DrakX configura o seu vídeo com a resolução de " -"\"800x600\" ou \"1024x768\". Se isto não é o que deseja, clique em\n" -"\"%s\" para reconfigurar a interface gráfica.\n" +" * \"%s\": por padrão, o DrakX configura sua interface gráfica em resolução\n" +"\"800x600\" ou \"1024x768\". Se isso não for adequada para você, clique\n" +"em \"%s\" para reconfigurar sua interface gráfica.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": se você deseja configurar a Internet ou o acesso a uma rede\n" -"local, você pode fazê-lo agora. Verifique a documentação impressa ou use\n" -"o Centro de Controle Mageia após a instalação ter terminado para\n" -"utilizar a ajuda integrada completa.\n" +" * \"%s\": se quer configurar seu acesso à internet ou rede local, você\n" +"pode fazê-lo agora. Consulte a documentação impressa ou use o Centro\n" +"de Controle Mageia após a instalação ser concluída para aproveitar\n" +"a ajuda completa em tempo real.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": permite configurar endereços de proxies HTTP e FTP se a máquina\n" -"que você está instalando utiliza um proxy para usar a internet.\n" +" * \"%s\": permite configurar endereços de proxy HTTP e FTP se a máquina\n" +"em que você está instalando estiver atrás de um servidor proxy.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": aqui você pode redefinir o nível de segurança que escolheu\n" -"anteriormente.\n" +" * \"%s\": esta entrada permite redefinir o nível de segurança configurado\n" +"em uma etapa anterior .\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": se você pretende conectar a sua máquina à Internet, é uma boa\n" -"idéia protegê-la contra intrusos, configurando um firewall. Veja o capítulo\n" -"correspondente no \"Guia do Usuário\" para mais detalhes sobre como\n" -"configurar um firewall.\n" +" * \"%s\": se planeja conectar sua máquina à internet, é uma boa ideia\n" +"se proteger contra intrusões configurando um firewall. Consulte a seção\n" +"correspondente do ``Guia de introdução'' para obter detalhes sobre as\n" +"configurações de firewall.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": se você deseja mudar sua configuração do gerenciador de\n" -"inicialização, clique neste botão. Recomendado apenas para usuários\n" -"avançados. Veja documentação impressa ou a ajuda integrada, sobre\n" -"como configurar o gerenciador de inicialização no Centro de Controle\n" -"do Mageia.\n" +" * \"%s\": se quer alterar a configuração do gerenciador de inicialização,\n" +"clique neste botão. Isso deve ser reservado para usuários avançados.\n" +"Consulte a documentação exibida ou a ajuda em tempo real sobre a " +"configuração\n" +"do gerenciador de inicialização no Centro de Controle Mageia.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": você poderá escolher aqui quais serviços serão iniciados\n" -"em sua máquina. Se você pretende usar sua máquina como servidor, é uma\n" -"boa idéia verificar esta configuração e desativar o que não for necessário." +" * \"%s\": através desta entrada, você pode ajustar quais serviços serão\n" +"executados em sua máquina. Se planeja usar esta máquina como um\n" +"servidor, é uma boa ideia revisar essa configuração." #: ../help.pm:809 #, c-format @@ -1936,34 +1924,37 @@ msgid "Graphical Interface" msgstr "Interface gráfica" #: ../help.pm:861 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Choose the hard disk drive you want to erase in order to install your new\n" "Mageia partition. Be careful, all data on this drive will be lost\n" "and will not be recoverable!" msgstr "" -"Escolha o disco rígido que você quer apagar para instalar sua nova\n" -"partição Mageia. Tenha cuidado, pois todos os dados existentes\n" -"serão perdidos e não poderão ser recuperados!" +"Escolha o disco rígido que deseja apagar para instalar sua nova partição\n" +"do Mageia. Cuidado, todos os dados neste disco são perdidos e não podem\n" +"ser recuperados!" #: ../help.pm:866 #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" "present on this hard disk drive." msgstr "" -"Clique em \"%s\" se você quiser apagar todos os dados e partições \n" -"existentes neste disco rígido. Tenha cuidado, pois após clicar em \"%s\", \n" -"você não será capaz de recuperar os dados/partições existentes neste\n" -"disco rígido, incluindo quaisquer dados do Windows.\n" +"Clique em \"%s\" se deseja excluir todos os dados e partições presentes\n" +"neste disco rígido. Cuidado, após clicar em \"%s\", você não pode recuperar\n" +"nenhum dado ou partição presente neste disco rígido, incluindo quaisquer " +"dados\n" +"do Windows.\n" "\n" -"Clique em \"%s\" para sair desta operação, sem perder qualquer dado\n" -"e/ou partição presente neste disco rígido." +"Clique em \"%s\" para sair desta operação sem perder dados e partições\n" +"presentes neste disco rígido." #: ../help.pm:872 #, c-format @@ -1974,122 +1965,3 @@ msgstr "Próximo ->" #, c-format msgid "<- Previous" msgstr "<- Anterior" - -#~ msgid "" -#~ "\"%s\": clicking on the \"%s\" button will open the printer " -#~ "configuration\n" -#~ "wizard. Consult the corresponding chapter of the ``Starter Guide'' for " -#~ "more\n" -#~ "information on how to set up a new printer. The interface presented in " -#~ "our\n" -#~ "manual is similar to the one used during installation." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "\"%s\": clique no botão \"%s\" para abrir o assistente de configuração " -#~ "de\n" -#~ "impressora. Consulte o capítulo correspondente do \"Guia do Iniciante\" " -#~ "para\n" -#~ "mais informações sobre como configurar uma nova impressora. A interface\n" -#~ "apresentada no manual é similar à utilizada durante a instalação." - -#~ msgid "" -#~ "This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your GNU/" -#~ "Linux\n" -#~ "system: you must enter the \"root\" password. \"Root\" is the system\n" -#~ "administrator and is the only user authorized to make updates, add " -#~ "users,\n" -#~ "change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short, \"root\" " -#~ "can\n" -#~ "do everything! That's why you must choose a password which is difficult " -#~ "to\n" -#~ "guess: DrakX will tell you if the password you chose is too simple. As " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "can see, you're not forced to enter a password, but we strongly advise\n" -#~ "against this. GNU/Linux is just as prone to operator error as any other\n" -#~ "operating system. Since \"root\" can overcome all limitations and\n" -#~ "unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly accessing the\n" -#~ "partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to become\n" -#~ "\"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password should be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and at least " -#~ "8\n" -#~ "characters long. Never write down the \"root\" password -- it makes it " -#~ "far\n" -#~ "too easy to compromise your system.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "One caveat: do not make the password too long or too complicated because " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "must be able to remember it!\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password will not be displayed on screen as you type it. To reduce " -#~ "the\n" -#~ "chance of a blind typing error you'll need to enter the password twice. " -#~ "If\n" -#~ "you do happen to make the same typing error twice, you'll have to use " -#~ "this\n" -#~ "``incorrect'' password the first time you'll try to connect as \"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you want an authentication server to control access to your computer,\n" -#~ "click on the \"%s\" button.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If your network uses either LDAP, NIS, or PDC Windows Domain " -#~ "authentication\n" -#~ "services, select the appropriate one for \"%s\". If you do not know " -#~ "which\n" -#~ "one to use, you should ask your network administrator.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you happen to have problems with remembering passwords, or if your\n" -#~ "computer will never be connected to the Internet and you absolutely " -#~ "trust\n" -#~ "everybody who uses your computer, you can choose to have \"%s\"." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Este ponto é crucial para a segurança do seu sistema GNU/Linux: você\n" -#~ "deverá digitar a senha de \"root\". \"Root\" é o administrador do " -#~ "sistema,\n" -#~ "e é o único autorizado a fazer atualizações, adicionar usuários e mudar\n" -#~ " configurações gerais do computador. Em suma: \"root\" pode fazer tudo! " -#~ "Por isso\n" -#~ "você deve escolher uma senha difícil de adivinhar - o DrakX irá avisá-lo " -#~ "se a senha que você digitar for muito simples. Você pode também escolher " -#~ "não\n" -#~ "digitar uma senha, mas nós desaconselhamos fortemente esta opção. O " -#~ "sistema\n" -#~ "GNU/Linux é tão vulnerável a erros cometidos pelo operador como qualquer " -#~ "outro.\n" -#~ "O \"root\"\n" -#~ "pode contornar todas as limitações do sistema e desavisadamente apagar \n" -#~ " todos os dados de uma partição, por exemplo. É muito importante, " -#~ "portanto, que seja\n" -#~ "difícil se tornar \"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "A senha deve ser um mistura de caracteres alfanuméricos, com pelo menos " -#~ "8 \n" -#~ "caracteres. Nunca escreva a senha de \"root\" num papel -- isto facilita " -#~ "para \n" -#~ " alguém comprometer seu sistema\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Porém, não faça também uma senha muito complicada e longa, porque você\n" -#~ " deve ser capaz de lembrá-la!\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "A senha não será mostrada na tela enquanto você digita. Portanto você\n" -#~ "deverá digitar a senha duas vezes para reduzir a chance de erro. Se " -#~ "ocorrer\n" -#~ "de você digitar o mesmo erro duas vezes, você deverá fazer o primeiro " -#~ "login\n" -#~ "no sistema com esta senha \"errada\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Se seu acesso a este computador é controlado por um servidor de " -#~ "autenticação,\n" -#~ "clique no botão \"%s\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Se sua rede usa o protocolo LDAP, NIS ou autenticação em um PDC Windows,\n" -#~ "selecione o servidor apropriado em \"%s\". Se você não sabe, pergunte ao " -#~ "seu\n" -#~ "administrador de rede.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Se você tiver problemas para lembrar de suas senhas, se seu computador " -#~ "nunca\n" -#~ " será conectado à internet ou se você confiar em absolutamente todas as\n" -#~ "pessoas que usam seu computador, você pode escolher usar \"%s\"." - -#~ msgid "authentication" -#~ msgstr "autenticação" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/ro.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/ro.po index 921154f51..f836a27ea 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/ro.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/ro.po @@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ msgstr "" "Last-Translator: Ovidiu Constantin <ovidiu.constantin@gmx.net>\n" "Language-Team: Romanian Translators for Free Software <rtfs-project@lists." "sourceforge.net>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -88,7 +89,8 @@ msgstr "Vreţi să folosiţi această facilitate?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -98,13 +100,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -115,7 +120,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" @@ -412,13 +418,15 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -431,12 +439,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -459,7 +469,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -616,18 +627,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -650,7 +664,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -658,7 +673,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -677,12 +693,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:526 @@ -723,20 +733,24 @@ msgstr "Schimbă între modul normal/expert" #: ../help.pm:536 #, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -747,10 +761,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" @@ -775,7 +791,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1109,8 +1126,10 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/ru.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/ru.po index 43aad5f5f..747b19348 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/ru.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/ru.po @@ -1,27 +1,31 @@ -# Translation of DrakX.po to Russian -# Russian translation of drakX messages -# Copyright (C) 1999-2003 Mandriva -# Pavel Maryanov <acid_jack@ukr.net>, 2002,2003, 2005. -# Alice Lafox <alice@lafox.com.ua>, 2003. -# Alice Lafox <alice@lafox.net>, 2004, 2005. +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) YEAR THE PACKAGE'S COPYRIGHT HOLDER +# This file is distributed under the same license as the PACKAGE package. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. # +# Translators: +# Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2024 +# +#, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: DrakX\n" +"Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2008-09-12 12:22+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2005-09-20 18:19+0300\n" -"Last-Translator: Pavel Maryanov <acid_jack@ukr.net>\n" -"Language-Team: Russian <doc@lafox.net>\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2024-09-04 17:33+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2024\n" +"Language-Team: Russian (https://app.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/teams/9361/" +"ru/)\n" +"Language: ru\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"X-Generator: KBabel 1.10.2\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n%" -"10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && " +"n%10<=4 && (n%100<12 || n%100>14) ? 1 : n%10==0 || (n%10>=5 && n%10<=9) || " +"(n%100>=11 && n%100<=14)? 2 : 3);\n" #: ../help.pm:14 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Before continuing, you should carefully read the terms of the license. It\n" "covers the entire Mageia distribution. If you agree with all the\n" @@ -113,24 +117,23 @@ msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "User name" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Имя пользователя" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "Accept user" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Принять пользователя" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "Do you want to use this feature?" msgstr "Хотите использовать эту возможность?" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -140,13 +143,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -157,7 +163,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Перечисленное выше является существующими разделами Linux, определенными на\n" @@ -174,7 +181,8 @@ msgstr "" "\"Название\" разделяется на: \"тип жесткого диска\", \"номер жесткого\n" "диска\", \"номер раздела\" (например, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" это \"hd\", если ваш жесткий диск IDE и \"sd\", если он\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" это \"hd\", если ваш жесткий диск IDE и \"sd\", " +"если он\n" "SCSI.\n" "\n" "\"Номер жесткого диска\" всегда является буквой после \"hd\" или \"sd\".\n" @@ -191,10 +199,8 @@ msgstr "" "Для жестких дисков SCSI, \"a\" означает \"lowest SCSI ID\", а \"b\"\n" "означает \"second lowest SCSI ID\", и т.д." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:88 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The Mageia installation is distributed on several CD-ROMs. If a\n" "selected package is located on another CD-ROM, DrakX will eject the current\n" @@ -208,10 +214,8 @@ msgstr "" "руками,\n" "просто нажмите \"%s\", тогда соответствующие пакеты не будут устанавливаться." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:95 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "It's now time to specify which programs you wish to install on your system.\n" "There are thousands of packages available for Mageia, and to make it\n" @@ -272,9 +276,8 @@ msgstr "" "вашу систему. С Mageia поставляются тысячи пакетов и, для упрощения\n" "выбора, они разбиты на группы.\n" "\n" -"Пакеты сортированы по группам, которые соответствуют специфике\n" -"использования вашей машины. В Mageia пакеты сортируются по четырем\n" -"категориям. Вы можете смешивать и сочетать приложения из различных\n" +"В Mageia пакеты сортируются по четырем категориям.\n" +"Вы можете смешивать и сочетать приложения из различных\n" "категорий, например, вариант установки ``Рабочая станция'' может иметь\n" "приложения из категории ``Разработка''.\n" "\n" @@ -283,7 +286,13 @@ msgstr "" "рабочей станции.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": если вы собираетесь заняться программированием, выберите\n" -"соответствующие группы из этой категории.\n" +"соответствующие группы из этой категории. Специальная группа\n" +"\"LSB\" настроит систему таким образом, что она будет содержать наиболее " +"полную\n" +"спецификацию Стандартной базы Linux.\n" +" Выбор \"LSB\" группы обеспечит 100%%-LSB совместимость\n" +"системы. Однако, если вы не выберете группу \"LSB\", вы всё ещё\n" +"будете иметь систему, которая почти на 100%% LSB-совместима.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": если ваша машина будет работать сервером, выберите какие из\n" "часто используемых служб вы желаете установить на нее.\n" @@ -295,7 +304,7 @@ msgstr "" "При наведении курсора мыши на имя группы будет показываться короткое\n" "пояснение к данной группе.\n" "\n" -"ы можете отметить пункт \"%s\", который очень полезен, если вы хорошо\n" +"Вы можете отметить пункт \"%s\", который очень полезен, если вы хорошо\n" "знаете предлагаемые пакеты, или если вы хотите иметь полный контроль над\n" "тем, что будет устанавливаться.\n" "\n" @@ -332,10 +341,8 @@ msgstr "С базовой документацией" msgid "Truly minimal install" msgstr "Самая минимальная установка" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:152 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you choose to install packages individually, the installer will present\n" "a tree containing all packages classified by groups and subgroups. While\n" @@ -407,8 +414,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Automatic dependencies" msgstr "Автоматические зависимости" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:185 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -445,8 +450,6 @@ msgstr "" "Пожалуйста помните, что некоторые службы потенциально опасны для сервера.\n" "В общем, оставьте только те службы, которые вам действительно нужны. !!" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:209 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -480,15 +483,13 @@ msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:213 #, c-format msgid "Hardware clock set to GMT" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Аппаратные часы настроены на время по Гринвичу" #: ../help.pm:213 #, c-format msgid "Automatic time synchronization" msgstr "Автоматическая синхронизация времени" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:223 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -512,10 +513,8 @@ msgstr "" "ускорением и без, вам предложат выбрать, какой сервер больше соответствует\n" "вашим потребностям." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:234 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "X (for X Window System) is the heart of the GNU/Linux graphical interface\n" "on which all the graphical environments (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep,\n" @@ -578,7 +577,9 @@ msgstr "" "WindowMaker, и т.д..), входящие в Mageia.\n" "\n" "Вам будет представлен список различных параметров для получения\n" -"оптимального графического отображения: Видеокарта\n" +"оптимального графического отображения.\n" +"\n" +"Видеокарта\n" "\n" " Инсталлятор обычно автоматически определяет и настраивает видеокарту,\n" "установленную в вашей машине. Если это не так, вы можете выбрать в этом\n" @@ -661,8 +662,6 @@ msgstr "" "это изменить после инсталляции). Пример выбранной конфигурации отображается\n" "на мониторе." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:306 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -674,8 +673,6 @@ msgstr "" "и без, вам предложат выбрать, какой сервер больше соответствует вашим\n" "потребностям." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:311 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -693,19 +690,19 @@ msgstr "" "машина будет работать в качестве сервера или вам не удалось настроить\n" "графический режим." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:319 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -718,12 +715,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -746,7 +745,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -808,7 +808,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\": эта опция позволит просто удалить всю информацию на диске и\n" "начать создание разделов диска на пустом месте. Вся информация на вашем\n" -"диске будет утеряна.\n" +"диске будет утеряна. Эта опция появляется, если жесткий диск полностьюзанят " +"Microsoft Windows.\n" "\n" " !! Если вы выберете эту опцию, все данные на вашем диске будут потеряны.\n" "!!\n" @@ -829,15 +830,13 @@ msgstr "Использовать существующий раздел" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format msgid "Use the free space on the Microsoft Windows® partition" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Использовать свободное пространство на разделе Microsoft Windows®" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format msgid "Erase entire disk" msgstr "Очистить весь диск" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:380 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -913,22 +912,20 @@ msgstr "Создать дискету автоматической устано #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Replay" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Повторить" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Automated" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Автоматически" #: ../help.pm:405 #, c-format msgid "Save packages selection" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Сохранить список пакетов" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:408 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you chose to reuse some legacy GNU/Linux partitions, you may wish to\n" "reformat some of them and erase any data they contain. To do so, please\n" @@ -977,10 +974,8 @@ msgstr "" "Нажмите \"%s\", если хотите выбрать разделы, которые следует проверить на\n" "сбойные блоки (bad blocks)." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:437 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "By the time you install Mageia, it's likely that some packages will\n" "have been updated since the initial release. Bugs may have been fixed,\n" @@ -1006,10 +1001,8 @@ msgstr "" "пакетов: просмотрите список и нажмите \"%s\" для получения и установки\n" "выбранных пакетов, или \"%s\" для отмены." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:450 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, DrakX will allow you to choose the security level you desire\n" "for your machine. As a rule of thumb, the security level should be set\n" @@ -1032,9 +1025,10 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Если вы не знаете что выбрать, оставьте выбор по умолчанию. Вы сможете\n" "изменить этот уровень безопасности потом с помощью утилиты draksec из\n" -"Mageia Control Center.\n" +"Центра управления Mageia.\n" "\n" -"В поле \"%s\" системе указывается пользователь, который будет отвечать за\n" +"В поле \"%s\" системе указывается пользователь (e-mail), который будет " +"отвечать за\n" "безопасность. На этот адрес будут посылаться сообщения по безопасности." #: ../help.pm:461 @@ -1042,26 +1036,27 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Security Administrator" msgstr "Администратор по безопасности" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:464 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1084,7 +1079,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1092,7 +1088,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1111,12 +1108,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Здесь вам предложат выбрать, какие разделы будут использоваться для\n" "установки вашей системы Mageia. Если разделы были уже определены\n" @@ -1133,7 +1124,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\": эта опция удаляет все разделы на выбранном жестком диске;\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": эта опция позволяет автоматически создать ext3 и swap разделы на\n" +" * \"%s\": эта опция позволяет автоматически создать ext4 и swap разделы на\n" "свободном пространстве вашего жесткого диска.\n" "\n" "\"%s\": открывает доступ к дополнительным возможностям:\n" @@ -1149,7 +1140,8 @@ msgstr "" "восстановить, используя эту опцию. Пожалуйста, будьте осторожны и помните,\n" "что это может и не получиться.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": отменяет все изменения и загружает исходную таблицу разделов.\n" +" * \"%s\": отменяет все изменения и загружает исходную таблицу разделов,\n" +"что была в оригинале на жесткий диск.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": если не выбрать эту опцию, то пользователи будут вынуждены\n" "вручную монтировать и размонтировать съемные носители типа дискет и\n" @@ -1183,27 +1175,21 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Чтобы получить информацию о различных доступных файловых системах,\n" "пожалуйста почитайте главу ext2FS из книги ``Справочное руководство''.\n" -"\n" -"Если вы производите инсталляцию на PPC машину, вам потребуется создать\n" -"маленький HFS ``bootstrap'' раздел, не больше 1MB, который будет\n" -"использоваться загрузчиком yaboot. Если вы решите сделать раздел чуть\n" -"больше, скажем 50MB, то вы найдете полезное место для хранения spare kernel\n" -"и ramdisk образов для загрузки в аварийных ситуациях." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Save partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Сохранить таблицу разделов" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Restore partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Восстановить таблицу разделов" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Rescue partition table" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Исправить таблицу разделов" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1213,37 +1199,39 @@ msgstr "Автомонтирование съемных носителей" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Wizard" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Мастер" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Undo" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Вернуть" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format msgid "Toggle between normal/expert mode" msgstr "Переключение между нормальным/экспертным режимами" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:536 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1254,10 +1242,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "На вашем жестом диске обнаружено несколько разделов Microsoft. Выберите\n" @@ -1289,8 +1279,6 @@ msgstr "" "\"Windows name\" это буква жесткого диска под Windows (первый диск или\n" "раздел называется \"C:\")." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:567 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -1304,10 +1292,8 @@ msgstr "" "присутствует в первом показанном списке, нажмите кнопку \"%s\", чтобы\n" "увидеть полный список." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:572 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "This step is activated only if an existing GNU/Linux partition has been\n" "found on your machine.\n" @@ -1318,7 +1304,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1351,8 +1338,6 @@ msgstr "" "\"8.1\" и выше. Проведение обновления на системах Mageia старше\n" "\"8.1\" не рекомендуется." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:594 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -1391,10 +1376,8 @@ msgstr "" "алфавите, следующее диалоговое окно позволит вам выбрать сочетание клавиш\n" "для переключения между латинской и не-латинской раскладками." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:612 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The first step is to choose your preferred language.\n" "\n" @@ -1436,6 +1419,7 @@ msgid "" "by the entire system. Running the command as a regular user will only\n" "change the language settings for that particular user." msgstr "" +"Первый шаг - выбор вашего предпочитаемого языка.\n" "Ваш выбор предпочитаемого языка повлияет на язык документации, сам\n" "инсталлятор и систему в целом. Выберите сначала регион, в котором вы\n" "находитесь, затем язык на котором вы говорите.\n" @@ -1446,7 +1430,8 @@ msgstr "" "Например, если у вас в системе будут работать пользователи из Испании,\n" "выберите в дереве English как основной, и \"%s\" в дополнительном разделе.\n" "\n" -"О поддержке UTF-8 (unicode): Unicode это новая кодировка, которая включает\n" +"О поддержке UTF-8 (unicode): Unicode - это новая кодировка, которая " +"включает\n" "в себя все существующие языки. Однако ее полная поддержка в GNU/Linux пока\n" "находится в стадии разработки. Поэтому Mageia будет определять\n" "использовать ее или нет в зависимости от выбора пользователя:\n" @@ -1470,7 +1455,7 @@ msgstr "" "шрифтов, проверку орфографии и т.д. для установленных языков.\n" "\n" "Для переключения между различными установленными языками в вашей системе вы\n" -"можете запускать команду \"/usr/sbin/localedrake\" с правами \"root\",\n" +"можете запускать команду \"localedrake\" с правами \"root\",\n" "чтобы изменить язык для всей системы. Запуск этой команды с правами\n" "обычного пользователя позволит изменить настройки языка для данного\n" "конкретного пользователя." @@ -1483,10 +1468,8 @@ msgstr "Испанский" #: ../help.pm:643 #, c-format msgid "Use Unicode by default" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Использовать Unicode по умолчанию" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:646 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -1567,8 +1550,6 @@ msgstr "с эмуляцией колесика" msgid "Universal | Any PS/2 & USB mice" msgstr "Универсальный |Любая PS/2 & USB мышь" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:687 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -1578,8 +1559,6 @@ msgstr "" "Пожалуйста, выберите правильный порт. Например, порт \"COM1\" под Windows\n" "называется \"ttyS0\" под GNU/Linux." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:684 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -1615,10 +1594,8 @@ msgstr "" "начальный загрузчик не будет установлен вообще. Используйте этот вариант\n" "только если вы знаете, что вы делаете." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:745 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Now, it's time to select a printing system for your computer. Other\n" "operating systems may offer you one, but Mageia offers two. Each of\n" @@ -1645,9 +1622,8 @@ msgid "" "system you may change it by running PrinterDrake from the Mageia\n" "Control Center and clicking on the \"%s\" button." msgstr "" -"Теперь пришло время выбрать систему печати для вашего компьютера. Другие OS\n" -"могут предложить вам одну, а Mageia предлагает две. Каждая из " -"систем\n" +"Теперь пришло время выбрать систему печати для вашего компьютера. Другие ОС\n" +"могут предложить вам одну, а Mageia предлагает две. Каждая из систем\n" "является лучшей для определенной конфигурации.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\" -- что означает ``печатать, не ставить в очередь'' (``print,\n" @@ -1670,7 +1646,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Если вы сделаете свой выбор сейчас, а позже обнаружите, что система печати\n" "вам не подходит, вы сможете изменить ее, запустив PrinterDrake из Центра\n" -"Управления Mageia и нажав на кнопку \"%s\"." +"управления Mageia и нажав на кнопку \"%s\"." #: ../help.pm:768 #, c-format @@ -1680,15 +1656,13 @@ msgstr "pdq" #: ../help.pm:724 #, c-format msgid "CUPS" -msgstr "" +msgstr "CUPS" #: ../help.pm:724 #, c-format msgid "Expert" msgstr "Эксперт" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:771 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -1726,8 +1700,6 @@ msgstr "" "Если DrakX не в состоянии автоматически определить, какие параметры нужны\n" "оборудованию, вам прийдется вручную настроить драйвер." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:789 #, c-format msgid "" @@ -1740,10 +1712,8 @@ msgstr "" "тому, что у вас реально есть в системе, вы можете нажать на кнопку и\n" "выбрать другой драйвер." -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:794 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "As a review, DrakX will present a summary of information it has gathered\n" "about your system. Depending on the hardware installed on your machine, you\n" @@ -1828,11 +1798,6 @@ msgstr "" " * \"%s\": проверьте текущую конфигурацию мыши и нажмите на кнопку, если\n" "необходимо что-либо изменить.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": по нажатию на кнопку \"%s\" откроется мастер настройки принтера.\n" -"Прочитайте соответствующую главу в книге ``Стартовое руководство\n" -"пользователя'', чтобы узнать как установить новый принтер. Представленный\n" -"там интерфейс подобен используемому в процессе установки.\n" -"\n" " * \"%s\": если в вашей системе найдена звуковая карта, здесь это будет\n" "показано. Если вы увидите, что показанная звуковая карта не соответствует\n" "тому, что у вас реально есть в системе, вы можете нажать на кнопку и\n" @@ -1875,9 +1840,9 @@ msgstr "" "установки." #: ../help.pm:809 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "TV card" -msgstr "карта ISDN" +msgstr "TV-карта" #: ../help.pm:809 #, c-format @@ -1889,10 +1854,8 @@ msgstr "карта ISDN" msgid "Graphical Interface" msgstr "Графический Интерфейс" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:861 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Choose the hard disk drive you want to erase in order to install your new\n" "Mageia partition. Be careful, all data on this drive will be lost\n" @@ -1902,14 +1865,14 @@ msgstr "" "раздела Mageia. Будьте осторожны, все данные на нем будут потеряны\n" "и их нельзя будет восстановить!" -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml #: ../help.pm:866 #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" @@ -1932,121 +1895,3 @@ msgstr "Далее ->" #, c-format msgid "<- Previous" msgstr "<- Назад" - -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml -#~ msgid "" -#~ "\"%s\": clicking on the \"%s\" button will open the printer " -#~ "configuration\n" -#~ "wizard. Consult the corresponding chapter of the ``Starter Guide'' for " -#~ "more\n" -#~ "information on how to set up a new printer. The interface presented in " -#~ "our\n" -#~ "manual is similar to the one used during installation." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "\"%s\": по нажатию на кнопку \"%s\" откроется мастер настройки принтера.\n" -#~ "Прочитайте соответствующую главу в книге ``Стартовое руководство\n" -#~ "пользователя'', чтобы узнать как установить новый принтер. " -#~ "Представленный\n" -#~ "там интерфейс подобен используемому в процессе установки." - -# DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: -# cvs.mandriva.com:/cooker/doc/manualB/modules/ru/drakx-chapter.xml -#~ msgid "" -#~ "This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your GNU/" -#~ "Linux\n" -#~ "system: you must enter the \"root\" password. \"Root\" is the system\n" -#~ "administrator and is the only user authorized to make updates, add " -#~ "users,\n" -#~ "change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short, \"root\" " -#~ "can\n" -#~ "do everything! That's why you must choose a password which is difficult " -#~ "to\n" -#~ "guess: DrakX will tell you if the password you chose is too simple. As " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "can see, you're not forced to enter a password, but we strongly advise\n" -#~ "against this. GNU/Linux is just as prone to operator error as any other\n" -#~ "operating system. Since \"root\" can overcome all limitations and\n" -#~ "unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly accessing the\n" -#~ "partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to become\n" -#~ "\"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password should be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and at least " -#~ "8\n" -#~ "characters long. Never write down the \"root\" password -- it makes it " -#~ "far\n" -#~ "too easy to compromise your system.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "One caveat: do not make the password too long or too complicated because " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "must be able to remember it!\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password will not be displayed on screen as you type it. To reduce " -#~ "the\n" -#~ "chance of a blind typing error you'll need to enter the password twice. " -#~ "If\n" -#~ "you do happen to make the same typing error twice, you'll have to use " -#~ "this\n" -#~ "``incorrect'' password the first time you'll try to connect as \"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you want an authentication server to control access to your computer,\n" -#~ "click on the \"%s\" button.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If your network uses either LDAP, NIS, or PDC Windows Domain " -#~ "authentication\n" -#~ "services, select the appropriate one for \"%s\". If you do not know " -#~ "which\n" -#~ "one to use, you should ask your network administrator.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you happen to have problems with remembering passwords, or if your\n" -#~ "computer will never be connected to the Internet and you absolutely " -#~ "trust\n" -#~ "everybody who uses your computer, you can choose to have \"%s\"." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Это самое важное решение в деле безопасности вашей системы GNU/Linux: вы\n" -#~ "должны ввести пароль \"root\". \"Root\" является администратором системы, " -#~ "и\n" -#~ "только он имеет право производить обновления, добавлять пользователей,\n" -#~ "изменять конфигурацию системы и так далее. Короче говоря, \"root\" может\n" -#~ "все! Вот поэтому вы должны придумать пароль, который трудно подобрать -\n" -#~ "DrakX сообщит вам, если пароль слишком прост. Как вы видите, можно " -#~ "вообще\n" -#~ "не вводить пароль, но мы серьезно советуем вам этого не делать по одной\n" -#~ "простой причине: не думайте, что если вы загрузили GNU/Linux, то ваши\n" -#~ "остальные операционные системы защищены от ошибок. Так как \"root\" " -#~ "может\n" -#~ "переступить все ограничения и непреднамеренно стереть все данные на\n" -#~ "разделах диска, обращаясь небрежно с разделами, то очень важно, чтобы " -#~ "стать\n" -#~ "\"root\" было трудно.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Пароль должен быть сочетанием цифровых и буквенных символов и иметь " -#~ "длину\n" -#~ "не менее 8 символов. Никогда не записывайте пароль \"root\" - это делает\n" -#~ "очень легкой возможность скомпрометировать систему.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Одно предостережение -- не делайте пароль слишком длинным или слишком\n" -#~ "сложным, потому что вы должны его без особых усилий запомнить!\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Пароль не будет отображаться на экране так же, как вы его вводите. Кроме\n" -#~ "того, вам прийдется повторить ввод пароля, чтобы предупредить " -#~ "возможность\n" -#~ "опечатки. Если случится так, что вы опечатались дважды, тогда этот\n" -#~ "``неверный'' пароль прийдется использовать при первой загрузке.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Если вы желаете, чтобы доступ к этому компьютеру контролировался " -#~ "сервером\n" -#~ "аутентификации, нажмите на кнопку \"%s\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Если ваша сеть использует службы аутентификации LDAP, NIS или PDC " -#~ "Windows\n" -#~ "Domain выберите соответствующий тип \"%s\". Если не знаете что выбрать,\n" -#~ "спросите своего администратора сети.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Если у вас возникли проблемы с запоминанием паролей, вы можете выбрать\n" -#~ "опцию \"%s\", если ваш компьютер не будет подключаться к Интернет и если " -#~ "вы\n" -#~ "доверяете всем доступ к своей машине." - -#~ msgid "authentication" -#~ msgstr "аутентификация" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/sc.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/sc.po index 45efd0569..e23d39d6d 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/sc.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/sc.po @@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -673,12 +673,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:526 diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/sk.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/sk.po index ec2d0c9ce..8289d938a 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/sk.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/sk.po @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2005-09-21 14:03+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Tibor Pittich <Tibor.Pittich@mandriva.org>\n" "Language-Team: <i18n@mandrake.sk>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -130,7 +131,8 @@ msgstr "Chcete použiť túto možnosť?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -140,13 +142,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -157,7 +162,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Tu je zoznam oblastí s existujúcimi Linux oddielmi, ktoré boli zdetekované\n" @@ -201,8 +207,7 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"Inštalácia Mageiau je distribuovaná na viacerých CD-ROM diskoch. " -"DrakX\n" +"Inštalácia Mageiau je distribuovaná na viacerých CD-ROM diskoch. DrakX\n" "vie zistiť, ak je vybraný balík umiestnený na inom CD-ROM disku, vysunie\n" "aktuálne CD a vypýta si od vás to ktoré je práve potrebné. Ak toto CD " "nemáte, kliknite na \"%s\" a požadovaný balík nebude nainštalovaný." @@ -266,8 +271,7 @@ msgid "" "megabytes." msgstr "" "Teraz je možné vybrať, ktoré programy chcete nainštalovať na váš systém.\n" -"Mageia obsahuje tisíce balčkov s programami. Pre jednoduchšiu " -"orientáciu\n" +"Mageia obsahuje tisíce balčkov s programami. Pre jednoduchšiu orientáciu\n" "boly rozdelené do skupín, ktoré združujú podobné aplikácie.\n" "\n" "Balíčky sú rozdelené do skupín, ktoré zodpovedajú tomu, ako ich " @@ -384,13 +388,11 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "!! Ak boli vybrané balíky, ktoré sú určené pre server, buď zámerne alebo\n" "preto že sú súčasťou celej skupiny, budete musieť potvrdiť, či skutočne\n" -"chcete tieto služby nainštalovať. V prípade Mageiau, sú štandardne " -"všetky\n" +"chcete tieto služby nainštalovať. V prípade Mageiau, sú štandardne všetky\n" "nainštalované služby spúšťané pri štarte systému. Aj keď sú bezpečné\n" "a v čase keď bola distribúcia vydaná neobsahovali žiadne známe problémy\n" "je možné, že tieto bezpečnostné problémy budú odhalené až po dokončení\n" -"tejto verzie Mageiau. Ak neviete čo jednotlivé servisy znamenajú, " -"alebo\n" +"tejto verzie Mageiau. Ak neviete čo jednotlivé servisy znamenajú, alebo\n" "prečo boli nainštalované tak kliknite na \"%s\". Kliknutím na \"%s\" budú\n" "vypísané služby nainštalované a automaticky naštartované pri spustení\n" "systému. !!\n" @@ -709,13 +711,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -728,12 +732,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -756,7 +762,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1074,18 +1081,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1108,7 +1118,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1116,7 +1127,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1135,12 +1147,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Na tomto mieste je potrebné aby ste si vybrali oblasti, ktoré budú použité\n" "na inštaláciu Mageiau. Ak už boli oddiely definované,\n" @@ -1158,7 +1164,7 @@ msgstr "" " * \"%s\": táto voľba vymaže všetky oblasti na vybranom pevnom\n" "disku\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": táto voľba umožní automatické vytvorenie ext3\n" +" * \"%s\": táto voľba umožní automatické vytvorenie ext4\n" "a swap oblasti na voľnom mieste vášho disku\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": získate prístup k rozšíreným možnostiam:\n" @@ -1217,13 +1223,6 @@ msgstr "" "Pre získanie informácií o iných súborových systémoch, ktoré sú dostupné, " "prečítajte\n" "si ext2FS kapitolu z ``Referenčnej príručky''.\n" -"\n" -"Ak prevádzate inštaláciu na PPC hardvéri, budete zrejme chcieť vytvoriť malý " -"HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' oddiel veľký aspoň 1MB, ktorý bude môcť používať yaboot\n" -"zavádzač. Ak sa rozhodnete vytvoriť tento oddiel väčší, povedzme 50MB, môže\n" -"to byť vhodné miesto pre uloženie jadra a obrazov ramdisku pre výnimočné\n" -"situácie, ktoré môžu nastať." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1263,20 +1262,24 @@ msgstr "Prepnúť medzi normálnym/expertným režimom" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1287,10 +1290,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Bol nájdený viac ako jeden Microsoft oddiel na vašom pevnom disku.\n" @@ -1349,7 +1354,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1383,8 +1389,7 @@ msgstr "" "inštalácie ostanú dostupné, podobne ako pri štandardnej inštalácii.\n" "\n" "Použitie voľby ``Aktualizácia'' by malo fungovať správne pre systémy\n" -"Mageia \"8.1\" a novšie. Vykonanie Aktualizácie pre staršie verzie " -"ako\n" +"Mageia \"8.1\" a novšie. Vykonanie Aktualizácie pre staršie verzie ako\n" "\"8.1\" nie je odporúčané.\"" #: ../help.pm:594 @@ -1672,8 +1677,7 @@ msgid "" "Control Center and clicking on the \"%s\" button." msgstr "" "Teraz nastal čas výberu tlačového systému pre váš počítač. Iné operačné\n" -"systémy vám poskytujú zvyčajne iba jediný, Mageia vám poskytuje " -"dva.\n" +"systémy vám poskytujú zvyčajne iba jediný, Mageia vám poskytuje dva.\n" "Kazdý z nich je vhodný pre iný typ konfigurácie.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\" - čo znamená ``tlačiť, neukladať do fronty'', je vhodný výber ak\n" @@ -1873,8 +1877,7 @@ msgstr "" " * \"%s\": ak si teraz želáte nastaviť vaše Internetové pripojenie\n" "alebo prístup do lokálnej siete. Prezrite si tlačenú dokumentáciu alebo " "použite\n" -"Kontrolné centrum Mageia ak už bude inštalácia ukončená aby ste " -"mali\n" +"Kontrolné centrum Mageia ak už bude inštalácia ukončená aby ste mali\n" "prístup k dokumentácii.\n" " * \"%s\": vám umožní nastaviť HTTP alebo FTP proxy ak je počítač\n" "umiestnený za proxy serverom.\n" @@ -1926,8 +1929,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/sl.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/sl.po index 7398b7329..71e2dd797 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/sl.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/sl.po @@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2009-10-03 17:02+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Jure Repinc <jlp@holodeck1.com>\n" "Language-Team: Slovenian <lugos-slo@lugos.si>\n" +"Language: sl\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ msgstr "" "n%100==4 ? 2 : 3);\n" #: ../help.pm:14 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Before continuing, you should carefully read the terms of the license. It\n" "covers the entire Mageia distribution. If you agree with all the\n" @@ -198,7 +199,7 @@ msgstr "" "»drugi najnižji SCSI ID« itd." #: ../help.pm:88 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The Mageia installation is distributed on several CD-ROMs. If a\n" "selected package is located on another CD-ROM, DrakX will eject the current\n" @@ -206,7 +207,7 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"Namestitev za Mageia je shranjena na več nosilcih.\n" +"Namestitev za distribucijo Mageia je shranjena na več nosilcih.\n" "Če je izbrani paket shranjen na drugem nosilcu, bo DrakX izvrgel\n" "trenutnega in vas pozval, da v pogon vstavite pravi nosilec.\n" "Če pravega nosilca nimate, kliknite »%s« in paketi z njega ne\n" @@ -271,7 +272,7 @@ msgid "" "megabytes." msgstr "" "Sedaj je čas za izbiro programov, ki jih želite namestiti na sistem.\n" -"Za Mageia je dostopnih na tisoče različnih programskih paketov.\n" +"Za distribucijo Mageia je dostopnih na tisoče različnih programskih paketov.\n" "Da bi bilo upravljanje s paketi bolj preprosto, so razvrščeni v skupine\n" "vsebinsko povezanih paketov.\n" "\n" @@ -345,7 +346,7 @@ msgid "Truly minimal install" msgstr "Zares minimalna namestitev" #: ../help.pm:152 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you choose to install packages individually, the installer will present\n" "a tree containing all packages classified by groups and subgroups. While\n" @@ -394,7 +395,7 @@ msgstr "" "boste morali namestitev takšnega paketa na izrecno vprašanje\n" "potrditi. Mageia namreč kot privzeto vključi vse\n" " nameščene storitve ob zagonu sistema. Čeprav ob izdaji\n" -"te različice Mageiaa ni bilo znanih težav v zvezi z varnostjo,\n" +"te različice Mageia ni bilo znanih težav v zvezi z varnostjo,\n" "je mogoče, da so bile odkrite varnostne luknje kasneje. Če za \n" "določeno storitev ne veste, kaj je njena naloga, kliknite »%s« S klikom\n" "na »%s«bodo nameščene naštete storitve, sistem pa jih bo samodejno\n" @@ -525,7 +526,7 @@ msgstr "" "vašim potrebam." #: ../help.pm:234 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "X (for X Window System) is the heart of the GNU/Linux graphical interface\n" "on which all the graphical environments (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep,\n" @@ -584,7 +585,7 @@ msgid "" "not successful in getting the display configured." msgstr "" "X (okenski sistem X) je srce grafičnega vmesnika za GNU/Linux\n" -"na katerega se zanašajo vsa v Mageia vključena grafična\n" +"na katerega se zanašajo vsa v distribucijo Mageia vključena grafična\n" "okolja. (KDE, GNOME, AfterStep, WindowMaker ...)\n" "\n" "Prikazal se vam bo seznam različnih vrednosti, ki jih lahko spreminjate,\n" @@ -696,7 +697,7 @@ msgstr "" "ali če vam ni uspelo nastaviti zaslona, označite »%s«." #: ../help.pm:319 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" "operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" @@ -928,7 +929,7 @@ msgid "Save packages selection" msgstr "Shrani izbor paketov" #: ../help.pm:408 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "If you chose to reuse some legacy GNU/Linux partitions, you may wish to\n" "reformat some of them and erase any data they contain. To do so, please\n" @@ -972,7 +973,7 @@ msgstr "" "preveri poškodovane bloke." #: ../help.pm:437 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "By the time you install Mageia, it's likely that some packages will\n" "have been updated since the initial release. Bugs may have been fixed,\n" @@ -987,7 +988,7 @@ msgid "" "the selected package(s), or \"%s\" to abort." msgstr "" "Verjetno so bili od njegove izdaje pa do časa, ko nameščate\n" -"Mageia na svoj računalnik, nekateri paketi popravljeni\n" +"distribucijo Mageia na svoj računalnik, nekateri paketi popravljeni\n" "ali nadgrajeni z varnostnimi popravki ali z odstranitvijo hroščev.\n" "Te popravke lahko prenesete z interneta. Če imate vzpostavljeno\n" "internetno povezavo, označite »%s«, če pa želite namestiti\n" @@ -999,7 +1000,7 @@ msgstr "" "Če tega ne želite, pritisnite »%s«." #: ../help.pm:450 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, DrakX will allow you to choose the security level you desire\n" "for your machine. As a rule of thumb, the security level should be set\n" @@ -1033,7 +1034,7 @@ msgid "Security Administrator" msgstr "Upravitelj varnostnih nastavitev" #: ../help.pm:464 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" @@ -1049,7 +1050,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1099,12 +1100,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Izbrati morate razdelke, na katere boste namestili sistem\n" "Mageia. Če ste razdelke že izbrali ob kakšni predhodni\n" @@ -1120,7 +1115,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * »%s«: brisanje vseh razdelkov na izbranem disku\n" "\n" -" * »%s«: samodejno ustvarjanje ext3 in izmenjalnih (swap) razdelkov\n" +" * »%s«: samodejno ustvarjanje ext4 in izmenjalnih (swap) razdelkov\n" "na prostem delu vašega trdega diska.\n" "\n" "»%s«: dostop do dodatnih možnosti:\n" @@ -1169,12 +1164,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Vse nadaljnje informacije o datotečnih sistemih boste našli v\n" "dokumentaciji.\n" -"\n" -"Če Mageia nameščate na PPC računalnik, morate ustvariti\n" -"zagonski »bootstrap« razdelek z velikostjo najmanj 1MB, ki ga\n" -"uporablja zagonski nalagalnik yaboot. Če ta razdelek nekoliko\n" -"povečate in mu namenite vsaj 50MB, boste nanj lahko shranjevali\n" -"potrebne datoteke za zasilni zagon sistema." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1212,7 +1201,7 @@ msgid "Toggle between normal/expert mode" msgstr "Preklopi med normalnim in izvedenskim načinom" #: ../help.pm:536 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" @@ -1287,7 +1276,7 @@ msgstr "" "kliknite »%s« za prikaz celotnega seznama držav." #: ../help.pm:572 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "This step is activated only if an existing GNU/Linux partition has been\n" "found on your machine.\n" @@ -1367,7 +1356,7 @@ msgstr "" "preklapljanje med latiničnim in ne-latiničnim razporedom tipkovnice." #: ../help.pm:612 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "The first step is to choose your preferred language.\n" "\n" @@ -1584,7 +1573,7 @@ msgstr "" "To možnost izberite samo, če zares veste, kaj delate. " #: ../help.pm:745 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Now, it's time to select a printing system for your computer. Other\n" "operating systems may offer you one, but Mageia offers two. Each of\n" @@ -1841,7 +1830,7 @@ msgid "Graphical Interface" msgstr "Grafična kartica" #: ../help.pm:861 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Choose the hard disk drive you want to erase in order to install your new\n" "Mageia partition. Be careful, all data on this drive will be lost\n" @@ -1849,7 +1838,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Izberite trdi disk, ki ga želite izbrisati, da bi dobili prostor za " "razdelek\n" -"za Mageia.\n" +"za distribucijo Mageia.\n" "Vsi podatki na izbranem disku bodo izbrisani in jih ne bo mogoče\n" "obnoviti!" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/sq.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/sq.po index c2e891283..d87248cd2 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/sq.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/sq.po @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2004-09-15 13:33+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Naim Daka <naim70@freesurf.ch>\n" "Language-Team: Albanian <LL@li.org>\n" +"Language: sq\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8-bit\n" @@ -132,7 +133,8 @@ msgstr "A dëshironi ta përdorni këtë veçori?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -142,13 +144,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -159,7 +164,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Lista e lartë shënuar identifikon ndrajet Linux të zbuluara në\n" @@ -204,8 +210,7 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"Pakot e nevojshme për Instalimin e Mageia janë të shpërndara në " -"shumë\n" +"Pakot e nevojshme për Instalimin e Mageia janë të shpërndara në shumë\n" "CDROM-e. Fatëmirësisht, DrakX i njef të gjitha lokacinet e pakove në CDROM-" "e.\n" "Ai do ta qetë jashtë CD-në që gjindet në lexuesin e CD-ve, dhe juve do të " @@ -706,13 +711,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -725,12 +732,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -753,7 +762,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1051,18 +1061,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1085,7 +1098,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1093,7 +1107,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1112,12 +1127,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Në këtë etapë ju duhet të zgjedhni se cila(t) ndarje(t) do të përdoret(n)\n" "për sistemin tuaj Mageia. Nëse ndarja e diskut është bërë më heret,\n" @@ -1136,7 +1145,7 @@ msgstr "" " * \"%s\": ky opcion do të zhduk, të gjitha ndarjet në diskun e zgjedhur\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": ky opcion mundëson krijimin e një sistemi të skedareve\n" -"ext3 dhe swap të ndarjeve, në hapësirën e lirë të diskut tuaja\n" +"ext4 dhe swap të ndarjeve, në hapësirën e lirë të diskut tuaja\n" "\n" "\"%s\": mundëson hyrjen në fonksionimin e llogarive:\n" "\n" @@ -1186,13 +1195,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Për të përfituar më shumë informacione mbi sistemet e skedareve, lexoni mbi\n" "sistemin e skedareve ext2FS në ``Doracakun referues''.\n" -"\n" -"Nëse ju jeni duke instaluar një stacion PPC, ju duhet të krijoni një ndarje\n" -"të vogël HFS ``bootstrap'' më së paku 1MB, e cila do të përdoret nga " -"bootloader\n" -"yaboot. Nëse dëshironi të bëni një ndarje më të madhe, p.sh 50MB, ju duhet\n" -"të gjeni një vegël për të vendosur bërthamat dhe imazhet ramdisk hyrëse në\n" -"rastë të ndonji problemi." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1232,20 +1234,24 @@ msgstr "Kalo mes modit normal/ekspert" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1256,10 +1262,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Janë gjetur më shumë se një ndarje Windows në diskun tuaj të fort, ju\n" @@ -1318,7 +1326,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1354,8 +1363,7 @@ msgstr "" "Duke përdorur mundësinë ``Azhurno'' duhet të funksionoj shumë mirë në " "sistemin\n" "Mageia ndër versionin \"8.1\" apo më të ri. Tentimi i Azhurnimit të\n" -"një versioni më të vjetër se versioni Mageia \"8.1\" nuk " -"rekomandohet." +"një versioni më të vjetër se versioni Mageia \"8.1\" nuk rekomandohet." #: ../help.pm:594 #, fuzzy, c-format @@ -1868,8 +1876,10 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/sr.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/sr.po index 72917b3d8..95516e817 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/sr.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/sr.po @@ -11,12 +11,13 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2004-09-15 13:33+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Toma Jankovic <tomaja@net.yu>\n" "Language-Team: Serbian <i18n@mandrake.co.yu>\n" +"Language: sr\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Generator: KBabel 0.9.6\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n%" -"10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2;\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n" +"%10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2;\n" #: ../help.pm:14 #, fuzzy, c-format @@ -136,7 +137,8 @@ msgstr "Да ли желите да користите ову опцију ?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -146,13 +148,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -163,7 +168,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Изнад се налази листа постојећих Linux партиција које су детектоване\n" @@ -213,8 +219,7 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"Mageia инсталација се налази на неколико дискова илити CDROM-ова. " -"DrakX\n" +"Mageia инсталација се налази на неколико дискова илити CDROM-ова. DrakX\n" "зна уколико да уколико је селктовани пакет лоциран на другом CDROM-у и " "избациће\n" "тренутни CD те тражити од вас да убаците одговарајући." @@ -278,8 +283,7 @@ msgid "" "megabytes." msgstr "" "Сада је време да одредимо које програме желите да инсталирате на ваш\n" -"систем. Постоје хиљаде пакета доступних за инсталацију на Mageia, " -"и \n" +"систем. Постоје хиљаде пакета доступних за инсталацију на Mageia, и \n" "да би их учинили доступнијим, смеђтени су у групе сличних апликација.\n" "\n" "Пакети су сортирани у групе у односу на одговарајућу употребу на вашој\n" @@ -710,13 +714,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -729,12 +735,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -757,7 +765,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -775,8 +784,7 @@ msgstr "" "постојећи оперативни систем користи сав постојећи простор на диску, треба да " "га\n" "партиционирате. У основи, партиционирање хард диска се састоји логичког\n" -"дељења да би обезбедили простор за инсталацију ваш нови Mageia " -"систем.\n" +"дељења да би обезбедили простор за инсталацију ваш нови Mageia систем.\n" "\n" "Пошто су ефекти процеса партиционирања обично неповратни,\n" "партиционирање може бити прилично стресан процес за неискусне кориснике.\n" @@ -1090,18 +1098,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1124,7 +1135,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1132,7 +1144,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1151,12 +1164,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "На овој тачки, морате избрати коју партицију(e) желите да користите за\n" "инсталацију новог Mageia система. Уколико су партиције\n" @@ -1223,13 +1230,6 @@ msgstr "" "Да би добили информације о различитим доступним типовима система, " "прочитајте\n" "ext2FS поглавље из ``Упуства''.\n" -"\n" -"Уколико радите инсталацију на PPC Машину, можда ћете желети да креирате " -"малу\n" -"HFS 'bootstrap' партицију од најмање 1MB за употребу\n" -"yaboot стартера. Уколико се двоумите да ову партицију направите мало већом,\n" -"на пример 50MB, можете искористити тај простор за смештање\n" -"резервног кернела и ramdisk image за стартање у хитним ситуацијама." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1269,20 +1269,24 @@ msgstr "Пређи на нормални мод" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1293,10 +1297,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Једна или више Microsoft Windows партиција је детектовано \n" @@ -1354,7 +1360,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1840,8 +1847,10 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/sr@Latn.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/sr@Latn.po index 2128132ce..2a825542d 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/sr@Latn.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/sr@Latn.po @@ -1104,7 +1104,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1154,12 +1154,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Na ovoj tački, morate izbrati koju particiju(e) želite da koristite za\n" "instalaciju novog Mageia sistema. Ukoliko su particije\n" @@ -1228,13 +1222,6 @@ msgstr "" "Da bi dobili informacije o različitim dostupnim tipovima sistema, " "pročitajte\n" "ext2FS poglavlje iz ``Upustva''.\n" -"\n" -"Ukoliko radite instalaciju na PPC Mašinu, možda ćete želeti da kreirate " -"malu\n" -"HFS 'bootstrap' particiju od najmanje 1MB za upotrebu\n" -"yaboot startera. Ukoliko se dvoumite da ovu particiju napravite malo većom,\n" -"na primer 50MB, možete iskoristiti taj prostor za smeštanje\n" -"rezervnog kernela i ramdisk image za startanje u hitnim situacijama." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/sv.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/sv.po index e65cf18a5..f3ebac4a8 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/sv.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/sv.po @@ -1,29 +1,26 @@ -# DrakX-sv - Swedish Translation +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) YEAR THE PACKAGE'S COPYRIGHT HOLDER +# This file is distributed under the same license as the PACKAGE package. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. # -# Copyright (C) 2000,2002,2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. -# Copyright (c) 2000 Mandriva -# Kenneth Krekula, 2005. -# Fuad Sabanovic <manijak@telia.com>, 2000. -# Mattias Dahlberg <voz@home.se>, 2001, 2002. -# Mattias Newzella <newzella@linux.nu>, 2001, 2002,2003. -# Magnus Björklöf <bjorklof@nic.fi>, 2003. -# Lars Westergren <lars.westergren@home.se>, 2003, 2004, 2005. -# Thomas Backlund <tmb@mandriva.org>, 2004, 2005. -# Thomas Backlund <tmb@mageia.org>, 2011. +# Translators: +# Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2024 # +#, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: DrakX-sv\n" +"Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2008-09-12 12:22+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2011-05-24 21:52+0200\n" -"Last-Translator: Thomas Backlund <tmb@mageia.org>\n" -"Language-Team: Swedish <sv@li.org>\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2024-09-04 17:33+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2024\n" +"Language-Team: Swedish (https://app.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/teams/9361/" +"sv/)\n" +"Language: sv\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"X-Generator: KBabel 1.10.2\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" #: ../help.pm:14 #, c-format @@ -136,7 +133,8 @@ msgstr "Vill du använda den här funktionen?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -146,13 +144,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -163,7 +164,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Listat ovan är de existerande Linux-partitionerna som hittats på\n" @@ -704,13 +706,15 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -723,12 +727,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -751,7 +757,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1046,18 +1053,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1080,7 +1090,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1088,7 +1099,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1107,12 +1119,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Nu måste du välja vilka partitioner som ska användas för installationen av\n" "Mageia-systemet. Om partitioner redan har definierats, antingen\n" @@ -1181,11 +1187,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "För att få information om de olika typerna av filsystem, läs kapitlet\n" "ext2FS i \"Reference Manual\".\n" -"\n" -"Om du installerar på en PPC-dator bör du skapa en en liten HFS-\n" -"partition (\"bootstrap\") på åtminstone 1 MB. Den kommer att användas av\n" -"starthanteraren Yaboot. Om du gör partitionen lite större, t ex 50 MB,\n" -"har du ett bra ställe att lagra en reservkärna och ramdiskar för nödlägen." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1225,20 +1226,24 @@ msgstr "Byt mellan normal/expert läge" #: ../help.pm:536 #, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1249,10 +1254,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Fler än en Microsoft Windows-partition har hittats på hårddisken.\n" @@ -1311,7 +1318,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1881,8 +1889,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" @@ -1905,120 +1915,3 @@ msgstr "Nästa ->" #, c-format msgid "<- Previous" msgstr "<- Föregående" - -#~ msgid "" -#~ "\"%s\": clicking on the \"%s\" button will open the printer " -#~ "configuration\n" -#~ "wizard. Consult the corresponding chapter of the ``Starter Guide'' for " -#~ "more\n" -#~ "information on how to set up a new printer. The interface presented in " -#~ "our\n" -#~ "manual is similar to the one used during installation." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "\"%s\": om du klickar på \"%s\" startar skrivarguiden.\n" -#~ "Se motsvarande kapitel i \"Starter Guide\" för mer information om hur du\n" -#~ "ska göra för att installera en ny skrivare. Gränssnittet som visas där\n" -#~ "liknar det som används vid installationen." - -#~ msgid "" -#~ "This is the most crucial decision point for the security of your GNU/" -#~ "Linux\n" -#~ "system: you must enter the \"root\" password. \"Root\" is the system\n" -#~ "administrator and is the only user authorized to make updates, add " -#~ "users,\n" -#~ "change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short, \"root\" " -#~ "can\n" -#~ "do everything! That's why you must choose a password which is difficult " -#~ "to\n" -#~ "guess: DrakX will tell you if the password you chose is too simple. As " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "can see, you're not forced to enter a password, but we strongly advise\n" -#~ "against this. GNU/Linux is just as prone to operator error as any other\n" -#~ "operating system. Since \"root\" can overcome all limitations and\n" -#~ "unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly accessing the\n" -#~ "partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to become\n" -#~ "\"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password should be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and at least " -#~ "8\n" -#~ "characters long. Never write down the \"root\" password -- it makes it " -#~ "far\n" -#~ "too easy to compromise your system.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "One caveat: do not make the password too long or too complicated because " -#~ "you\n" -#~ "must be able to remember it!\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "The password will not be displayed on screen as you type it. To reduce " -#~ "the\n" -#~ "chance of a blind typing error you'll need to enter the password twice. " -#~ "If\n" -#~ "you do happen to make the same typing error twice, you'll have to use " -#~ "this\n" -#~ "``incorrect'' password the first time you'll try to connect as \"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you want an authentication server to control access to your computer,\n" -#~ "click on the \"%s\" button.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If your network uses either LDAP, NIS, or PDC Windows Domain " -#~ "authentication\n" -#~ "services, select the appropriate one for \"%s\". If you do not know " -#~ "which\n" -#~ "one to use, you should ask your network administrator.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "If you happen to have problems with remembering passwords, or if your\n" -#~ "computer will never be connected to the Internet and you absolutely " -#~ "trust\n" -#~ "everybody who uses your computer, you can choose to have \"%s\"." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "Det här är det viktigaste steget för säkerheten i ditt GNU/Linux-system:\n" -#~ "du ska ange \"root\"-lösenordet. \"root\" är systemets administratör och\n" -#~ "den enda som har behörighet att göra uppdateringar, lägga till " -#~ "användare,\n" -#~ "ändra på systemets övergripande konfiguration, osv. Kort sagt, \"root\" " -#~ "kan\n" -#~ "göra allt. Därför måste du välja ett lösenord som är svårt att lista ut.\n" -#~ "DrakX talar om för dig om du väljer ett lösenord som är för lätt. Som du\n" -#~ "ser har du möjlighet att inte ange något lösenord alls, men vi avråder " -#~ "från\n" -#~ "det. Det är lika lätt att begå misstag i GNU/Linux som i andra " -#~ "operativsystem.\n" -#~ "Eftersom \"root\" kan gå förbi alla begränsningar och oavsiktligt radera\n" -#~ "alla data på partitioner genom att vara oförsiktig är det viktigt att det " -#~ "är\n" -#~ "svårt att bli \"root\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Lösenordet bör vara en blandning av numeriska tecken och bokstäver och\n" -#~ "minst åtta tecken långt. Skriv aldrig ner \"root\"-lösenordet - det\n" -#~ "ökar risken för ett intrång i systemet.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Gör dock inte lösenordet för långt och komplicerat, för du måste\n" -#~ "kunna komma ihåg det utan allt för mycket besvär.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Lösenordet visas inte på skärmen när du skriver in det. Det är därför\n" -#~ "du får skriva det två gånger, för att undvika att du skriver fel. Om du\n" -#~ "gör samma skrivfel två gånger måste du använda detta \"felaktiga\"\n" -#~ "lösenord första gången du loggar in.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Tänk på att om du byter språk för tangentbordsinställningar efter att du\n" -#~ "har skrivit in ditt lösenord så kommer kanske vissa bokstäver eller\n" -#~ "specialtecken att tolkas annorlunda fast du trycker på exakt samma\n" -#~ "tangent som tidigare. Detta kan göra det svårt att skriva in lösenordet\n" -#~ "korrekt eftersom det inte visas på skärmen medan du skriver. Det kan\n" -#~ "därför vara en god ide att undvika att använda specialtecken i ditt\n" -#~ "lösenord.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Om du önskar att tillgången till denna dator ska kontrolleras av en\n" -#~ "autentiseringsserver, klicka på knappen \"%s\".\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Om ditt nätverk använder LDAP, NIS eller en Windows PDC för " -#~ "autentisering,\n" -#~ "välj motsvarande för \"%s\". Om du är osäker, fråga\n" -#~ "din nätverksadministratör.\n" -#~ "\n" -#~ "Om du har problem med att komma ihåg lösenord kan du välja att ha\n" -#~ "\"%s\", om din dator inte kommer att vara uppkopplad mot\n" -#~ "Internet och du litar på alla som har tillgång till den." - -#~ msgid "authentication" -#~ msgstr "autentisering" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/ta.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/ta.po index eb82cb8ff..e9e0d3bdf 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/ta.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/ta.po @@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2002-09-06 00:35+0800\n" "Last-Translator: prabu anand <prabu_anand2000@yahoo.com>\n" "Language-Team: Tamil <tamilinix@yahoogroups.com>\n" +"Language: ta\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -120,7 +121,8 @@ msgstr "நீங்கள் இந்த வசதியை பயன்பட #: ../help.pm:57 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -130,13 +132,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -147,7 +152,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "உதவி இன்னமும் மொழிபெயர்கப்படவில்லை.Listed above are the existing Linux partitions " @@ -161,13 +167,16 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -178,7 +187,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." #: ../help.pm:88 @@ -190,8 +200,8 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"உதவி இன்னமும் மொழிபெயர்கப்படவில்லை.The Mageia installation is spread out " -"over several CD-ROMs. DrakX\n" +"உதவி இன்னமும் மொழிபெயர்கப்படவில்லை.The Mageia installation is spread out over " +"several CD-ROMs. DrakX\n" "knows if a selected package is located on another CD-ROM and will eject the\n" "current CD and ask you to insert a different one as required" @@ -598,13 +608,15 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -617,12 +629,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -645,7 +659,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -880,18 +895,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -914,7 +932,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -922,7 +941,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -941,21 +961,17 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "உதவி இன்னமும் மொழிபெயர்கப்படவில்லை.At this point, you need to choose which " "partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or from another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" @@ -988,7 +1004,8 @@ msgstr "" "CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"Wizard\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition\n" -"your hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good knowledge of\n" +"your hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good " +"knowledge of\n" "partitioning;\n" "\n" " * \"Undo\": use this option to cancel your changes;\n" @@ -996,7 +1013,8 @@ msgstr "" " * \"Toggle to normal/expert mode\": allows additional actions on\n" "partitions (type, options, format) and gives more information;\n" "\n" -" * \"Done\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"Done\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "Note: you can reach any option using the keyboard. Navigate through the\n" @@ -1012,12 +1030,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2fs chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB, which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1057,20 +1069,24 @@ msgstr "சாதாரனர் முறைமைக்கு மாறு" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1081,10 +1097,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "உதவி இன்னமும் மொழிபெயர்கப்படவில்ைல.More than one Microsoft partition has been " @@ -1095,13 +1113,16 @@ msgstr "" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1112,10 +1133,12 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." #: ../help.pm:567 @@ -1139,7 +1162,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1536,8 +1560,10 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" @@ -1545,8 +1571,10 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "உதவி இன்னமும் மொழிபெயர்கப்படவில்லை. Click on \"OK\" if you want to delete all " "data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"OK\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"OK\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"Cancel\" to cancel this operation without losing any data and\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/tg.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/tg.po index 7c908f32e..c0f17554a 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/tg.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/tg.po @@ -20,6 +20,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2005-09-17 16:03+0500\n" "Last-Translator: Victor Ibragimov <youth_opportunities@tajikngo.org>\n" "Language-Team: Tajik\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -143,7 +144,8 @@ msgstr "Шумо ин хислатро истифрда бурдан мехоҳ #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -153,13 +155,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -170,7 +175,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Дар ин ҷо бахшҳои мавҷудаи Linux, ки дар гардонандаи сахти шумо\n" @@ -284,8 +290,7 @@ msgid "" "megabytes." msgstr "" "It's now time to specify which programs you wish to install on your system.\n" -"There are thousands of packages available for Mageia, and to make " -"it\n" +"There are thousands of packages available for Mageia, and to make it\n" "simpler to manage, they have been placed into groups of similar\n" "applications.\n" "\n" @@ -740,13 +745,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -759,12 +766,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -787,7 +796,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1099,18 +1109,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1133,7 +1146,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1141,7 +1155,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1160,12 +1175,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Дар ин пункт шумо бояд интихоб намоед, ки кадом бахш(ҳо) барои\n" "коргузории системавӣ Mageia-и шумо истифода бурда мешаванд.\n" @@ -1186,7 +1195,7 @@ msgstr "" "месозад\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": ин хосият имконияти ба таври худкор офаридани бахшҳои\n" -"ext3 ва swap-ро дар фазои холии гардонандаи сахти шумо, медиҳад\n" +"ext4 ва swap-ро дар фазои холии гардонандаи сахти шумо, медиҳад\n" "\n" "\"%s\": хусусиятҳои иловагиро дастрас мекунад:\n" "\n" @@ -1238,14 +1247,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Барои гирифтани маълумот оиди намудҳои системаи файлии дастрас\n" "марҳамат карда боби ext2FS-ро аз ``Раҳнамои Муроҷиат'' хонед.\n" -"\n" -"Агар шумо дар мошинаи PPC коргузориро иҷро карда бошед, ба шумо\n" -"лозим меояд, ки бахши хурди HFS ``bootstrap''-ро офаред, ки ақалан 1Мб\n" -"бошад ва он аз тарафи боркунандаи yaboot истифода бурда мешавад.\n" -"Агар шумо хоҳед, ки бахшро каме калонтар кунед, масалан 50Мб шумо\n" -"онро ҷои хеле қуллай барои захиракунии ҳастаи эҳтиётӣ ва симоҳои ramdisk " -"ҳангоми ҳодисаи боркунии ғайричашмдошт,\n" -"пайдо хоҳед кард." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1285,20 +1286,24 @@ msgstr "Зомин байни усули мӯътадил/мутахассисӣ #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1309,10 +1314,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Дар гардонандаи сахти шумо зиёда аз як бахши Microsoft муайян гардид.\n" @@ -1373,7 +1380,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1929,8 +1937,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/th.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/th.po index b0ea997f4..fc65aa12e 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/th.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/th.po @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2001-09-10 14:24GMT+7\n" "Last-Translator: Wachara Chinsettawong <wachara@yahoo.com>\n" "Language-Team: Thai <th@li.org>\n" +"Language: th\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -84,7 +85,8 @@ msgstr "คุณต้องการใช้ aboot หรือไม่" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -94,13 +96,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -111,7 +116,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" @@ -408,13 +414,15 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -427,12 +435,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -455,7 +465,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -612,18 +623,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -646,7 +660,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -654,7 +669,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -673,12 +689,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:526 @@ -719,20 +729,24 @@ msgstr "สำหรับผู้ชำนาญ > ปกติ" #: ../help.pm:536 #, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -743,10 +757,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" @@ -771,7 +787,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1121,8 +1138,10 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/tl.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/tl.po index bc8db25e4..f90c347f4 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/tl.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/tl.po @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2004-09-15 13:35+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Arys P. Deloso <arys@deloso.org>\n" "Language-Team: Filipino <salinpinoy@comitus.net>\n" +"Language: fil\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -141,7 +142,8 @@ msgstr "Gusto ninyong gamitin ang katangian na ito?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -151,13 +153,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -168,11 +173,13 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Nakalista rito ang mga namamalaging partisyon ng Linux na natiktikan sa\n" -"inyong hard disk drive. Maaari ninyong itago ang mga pili ng Wizard, dahil sila\n" +"inyong hard disk drive. Maaari ninyong itago ang mga pili ng Wizard, dahil " +"sila\n" "ay mabuti para sa karamihan ng mga karaniwang \"installation\". Kung kayo\n" "ay gagawa ng mga pagbabago, mag-define dapat kayo ng partisyon ng\n" "\"root\" (\"/\"). Huwag pumili ng napakaliit na partisyon dahil hindi kayo " @@ -186,32 +193,32 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Bawat partisyon ay nakalista na sumusunod: \"Pangalan\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Pangalan\" ay naka-structure na: \"uri ng hard disk drive\", \"bilang ng hard " -"drive\",\n" +"\"Pangalan\" ay naka-structure na: \"uri ng hard disk drive\", \"bilang ng " +"hard drive\",\n" "\"bilang ng partisyon\" (halimbawa, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Uri ng hard disk drive\" ay \"hd\" kung ang inyong hard disk drive ay isang IDE na " -"hard disk drive\n" +"\"Uri ng hard disk drive\" ay \"hd\" kung ang inyong hard disk drive ay " +"isang IDE na hard disk drive\n" "at \"sd\" kung ito ay isang SCSI na hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Bilang ng hard disk drive\" ay palaging titik pagkatapos ng \"hd\" o \"sd\". " -"Para\n" +"\"Bilang ng hard disk drive\" ay palaging titik pagkatapos ng \"hd\" o \"sd" +"\". Para\n" "sa mga IDE na hard disk drive:\n" "\n" -" * \"a\" ay nangangahulugang \"master hard disk drive sa primary IDE controller" -"\";\n" +" * \"a\" ay nangangahulugang \"master hard disk drive sa primary IDE " +"controller\";\n" "\n" -" * \"b\" ay nangangahulugang \"slave hard disk drive sa primary IDE controller" -"\";\n" +" * \"b\" ay nangangahulugang \"slave hard disk drive sa primary IDE " +"controller\";\n" "\n" -" * \"c\" ay nangangahulugang \"master hard disk drive sa secondary IDE controller" -"\";\n" +" * \"c\" ay nangangahulugang \"master hard disk drive sa secondary IDE " +"controller\";\n" "\n" -" * \"d\" ay nangangahulugang \"slave hard disk drive sa secondary IDE controller" -"\".\n" +" * \"d\" ay nangangahulugang \"slave hard disk drive sa secondary IDE " +"controller\".\n" "\n" -"Sa mga SCSI na hard disk drive, ang \"a\" ay nangangahulugang \"pinakamababang " -"SCSI ID\",\n" +"Sa mga SCSI na hard disk drive, ang \"a\" ay nangangahulugang " +"\"pinakamababang SCSI ID\",\n" "ang \"b\" ay nangangahulugang \"pangalawang pinakamababang SCSI ID\", atbp." #: ../help.pm:88 @@ -746,13 +753,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -765,12 +774,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -793,7 +804,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -824,10 +836,12 @@ msgstr "" "basahin muna ang mga nalalabing bahagi ng section na ito at higit sa\n" "lahat, huwag magmadali.\n" "\n" -"Depende sa confiugration ng inyong hard disk drive, mayroong ilang mga option:\n" +"Depende sa confiugration ng inyong hard disk drive, mayroong ilang mga " +"option:\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": ang option na ito ay magsasagawa ng automatic na pagpapartisyon\n" -"ng inyong walang lamang hard disk drive. Kung gagamitin ninyon ang option na ito\n" +"ng inyong walang lamang hard disk drive. Kung gagamitin ninyon ang option na " +"ito\n" "hindi na magkakaroon ng iba pang mga \"prompt\".\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": natiktikan ng wizard na mayroong isa o mahigit na namamalaging\n" @@ -839,8 +853,8 @@ msgstr "" "na bilang default, at para sa karamihang bahagi isang magandang pagkukuro\n" "kung gagamitin sila.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": kung ang Microsoft Windows ay naka-install sa inyong hard disk drive " -"at\n" +" * \"%s\": kung ang Microsoft Windows ay naka-install sa inyong hard disk " +"drive at\n" "ginagamit nito lahat ng mayroong puwang dito, kakailanganin ninyong\n" "gumawa ng libreng puwang para sa GNU/Linux. Para gawin ito, maaari ninyong\n" "tanggalin ang inyong partisyon ng Microsoft Windows at data (tingnan ang\n" @@ -858,7 +872,8 @@ msgstr "" "inyong data o mag-install ng bagong software.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": kung gusto ninyong tanggalin lahat ng data at mga partisyon\n" -"na mayroon sa inyong hard disk drive at palitan sila ng inyong bagong sistema\n" +"na mayroon sa inyong hard disk drive at palitan sila ng inyong bagong " +"sistema\n" "ng Mageia, piliin ang option na ito. Maging maingat, dahil hindi na\n" "ninyo maaaring bawiin ang inyong pili matapos ninyong patotohanan ito.\n" "\n" @@ -1016,8 +1031,7 @@ msgid "" "bad blocks on the disk." msgstr "" "Kailangang i-format ang kahit anong partisyon na bagong gawa para ito\n" -"magamit (ang ibig sabihin ng pagfo-format ay paglilikha ng \"filesystem" -"\").\n" +"magamit (ang ibig sabihin ng pagfo-format ay paglilikha ng \"filesystem\").\n" "\n" "Sa ngayon, maaari ninyong naisin na i-format muli ang ilang mga mayroon\n" "nang partisyon para burahin ang nilalamang data nila. Kung nanaisin ninyong\n" @@ -1112,18 +1126,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1146,7 +1163,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1154,7 +1172,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1173,12 +1192,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Sa puntong ito, kailangan ninyong piliin kung aling mga partisyon ang\n" "gagamitin para sa pag-i-install ng sistema na Mageia. Kung ang\n" @@ -1187,20 +1200,22 @@ msgstr "" "mga mayroon nang partisyon. Kung hindi, dapat mag-define ng mga\n" "partisyon ng hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"Upang makalikha ng mga partisyon, dapat pumili muna kayo ng hard disk drive.\n" +"Upang makalikha ng mga partisyon, dapat pumili muna kayo ng hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Maaari ninyong piliin ang disk para sa pagpapartisyon sa pamamagitan ng\n" "pagki-click sa ``hda'' para sa unang IDE na drive, ``hdb'' para sa " "pangalawa,\n" "``sda'' para sa unang SCSI na drive at ganon.\n" "\n" -"Para ipartisyon ang napiling hard disk drive, maaari ninyong gamitin ang mga\n" +"Para ipartisyon ang napiling hard disk drive, maaari ninyong gamitin ang " +"mga\n" "option na ito:\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": ang option na ito ay magtatanggal ng lahat ng partisyon sa\n" "napiling hard disk drive\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": ang option na ito ay hahayaan kayo na automatic na lumikha\n" -"ng ext3 at swap na partisyon sa libreng puwang ng inyong hard disk drive\n" +"ng ext4 at swap na partisyon sa libreng puwang ng inyong hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": magbibigay daan sa karagdang mga katangian (\"feature\"):\n" "\n" @@ -1224,7 +1239,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\": gamitin ang option na ito kung nais ninyong gumamit ng wizard " "para\n" -"i-partisyon ang inyong hard disk drive. Ito ay nirerekomenda kung kayo ay walang\n" +"i-partisyon ang inyong hard disk drive. Ito ay nirerekomenda kung kayo ay " +"walang\n" "mabuting kaalaman sa pagpapartisyon.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": gamitin ang option na ito para bawiin ang mga pagbabago.\n" @@ -1233,8 +1249,8 @@ msgstr "" ", mga option, format) at magbibigay ng mas maraming inpormasyon tungkol\n" "sa hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": kung kayo ay tapos na sa pagpapartisyon ng inyong hard disk drive, " -"ito\n" +" * \"%s\": kung kayo ay tapos na sa pagpapartisyon ng inyong hard disk " +"drive, ito\n" "ay magse-save ng inyong mga pagbabago pabalik sa disk.\n" "\n" "Kung inaalam ang laki ng partisyon, maaari ninyong i-set ng mabuti ang laki\n" @@ -1256,14 +1272,6 @@ msgstr "" "Para makakuha ng inpormasyon tungkol sa mga iba't-ibang uri ng \"filesystem" "\",\n" "pakibasa ang kabanata ng ext2FS mula sa ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"Kung kayo ay nag-i-install sa makina ng PPC, gugustuhin ninyong lumikha ng\n" -"maliit na partisyon na HFS ``bootstrap'' na may laking hindi liliit sa 1MB " -"na\n" -"gagamitin ng yaboot bootloader. Kung pipiliin ninyong mas malaki ang\n" -"partisyon, mga 50MB, makikita ninyong ito ay kapakipakinabang na lugar\n" -"sa pag-iimbak ng mga reserbang kernel at mga \"ramdisk image\" para sa\n" -"panahon ng mahigpit na pangangailangan." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1303,20 +1311,24 @@ msgstr "Lipat sa normal o bihasang mode" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1327,10 +1339,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Mahigit sa isang partisyon ng Microsoft ang natiktikan sa inyong hard " @@ -1341,30 +1355,32 @@ msgstr "" "Bawat partition ay nakalista ng ganito: \"Pangalan ng Linux\",\n" "\"Pangalan ng Windows\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Pangalan ng Linux name\" ay may istruktura na: \"uri ng hard disk drive\",\n" -"\"bilang ng hard disk drive\",\"bilang ng partisyon\" (halimbawa, \"hda1\").\n" +"\"Pangalan ng Linux name\" ay may istruktura na: \"uri ng hard disk drive" +"\",\n" +"\"bilang ng hard disk drive\",\"bilang ng partisyon\" (halimbawa, " +"\"hda1\").\n" "\n" "\"Uri ng hard disk drive\" ay \"hd\" kung ang inyong hard dive ay isang IDE\n" "na hard disk drive at \"sd\" kung iyon ay isang SCSI na hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Bilang ng hard disk drive\" ay palaging titik pagkatapos ng \"hd\" o \"sd\". " -"Para\n" +"\"Bilang ng hard disk drive\" ay palaging titik pagkatapos ng \"hd\" o \"sd" +"\". Para\n" "sa mga IDE na hard disk drive:\n" "\n" -" * \"a\" ay nangangahulugang \"master hard disk drive sa primary IDE controller" -"\";\n" +" * \"a\" ay nangangahulugang \"master hard disk drive sa primary IDE " +"controller\";\n" "\n" -" * \"b\" ay nangangahulugang \"slave hard disk drive sa primary IDE controller" -"\";\n" +" * \"b\" ay nangangahulugang \"slave hard disk drive sa primary IDE " +"controller\";\n" "\n" -" * \"c\" ay nangangahulugang \"master hard disk drive sa secondary IDE controller" -"\";\n" +" * \"c\" ay nangangahulugang \"master hard disk drive sa secondary IDE " +"controller\";\n" "\n" -" * \"d\" ay nangangahulugang \"slave hard disk drive sa secondary IDE controller" -"\".\n" +" * \"d\" ay nangangahulugang \"slave hard disk drive sa secondary IDE " +"controller\".\n" "\n" -"Sa mga SCSI na hard disk drive, ang \"a\" ay nangangahulugang \"pinakamababang " -"SCSI ID\",\n" +"Sa mga SCSI na hard disk drive, ang \"a\" ay nangangahulugang " +"\"pinakamababang SCSI ID\",\n" "ang \"b\" ay nangangahulugang \"pangalawang pinakamababang SCSI ID\", atbp.\n" "\n" "\"Pangalan ng Windows\" ay ang titik ng inyong hard disk drive sa ilalim ng " @@ -1396,7 +1412,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1416,7 +1433,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\": Para sa karamihang bahagi, ganap na binubura nito ang lumang\n" "sistema. Kung nais ninyong baguhin kung paano ang pagpartisyon sa inyong\n" -"hard disk drive, o baguhin ang filesystem, dapat ninyong gamitin ang option na\n" +"hard disk drive, o baguhin ang filesystem, dapat ninyong gamitin ang option " +"na\n" "ito. Subalit, depende sa inyong pakana ng pagpapartisyon, maaari ninyong\n" "pigilang masulatan ang ilan sa inyong mga namamalaging data.\n" "\n" @@ -1811,7 +1829,8 @@ msgstr "" "naaangkop na driver.\n" "\n" "Dahil sa hindi perpekto ang pagtiktik sa hardware, ang DrakX ay maaaring\n" -"mabigo sa pagtitiktik sa inyong mga hard disk drive. Kung gayon, dapat ninyong\n" +"mabigo sa pagtitiktik sa inyong mga hard disk drive. Kung gayon, dapat " +"ninyong\n" "sabihin ang inyong hardware ng mano-mano.\n" "\n" "Kung kinailangan na mano-mano ninyong sabihin ang inyong PCI SCSI adapter,\n" @@ -2008,8 +2027,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" @@ -2018,7 +2039,8 @@ msgstr "" "I-click ang \"%s\" kung gusto ninyong tangalin lahat ng data at partisyon\n" "na mayroon sa hard disk drive na ito. Mag-ingat, pagkatapos ma-click ang\n" "\"%s\", hindi na ninyo mababawi ang kahit anong data at mga partisyon\n" -"na mayroon sa hard disk drive na ito, kasama ang kahit anong data ng Windows.\n" +"na mayroon sa hard disk drive na ito, kasama ang kahit anong data ng " +"Windows.\n" "\n" "I-click ang \"%s\" para hindi ituloy ang operasyon na ito na walang " "mawawlang\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/tr.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/tr.po index d8c07201d..2c48ade09 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/tr.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/tr.po @@ -2,30 +2,30 @@ # Copyright (C) 2000,2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # Copyright (c) 2000 Mandriva # ############################################ -# # Ömer Fadıl USTA <omer_fad@hotmail.com> , 1999-2003. # Tuncay YENİAY <tuncayyeniay@mynet.com>,2002. # Nazmi Savga <nsavga@doruk.net.tr>,2001. # Durmuş Celep <durmusc_tr@yahoo.com>,2002. # Erçin EKER <erc.caldera@gmx.net>, 2003. -# # ############################################# -# +# Atilla ÖNTAŞ <tarakbumba@gmail.com>, 2013. msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: DrakX-tr\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2008-09-12 12:22+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2004-09-15 13:35+0200\n" -"Last-Translator: Ömer Fadıl USTA <omer_fad@hotmail.com>\n" -"Language-Team: Turkish <tr@li.org>\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-11-28 20:15+0300\n" +"Last-Translator: Atilla ÖNTAŞ <tarakbumba@gmail.com>\n" +"Language-Team: Mageia Turkish Translation Team <i18n-tr@ml.mageia.org>\n" +"Language: tr\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;\n" +"X-Generator: Virtaal 0.7.1\n" #: ../help.pm:14 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Before continuing, you should carefully read the terms of the license. It\n" "covers the entire Mageia distribution. If you agree with all the\n" @@ -33,13 +33,12 @@ msgid "" "button will reboot your computer." msgstr "" "Devam etmeden önce lisans koşullarını dikkatle okumalısınız. Lisans tüm\n" -"Mageia dağıtımını kapsar, bu koşullarını tamamını kabul " -"ediyorsanız,\n" +"Mageia dağıtımını kapsar, bu koşullarını tamamını kabul ediyorsanız,\n" "\"%s\" kutusunu işaretleyiniz aksi halde \"%s\" tuşuna tıklayarak\n" "makinenizi yeniden başlatabilirsiniz." #: ../help.pm:20 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "GNU/Linux is a multi-user system which means each user can have his or her\n" "own preferences, own files and so on. But unlike \"root\", who is the\n" @@ -78,49 +77,62 @@ msgid "" "security), choose the desired user and window manager, then click on\n" "\"%s\". If you're not interested in this feature, uncheck the \"%s\" box." msgstr "" -"GNU/Linux çok kullanıcılı bir sistemdir, yani her kullanıcının kendi\n" -"tercihleri, kendi dosyaları, v.s. olabilir. Daha fazla bilgi edinmek için\n" -"\"Kullanıcı Kılavuzu\"nu okuyunuz. Sistem Yöneticisi olan \"root\" dışındaki " -"kullanıcılar kendi dosyaları ve yapılandırmaları dışında hiçbir\n" -"şeyi değiştiremezler. Kendiniz için en az bir normal kullanıcı " -"oluşturmalısınız.\n" -"Bu hesabı sıradan işler için kullanacaksınız. Sisteminizi \"root\" olarak\n" -"kullanmak çok pratik gibi görünse de aslında çok tehlikelidir. En küçük bir\n" -"yanlışlık sisteminizin çalışmamasıyla sonuçlanabilir. Ama normal kullanıcı\n" -"olarak bir sürü yanlış da yapsanız sadece kendi bilgilerinize zarar vermiş\n" -"olursunuz, sisteminize zarar veremezsiniz.\n" -"\n" -"İl alan gerçek isminizi girmeniz içindir. Tabii ki sorunlu değildir, " -"herhangi bir\n" -"şey yazabilirsiniz. DrakX bu bölüme ilk girdiğiniz kelimeyi \"%s\" bölümüne\n" -"kopyalayacak ki bu sisteme giriş için kullanılacak kullanıcı adıdır. " -"İsterseniz\n" -"kullanıcı adını değiştirebilirsiniz. Sonra buraya bir parola gireceksiniz. " -"Bir\n" -"normal kullanıcının parolası \"root\" parolası kadar önemli değildir.\n" -"Fakat bu boş yada basit bir şifre kullanmak için bir gerekçe değildir,\n" -"sonuç olarak kişisel dosyalarınızı tehlikeye atmış olursunuz.\n" -"\n" -"\"%s\"e tıklayarak ile kullanıcı için öntanımlı \"kabuk\"u " -"değiştirebilirsiniz\n" -"(öntanımlı olan bash'dir).\n" -"\n" -"Kullanıcı eklemeyi tamamladıktan sonra, sistem açıldıktan sonra otomatik\n" -"giriş yapılacak kullanıcı sorulacaktır. Eğer bu konu ile ilgileniyorsanızı " -"(ve\n" -"yerel güvenliğe önem vermiyorsanız), istediğiniz kullanıcıyı ve pencere\n" -"yöneticisini seçin ve \"%s\"e tıklayın. Eğer bu konu ilginizi çekmiyorsa\n" -"\"%s\" seçimini kaldırın ve devam edin." +"GNU/Linux, her kullanıcının kendi ayarlarına, kendi dosyalarına v.b. sahip " +"olabileceği çok kullanıcılı bir\n" +"sistemdir. Sistem yöneticisi olan \"kök\" aksine bu noktada eklediğiniz " +"kullanıcılar kendi\n" +"dosyaları ve ve kendi yapılandırmaları haricinde herhangi bir şeyi " +"değiştirme yetkisine sahip\n" +"olmayacaklardır ki böylece bir bütün olarak sistem istenmeyen veya zararlı " +"değişikliklerden korunacaktır.\n" +"Kendiniz için en azından bir normal kullanıcı oluşturmak zorundasınız -- bu, " +"günlük olarak kullanacağınız\n" +"hesap olacaktır. Her ne kadar her şeyi yapabilmek için \"kök\" olarak oturum " +"açabilmeniz mümkünse de\n" +"bu işlem çok tehlikeli olabilir! Çok basit bir hata sisteminizin bir daha " +"işlememesine neden olabilir.\n" +"Normal bir kullanıcı olarak ciddi bir hata yaparsanız en kötü durumda biraz " +"veri kaybedersiniz;\n" +"ama bu, tüm sistemi etkilemeyecektir.\n" +"\n" +"İlk alan gerçek adınızı sorar. Elbette, bu zorunlu değildir -- ne isterseniz " +"onu yazabilirsiniz.\n" +"DrakX yazdığınız ilk sözcüğü alır ve \"%s\" olarak kopyalar. Bu, kullanıcının " +"oturum açarken\n" +"gireceği isimdir. İsterseniz öntanımlı olan kullanıcı ismini " +"değiştirebilirsiniz. Sonraki adım\n" +"bir parola girmektir. Güvenlik açısından, bir tam yetkilendirilmemiş " +"(normal) kullanıcı parolası\n" +"\"kök\" parolası kadar önemli değildir. Ancak, bunu boş geçmek veya çok basit " +"belirlemek için\n" +"bir neden yoktur: sonuçta, risk altına girebilecek olan kendi " +"dosyalarınızdır.\n" +"\n" +"\"%s\" üzerine tıkladığınızda, diğer kullanıcıları da ekleyebilirsiniz. " +"Arkadaşlarınız, babanız, kardeşiniz v.b.\n" +"her biri için bir kullanıcı ekleyin. Bitirdiğinizde \"%s\" üzerine tıklayın.\n" +"\n" +"\"%s\" düğmesine tıklamak o kullanıcı için öntanımlı \"kabuk\"u değiştirmenizi " +"sağlayacaktır.\n" +"(Öntanımılı olan bash kabuktur)\n" +"\n" +"Kullanıcıları eklemeyi bitirdiğinizde, bilgisayar başladığında kendiliğinden " +"oturum açacak kullanıcı\n" +"sorulacaktır. Bu özelliği kullanmak istiyorsanız (ve yerel güvenlik " +"endişeniz yoksa) istediğiniz\n" +"kullanıcıyı ve pencere yöneticisini seçin. Sonra \"%s\" üzerine tıklayın. Bu " +"özelliği kullanmak istemiyorsanız\n" +"\"%s\" kutusundaki işareti kaldırın." #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "User name" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Kullanıcı adı" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format msgid "Accept user" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Kullanıcıyı kabul et" #: ../help.pm:54 #, c-format @@ -481,7 +493,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:213 #, c-format msgid "Hardware clock set to GMT" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Donanım saati GMT olarak ayarla" #: ../help.pm:213 #, c-format @@ -571,6 +583,12 @@ msgid "" "monitor connected to your machine. If it is not correct, you can choose\n" "from this list the monitor which is connected to your computer." msgstr "" +"Monitör\n" +"\n" +" Normalde kurulum aracı makinenize bağlı olan monitörü kendiliğinden " +"algılar ve yapılandırır.\n" +"Doğru ayarlama yapılmamışsa, bilgisayarınıza bağlı olan monitörü bu listeden " +"seçebilirsiniz." #: ../help.pm:298 #, c-format @@ -582,6 +600,13 @@ msgid "" "able to make changes after the installation). A sample of the chosen\n" "configuration is shown in the monitor picture." msgstr "" +"Çözünürlük\n" +"\n" +" Burada ekran kartınız için uygun olan çözünürlükleri ve renk " +"derinliklerini seçebilirsiniz. İhtiyacınıza\n" +"en uygun olanını seçin (kurulum sonrasında değişiklik yapabilirsiniz). " +"Seçilen yapılandırma\n" +"örneği monitör resminde görüntülenir." #: ../help.pm:306 #, c-format @@ -590,9 +615,12 @@ msgid "" "or without 3D acceleration, you're asked to choose the server which best\n" "suits your needs." msgstr "" +"Ekran kartınız için farklı sunucuların mümkün olduğu durumlarda, 3B " +"hızlandırma etkin veya devredışı,\n" +"ihtiyaçlarınıza en uygun sunucuyu seçmeniz istenir." #: ../help.pm:311 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Options\n" "\n" @@ -601,15 +629,16 @@ msgid "" "want to check \"%s\" if your machine is to act as a server, or if you were\n" "not successful in getting the display configured." msgstr "" -"Son olarak açılış sırasında grafik arayüzle başlamak isteyip istemediğiniz\n" -"sorulacaktır. Yapılandırmanızı denemeyi seçmemiş bile olsanız bu soru yine " -"de\n" -"sorulacaktır. Ekranınızı iyi yapılandıramamışsanız ya da makinanızın bir\n" -"sunucu rolü üstlenmesini seçmişseniz bu soruya \"Hayır\" cevabı vermeniz\n" -"önerilir." +"Seçenekler\n" +"\n" +" Bu adımlar önyüklemede makinenizin grafiksel arayüze kendiliğinden " +"geçmesini isteyip istemediğinizi\n" +"seçmenizi sağlar. Elbette, makineniz bir sunucu olarak çalışacaksa veya " +"görüntü almayı başaramadıysanız\n" +"\"%s\" seçeneğini işaretleyebilirsiniz." #: ../help.pm:319 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" "operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" @@ -672,69 +701,73 @@ msgid "" "experience. For more instructions on how to use the DiskDrake utility,\n" "refer to the ``Managing Your Partitions'' section in the ``Starter Guide''." msgstr "" -"Bu noktada, Mageia işletim sisteminizi sabit diskinizde\n" -"nereye kuracağınızı seçmeniz gerekiyor. Diskiniz boşsa, ya da\n" -"halihazırda bir işletim sistemi diskin tamamını kullanıyorsa\n" -"diski bölümlendirmeniz gerekmektedir. Temel olarak, bir diski\n" -"bölümlendirmek, Mageia sistemini kurabilmek için onu\n" -"mantıksal olarak bölmek ve böylece boş alan oluşturmak anlamına\n" +"Bu noktada, Mageia işletim sisteminizi sabit diskinizde nereye kuracağınızı " +"seçmeniz\n" +"gerekiyor. Diskiniz boşsa, ya da halihazırda bir işletim sistemi diskin " +"tamamını kullanıyorsa\n" +"diski bölümlendirmeniz gerekmektedir. Temel olarak, bir diski " +"bölümlendirmek, Mageia sistemini\n" +"kurabilmek için onu mantıksal olarak bölmek ve böylece boş alan oluşturmak " +"anlamına\n" "gelir.\n" "\n" -"Bölümlendirme işlemi gerellikle geri alınamaz ve zaten kurulu bir\n" -"işletim sisteminiz var ise bilgi kaybına yol açabilir. Bu işlem, eğer\n" -"tecrübesizseniz, korkutucu ve stresli bir iş olabilir. Mageia,\n" -"bu işlemi oldukça kolaylaştıran bir sihirbaz sunmaktadır.Başlamadan\n" -"önce lütfen aşağıdaki okumak için zaman ayrın.\n" +"Bölümlendirme işlemi genellikle geri alınamaz ve zaten kurulu bir işletim " +"sisteminiz var ise bilgi kaybına yol\n" +"açabilir. Bu işlem, eğer tecrübesizseniz, korkutucu ve stresli bir iş " +"olabilir. Şansınıza, DrakX bu işlemi\n" +"oldukça kolaylaştıran bir sihirbaz sunmaktadır.Başlamadan önce lütfen " +"aşağıdaki okumak için zaman ayrın.\n" "\n" -"Sabit disk yapınıza bağlı olarak, birkaç seçenek mevcut: \n" +"Sabit disk yapınıza bağlı olarak, birkaç seçenek mevcuttur: \n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": bu seçenek boş sabit disk(ler)iniz üzerinde otomatik " -"bölümlendirme\n" -"gerçeklerştirir. Bu seçeneği seçerseniz konu hakkında soru sorulmayacak\n" +" * \"%s\": Bu seçenek boş sabit disk(ler)iniz üzerinde otomatik bölümlendirme " +"gerçekleştirir. Bu seçeneği\n" +"seçerseniz konu hakkında soru sorulmayacaktır.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\" sihirbaz sabit diskiniz üstünde bir ya da daha fazla Linux bölümü\n" -"buldu. Eğer bunları kullanmak istiyorsanız bu seçeneği kullanın. Sonra ki\n" -"adımda bu bölümler ile ilişkili bağlama noktaları seçmeniz istenecek.\n" +" * \"%s\": Sihirbaz sabit diskiniz üstünde bir ya da daha fazla Linux bölümü " +"buldu. Bunları kullanmak istiyorsanız\n" +"bu seçeneği kullanın. Sonraki adımda bu bölümler ile ilişkili bağlama " +"noktaları seçmeniz istenecektir.\n" "Bağlama noktaları öntanımlı olarak seçilir ve genellikle olduğu gibi " -"bırakmak\n" -"en iyisidir.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": eğer sisteminizde Microsoft Windows kurulu ve tük disk " -"kapasitesini\n" -"kullanıyorsa Linux'un kullanabilmesi için yer açmanız gerekecektir. Bunun " -"için,\n" -"Microsoft Window disk bölümünü ve bilgileri silebilir (``Tüm Diski Sil''e " -"bakın)\n" -"yada Microsoft Windows FAT bölümünüzü yeniden boyutlandırabilirsiniz. Bu\n" -"işlem sırasında eğer Windows bölümünüzü birleştirmiş ve biçimi FAT ise\n" -"herhangi bir veri kaybı yaşamazsınız. Verilerinizi yedeklemeniz şiddetle " -"önerilir.\n" -"Eğer aynı bilgisayarda hem Mageia hem de Windows kullanamk\n" -"istiyorsanız bu seçeneği seçmeniz önerilir.\n" -"\n" -" Bu seçeneği seçmeden önce unutmayın ki işlem tamamlandığında Microsoft\n" -"Windows disk bölümünüz küçülmüş olacak. Yeni yazılımları yüklemek ya da " -"kişisel\n" -"verilerinizi saklamak için Microsoft Windows altında daha az boş alanınız " -"olacak.\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": Sabit diskinizde bulunan tüm bilgileri silmek ve yeni bir " -"Mageia\n" -"kurulumu yapmak için bu seçeneği seçin. Lütfen bu seçeneği kullanırken " -"dikkatli\n" -"olun, çünkü onayladıktan sonra geri alma şansınız bulunmuyor.\n" -"\n" -" !! Eğer bu seçeneği seçerseniz sabit diskinizdeki tüm bilgi " -"silinecektir. !!\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": Bu seçenek tüm sabit diski silecek ve disk bölümlerini baştan " -"oluşturacak.\n" -"Diskinizdeki tüm bilgiler silinecektir.\n" -"\n" -" !! Eğer bu seçeneği seçerseniz sabit diskinizdeki tüm bilgileri " -"kaybedeceksiniz. !!\n" -"\n" -" * \"%s\": Sabit diskinizi kendiniz bölümlendirmek istiyorsanız bu seçeneği " +"bırakmak en iyisidir.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": Sisteminizde Microsoft Windows kurulu ve tüm disk alanını " +"kullanıyorsa GNU/Linux 'un\n" +"kullanabilmesi için yer açmanız gerekecektir. Bunun için, Microsoft Window " +"disk bölümünü ve bilgilerini\n" +"tümüyle silebilir (``Tüm Diski Sil''e bakın) ya da Microsoft Windows FAT " +"veya NTFS bölümünüzü yeniden\n" +"boyutlandırabilirsiniz. Bu işlem sırasında eğer Windows bölümünüzü " +"birleştirmişseniz herhangi bir veri\n" +"kaybı yaşamazsınız. Verilerinizi yedeklemeniz şiddetle önerilir. Aynı " +"bilgisayarda hem Mageia hem de\n" +"Windows kullanmak istiyorsanız bu seçeneği seçmeniz önerilir.\n" +"\n" +" Bu seçeneği seçmeden önce unutmayın ki işlem tamamlandığında Microsoft " +"Windows\n" +"disk bölümünüz küçülmüş olacak. Yeni yazılımları yüklemek ya da kişisel " +"verilerinizi saklamak için\n" +"Microsoft Windows altında daha az boş alanınız olacaktır.\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": Sabit diskinizde bulunan tüm bilgileri silmek ve yeni bir Mageia " +"kurulumu yapmak için\n" +"bu seçeneği seçin. Lütfen bu seçeneği kullanırken dikkatli olun, çünkü " +"onayladıktan sonra geri alma\n" +"şansınız bulunmuyor.\n" +"\n" +" !! Eğer bu seçeneği seçerseniz sabit diskinizdeki tüm bilgi silinecektir. " +"!!\n" +"\n" +" * \"%s\": Bu seçenek tüm sabit disk alanı Microsoft Windows tarafından " +"alınmışsa görüntülenir.\n" +"Bu seçeneği seçmek basitçe disk üzerindeki herşeyi silecek ve en baştan yeni " +"bir bölümlendirme\n" +"oluşturacaktır.\n" +"\n" +" !! Eğer bu seçeneği seçerseniz sabit diskinizdeki tüm bilgi silinecektir. " +"!!\n" +"\n" +"* \"%s\": Sabit diskinizi kendiniz bölümlendirmek istiyorsanız bu seçeneği " "seçin.\n" "Dikkati olun -- oldukça güçlü bir seçenektir ama veri kaybetmek oldukça " "kolaydır.\n" @@ -754,7 +787,7 @@ msgstr "Geçerli bölümlendirmeyi kullan" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format msgid "Use the free space on the Microsoft Windows® partition" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Microsoft Windows® bölümündeki boş alan kullanılsın" #: ../help.pm:370 #, c-format @@ -799,8 +832,7 @@ msgid "" "/dev/fd0\"." msgstr "" "Buraya kadar geldiyseniz kurulum tamamlanmış ve GNU/Linux sisteminizi\n" -"kullanmaya hazırsınız demektir. \"TAMAM\" düğmesine tıkladığınızda " -"sisteminiz\n" +"kullanmaya hazırsınız demektir. \"TAMAM\" düğmesine tıkladığınızda sisteminiz\n" "yeniden başlatılacaktır. Hem Windows hem de GNU/Linux kullanımını " "seçtiyseniz\n" "makinanızın her açılışında bu sistemlerden biri için tercihinizi\n" @@ -809,16 +841,14 @@ msgstr "" "\"Gelişmiş\" düğmesine (Uzman kipinde görünür) tıkladığınızda size iki\n" "seçenek sunulacaktır:\n" "\n" -" * \"Otomatik kurulum disketi oluşturulsun\": yaptığınız kuruluma benzer " -"bir\n" +" * \"Otomatik kurulum disketi oluşturulsun\": yaptığınız kuruluma benzer bir\n" " kurulumu herhangi bir yardım gerekmeksizin otomatik olarak " "yapılabilmesini\n" " sağlayacak bir kurulum disketi oluşturabilirsiniz.\n" "\n" " Bu seçeneği kullanmaya karar verdiğinizde size iki seçenek sunulacaktır:\n" "\n" -" * \"Etkileşimli\": bu sadece disk bölümlemesinin etkileşimli olduğu " -"yarı\n" +" * \"Etkileşimli\": bu sadece disk bölümlemesinin etkileşimli olduğu yarı\n" " otomatik kurulumdur.\n" "\n" " * \"Otomatik\": sabit diskin tamamen silinip yeniden yazılması\n" @@ -831,8 +861,7 @@ msgstr "" " * \"Paket seçim listesini kaydet\"(*): kurulum sırasında seçtiğiniz\n" " paketlerin listesi kaydedilir. Bir başka kurulum sırasında disketi\n" " sürücüye yerleştirdikten sonra [F1] tuşuna bastıktan sonra\n" -" »linux defcfg=\"floppy\"« yazarak kurulumu yardım ekranına kadar " -"ilerletin\n" +" »linux defcfg=\"floppy\"« yazarak kurulumu yardım ekranına kadar ilerletin\n" "\n" " (*) Bu seçenek için FAT biçemli bir diskete ihtiyacınız olacak. Bu " "disketi\n" @@ -983,7 +1012,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1033,12 +1062,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Bu noktada, Mageia işletim sisteminizi sabit diskinizde nereye\n" "kuracağınızı seçmeniz gerekiyor. Bölümler önceki bir kurulumda ya da bir\n" @@ -1111,14 +1134,6 @@ msgstr "" "Başka dosya sistemleri hakkında bilgi edinmek için \"Başvuru Kılavuzu" "\"ndaki\n" "ext2fs bölümünü okuyunuz.\n" -"\n" -"Bir PPC makina üzerine kurulum yapıyorsanız, yaboot önyükleyicisi " -"tarafından\n" -"kullanılmak üzere en az 1MB lık küçük bir HFS \"önyükleme\" bölümü " -"oluşturmak\n" -"isteyeceksiniz. Bu disk bölümünü biraz daha büyük, örneğin 50MB yaparsanız\n" -"bir yedek çekirdeğin ve kurtarma açılışı gereksinimleri için ramdisk\n" -"görüntüsünün saklanacağı kullanışlı bir alan elde edebilirsiniz." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1661,9 +1676,9 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:809 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "TV card" -msgstr "ISDN kartı" +msgstr "TV kartı" #: ../help.pm:809 #, c-format @@ -1676,7 +1691,7 @@ msgid "Graphical Interface" msgstr "Grafiksel Arabirim" #: ../help.pm:861 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Choose the hard disk drive you want to erase in order to install your new\n" "Mageia partition. Be careful, all data on this drive will be lost\n" @@ -1687,7 +1702,7 @@ msgstr "" "mümkün olmayacağını unutmayın!" #: ../help.pm:866 -#, fuzzy, c-format +#, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" "this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/uk.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/uk.po index 11553e3a4..548f3b3be 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/uk.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/uk.po @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ # translation of DrakX-uk.po to ukrainian # translation of DrakX.po to ukrainian -# $Id: uk.po 26602 2006-04-22 07:43:48Z fwang $ # Copyright (C) 2000,2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # Dmytro Kovalov <kov@tokyo.email.ne.jp>, 2000. @@ -13,16 +12,16 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: DrakX-uk\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2008-09-12 12:22+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2012-03-01 21:42+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2012-06-29 16:20+0300\n" "Last-Translator: Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>\n" "Language-Team: Ukrainian <kde-i18n-uk@kde.org>\n" +"Language: uk\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" -"X-Generator: Lokalize 1.2\n" -"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n%" -"10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" -"Language: uk\n" +"X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n%10>=2 && n" +"%10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2);\n" #: ../help.pm:14 #, c-format @@ -146,8 +145,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " -"number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" "\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " @@ -166,7 +165,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Тут перелічені вже існуючі розділи, знайдені на Вашому твердому\n" @@ -701,8 +701,8 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or " -"if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" @@ -752,7 +752,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1002,7 +1003,7 @@ msgid "" "the selected package(s), or \"%s\" to abort." msgstr "" "Коли ви встановлюєте Mageia, деякі пакунки можуть\n" -"бути поновлені з часу виходу дистрибутиву. Можуть бути виправлені\n" +"бути поновлені з часу виходу дистрибутива. Можуть бути виправлені\n" "помилки, вирішені проблеми безпеки. Щоб мати користь від цих поновлень,\n" "зараз ви можете звантажити їх з інтернету. Перевірте «%s», якщо маєте\n" "зв'язок з інтернетом, або «%s», якщо бажаєте встановити поновлені пакунки\n" @@ -1068,7 +1069,7 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " "drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1120,12 +1121,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Зараз вам потрібно вибрати, які розділи використовувати для встановлення\n" "Вашої нової системи Mageia. Якщо ці розділи вже були створені\n" @@ -1142,7 +1137,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * «%s»: вилучає всі розділи на вибраному твердому диску\n" "\n" -" * «%s»: ця команда автоматично створить розділи типу ext3 та swap\n" +" * «%s»: ця команда автоматично створить розділи типу ext4 та swap\n" "на вільному місці диску\n" "\n" "«%s»: дає доступ до додаткових параметрів:\n" @@ -1194,13 +1189,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Щоб отримати інформацію про різні типи файлових систем, які ви можете\n" "створити, прочитайте розділ ext2FS з \"Reference Manual\".\n" -"\n" -"Якщо ви встановлюєте систему на комп'ютер з процесором PPC, можете\n" -"створити маленький розділ типу HFS для завантаження 'bootstrap'\n" -"(розміром не менше 1 МБ) для завантажувача yaboot. Якщо ви вирішите\n" -"створити розділ трохи більшого розміру, скажімо 50 МБ, ви зможете\n" -"також зберігати на ньому резервне ядро системи та віртуальний диск для\n" -"аварійних завантажень системи. " #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1240,7 +1228,8 @@ msgstr "Перемикнути між режимами Експерт/Звича #: ../help.pm:536 #, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" @@ -1267,7 +1256,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" "\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " @@ -1672,11 +1662,11 @@ msgstr "" "Хоч вона і є дуже потужною, загальне встановлення є майже таким\n" "самим простим, як і \"pdq\". Якщо вам потрібно емулювати сервер \"lpd\",\n" "переконайтеся, що увімкнена служба \"cups-lpd \". «%s» має графічну\n" -"оболонку для друку або вибору параметрів друкарки і управління нею.\n" +"оболонку для друку або вибору параметрів принтера і управління ним.\n" " \n" "Якщо ви зараз зробите вибір, а пізніше побачите, що ця система друку\n" "вам не подобається, ви можете її замінити з допомогою PrinterDrake з\n" -"Центру керування Мандріва , натиснувши кнопку «%s»." +"Центру керування Mageia, натиснувши кнопку «%s»." #: ../help.pm:768 #, c-format @@ -1814,7 +1804,7 @@ msgstr "" " * «%s»: перевірити поточну мапу клавіатури і змінити, якщо потрібно.\n" "\n" " * «%s»: перевірити вибір країни. Якщо ви знаходитесь не в цій\n" -"країні, натисніть кнопку «%s» і виберіть іншу. Якщо Вашої країни\n" +"країні, натисніть кнопку «%s» і виберіть іншу. Якщо вашої країни\n" "немає в показаному початковому списку, натисніть кнопку «%s»,\n" "щоб отримати повний список країн.\n" "\n" @@ -1825,12 +1815,6 @@ msgstr "" " * «%s»: перевірте налаштування миші і натисніть на кнопку, щоб\n" "змінити, якщо необхідно.\n" "\n" -" * «%s»: натиснувши на кнопку «%s», ви викличите Помічника\n" -"налаштування друкарки. Зверніться до відповідного розділу \"Starter\n" -"Guide\" для детальнішої інформації про те, як встановити нову\n" -"друкарку. Інтерфейс, представлений там, є подібним до того, що\n" -"використовується при встановленні.\n" -"\n" " * «%s»: якщо у вашій системі знайдено звукову карту, її буде\n" "показано тут. Якщо ви виявите, що показана звукова карта не є\n" "тією, що насправді встановлена у системі, можете натиснути на\n" @@ -1858,17 +1842,21 @@ msgstr "" " * «%s»: цей пункт дасть змогу перевизначити рівень безпеки, який\n" "встановлено попереднім кроком ().\n" "\n" -" * «%s»: якщо ви плануєте під'єднати Вашу машину до інтернету,\n" +" * «%s»: якщо ви плануєте під'єднати ваш комп’ютер до інтернету,\n" "хорошою ідеєю є захистися від вторгнення шляхом встановлення\n" "захисного шлюзу. Зверніться до відповідного розділу \"Starter Guide\"\n" "для детальнішої інформації про встановлення захисного шлюзу.\n" "\n" " * «%s»: якщо ви хочете змінити конфігурацію завантажувача,\n" -"натисніть цю кнопку. Це зарезервовано для досвідчених користувачів.\n" +"натисніть цю кнопку. Ці налаштування призначено для досвідчених\n" +"користувачів. Зверніться до паперової документації або вбудованої\n" +"довідки щодо налаштувань завантажувача у Центрі керування\n" +"Mageia.\n" +"\n" "\n" " * «%s»: тут ви можете підправити, які служби будуть виконуватися\n" -"на вашій машині. Якщо ви плануєте використовувати цю машину в\n" -"якості сервера, хорошою ідеєю є переглянути ці налаштування." +"у вашій системі. Якщо ви плануєте використовувати цю машину як\n" +"сервер, варто є переглянути ці налаштування." #: ../help.pm:809 #, c-format diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/uz.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/uz.po index 8e13a4222..487318fe7 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/uz.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/uz.po @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2006-04-23 12:29+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Mashrab Kuvatov <kmashrab@uni-bremen.de>\n" "Language-Team: Uzbek <kmashrab@uni-bremen.de>\n" +"Language: uz\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -88,7 +89,8 @@ msgstr "Bu qulaylikdan foydalanishni istaysizmi?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -98,13 +100,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -115,7 +120,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" @@ -128,8 +134,7 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"Mageia bir nechta kompakt-disklarda tarqatiladi. Agar tanlangan " -"paket\n" +"Mageia bir nechta kompakt-disklarda tarqatiladi. Agar tanlangan paket\n" "boshqa kompakt-diskda joylashgan bo'lsa, DrakX joriy kompakt-diskni\n" "chiqaradi va tegishlisini qo'yishni so'raydi. Agar so'ralgan kompakt-disk " "sizda\n" @@ -428,13 +433,15 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -447,12 +454,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -475,7 +484,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -632,18 +642,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -666,7 +679,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -674,7 +688,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -693,12 +708,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:526 @@ -739,20 +748,24 @@ msgstr "Odiy/ekspert usuliga o'tish" #: ../help.pm:536 #, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -763,10 +776,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" @@ -791,7 +806,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1124,8 +1140,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/uz@cyrillic.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/uz@cyrillic.po index 09fc9402b..c318abb18 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/uz@cyrillic.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/uz@cyrillic.po @@ -642,7 +642,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -692,12 +692,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" #: ../help.pm:526 diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/vi.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/vi.po index 6a934e236..887d001df 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/vi.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/vi.po @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2005-06-02 21:17+0700\n" "Last-Translator: Larry Nguyen <larry@vnlinux.org>\n" "Language-Team: <gnomevi-list@lists.sourceforge.net>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -121,7 +122,8 @@ msgstr "Bạn muốn dùng tính năng này không?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -131,13 +133,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -148,7 +153,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Trên đây là danh sách các phân vùng Linux hiện có trên đĩa cứng của bạn.\n" @@ -259,8 +265,7 @@ msgstr "" "nhóm các ứng dụng giống nhau để dễ dàng quản lý.\n" "\n" "Các gói phần mềm được xếp loại theo các nhóm tương ứng với việc sử dụng\n" -"cụ thể cho máy tính. Mageia có 4 kiểu cài đặt sẵn với nhiều loại gói " -"tin.\n" +"cụ thể cho máy tính. Mageia có 4 kiểu cài đặt sẵn với nhiều loại gói tin.\n" "Bạn có thể chọn dùng các ứng dụng pha trộn của các kiểu cài đặt này, ví dụ\n" "như cài đặt kiểu ``Máy trạm'' cùng với việc cài các ứng dụng của kiểu cài\n" "đặt ``Máy chủ''.\n" @@ -675,13 +680,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -694,12 +701,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -722,7 +731,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1009,18 +1019,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1043,7 +1056,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1051,7 +1065,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1070,12 +1085,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Vào lúc này, bạn cần chọn những phân vùng nào sẽ được dùng để cài đặt\n" "hệ thống Mageia. Nếu các phân vùng đã được xác lập từ lần cài\n" @@ -1092,7 +1101,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\": để xóa mọi phân vùng có trên đĩa cứng được chọn.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": cho phép tự động tạo các phân vùng ext3 và swap\n" +" * \"%s\": cho phép tự động tạo các phân vùng ext4 và swap\n" "tại không gian trống của đĩa cứng.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\" : cho phép thực hiện thêm một số tính năng:\n" @@ -1140,13 +1149,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Để có thêm thông tin về các loại hệ thống tập tin hiện có, hãy đọc chương\n" "ext2FS ở trong ``Tài liệu Tham khảo''.\n" -"\n" -"Nếu đang thực hiện cài đặt trên máy PPC, có thể bạn muốn tạo một phân vùng\n" -"``bootstrap'' HFS có kích thước ít nhất 1MB để cho trình nạp khởi động\n" -"yaboot. Nếu lập kích thước phân vùng này lớn hơn một chút (50MB), bạn sẽ " -"thấy\n" -"đó là nơi hữu ích để lưu trữ kernel dự phòng và các ảnh ramdisk cho các\n" -"trường hợp khởi động khẩn cấp." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1186,20 +1188,24 @@ msgstr "Chuyển đổi giữa chế độ bình thường và chuyên gia" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1210,10 +1216,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Phát hiện ra có hơn một phân vùng Microsoft Windows trên đĩa cứng.\n" @@ -1271,7 +1279,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1813,8 +1822,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/wa.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/wa.po index 383ee138b..5a1ff1248 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/wa.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/wa.po @@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2005-02-24 21:42+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Pablo Saratxaga <pablo@walon.org>\n" "Language-Team: Walloon <linux-wa@walon.org>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -133,7 +134,8 @@ msgstr "Voloz vs eployî cisse fonccionålité chal?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -143,13 +145,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -160,7 +165,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "Chal pa dzeur i gn a ene djivêye des pårticions Linux k' i gn a so vosse\n" @@ -170,7 +176,8 @@ msgstr "" "Ni prindoz nén ene trop ptite grandeu ôtrumint vos n' pôrîz astaler " "åjheymint\n" "des programes, fåte di plaece. Si vos vloz mete vos dnêyes so ene pårticion\n" -"diferinne, vos dvroz ossu fé ene po «/home» (çou ki vos pôroz fé seulmint si\n" +"diferinne, vos dvroz ossu fé ene po «/home» (çou ki vos pôroz fé seulmint " +"si\n" "vos avoz pus d' ene pårticion del sôre Linux).\n" "\n" "Po l' informåcion, tchaeke pårticion est mostrêye come çoula: «no», " @@ -294,8 +301,8 @@ msgstr "" "ostant ki possibe, les specifiaedjes del «Linux Standard Base».\n" "\n" " Tchoezi l' groupe «LSB» astalrè eto les naweas del séreye «2.4»,\n" -"el plaece do prémetou nawea «2.6». Çoula c' est po-z esse 100%% copatibe avou " -"LSB. Mins nerén, si vos n' tchoezixhoz nén li groupe «LSB»\n" +"el plaece do prémetou nawea «2.6». Çoula c' est po-z esse 100%% copatibe " +"avou LSB. Mins nerén, si vos n' tchoezixhoz nén li groupe «LSB»\n" "vos ploz tot l' minme aveur on sistinme k' est copatibe LSB cåzu a 100%%.\n" "\n" " * «%s»: al fén, si l' såme di l' éndjole c' est d' esse on sierveu,\n" @@ -714,13 +721,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -733,12 +742,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -761,7 +772,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -1071,18 +1083,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -1105,7 +1120,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1113,7 +1129,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1132,12 +1149,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "Chal, vos dvoz tchoezi so kéne/kénès pårticion(s) ki vos voloz astaler\n" "vosse sistinme Mageia. Si vos pårticions ont ddja stî fwaites\n" @@ -1157,8 +1168,8 @@ msgstr "" " * «%s»: cisse tchuze va disfacer totes les pårticions k' i gn a sol " "tchoezeye deure plake.\n" "\n" -" * «%s»: cisse tchuze va fé des pårticions ext3 pol sistinme et ene di swap " -"e prindant li plaece di libe k' i gn a sol deure plake et carculant " +" * «%s»: cisse tchuze va fé des pårticions ext4 pol sistinme et ene di " +"swap e prindant li plaece di libe k' i gn a sol deure plake et carculant " "otomaticmint li grandeu li meyeuse.\n" "\n" "«%s» dene des ôtes tchuzes, pus spepieuses:\n" @@ -1212,12 +1223,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Po-z aveur des informåcions so les diferins sistinmes di fitchîs k' i gn a,\n" "lijhoz li tchaptrê so «ext2FS» do «Manuel di Referince».\n" -"\n" -"Si vos alez astaler sor ene éndjole PPC, motoit ki vos vôroz fé ene pitite " -"pårticion HFS «d' enondaedje» di 1 Mo å moens po l' eployî avou l' enondrece " -"«yaboot». Si vos decidez del fé on pô pus grande, par egzimpe 50 Mo, çoula " -"pôreut fé ene clapante plaece po-z î mete on nawea et ene imådje ramdisk po " -"des cas d' urdjince k' i gn åreut." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1257,20 +1262,24 @@ msgstr "Candjî pol môde normå/spepieus" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1281,10 +1290,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "Pus d' ene pårticion Windows a stî detectêye so vosse deure plake.\n" @@ -1295,8 +1306,8 @@ msgstr "" "«no Linux», «no Windows», «grandeu».\n" "\n" "Li «no Linux» est costrût come çouchal:\n" -"«sôre del deure plake» + «limero del deure plake» + «limero del pårticion» (par " -"egzimpe, hd+a+1 --> «hda1»)\n" +"«sôre del deure plake» + «limero del deure plake» + «limero del " +"pårticion» (par egzimpe, hd+a+1 --> «hda1»)\n" "\n" "Li «sôre del deure plake» est «hd» si vosse deure plake est del sôre IDE,\n" "oudonbén «sd» si elle est del sôre SCSI.\n" @@ -1344,7 +1355,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1704,8 +1716,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "Si vos tchoezixhoz asteure, et ki pus tård vos n' inmez nén vosse sistinme\n" "d' imprimaedje, vos l' poloz åjheymint candjî avou l' usteye d' apontiaedje\n" -"des scrireces, a-z enonder a pårti do cinte di contrôle di Mageia, " -"tot\n" +"des scrireces, a-z enonder a pårti do cinte di contrôle di Mageia, tot\n" "clitchant sol boton «%s»." #: ../help.pm:768 @@ -1932,8 +1943,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" @@ -2029,8 +2042,10 @@ msgstr "<- Di dvant" #~ "GNU/Linux: vos dvoz dner li scret po «root». «root» est li manaedjeu\n" #~ "do sistinme eyet l' seu otorijhî a fé des metaedjes a djoû, radjouter\n" #~ "des uzeus, candjî l' apontiaedje djenerå do sistinme, evnd. Po fé court,\n" -#~ "«root» pout fé ttafwait! C' est po çoula k' i vs fåt bén tchoezi li scret\n" -#~ "di «root», onk ki soeye målåjhey a trover - DrakX vos dirè s' il est trop\n" +#~ "«root» pout fé ttafwait! C' est po çoula k' i vs fåt bén tchoezi li " +#~ "scret\n" +#~ "di «root», onk ki soeye målåjhey a trover - DrakX vos dirè s' il est " +#~ "trop\n" #~ "åjhey. Come vos l' poloz vey, vos avoz l' tchuze di n' nén dner di " #~ "scret,\n" #~ "mins nos nel consians nén; «root» pout tot fé, çoula vout dire eto k' i " @@ -2058,7 +2073,8 @@ msgstr "<- Di dvant" #~ "\n" #~ "Si vosse rantoele eploye li protocole LDAP, NIS ou les dominnes Windows " #~ "PDC\n" -#~ "po l' otintifiaedje, tchoezixhoz li moyén d' otintifiaedje corek po «%s».\n" +#~ "po l' otintifiaedje, tchoezixhoz li moyén d' otintifiaedje corek po " +#~ "«%s».\n" #~ "Si vos n' savoz nén, dimandez a l' administreu del rantoele locåle.\n" #~ "\n" #~ "Si vos avoz des rujhes po vs rimimbrer les screts, vos ploz tchoezi di\n" diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/zh_CN.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/zh_CN.po index 558ca9533..fdb983a8b 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/zh_CN.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/zh_CN.po @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2006-04-22 15:41+0800\n" "Last-Translator: Funda Wang <fundawang@linux.net.cn>\n" "Language-Team: Mageia i18n Team <cooker-i18n@mandrivalinux.org>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -25,9 +26,9 @@ msgid "" "terms it contains, check the \"%s\" box. If not, clicking on the \"%s\"\n" "button will reboot your computer." msgstr "" -"在继续之前, 您应该仔细阅读许可协议的条款。该许可适用于整个 Mageia发行" -"版。如果您同意其中的全部条款, 请选中\"%s\"框。如果不同意, 单击\"%s\"按钮将重" -"新启动您的计算机。" +"在继续之前, 您应该仔细阅读许可协议的条款。该许可适用于整个 Mageia发行版。如果" +"您同意其中的全部条款, 请选中\"%s\"框。如果不同意, 单击\"%s\"按钮将重新启动您" +"的计算机。" #: ../help.pm:20 #, c-format @@ -116,7 +117,8 @@ msgstr "您要使用此特性吗?" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -126,13 +128,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -143,7 +148,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "在此列出了您硬盘上已有的 Linux\n" @@ -183,8 +189,8 @@ msgid "" "CD at hand, just click on \"%s\", the corresponding packages will not be\n" "installed." msgstr "" -"Mageia 安装分布于多张 CD-ROM 中。如果选中软件包位于另外的 CD-ROM, " -"DrakX 将弹出当前\n" +"Mageia 安装分布于多张 CD-ROM 中。如果选中软件包位于另外的 CD-ROM, DrakX 将弹" +"出当前\n" "CD, 并要求您插入所需的正确 CD。如果您手中没有所请求的 CD, 只需单击\"%s\", 就" "不会安装相应的软件包了。" @@ -640,13 +646,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -659,12 +667,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -687,7 +697,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -919,8 +930,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "\n" "选择\"%s\"将显示一个清单, 其中列出的地方都提供了更新软件包。您应该选择离您地" -"理位置较近的镜像。之后会出现一个可以下载的软件包选择树：复查选项, 然后单击\"%" -"s\"来获取并安装选中的软件包, 要终止请单击\"%s\"。" +"理位置较近的镜像。之后会出现一个可以下载的软件包选择树：复查选项, 然后单击" +"\"%s\"来获取并安装选中的软件包, 要终止请单击\"%s\"。" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: #: ../help.pm:450 @@ -943,8 +954,8 @@ msgstr "" "包含关键数据, 或者将直接暴露于 Internet\n" "之下, 则应该设置较高的安全级别。较高的安全级别通常以损失易用性作为代价。\n" "\n" -"如果您不知道要选择什么, 请保持默认选项。您可以稍后从 Mageia 控制中心" -"的一部分 draksec\n" +"如果您不知道要选择什么, 请保持默认选项。您可以稍后从 Mageia 控制中心的一部分 " +"draksec\n" "来更改安全级别。\n" "\n" "请在\"%s\"域中填入要负责安全的人的电子邮件地址。安全信息将被发送到该地址。" @@ -961,18 +972,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -995,7 +1009,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -1003,7 +1018,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -1022,15 +1038,9 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" -"在这一步中, 您需要选择要使用哪个或哪些分区来安装您的 Mageia 系统。如" -"果已经定义了分区, 不管是先前安装的 GNU/Linux\n" +"在这一步中, 您需要选择要使用哪个或哪些分区来安装您的 Mageia 系统。如果已经定" +"义了分区, 不管是先前安装的 GNU/Linux\n" "还是由其它分区工具划分的, 您都可以使用已有的分区。否则, 必须对硬盘分区进行定" "义。\n" "\n" @@ -1042,7 +1052,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\": 此选项将删除选中硬盘上的全部分区\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": 此选项可在您硬盘的剩余空间中为您自动创建 ext3 和交换分区\n" +" * \"%s\": 此选项可在您硬盘的剩余空间中为您自动创建 ext4 和交换分区\n" "\n" "\"%s\": 使您可以访问额外特性: \n" "\n" @@ -1082,11 +1092,6 @@ msgstr "" " * Ctrl+M 设定挂载点\n" "\n" "要的关于不同的文件系统类型的更多信息, 请查看“参考手册”中 ext2FS 一章。\n" -"\n" -"如果您在 PPC 计算机上安装, 您可能需要创建至少 1MB 大小的 HFS“bootstrap”分区, " -"该分区将用于 yaboot\n" -"引导程序。如果您创建的分区再稍微大点, 比如说 50MB, 您可能会发现这个分区可用来" -"存储内核或紧急引导时的虚拟磁盘映像。" #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1126,20 +1131,24 @@ msgstr "在正常/专家模式间切换" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1150,10 +1159,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "在硬盘上检测到了多个 Microsoft 分区。请选择一个分区改变大小, 以便安装您新\n" @@ -1207,7 +1218,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1221,8 +1233,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "仅当在您的计算机上发现了已有的 GNU/Linux 分区, 才会激活这一步骤。\n" "\n" -"DrakX 现在需要知道您是想要执行全新安装, 还是升级已有的 Mageia 系" -"统：\n" +"DrakX 现在需要知道您是想要执行全新安装, 还是升级已有的 Mageia 系统：\n" "\n" " *\n" "\"%s\"：总体来说, 这将完全销毁旧系统。但是, 根据您选择的分区方案, 您可以让现" @@ -1233,8 +1244,8 @@ msgstr "" "系统上的软件包。您的分区方案和用户数据都不会被破坏。绝大多数配置步骤仍然可" "用, 与标准安装类似。\n" "\n" -"使用``升级''选项应该在 \"8.1\" 或更新版本的 Mageia 系统上工作正常。不" -"推荐在先于 \"8.1\" 版本的\n" +"使用``升级''选项应该在 \"8.1\" 或更新版本的 Mageia 系统上工作正常。不推荐在先" +"于 \"8.1\" 版本的\n" "Mageia 系统上执行升级。" # DO NOT BOTHER TO MODIFY HERE, SEE: @@ -1328,8 +1339,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "关于 UTF-8 (Unicode) 支持：Unicode 是一种新的字符编码, 该编码可支持所有现存的" "语言。但是, 在 GNU/Linux 下完全支持\n" -"Unicode, 仍然在开发和完善中。由此原因, Mageia 会根据用户的选择是否使" -"用 UTF-8：\n" +"Unicode, 仍然在开发和完善中。由此原因, Mageia 会根据用户的选择是否使用 " +"UTF-8：\n" "\n" " * 如果您所选的语言自身有强制性的编码(latin1 语言、俄语、日语、中文、朝鲜语、" "泰语、希腊语、土耳其语及大多数 iso-8859-2\n" @@ -1344,9 +1355,9 @@ msgstr "" "项\"%s\"。\n" "\n" "\n" -"请注意, 系统没有限制您只能选择一种额外的语言。您可以选择多种语言, 甚至选择\"%" -"s\"框表明您想要安装全部语言。选择支持某种语言, 意味着同时安装该语言的翻译、字" -"体、拼写检查程序等等。\n" +"请注意, 系统没有限制您只能选择一种额外的语言。您可以选择多种语言, 甚至选择" +"\"%s\"框表明您想要安装全部语言。选择支持某种语言, 意味着同时安装该语言的翻" +"译、字体、拼写检查程序等等。\n" "\n" "要在系统中所安装的不同语言之间切换, 请以 \"root\" 身份执行 \"/usr/sbin/" "localedrake\"\n" @@ -1686,8 +1697,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\"：如果您觉得检测的配置有错, 可以点击\"%s\"来更改与该卡关联的参数。\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\"：默认情况下, DrakX 会将您的图形界面配置为 \"800x600\" 或 \"1024x768" -"\"\n" +" * \"%s\"：默认情况下, DrakX 会将您的图形界面配置为 \"800x600\" 或 " +"\"1024x768\"\n" "分辨率。如果这不适合您的话, 请单击\"%s\"重新配置您的图形界面。\n" "\n" " * \"%s\"：如果您想要配置您的 Internet 或局域网访问, 现在就可以进行。请参考印" @@ -1738,8 +1749,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" @@ -1826,8 +1839,8 @@ msgstr "<- 上一步" #~ "trust\n" #~ "everybody who uses your computer, you can choose to have \"%s\"." #~ msgstr "" -#~ "要保卫您的 GNU/Linux 系统, 现在是最关键的一步：您需要输入 \"root\" 密码。" -#~ "\"Root\"\n" +#~ "要保卫您的 GNU/Linux 系统, 现在是最关键的一步：您需要输入 \"root\" 密" +#~ "码。\"Root\"\n" #~ "是系统管理员, 而且是唯一有权进行更新、添加用户、更改泛系统配置等操作的用" #~ "户。简言之, \"root\"\n" #~ "可以做任何事！这就是为什么您必须选择难于猜测的密码：如果您的密码太简单了, " diff --git a/perl-install/install/help/po/zh_TW.po b/perl-install/install/help/po/zh_TW.po index c32dfa74d..f95db7e15 100644 --- a/perl-install/install/help/po/zh_TW.po +++ b/perl-install/install/help/po/zh_TW.po @@ -23,6 +23,7 @@ msgstr "" "PO-Revision-Date: 2006-04-06 20:30+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Shiva Huang <shivahuang@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Traditional Chinese <zh@li.org>\n" +"Language: \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" @@ -129,7 +130,8 @@ msgstr "您想要使用這個功能嗎？" #: ../help.pm:57 #, c-format msgid "" -"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"Listed here are the existing Linux partitions detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "You can keep the choices made by the wizard, since they are good for most\n" "common installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a\n" "root partition (\"/\"). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not\n" @@ -139,13 +141,16 @@ msgid "" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Name\", \"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number" +"\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard disk drive is an IDE hard " +"disk drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". For " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -156,7 +161,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc." msgstr "" "目前所列出來的是硬碟機上偵測到已經存在的 Linux 分割區.\n" @@ -555,13 +561,15 @@ msgstr "" #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" "You now need to decide where you want to install the Mageia\n" -"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty or if an\n" +"operating system on your hard disk drive. If your hard disk drive is empty " +"or if an\n" "existing operating system is using all the available space you will have to\n" "partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard disk drive means to\n" "logically divide it to create the space needed to install your new\n" "Mageia system.\n" "\n" -"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually irreversible\n" +"Because the process of partitioning a hard disk drive is usually " +"irreversible\n" "and can lead to data losses, partitioning can be intimidating and stressful\n" "for the inexperienced user. Fortunately, DrakX includes a wizard which\n" "simplifies this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the\n" @@ -574,12 +582,14 @@ msgid "" "drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further prompts.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". The wizard has detected one or more existing Linux partitions on\n" -"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will then\n" +"your hard disk drive. If you want to use them, choose this option. You will " +"then\n" "be asked to choose the mount points associated with each of the partitions.\n" "The legacy mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's\n" "a good idea to keep them.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and takes\n" +" * \"%s\". If Microsoft Windows is installed on your hard disk drive and " +"takes\n" "all the space available on it, you will have to create free space for\n" "GNU/Linux. To do so, you can delete your Microsoft Windows partition and\n" "data (see ``Erase entire disk'' solution) or resize your Microsoft Windows\n" @@ -602,7 +612,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" " !! If you choose this option, all data on your disk will be deleted. !!\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken by\n" +" * \"%s\". This option appears when the hard disk drive is entirely taken " +"by\n" "Microsoft Windows. Choosing this option will simply erase everything on the\n" "drive and begin fresh, partitioning everything from scratch.\n" "\n" @@ -854,8 +865,8 @@ msgstr "" "安全性等級應該設定較高. 權衡之下, 較高的安全性等級換得不容易使用.\n" "\n" "如果您不知道選什麼, 保留預設選項. 您將能在稍後用 draksec 工具改變它,\n" -"draksec 是 Mageia 控制中心的一部分.用負責安全性的人的 e-mail 地址填" -"入 \"%s\" 欄位. 安全性訊息將被寄到\n" +"draksec 是 Mageia 控制中心的一部分.用負責安全性的人的 e-mail 地址填入 \"%s\" " +"欄位. 安全性訊息將被寄到\n" "那個位址." #: ../help.pm:461 @@ -869,18 +880,21 @@ msgid "" "At this point, you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the\n" "installation of your Mageia system. If partitions have already been\n" "defined, either from a previous installation of GNU/Linux or by another\n" -"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk drive\n" +"partitioning tool, you can use existing partitions. Otherwise, hard disk " +"drive\n" "partitions must be defined.\n" "\n" -"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can select\n" +"To create partitions, you must first select a hard disk drive. You can " +"select\n" "the disk for partitioning by clicking on ``hda'' for the first IDE drive,\n" "``hdb'' for the second, ``sda'' for the first SCSI drive and so on.\n" "\n" "To partition the selected hard disk drive, you can use these options:\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk drive\n" +" * \"%s\": this option deletes all partitions on the selected hard disk " +"drive\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext3 and swap\n" +" * \"%s\": this option enables you to automatically create ext4 and swap\n" "partitions in the free space of your hard disk drive\n" "\n" "\"%s\": gives access to additional features:\n" @@ -903,7 +917,8 @@ msgid "" "unmount removable media such as floppies and CD-ROMs.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": use this option to cancel your changes.\n" @@ -911,7 +926,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\": allows additional actions on partitions (type, options, format)\n" "and gives more information about the hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this will\n" +" * \"%s\": when you are finished partitioning your hard disk drive, this " +"will\n" "save your changes back to disk.\n" "\n" "When defining the size of a partition, you can finely set the partition\n" @@ -930,12 +946,6 @@ msgid "" "\n" "To get information about the different filesystem types available, please\n" "read the ext2FS chapter from the ``Reference Manual''.\n" -"\n" -"If you are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' partition of at least 1MB which will be used by the yaboot\n" -"bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say 50MB, you\n" -"may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel and ramdisk images for\n" -"emergency boot situations." msgstr "" "在這個階段, 您需要選擇要用來安裝 Mageia 系統的分割區.\n" "如果分割區已經被定義了, 不管是從舊有的 GNU/Linux 安裝或是\n" @@ -949,7 +959,7 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\": 這個選項刪除在所選的影碟上的全部分割區\n" "\n" -" * \"%s\": 這個選項使您自動建立 ext3 與 swap 分割區於您的硬碟上的空白空間\n" +" * \"%s\": 這個選項使您自動建立 ext4 與 swap 分割區於您的硬碟上的空白空間\n" "\n" "\"%s\": 給多加的功能的使用:\n" "\n" @@ -967,7 +977,8 @@ msgstr "" "\n" " * \"%s\": 如果您想用精靈來分割您的硬碟, 使用這個選項. 如果您沒有對於\n" "操作分割的好的了解, 這是被建議的.\n" -"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding of\n" +"hard disk drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding " +"of\n" "partitioning.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\": 用這個選項來取消您的變更.\n" @@ -990,12 +1001,6 @@ msgstr "" "\n" "要得到關於不同可用的檔案系統的資訊, 請從 ``Reference Manual (參考手冊)''\n" "閱讀 ext2FS 章節.\n" -"\n" -"如果您正在安裝於一個 PPC 機器, 您將想要建立一個小的 HFS\n" -"``bootstrap'' 分割至少 1MB 以用於 yaboot 開機載入器. 如果您選擇使分割大一" -"些,\n" -"像 50MB, 您或許發現它是一個好用的貯存一個備用核心與 ramdisk\n" -"影像給緊急使用開機的好地方." #: ../help.pm:526 #, c-format @@ -1035,20 +1040,24 @@ msgstr "切換一般/專家模式" #: ../help.pm:536 #, fuzzy, c-format msgid "" -"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk drive.\n" +"More than one Microsoft partition has been detected on your hard disk " +"drive.\n" "Please choose the one which you want to resize in order to install your new\n" "Mageia operating system.\n" "\n" "Each partition is listed as follows: \"Linux name\", \"Windows name\"\n" "\"Capacity\".\n" "\n" -"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive number\",\n" +"\"Linux name\" is structured: \"hard disk drive type\", \"hard disk drive " +"number\",\n" "\"partition number\" (for example, \"hda1\").\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk drive and\n" +"\"Hard disk drive type\" is \"hd\" if your hard dive is an IDE hard disk " +"drive and\n" "\"sd\" if it is a SCSI hard disk drive.\n" "\n" -"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With IDE\n" +"\"Hard disk drive number\" is always a letter after \"hd\" or \"sd\". With " +"IDE\n" "hard disk drives:\n" "\n" " * \"a\" means \"master hard disk drive on the primary IDE controller\";\n" @@ -1059,10 +1068,12 @@ msgid "" "\n" " * \"d\" means \"slave hard disk drive on the secondary IDE controller\".\n" "\n" -"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" means\n" +"With SCSI hard disk drives, an \"a\" means \"lowest SCSI ID\", a \"b\" " +"means\n" "\"second lowest SCSI ID\", etc.\n" "\n" -"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the first\n" +"\"Windows name\" is the letter of your hard disk drive under Windows (the " +"first\n" "disk or partition is called \"C:\")." msgstr "" "多於一個 Microsoft 分割區已經在您的硬碟上被偵測到. 請選擇您希望要重新調整 大" @@ -1116,7 +1127,8 @@ msgid "" " * \"%s\". For the most part, this completely wipes out the old system.\n" "However, depending on your partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of\n" "your existing data (notably \"home\" directories) from being over-written.\n" -"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to change\n" +"If you wish to change how your hard disk drives are partitioned, or to " +"change\n" "the filesystem, you should use this option.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\". This installation class allows you to update the packages\n" @@ -1231,8 +1243,7 @@ msgstr "" "選擇英文當預設語言且在進階部份選擇 \"%s\".\n" "\n" "關於 UTF-8 (unicode) 支援：Unicode 是一個新的字元編碼以涵蓋所有存在的語言。\n" -"然而, 在 GNU/Linux 下完全的支援仍然在開發中. 因為那個原因, Mageia " -"的\n" +"然而, 在 GNU/Linux 下完全的支援仍然在開發中. 因為那個原因, Mageia 的\n" " UTF-8 使用將根據使用者的選擇而定：\n" "\n" " * 如果您選擇一個有偏重傳統編碼的語言 (latin1 語言、俄羅斯文、日文、中文、\n" @@ -1404,8 +1415,7 @@ msgid "" "Control Center and clicking on the \"%s\" button." msgstr "" "現在要選擇您的電腦要使用的列印系統. 其他作業系統或許只有提供您一種選擇,\n" -"但是 Mageia 這邊提供了兩種選擇. 每一種列印系統是最適合於特別設定型" -"態.\n" +"但是 Mageia 這邊提供了兩種選擇. 每一種列印系統是最適合於特別設定型態.\n" "\n" " * \"%s\" - 是 ``print, do not queue (列印, 不排隊)'' 之縮寫字, 是當您有一" "個\n" @@ -1576,8 +1586,10 @@ msgstr "" #, c-format msgid "" "Click on \"%s\" if you want to delete all data and partitions present on\n" -"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be able\n" -"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, including\n" +"this hard disk drive. Be careful, after clicking on \"%s\", you will not be " +"able\n" +"to recover any data and partitions present on this hard disk drive, " +"including\n" "any Windows data.\n" "\n" "Click on \"%s\" to quit this operation without losing data and partitions\n" |